Machine Control System: Sub Supplier Instruction

.
Machine Control System

Sub Supplier Instruction
PO: 2870004109, 2870004115, 2870004085, 2870004141, 2870004138,
2870004083,2870004146,2870004084,2870004147
Plant Name: XUAN THANH - VIETNAM
Contract Number: 1445344_900
Created by: ASHPI-IN

Approved by: PRP-IN
Approved date: 15-Jul-16
Doc. No.: 60152277 - 1.0

FLS Nr. 1577286-1626-2870004115 + 2870004085 + 2870004138 + 2870004141 +
2870004083 + 2870004146 + 2870004084 + 2870004147 Løgstrup Nr. 3-82164 3-82165 3-82014 3-82176 3-82177 3-82015 3-82178 3-82016 3-82179
CBS- CBS- STK- PS- PS- STK- PS- STK- PS-
STACKER RECLAIMER STACKER RECLAIMER RECLAIMER STACKER RECLAIMER STACKER RECLAIMER
Sub-supplier's instruction, List of contens REV: 131.ST200 131.RE300 132.ST200 132.RE300 132.RE350 231.ST200 231.RE300 232.ST200 232.RE300
Description Supplier
1. PROXIMITY SWITCHES
1.2 Proximity Sensor XSAV11801 (Speed Monitor) Telemecanique X X X X X X X X
1.4 Proximity Sensor XSAV11373EX (Speed Monitor) Telemecanique X
1.8 Inductive Proximity Sensor IQ40 Sick X X X X X X X X X
2. SWITCHES
2.1 Limit Switches TD 250 Schmersal X X X X X X X X X
2.3 Reed Proximity Switches BN20 Schmersal X X X X X X X X
2.5 Wire Emergency Stop Telemecanique / Kiepe X X X X X
2.17 Limit Switch i110 Sick X X X X X X X
2.18 Ultimate bypass switch Schneider Electric X X X X X X X
3. EMERGENCY STOP RELAY

3.1 Emergency stop relay Pilz X X X X X X X X X
3.4 Emergency stop pushbuttons Schneider X X X X X X X X X
3.6 Safety-related digital input module Phoenix X X X X X X X
3.9 Emergancy stop pushbuttons Sick X X X X X X X X X
3.10 Safety-related digital output module, controller, SD card and other I/O Phoenix X X X X X X X
4. POWER SUPPLY
4.4 Powersupply 24 VDC Phoenix X X X X X X X X X
4.5 Powersupply PS307 Siemens X X X X X X X X
4.9 Transformer Noratel Noratel X X X X X X X X X
5. MOTOR STARTERS
5.10 ACS 800 Frequency Converter - Hardware Manual ABB X X X X X X
5.11 ACS 800 Frequency Converter - Firmware Manual ABB X X X X X X X X X
5.12 ACS 800 Frequency Converter - Encoder module RTAC-01 ABB X X X X X
5.13 ACS 800-11 Frequency Converter - Hardware Manual ABB X X X
5.14 ACS 800 Frequency Converter - Profibus module RPBA-01 ABB X X X X X X X X X
5.21 Soft Starter PST30 - PSTB1050 ABB X X X X X
6. TRANSMITTERS
6.3 Level probe, Capacitiv, FTC53 + FTC325 Endress and Hauser X
6.9 Ethernet Equipment Hirschmann/phoenix/Weidmuller X X X X X X X X
6.27 Crane overload protection OL3000A Nord Tech/Vetec X X X X
6.31 Warning equipment Banner X X X X X X X X X
6.33 Transmitter 4-20 mA Gemac X X X
6.49 Level sensors Sick X X X X
6.50 FO Converters Phoenix X X X X X X X X
6.51 Fiber Patchbox EFB Nordic X X X X X X X
6.53 Level switch, FTI55 + FTI56 (Solicap M) Endress and Hauser X
7. Lamp
7.3 LED Lighting LED-TEK X X X X X X X X X
8. ENCODER
8.5 Encoder POSITAL POSITAL X X X X X X X
9 SPARE
10. CIRCUIT BREAKER AND RELAY

10.3 Circuit Breaker ABB ABB X X X X X X X X X
10.4 Circuit breaker, Auxiliary & alarm switch ABB ABB X X X X X X X X X
10.6 Contactors ABB ABB X X X X X X X X X
10.9 Aux.Relay Phoenix Phoenix X X X X X X X X X
10.23 Fuse Siemens Siemens X X X X
10.24 Fuse ABB ABB X X X X
11. Spare
12. Spare
13. Spare
14. TOUCHVEIW SCREEN

15. PLC Only if specified in ordre
15.1 CPU Hardware and Installation Siemens Siemens X X X X X X X X X
15.2 I/O Hardware and Installation Siemens Siemens X X X X X X X X X
16. PARAMETER LIST FOR CONVERTERS
17. CABIN
17.4 El-cabinet partlist Rittal Rittal X X X X
17.5 Cabinet Seals, Twinseal Power Flex X X X X X X X X X
17.9 Maintenance and Torques Lögstrup Lögstrup X X X X X X X X X
18. MOTOR
18.1 Data sheet for three-phase Motors
18.2 Data sheet for three-phase Motors with brake
18.3 Data sheet for three-phase Motors for variable speed
19. CABLE DRUMS / SLIPRING SYSTEM

19.1 Dimension drawing Delachaux
19.2 Installation, Operation and Maintenance Delachaux
19.3 Cable Trolley systems Wampfler
20. UL-LISTED / IEC, Data sheet on cabinets

20.1 Data sheet Lögstrup X X X X X X X X X
1.
PROXIMITY SWITCHES
Product data sheet XSAV11801
Characteristics inductive sensor XSAV - M30 - Sn10mm -
6..150c/mn - 24..240VAC/DC - cable 2m
Main
Range of product OsiSense XS
Series name Application
Sensor type Inductive proximity sensor
Device application Rotation monitoring
Sensor name XSA
Sensor design Cylindrical M30
Size 81 mm
Body type Fixed
Detector flush mounting Flush mountable
It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof.
acceptance
Material Metal
Enclosure material Nickel plated brass
Type of output signal Discrete
Wiring technique 2-wire
[Sn] nominal sensing 10 mm
distance
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein.
This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications.
Discrete output function 1 NC
Neither Schneider Electric Industries SAS nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein.
Output circuit type AC/DC
Electrical connection Cable
Cable length 2m
[Us] rated supply volt- 24...240 V AC 50/60 Hz
age 24...210 V DC
Switching capacity in 5...350 mA AC
mA 5...200 mA DC
IP degree of protection IP67 conforming to IEC 60529
Complementary
Thread type M30 x 1.5
Detection face Frontal
Front material PPS
Adjustable frequency range 6...150 cyc/mn
Operating zone 0...8 mm
Differential travel 3...15% of Fr
Repeat accuracy 3% of Sr
Cable composition 2 x 0.34 mm²
Wire insulation material PvR
Status LED 1 LED red for output state
Supply voltage limits 20...264 V AC/DC
Residual current <= 1.5 mA for open state
Switching frequency <= 100 Hz
Voltage drop <= 5.7 V at closed state
Run up delay at power up 9 s standard
Marking CE
Threaded length 57 mm
Height 30 mm
May 19, 2016

1
Length 81 mm
Product weight 0.3 kg
Environment
Product certifications CCC
CSA
UL
Ambient air temperature for operation -25...70 °C
Offer Sustainability
Sustainable offer status Green Premium product
RoHS (date code: YYWW)
Compliant - since 0825 - Schneider Electric declaration of conformity
REACh Reference not containing SVHC above the threshold
Product environmental profile Available Download Product Environmental
Product end of life instructions Available Download End Of Life Manual
2
Product data sheet XSAV11373EX
Characteristics inductive sensor XSAV - M30 - Sn10mm -
6..150c/mn - 12..48VDC - cable 2m
Main
Range of product OsiSense XS ATEX D
Series name Application
Sensor type Inductive proximity sensor
Device application Rotation monitoring ATEX dust
Sensor name XSA
Sensor design Cylindrical M30
Size 81 mm
Body type Fixed
Detector flush mounting Flush mountable
acceptance
Material Metal
Enclosure material Nickel plated brass
[Sn] nominal sensing 10 mm
distance
Type of output signal Discrete
Wiring technique 3-wire
Discrete output function 1 NC
Output circuit type DC
Discrete output type PNP
Electrical connection Cable
Cable length 2m
[Us] rated supply volt- 12...48 V DC with reverse polarity protection
age
Switching capacity in <= 200 mA with overload and short-circuit protection
mA
Complementary
Thread type M30 x 1.5
Detection face Frontal
Front material PPS
Adjustable frequency range 6...150 cyc/mn
Operating zone 0...8 mm
Differential travel 3...15% of Fr
Repeat accuracy 3% of Sr
Cable composition 3 x 0.34 mm²
Wire insulation material PvR
Status LED 1 LED red (output state)
Supply voltage limits 10...58 V DC
Switching frequency <= 100 Hz
Voltage drop <= 1.8 V, closed state contact(s)
Current consumption 0...15 mA, no-load
Run up delay at power up 9 s standard
Marking II2 D-Ex tb IIIC T90°C Db IP67
Threaded length 57 mm
Jun 23, 2016

1
Height 30 mm
Length 81 mm
Environment
Standards Directive ATEX 94/9/EC
EN/IEC 60079-0
EN/IEC 60079-31
Product certifications CCC
INERIS 04ATEX0022X
Dust zone Zone 21 - 22
Product end of life instructions Available Download End Of Life Manual
2
2.
SWITCHES
Datasheet - BN 20-10Z - 101172882 - eclass 27270104 27-27-01-04 Side 1 af 8
08.07.2013 - 11:39:55h
Datasheet - BN 20-10Z
Magnetic reed switch / BN 20
Preferred typ
• Non-contact principle
• With pre-wired cable
• 1 Reed contakts
• Long life
• 104 mm x 52 mm x 47 mm
• Aluminium enlosure
• Actuating distance up to 50 mm depending on
actuating magnet and version
• Screw connection
• Highly resistant to vibration
• Available for actuation from front or side
(Minor differences between the printed image and the original

product may exist!)
Ordering details
Product type description BN 20-10Z

Article number 101172882
EAN code 4030661301761
Approval
Approval -
Global Properties
Product name BN 20
Standards -
Compliance with the Directives (Y/N) Yes
suitable for elevators (Y/N) No
Active principle Magnetic drive
Materials
- Material of the housings Aluminium
- Material of the active surface Metal film
Housing construction form rectangular
Weight 285 g
Recommended actuator 2 x BP 10, 2 x BP 15/2, BP 20, BP 31, BP 11, BP 12,
BP 21 N, BE 20
http://www.schmersal.net/datenblatt?lang=en&produkt=4co734745nkmzt8ekjj42004... 08-07-2013
Mechanical data
Design of electrical connection Screw connection

Mechanical life 1.000.000.e+9 operations
Electrical lifetime 1.000.000 operations … 1.000.000.e+9 operations
operations
Switching frequency max. 300/s
Actuating planes Actuation from side
Active area lateral
Switch distance Sn 12 mm … 45 mm
2 x BP 10 = 12 mm
2 x BP 15/2 = 12 mm
BP 20 = 15 mm
BP 31 = 15 mm
BP 11 = 15 mm
BP 12 = 25 mm
BP 21N = 20 ... 45 mm
BE 20 = 15 mm
- notice Actuating distance up to 45 mm depending on
actuating magnet and version
Type of actuation Magnet
restistance to shock -
resistant to vibration 50 g, on sine wave oscillation
Bounce duration 0,3 ms … 0,6 ms
Latching (Y/N) No
bias magnet (Y/N) Yes
Actuating speed max. 18 m/s
Switching point accuracy ± 0,25 mm
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
- Min. environmental temperature −25 °C
- Max. environmental temperature +90 °C
Protection class IP67
Electrical data
Design of control element Normally open contact (NO)

Number of shutters 1 piece
Number of openers 0 piece
Switching time - Close 0,3 ms … 1.5 ms
Switching time - Open -
Voltage type VAC
Dielectric strength > 600 VAC (50 Hz)
Switching voltage max. 250 VAC
Switching current max. 3 A
Switching capacity max. 120 VA / W
Outputs
Design of control output Reed contakts
LED switching conditions display
LED switching conditions display (Y/N) No
ATEX
Explosion protection categories for gases None

Explosion protected category for dusts None
Dimensions
Dimensions of the sensor

- Width of sensor 104 mm
- Height of sensor 52 mm
- Length of sensor 47 mm
notice
The opening and closing functions depend on the direction of actuation, the actuating magnets and the polarity of the
actuating magnets.
When the switches and actuators come together, the colours must coincide: Red (S) to red (S) and green (N) to green
(N).
Included in delivery
Actuators must be ordered separately.
Diagram
Note Diagram
positive break NC contact
active
no active
Normally-open contact
Normally-closed contact
Documents
Declaration of conformity (de) 188 kB, 10.07.2012

Code: __bn_p01
notice - Switch distance (de) 36 kB, 07.08.2009

Code: s_bnsp01
notice - Switch distance (nl) 39 kB, 07.08.2009

Code: s_bnsp04
notice - Switch distance (fr) 41 kB, 07.08.2009

Code: s_bnsp03
notice - Switch distance (pt) 39 kB, 07.08.2009

Code: s_bnsp10
notice - Switch distance (it) 40 kB, 07.08.2009

Code: s_bnsp05
notice - Switch distance (es) 38 kB, 07.08.2009

Code: s_bnsp09
Images
Dimensional drawing (basic component)
Characteristic curve
System components
Actuator
101059927 - BP 2x21 S
• Al-metal housing
• S-pole marked red
• Suitable for mounting on ferrous material
101059928 - BP 2x21 N
• N-pole marked green
101057534 - BP 21 S
101057536 - BP 21 N
101059921 - BP 21
101059926 - BP 2x12 S
101059925 - BP 2x12 N
101059917 - BP 12 N
101059916 - BP 12
101059930 - BP 2x11 S
101059929 - BP 2x11 N
101057533 - BP 11 S
101059923 - BP 11 N
101059922 - BP 11
101057521 - BP 31 S
• thermoplastic enclosure
• Suitable for mounting on ferrous material with a
distance of 20 mm
101057520 - BP 31 N
distance of 20 mm
101057530 - BP 31

distance of 20 mm
101057541 - BP 20 S
distance of 20 mm
101057538 - BP 20 N
distance of 20 mm
101057549 - BP 20
distance of 20 mm
101057553 - BP 34
distance of 25 mm
101060165 - BP 15/2
• Unenclosed
• Polarity stamped in
distance of 18 mm
101060163 - BP 15
distance of 18 mm
101057531 - BP 10
• Unenclosed
• Colour coding of poles by lables
K.A. Schmersal GmbH & Co. KG, Möddinghofe 30, D-42279 Wuppertal
The data and values have been checked throroughly. Technical modifications and errors excepted.
Generiert am 08.07.2013 - 11:40:00h Kasbase 2.2.17.F DBI
belt conveyor - pull rope Switch
hEn
leaflet no. Kiepe 358

Application
Kiepe pull-rope emergency stop switches type HEN are used in Kiepe pull-rope emergency stop switch types HEN comply with
accordance with the requirements of EN 620 as well as BGI 710 and Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and meet the requirements in the
in conformity with DIN EN ISO 13850 as emergency stop devices as safety objectives of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
supplementary safety measures on conveyor belt systems. The pull They must only be used in control electrical circuits.
rope is symmetrically tensioned on both sides of the red release
The HEN aluminum housing offers space for up to 3 simultaneously
lever.
switching NO and NC contacts. Taking into consideration the safety
The devices are suitable for outdoor use and applications where data and maintenance recommendations, the pull-rope emergency
the ambient temperature varies considerably. stop switch type NTS can be used in safety circuits in accordance
With the pull-rope system functionally aligned, the emergency with DIN EN ISO 13849 up to Performance Level e (PLe).
stop signal can be triggered over a distance of up to about 100 m
for each switch.
Function
The pull-rope emergency stop switch is actuated by a pull rope 1 The emergency stop signal is performed with positive-making
connected on both sides of the red release lever. The contacts are normally closed (NC) contacts in accordance with the closed circuit
actuated by a spring supported cam disc (snap action function). principle.
At the same time, up to three NC and NO contacts are actuated After the emergency stop function is triggered, the switching
simultaneously and a cross comparison of the contacts can be mechanism is locked in the shut-off position "0". When the blue
performed with an external control unit. reset lever is actuated in switch position "1", the switching con-
tacts are reactivated and the conveyor belt is prepared for being
turned back on again.
Resetting the pull-rope emergency stop switch must not cause the
conveyor system to start up.
Te c h n i c a l da t a
Designation Pull-rope emergency stop switch type HEN – emergency stop device with latching function
Type of actuation Bidirectional; spring-loaded ("snap action")
Complies with DIN EN ISO 13850; DIN EN 60204-1; DIN EN 60947-5-5;
DIN EN 60947-5-1; EN 620; BGI 710
Suited for Control units and systems in accordance with DIN EN 60204
Mechanics
Enclosure Aluminum GK-AISi 12
Finish DD-paint
Enclosure – yellow (RAL 1004), release lever – red (RAL 3000), reset lever – blue (RAL 5010)
Mounting 2 slotted holes for M8 screws
Installation position Horizontal, tilt angle up to about 15°
Pull-rope length Up to approx. 100 m
Actuation force 30 N ± 10 N
Weight 1.7 kg
Electrical system
Switching system Up to 3 NC and NO contacts; cam operated positive-making switches
Cable entry Threaded holes 2x M25 x 1.5 with each
1x screwed cable gland: sealing area Ø 11 mm to Ø 16 mm; 1x dummy screw
Utilization category AC-15: 230 V; 6 A
DC-13: 110 V; 1.1 A
Connection cross section 1 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
Protective conductor connection In the casing; M4
Rated insulation voltage Ui 400 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 2.5 kV, degree of pollution III
Conventional thermal current Ith 16 A
Contact reliability 1 2 million switching operations
Ambient conditions in accordance with DIN EN 60947-5-5
Permissible ambient temperature –25 °C …+70 °C
Extended ambient temperature range –40 °C …+70 °C (type HEN 7xx)
Protection rating IP 67 in accordance with EN 60529
Safety data in accordance with DIN EN ISO 13849 and EN 61062
Safety functions Emergency stop incl. latching
Manual reset
Usable in accordance with Up to PLe (depending on customer application)
DIN EN ISO 13849-1
B10d value 24,000 actuations
S e l e c t i o n ta b l e
Switch type Contact configuration Integrated Temperature range Ventilation Order number
NO NC signal lamp –40 °C …+70 °C membran
HEN 001 1 1 91.043 450.001

HEN 002 2 2 91.043 450.002
HEN 004 1 1 x 91.043 450.004
HEN 005 2 2 x 91.043 450.005
HEN 018 2 2 x 91.043 450.018
HEN 701 1 1 x 91.043 450.701
HEN 702 2 2 x 91.043 450.702
Further models available on request
Equipment options:
Gold-plated contacts
Ventilation membran
Reset with square instead of lever
Signal lamps for 230 V, 110 V, or 24 V
LED signal lamps in AC/DC version for 230 V or 24 V
Devices for two-wire bus line
Spare parts and accessories:

Screwed cable gland M25 x 1.5 (sealing area 11 mm to 16 mm) 113.52.02.20.01
Screw plug M25 x 1.5 113.52.87.20.02
Replacement lamp: light bulb230 V / 5W - E14 330.03.06.15.00
Ventilation membran M12 x 1 580.00.16.01.01
Cover HEN including seal and screws 93.066 839.004
Mounting
Pull-rope emergency stop switches of types HEN are each fas- as well as the protective conductor connection. The pull-rope 1 is
tened to the substructure in installation position with 2 M8 screws, tensioned by tension springs 2 between the anchor hooks 3 and
centered between the anchor hook 3 of the pull-rope system (see fastened at the red release lever.
the mounting diagram).
After the tension springs 2 have been adjusted, the actuation
Electrical connection is performed with the device open using the force and path for triggering the switch must be tested to ensure
screwed cable gland included in the delivery, directly on the screw compliance with specified requirements.
joints of the switching elements and the lamp fitting (option)
M o u n t i n g d i a g r am
3 2 5 8 7 1 6 7 4
1 Pull rope 4 Turnbuckle 7 Clamp

2 Tension spring 5 Quick link 8 Thimble
3 Anchor hook 6 Rope support
Connection drawing
Switching elements in accordance with DIN EN 60617
(the maximum configuration is shown)
D i me n s i o n s
15° 15°
80
119.5
123
X1 X2
43
31
16
7
192
176
162
15
8.5
13.25
80.5
54
22
81
119
Subject to change without notice.
40599 Düsseldorf (Germany) · Kiepe-Platz 1

358/07–07/13
Phone +49 (0) 2 11 74 97-0 · Fax +49 (0) 2 11 74 97-420

Vossloh Kiepe GmbH info@kiepe-elektrik.com · www.kiepe-elektrik.com
Product data sheet ZB4BG2
Characteristics KEY SWITCH
Main
Range of product Harmony XB4
Product or component Head for key selector switch
type
Device short name ZB4
Bezel material Chromium plated metal
Mounting diameter 22 mm
Sale per indivisible 1
quantity
Shape of signaling unit Round
head
Operator profile Black key switch
Operator position infor- 2 positions 90°
mation
Type of keylock Ronis 455
Key withdrawal position Left
Complementary
CAD overall width 29 mm
CAD overall height 29 mm
CAD overall depth 72 mm
Resistance to high pressure washer 7000000 Pa at 55 °C,distance: 0.1 m
Mechanical durability 1000000 cycles
Electrical composition code C15 for 1 contacts using single blocks in front mounting
C11 for <= 3 contacts using single blocks in front mounting
C8 for <= 4 contacts using single and double blocks in front mounting
Environment
Protective treatment TH
Ambient air temperature for storage -40...70 °C
Class of protection against electric shock Class I conforming to IEC 60536
IP degree of protection IP69K conforming to IEC 60529
NEMA degree of protection NEMA 4X
NEMA 13
IK degree of protection IK06 conforming to IEC 50102
Standards EN/IEC 60947-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-4
EN/IEC 60947-5-5
UL 508
GB 14048.5
CSA C22.2 No 14
May 20, 2016

1
Product certifications BV
CSA
DNV
GL
LROS (Lloyds register of shipping)
RINA
UL listed
Vibration resistance 5 gn (f = 2...500 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance 50 gn (duration = 11 ms) for half sine wave acceleration conforming to IEC
60068-2-27
30 gn (duration = 18 ms) for half sine wave acceleration conforming to IEC
60068-2-27
2
Dimensions Drawings
Dimensions
3
Mounting and Clearance
Panel Cut-out for Pushbuttons, Switches and Pilot Lights (Finished Holes, Ready for Installation)
Connection by Screw Clamp Terminals or Plug-in Connectors or on Connection by Faston Connectors

Printed Circuit Board
(1) Diameter on finished panel or support

(2) 40 mm min. / 1.57 in. min.
(3) 30 mm min. / 1.18 in. min.
(4) Ø 22.5 mm / 0.89 in. recommended (Ø 22.3 mm 0
+0.4
/ 0.88 in. 0
+0.016
)
(5) 45 mm min. / 1.78 in. min.
(6) 32 mm min. / 1.26 in. min.
Pushbuttons, Switches and Pilot Lights for Printed Circuit Board Connection
Panel Cut-outs (Viewed from Installer’s Side)
A: 30 mm min. / 1.18 in. min.

B: 40 mm min. / 1.57 in. min.
4
Printed Circuit Board Cut-outs (Viewed from Electrical Block Side)
Dimensions in mm
A: 30 mm min.
B: 40 mm min.
Dimensions in in.
A: 1.18 in. min.
B: 1.57 in. min.
General Tolerances of the Panel and Printed Circuit Board

The cumulative tolerance must not exceed 0.3 mm / 0.012 in: T1 + T2 = 0.3 mm max.
Installation Precautions
● Minimum thickness of circuit board: 1.6 mm / 0.06 in.
● Cut-out diameter: 22.4 mm ± 0.1 / 0.88 in. ± 0.004
● Orientation of body/fixing collar ZB4 BZ009: ± 2°30’ (excluding cut-outs marked a and b).
● Tightening torque of screws ZBZ 006: 0.6 N.m (5.3 lbf.in) max.
● Allow for one ZB4 BZ079 fixing collar/pillar and its fixing screws:
○ every 90 mm / 3.54 in. horizontally (X), and 120 mm / 4.72 in. vertically (Y).
○ with each selector switch head (ZB4 BD•, ZB4 BJ•, ZB4 BG•).
The fixing centers marked a and b are diagonally opposed and must align with those marked 4 and 5.
5
(1) Panel
(2) Printed circuit board
Mounting of Adapter (Socket) ZBZ 01•

● 1 2 elongated holes for ZBZ 006 screw access
● 2 1 hole Ø 2.4 mm ± 0.05 / 0.09 in. ± 0.002 for centring adapter ZBZ 01•
● 3 8 × Ø 1.2 mm / 0.05 in. holes
● 4 1 hole Ø 2.9 mm ± 0.05 / 0.11 in. ± 0.002, for aligning the printed circuit board (with cut-out marked a)
● 5 1 elongated hole for aligning the printed circuit board (with cut-out marked b)
● 6 4 holes Ø 2.4 mm / 0.09 in. for clipping in adapter ZBZ 01•
Dimensions An + 18.1 relate to the Ø 2.4 mm ± 0.05 / 0.09 in. ± 0.002 holes for centring adapter ZBZ 01•.
6
Technical Description
Electrical Composition Corresponding to Code C3
7
Electrical Composition Corresponding to Codes C9, C11, SF1 and SR1
1 N/O
1 N/C
1 N/O + N/C or 1 N/O + N/O or 1 N/C + N/C
Legend
Single contact
Double contact
Light block
Possible location
8
Sequence of Contacts Fitted to 2-position Selector Switch Body
Position 315°
Push Position Top
Bottom
Location Left Centre Right
State 0 0 0
Contacts N/O open open open
N/C closed closed closed
Position 45°
Push Position Top
Bottom
Location Left Centre Right
State 1 1 1
Contacts N/O closed closed closed
N/C open open open
9
3.
EMERGENCY STOP RELAY
PNOZ s2
Safety relays
Operating Manual-21394-EN-08
Preface
This document is a translation of the original document.
All rights to this documentation are reserved by Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. Copies may be made
for internal purposes. Suggestions and comments for improving this documentation will be
gratefully received.
Pilz®, PIT®, PMI®, PNOZ®, Primo®, PSEN®, PSS®, PVIS®, SafetyBUS p®,
SafetyEYE®, SafetyNET p®, the spirit of safety® are registered and protected trademarks
of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries.
SD means Secure Digital

Content
Introduction 5
Validity of documentation 5
Using the documentation 5
Definition of symbols 5
Safety 6
Intended use 6
Safety regulations 6
Safety assessment 6
Use of qualified personnel 6
Warranty and liability 7
Disposal 7
For your safety 7
Unit features 8
Safety features 8
Block diagram/terminal configuration 9
Function description 9
Timing diagram 10
Installation 10
Wiring 11
Preparing for operation 12

Operating modes 12
Set operating modes 12
Connection 12
Operation 13
Status indicators 14
Error indicators 15
Faults - malfunctions 15
Dimensions in mm 16
Technical Details 16
Safety characteristic data 21
Supplementary data 21
Service life graph 22
Remove plug-in terminals 23
Operating Manual PNOZ s2 3

21394-EN-08
Content
Order reference 23
EC declaration of conformity 23

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Introduction
Validity of documentation
This documentation is valid for the product PNOZ s2. It is valid until new documentation is
published.
This operating manual explains the function and operation, describes the installation and
provides guidelines on how to connect the product.
Using the documentation

This document is intended for instruction. Only install and commission the product if you
have read and understood this document. The document should be retained for future ref-
erence.
Definition of symbols
Information that is particularly important is identified as follows:
DANGER!
This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that poses
an immediate threat of serious injury and death and indicates preventive
measures that can be taken.
WARNING!
This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that could
lead to serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can
be taken.
CAUTION!
This refers to a hazard that can lead to a less serious or minor injury plus
material damage, and also provides information on preventive measures
that can be taken.
NOTICE
This describes a situation in which the product or devices could be dam-
aged and also provides information on preventive measures that can be
taken. It also highlights areas within the text that are of particular import-
ance.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
INFORMATION
This gives advice on applications and provides information on special fea-
tures.
Safety
Intended use
The safety relay provides a safety-related interruption of a safety circuit.
The safety relay meets the requirements of EN 60947-5-1, EN 60204-1 and VDE 0113-1
and may be used in applications with
} E-STOP pushbuttons
} Safety gates
The following is deemed improper use in particular:
} Any component, technical or electrical modification to the product
} Use of the product outside the areas described in this manual
} Use of the product outside the technical details (see Technical details [ 16]).
NOTICE
EMC-compliant electrical installation
The product is designed for use in an industrial environment. The product
may cause interference if installed in other environments. If installed in other
environments, measures should be taken to comply with the applicable
standards and directives for the respective installation site with regard to in-
terference.
Safety regulations
Safety assessment
Before using a unit it is necessary to perform a safety assessment in accordance with the
Machinery Directive.
Functional safety is guaranteed for the product as a single component. However, this does
not guarantee the functional safety of the overall plant/machine. In order to achieve the re-
quired safety level for the overall plant/machine, define the safety requirements for the
plant/machine and then define how these must be implemented from a technical and organ-
isational standpoint.
Use of qualified personnel

The products may only be assembled, installed, programmed, commissioned, operated,
maintained and decommissioned by competent persons.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
A competent person is someone who, because of their training, experience and current pro-
fessional activity, has the specialist knowledge required to test, assess and operate the
work equipment, devices, systems, plant and machinery in accordance with the general
standards and guidelines for safety technology.
It is the company’s responsibility only to employ personnel who:
} Are familiar with the basic regulations concerning health and safety / accident preven-
tion
} Have read and understood the information provided in this description under "Safety"
} And have a good knowledge of the generic and specialist standards applicable to the
specific application.
Warranty and liability

All claims to warranty and liability will be rendered invalid if
} The product was used contrary to the purpose for which it is intended
} Damage can be attributed to not having followed the guidelines in the manual
} Operating personnel are not suitably qualified
} Any type of modification has been made (e.g. exchanging components on the PCB
boards, soldering work etc.).
Disposal
} In safety-related applications, please comply with the mission time TM in the safety-re-
lated characteristic data.
} When decommissioning, please comply with local regulations regarding the disposal of
electronic devices (e.g. Electrical and Electronic Equipment Act).
For your safety

The unit meets all the necessary conditions for safe operation. However, please note the
following:
} Note for overvoltage category III: If voltages higher than low voltage (>50 VAC or >120
VDC) are present on the unit, connected control elements and sensors must have a
rated insulation voltage of at least 250 V.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Unit features
} Positive-guided relay outputs:
– 3 safety contacts (N/O), instantaneous
– 1 auxiliary contact (N/C), instantaneous
} Protective separation of safety contacts from all other circuits
} 1 semiconductor output
} Connection options for:
– E-STOP pushbutton
– Safety gate limit switch
– Start button
} A connector can be used to connect 1 PNOZsigma contact expansion module
} Operating modes can be set via rotary switch
} LED indicator for:
– Supply voltage
– Input status, channel 1
– Switch status of the safety contacts
– Start circuit
– Errors
} Plug-in connection terminals (either spring-loaded terminal or screw terminal)
} See order reference for unit types
Safety features
The relay meets the following safety requirements:
} The circuit is internally redundant with built-in self-monitoring.
} The safety function remains effective in the case of a component failure.
} The correct opening and closing of the safety function relays is tested automatically in
each on-off cycle.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Block diagram/terminal configuration
expansion
Interface
module
Fig.: Centre: Front view with cover, right: Front view without cover
*Safe separation from non-marked area in accordance with EN 60947-1, 6 kV, basic insula-
tion between all safety contacts.
Function description
} Single-channel operation: No redundancy in the input circuit, earth faults in the start
and input circuit are detected.
} Automatic start: Unit is active once the input circuit has been closed.
} Manual start Unit is active once the input circuit and the start circuit are closed.
} Monitored start with falling edge: Unit is active once
– the input circuit is closed and then the start circuit is closed and opened again.
– the start circuit is closed and then opened again once the input circuit is closed.
} Monitored start with rising edge: Unit is active once the input circuit is closed and
once the start circuit is closed after the waiting period has elapsed (see technical de-
tails).
} Increase in the number of available instantaneous safety contacts by connecting con-
tact expander modules or external contactors/relays;
A connector can be used to connect 1 PNOZsigma contact expander module.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Timing diagram
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Legend
} Power: Supply voltage
} Start: Start circuit
} Input: Input circuits
} Output safe: Safety contacts
} Output aux: Auxiliary contacts
} Out semi: Semiconductor output
} [1]: Automatic start
} [2]: Manual start
} [3]: Monitored start with rising edge
} [4]: Monitored start with falling edge
} a: Input circuit closes before start circuit
} b: Start circuit closes before input circuit
} t1: Switch-on delay
} t2: Delay-on de-energisation
} t3: Waiting period
} t4: Min. start pulse duration with a monitored start
Installation
Install base unit without contact expansion module:
} Ensure that the plug terminator is inserted at the side of the unit.
Connect base unit and PNOZsigma contact expansion module:
} Remove the plug terminator at the side of the base unit and at the contact expansion
module.
} Connect the base unit and the contact expansion module to the supplied connector be-
fore mounting the units to the DIN rail.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Installation in control cabinet

} The safety relay should be installed in a control cabinet with a protection type of at least
IP54.
} Use the notch on the rear of the unit to attach it to a DIN rail (35 mm).
} When installed vertically: Secure the unit by using a fixing element (e.g. retaining
bracket or end angle).
} Push the device upwards or downwards before lifting it from the DIN rail.
Wiring
Please note:
} Information given in the "Technical details [ 16]" must be followed.
} Outputs 13-14, 23-24, 33-34 are safety contacts; output 41-42 is an auxiliary contact
(e.g. for display).
} Auxiliary contact 41-42 and semiconductor output Y32 should not be used for safety
circuits!
} To prevent contact welding, a fuse should be connected before the output contacts (see
Technical details [ 16]).
} Calculation of the max. cable runs lmax in the input circuit:
Rlmax
Imax =
Rl / km
Rlmax = max. overall cable resistance (see Technical details [ 16])

Rl / km = cable resistance/km
} Use copper wire that can withstand 60/75 °C.
} Sufficient fuse protection must be provided on all output contacts with capacitive and in-
ductive loads.
} Ensure the EMC requirements of IEC 60204-1 are met.
} The power supply must comply with the regulations for extra low voltages with protect-
ive electrical separation (SELV, PELV) in accordance with VDE 0100, Part 410.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Preparing for operation
Operating modes
The operating mode is set via the rotary switch on the unit. You can do this by opening the
cover on the front of the unit.
NOTICE
Do not adjust the rotary switch during operation, otherwise an error mes-
sage will appear, the safety contacts will open and the unit will not be ready
for operation until the supply voltage has been switched off and then on
again.
Set operating modes

} Switch off supply voltage.
} Select operating mode via the operating mode selector switch "mode".
} If the operating mode selector switch "mode" is in its start position (vertical position), an
error message will appear.
Operating mode se- Automatic/manual Monitored start rising Monitored start fall-
lector switch "mode" start edge ing edge
without detection of
shorts across con-
tacts
Connection
Supply voltage AC DC
S1
A1 L+
A2 L-
Input circuit Single-channel Dual-channel

E-STOP S1
without detection of shorts A1 L+
across contacts
Safety gate
without detection of shorts
across contacts S1
A1 L+

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Without feedback loop monit-

Start circuit/feedback loop oring With feedback loop monitoring
Automatic start
A1
K5 K6
S34
13 (23,33) L1
K5 N
14 (24,34)
K6
Monitored, manual start/restart S3 S3

A1 A1
K5 K6
S34
13 (23,33) L1
K5
S34 14 (24,34) N
K6
NOTICE
In the event of an automatic start or manual start with a bridged start con-
tact (fault case)
The unit starts up automatically when the safeguard is reset, e.g. when the
E-STOP pushbutton is released. Use external circuit measures to prevent
an unexpected restart.
Semiconductor output
*Connect together the 0V connections on all the external power supplies
INFORMATION
If a base unit and a contact expansion module from the PNOZsigma range
are connected via the connector, no additional wiring is necessary.
Operation
NOTICE
The safety function should be checked after initial commissioning and each
time the plant/machine is changed. The safety functions may only be
checked by qualified personnel.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
The unit is ready for operation when the Power LED is permanently lit.
LEDs indicate the status and errors during operation:
LED on
LED flashes
INFORMATION
Status indicators and error indicators may occur independently. In the case
of an error display, the "Fault" LED will light or flash (exception: "Supply
voltage too low"). An LED that is also flashing indicates the potential cause
of the error. An LED that is lit and is static indicates a normal operating
status. Several status indicators and error indicators may occur simultan-
eously.
Status indicators
POWER, IN1, IN2
Input circuit is closed.
OUT
Safety contacts are closed and semiconductor output Y32 carries a high signal.
RESET
24 VDC is present at S34.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Error indicators
FAULT
Diagnostics: Plug terminator not connected
} Remedy: Insert plug terminator, switch supply voltage off and then on
again.
FAULT
Diagnostics: Internal error, unit defective
} Remedy: Switch supply voltage off and then on again, change unit if neces-
sary.
POWER
Diagnostics: Supply voltage too low
} Remedy: Check supply voltage and increase if necessary.
RESET FAULT
Diagnostics: Position of rotary switch is not permitted or rotary switch was ad-
justed during operation.
} Remedy: Switch supply voltage off and then on again.
POWER, IN1, IN2, OUT, RESET, FAULT

Diagnostics: The operating mode selector switch "mode" is in its start position
(vertical position)
} Remedy: Switch off the supply voltage and set the required operating mode
on operating mode selector switch "mode".
Faults - malfunctions
} Contact malfunctions: If the contacts have welded, reactivation will not be possible after
the input circuit has opened.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Dimensions in mm
*with spring-loaded terminals
120 (4.72")
98 (3.86")
17,5
* 100 (3,94") (0.69")
Technical Details
General 750102 751102

CCC, CE, EAC (Eurasian), CCC, CE, EAC (Eurasian),
Approvals KOSHA, TÜV, cULus Listed KOSHA, TÜV, cULus Listed
Electrical data 750102 751102
Supply voltage
Voltage 24 V 24 V
Kind DC DC
Voltage tolerance -15 %/+10 % -15 %/+10 %
Output of external power supply
(DC) 2W 2W
Residual ripple DC 20 % 20 %
Continuous duty 100 % 100 %
Inputs 750102 751102
Number 1 1
Voltage at
Input circuit DC 24 V 24 V
Start circuit DC 24 V 24 V
Feedback loop DC 24 V 24 V
Current at
Input circuit DC 75 mA 75 mA
Start circuit DC 7 mA 7 mA
Feedback loop DC 7 mA 7 mA

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Inputs 750102 751102

Max. inrush current impulse
Current pulse, input circuit 0,5 A 0,5 A
Pulse duration, input circuit 7 ms 7 ms
Current pulse, feedback loop 0,5 A 0,5 A
Pulse duration, feedback loop 30 ms 30 ms
Current pulse, start circuit 0,5 A 0,5 A
Pulse duration, start circuit 30 ms 30 ms
Max. overall cable resistance Rl-
max
Single-channel at UB DC 30 Ohm 30 Ohm
Semiconductor outputs 750102 751102
Number 1 1
Voltage 24 V 24 V
Current 20 mA 20 mA
Relay outputs 750102 751102
Number of output contacts
Safety contacts (N/O), instant-
aneous 3 3
Auxiliary contacts (N/C) 1 1
Max. short circuit current IK 1 kA 1 kA
Utilisation category
In accordance with the standard EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-4-1
Utilisation category of safety con-
tacts
AC1 at 240 V 240 V
Min. current 0,01 A 0,01 A
Max. current 6A 6A
Max. power 1500 VA 1500 VA
DC1 at 24 V 24 V
Max. current 6A 6A
Max. power 150 W 150 W
Utilisation category of auxiliary con-
tacts
AC1 at 240 V 240 V
Max. current 6A 6A
DC1 at 24 V 24 V
Max. current 6A 6A

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2

tacts
AC15 at 230 V 230 V
Max. current 5A 5A
DC13 (6 cycles/min) at 24 V 24 V
Max. current 5A 5A
tacts
AC15 at 230 V 230 V
Max. current 5A 5A
Max. current 5A 5A
Utilisation category in accordance
with UL
Voltage 240 V AC G.U. (same polarity) 240 V AC G.U. (same polarity)
With current 6A 6A
Voltage 24 V DC G. U. 24 V DC G. U.
With current 6A 6A
External contact fuse protection,
safety contacts
Max. melting integral 260 A²s 260 A²s
Blow-out fuse, quick 10 A 10 A
Blow-out fuse, slow 6A 6A
Blow-out fuse, gG 10 A 10 A
Circuit breaker 24V AC/DC,
characteristic B/C 6A 6A
auxiliary contacts
Blow-out fuse, quick 10 A 10 A
Blow-out fuse, gG 6A 6A
Circuit breaker 24 V AC/DC,
Contact material AgCuNi + 0,2 µm Au AgCuNi + 0,2 µm Au
Conventional thermal current 750102 751102
while loading several contacts
Ith per contact at UB DC
AC1: 240 V, DC1: 24 V
Conv. therm. current with 1 con-
tact 6A 6A
tacts 6A 6A
tacts 5A 5A

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Times 750102 751102

Switch-on delay
With automatic start typ. 75 ms 75 ms
With automatic start max. 250 ms 250 ms
With automatic start after power
on typ. 75 ms 75 ms
on max. 250 ms 250 ms
With manual start typ. 75 ms 75 ms
With manual start max. 250 ms 250 ms
With monitored start with rising
edge typ. 75 ms 75 ms
edge max. 250 ms 250 ms
With monitored start with falling
Delay-on de-energisation
With E-STOP typ. 50 ms 50 ms
With E-STOP max. 70 ms 70 ms
With power failure typ. 50 ms 50 ms
With power failure max. 70 ms 70 ms
Recovery time at max. switching
frequency 1/s
After E-STOP 100 ms 100 ms
After power failure 100 ms 100 ms
Waiting period with a monitored
start
With rising edge 100 ms 100 ms
With falling edge 110 ms 110 ms
Min. start pulse duration with a
monitored start
Supply interruption before de-ener-
gisation 10 ms 10 ms
Environmental data 750102 751102
Climatic suitability EN 60068-2-78 EN 60068-2-78
Ambient temperature
Temperature range -10 - 55 °C -10 - 55 °C
Storage temperature
Climatic suitability
Humidity 93 % r. h. at 40 °C 93 % r. h. at 40 °C
Condensation during operation Not permitted Not permitted
EMC EN 60947-5-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN EN 60947-5-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN
61000-6-4, EN 61326-3-1 61000-6-4, EN 61326-3-1

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2

Vibration
Frequency 10 - 55 Hz 10 - 55 Hz
Amplitude 0,35 mm 0,35 mm
Airgap creepage
In accordance with the standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-1
Overvoltage category III III
Pollution degree 2 2
Rated insulation voltage 250 V 250 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage 6 kV 6 kV
Protection type
Mounting area (e.g. control cab-
inet) IP54 IP54
Housing IP40 IP40
Terminals IP20 IP20
Mechanical data 750102 751102
Mounting position Any Any
Mechanical life 10,000,000 cycles 10,000,000 cycles
Material
Bottom PC PC
Front PC PC
Top PC PC
Connection type Screw terminal Spring-loaded terminal
Mounting type plug-in plug-in
Conductor cross section with screw
terminals
1 core flexible 0,25 - 2,5 mm², 24 - 12 AWG –
2 core with the same cross sec-
tion, flexible with crimp connect-
ors, no plastic sleeve 0,25 - 1 mm², 24 - 16 AWG –
2 core with the same cross sec-
tion, flexible without crimp con-
nectors or with TWIN crimp con-
nectors 0,2 - 1,5 mm², 24 - 16 AWG –
Torque setting with screw terminals 0,5 Nm –
Conductor cross section with
spring-loaded terminals: Flexible
with/without crimp connector – 0,2 - 2,5 mm², 24 - 12 AWG
Spring-loaded terminals: Terminal
points per connection – 2
Stripping length with spring-loaded
terminals – 9 mm
Dimensions
Height 98 mm 100 mm
Width 17,5 mm 17,5 mm
Depth 120 mm 120 mm
Weight 175 g 175 g

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Where standards are undated, the 2014-07 latest editions shall apply.
Safety characteristic data
NOTICE
You must comply with the safety-related characteristic data in order to
achieve the required safety level for your plant/machine.
Operating EN ISO EN ISO EN 62061 EN 62061 IEC 61511 IEC 61511 EN ISO
mode 13849-1: 13849-1: SIL CL PFHD [1/h] SIL PFD 13849-1:
2008 2008 2008
PL Category TM [year]
Safety con-
tacts, in-
stantaneous PL e Cat. 4 SIL CL 3 2,50E-09 SIL 3 2,13E-05 20
All the units used within a safety function must be considered when calculating the safety
characteristic data.
INFORMATION
A safety function's SIL/PL values are not identical to the SIL/PL values of
the units that are used and may be different. We recommend that you use
the PAScal software tool to calculate the safety function's SIL/PL values.
Supplementary data
CAUTION!
It is essential to consider the relay's service life graphs. The relay outputs'
safety-related characteristic data is only valid if the values in the service life
graphs are met.
The PFH value depends on the switching frequency and the load on the relay output.
If the service life graphs are not accessible, the stated PFH value can be used irrespective
of the switching frequency and the load, as the PFH value already considers the relay's
B10d value as well as the failure rates of the other components.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Service life graph

The service life graphs indicate the number of cycles from which failures due to wear must
be expected. The wear is mainly caused by the electrical load; the mechanical load is negli-
gible.
Cycles x 1000
Switching current (A)
Fig.: Service life graphs at 24 VDC and 230 VAC
Example
} Inductive load: 0.2 A
} Utilisation category: AC15
} Contact service life: 2 000 000 cycles
Provided the application to be implemented requires fewer than 2 000 000 cycles, the PFH
value (see Technical details [ 16]) can be used in the calculation.
To increase the service life, sufficient spark suppression must be provided on all output
contacts. With capacitive loads, any power surges that occur must be noted. With DC con-
tactors, use flywheel diodes for spark suppression.

21394-EN-08
PNOZ s2
Remove plug-in terminals

Procedure: Insert the screwdriver into the housing recess behind the terminal and lever the
terminal out.
Do not remove the terminals by pulling the cables!
Order reference
Product type Features Connection type Order No.
PNOZ s2 24 V DC Screw terminals 750 102
PNOZ s2 C 24 V DC Spring-loaded terminals 751 102
EC declaration of conformity
This product/these products meet the requirements of the directive 2006/42/EC for ma-
chinery of the European Parliament and of the Council. The complete EC Declaration of
Conformity is available on the Internet at www.pilz.com/downloads.
Representative: Norbert Fröhlich, Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, Felix-Wankel-Str. 2, 73760 Ost-
fildern, Germany

21394-EN-08
Back cover
Printed in Germany
Support
21394-EN-08, 2015-09100XXXX-DE-0X
in Germany
© Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, 2015
KG, 2015
& Co.Printed
Technical support is available from Pilz round the clock.
2015-00
Americas Australia Scandinavia
© Pilz GmbH
0-0-1-3-000,
Brazil +61 3 95446300 +45 74436332
+55 11 97569-2804 Spain
Canada Europe +34 938497433
+1 888-315-PILZ (315-7459) Austria Switzerland
SafetyEYE®, SafetyNET p®, the spirit of safety® are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. We would point out that product features may vary
Mexico +43 1 7986263-0 +41 62 88979-30
CMSE®, InduraNET p®, PAS4000®, PAScal®, PASconfig®, Pilz®, PIT®, PLID®, PMCprimo®, PMCprotego®, PMCtendo®, PMD®, PMI®, PNOZ®, Primo®, PSEN®, PSS®, PVIS®, SafetyBUS p®,
+52 55 5572 1300 Belgium, Luxembourg The Netherlands
USA (toll-free) +32 9 3217575 +31 347 320477
from the details stated in this document, depending on the status at the time of publication and the scope of the equipment. We accept no responsibility for the validity, accuracy
+1 877-PILZUSA (745-9872) France Turkey
+33 3 88104000 +90 216 5775552
Asia Germany United Kingdom
China +49 711 3409-444 +44 1536 462203
+86 21 60880878-216 Ireland
Japan +353 21 4804983 You can reach our
+81 45 471-2281 Italy international hotline on:
South Korea +39 0362 1826711 +49 711 3409-444
+82 31 450 0680 support@pilz.com
and entirety of the text and graphics presented in this information. Please contact our Technical Support if you have any questions.
Pilz develops environmentally-friendly products using
ecological materials and energy-saving technologies.
Offices and production facilities are ecologically designed,
environmentally-aware and energy-saving. So Pilz offers
sustainability, plus the security of using energy-efficient
products and environmentally-friendly solutions.
Partner of:
The Best of
German
Engineering
Pilz GmbH & Co. KG

Felix-Wankel-Straße 2
73760 Ostfildern, Germany
Tel.: +49 711 3409-0
Fax: +49 711 3409-133
info@pilz.com
www.pilz.com
PNOZ s4
} Safety relays
Operating Manual 21396-EN-14

Preface

Contents
Introduction 5
Safety 6
Intended use 6
Safety assessment 7
Disposal 7
For your safety 8
Unit features 8
Safety features 8

Unit types with UB 24 VDC 9
Unit types with UB 48 - 240 VAC/DC 9
Timing diagram 11
Installation 11
Wiring 12

Operating modes 13
Connection 13
Operation 16
Error indicators 17
Dimensions in mm 18
Technical details 19

21396-EN-14
Contents
Order reference 34

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Introduction
published.

erence.
DANGER!
WARNING!
be taken.
CAUTION!
that can be taken.
NOTICE
ance.

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
INFORMATION
tures.
Safety
Intended use
The safety relay provides a safety-related interruption of a safety circuit.
The safety relay meets the requirements of EN 60947-5-1, EN 60204-1 and VDE 0113‑1
and may be used in applications with
} E-STOP pushbuttons
} Safety gates
} Light grids and safety switches with detection of shorts across contacts
Units with the following order numbers can be used as a safety component for lifts in ac-
cordance with Annex IV of the directive 95/16/EC and EN 81-1:
} 750 104
} 751 104
} 750 134
} 751 134
NOTICE
terference.

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Safety regulations
Safety assessment

tion

Disposal

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
For your safety

following:
} For units with the order number 751 184, the following applies for railway applications in
accordance with EN 50155: The unit may only be accessible for maintenance and re-
pair and not during operation.
Unit features
} Positive-guided relay outputs:
– 3 safety contacts (N/O), instantaneous
– 1 auxiliary contact (N/C), instantaneous
} 1 semiconductor output
} Connection options for:
– E-STOP pushbuttons
– Safety gate limit switches
– Start buttons
– Light grids and safety switches with detection of shorts across contacts
} A connector can be used to connect 1 PNOZsigma contact expansion module
} Operating modes can be set via rotary switch
– Supply voltage
– Switch status of the safety contacts
– Start circuit
– Errors
Safety features
The relay meets the following safety requirements:
} The circuit is redundant with built-in self-monitoring.
} The correct opening and closing of the safety function relays is tested automatically in
each on-off cycle.

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Unit types with UB 24 VDC

} UB: 24 VDC; Order no. 750104, 751104, 751184
expansion
Interface
module
*Insulation between the non-marked area and the relay contacts: Basic insulation (over-
voltage category III), Protective separation (overvoltage category II)
Unit types with UB 48 - 240 VAC/DC

} UB: 48 - 240 VAC/DC; Order no. 750134, 751134
expansion
Interface
module
*Insulation between the non-marked area and the relay contacts: Basic insulation (over-
voltage category III), Protective separation (overvoltage category II)

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
In2+
} Single-channel operation: no redundancy in the input circuit, earth faults in the start
circuit and input circuit are detected.
} Dual-channel operation without detection of shorts across contacts: redundant input cir-
cuit, detects
– earth faults in the start and input circuit,
– short circuits in the input circuit and, with a monitored start, in the start circuit too.
In2-
} Dual-channel operation with detection of shorts across contacts: redundant input cir-
cuit, detects
– earth faults in the start and input circuit,
– short circuits in the input circuit and, with a monitored start, in the start circuit too,
– shorts between contacts in the input circuit.
} Automatic start: Unit is active once the input circuit has been closed.
} Manual start Unit is active once the input circuit and the start circuit are closed.
} Monitored start with falling edge: Unit is active once
– the input circuit is closed and then the start circuit is closed and opened again.
– the start circuit is closed and then opened again once the input circuit is closed.
} Monitored start with rising edge: Unit is active once the input circuit is closed and
once the start circuit is closed after the waiting period has elapsed (see technical de-
tails).
} Start with start-up test: The unit checks whether safety gates that are closed are
opened and then closed again when supply voltage is applied.
} Increase in the number of available instantaneous safety contacts by connecting con-
tact expander modules or external contactors/relays;
A connector can be used to connect 1 PNOZsigma contact expander module.

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Timing diagram
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Legend
} POWER: Supply voltage
} Start: Start circuit
} Input: Input circuits
} Output aux: Auxiliary contacts
} Out semi: Semiconductor output
} [1]: Automatic start
} [2]: Manual start
} [3]: Monitored start with rising edge
} [4]: Monitored start with falling edge
} a: Input circuit closes before start circuit
} b: Start circuit closes before input circuit
} t3: Waiting period with a monitored start
} t4: Min. start pulse duration with a monitored start
Installation
Install base unit without contact expansion module:
} Remove the plug terminator at the side of the base unit and at the contact expansion
module.
} Connect the base unit and the contact expansion module to the supplied connector be-
fore mounting the units to the DIN rail.
Installation in control cabinet
IP54.

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
} Push the device upwards or downwards before lifting it from the DIN rail.
Wiring
Please note:
(e.g. for display).
} Auxiliary contact 41-42 and semiconductor output Y32 should not be used for safety
circuits!
Rlmax
Imax =
Rl / km

ductive loads.
} With UB 48 – 240 VAC/DC: Connect S21 to the functional earth.
} When connecting magnetically operated, reed proximity switches, ensure that the max.
peak inrush current (on the input circuit) does not overload the proximity switch.
} On 24 VDC devices:
The power supply must comply with the regulations for extra low voltages with protect-
NOTICE
If you connect contact expansion modules to a base unit with a universal
power supply, you will need to limit the conventional thermal current at the
contact expansion modules' safety contacts to 70 % of the stated current
(see technical details for contact expansion module).

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Operating modes
The operating mode is set via the rotary switch on the unit. You can do this by opening the
cover on the front of the unit.
NOTICE
again.
Set operating modes

Operating mode Automatic or Monitored start Monitored start Automatic start

selector switch manual start rising edge falling edge with start-up test
"mode"
In2+ In2-
Without detec- In2+ In2- In2+ In2- In2+ In2-
tion of shorts
across contacts
With detection of In2+ In2- In2+ In2- In2+ In2- In2+ In2-
shorts across
contacts
Connection
Unit types with Unit types with

Supply voltage UB 24 VDC UB 48 - 240 VAC/DC
A1 L+
A2 L-

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Input circuit Single-channel Dual-channel

E-Stop S1 S1
S11 S11
without detection of shorts S12
across contacts S12
S22
S22
E-Stop S1
S11
with detection of shorts S21
across contacts S22
S12
Safety gate
without detection of shorts
S1
across contacts S11 S11
S1
S12 S2
S22 S12
S22
Safety gate
with detection of shorts
across contacts S11
S1
S12 S2
S21
S22
Light beam device or safety 24 V DC
switch, detection of shorts A1

across contacts via ESPE
(only for unit types with A2 S12
UB = 24 VDC) S22
GND
NOTICE
When operated with a light grid or sensor
– It must not be possible to switch off the supply voltage for the PNOZ-
sigma separately from the supply voltage for the light grid or safety
switch.
– The operating mode selector switch must be set to "Without detection
of shorts across contacts", as shorts across contacts are detected by
the ESPE.

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
NOTICE
When used as a safety component in accordance with EN 81-1:
– The switch that is used must be designed as a safety switch in ac-
cordance with 14.1.2.2 of EN 81-1, so that a failure to open when en-
ergised is excluded.
– The supply lines to the safety switch must be laid in accordance with
13.5 of EN 81-1 so that short circuits that would bridge the contacts
in the switch can be excluded.
Without feedback loop With feedback loop monit-

Start circuit/feedback loop monitoring oring
Automatic start S12
K5 K6
S34
13 (23,33) L1
14 (24,34) K5 N
K6
Monitored, manual start/re- S3 S3

S12 S12
start K5 K6
S34
13 (23,33) L1
14 (24,34) K5
S34 N
K6
NOTICE
In the event of an automatic start or manual start with bridged start contact
(fault)
The unit starts up automatically when the safeguard is reset, e.g. when the
E-STOP pushbutton is released. Use external circuit measures to prevent
an unexpected restart.
Unit types with UB 24 VDC Unit types with UB 48 - 240 VAC/DC
*Connect together the 0V connections on all

the external power supplies
Legend
} S1/S2: E-STOP/safety gate switch
} S3: Reset button
} : Switch operated

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
} : Gate open
} : Gate closed
Operation
NOTICE
LED on
LED flashes
LED off
INFORMATION
eously.
Status indicators
POWER
Supply voltage is present.
IN1
Input circuit at S12 is closed.
IN2
OUT
Safety contacts are closed and semiconductor output Y32 carries a high signal.
RESET

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Error indicators
All LEDs off
Diagnostics: Short across contacts/earth fault; unit switched off
} Remedy: Rectify short across contacts/earth fault, switch off supply voltage
for 1 min.
FAULT
again.
FAULT
sary.
POWER
IN1, IN2 alternately FAULT

Diagnostics: Connection error (possibly: cable resistance in the input circuit is
too high) or short detected between S12 and S22
} Remedy: Rectify connection error or short across contacts, switch supply
voltage off and then on again.
IN1 FAULT
Diagnostics: Power-up blocked due to short-term interruption at S12; input cir-
cuits not operated simultaneously
} Remedy: Open both input circuits, S12 and S22, simultaneously and then
close again.
IN2 FAULT
Diagnostics: Power-up blocked due to short-term interruption at S22; input cir-
cuits not operated simultaneously
} Remedy: Open both input circuits, S12 and S22, simultaneously and then
close again.

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
RESET FAULT

(vertical position)
Dimensions in mm

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Technical details
Order no. 750104 ─ 751104
See below for more order numbers
General 750104 750134 751104

CCC, CE, EAC (Euras- CCC, CE, EAC (Euras- CCC, CE, EAC (Euras-
ian), KOSHA, TÜV, cU- ian), KOSHA, TÜV, cU- ian), KOSHA, TÜV, cU-
Approvals Lus Listed Lus Listed Lus Listed
Electrical data 750104 750134 751104
Supply voltage
Voltage 24 V 48 - 240 V 24 V
Kind DC AC/DC DC
Voltage tolerance -15 %/+10 % -15 %/+10 % -15 %/+10 %
Output of external
power supply (AC) – 5 VA –
Output of external
power supply (DC) 2,5 W 2,5 W 2,5 W
Frequency range AC – 50 - 60 Hz –
Residual ripple DC 20 % 160 % 20 %
Duty cycle 100 % 100 % 100 %
Max. inrush current im-
pulse
Current pulse, A1 0,5 A – 0,5 A
Pulse duration, A1 5 ms – 5 ms
Inputs 750104 750134 751104
Number 2 2 2
Voltage at
Input circuit DC 24 V 24 V 24 V
Start circuit DC 24 V 24 V 24 V
Feedback loop DC 24 V 24 V 24 V
Current at
Input circuit DC 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA
Start circuit DC 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA
Feedback loop DC 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Inputs 750104 750134 751104

pulse
Current pulse, input cir-
cuit 0,2 A 0,2 A 0,2 A
Pulse duration, input
circuit 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms
Current pulse, feed-
back loop 0,2 A 0,2 A 0,2 A
Pulse duration, feed-
back loop 15 ms 15 ms 15 ms
Current pulse, start cir-
cuit 0,2 A 0,2 A 0,2 A
Pulse duration, start
circuit 15 ms 15 ms 15 ms
Min. input resistance at
power-on 110 Ohm 110 Ohm 110 Ohm
Max. overall cable resist-
ance Rlmax
Single-channel at UB
DC 30 Ohm 30 Ohm 30 Ohm
AC – 30 Ohm –
Dual-channel without
detection of shorts
across contacts at UB
Dual-channel without
detection of shorts
across contacts at UB
AC – 30 Ohm –
Dual-channel with de-
tection of shorts across
contacts at UB DC 30 Ohm 30 Ohm 30 Ohm
Dual-channel with de-
tection of shorts across
contacts at UB AC – 30 Ohm –
Semiconductor outputs 750104 750134 751104
Number 1 1 1
Voltage 24 V 24 V 24 V
Current 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
Relay outputs 750104 750134 751104
Number of output con-
tacts
Safety contacts (N/O),
instantaneous 3 3 3
Auxiliary contacts (N/C) 1 1 1
Max. short circuit current
IK 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Relay outputs 750104 750134 751104

In accordance with the
standard EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-4-1
Utilisation category of
safety contacts
AC1 at 240 V 240 V 240 V
Min. current 0,01 A 0,01 A 0,01 A
Max. current 6A 6A 6A
Max. power 1500 VA 1500 VA 1500 VA
DC1 at 24 V 24 V 24 V
Min. current 0,01 A 0,01 A 0,01 A
Max. power 150 W 150 W 150 W
auxiliary contacts
AC1 at 240 V 240 V 240 V
Min. current 0,01 A 0,01 A 0,01 A
DC1 at 24 V 24 V 24 V
Min. current 0,01 A 0,01 A 0,01 A
Max. power 150 W 150 W 150 W
standard EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1
safety contacts
AC15 at 230 V 230 V 230 V
DC13 (6 cycles/min) at 24 V 24 V 24 V
auxiliary contacts
AC15 at 230 V 230 V 230 V
Utilisation category in ac-
cordance with UL
Voltage 240 V AC G.U. (same po- 240 V AC G.U. (same po- 240 V AC G.U. (same po-
larity) larity) larity)
With current 6A 6A 6A
Voltage 24 V DC G. U. 24 V DC G. U. 24 V DC G. U.

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Relay outputs 750104 750134 751104

External contact fuse pro-
tection, safety contacts
standard EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1
Max. melting integral 260 A²s 66 A²s 260 A²s
Blow-out fuse, quick 10 A 6A 10 A
Blow-out fuse, slow 6A 4A 6A
Blow-out fuse, gG 10 A 6A 10 A
Circuit breaker 24V
AC/DC, characteristic
B/C 6A 4A 6A
tection, auxiliary contacts
Blow-out fuse, quick 10 A 6A 10 A
Blow-out fuse, gG 6A 6A 6A
Circuit breaker 24 V
B/C 6A 4A 6A
Contact material AgCuNi + 0,2 µm Au AgCuNi + 0,2 µm Au AgCuNi + 0,2 µm Au
Conventional thermal 750104 750134 751104
current while loading
several contacts
Ith per contact at UB AC;
AC1: 240 V, DC1: 24 V
Conv. therm. current
with 1 contact – 6A –
with 2 contacts – 6A –
with 3 contacts – 4,5 A –
Ith per contact at UB DC;
AC1: 240 V, DC1: 24 V
with 1 contact 6A 6A 6A
with 2 contacts 6A 6A 6A
with 3 contacts 5A 4,5 A 5A

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Times 750104 750134 751104

Switch-on delay
With automatic start
typ. 170 ms 170 ms 170 ms
max. 300 ms 300 ms 300 ms
after power on typ. 350 ms 350 ms 350 ms
after power on max. 600 ms 600 ms 600 ms
With manual start typ. 40 ms 40 ms 40 ms
With monitored start
with rising edge typ. 35 ms 35 ms 35 ms
with rising edge max. 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms
with falling edge typ. 55 ms 55 ms 55 ms
with falling edge max. 70 ms 70 ms 70 ms
With E-STOP typ. 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms
With E-STOP max. 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms
With power failure typ. 40 ms 40 ms 40 ms
With power failure max. 80 ms 80 ms 80 ms
Recovery time at max.
switching frequency 1/s
After E-STOP 100 ms 50 ms 100 ms
After power failure 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms
Waiting period with a
monitored start
With rising edge 120 ms 120 ms 120 ms
With falling edge 250 ms 150 ms 250 ms
Min. start pulse duration
with a monitored start
With rising edge 30 ms 30 ms 30 ms
With falling edge 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms
Supply interruption before
de-energisation 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms
Simultaneity, channel 1
and 2 max. ∞ ∞ ∞
Environmental data 750104 750134 751104
Climatic suitability EN 60068-2-78 EN 60068-2-78 EN 60068-2-78
Ambient temperature
Temperature range -10 - 55 °C -10 - 55 °C -10 - 55 °C
Storage temperature
Humidity 93 % r. h. at 40 °C 93 % r. h. at 40 °C 93 % r. h. at 40 °C

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4

Condensation during op-
eration Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted
EMC EN 60947-5-1, EN EN 60947-5-1, EN EN 60947-5-1, EN
61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4, 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4, 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4,
EN 61326-3-1 EN 61326-3-1 EN 61326-3-1
Vibration
standard EN 60068-2-6 EN 60068-2-6 EN 60068-2-6
Frequency 10 - 55 Hz 10 - 55 Hz 10 - 55 Hz
Amplitude 0,35 mm 0,35 mm 0,35 mm
Airgap creepage
standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-1 EN 60947-1
Overvoltage category III / II III / II III / II
Pollution degree 2 2 2
Rated insulation voltage 250 V 250 V 250 V
Rated impulse withstand
voltage 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Protection type
Mounting area (e.g.
control cabinet) IP54 IP54 IP54
Housing IP40 IP40 IP40
Terminals IP20 IP20 IP20
Mechanical data 750104 750134 751104
Mounting position Any Any Any
Mechanical life 10,000,000 cycles 10,000,000 cycles 10,000,000 cycles
Material
Bottom PC PC PC
Front PC PC PC
Top PC PC PC
Connection type Screw terminal Screw terminal Spring-loaded terminal
Mounting type plug-in plug-in plug-in
Conductor cross section
with screw terminals
1 core flexible 0,25 - 2,5 mm², 24 - 12 0,25 - 2,5 mm², 24 - 12
AWG AWG –
2 core with the same
cross section, flexible
with crimp connectors, 0,25 - 1 mm², 24 - 16 0,25 - 1 mm², 24 - 16
no plastic sleeve AWG AWG –
without crimp connect-
ors or with TWIN crimp 0,2 - 1,5 mm², 24 - 16 0,2 - 1,5 mm², 24 - 16
connectors AWG AWG –
Torque setting with screw
terminals 0,5 Nm 0,5 Nm –

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Mechanical data 750104 750134 751104

with spring-loaded termin-
als: Flexible with/without 0,2 - 2,5 mm², 24 - 12
crimp connector – – AWG
Spring-loaded terminals:
Terminal points per con-
nection – – 2
Stripping length with
spring-loaded terminals – – 9 mm
Dimensions
Height 98 mm 98 mm 100 mm
Width 22,5 mm 22,5 mm 22,5 mm
Depth 120 mm 120 mm 120 mm
Weight 190 g 210 g 190 g
Order no. 751134 ─ 751184
General 751134 751184

CCC, CE, EAC (Eurasian), CCC, CE, EAC (Eurasian),
Approvals KOSHA, TÜV, cULus Listed KOSHA, TÜV, cULus Listed
Electrical data 751134 751184
Supply voltage
Voltage 48 - 240 V 24 V
Kind AC/DC DC
Voltage tolerance -15 %/+10 % -15 %/+10 %
(AC) 5 VA –
(DC) 2,5 W 2,5 W
Frequency range AC 50 - 60 Hz –
Residual ripple DC 160 % 20 %
Duty cycle 100 % 100 %
Current pulse, A1 – 0,5 A
Pulse duration, A1 – 5 ms
Inputs 751134 751184
Number 2 2
Voltage at
Input circuit DC 24 V 24 V
Start circuit DC 24 V 24 V
Feedback loop DC 24 V 24 V
Current at
Input circuit DC 50 mA 50 mA
Start circuit DC 50 mA 50 mA
Feedback loop DC 50 mA 50 mA

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Inputs 751134 751184

Current pulse, input circuit 0,2 A 0,2 A
Pulse duration, input circuit 100 ms 100 ms
Current pulse, feedback loop 0,2 A 0,2 A
Pulse duration, feedback loop 15 ms 15 ms
Current pulse, start circuit 0,2 A 0,2 A
Pulse duration, start circuit 15 ms 15 ms
Min. input resistance at power-on 110 Ohm 110 Ohm
Max. overall cable resistance Rl-
max
Single-channel at UB DC 30 Ohm 30 Ohm
Single-channel at UB AC 30 Ohm –
Dual-channel without detection
of shorts across contacts at UB
DC 30 Ohm 60 Ohm
Dual-channel without detection
of shorts across contacts at UB
AC 30 Ohm –
Dual-channel with detection of
shorts across contacts at UB DC 30 Ohm 30 Ohm
Dual-channel with detection of
shorts across contacts at UB AC 30 Ohm –
Semiconductor outputs 751134 751184
Number 1 1
Voltage 24 V 24 V
Current 20 mA 20 mA
Number of output contacts
Safety contacts (N/O), instant-
aneous 3 3
Auxiliary contacts (N/C) 1 1
Max. short circuit current IK 1 kA 1 kA
tacts
AC1 at 240 V 240 V
Max. current 6A 6A
DC1 at 24 V 24 V
Max. current 6A 6A

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4

tacts
AC1 at 240 V 240 V
Max. current 6A 6A
DC1 at 24 V 24 V
Max. current 6A 6A
tacts
AC15 at 230 V 230 V
Max. current 3A 5A
Max. current 4A 5A
tacts
AC15 at 230 V 230 V
Max. current 3A 5A
Max. current 4A 5A
Utilisation category in accordance
with UL
Voltage 240 V AC G.U. (same polarity) 240 V AC G.U. (same polarity)
With current 6A 6A
Voltage 24 V DC G. U. 24 V DC G. U.
With current 6A 6A
safety contacts
Blow-out fuse, quick 6A 10 A
Blow-out fuse, gG 6A 10 A
Circuit breaker 24V AC/DC,
auxiliary contacts
Blow-out fuse, quick 6A 10 A
Blow-out fuse, gG 6A 6A
Circuit breaker 24 V AC/DC,

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4

Contact material AgCuNi + 0,2 µm Au AgCuNi + 0,2 µm Au
Conventional thermal current 751134 751184
while loading several contacts
Ith per contact at UB AC;
AC1: 240 V, DC1: 24 V
tact 6A –
tacts 6A –
tacts 4,5 A –
Ith per contact at UB DC;
AC1: 240 V, DC1: 24 V
tact 6A 6A
tacts 6A 6A
tacts 4,5 A 5A
Times 751134 751184
Switch-on delay
With automatic start typ. 170 ms 170 ms
With automatic start max. 300 ms 300 ms
on typ. 350 ms 350 ms
on max. 600 ms 600 ms
With manual start typ. 40 ms 40 ms
With E-STOP typ. 10 ms 10 ms
With E-STOP max. 20 ms 20 ms
With power failure typ. 40 ms 40 ms
With power failure max. 80 ms 80 ms
Recovery time at max. switching
frequency 1/s
After E-STOP 50 ms 100 ms
After power failure 100 ms 100 ms
Waiting period with a monitored
start

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Times 751134 751184

Min. start pulse duration with a
monitored start
Supply interruption before de-ener-
gisation 20 ms 20 ms
Simultaneity, channel 1 and 2 max. ∞ ∞
Climatic suitability EN 60068-2-78 EN 60068-2-78
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Humidity 93 % r. h. at 40 °C 93 % r. h. at 40 °C
Condensation during operation Not permitted Not permitted
EMC EN 60947-5-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN EN 60947-5-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN
61000-6-4, EN 61326-3-1 61000-6-4, EN 61326-3-1
Vibration
Frequency 10 - 55 Hz 10 - 55 Hz
Amplitude 0,35 mm 0,35 mm
Airgap creepage
In accordance with the standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-1
Overvoltage category III / II III / II
Pollution degree 2 2
Rated insulation voltage 250 V 250 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage 4 kV 4 kV
Protection type
Mounting area (e.g. control cab-
inet) IP54 IP54
Housing IP40 IP40
Terminals IP20 IP20
Mounting position Any Any
Mechanical life 10,000,000 cycles 10,000,000 cycles
Material
Bottom PC PC
Front PC PC
Top PC PC
Connection type Spring-loaded terminal Spring-loaded terminal
Mounting type plug-in plug-in
Conductor cross section with
spring-loaded terminals: Flexible
with/without crimp connector 0,2 - 2,5 mm², 24 - 12 AWG 0,2 - 2,5 mm², 24 - 12 AWG

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4

Spring-loaded terminals: Terminal
points per connection 2 2
Stripping length with spring-loaded
terminals 9 mm 9 mm
Dimensions
Height 100 mm 100 mm
Width 22,5 mm 22,5 mm
Depth 120 mm 120 mm
Weight 210 g 190 g
NOTICE
2008 2008 2008
Safety con-
tacts, in-
stantaneous PL e Cat. 4 SIL CL 3 2,31E-09 SIL 3 2,03E-06 20
INFORMATION

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Supplementary data
CAUTION!
graphs are met.
Service life graph

gible.
Unit types with UB 24 VDC
} UB: 24 VDC; Order no. 750104, 751104, 751184
Cycles x 1000

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Cycles x 1000
Fig.: Service life graphs at 110 VDC
Example

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Unit types with UB 48-240 VAC/DC

} UB: 48 – 240 VAC/DC; Order no. 750134, 751134
Cycles x 1000

Number of cycles x 1000
Fig.: Service life graphs at 110 VDC

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4
Example
To increase the service life, sufficient spark suppression must be provided on all relay con-
tacts. With capacitive loads, any power surges that occur must be noted. With DC contact-
ors, use flywheel diodes for spark suppression.

terminal out.
Order reference
PNOZ s4 24 VDC Screw terminals 750 104
PNOZ s4 48 – 240 VAC/DC Screw terminals 750 134
PNOZ s4 C 24 VDC Spring-loaded terminals 751 104
PNOZ s4 C 48 – 240 VAC/DC Spring-loaded terminals 751 134

21396-EN-14
PNOZ s4

Coated
fildern, Germany

21396-EN-14
Back cover
Printed in Germany
Support
21396-EN-14, 2015-09100XXXX-DE-0X
in Germany
KG, 2015
& Co.Printed
2015-00
© Pilz GmbH
0-0-1-3-000,
Brazil +61 3 95446300 +45 74436332
+55 11 97569-2804 Spain
Mexico +43 1 7986263-0 +41 62 88979-30
USA (toll-free) +32 9 3217575 +31 347 320477
+33 3 88104000 +90 216 5775552
China +49 711 3409-444 +44 1536 462203
+86 21 60880878-216 Ireland
South Korea +39 0362 1826711 +49 711 3409-444
Partner of:
The Best of
German
Engineering
Pilz GmbH & Co. KG

Tel.: +49 711 3409-0
Fax: +49 711 3409-133
info@pilz.com
www.pilz.com
PNOZ s9
} Safety relays
Operating Manual 21401-EN-09

Preface

Contents
Introduction 5
Safety 6
Intended use 6
Safety assessment 7
Disposal 8
For your safety 8
Unit features 8
Safety features 8
Timing diagrams 10
Delay-on de-energisation, not retriggerable 10
Delay-on de-energisation, retriggerable 11
Pulse on switching on 12
Delay-on energisation 13
Installation 13
Wiring 14

Operating modes and delay time 14
Set delay time 15
Connection 15
Operation 17
Fault indicators 18
Dimensions in mm 19
Technical details 19

21401-EN-09
Contents
Order reference 27

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Introduction
published.

erence.
DANGER!
WARNING!
be taken.
CAUTION!
that can be taken.
NOTICE
ance.

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
INFORMATION
tures.
Safety
Intended use
The unit meets the requirements of EN 60947-5-1, EN 60204-1 and VDE0113-1. In con-
junction with a base unit the unit is used as a
} Contact expansion module to increase the number of contacts available on a base unit.
Base units are all safety relays with feedback loop monitoring.
} Pulse relay
– In accordance with EN ISO 12100 (inching circuit for limited movement of hazard-
ous machine components during installation, set up and positioning)
– In safety circuits in accordance with VDE 0113 and EN 60204-1 (e.g. on movable
guards)
} Safe timer, delay-on energisation
– In accordance with EN ISO 14119 (release with delay through timer)
– In safety circuits in accordance with VDE 0113-1 and EN 60204-1 (e.g. on movable
guards)
} Safe timer, delay-on de-energisation
– In safety circuits in accordance with VDE 0113-1 and EN 60204-1 (e.g. on movable
guards)
The max. achievable safety level depends on the base unit. The expansion module may not
exceed this. The safety-related characteristic values stated under Safety-related character-
istic data [ 25] can only be achieved if the base unit also exhibits these values.
} The unit can also be used without a base unit as a pulse relay or safe timer.
The unit is designed for use with
} Safety relays in the series PNOZsigma, PNOZ X, PNOZelog, PNOZmulti
} Safety gate monitors from the PST series
} Two-hand relays from the PNOZsigma, P2HZ series

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
NOTICE
terference.
Safety regulations
Safety assessment

tion


21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Disposal
For your safety

following:
Unit features
} Positive-guided relay outputs, either instantaneous, delay-on de-energisation
(also retriggerable), pulsing or delay-on energisation:
– 3 safety contacts
– 1 auxiliary contact
} Switch-on time, pulse time or delay-on de-energisation selectable with rotary switches
– Supply voltage
– Switch status channel 1/2
– Start circuit
– Error
Safety features
The unit meets the following safety requirements:
} The unit monitors its own output contacts.
} Earth fault in the feedback loop is detected.
} Earth fault in the input circuit:
The output relays de-energise and the safety contacts open.

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
*Safe separation from non-marked area in accordance with EN 60947-1, 6 kV, basic insula-
tion between all safety contacts.
} Delay-on de-energisation, not retriggerable
If the supply voltage at the input circuit is interrupted, the safety contacts will open once
the set release time has elapsed, even if the safety function is cancelled during the
delay time. The unit cannot be reactivated until the delay time has elapsed.
} Delay-on de-energisation, retriggerable
(only possible as a standalone application or with the PNOZsigma base unit!)
If the supply voltage at the input circuit is interrupted, the safety contacts will open once
the set release time has elapsed.
If the safety function is cancelled during the delay time (e.g. safety gate closed), the unit
will remain active.
} Pulse on switching on
The safety contacts close when supply voltage is applied, the feedback loop is closed
and finally the input circuit is closed. The safety contacts are reopened once the pulse
time has elapsed.
If the input circuit is opened for more than 10 ms during the pulse time, the safety con-
tacts will open immediately and the auxiliary contact will be closed.

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
} Delay-on energisation
The set delay time is started when supply voltage is applied, the feedback loop is
closed and finally the input circuit is closed.
If the input circuit and feedback loop are closed once the delay time has elapsed, the
safety contacts will close and the auxiliary contact will be opened.
If the input circuit is opened for more than 10 ms, the safety contacts will open immedi-
ately and the auxiliary contact will be closed.
with PNOZsigma base unit:
} Dual-channel operation via PNOZsigma connector
with other base units or without base unit:
} Single-channel operation: one input circuit affects the output relays
Timing diagrams
Delay-on de-energisation, not retriggerable
[1] [2]
POWER
Input
Reset
Output safe
Output aux.
Legend
} Input: Input circuit
} Output aux: Auxiliary contact
} Reset: Feedback loop input
} tv: Delay time
} [1]: Delay-on de-energisation with the time tv
} [2]: No retriggering in the time tv
NOTICE
At the latest the safety contacts open after the set delay time + 20 ms +
15% of the set value, even in the case of a component failure.

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Delay-on de-energisation, retriggerable
[1] [2]
POWER
Input
Reset
Output safe
Output aux.
Legend
} tv: Delay time
} tges: Overall delay time
} [1]: Delay-on de-energisation with the time tv
} [2]: Retriggering in the time tv for overall delay-on de-energisation tges
NOTICE

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Pulse on switching on
[1] [2] [3] [4]

POWER
t < 10 ms
Input
Reset
Output safe
Output aux.
Legend
} tv: Delay time (pulse time)
} [1]: Normal operating cycle
} [2]: Fault: Input circuit opened too early
} [3]: Fault: Feedback loop closed too late
} [4]: Normal operating cycle with supply interruption < 10 ms
NOTICE

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Delay-on energisation
[1] [2] [3] [4]

POWER
Input
Reset
Output safe
Output aux.
Legend
} tv: Delay time
} [1]: Normal operating cycle
} [2]: Fault: Input circuit opened too early, before tv expired
} [3]: Fault: Feedback loop closed too late after tv elapsed
} [4]: Normal operating cycle with supply interruption < 10 ms
NOTICE
At the earliest the safety contacts close after the set delay time - 20 ms -
Installation
Install contact expansion module without base unit:
} Remove the plug terminator at the side of the base unit and at the contact expander
module
} Connect the base unit and the contact expansion module using the connector supplied,
before mounting the units to the DIN rail.
Control cabinet installation
IP54.

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
} Push the unit upwards or downwards before lifting it from the DIN rail.
Wiring
Please note:
(e.g. for display).
} Auxiliary contact 45-46 should not be used for safety circuits!
Rlmax
Imax =
Rl / km

ductive loads.
} The power supply must comply with the regulations for extra low voltages with protect-
Operating modes and delay time

The operating mode and delay time are set via the rotary switches on the unit. You can do
this by opening the cover on the front of the unit.
NOTICE
again.

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Set operating modes

operating mode delay-on de-en- delay-on de-en- delay-on ener- pulse on switch-
selector switch ergisation, not ergisation, ret- gisation ing on
"mode" retriggerable riggerable
Set delay time

Time selector switch "t[s]"
Factor selector switch "n"
n x t[s] = Delay time
Example:
t = 4 s, n = 5
Delay time = 5 x 4 = 20 s
Connection
} Supply voltage
Supply voltage AC DC
A1 L+
A2 L-
INFORMATION
The supply voltage may only be connected as shown in the examples listed
below!

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
} 1-channel input circuit/feedback loop
Input circuit Input circuit Feedback loop

Without base unit (stand- S3 S3
S32 +24 V DC PNOZs9 S32
K5 K6
alone) S34
A1 24 V DC
A2 0V A2 0V
Base unit: 24 V DC 24 V DC
Safety relay PNOZ X A1 PNOZs9 PNOZ X

S34 PNOZs9
S32 feedback 45
PNOZ X loop
S34 46
A2 A2
0V 0V
Base unit: 24 V DC 24 V DC
Safety relay PNOZelog; PNOZelog PNOZelog

driven via semiconductor Output
A1
S32
PNOZs9 S34
45
PNOZs9
*
feedback
outputs (24 VDC) S34 loop 46
A2 A2
0V 0V
INFORMATION
Feedback loop
The inputs that evaluate the feedback loop will depend on the base unit and
application.
* with PNOZelog as base unit:

The selectable delay-on de-energisation of PNOZ s9 may only be used with
the safety relay PNOZ e1p. Other PNOZelog safety relays must be oper-
ated without delay-on de-energisation.
} 2-channel input circuit
Base unit: Safety relays

PNOZ s3, PNOZ s4, PNOZ Base unit: Safety relays
s5 PNOZ s1, PNOZ s2
The input circuit is connec- S11 S34 PNOZ s9
24 V DC
ted and evaluated via the A1 PNOZ s9

PNOZsigma
S34
Interface
PNOZ s3
connector.
PNOZsigma
PNOZ s4
Interface
PNOZ s5 PNOZ s1
PNOZ s2
Base unit: Two-hand con- Base unit: Two-hand con-

trol device PNOZ s6 trol device PNOZ s6.1
The input circuit is connec- S12 S34 PNOZ s9 S24 S34 PNOZ s9
ted and evaluated via the
PNOZsigma
PNOZsigma
Interface
Interface
connector.
PNOZ s6 PNOZ s6.1

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
INFORMATION
If a base unit and a contact expansion module from the PNOZsigma range
are linked via the connector, no additional wiring is necessary.
Do not connect S32 on the contact expansion module!
} Application
Without feedback loop With feedback loop

Without base unit PNOZs9 S32
S3
PNOZs9 S32
S3
K5 K6
S34 S34
A1 24 V DC A1 24 V DC
A2 0V A2 0V
Legend
} S3: Start button
Operation
NOTICE
LED on
LED flashes
INFORMATION
eously.

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Status indicators
POWER
Supply voltage is present.
IN1
IN2
OUT
Safety contacts are closed.
RESET
OUT
Set delay time is running.
Fault indicators
FAULT
again.
With base unit PNOZsigma:
Diagnostics: Input circuit S32 is closed without authorisation
FAULT
sary.
POWER
RESET FAULT

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9

(vertical position)
} In the case of an error, the delay-on de-energisation contacts may open before the
delay time has elapsed.
Dimensions in mm
120 (4.72")
98 (3.86")
17,5
* 100 (3,94") (0.69")
Technical details
General 750109 751109 751189

CCC, CE, EAC (Euras- CCC, CE, EAC (Euras- CCC, CE, EAC (Euras-
ian), KOSHA, TÜV, cU- ian), KOSHA, TÜV, cU- ian), KOSHA, TÜV, cU-
Approvals Lus Listed Lus Listed Lus Listed
Electrical data 750109 751109 751189
Supply voltage
Voltage 24 V 24 V 24 V
Kind DC DC DC
Voltage tolerance -20 %/+20 % -20 %/+20 % -20 %/+20 %
Output of external
power supply (DC) 2W 2W 2W
Residual ripple DC 20 % 20 % 20 %
Duty cycle 100 % 100 % 100 %

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Electrical data 750109 751109 751189

pulse
Current pulse, A1 0,7 A 0,7 A 0,7 A
Pulse duration, A1 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms
ance Rlmax
Feedback loop 30 Ohm 30 Ohm 30 Ohm
A1/A2 20 Ohm 20 Ohm 20 Ohm
Inputs 750109 751109 751189
Voltage at
Feedback loop DC 24 V 24 V 24 V
Current at
Input circuit DC 15 mA 15 mA 15 mA
Feedback loop DC 15 mA 15 mA 15 mA
pulse
Current pulse, input cir-
cuit 0,1 A 0,1 A 0,1 A
Pulse duration, input
circuit 20 µs 20 µs 20 µs
Current pulse, feed-
back loop 0,1 A 0,1 A 0,1 A
Pulse duration, feed-
back loop 20 µs 20 µs 20 µs
ance Rlmax
Relay outputs 750109 751109 751189
Number of output con-
tacts
Safety contacts (N/O),
delayed 3 3 3
Auxiliary contacts (N/
C), delayed 1 1 1
Max. short circuit current
IK 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA
standard EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-4-1

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Relay outputs 750109 751109 751189

safety contacts
AC1 at 240 V 240 V 240 V
Min. current 0,01 A 0,01 A 0,01 A
DC1 at 24 V 24 V 24 V
Min. current 0,01 A 0,01 A 0,01 A
Max. power 150 W 150 W 150 W
auxiliary contacts
AC1 at 240 V 240 V 240 V
Min. current 0,01 A 0,01 A 0,01 A
DC1 at 24 V 24 V 24 V
Min. current 0,01 A 0,01 A 0,01 A
Max. power 150 W 150 W 150 W
standard EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1
safety contacts
AC15 at 230 V 230 V 230 V
auxiliary contacts
AC15 at 230 V 230 V 230 V
Utilisation category in ac-
cordance with UL
Voltage 240 V AC G.U. (same po- 240 V AC G.U. (same po- 240 V AC G.U. (same po-
larity) larity) larity)
Voltage 24 V DC G. U. 24 V DC G. U. 24 V DC G. U.

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Relay outputs 750109 751109 751189

tection, safety contacts
standard EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1
Blow-out fuse, quick 10 A 10 A 10 A
Blow-out fuse, gG 10 A 10 A 10 A
Circuit breaker 24V
B/C 6A 6A 6A
tection, auxiliary contacts
Blow-out fuse, quick 10 A 10 A 10 A
Blow-out fuse, gG 6A 6A 6A
Circuit breaker 24 V
B/C 6A 6A 6A
Conventional thermal cur-
rent 6A 6A 6A
Contact material AgCuNi + 0,2 µm Au AgCuNi + 0,2 µm Au AgCuNi + 0,2 µm Au
Times 750109 751109 751189
Switch-on delay
With manual start typ. 60 ms 60 ms 60 ms
With manual start max. 80 ms 80 ms 80 ms
With E-STOP typ. 40 ms 40 ms 40 ms
With E-STOP max. 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms
Recovery time at max.
switching frequency 1/s
After power failure 800 ms 800 ms 800 ms
Delay time tv 0,04 s, 0,1 s, 0,2 s, 0,3 s, 0,04 s, 0,1 s, 0,2 s, 0,3 s, 0,04 s, 0,1 s, 0,2 s, 0,3 s,
0,4 s, 0,5 s, 0,6 s, 0,7 s, 0,4 s, 0,5 s, 0,6 s, 0,7 s, 0,4 s, 0,5 s, 0,6 s, 0,7 s,
0,8 s, 1 s, 1,5 s, 2 s, 2,5 0,8 s, 1 s, 1,5 s, 2 s, 2,5 0,8 s, 1 s, 1,5 s, 2 s, 2,5
s, 3 s, 3,5 s, 4 s, 5 s, 6 s, s, 3 s, 3,5 s, 4 s, 5 s, 6 s, s, 3 s, 3,5 s, 4 s, 5 s, 6 s,
7 s, 8 s, 10 s, 12 s, 14 s, 7 s, 8 s, 10 s, 12 s, 14 s, 7 s, 8 s, 10 s, 12 s, 14 s,
15 s, 16 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 15 s, 16 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 15 s, 16 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30
s, 35 s, 40 s, 50 s, 60 s, s, 35 s, 40 s, 50 s, 60 s, s, 35 s, 40 s, 50 s, 60 s,
70 s, 80 s, 90 s, 100 s, 70 s, 80 s, 90 s, 100 s, 70 s, 80 s, 90 s, 100 s,
120 s, 140 s, 150 s, 160 120 s, 140 s, 150 s, 160 120 s, 140 s, 150 s, 160
s, 180 s, 200 s, 210 s, s, 180 s, 200 s, 210 s, s, 180 s, 200 s, 210 s,
240 s, 300 s 240 s, 300 s 240 s, 300 s
Time accuracy +/-1 % + +/-20 ms +/-1 % + +/-20 ms +/-1 % + +/-20 ms
Repetition accuracy +/-1 % + +/-20 ms +/-1 % + +/-20 ms +/-1 % + +/-20 ms
Repetition accuracy in the
event of an error +/-15 % + +/-20 ms +/-15 % + +/-20 ms +/-15 % + +/-20 ms

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Times 750109 751109 751189

Min. delay time (operating
mode delay-on energisa-
tion) tv - 15 % - 20 ms tv - 15 % - 20 ms tv - 15 % - 20 ms
Max. delay time tv + 15 % + 20 ms tv + 15 % + 20 ms tv + 15 % + 20 ms
de-energisation in the in-
put circuit 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms
de-energisation 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms
Climatic suitability EN 60068-2-78 EN 60068-2-78 EN 60068-2-78
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Humidity 93 % r. h. at 40 °C 93 % r. h. at 40 °C 93 % r. h. at 40 °C
Condensation during op-
eration Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted
EMC EN 60947-5-1, EN EN 60947-5-1, EN EN 60947-5-1, EN
61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4, 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4, 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4,
EN 61326-3-1 EN 61326-3-1 EN 61326-3-1
Vibration
standard EN 60068-2-6 EN 60068-2-6 EN 60068-2-6
Frequency 10 - 55 Hz 10 - 55 Hz 10 - 55 Hz
Amplitude 0,35 mm 0,35 mm 0,35 mm
Airgap creepage
standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-1 EN 60947-1
Overvoltage category III III III
Pollution degree 2 2 2
Rated insulation voltage 250 V 250 V 250 V
Rated impulse withstand
voltage 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV
Protection type
Mounting area (e.g.
control cabinet) IP54 IP54 IP54
Housing IP40 IP40 IP40
Terminals IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Mechanical data 750109 751109 751189
Mounting position Any Any Any
Mechanical life 10,000,000 cycles 10,000,000 cycles 10,000,000 cycles
Material
Bottom PC PC PC
Front PC PC PC
Top PC PC PC

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Mechanical data 750109 751109 751189

Connection type Screw terminal Spring-loaded terminal Spring-loaded terminal
Mounting type plug-in plug-in plug-in
with screw terminals
1 core flexible 0,25 - 2,5 mm², 24 - 12
AWG – –
with crimp connectors, 0,25 - 1 mm², 24 - 16
no plastic sleeve AWG – –
without crimp connect-
ors or with TWIN crimp 0,2 - 1,5 mm², 24 - 16
connectors AWG – –
Torque setting with screw
terminals 0,5 Nm – –
with spring-loaded termin-
als: Flexible with/without 0,2 - 2,5 mm², 24 - 12 0,2 - 2,5 mm², 24 - 12
crimp connector – AWG AWG
Spring-loaded terminals:
Terminal points per con-
nection – 2 2
Stripping length with
spring-loaded terminals – 9 mm 9 mm
Dimensions
Height 98 mm 100 mm 100 mm
Width 17,5 mm 17,5 mm 17,5 mm
Depth 120 mm 120 mm 120 mm
Weight 175 g 175 g 175 g
NOTICE
2008 2008 2008
Safety con-
tacts,
delayed PL e Cat. 4 SIL CL 3 2,34E-09 SIL 3 2,75E-05 20

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
INFORMATION
Supplementary data
CAUTION!
graphs are met.
Service life graph

gible.
Cycles x 1000
Fig.: Service life graphs at 24 V DC and 230 V AC

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9
Cycles x 1000
Fig.: Service life graphs at 110 V DC
Example

21401-EN-09
PNOZ s9

terminal out.
Order reference
PNOZ s9 24 VDC Screw terminals 750 109
(coated version)
PNOZ s9 C 24 VDC; 10 pieces Spring-loaded terminals 751 909
fildern, Germany

21401-EN-09
Back cover
Printed in Germany
Support
21401-EN-09, 2015-09100XXXX-DE-0X
in Germany
KG, 2015
& Co.Printed
2015-00
© Pilz GmbH
0-0-1-3-000,
Brazil +61 3 95446300 +45 74436332
+55 11 97569-2804 Spain
Mexico +43 1 7986263-0 +41 62 88979-30
USA (toll-free) +32 9 3217575 +31 347 320477
+33 3 88104000 +90 216 5775552
China +49 711 3409-444 +44 1536 462203
+86 21 60880878-216 Ireland
South Korea +39 0362 1826711 +49 711 3409-444
Partner of:
The Best of
German
Engineering
Pilz GmbH & Co. KG

Tel.: +49 711 3409-0
Fax: +49 711 3409-133
info@pilz.com
www.pilz.com
Product data sheet ZBE102
Characteristics single contact block for head Ø22 1NC silver
alloy screw clamp terminal
Main
Harmony XB5
Product or component Contact block
type
Device short name ZBE
quantity
Contacts type and com- 1 NC
position
Contacts operation Slow-break
Contact block type Single
Contacts usage Standard contacts
Connections - terminals Screw clamp terminals : >= 1 x 0.22 mm² without ca-
ble end conforming to EN 60947-1
Screw clamp terminals : <= 2 x 1.5 mm² with cable
end conforming to EN 60947-1
Complementary
Terminals description ISO n°1 (11-12)NC
Positive opening With positive opening conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 appendix K
Operating travel 4.3 mm (total travel)
1.5 mm (NC changing electrical state)
Operating force 2 N (NC changing electrical state)
Tightening torque 0.8...1.2 N.m conforming to EN 60947-1
Shape of screw head Slotted head compatible with flat Ø 5.5 mm screwdriver
Slotted head compatible with flat Ø 4 mm screwdriver
Cross head compatible with pozidriv No 1 screwdriver
Cross head compatible with Philips no 1 screwdriver
Contacts material Silver alloy (Ag/Ni)
Short circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuse type gG conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
[Ith] conventional free air thermal current 10 A conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
[Ui] rated insulation voltage 600 V (degree of pollution: 3) conforming to EN 60947-1
[Uimp] rated impulse withstand voltage 6 kV conforming to EN 60947-1
[Ie] rated operational current 1.2 A at 600 V, AC-15, A600 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
0.55 A at 125 V, DC-13, Q600 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
6 A at 120 V, AC-15, A600 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
Electrical durability 1000000 cycles, DC-13, 0.5 A at 24 V, operating rate: 3600 cyc/h, load factor: 0.5
conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 appendix C
1000000 cycles, DC-13, 0.2 A at 110 V, operating rate: 3600 cyc/h, load factor:
0.5 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 appendix C
1000000 cycles, AC-15, 4 A at 24 V, operating rate: 3600 cyc/h, load factor: 0.5
Electrical reliability IEC 60947-5-4 Λ < 10exp(-8) at 17 V, 5 mA in clean environment conforming to EN/IEC
60947-5-4
Λ < 10exp(-7) at 5 V, 1 mA in clean environment conforming to EN/IEC
60947-5-4
May 23, 2016

1
Mounting of block Front mounting
Additional information Mounting on push-button collar
Environment
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-4
JIS C 4520
UL 508
CSA C22.2 No 14
CCC
CSA
DNV
GL
GOST
RINA
UL
60068-2-27
60068-2-27
2
Product data sheet ZBE102
Dimensions Drawings
Dimensions
with ZB5AZ009 Fixing Collar
with ZB4BZ009 Fixing Collar
3
Product data sheet ZB4BS844
Characteristics red Ø40 Emergency stop,switching off head
Ø22 trigger and latching turn release
Main
Product or component Head for emergency switching off push-button
type
Bezel material Chromium plated metal
Mounting diameter 22 mm
quantity
Shape of signaling unit Round
head
Type of operator Trigger action and mechanical latching
Reset Turn to release
Operator profile Red mushroom Ø 40 mm unmarked
Complementary
Electrical composition code C10 for <= 4 contacts using single and double blocks in front mounting
C15 for 1 contacts using single blocks in front mounting
Environment
Class of protection against electric shock Class I conforming to IEC 61140
NEMA degree of protection NEMA 12
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
NEMA 13
IK degree of protection IK03 conforming to IEC 50102
EN/IEC 60947-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-4
EN/IEC 60947-5-5
EN/ISO 13850
IEC 60364-5-53
JIS C 4520
UL 508
GB 14048.5
CSA C22.2 No 14
May 23, 2016

1
CSA
DNV
GL
RINA
UL listed
60068-2-27
60068-2-27
Product end of life instructions Need no specific recycling operations
2
Dimensions Drawings
Dimensions
3


(2) 40 mm min. / 1.57 in. min.
(3) 30 mm min. / 1.18 in. min.
+0.4
/ 0.88 in. 0
+0.016
)
(5) 45 mm min. / 1.78 in. min.
(6) 32 mm min. / 1.26 in. min.
Pushbuttons, Switches and Pilot Lights for Printed Circuit Board Connection
Panel Cut-outs (Viewed from Installer’s Side)
A: 30 mm min. / 1.18 in. min.

B: 40 mm min. / 1.57 in. min.
4
Printed Circuit Board Cut-outs (Viewed from Electrical Block Side)
Dimensions in mm
A: 30 mm min.
B: 40 mm min.
Dimensions in in.
A: 1.18 in. min.
B: 1.57 in. min.
General Tolerances of the Panel and Printed Circuit Board

The cumulative tolerance must not exceed 0.3 mm / 0.012 in: T1 + T2 = 0.3 mm max.
Installation Precautions
● Minimum thickness of circuit board: 1.6 mm / 0.06 in.
● Cut-out diameter: 22.4 mm ± 0.1 / 0.88 in. ± 0.004
● Orientation of body/fixing collar ZB4 BZ009: ± 2°30’ (excluding cut-outs marked a and b).
● Tightening torque of screws ZBZ 006: 0.6 N.m (5.3 lbf.in) max.
● Allow for one ZB4 BZ079 fixing collar/pillar and its fixing screws:
○ every 90 mm / 3.54 in. horizontally (X), and 120 mm / 4.72 in. vertically (Y).
○ with each selector switch head (ZB4 BD•, ZB4 BJ•, ZB4 BG•).
The fixing centers marked a and b are diagonally opposed and must align with those marked 4 and 5.
5
(1) Panel
(2) Printed circuit board
Mounting of Adapter (Socket) ZBZ 01•

● 1 2 elongated holes for ZBZ 006 screw access
● 2 1 hole Ø 2.4 mm ± 0.05 / 0.09 in. ± 0.002 for centring adapter ZBZ 01•
● 3 8 × Ø 1.2 mm / 0.05 in. holes
● 4 1 hole Ø 2.9 mm ± 0.05 / 0.11 in. ± 0.002, for aligning the printed circuit board (with cut-out marked a)
● 5 1 elongated hole for aligning the printed circuit board (with cut-out marked b)
● 6 4 holes Ø 2.4 mm / 0.09 in. for clipping in adapter ZBZ 01•
Dimensions An + 18.1 relate to the Ø 2.4 mm ± 0.05 / 0.09 in. ± 0.002 holes for centring adapter ZBZ 01•.
6
Technical Description
Electrical Compositions Corresponding to Code C8
Electrical Compositions Corresponding to Code C10
Electrical Composition Corresponding to Codes C9, C11, SF1 and SR1
1 N/O
1 N/C
1 N/O + N/C or 1 N/O + N/O or 1 N/C + N/C
7
Legend
Single contact
Double contact
Light block
Possible location
8
Product data sheet ZB4BZ103
Characteristics single contact block with body/fixing collar 2NO
screw clamp terminal
Main
Product or component Complete body/contact assembly
type
Fixing collar material Zamak
quantity
Contacts type and com- 2 NO
position
Additional information With body/fixing collar
Complementary
Terminals description ISO n°1 (13-14)NO
Positive opening Without positive opening
2.6 mm (NO changing electrical state)
Operating torque 0.05 N.m (NO changing electrical state)
May 23, 2016

1
60947-5-4
60947-5-4
Environment
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-4
EN/IEC 60947-5-5
JIS C 4520
UL 508
CSA C22.2 No 14
CSA
DNV
GL
RINA
UL
60068-2-27
60068-2-27
2
Dimensions Drawings
Dimensions
3


(2) 40 mm min. / 1.57 in. min.
(3) 30 mm min. / 1.18 in. min.
+0.4
/ 0.88 in. 0
+0.016
)
(5) 45 mm min. / 1.78 in. min.
(6) 32 mm min. / 1.26 in. min.
4
Characteristics single contact block with body/fixing collar 2NC
screw clamp terminal
Main
Product or component Complete body/contact assembly
type
Fixing collar material Zamak
quantity
Contacts type and com- 2 NC
position
Additional information With body/fixing collar
Complementary
Terminals description ISO n°1 (11-12)NC
Positive opening With positive opening conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 appendix K
1.5 mm (NC changing electrical state)
May 23, 2016

1
60947-5-4
60947-5-4
Environment
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-4
EN/IEC 60947-5-5
JIS C 4520
UL 508
CSA C22.2 No 14
CSA
DNV
GL
RINA
UL
60068-2-27
60068-2-27
2
Dimensions Drawings
Dimensions
3


(2) 40 mm min. / 1.57 in. min.
(3) 30 mm min. / 1.18 in. min.
+0.4
/ 0.88 in. 0
+0.016
)
(5) 45 mm min. / 1.78 in. min.
(6) 32 mm min. / 1.26 in. min.
4
https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2985688
Safety module - IB IL 24 PSDI 8-PAC - 2985688

Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's
documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid
(http://phoenixcontact.com/download)
Safety-related digital input module, IP20 protection, for the SafetyBridge, INTERBUS-Safety, and PROFIsafe
system. The module has 4 safe digital inputs for two-channel assignment or 8 safe digital inputs for single-
channel assignment.
Product Description
The safety module is an input module from the Inline product range, designed for use in a SafetyBridge, INTERBUS-Safety or PROFIsafe system.
The safety module can be used as part of an Inline station at any point within a SafetyBridge, INTERBUS-Safety or PROFIsafe Inline system. The
transmission speed of the safety module can be set to 500 kbaud or 2 Mbaud using a switch. Only one transmission speed must be used uniformly
within a station. The module has four safe digital inputs for two-channel assignment or eight safe digital inputs for single-channel assignment. The inputs
can be parameterized according to the application and enable the integration of sensors in the safe SafetyBridge, INTERBUS (INTERBUS-Safety), and
PROFIsafe system. Depending on the installation and parameterization, in these systems the safety module can achieve the following safety integrity:
– Up to category 4 according to standard EN 954-1
– Up to SIL 3 according to standards EN 61508 and EN 62061
– Up to PL e according to standard EN ISO 13849-1
Product Features
■ SIL 3 according to IEC 61508/EN 61508
■ SILCL 3 according to EN 62061
■ PL e according to EN ISO 13849-1
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 340.0 g
Country of origin Germany
Technical data
Note
EMC: class A product, see manufacturer's declaration in the download
Utilization restriction
area
Dimensions
Width 48.8 mm
Height 119.8 mm
Depth 71.5 mm
Note on dimensions Housing dimensions
05/26/2016 Page 1 / 5

Technical data
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature (operation) -25 °C ... 55 °C
Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -25 °C ... 70 °C
10 % ... 85 % (Take suitable measures against increased air humidity
Permissible humidity (operation)
within the permitted temperature range.)
Permissible humidity (storage/transport)
Air pressure (operation) 80 kPa ... 108 kPa (up to 2000 m above sea level)
Air pressure (storage/transport) 66 kPa ... 108 kPa (up to 3500 m above sea level)
Degree of protection IP20
Interfaces
Fieldbus system INTERBUS
Designation Inline local bus
Connection method Inline data jumper
Transmission speed 500 kBit/s 2MBit/s (can be switched)
Digital inputs
Input name Digital inputs
Connection method Spring-cage connection
2, 3, 4-wire
Number of inputs 4 (with two-channel assignment)
8 (for single-channel assignment)
Typical response time See technical data
Input characteristic curve IEC 61131-2 type 3
Input voltage 24 V DC (via clock outputs UT1 and UT2 or external supply)
Input voltage range "0" signal -3 V DC ... 5 V DC
Input voltage range "1" signal 11 V DC ... 30 V DC
Input voltage range -3 V DC ... 30 V DC
Typical input current per channel 4.2 mA (at 24 V)
Power supply for module electronics

Supply voltage 24 V DC (via voltage jumper)
Supply voltage range 19.2 V DC ... 30 V DC
Communications power UL 7.5 V (via voltage jumper)
Current consumption max. 180 mA (from the local bus)
General
Mounting type DIN rail
Net weight 349.4 g
Note on weight specifications with connectors
05/26/2016 Page 2 / 5

Technical data
Inline potentials
Communications power UL 7.5 V DC (see safety data)
Current consumption from UL max. 180 mA
Main circuit supply UM 24 V DC
Supply voltage range UM 19.2 V DC ... 30 V DC (including ripple)
typ. 25 mA (plus current consumption of the inputs when supplied via the
Current consumption from UM clock outputs, plus current consumption of the connected initiators when
via through the clock outputs)
max. 825 mA (see safety data)
Safety-related characteristic data

Designation IEC 61508 - High demand
Safety Integrity Level (SIL) max. 3 (two channel; dependent in parameterization and wiring)
Designation IEC 61508 - Low demand
Designation EN ISO 13849
Performance level (PL) max. e (two channel; dependent in parameterization and wiring)
Category max. 4 (two channel; dependent in parameterization and wiring)
Designation EN 62061
Safety Integrity Level Claim Limit (SIL CL) max. 3 (two channel; dependent in parameterization and wiring)
Standards and Regulations

5 V supply, incoming remote bus/7.5 V supply (bus logics) 500 V AC 50 Hz
Test section
1 min.
5 V supply, outgoing remote bus/7.5 V supply (bus logics) 500 V AC 50 Hz
1 min.
7.5 V supply (bus logics)/24 V supply (I/O) 500 V AC 50 Hz 1 min.
24 V supply (I/O) / functional earth ground 500 V AC 50 Hz 1 min.
Protection class III, IEC 61140, EN 61140, VDE 0140-1
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27240409

eCl@ss 4.1 27240409
eCl@ss 5.0 27250604
eCl@ss 5.1 27242904
eCl@ss 6.0 27242604
eCl@ss 7.0 27242604
eCl@ss 8.0 27242604
05/26/2016 Page 3 / 5

Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 9.0 27242604
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC001433

ETIM 3.0 EC001617
ETIM 4.0 EC001599
ETIM 5.0 EC001599
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 43172015

UNSPSC 7.0901 43201404
UNSPSC 11 43172015
UNSPSC 12.01 43201404
UNSPSC 13.2 43201404
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / Functional Safety / PROFIsafe / cULus Listed
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Listed
cUL Listed
05/26/2016 Page 4 / 5

Approvals
Functional Safety
PROFIsafe
cULus Listed
Phoenix Contact 2016 © - all rights reserved

http://www.phoenixcontact.com
05/26/2016 Page 5 / 5
https://www.phoenixcontact.com/in/products/2700606
Safety module - IB IL 24 LPSDO 8 V2-PAC - 2700606

Safety-related digital output module, IP20 protection, for the SafetyBridge system. The module has four safe
digital outputs with two-channel occupancy or 8 safe digital outputs with single-channel occupancy
Product Description
The safety module is an output module from the Inline product range, designed for use in a SafetyBridge technology system. The safety module
®
can be used as part of an Inline station at any point within an INTERBUS, DeviceNet™, CANopen , EtherNet/IP™, Sercos, Modbus, PROFINET
or PROFIBUS system. The transmission speed of the safety module can be set to 500 kbaud or 2 Mbaud using a switch. One transmission speed
must be used consistently within a station. The module has four safe digital outputs for two-channel assignment or eight safe digital outputs for
single-channel assignment. Depending on the installation and parameterization, in the SafetyBridge system the safety module can achieve the
following safety integrity:
- Up to SIL 3 according to standard EN 61508
- Up to SIL CL 3 according to standard EN 62061
- Up to Cat. 4/PL e according to standard EN ISO 13849-1
Product Features
■ Generation and monitoring of the SafetyBridge protocol
■ Processing of the parameterized safety logic
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
GTIN

Technical data
Note
area
Dimensions
Width 48.8 mm
Height 119.8 mm
Depth 71.5 mm
Note on dimensions Housing dimensions
Ambient conditions
05/23/2016 Page 1 / 7

Technical data
Ambient conditions
Permissible humidity (operation)
Permissible humidity (storage/transport)
Air pressure (operation) 80 kPa ... 108 kPa (up to 2000 m above sea level)
Air pressure (storage/transport) 66 kPa ... 108 kPa (up to 3500 m above sea level)
Interfaces
Fieldbus system INTERBUS
Designation Inline local bus
Transmission speed 500 kBit/s / 2MBit/s (can be switched)
Digital outputs
Output name Digital outputs
Connection method Spring-cage connection
2, 3, 4-wire
Number of outputs 4 (with two-channel assignment)
8
Protective circuit Overload protection, short-circuit protection of outputs
Output voltage 24 V DC (US - 1 V)
Nominal output voltage 24 V DC
Output current max. 6 A (Total current of all outputs, -25 °C ... 50 °C)
max. 4 A (Total current of all outputs, >50 °C ... 55 °C)
Maximum output current per channel 2A
Maximum output current per group 3A
Nominal load, inductive see safety data
Nominal load, lamp see safety data
Nominal load, ohmic see safety data
Power supply for module electronics

Supply voltage 24 V DC (via voltage jumper)
Communications power UL 7.5 V (via voltage jumper)
Current consumption max. 230 mA (from the local bus)
General
Net weight 353.1 g
Note on weight specifications with connectors
Short-circuit / overload of the digital outputs Error message in
Diagnostics messages
diagnostics code (bus) and display by means of the LED on the motor
05/23/2016 Page 2 / 7

Technical data
Inline potentials
Communications power UL 7.5 V DC (see safety data)
Current consumption from UL max. 230 mA (see safety data)
Main circuit supply UM 24 V DC (see safety data)
Supply voltage range UM 19.2 V DC ... 30 V DC (including all tolerances, including ripple)
Current consumption from UM typ. 30 mA (all outputs set including actuator current)
max. 6.03 A
Segment circuit supply US 24 V (see safety data)
SafetyBridge properties
Connection to I/O modules max. 5 (safe digital I/O modules)
Logic memory 24 kByte
Safety-related characteristic data

Designation IEC 61508 - High demand
Designation IEC 61508 - Low demand
Designation EN ISO 13849
Performance level (PL) max. e (two channel; dependent in parameterization and wiring)
Category max. 4 (two channel; dependent in parameterization and wiring)
Designation EN 62061
Safety Integrity Level Claim Limit (SIL CL) max. 3 (two channel; dependent in parameterization and wiring)

5 V supply, incoming remote bus/7.5 V supply (bus logics) 500 V AC 50
Test section
Hz 1 min.
5 V supply, outgoing remote bus/7.5 V supply (bus logics) 500 V AC 50
Hz 1 min.
7.5 V supply (bus logics)/24 V supply (I/O) 500 V AC 50 Hz 1 min.
24 V supply (I/O) / functional earth ground 500 V AC 50 Hz 1 min.
Protection class III, IEC 61140, EN 61140, VDE 0140-1
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27240404

eCl@ss 4.1 27240404
eCl@ss 5.0 27242204
eCl@ss 5.1 27242604
eCl@ss 6.0 27242604
eCl@ss 7.0 27242604
eCl@ss 8.0 27242604
eCl@ss 9.0 27242604
05/23/2016 Page 3 / 7

Classifications
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC001433

ETIM 3.0 EC001599
ETIM 4.0 EC001599
ETIM 5.0 EC001599
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 43172015

UNSPSC 7.0901 43201404
UNSPSC 11 39121311
UNSPSC 12.01 39121311
UNSPSC 13.2 39121311
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / Functional Safety / cULus Listed
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Listed
cUL Listed
Functional Safety
cULus Listed
05/23/2016 Page 4 / 7

Accessories
Accessories
Connector set
Connector set - IB IL 24 SDO 8-PLSET/CP - 2916927
Connector set (yellow), color coded, for safe SDO boards.

Documentation
User manual - UM DE IB IL 24 SDO 8-PAC - 2888835
User Manual, German, for INTERBUS Safety output modules

User manual - UM EN IB IL 24 SDO 8-PAC - 2888864
User Manual, English for PLCopen-certified INTERBUS Safety function blocks

User manual - UM QS EN IB IL 24 PSDX - S7 - 2910648
User manual, English

Filter terminal block
Filter terminal block - PSR-FTB/20/86 - 2904477
Terminal block for filtering test pulses from safe semiconductor outputs with adjustable filter values (20 µF/86 µF), as
well as for EMC filtering of 24 V signals up to an amperage of 2 A.

05/23/2016 Page 5 / 7

Accessories
Filter terminal block - PSR-FTB/1.5/11.5 - 2904476
Terminal block for filtering test pulses from safe semiconductor outputs with adjustable filter values (1.5 µF/11.5 µF),
as well as for EMC filtering of 24 V signals up to an amperage of 2 A.

Labeling panel
Labeling field - IB IL FIELD 2 - 2727501
Labeling field, width: 12.2 mm

Labeling field - IB IL FIELD 8 - 2727515
Labeling field, width: 48.8 mm

Parameterization memory
Program / configuration memory - SD FLASH 2GB EASY SAFE BASIC - 2403297
Program and configuration memory, plug-in, 2 GB, with license key and application program for easy web-based
configuration and startup of a SafetyBridge solution.

Program / configuration memory - SD FLASH 2GB EASY SAFE PRO - 2403298
Program and configuration memory, plug-in, 2 GB, with license key and application program for easy web-based
configuration and startup of a SafetyBridge solution including communication via Modbus/TCP, PROFINET, and e-
mail.

Terminal marking
05/23/2016 Page 6 / 7

Accessories
Insert strip - ESL 62X10 - 0809492
Insert strip, Sheet, white, unlabeled, can be labeled with: Office printing systems, Plotter: Laser printer, Mounting
type: Insert, Lettering field: 62 x 10 mm

Insert strip - ESL 62X46 - 0809502
Insert strip, Sheet, white, unlabeled, can be labeled with: Office printing systems, Plotter: Laser printer, Mounting
type: Insert, Lettering field: 62 x 46 mm


05/23/2016 Page 7 / 7
Controller - ILC 131 ETH - 2700973

The Inline controller offers the option of communicating via PROFINET and Modbus/TCP. Programming is carried
out using PC Worx Express or PC Worx (IEC 61131-3).
Product Description
The ILC 131 ETH modular small-scale controller for the Inline I/O system is at the heart of Easy Automation. The ILC 1X1 series is characterized by its
support for the Modbus/TCP and PROFINET Ethernet-based protocols. A new feature is the support for an optional SD card.
Product Features
■ PROFINET-Device
■ Modbus/TCP-Client
■ Numerous protocols supported such as: http, https, FTP, SNTP, SNMP, SMTP, SQL, MySQL, DCP, etc.
■ Free engineering with PC Worx Express (IEC 61131-3)
■ Program memory and mass storage (192 kB/192 kB)
■ Modbus/TCP server
■ HTML 5
■ Integrated web server for visualization with WebVisit/atvise®
■ Complete INTERBUS master (2048 I/O points)
■ SD card up to 2 GB as optional plug-in parameterization memory
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Technical data
Note
05/26/2016 Page 1 / 5

Technical data
Note
area
Dimensions
Width 80 mm
Height 119.8 mm
Depth 71.5 mm
Ambient conditions
Permissible humidity (operation) 10 % ... 95 % (according to DIN EN 61131-2)
Permissible humidity (storage/transport) 10 % ... 95 % (according to DIN EN 61131-2)
Air pressure (operation) 70 kPa ... 106 kPa (up to 3000 m above mean sea level)
Air pressure (storage/transport) 70 kPa ... 106 kPa (up to 3000 m above mean sea level)
Shock 25g, Criterion 1, according to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration (operation) 5g
Control system
Programming tool PC WORX / PC WORX EXPRESS
Diagnostics tool DIAG+
Configuration tool Config+ Version 1.01 or later
Mechanical design
Weight 285 g
Diagnostics display No
Controller redundancy No
Data interfaces
Interface INTERBUS local bus (master)
Transmission speed 500 kBaud / 2 MBaud (can be switched)
Interface Parameterization/operation/diagnostics
Connection method RS-232-C, 6-pos. MINI-DIN socket (PS/2), Ethernet 10/100 (RJ45)
Transmission speed max. 115,2 kBit/s
Interface Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Connection method RJ45 socket
Transmission speed 10/100 MBit/s
PROFINET
05/26/2016 Page 2 / 5

Technical data
PROFINET
Device function PROFINET device
Power supply
Typical current consumption 210 mA
Max. current consumption 870 mA (370 mA communications power + 500 mA analog voltage supply)
Supply voltage 24 V DC
Residual ripple ±5%
Power dissipation max. 5 W
Fieldbus function
Amount of process data max. 2048 Bit (INTERBUS)
max. 8192 Bit (internal Modbus /TCP client)
Number of supported devices max. 63
Number of local bus devices that can be connected max. 63 (observe current consumption)
Number of devices with parameter channel max. 8
Direct I/Os
Input name Digital inputs
Number of inputs 8
Connection method Inline potential distributor
Description of the input EN 61131-2 type 1 NPN/PNP
Output name Digital outputs
Number of outputs 4
Connection method 2, 3, 4-wire
Maximum output current per channel 500 mA
Without analog input yes
Without analog output yes
Without pulse direction output yes
Without counter input yes
IEC 61131 runtime system

Programming tool PC WORX / PC WORX EXPRESS
Program memory 192 kByte (16 K instructions (IL))
Mass storage 192 kByte
Retentive mass storage 8 kByte (NVRAM)
Number of control tasks 8
Realtime clock Yes
General data
05/26/2016 Page 3 / 5

Technical data
General data
Processor Altera Nios II 64 MHz

Shock 25g, Criterion 1, according to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration (storage/transport) 5g
Vibration (operation) 5g
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27250203

eCl@ss 4.1 27240601
eCl@ss 5.0 27242215
eCl@ss 5.1 27242207
eCl@ss 6.0 27242207
eCl@ss 7.0 27242207
eCl@ss 8.0 27242207
eCl@ss 9.0 27242207
ETIM
ETIM 3.0 EC000236

ETIM 4.0 EC000236
ETIM 5.0 EC000236
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 43172015

UNSPSC 7.0901 43201404
UNSPSC 11 43172018
UNSPSC 12.01 43201404
UNSPSC 13.2 43201404
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / RINA / BSH / LR / BV / ABS / EAC / EAC / cULus Listed
05/26/2016 Page 4 / 5

Approvals
Ex Approvals
ATEX / UL Listed / cUL Listed / cULus Listed
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Listed
cUL Listed
RINA
BSH
LR
BV
ABS
EAC
EAC
cULus Listed

05/26/2016 Page 5 / 5
Program / configuration memory - SD FLASH 2GB - 2988162

Program and configuration memory
Similar figure
Product Description
Program and configuration memory to save the application programs and other files in the file system of the PLC.
Alternatively, a program and configuration memory with integrated license is available to disconnect various function blocks.
Product Features
■ Program and configuration memory, plug-in, 2 Gbytes
■ For storing application programs and other files in the file system of the PLC
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Country of origin Taiwan
Technical data
Product type Parameterization memory
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27240403

eCl@ss 4.1 27240403
eCl@ss 5.0 27242212
eCl@ss 5.1 27242212
eCl@ss 6.0 19150702
eCl@ss 7.0 19150702
eCl@ss 8.0 27242212
05/26/2016 Page 1 / 2
Program / configuration memory - SD FLASH 2GB - 2988162

Classifications
ETIM
ETIM 3.0 EC000192

ETIM 4.0 EC000192
ETIM 5.0 EC000192
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 43172015

UNSPSC 7.0901 43201404
UNSPSC 11 39121311
UNSPSC 12.01 32101601
UNSPSC 13.2 32101601

05/26/2016 Page 2 / 2
4.
POWER SUPPLY
Energy storage - MINI-BAT/24DC/1.3AH - 2866417
Energy storage device, lead AGM, VRLA technology, 24 V DC, 1.3 Ah.
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Country of origin China
Technical data
Dimensions
Width 52 mm
Height 130 mm
Depth 110 mm
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature (operation) 0 °C ... 40 °C
Ambient temperature (storage/transport) 0 °C ... 40 °C
Max. permissible relative humidity (operation) 95 %
Input data
Nominal input voltage 24 V DC
Buffer period 20 min. (2 A)
5 min. (5 A)
Output data
Output current Imax 15 A
06/15/2016 Page 1 / 4
Technical data
Output data
Connection in parallel 5
Connection in series No
Output fuse 1x 15 A
General
IQ technology No
Used batteries must not be thrown away with household waste, they
should instead be disposed of in accordance with applicable national
Disposal
regulations. They can also be returned to Phoenix Contact or the
manufacturer.
Net weight 1.7 kg
Protection class III

UL ANSI/ISA-12.12.01 Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D (Hazardous
UL approvals
Location)
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27040603

eCl@ss 4.1 27040603
eCl@ss 5.0 27040603
eCl@ss 5.1 27040603
eCl@ss 6.0 27040603
eCl@ss 7.0 27049201
eCl@ss 8.0 27050403
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000382

ETIM 3.0 EC000382
ETIM 4.0 EC000357
ETIM 5.0 EC000357
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211510

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121011
UNSPSC 11 39121011
UNSPSC 12.01 39121011
UNSPSC 13.2 39121011
06/15/2016 Page 2 / 4
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
EAC / EAC
Ex Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / cULus Listed
Approvals submitted
Approval details
EAC
EAC
Accessories
Accessories
Assembly adapter
Assembly adapters - UWA 182/52 - 2938235
Universal wall adapter

Assembly adapters - QUINT-PS-ADAPTERS7/1 - 2938196
Assembly adapter for QUINT-PS... power supply on S7-300 rail

Fuse
06/15/2016 Page 3 / 4
Accessories
Fuse - SI FORM C 15 A DIN 72581 - 0913676
Flat-type plug-in fuse, type C, color code: light blue, nominal current: 15 A

Fuse - FUSE 15A/32V FKS ATO - 2908361
Fuse, nominal current: 15 A, length: 19 mm, width: 5 mm, height: 13 mm

Mounting rail adapter
Electronic housing - UTA 107 - 2853983
Universal DIN rail adapter

Drawings
Block diagram

06/15/2016 Page 4 / 4
Power supply unit - MINI-PS-100-240AC/24DC/1.3 - 2866446

Primary-switched MINI POWER power supply for DIN rail mounting, input: 1-phase, output: 24 V DC/1.3 A
Product Description
MINI POWER power supplies for MCR technology
In measurement and control technology (MCR), modular electronics housing has become the industry standard. MINI POWER is the power supply unit
to go with it. The devices are flexible, thanks to special voltages and special versions.
Product Features
■ Easy-maintenance connection technology thanks to keyed COMBICON connectors
■ Remote monitoring of output voltage via switching output
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Custom tariff number 85044030
Technical data
Dimensions
Width 22.5 mm
Height 99 mm
Depth 107 mm
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature (operation) -25 °C ... 70 °C (> 60 °C Derating: 2,5 %/K)
Max. permissible relative humidity (operation) ≤ 95 % (at 25 °C, non-condensing)
05/08/2016 Page 1 / 7

Technical data
Ambient conditions
Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2:2005
Input data
Nominal input voltage range 100 V AC ... 240 V AC
Input voltage range 85 V AC ... 264 V AC
90 V DC ... 350 V DC
AC frequency range 45 Hz ... 65 Hz
Frequency range DC 0 Hz
Current consumption 0.55 A (100 V AC)
0.23 A (240 V AC)
Inrush surge current < 15 A (< 0.6 A s)
2
Power failure bypass > 20 ms (120 V AC)

> 110 ms (230 V AC)
Input fuse 1.25 A (slow-blow, internal)
Choice of suitable circuit breakers 6 A ... 16 A (Characteristics B, C, D, K)
Type of protection Transient surge protection
Protective circuit/component Varistor
Output data
Nominal output voltage 24 V DC ±1 %
Setting range of the output voltage (USet) 22.5 V DC ... 28.5 V DC (> 24 V DC, constant capacity restricted)
Nominal output current (IN) 1.3 A (-25 °C ... 60 °C)
POWER BOOST (IBoost) 1.6 A (-25°C ... 40°C permanent )
Derating 60 °C ... 70 °C (2.5%/K)
Connection in parallel Yes, for redundancy and increased capacity
Connection in series Yes
Starting delay with capacitive load Unrestricted
Max. capacitive load Unlimited
Active current limitation Approx. 5 A (for short-circuit)
Control deviation < 1 % (change in load, static 10 % ... 90 %)
< 3 % (change in load, dynamic 10 % ... 90 %)
< 0.1 % (change in input voltage ±10 %)
Residual ripple < 20 mVPP (20 MHz)
Output power 31.2 W
Typical response time <1s
Peak switching voltages nominal load < 50 mVPP (20 MHz)
Maximum power dissipation in no-load condition 1.4 W
Power loss nominal load max. 4.5 W
05/08/2016 Page 2 / 7

Technical data
General
Net weight 0.2 kg
Operating voltage display Green LED
Efficiency > 85 % (for 230 V AC and nominal values)
Insulation voltage input/output 4 kV (type test)
3 kV (Routine test)
Protection class II (in closed control cabinet)
MTBF (IEC 61709, SN 29500) > 1104000 h (40°C)
Mounting position horizontal DIN rail NS 35, EN 60715
Assembly instructions Can be aligned: Horizontally 0 mm, vertically 50 mm
Connection data, input

Connection method Pluggable screw connection
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.2 mm²
Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG min. 24
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Stripping length 7 mm
Screw thread M3
Connection data, output

Screw thread M3
Connection data for signaling

05/08/2016 Page 3 / 7

Technical data
Screw thread M3

Electromagnetic compatibility Conformance with EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
Shock 30g in each direction, according to IEC 60068-2-27
Connection in acc. with standard CUL
Standards/regulations EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-6
Standard – Electrical equipment of machines EN 60204-1
Standard - Electrical safety EN 60950-1/VDE 0805 (SELV)
Standard – Electronic equipment for use in electrical power installations
EN 50178/VDE 0160 (PELV)
and their assembly into electrical power installations
Standard – Safety extra-low voltage EN 60950-1 (SELV)
EN 60204 (PELV)
Standard - Safe isolation DIN VDE 0100-410
Standard – Limitation of mains harmonic currents EN 61000-3-2
UL approvals UL/C-UL listed UL 508
UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60950
Location)
NEC Class 2 as per UL 1310
Vibration (operation) < 15 Hz, amplitude ±2.5 mm (according to IEC 60068-2-6)
Low Voltage Directive Conformance with LV directive 2006/95/EC
Rail applications EN 50121-4
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27040702

eCl@ss 4.1 27040702
eCl@ss 5.0 27049002
eCl@ss 5.1 27049002
eCl@ss 6.0 27049002
eCl@ss 7.0 27049002
eCl@ss 8.0 27049002
eCl@ss 9.0 27040701
05/08/2016 Page 4 / 7

Classifications
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC001039

ETIM 3.0 EC001039
ETIM 4.0 EC000599
ETIM 5.0 EC002540
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211502

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121004
UNSPSC 11 39121004
UNSPSC 12.01 39121004
UNSPSC 13.2 39121004
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / UL Recognized / cUL Recognized / EAC / EAC / UL Listed / cUL Listed / cULus Recognized / cULus Listed
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Listed
cUL Listed
05/08/2016 Page 5 / 7

Approvals
UL Recognized
cUL Recognized
EAC
EAC
UL Listed
cUL Listed
cULus Recognized
cULus Listed
Drawings
Block diagram Dimensional drawing

107
L (+)
NC
NC DC OK
N (-)
99
05/08/2016 Page 6 / 7

05/08/2016 Page 7 / 7
Power supply unit - QUINT-PS/3AC/24DC/10 - 2866705

Primary-switched QUINT POWER power supply for DIN rail mounting with SFB (Selective Fuse Breaking)
Technology, input: 3-phase, output: 24 V DC/10 A
Product Description
QUINT POWER power supplies with maximum functionality
QUINT POWER circuit breakers magnetically and therefore quickly trip at six times the nominal current, for selective and therefore cost-effective system
protection. The high level of system availability is additionally ensured, thanks to preventive function monitoring, as it reports critical operating states
before errors occur.
Reliable starting of heavy loads takes place via the static power reserve POWER BOOST. Thanks to the adjustable voltage, all ranges between 5 V
DC ... 56 V DC are covered.
Product Features
■ High level of system availability even in the event of permanent phase failure
■ Reliable starting of difficult loads
■ Preventive function monitoring
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Country of origin Thailand
Technical data
Dimensions
Width 60 mm
Height 130 mm
Depth 125 mm
Width with alternative assembly 122 mm
Height with alternative assembly 130 mm
Depth with alternative assembly 63 mm
05/26/2016 Page 1 / 8

Technical data
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature (operation) -25 °C ... 70 °C (> 60 °C Derating: 2,5 %/K)
Max. permissible relative humidity (operation) ≤ 95 % (at 25 °C, non-condensing)
Maximum altitude 4500 m
Input data
Nominal input voltage range 3x 400 V AC ... 500 V AC
Input voltage range 3x 320 V AC ... 575 V AC
2x 360 V AC ... 575 V AC
450 V DC ... 800 V DC
AC frequency range 45 Hz ... 65 Hz
Frequency range DC 0 Hz
Discharge current to PE < 3.5 mA
Current consumption 3x 1.2 A (400 V AC)
3x 1 A (500 V AC)
0.4 A (600 V DC)
Inrush surge current < 15 A (typical)
Power failure bypass > 30 ms (400 V AC)
> 46 ms (500 V AC)
Choice of suitable circuit breakers 6 A ... 16 A (AC: Characteristics B, C, D, K)
Type of protection Transient surge protection
Protective circuit/component Varistor, gas-filled surge arrester
Output data
Nominal output voltage 24 V DC ±1 %
Setting range of the output voltage (USet) 18 V DC ... 29.5 V DC (> 24 V DC, constant capacity restricted)
Nominal output current (IN) 10 A (-25°C ... 60°C, UOUT = 24 V DC)
POWER BOOST (IBoost) 15 A (-25°C ... 40°C permanent, UOUT = 24 V DC )
Selective Fuse Breaking (ISFB) 60 A (12 ms)
Derating 60 °C ... 70 °C (2.5%/K)
Connection in parallel Yes, for redundancy and increased capacity
Connection in series Yes
< 3 % (change in load, dynamic 10 % ... 90 %)
< 0.1 % (change in input voltage ±10 %)
Residual ripple < 20 mVPP (with nominal values)
05/26/2016 Page 2 / 8

Technical data
Output data
Output power 240 W
Typical response time < 0.45 s
Peak switching voltages nominal load < 20 mVPP (at nominal values, 20 MHz)
Maximum power dissipation in no-load condition 7W
Power loss nominal load max. 19 W
General
Net weight 1.1 kg
Operating voltage display Green LED
Efficiency > 93 % (at 400 V AC and nominal values)
Insulation voltage input/output 4 kV AC (type test)
2 kV AC (routine test)
Protection class I
MTBF (IEC 61709, SN 29500) > 1100000 h (25 °C)
> 630000 h (40°C)
> 280000 s (60°C)
Alignable: 5 mm horizontally, 15 mm next to active components, 50 mm
Assembly instructions
vertically

Screw thread M3

05/26/2016 Page 3 / 8

Technical data
Screw thread M3

Screw thread M3

Shock 30g in each direction, according to IEC 60068-2-27
Connection in acc. with standard CSA
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
Standard – Electrical equipment of machines EN 60204-1
Standard - Electrical safety IEC 60950-1/VDE 0805 (SELV)
EN 50178/VDE 0160 (PELV)
Standard – Safety extra-low voltage IEC 60950-1 (SELV) and EN 60204-1 (PELV)
Standard – Protection against shock currents, basic requirements for
EN 50178
protective separation in electrical equipment
Standard - Equipment safety GS (tested safety)
Standard - Approval for medical use IEC 60601-1, 2 x MOOP
Shipbuilding approval Germanischer Lloyd (EMC 1), ABS, LR, RINA, NK, DNV, BV
UL approvals UL Listed UL 508
UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60950-1 (3-wire + PE, star net)
Location)
05/26/2016 Page 4 / 8

Technical data
Approval - requirement of the semiconductor industry with regard to mains
SEMI F47-0706 Compliance Certificate
voltage dips
Information technology equipment - safety (CB scheme) CB Scheme
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27040702

eCl@ss 4.1 27040702
eCl@ss 5.0 27049002
eCl@ss 5.1 27049002
eCl@ss 6.0 27049002
eCl@ss 7.0 27049002
eCl@ss 8.0 27049002
eCl@ss 9.0 27040701
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC001039

ETIM 3.0 EC001039
ETIM 4.0 EC000599
ETIM 5.0 EC002540
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211502

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121004
UNSPSC 11 39121004
UNSPSC 12.01 39121004
UNSPSC 13.2 39121004
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
CSA / UL Recognized / UL Listed / cUL Recognized / LR / GL / BV / DNV / ABS / NK / RINA / BSH / IECEE CB Scheme / SEMI F47 / IECEE CB
Scheme / EAC / EAC / GL / BV / ABS / NK / RINA / BSH / SEMI F47 / cULus Recognized
05/26/2016 Page 5 / 8

Approvals
Ex Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / cUL Listed / cULus Listed
Approvals submitted
Approval details
CSA
UL Recognized
UL Listed
cUL Recognized
LR
GL
BV
DNV
ABS
NK
RINA
05/26/2016 Page 6 / 8

Approvals
BSH
IECEE CB Scheme
SEMI F47
IECEE CB Scheme
EAC
EAC
GL
BV
ABS
NK
RINA
BSH
SEMI F47
cULus Recognized
Drawings
05/26/2016 Page 7 / 8

Block diagram
L1 (+)
L2
L3 (-)
DC OK
I < IN
13
14

05/26/2016 Page 8 / 8
Uninterruptible power supply - TRIO-UPS/1AC/24DC/ 5 - 2866611

Uninterruptible power supply with integrated power supply unit, 5A, in combination with MINI-BAT/24/DC/1.3 AH,
QUINT-BAT/24DC 3,4AH, 7,2AH or 12 AH
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Technical data
Dimensions
Width 60 mm
Height 130 mm
Depth 118 mm
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature (operation) -25 °C ... 70 °C (> 55° C derating : 2.5%/K)
Max. permissible relative humidity (operation) 95 % (at 25 °C, non-condensing)
Input data
Nominal input voltage range 100 V AC ... 240 V AC
AC input voltage range 85 V AC ... 264 V AC (Derating < 90 V AC: 2.5%V)
Input voltage range DC 100 V DC ... 350 V DC (UL508: 100 ... 250 V)
adjustable: 0.5 min; 1 min; 2 min; 3 min; 5 min; 10 min; 15 min; 20 min;
Buffer time
PC-Mode
Current consumption 1.1 A (230 V AC, maximum)
06/15/2016 Page 1 / 11

Technical data
Input data
1.8 A (120 V AC, maximum)
Inrush current limiting/I²t < 1.3 A s
2
Power failure bypass see diagram

Typical response time 150 ms (230 V AC)
200 ms (120 V AC)
Power factor (cos phi) approx. 0.5
Protective circuit Transient surge protection Varistor
Input fuse, integrated 6.3 A (slow-blow, internal)
Output data
22.5 V DC ... 29.5 V DC (Network operation; in the buffer mode, dependent
Setting range of the output voltage (USet)
on the battery voltage of 27.9 V DC ... 19.2 V DC)
Nominal output current (IN) 5 A (-25°C ... 55°C)
Derating 55 °C ... 70 °C (2.5%/K)
Output current limit max. 6 A (Mains operation)
Efficiency > 88 % (230 V AC, network operation)
> 86 % (120 V AC, network operation)
> 86 % (Battery operation)
Residual ripple < 10 mVPP
Peak switching voltages nominal load < 25 mVPP
Connection in parallel Yes, 2
Surge protection against internal surge voltages Yes, < 35 V DC
Feedback resistance 35 V DC
General
IQ technology No
Net weight 1.1 kg
Memory medium External, battery 1.3 Ah / 3.4 Ah / 7.2 Ah / 12 Ah
Operating mode
Insulation voltage input/output 4 kV (type test)
2 kV (Routine test)
Protection class I
> 596000 h (40°C)
Assembly instructions Can be aligned: Horizontally 0 mm, vertically 50 mm

06/15/2016 Page 2 / 11

Technical data
Connection method Screw connection
Screw thread M3

Screw thread M3

Screw thread M3
Charging process
Charge characteristic curve I/U characteristic curve
Battery presence check/time interval 60 s
Charge current 0.2 A ... 1.5 A (Default 1.0 A)
End-of-charge voltage 25 V DC ... 30 V DC (Default 27.6 V DC)
Temperature compensation 0 mV/K ... 200 mV/K (42 mV/K by default)
Quality check of battery 4 h ... 200 h (Default 12 h)
Deep discharge protection 18 V DC ... 21 V DC (Default 19.2 V DC)
Alarm signaling threshold 18 V DC ... 30 V DC (Default 20.4 V DC)
06/15/2016 Page 3 / 11

Technical data
Shock 18 ms, 30g, in each space direction (according to IEC 60068-2-27)
Noise emission EN 55011 (EN 55022)
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-11
Standard - Electrical safety EN 60950-1/VDE 0805 (SELV)
EN 50178/VDE 0160 (PELV)
Standard – Safety extra-low voltage EN 60950-1 (SELV)
EN 60204 (PELV)
Standard – Protection against shock currents, basic requirements for
EN 50178
protective separation in electrical equipment
Shipbuilding approval Germanischer Lloyd (EMC 1)
UL approvals UL/C-UL listed UL 508
UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60950
15 Hz ... 150 Hz, 2.3g, 90 min.
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27040603

eCl@ss 4.1 27040603
eCl@ss 5.0 27040603
eCl@ss 5.1 27040603
eCl@ss 6.0 27040603
eCl@ss 7.0 27040603
eCl@ss 8.0 27040603
06/15/2016 Page 4 / 11

Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 9.0 27040705
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000382

ETIM 3.0 EC000382
ETIM 4.0 EC000382
ETIM 5.0 EC000382
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211510

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121011
UNSPSC 11 39121011
UNSPSC 12.01 39121011
UNSPSC 13.2 39121011
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Recognized / UL Listed / cUL Recognized / cUL Listed / EAC / EAC / cULus Recognized / cULus Listed
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Recognized
UL Listed
06/15/2016 Page 5 / 11

Approvals
cUL Recognized
cUL Listed
EAC
EAC
cULus Recognized
cULus Listed
Accessories
Accessories
Assembly adapter
Assembly adapters - UWA 182/52 - 2938235
Universal wall adapter

Assembly adapters - QUINT-PS-ADAPTERS7/2 - 2938206
Assembly adapter for QUINT POWER 10A on S7-300 rail

06/15/2016 Page 6 / 11

Accessories
Battery unit
Energy storage device, lead AGM, VRLA technology, 24 V DC, 1.3 Ah.

Energy storage - QUINT-BAT/24DC/ 3.4AH - 2866349
Energy storage device, lead AGM, VRLA technology, 24 V DC, 3.4 Ah. Connection via pin cable lug, 14 mm.

Energy storage - QUINT-BAT/24DC/ 7.2AH - 2866352
Energy storage device, lead AGM, VRLA technology, 24 V DC, 7.2 Ah. Connection via pin cable lug, 14 mm.

Energy storage - QUINT-BAT/24DC/12AH - 2866365
Energy storage device, lead AGM, VRLA technology, 24 V DC, 12 Ah. Connection via pin cable lug, 14 mm.

Energy storage - UPS-BAT/VRLA/24DC/1.3AH - 2320296
Energy storage device, lead AGM, VRLA technology, 24 V DC, 1.3 Ah, tool-free battery replacement, automatic
detection, and communication with QUINT UPS-IQ

06/15/2016 Page 7 / 11

Accessories


Energy storage - UPS-BAT/VRLA/24DC/12AH - 2320322
Energy storage device, lead AGM, VRLA technology, 24 V DC, 12 Ah, tool-free battery replacement, automatic detection,
and communication with QUINT UPS-IQ

Fuse
Flat-type plug-in fuse, type C, color code: light blue, nominal current: 15 A

Flat-type plug-in fuse, type C, color code: white, nominal current: 25 A

06/15/2016 Page 8 / 11

Accessories
Memory block
Memory block - IFS-CONFSTICK - 2986122
Multi-functional memory block for the INTERFACE systemf for easy storage and backup of the configuration.

Mounting rail adapter
Electronic housing - UTA 107 - 2853983
Universal DIN rail adapter

Programming adapter
Programming adapter - IFS-USB-PROG-ADAPTER - 2811271
Programming adapter with USB interface, for programming with software. The USB driver is included in the software
solutions for the products to be programmed, such as measuring transducers or motor managers.

Drawings
Block diagram Diagram

J IFS Config.-Port 30
t...[min]
Confirm
4
Time [h]
10
2x 12V
Battery R1 Remote
On/Off
R2
Alarm
1
Bat.-Mode 60 3
Bat.-Charge
1
Time [min]
L (+) 2
Output DC 10
PS
N (-) 24 V 5 A 1 = 1,3Ah
2 = 3,4Ah
3 = 7,2Ah
4 = 12Ah
1
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5
Current [A]
06/15/2016 Page 9 / 11

Diagram
06/15/2016 Page 10 / 11

Diagram

06/15/2016 Page 11 / 11
Data sheet 6ES7307-1EA01-0AA0
POWER SUPPLY PS307 24 V/5 A
SIMATIC S7-300 STABILIZED POWER SUPPLY PS307 INPUT:
120/230 V AC OUTPUT: DC 24 V DC/5 A
Input
Input 1-phase AC
Supply voltage
● 1 at AC Rated value 120 V
● 2 at AC Rated value 230 V
● Note Automatic range selection
Input voltage
● 1 at AC 85 ... 132 V
● 2 at AC 170 ... 264 V
Wide-range input No
Overvoltage resistance 2.3 × Vin rated, 1.3 ms
Mains buffering at Iout rated, min. 20 ms; at Vin = 93/187 V
Rated line frequency 1 50 Hz
Rated line frequency 2 60 Hz
Rated line range 47 ... 63 Hz
Input current
● at rated input voltage 120 V 2.3 A
● at rated input voltage 230 V 1.2 A
Switch-on current limiting (+25 °C), max. 20 A
6ES7307-1EA01-0AA0 Changes preserved

Page 1/4 22.04.2016 © Copyright Siemens AG
Duration of inrush current limiting at 25 °C
● maximum 3 ms
I²t, max. 1.2 A²·s
Built-in incoming fuse T 3,15 A/250 V (not accessible)
Protection in the mains power input (IEC 898) Recommended miniature circuit breaker: from 6 A characteristic C
Output
Output Controlled, isolated DC voltage
Rated voltage Vout DC 24 V
Total tolerance, static ± 3 %
Static mains compensation, approx. 0.1 %
Static load balancing, approx. 0.5 %
Residual ripple peak-peak, max. 50 mV
Residual ripple peak-peak, typ. 10 mV
Spikes peak-peak, max. (bandwidth: 20 MHz) 150 mV
Spikes peak-peak, typ. (bandwidth: 20 MHz) 20 mV
Product function Output voltage adjustable No
Output voltage setting -
Status display Green LED for 24 V OK
On/off behavior No overshoot of Vout (soft start)
Startup delay, max. 2 s
Voltage rise, typ. 10 ms
Rated current value Iout rated 5 A
Current range 0 ... 5 A
Supplied active power typical 120 W
Short-term overload current
● on short-circuiting during the start-up typical 20 A
● at short-circuit during operation typical 20 A
Duration of overloading capability for excess current
● on short-circuiting during the start-up 100 ms
● at short-circuit during operation 100 ms
Parallel switching for enhanced performance Yes
Efficiency
Efficiency at Vout rated, Iout rated, approx. 87 %
Power loss at Vout rated, Iout rated, approx. 18 W
Closed-loop control
Dynamic mains compensation (Vin rated ±15 %), 0.1 %
max.
Dynamic load smoothing (Iout: 50/100/50 %), Uout ± 1 %
typ.
Load step setting time 50 to 100%, typ. 0.3 ms
Load step setting time 100 to 50%, typ. 0.3 ms
Protection and monitoring

Output overvoltage protection Additional control loop, shutdown at < 28.8 V, automatic restart
Current limitation 5.5 ... 6.5 A
Property of the output Short-circuit proof Yes
Short-circuit protection Electronic shutdown, automatic restart
Enduring short circuit current RMS value
● maximum 7 A
Safety
Primary/secondary isolation Yes
Galvanic isolation Safety extra-low output voltage Uout acc. to EN 60950-1 and EN
50178
Protection class Class I
Leakage current
● maximum 3.5 mA
● typical 0.5 mA
CE mark Yes
UL/cUL (CSA) approval cULus-Listed (UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 142), File E143289
Explosion protection ATEX (EX) II 3G Ex nA II T4; cULus (ISA 12.12.01, CSA C22.2
No.213) Class I, Div. 2, Group ABCD, T4, File E330455
FM approval Class I, Div. 2, Group ABCD, T4
CB approval No
Marine approval In S7-300 system
Degree of protection (EN 60529) IP20
EMC
Emitted interference EN 55022 Class B
Supply harmonics limitation EN 61000-3-2
Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2
Operating data
Ambient temperature
● during operation 0 ... 60 °C
— Note with natural convection
● during transport -40 ... +85 °C
● during storage -40 ... +85 °C
Humidity class according to EN 60721 Climate class 3K3, no condensation
Mechanics
Connection technology screw-type terminals
Connections
● Supply input L, N, PE: 1 screw terminal each for 0.5 ... 2.5 mm² single-
core/finely stranded
● Output L+, M: 3 screw terminals each for 0.5 ... 2.5 mm²
● Auxiliary -
Width of the enclosure 60 mm
Height of the enclosure 125 mm

Depth of the enclosure 120 mm
Weight, approx. 0.6 kg
Product feature of the enclosure housing for side-by- Yes
side mounting
Installation Can be mounted onto S7 rail
Mechanical accessories Mounting adapter for standard mounting rail (6EP1971-1BA00)
MTBF at 40 °C 2 480 589 h
Other information Specifications at rated input voltage and ambient temperature +25
°C (unless otherwise specified)

Isolating transformers
Isolating transformer, UL-approved
Type SUL
Open single-phase isolating-/control-transformer
with separate insulated windings and protected
against dust, humidity and corrosion through
complete impregnation in heat tempered varnish.
UL-approved and produced according to DNV,
Lloyds register of shipping and Bureau Veritas
regulations which include 45°C ambient tempe-
rature. Compact design, fixed installation, easy
mounting in cabinets or switchboards.
Applications:
Industrial isolating-/control-transformer suitable
for installation which require protective separa-
tion between input and output. SUL84A, SUL84B,
SUL96C & SUL96C can be mounted on 35mm
DIN-rail. The transformer must be protected
against overload and short circuit in the installation.
Dimensions (mm) Wt
Type
A B C D E F G (Kg)
SUL84A 86 84 97 60 64 65 4,5x8 1,4
SUL84B 86 84 97 74 64 65 4,5x8 1,9
SUL96B 102 96 105 80 84 87 5,5x9 2,8
SUL96C 102 96 105 94 84 87 5,5x9 3,5
SUL120A 86 120 120 88 90 69 6x11 4,2
SUL120B 98 120 120 100 90 81 6x11 5,1
SUL120C 117 120 120 120 90 101 6x11 6,6
SUL150A 106 150 145 108 122 85 7x13 8,1
SUL150B 122 150 145 124 122 103 7x13 9,9
SUL150C 147 150 145 150 122 128 7x13 13,3
SUL192C 156 192 180 154 150 126 10x18 22,5
SUL192D 177 192 188 175 150 148 10x18 27,3
SUL192E 184 192 188 184 150 154 10x18 28,7
3-24 www.noratel.com
Technical specifications Voltage Current Power (VA)
Type Art. no.
■
Input voltage: 230-400±15 V Sec. (V) Sec. (A) IEC / UL
400-460±20 V 230-400±15V/2x115V
SUL84A-234230 2x115 2x0,27 63 / 63 4-065-084230
550-575±25 V
SUL84B-234230 2x115 2x0,43 100 / 100 4-065-084231
■
Frequency: 47-63 Hz SUL96B-234230 2x115 2x0,7 160 / 160 4-065-096232
SUL96C-234230 2x115 2x1,09 250 / 200 4-065-096233
■
Output voltage: 2x115 V
SUL120A-234230 2x115 2x1,39 320 / 250 4-065-120234
■
According to: EN61558, UL506, SUL120B-234230 2x115 2x1,74 400 / 320 4-065-120235
UL file no. E305755 SUL120C-234230 2x115 2x2,17 500 / 400 4-065-120236
SUL150A-234230 2x115 2x2,74 630 / 500 4-065-150237
■
Test/insulating voltage: 4,5 kV AC RMS SUL150B-234230 2x115 2x3,48 800 / 630 4-065-150238
■
Construction class: I SUL150C-234230 2x115 2x4,35 1000 / 800 4-065-150239
SUL192C-234230 2x115 2x6,96 1600 / 1000 4-065-192240
■
Insulation class: IEC - B (130°C)
SUL192D-234230 2x115 2x8,7 2000 / 1600 4-065-192241
UL - class A (105°C) SUL192E-234230 2x115 2x10,87 2500 / 2000 4-065-192242
■
Ambient temp. (ta): 45°C 400-460±20V/2x115V
SUL84A-460230 2x115 2x0,27 63 / 63 8-065-084063
■
Degree of protection: IP00
SUL84B-460230 2x115 2x0,43 100 / 100 8-065-084100
SUL96B-460230 2x115 2x0,7 160 / 160 8-065-096160
■
The SUL 234 transformer series is designed for connecting to
SUL96C-460230 2x115 2x1,09 250 / 200 8-065-096250
a wide range of primary voltages. Connect neutral conductor
(N) and phase conductor (P) according to the table: SUL120A-460230 2x115 2x1,39 320 / 250 8-065-120320
SUL120B-460230 2x115 2x1,74 400 / 320 8-065-120400
Terminal SUL120C-460230 2x115 2x2,17 500 / 400 8-065-120500
Primary
SUL150A-460230 2x115 2x2,74 630 / 500 8-065-150630
voltage +15 0 15 230 400
SUL150B-460230 2x115 2x3,48 800 / 630 8-065-150800
215 V N P
SUL150C-460230 2x115 2x4,35 1000 / 800 8-065-150000
230 V N P
SUL192C-460230 2x115 2x6,96 1600 / 1000 8-065-192160
245 V N P
SUL192D-460230 2x115 2x8,7 2000 / 1600 8-065-192200
385 V N P
SUL192E-460230 2x115 2x10,87 2500 / 2000 8-065-192250
400 V N P
500-575±25V/2x115V
415 V N P
SUL84A-500230 2x115 2x0,27 63 / 63 8-065-084230
SUL84B-500230 2x115 2x0,43 100 / 100 8-065-084231
Primary Terminal SUL96B-500230 2x115 2x0,7 160 / 160 8-065-096232
voltage +20 0 20 400 460 SUL96C-500230 2x115 2x1,09 250 / 200 8-065-096233
SUL120A-500230 2x115 2x1,39 320 / 250 8-065-120234
380 V N P
SUL120B-500230 2x115 2x1,74 400 / 320 8-065-120235
400 V N P
SUL120C-500230 2x115 2x2,17 500 / 400 8-065-120236
420 V N P
SUL150A-500230 2x115 2x2,74 630 / 500 8-065-150237
440 V N P
SUL150B-500230 2x115 2x3,48 800 / 630 8-065-150238
460 V N P
SUL150C-500230 2x115 2x4,35 1000 / 800 8-065-150239
480 V N P
115**
Primary Terminal
P
P
voltage +25 0 25 500 575

115*
P
-
475 V N P
500 V N P
0**
N
-
525 V N P
550 V N P
0*
N
N
575 V N P
115V
230V
Sec.
600 V N P
www.noratel.com 3-25
5.
MOTOR STARTERS
ACS800
Hardware Manual
ACS800-01 Drives (0.55 to 200 kW)
ACS800-U1 Drives (0.75 to 200 hp)
List of related manuals
Drive hardware manuals and guides Code (English)
ACS800-01/U1 Drives Hardware Manual (0.55 to 200 kW, 0.75 to 3AFE64382101
200 hp)
Converter module capacitor reforming instructions 3BFE64059629
ACS800-01, -U1, -04 frames R2-R6 EMC filter disconnection 3AXD00000168163
Drive firmware manuals and guides

ACS800 Standard Control Program 7.x Firmware Manual and 3AFE64527592
Adaptive Program Application Guide 3AFE64527274
ACS800 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine Drive Control 3AFE68437890
Program Supplement to Firmware Manual for ACS800 Standard
Control Program 7.x
ACS800 Master/Follower Application Guide 3AFE64590430
ACS800 Pump Control Application Program 7.2 Firmware 3AFE68478952
Manual
ACS800 Extruder Control Program Supplement 3AFE64648543
ACS800 Centrifuge Control Program Supplement 3AFE64667246
ACS800 Traverse Control Program Supplement 3AFE64618334
ACS800 Winch Control Program (+N698) Firmware Manual 3AUA0000031177
ACS800 Rod Pump Light Control Program Firmware Manual 3AUA0000005304
etc.
Option manuals and guides

ACS800-01/U1/04 + C132 Drives (0.55 to 200 kW, 0.75 to 200 3AFE68291275
hp) Marine Supplement
ACS800-01/04/11/31/104/104LC Safe torque off function 3AUA0000063373
(+Q967), Application guide
AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter User's Manual 3AFE64661442
ACS800 Vibration Damper Installation Guide 3AFE68295351
Manuals and quick guides for I/O extension modules, fieldbus
adapters, etc.
You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. See section
Document library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover. For manuals not available in the
Document library, contact your local ABB representative.
ACS800-01/U1 manuals
ACS800-01 Drives
0.55 to 200 kW
ACS800-U1 Drives
0.75 to 200 hp
Hardware Manual
3AFE64382101 Rev K
EN
EFFECTIVE: 2013-06-27
 2013 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

5
Safety instructions
What this chapter contains

This chapter contains the safety instructions which you must follow when installing,
operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or
damage may occur to the drive, motor or driven equipment. Read the safety
instructions before you work on the unit.
Use of warnings and notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual: warnings and
notes. Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or
death and/or damage to the equipment. They also tell you how to avoid the danger.
Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a
subject. The warning symbols are used as follows:
Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause

physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.
General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by

electricity, which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the
equipment.
Electrostatic discharge warning warns of electrostatic discharge which
can damage the equipment.
Hot surface warning warns of hot surfaces which can cause physical
injury.
Safety instructions
6
Installation and maintenance work

These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor.
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment:
• Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive.
• Never work on the drive, motor cable or motor when main power is applied.
After disconnecting the input power, always wait for 5 min to let the intermediate
circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive, motor or
motor cable.
Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least 1 Mohm)
that:
1. voltage between drive input phases U1, V1 and W1 and the frame is close to
0 V.
2. voltage between terminals UDC+ and UDC- and the frame is close to 0 V.
• Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the
external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may cause
dangerous voltages inside the drive even when the main power on the drive is
switched off.
• Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive or drive
modules.
• When reconnecting the motor cable, always check that the phase order is
correct.
• After maintaining or modifying a drive safety circuit or changing circuit boards

inside the module, retest the functioning of the safety circuit according to the
start-up instructions.
• Do not change the electrical installations of the drive except for the essential
control and power connections. Changes may affect the safety performance or
operation of the drive unexpectedly. All customer-made changes are on the
customer's responsibility.
Note:
• The motor cable terminals on the drive are at a dangerously high voltage when
the input power is on, regardless of whether the motor is running or not.
• The brake control terminals (UDC+, UDC-, R+ and R- terminals) carry a

dangerous DC voltage (over 500 V).
• Depending on the external wiring, dangerous voltages (115 V, 220 V or 230 V)

may be present on the terminals of relay outputs RO1 to RO3 or on the optional
AGPS board (Prevention of unexpected start-up).
Safety instructions
7
• The Prevention of unexpected start-up function (option +Q950) does not

remove the voltage from the main and auxiliary circuits.
• The Safe torque off function (option +Q967) does not remove the voltage from
the main and auxiliary circuits.
• At installation sites above 2000 m (6562 ft), the terminals of the RMIO board
and option modules attached to the board do not fulfil the Protective Extra Low
Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178.
Grounding
These instructions are intended for all who are responsible for the grounding of the
drive.
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury, death,
increased electromagnetic interference and equipment malfunction:
• Ground the drive, motor and adjoining equipment to ensure personnel safety in
all circumstances, and to reduce electromagnetic emission and interference.
• Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized as required by

safety regulations.
• In a multiple-drive installation, connect each drive separately to protective

earth (PE).
• In European CE compliant installations and in other installations where EMC

emissions must be minimized, make a 360° high frequency grounding of cable
entries in order to suppress electromagnetic disturbances. In addition, connect
the cable shields to protective earth (PE) in order to meet safety regulations.
• Do not install a drive with EMC filter option +E202 or +E200 on an ungrounded
power system or a high-resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power system.
Note:
• Power cable shields are suitable for equipment grounding conductors only
when adequately sized to meet safety regulations.
• As the normal leakage current of the drive is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA

DC (stated by EN 50178, 5.2.11.1), a fixed protective earth connection is
required. In addition, we recommend that you use:
• a cross-section of the protective earthing conductor of at least 10 mm2 Cu or
16 mm2 Al,
or
• an automatic disconnection of the supply in case of discontinuity of the
protective earthing conductor,
or
• a second protective earthing conductor of the same cross-sectional area as
the original protective earthing conductor.
Safety instructions
8
Mechanical installation and maintenance

These instructions are intended for all who install and service the drive.
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death,
or damage to the equipment:
• Handle the unit carefully.
• The drive is heavy. Do not lift it alone. Do not lift the unit by the front cover.
Place the unit only on its back.
• Beware of hot surfaces. Some parts, such as heatsinks of power
semiconductors, remain hot for a while after disconnection of the electrical
supply.
• Make sure that dust from borings and grindings does not enter the drive when
installing. Electrically conductive dust inside the unit may cause damage or
malfunctioning.
• Ensure sufficient cooling.
• Do not fasten the drive by riveting or welding.
Printed circuit boards
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause damage to the printed
circuit boards:
• The printed circuit boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic

discharge. Wear a grounding wrist band when handling the boards. Do not
touch the boards unnecessarily.
Fibre optic cables
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause equipment malfunction

and damage to the fibre optic cables:
• Handle the fibre optic cables with care. When unplugging optic cables, always
grab the connector, not the cable itself. Do not touch the ends of the fibres with
bare hands as the fibre is extremely sensitive to dirt. The minimum allowed
bend radius is 35 mm (1.4 in.).
Safety instructions
9
Operation
These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation of the drive or operate
the drive.
• Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure that the motor
and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range
provided by the drive. The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at
speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly
to the power line.
• Do not activate automatic fault reset functions of the Standard Control Program
if dangerous situations can occur. When activated, these functions will reset
the drive and resume operation after a fault.
• Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device; instead, use the control
panel keys and , or commands via the I/O board of the drive. The
maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors (i.e. power-
ups by applying power) is five in ten minutes.
Note:
• If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive (with
Standard Control Program) will start immediately after fault reset unless the
drive is configured for 3-wire (a pulse) start/stop.
• When the control location is not set to Local (L not shown in the status row of
the display), the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive. To stop
the drive using the control panel, press the LOC/REM key and then the stop
key .
Safety instructions
10
Permanent magnet motor

These are additional warnings concerning permanent magnet motor drives. Ignoring
the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.
Note: Controlling a permanent magnet motor is only allowed using the ACS800
Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor Drive Control Program.
WARNING! Do not work on the drive when the permanent magnet motor is rotating.
Also, when the supply power is switched off and the inverter is stopped, a rotating
permanent magnet motor feeds power to the intermediate circuit of the drive and the
supply connections become live.
Before installation and maintenance work on the drive:
• Stop the motor.
• Ensure that the motor cannot rotate during work. Prevent the start-up of any
drives in the same mechanical group by opening the Prevention of unexpected
start switch (option +Q950) or the Safe torque off switch (option +Q967) and
padlocking it. Make sure that no other system, like hydraulic crawling drives, are
able to rotate the motor directly or through any mechanical connection like felt,
nip, rope, etc.
• Ensure that there is no voltage on the drive power terminals:
Alternative 1) Disconnect the motor from the drive with a safety switch or by other
means. Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input, output or DC
terminals (U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+, UDC-).
Alternative 2) Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input, output
or DC terminals (U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+, UDC-). Ground the drive output
terminals temporarily by connecting them together as well as to the PE.
Alternative 3) If possible, both of the above.
Start-up and operation
WARNING! Do not run the motor over the rated speed. Motor overspeed leads to
overvoltage which can damage the capacitors in the intermediate circuit of the drive.
Safety instructions
11
Table of contents
List of related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Safety instructions
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Use of warnings and notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation and maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Mechanical installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Permanent magnet motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installation and maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Start-up and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Table of contents
Introduction to this manual

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Categorization according to the frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Categorization according to the + code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Installation and commissioning flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operation principle and hardware description

Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Type code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Main circuit and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Mechanical installation
Unpacking the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Table of contents
12
Checking the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Requirements for the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Free space around the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Mounting the drive on the wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Units without vibration dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
IP55 (UL type 12) marine applications (+C132) of frame sizes R4 to R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Units with vibration dampers (+C131) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
UL 12 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cabinet installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Preventing cooling air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Unit above another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Planning the electrical installation

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Motor selection and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Protecting the motor insulation and bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Requirements table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Permanent magnet motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Supply connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Disconnecting device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Main contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Thermal overload and short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Thermal overload protection of the drive and the input and motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Thermal overload protection of the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Protection against short-circuit in the motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Protection against short-circuit inside the drive or in the supply cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Ground fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Prevention of unexpected start-up (option +Q950) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Safe torque off (option +Q967) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Safe torque off circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Selecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Alternative power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Motor cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Additional US requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Armored cable / shielded power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Power factor compensation capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Equipment connected to the motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Installation of safety switches, contactors, connection boxes, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Bypass connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Table of contents
13
Using a contactor between the drive and the motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Protecting the relay output contacts and attenuating disturbances in case of inductive loads. . . . . 56
Selecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Relay cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Control panel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Installation sites above 2000 metres (6562 feet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Routing the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Control cable ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Electrical installation
Checking the insulation of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Supply cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Motor and motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
IT (ungrounded) systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Connecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Conductor stripping lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Allowed wire sizes, tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Wall installed units (European version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Power cable installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Wall installed units (US version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Warning sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Cabinet installation (IP21, UL type 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Frame size R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Frame size R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
360 degrees grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Connecting the shield wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Cabling of I/O and fieldbus modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Pulse encoder module cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fastening the control cables and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Installation of option modules and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fibre optic link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Installation of the AGPS board (Prevention of unexpected start-up, +Q950)

Prevention of unexpected start-up (+Q950) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Installation of the AGPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Start-up and validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Dimensional drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table of contents
14
Installation of the ASTO board (Safe torque off, +Q967)

Safe torque off (+Q967). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Installation of the ASTO board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Start-up and validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Motor control and I/O board (RMIO)

Note on terminal labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Note on external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
External control connections (non-US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
External control connections (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
RMIO board specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Constant voltage output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Auxiliary power output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
DDCS fibre optic link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
24 V DC power input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Installation checklist
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Start-up and use

Startup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Removing the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Maintenance
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fan replacement (R2, R3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fan replacement (R4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fan replacement (R5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fan replacement (R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Table of contents
15
Additional fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Replacement (R2, R3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Replacement (R4, R5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Replacement (R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Reforming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Technical data
IEC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Temperature derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Altitude derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Frame sizes R2 to R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Frame sizes R5 and R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Calculation example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fuse tables for frame sizes R5 and R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Standard gG fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Ultrarapid (aR) fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Quick guide for selecting between gG and aR fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Dimensions, weights and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Package dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
NEMA data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Cable Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Dimensions, weights and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Package dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Input power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Motor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Degree of protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
AGPS-11C (option +Q950) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
ASTO-11C (option +Q967). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Table of contents
16
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Compliance with the European EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Compliance with the European Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
First environment (drive of category C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Second environment (drive of category C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
“C-tick” marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Marine type approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
UL/CSA markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
UL checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Dimensional drawings
Frame size R2 (IP21, UL type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Frame size R2 (IP55, UL type 12). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Frame size R6 (IP21, UL type 1), -205-3 and -255-5 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Frame size R6 (IP55, UL type 12) -0205-3 and -0255-5 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Dimensional drawings (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Frame size R2 (UL type 1, IP21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Frame size R2 (UL type 12, IP55) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Frame size R6 (UL type 1, IP21) -0205-3 and -0255-5 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Frame size R6 (UL type 12, IP55) -0205-3 and -0255-5 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
AGPS board (option +Q950) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
ASTO board with enclosure (option +Q967) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Resistor braking
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Availability of brake choppers and resistors for the ACS800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Selecting the correct drive/chopper/resistor combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table of contents
17
Optional brake chopper and resistor(s) for the ACS800-01/U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Resistor installation and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Protection of frame sizes R2 to R5 (ACS800-01/U1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Protection of frame size R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Brake circuit commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
External +24 V DC power supply for the RMIO board via terminal X34
Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Connecting +24 V DC external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
RDCO-01/02/03/04 DDCS communication option modules

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Delivery check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Module layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Further information
Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Document library on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Table of contents
18
Table of contents
19

This chapter describes the intended audience and contents of this manual. It
contains a flowchart of steps in checking the delivery, installing and commissioning
the drive. The flowchart refers to chapters/sections in this manual and other
manuals.
Intended audience
This manual is intended for people who plan the installation, install, commission, use
and service the drive. Read the manual before working on the drive. The reader is
expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical components and
electrical schematic symbols.
This manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.
Special US instructions for installations within the United States that must be
installed per the National Electrical Code and local codes are marked with (US).
Categorization according to the frame size

Some instructions, technical data and dimensional drawings which concern only
certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size R2, R3... or R8.
The frame size is not marked on the drive designation label. To identify the frame
size of your drive, see the rating tables in chapter Technical data.
The ACS800-01/U1 is manufactured in frame sizes R2 to R6.
Categorization according to the + code

The instructions, technical data and dimensional drawings which concern only
certain optional selections are marked with + codes, e.g. +E202. The options
included in the drive can be identified from the + codes visible on the type
designation label of the drive. The + code selections are listed in chapter Operation
principle and hardware description under Type code.

20
Contents
The chapters of this manual are briefly described below.
Safety instructions give safety instructions for the installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance of the drive.
Introduction to this manual lists the steps in checking the delivery and installing and
commissioning the drive and refers to chapters/sections in this manual and other
manuals for particular tasks.
Operation principle and hardware description describes the drive.
Mechanical installation instructs how to place and mount the drive.
Planning the electrical installation instructs on the motor and cable selection,
protections and cable routing.
Electrical installation shows how to wire the drive.
Installation of the AGPS board (Prevention of unexpected start-up, +Q950) contains
electrical installation instructions of the optional Prevention of unexpected start-up
function (+Q950) of the drive, and gives instructions for starting up, validating and
using the function.
Installation of the ASTO board (Safe torque off, +Q967) describes the electrical
installation of the optional Safe torque off function (+Q967).
Motor control and I/O board (RMIO) shows the external control connections to the
I/O board.
Installation checklist contains a list for checking the mechanical and electrical
installation of the drive.
Start-up and use describes the start-up procedure and use of the drive.
Maintenance contains preventive maintenance instructions.
Technical data contains the technical specifications of the drive, e.g. the ratings,
sizes and technical requirements, provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE
and other markings and warranty policy.
Dimensional drawings contains the dimensional drawings of the drive.
Resistor braking describes how to select, protect and wire brake choppers and
resistors. The chapter also contains the technical data.
External +24 V DC power supply for the RMIO board via terminal X34 describes how
to connect an external +24 V DC power supply for the RMIO board using terminal
X34.

21
Installation and commissioning flowchart
Task See
Identify the frame size of your drive: R2, R3, R4, R5 Technical data: IEC data or NEMA data
or R6.
Plan the installation. Technical data

Check the ambient conditions, ratings, required Planning the electrical installation
cooling air flow, input power connection, compatibility
For compliance with the European Union EMC
of the motor, motor connection, and other technical
Directive, see Technical data: CE marking
data.
Select the cables. Option manual (if optional equipment is
included)
Unpack and check the units. Mechanical installation: Unpacking the unit.
Check that all necessary option modules and If the converter has been non-operational for
equipment are present and correct. more than one year, the converter DC link
Only intact units may be started up. capacitors need to be reformed. See Converter
module capacitor reforming instructions
(3BFE64059629 [English]).
If the drive is about to be connected to an IT Product overview: Type code

(ungrounded) system, check that the drive is not
IT (ungrounded) systems
equipped with EMC filtering intended for grounded
systems.
Check the installation site. Mechanical installation: Before installation

Technical data
Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet. Mechanical installation
Route the cables. Planning the electrical installation: Routing the

cables
Directive, see Technical data: CE marking.

22
Task See
Check the insulation of the motor and the motor Electrical installation: Checking the insulation of
cable. the installation
Connect the power cables. Electrical installation
Connect the control and the auxiliary control cables. Electrical installation, Motor control and I/O
board (RMIO), and the option module manual
delivered with the module.
Check the installation. Installation checklist
Commission the drive. Appropriate firmware manual
Commission the optional brake chopper (if present). Resistor braking
Terms and abbreviations
Term / Abbreviation Description

AGPS Power supply board for IGBT gate driver boards. Used in implemen-
tation of the optional Prevention of unexpected start-up function.
AIMA I/O module adapter. An extension unit for mounting I/O extension
modules outside the drive unit.
ASTO Safe torque off board. An optional board used to implement the Safe
torque off function.
CDP 312R Type of control panel
DDCS Distributed drives communication system; a protocol used in optical
fiber communication.
DTC Direct torque control
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor
IT system Type of supply network that has no (low-impedance) connection to
ground/earth.
POUS Prevention of unexpected start-up
RAIO Analog I/O extension module
RCAN CANopen adapter module
RCNA ControlNet adapter module
RDCO DDCS communication module

23
RDIO Digital I/O extension module

RDNA DeviceNet™ adapter module
RECA EtherCAT adapter module
REPL Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module
RETA Ethernet adapter module for Modbus/TCP and EtherNet/IP protocols
RFI Radio-frequency interference
RIBA InterBus-S adapter module
RINT Main circuit board
RLON LONWORKS® adapter module
RMBA Modbus adapter module
RMBP Modbus plus adapter module
RMIO Supply/motor control and I/O board
RPBA PROFIBUS-DP adapter module
RRFC RFI filter board (filter board for meeting the EMC requirements)
RRIA Resolver adapter module
RTAC Pulse encoder adapter module
RVAR Varistor board
STO Safe torque off
TN system Type of supply network that provides a direct connection to ground
(earth)

24

25

This chapter describes the operating principle and construction of the drive in short.
Product overview
The ACS800-01/U1 is a wall mountable drive for controlling AC motors.
Control panel CDP 312R

Heat sink
Front cover
Connection box
IP21 (UL type 1)
Control panel CDP 312R Heat sink

under a hinged plastic
cover
Front cover (no connection box)
IP55 (UL type 12)

26
Type code
The type code contains information on the specifications and configuration of the
drive. The first digits from left express the basic configuration (for example,
ACS800-01-0006-5). The optional selections are given thereafter, separated by +
signs (for example, +E202). The main selections are described below. Not all
selections are available for all types. For more information, refer to ACS800
Ordering Information (EN code: 3AFY64556568, available on request).
Selection Alternatives
Product series ACS800 product series
Type 01 Wall mounted. When no options are selected: IP21, control panel CDP 312R,
no EMC filter, Standard Control Program, cable connection box (cabling from
below), brake chopper in frame sizes R2 and R3 (230/400/500 V units) and in
frame size R4 (690 V units), boards without coating, one set of English
manuals.
U1 Wall mounted (USA). When no options are selected: UL type 1, control panel
CDP 312R, no EMC filter, US version of the Standard Control Program (three-
wire start/stop as default setting), US gland/conduit box, brake chopper in
frame sizes R2 and R3 (230/400/500 V units) and in frame size R4 (690 V
units), boards without coating, one set of English manuals.
Size Refer to Technical data: IEC data or NEMA data.
Voltage range 2 208/220/230/240 V AC
(nominal rating in bold) 3 380/400/415 V AC
5 380/400/415/440/460/480/500 V AC
7 525/575/600/690 V AC
Option codes (+ codes)
Degree of protection B056 IP55 / UL type 12
Construction C131 Vibration dampers
C132 Marine type approved unit (coated boards included, +C131 required for frame
sizes R4 to R6 in wall installations, +C131 not required in cabinet installations)
Resistor braking D150 Brake chopper
Filter E200 EMC/RFI filter for second environment TN (grounded) system, drive category
C3 (frame sizes R2…R5)
E202 EMC/RFI filter for first environment TN (grounded) system, drive category C2
E210 EMC/RFI filter for second environment TN/IT (grounded/ungrounded) system,
drive category C3 (frame size R6 only)
Cabling H358 US/UK gland/conduit box
Control panel 0J400 No control panel
Fieldbus K... Refer to ACS800 Ordering Information (EN code: 3AFY64556568).
I/O L...
Control program N...
Manual language R...
Safety features Q950 Prevention of unexpected start-up: AGPS board and 3 m connection cable
(not to be used with option +Q967)
Q967 Safe torque off (STO) function without safety relay: ASTO board and 3 m
connection cable (not to be used with option +Q950)
Specialities P901 Coated boards
P904 Extended warranty

27
Main circuit and control
Diagram
This diagram shows the control interfaces and the main circuit of the drive.
Drive
Motor
control and Option module 1: RMBA, RAIO, RDIO,
I/O board RDNA, RLON, RIBA, RPBA, RCAN,
(RMIO) RCNA, RMBP, RETA, RECA, REPL, RRIA
or RTAC
External control via Option module 2: RTAC, RAIO, RRIA or

analogue/digital RDIO
inputs and outputs DDCS communication option module 3:
RDCO-01, RDCO-02 or RDCO-03
Prevention of unexpected start -up X41
(AGPS board) or
Safe torque off (ASTO board)
Input power Output power
Brake chopper in frame sizes R2 and R3

and in 690 V units of frame size R4
(optional in other frame sizes)
R- UDC+ UDC-
R+
Operation
This table describes the operation of the main circuit in short.
Component Description
six-pulse rectifier converts the three-phase AC voltage to DC voltage
capacitor bank energy storage which stabilizes the intermediate circuit DC voltage
IGBT inverter converts the DC voltage to AC voltage and vice versa. The motor
operation is controlled by switching the IGBTs.

28

The drive contains the following printed circuit boards as standard:
• main circuit board (RINT)
• motor control and I/O board (RMIO)
• EMC filter board (RRFC) when EMC equipment is selected or varistor board
(RVAR) otherwise
• control panel (CDP 312R).
Motor control
The motor control is based on the Direct Torque Control (DTC) method. Two phase
currents and DC link voltage are measured and used for the control. The third phase
current is measured for earth fault protection.

29

This chapter contains unpacking instructions, the delivery checklist and the
mechanical installation instructions of the drive.
Unpacking the unit

The drive is delivered in either in a cardboard box or in a plywood package. The
package also contains:
• connection box (only in IP21 units): screws, clamps and vibration dampers (option
+C131)
• box for safety options: ASTO board for the Safe torque off function (option
+Q967) or AGPS board for the Prevention of unexpected start-up function (option
+Q950)
• plastic bag: screws (M3), clamps and cable lugs (2 mm2, M3) for grounding the
control cable screens, all manuals (hardware manual, appropriate firmware
manuals and guides, option module manuals), residual voltage warning stickers
and other delivery documents.
The type, size and material of the package depend on the frame size of the drive and
the selected options (see section Package dimensions and weights on page 117).
The following unpacking instructions are examples.
Note: Do not discard any important components that are in the separate cardboard
boxes.
30
Example 1
1. To cut the box into two pieces, pull from the spots marked with arrows.
2. Remove the upper part of the box.
3. Remove the unit and other contents from the box.
1 2
Pull
Do not lift by the cover.
31
Example 2
1. Cut the straps.
2. Remove the outer box and sleeve.
3. Remove the locking sheet and the screws that attach the unit to the bottom pallet.
32
Checking the delivery

Check that all items listed in section Unpacking the unit are present.
Check that there are no signs of damage. Before attempting installation and
operation, check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify
that the unit is of the correct type. The label includes an IEC and NEMA rating, UL,
C-UL, CSA and CE markings, a type code and a serial number, which allow
individual recognition of each unit. The first digit of the serial number refers to the
manufacturing plant. The next four digits refer to the unit’s manufacturing year and
week, respectively. The remaining digits complete the serial number so that there
are no two units with the same serial number.
The type designation label is attached to the heat sink and the serial number label to
the upper part of the back plate of the unit. Example labels are shown below.
Type designation label
Serial number label
Before installation
The drive must be installed in an upright position with the cooling section facing a
wall. Check the installation site according to the requirements below. Refer to
Dimensional drawings for frame details.
Requirements for the installation site

See Technical data for the allowed operation conditions of the drive.
Wall
The wall should be as close to vertical as possible, of non-flammable material and
strong enough to carry the weight of the unit. Check that there is nothing on the wall
to inhibit the installation.
Floor
The floor/material below the installation should be non-flammable.
33
Free space around the unit

Required free space around the drive to enable cooling air flow, service and
maintenance is shown below in millimetres and [inches]. When mounting IP55 units
above one another, leave 200 mm (7.9 in.) free space above and below the unit.
50 [2.0]
200 [7.9]
50 [2.0] 50 [2.0] 50 [2.0] 50 [2.0]
300 [12]
50 [2.0]
IP21 (UL 1) IP55 (UL 12)
Air flow (side view)
34
Mounting the drive on the wall
Units without vibration dampers

1. Mark the locations for the four holes. The mounting points are shown in
Dimensional drawings. In frame sizes R2 to R5 (IP21, UL type 1), use the
mounting template cut from the package.
2. Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations.
3. IP55 (UL type 12) units: Remove the front cover by undoing the fixing screws.
4. Position the drive onto the screws on the wall. Note: Lift the drive by its chassis
(R6: by its lifting holes), not by its cover.
5. Tighten the screws in the wall securely.
IP55 (UL 12)
IP55 (UL type 12) marine applications (+C132) of frame sizes R4 to R6

See ACS800-01/U1 Marine Supplement [3AFE68291275 (English)].
Units with vibration dampers (+C131)

See ACS800-01/U1 Vibration Damper Installation Guide [3AFE68295351 (English)].
UL 12 units
Install the hood delivered with the drive 50 mm (2.0 in.) above the top of unit.
35
Cabinet installation
For better cooling, it is recommended to remove the front cover if the unit is installed
into a cabinet. The required distance between parallel units is five millimetres
(0.2 in.) in installations without the front cover. The cooling air entering the unit must
not exceed +40 °C (+104 °F).
Preventing cooling air recirculation

Prevent air recirculation inside and outside the cabinet.
Example
HOT
Main air flow out AREA
Air baffle plates
COOL AREA
Main air flow in
36
Unit above another

Lead the out-coming cooling air away from the unit above.
Example
max.+40 °C (+104 °F)
37

This chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when selecting the motor,
cables, protections, cable routing and way of operation for the drive system.
Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable
local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any
installation which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if
the recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience
problems that the warranty does not cover.
Motor selection and compatibility

1. Select the motor according to the rating tables in chapter Technical data. Use the
DriveSize PC tool if the default load cycles are not applicable.
2. Check that the motor ratings lie within the allowed ranges of the drive control
program:
• motor nominal voltage is 1/2 ... 2 · UN of the drive
• motor nominal current is 1/6 ... 2 · I2hd of the drive in DTC control and
0 ... 2 · I2hd in scalar control. The control mode is selected by a drive parameter.
3. Check that the motor voltage rating meets the application requirements:
Resistor braking Motor voltage rating
no resistor braking is in use UN
frequent or long term brake cycles will be used UACeq1
UN = rated input voltage of the drive

UACeq1 = UDC/1.35
UACeq1 = the equivalent AC power source voltage of the drive in V AC.
UDC = the maximum DC link voltage of the drive in V DC.
For resistor braking: UDC= 1.21 × nominal DC link voltage.
Note: Nominal DC link voltage is UN × 1.35 in V DC.
See note 7 below the Requirements table, page 43.

4. Consult the motor manufacturer before using a motor in a drive system where the
motor nominal voltage differs from the AC power source voltage.
5. Ensure that the motor insulation system withstands the maximum peak voltage in
the motor terminals. See the Requirements table below for the required motor
insulation system and drive filtering.

38
Example 1: When the supply voltage is 440 V and a drive with a diode supply is
operating in motor mode only, the maximum peak voltage in the motor terminals
can be approximated as follows: 440 V · 1.35 · 2 = 1190 V. Check that the motor
insulation system withstands this voltage.
Protecting the motor insulation and bearings

The output of the drive comprises – regardless of output frequency – pulses of
approximately 1.35 times the equivalent mains network voltage with a very short rise
time. This is the case with all drives employing modern IGBT inverter technology.
The voltage of the pulses can be almost double at the motor terminals, depending on
the attenuation and reflection properties of the motor cable and the terminals. This in
turn can cause additional stress on the motor and motor cable insulation.
Modern variable speed drives with their fast rising voltage pulses and high switching
frequencies can generate current pulses that flow through the motor bearings, which
can gradually erode the bearing races and rolling elements.
The stress on motor insulation can be avoided by using optional ABB du/dt filters.
du/dt filters also reduce bearing currents.
To avoid damage to motor bearings, the cables must be selected and installed
according to the instructions given in the hardware manual. In addition, insulated N-
end (non-driven end) bearings and output filters from ABB must be used according
to the following table. Two types of filters are used individually or in combinations:
• optional du/dt filter (protects motor insulation system and reduces bearing
currents).
• common mode filter (mainly reduces bearing currents).

39
Requirements table
The following table shows how to select the motor insulation system and when an
optional ABB du/dt filter, insulated N-end (non-driven end) motor bearings and ABB
common mode filters are required. Ignoring the requirements or improper installation
may shorten motor life or damage the motor bearings and voids the warranty.
Motor type Nominal mains Requirement for

voltage (AC line
Motor insulation ABB du/dt filter, insulated N-end bearing and ABB common mode
voltage)
system filter
Manufacturer
PN < 100 kW 100 kW < PN < 350 kW PN > 350 kW

and or or
frame size < IEC 315 frame size > IEC 315 frame size > IEC 400
PN < 134 hp 134 hp < PN < 469 hp PN > 469 hp
and or or
frame size < frame size > frame size >
NEMA 500 NEMA 500 NEMA 580
A Random- UN < 500 V Standard - +N + N + CMF
B wound M2_,
500 V < UN < 600 V Standard + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
M3_ and
B
M4_ or
Reinforced - +N + N + CMF
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
(cable length <
150 m)
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced - +N + N + CMF
(cable length >
150 m)
Form-wound 380 V < UN < 690 V Standard n.a. + N + CMF PN < 500 kW: + N +
HX_ and CMF
AM_ PN > 500 kW: + N +
CMF + du/dt
Old* form- 380 V < UN < 690 V Check with the motor + du/dt with voltages over 500 V + N + CMF
wound HX_ manufacturer.
and modular
Random- 0 V < UN < 500 V Enamelled wire with + N + CMF
wound HX_ fibre glass taping
500 V < UN < 690 V + du/dt + N + CMF
and AM_ **
HDP Consult the motor manufacturer.

40

voltage (AC line
voltage) system filter
Manufacturer
PN < 100 kW 100 kW < PN < 350 kW PN > 350 kW

and or or
PN < 134 hp 134 hp < PN < 469 hp PN > 469 hp
and or or
N Random- UN < 420 V Standard: ÛLL = - + N or CMF + N + CMF
O wound and 1300 V
N form-wound 420 V < UN < 500 V Standard: ÛLL = + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
- 1300 V
or
A + du/dt + CMF
B
or
B
Reinforced: ÛLL = - + N or CMF + N + CMF
1600 V, 0.2
microsecond rise time
500 V < UN < 600 V Reinforced: ÛLL = + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt+ N + CMF
1600 V or
+ du/dt + CMF
or
1800 V
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced: ÛLL = + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
1800 V
Reinforced: ÛLL = - N + CMF N + CMF
2000 V, 0.3
***
* manufactured before 1.1.1998

** For motors manufactured before 1.1.1998, check for additional instructions with the motor
manufacturer.
*** If the intermediate DC circuit voltage of the drive is increased from the nominal level by resistor
braking or by the IGBT Supply Control Program (parameter selectable function), check with the
motor manufacturer if additional output filters are needed in the applied drive operation range.
Note 1: The abbreviations used in the table are defined below.

Abbreviation Definition
UN nominal voltage of the supply network
ÛLL peak line-to-line voltage at motor terminals which the motor insulation must
withstand
PN motor nominal power
du/dt du/dt filter at the output of the drive
CMF common mode filter
N N-end bearing: insulated motor non-driven end bearing
n.a. Motors of this power range are not available as standard units. Consult the motor
manufacturer.

41
Note 2: Explosion-safe (EX) motors

The motor manufacturer should be consulted regarding the construction of the motor
insulation and additional requirements for explosion-safe (EX) motors.
Note 3: ABB high-output motors and IP23 motors
The rated output power of high output motors is higher than what is stated for the
particular frame size in EN 50347:2001. This table shows the requirements for ABB
random-wound motor series (for example, M3AA, M3AP and M3BP).
Nominal AC supply Requirement for
voltage Motor ABB du/dt and common mode filters, insulated N-end motor
insulation bearings
system PN < 100 kW 100 kW < PN < 200 kW PN > 200 kW
PN < 140 hp 140 hp < PN < 268 hp PN > 268 hp
UN < 500 V Standard - +N + N + CMF
500 V < UN < 600 V Standard + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + du/dt + CMF
or
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + du/dt + CMF

42
Note 4: Non-ABB high-output and IP23 motors

particular frame size in EN 50347:2001. The table below shows the requirements for
random-wound and form-wound non-ABB motors with nominal power smaller than
350 kW. For bigger motors, consult the motor manufacturer.
Nominal AC Requirement for
supply voltage Motor insulation ABB du/dt filter, insulated N-end bearing and ABB common
system mode filter
PN < 100 kW or frame 100 kW < PN < 350 kW or
size < IEC 315 IEC 315 < frame size < IEC 400
PN < 134 hp or frame 134 hp < PN < 469 hp or
size < NEMA 500 NEMA 500 < frame size < NEMA 580
UN < 420 V Standard: ÛLL = + N or CMF + N + CMF
1300 V
420 V < UN < 500 V Standard: ÛLL = + du/dt + (N or CMF) + N + du/dt + CMF
1300 V
or
Reinforced: ÛLL = + N or CMF + N + CMF
1600 V, 0.2
microsecond rise
time
500 V < UN < 600 V Reinforced: ÛLL = + du/dt + (N or CMF) + du/dt + N + CMF
1600 V
or
1800 V
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced: ÛLL = + N + du/dt + N + du/dt + CMF
1800 V
Reinforced: ÛLL = N + CMF N + CMF
2000 V, 0.3
microsecond rise
time ***
*** If the intermediate DC circuit voltage of the drive is increased from the nominal level by resistor braking,
check with the motor manufacturer if additional output filters are needed in the applied drive operation
range.
Note 5: HXR and AMA motors

All AMA machines (manufactured in Helsinki) for drive systems have form-wound
windings. All HXR machines manufactured in Helsinki starting 1.1.1998 have form-
wound windings.
Note 6: ABB motors of types other than M2_, M3_, HX_ and AM_
Use the selection criteria given for non-ABB motors.

43
Note 7: Resistor braking of the drive

When the drive is in braking mode for a large part of its operation time, the
intermediate circuit DC voltage of the drive increases, the effect being similar to
increasing the supply voltage by up to 20 percent. The voltage increase should be
taken into consideration when determining the motor insulation requirement.
Example: Motor insulation requirement for a 400 V application must be selected as if
the drive were supplied with 480 V.
Note 8: Calculating the rise time and the peak line-to-line voltage
The peak line-to-line voltage at the motor terminals generated by the drive as well as
the voltage rise time depend on the cable length. The requirements for the motor
insulation system given in the table are “worst case” requirements covering
installations with 30 metre and longer cables. The rise time can be calculated as
follows: t = 0.8 · ÛLL/(du/dt). Read ÛLL and du/dt from the diagrams below. Multiply
the values of the graph by the supply voltage (UN). In case of drives with an IGBT
supply unit or resistor braking, the ÛLL and du/dt values are approximately 20 %
higher.
3.0 5.5
ÛLL/UN 5.0
2.5 du/dt
------------- (1/s)
4.5 UN
2.0 4.0
3.5
1.5
3.0
ÛLL/UN
1.0 2.5
du/dt
------------- (1/s)
UN 2.0
0.5
1.5
0.0 1.0
100 200 300 100 200 300
Cable length (m) Cable length (m)
With du/dt Filter Without du/dt Filter
Note 9: Sine filters protect the motor insulation system. Therefore, du/dt filter can be
replaced with a sine filter. The peak phase-to-phase voltage with the sine filter is
approximately 1.5 × UN.
Note 10: Common mode filter is available as a separate option.

Only one permanent magnet motor can be connected to the inverter output.
It is recommended to install a safety switch between the permanent magnet motor
and the drive output. The switch is needed to isolate the motor during any
maintenance work on the drive.

44
Supply connection
Disconnecting device
Install a hand-operated input disconnecting device between the AC power source
and the drive. The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the
open position for installation and maintenance work.
EU
To meet the European Union Directives, according to standard EN 60204-1, Safety
of Machinery, the disconnecting device must be one of the following types:
• switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-23B (EN 60947-3)
• disconnector that has an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching
devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the
disconnector (EN 60947-3)
• circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2.
US
The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations.
Fuses
See section Thermal overload and short-circuit protection.
Main contactor
If used, dimension the contactor according to the nominal voltage and current of the
drive. The utilization category (IEC 947-4) is AC-1.

45
Thermal overload and short-circuit protection
Thermal overload protection of the drive and the input and motor cables
The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload
when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional thermal protection devices are needed.
WARNING! If the drive is connected to multiple motors, a separate thermal overload

switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor. These
devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short-circuit current.
Thermal overload protection of the motor

According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and
the current must be switched off when overload is detected. The drive includes a
motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current
when necessary. Depending on a drive parameter value, the function either monitors
a calculated temperature value (based on a motor thermal model) or an actual
temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors. The user can tune the
thermal model further by feeding in additional motor and load data.
The most common temperature sensors are:
• motor sizes IEC180…225: thermal switch (e.g. Klixon)
• motor sizes IEC200…250 and larger: PTC or Pt100.
See the firmware manual for more information on the motor thermal protection, and
the connection and use of the temperature sensors.
Protection against short-circuit in the motor cable

The drive protects the motor cable and motor in a short-circuit situation when the
motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional protection devices are needed.

46
Protection against short-circuit inside the drive or in the supply cable

Protect the drive and input cable with fuses or a circuit breaker.
Circuit diagram
DRIVE IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH INPUT FUSES
Distribution Drive or drive

board Input cable module
Fuses
~ M
~ 3~
Circuit
breaker
~ M
I>
~ 3~
Fuses
Size the fuses according to instructions given in chapter Technical data. The fuses
will protect the input cable in short-circuit situations, restrict drive damage and
prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short-circuit inside the
drive.Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS800 can be
used. Fuses must be used with other circuit breakers. Contact your local ABB
representative for the approved breaker types and supply network characteristics.
Circuit breaker
The protective characteristics of circuit breakers depend on the type, construction
and settings of the breakers. There are also limitations pertaining to the short-circuit
capacity of the supply network.
WARNING! Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of

circuit breakers, independent of the manufacturer, hot ionized gases may
escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short-circuit. To ensure
safe use, special attention must be paid to the installation and placement
of the breakers. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: Circuit breakers must not be used without fuses in the USA.

47
Ground fault protection

The drive is equipped with an internal ground fault protective function to protect the
unit against ground faults in the motor and motor cable. This is not a personal safety
or a fire protection feature. The ground fault protective function can be disabled with
a parameter, refer to the appropriate firmware manual.
The EMC filter of the drive includes capacitors connected between the main circuit
and the frame. These capacitors and long motor cables increase the ground leakage
current and may cause fault current circuit breakers to function.

48
Prevention of unexpected start-up (option +Q950)

The drive can be equipped with an optional Prevention of unexpected start-up
function according to standards:
• IEC/EN 60204-1:1997,
• ISO/DIS 14118:2000,
• EN 1037:1996,
• EN ISO 12100:2003,
• EN 954-1:1996,
• EN ISO 13849-2:2003.
The Prevention of unexpected start-up (POUS) function disables the control voltage
of the power semiconductors, thus preventing the drive from generating the AC
voltage required to rotate the motor. By using this function, short-time operations
(like cleaning) and/or maintenance work on non-electrical parts of the machinery can
be performed without switching off the AC power supply to the drive.
The operator activates the Prevention of unexpected start-up function by opening a
switch on a control desk. An indicating lamp on the control desk will light, signalling
that the prevention is active. The switch can be locked out.
The user must install on a control desk near the machinery:
• switching/disconnecting device for the circuitry. “Means shall be provided to
prevent inadvertent, and/or mistaken closure of the disconnecting device.”
EN 60204-1:1997.
• indicating lamp; on = starting the drive is prevented, off = drive is operative.
For connections to the drive, see the circuit diagram delivered with the drive.
WARNING! The Prevention of unexpected start-up function does not disconnect the
voltage of the main and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work
on electrical parts of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after isolating the
drive system from the main supply.
Note: The Prevention of unexpected start-up function is not intended for stopping
the drive. If the Prevention of unexpected start-up function is activated when the
drive is running, the control voltage of the power semiconductors is cut off and the
motor coasts to a stop.
For detailed instructions for installation, start-up, use and maintenance of the
function, see chapter Installation of the AGPS board (Prevention of unexpected
start-up, +Q950).

49
Safe torque off (option +Q967)

The drive supports the Safe torque off (STO) function according to standards:
• EN 61800-5-2:2007,
• EN ISO 13849-1:2008,
• IEC 61508,
• IEC 61511:2004,
• EN 62061:2005.
The function also corresponds to an uncontrolled stop in accordance with category 0
of EN 60204-1and Prevention of unexpected start-up of EN 1037.
The STO may be used where power removal is required to prevent an unexpected
start. The function disables the control voltage of the power semiconductors of the
drive output stage, thus preventing the drive from generating the voltage required to
rotate the motor (see diagram below). By using this function, short-time operations
be performed without switching off the power supply to the drive.
WARNING! The Safe torque off function does not disconnect the voltage of the main
and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work on electrical parts
of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after isolating the drive system from
the main supply.
Note: The Safe torque off function can be used for stopping the drive in emergency
stop situations. In the normal operating mode, use the Stop command instead. If the
Safe torque off function is activated when the drive is running, the control voltage of
the power semiconductors is cut off and the motor coasts to a stop. If this is not
acceptable, e.g. causes danger, the drive and machinery must be stopped using the
appropriate stopping mode before using this function.
Note concerning permanent magnet motor drives in case of a multiple IGBT
power semiconductor failure: In spite of the activation of the Safe torque off
function, the drive system can produce an alignment torque which maximally rotates
the motor shaft by 180/p degrees. p denotes the pole pair number.
For more information on the installation of the Safe torque off function, see chapter
Installation of the ASTO board (Safe torque off, +Q967).
For more information on the Safe torque off function and the relevant safety data,
see ACS800-01/04/11/31/104/104LC Safe torque off function (+Q967), Application
guide (3AUA0000063373 [English]).
An example circuit diagram is shown below.

50
Safe torque off circuit diagram
3AUA0000072271

51
Selecting the power cables
General rules
Dimension the mains (input power) and motor cables according to local
regulations:
• The cable must be able to carry the drive load current. See chapter Technical
data for the rated currents.
• The cable must be rated for at least 70 °C (158 °F) maximum permissible
temperature of conductor in continuous use. For US, see Additional US
requirements.
• The inductance and impedance of the PE conductor/cable (grounding wire) must
be rated according to permissible touch voltage appearing under fault conditions
(so that the fault point voltage will not rise excessively when a ground fault
occurs).
• 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC. 750 V AC cable is accepted for
up to 600 V AC. For 690 V AC rated equipment, the rated voltage between the
conductors of the cable should be at least 1 kV.
For drive frame size R5 and larger, or motors larger than 30 kW (40 hp), symmetrical
shielded motor cable must be used (figure below). A four-conductor system can be
used up to frame size R4 with up to 30 kW (40 hp) motors, but shielded symmetrical
motor cable is always recommended. The shield(s) of motor cable(s) must have
360° bonding at both ends.
Note: When continuous metal conduit is employed, shielded cable is not required.
The conduit must have bonding at both ends as with cable shield.
A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but shielded symmetrical cable
is recommended. To operate as a protective conductor, the shield conductivity must
be as follows when the protective conductor is made of the same metal as the phase
conductors:
Cross-sectional area of the phase Minimum cross-sectional area of the
conductors corresponding protective conductor
S (mm2) Sp (mm2)
S < 16 S
16 < S < 35 16
35 < S S/2
Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of symmetrical shielded cable

reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as the stress on
motor insulation, bearing currents and wear.
The motor cable and its PE pigtail (twisted shield) should be kept as short as
possible in order to reduce high-frequency electromagnetic emission, as well as
stray currents outside the cable and capacitive current (relevant in power range
below 20 kW).

52
Alternative power cable types

Power cable types that can be used with the drive are represented below.
Recommended
Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase conductors A separate PE conductor is required if the conductivity
and a concentric or otherwise symmetrically of the cable shield is < 50% of the conductivity of the
constructed PE conductor, and a shield phase conductor.
PE conductor Shield
and shield Shield
PE
PE
PE Shield
A four-conductor system:
three phase conductors
and a protective
conductor
Not allowed for motor cables Not allowed for motor cables with phase
conductor cross section larger than 10 mm2
[motors > 30 kW (40 hp)].
The following power cable type is not allowed.

Symmetrical shielded cable with individual shields for each phase
PE
conductor is not allowed on any cable size for input and motor cabling.

53
Motor cable shield

If the motor cable shield is used as the sole protective earth conductor of the motor,
ensure that the conductivity of the shield is sufficient. See section General rules
above, or IEC 61439-1. To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio-
frequency emissions, the shield conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase
conductor conductivity. The requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium
shield. The minimum requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown
below. It consists of a concentric layer of copper wires with an open helix of copper
tape or copper wire. The better and tighter the shield, the lower the emission level
and bearing currents.
Copper wire screen Helix of copper tape Inner insulation

Insulation jacket
or copper wire
Cable core
Additional US requirements
Type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds or
shielded power cable must be used for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not
used. For the North American market, 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to
500 V AC. 1000 V AC cable is required above 500 V AC (below 600 V AC). For
drives rated over 100 amperes, the power cables must be rated for 75 °C (167 °F).
Conduit
Separate parts of a conduit must be coupled together, bridge the joints with a ground
conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint. Bond the conduits also to
the drive enclosure and motor frame. Use separate conduits for input power, motor,
brake resistor, and control wiring. When conduit is employed, type MC continuous
corrugated aluminium armor cable or shielded cable is not required. A dedicated
ground cable is always required.
Note: Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit.
Armored cable / shielded power cable
Six conductor (3 phases and 3 ground) type MC continuous corrugated aluminum
armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers (trade
names in parentheses):
• Anixter Wire & Cable (Philsheath)
• BICC General Corp (Philsheath)
• Rockbestos Co. (Gardex)
• Oaknite (CLX).
Shielded power cables are available from Belden, LAPPKABEL (ÖLFLEX) and
Pirelli.

54
Power factor compensation capacitors

Power factor compensation is not needed with AC drives. However, if a drive is to be
connected in a system with compensation capacitors installed, note the following
restrictions.
WARNING! Do not connect power factor compensation capacitors or harmonic

filters to the motor cables (between the drive and the motor). They are not meant to
be used with AC drives and can cause permanent damage to the drive or
themselves.
If there are power factor compensation capacitors in parallel with the three phase
input of the drive:
1. Do not connect a high-power capacitor to the power line while the drive is
connected. The connection will cause voltage transients that may trip or even
damage the drive.
2. If capacitor load is increased/decreased step by step when the AC drive is
connected to the power line: Ensure that the connection steps are low enough not
to cause voltage transients that would trip the drive.
3. Check that the power factor compensation unit is suitable for use in systems with
AC drives i.e. harmonic generating loads. In such systems, the compensation unit
should typically be equipped with a blocking reactor or harmonic filter.
Equipment connected to the motor cable
Installation of safety switches, contactors, connection boxes, etc.

To minimize the emission level when safety switches, contactors, connection boxes
or similar equipment are installed in the motor cable between the drive and the
motor:
• EU: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure with 360 degrees grounding for the
shields of both the incoming and outgoing cable, or connect the shields of the
cables otherwise together.
• US: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure in a way that the conduit or motor
cable shielding runs consistently without breaks from the drive to the motor.
Bypass connection
WARNING! Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2, V2
and W2. If frequent bypassing is required, employ mechanically connected switches
or contactors. Mains (line) voltage applied to the output can result in permanent
damage to the unit.

55
Using a contactor between the drive and the motor

Implementing the control of the output contactor depends on how you select the
drive to operate.
When you have selected to use DTC motor control mode, and motor ramp stop,
open the contactor as follows:
1. Give a stop command to the drive.
2. Wait until the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed.
3. Open the contactor.
When you have selected to use DTC motor control mode, and motor coast stop, or
scalar control mode, open the contactor as follows:
WARNING! When the DTC motor control mode is in use, never open the output
contactor while the drive controls the motor. The DTC motor control operates
extremely fast, much faster than it takes for the contactor to open its contacts. When
the contactor starts opening while the drive controls the motor, the DTC control will
try to maintain the load current by immediately increasing the drive output voltage to
the maximum. This will damage, or even burn the contactor completely.

56
Protecting the relay output contacts and attenuating disturbances in case

of inductive loads
Inductive loads (relays, contactors, motors) cause voltage transients when switched
off.
The relay contacts on the RMIO board are protected with varistors (250 V) against
overvoltage peaks. In spite of this, it is highly recommended to equip inductive loads
with noise attenuating circuits [varistors, RC filters (AC) or diodes (DC)] in order to
minimize the EMC emission at switch-off. If not suppressed, the disturbances may
connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form
a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system.
Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible. Do not
install protective components at the RMIO board terminal block.
RMIO
Relay outputs
Varistor X25
1 RO1
2 RO1
230 V AC
3 RO1
RC filter X26
1 RO2
2 RO2
230 V AC
3 RO2
Diode X27
1 RO3
2 RO3
24 V DC
3 RO3

57
Selecting the control cables

All control cables must be shielded.
Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure a below) for analogue signals. This
type of cable is recommended for the pulse encoder signals also. Employ one
individually shielded pair for each signal. Do not use common return for different
analogue signals.
A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals but
single-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure b) is also usable.
a b
A double-shielded twisted A single-shielded twisted
pair cable pair cable
Run analogue and digital signals in separate, shielded cables.

Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in
the same cables as digital input signals. It is recommended that the relay-controlled
signals be run as twisted pairs.
Never mix 24 V DC and 115/230 V AC signals in the same cable.
Relay cable
The cable type with braided metallic screen (e.g. ÖLFLEX by LAPPKABEL,
Germany) has been tested and approved by ABB.
Control panel cable

In remote use, the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed 3
metres (10 ft). The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel
option kits.

58
Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I/O
WARNING! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts
and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non-
conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.
To fulfil this requirement, the connection of a thermistor (and other similar
components) to the digital inputs of the drive can be implemented in three alternate
ways:
1. There is double or reinforced insulation between the thermistor and live parts of
the motor.
2. Circuits connected to all digital and analogue inputs of the drive are protected
against contact and insulated with basic insulation (the same voltage level as the
drive main circuit) from other low voltage circuits.
3. An external thermistor relay is used. The insulation of the relay must be rated for
the same voltage level as the main circuit of the drive. For connection, see the
firmware manual.
Installation sites above 2000 metres (6562 feet)
WARNING! Protect against direct contact when installing, operating and servicing
the RMIO board wiring and option modules attached to the board. The Protective
Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178 are not fulfilled at
altitudes above 2000 m (6562 ft).
Routing the cables

Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives
can be run in parallel installed next to each other. It is recommended that the motor
cable, input power cable and control cables be installed on separate trays. Avoid
long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables in order to decrease
electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output
voltage.
Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are arranged at an
angle as near to 90 degrees as possible. Do not run extra cables through the drive.
The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the
grounding electrodes. Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local
equalizing of potential.

59
A diagram of the cable routing is shown below.
Motor cable
Drive
min 300 mm (12 in.)
Power cable
Input power cable Motor cable
min 200 mm (8 in.) 90 ° min 500 mm (20 in.)
Control cables
Control cable ducts
230 V 230 V
24 V (120 V) 24 V (120 V)
Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is Lead 24 V and 230 V (120 V) control
insulated for 230 V (120 V) or insulated cables in separate ducts inside the
with an insulation sleeving for 230 V cabinet.
(120 V).

60

61

This chapter describes the electrical installation procedure of the drive.
WARNING! The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a qualified
electrician. Follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual. Ignoring
the safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the mains (input power) during
installation. If the drive is already connected to the mains, wait for 5 min after
disconnecting mains power.
Checking the insulation of the installation
Drive
Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests on any part of the
drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has been tested for insulation
between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory. Also, there are voltage-
limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically.
Supply cable
Check the insulation of the supply (input) cable according to local regulations before
connecting to the drive.
62
Motor and motor cable

Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows:
1. Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor, and disconnected from the
drive output terminals U2, V2 and W2.
2. Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the
Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 1000 V DC. The
insulation resistance of an ABB motor must exceed 100 Mohm (reference value
at 25 °C or 77 °F). For the insulation resistance of other motors, please consult
the manufacturer’s instructions. Note: Moisture inside the motor casing will
reduce the insulation resistance. If moisture is suspected, dry the motor and
repeat the measurement.
U1
M
V1
3~
ohm W1
PE
In units with EMC filter options (+E202 or +E200 in the type code), disconnect the
filter capacitors before connecting the drive to an ungrounded system. For detailed
instructions, see ACS800-01, -U1, -04 frames R2-R6 EMC filter disconnection
(3AXD00000168163 [English]).
WARNING! If a drive with EMC filter selection +E202 or +E200 is installed on an IT

system [an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms)
power system], the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC
filter capacitors of the drive. This may cause danger or damage the unit.
63
Connecting the power cables
Diagram
Drive
INPUT UDC+ UDC- OUTPUT
PE U1 V1 W1 R- R+ U2 V2 W2
1) 2)
3) 4) 4)
(PE) PE (PE)
5)
V1 W1
U1
External brake
For alternatives, see
Planning the electrical
resistor 3 ~
installation: Motor
L1 L2 L3
1), 2) Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end

If shielded cable is used (not required but For minimum radio frequency interference:
recommended), use a separate PE cable (1) or a • ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead-through of
cable with a grounding conductor (2) if the the motor terminal box
conductivity of the input cable shield is < 50% of the
conductivity of the phase conductor.
Ground the other end of the input cable shield or PE
conductor at the distribution board. 360 degrees grounding
3) 360 degrees grounding recommended if shielded
cable
Conductive gaskets
4) 360 degrees grounding required
• or ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows:
flattened width > 1/5 · length.
b > 1/5 · a
5) Use a separate grounding cable if the conductivity of
the cable shield is < 50% of the conductivity of the b
a
phase conductor and there is no symmetrically
constructed grounding conductor in the cable (see
Planning the electrical installation: Selecting the
power cables).
Note:
If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding
conductor in the motor cable in addition to the
conductive shield, connect the grounding conductor to
the grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends.
Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable
for motors > 30 kW (40 hp). Connecting its fourth
conductor at the motor end increases bearing currents
and causes extra wear.
64
Conductor stripping lengths

Strip the conductor ends as follows to fit them inside the power cable connection
terminals.
Frame size Stripping length
mm in.
R2, R3 10 0.39
R4, R5 16 0.63
R6 28 1.10
Allowed wire sizes, tightening torques

See Technical data: Cable entries.
Wall installed units (European version)

Power cable installation procedure
1. Remove the front cover (in frame size R6 the lower front cover) by releasing the
retaining clip with a screw driver and lifting the cover from the bottom outwards.
For IP55 units, see Mechanical installation: Mounting the drive on the wall.
2. Slide the back plate of the connection box to the holes below the drive.
3. Fasten the back plate to the drive frame with two screws / three screws in frame
size R6.
4. Cut adequate holes into the rubber grommets and slide the grommets onto the
cables. Slide the cables through the holes of the bottom plate.
5. Strip off the plastic sheath of the cable under the 360 degrees grounding clamp.
Fasten the clamp onto the stripped part of the cable.
6. Connect the twisted shield of the cable to the grounding terminal. Note: Cable
lugs are needed in frame sizes R2 and R3.
7. Connect the phase conductors of the mains cable to the U1, V1 and W1 terminals
and the phase conductors of the motor cable to the U2, V2 and W2 terminals.
8. Fasten the bottom plate of the connection box with two screws to the already
fastened back plate and slide the grommets into their place.
9. Secure the cables outside the unit mechanically. Connect the control cables as
described in section Connecting the control cables. Fasten the covers (see
Fastening the control cables and covers).
65
Connection box (IP21)

Back plate Fastening hooks
2 3 2
3
Fastening screws
8
3
1 8
360 degrees grounding 4

clamp Grommet
Input cable entry Motor cable entry

Brake resistor cable entry
Control cable entry
Bottom plate
Fasten the
control
cables
between
these plates
with cable
Cover
ties
Frame sizes R2 to R4
U1 V1 W1 UDC+
U2 V2 W2
R- R+ UDC-
PE
6 6
5 5
66
Frame size R5
UDC+
U1 V1 W1 R- R+ UDC- U2 V2 W2 6
3 3
6 6
8 8
5
5
67
Frame size R6: Cable lug installation [16 to 70 mm2 (6 to 2/0 AWG) cables]
Remove the screw terminals. Fasten the cable lugs

to the remaining bolts with M10 nuts.
Isolate the ends of a
a the cable lugs with
PE 6 Connection plate
insulating tape or
fastening screws
shrink tubing.
3 3
5 5
Frame size R6: Cable terminal installation [95 to 240 mm2 (3/0 to 500 MCM) cables]
PE 6
a
a. Connect the cable to the terminal.
3 b. Connect the terminal to the drive.

3
WARNING! If the wire size is less than
95 mm2 (3/0 AWG), a cable lug must
5 5 be used. A cable of wire size less than
95 mm2 (3/0 AWG) connected to this
terminal will loosen and may damage
the drive.
68
Wall installed units (US version)

1. Remove the front cover (in frame size R6 the lower front cover) by releasing the
retaining clip with a screw driver and lifting the cover from the bottom outwards.
2. Make the cable entry holes in the gland box by breaking off the suitable knock-out
plates with a screw driver.
3. Fasten the cable glands to the opened holes of the gland box.
4. Fasten the gland box to the frame with two screws / three screws in frame size
R6.
UDC+
U1 V1 W1 R- R+ UDC- U2 V2 W2
4 4
PE
3 3
5. Lead the cables through the glands to the inside of the gland box.
6. Connect the PE conductors of the input and motor cables to the grounding
terminal. Note: cable lugs are needed in frame sizes R2 and R3. Connect the
separate PE conductor (if used) to the grounding terminal.
7. Connect the phase conductors of the input cable to the U1, V1 and W1 terminals
For frame size R6, see Wall installed units (European version) / figures for frame
size R6. In case of a cable lug installation, use UL listed cable lugs and tools
given below or corresponding to meet UL requirements.
69
Wire size Compression lug Crimping tool

MCM/AWG Manufacturer Type Manufacturer Type No. of crimps
6 Burndy YAV6C-L2 Burndy MY29-3 1
Ilsco CCL-6-38 Ilsco ILC-10 2
4 Burndy YA4C-L4BOX Burndy MY29-3 1
Ilsco CCL-4-38 Ilsco MT-25 1
Ilsco CRC-2 Ilsco IDT-12 1
Ilsco CRA-1-38 Ilsco IDT-12 1
Thomas & Betts 54148 Thomas & Betts TBM-8 3
1/0 Burndy YA25-L4BOX Burndy MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRB-0 Ilsco IDT-12 1
Ilsco CCL-1/0-38 Ilsco MT-25 1
2/0 Burndy YAL26T38 Burndy MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRA-2/0 Ilsco IDT-12 1
8. Tighten the clamping nuts of the cable glands.

After connecting the control cables, fasten the front covers.
Warning sticker
There are warning stickers in different languages inside the packing box of the drive.
Attach a warning sticker in the language of your choice onto the plastic skeleton
above the power cable terminals.
70
Cabinet installation (IP21, UL type 1)

The drive can be installed in a cabinet without the connection box and front cover.
It is recommended:
• to ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the cabinet entry
• to lead the cable unstripped as close to the terminals as possible.
Secure the cables mechanically.
Protect the RMIO board terminals X25 to X27 against contact when input voltage
exceeds 50 V AC.
Frame size R5
Cover the power cable terminals as follows:
1. Cut holes for the installed cables into the clear plastic shroud.
2. Press the shroud onto the terminals.
1 2
Removal of the shroud with a screw driver:
71
Frame size R6
Cover the power cable terminals as follows:
1. Cut holes for the installed cables into the clear plastic shroud in cable lug
installations.
2. Press the shroud onto the terminals.
View of cable terminal

2 installation
Removal of the shroud by lifting up with a screw driver from the corner:
72
Connecting the control cables

Lead the cable through the control cable entry (1).
Connect the control cables as described below. Connect the conductors to the
appropriate detachable terminals of the RMIO board [refer to chapter Motor control
and I/O board (RMIO)]. Tighten the screws to secure the connection.
Terminals
The control cable connection terminals are
exposed when the control panel mounting platform
is turned aside by pulling this knob. Be careful, do Detachable connection terminals (pull up)
not use excess force when pulling.
X39 for control panel cable
Terminal for optional Prevention of

unexpected start-up (+Q950) or optional
Safe torque off (+Q967) function.
Connect the external AGPS or ASTO
Option module 1
board here. See page 77 or 83.
X41
Option module 2
I/O cables: Ground the DDCS communication

control cable shields in the option module 3:
holes with screws. See RDCO
section 360 degrees
grounding. Place the warning
sticker here
4
3
2
1
73
Frame sizes R5 and R6
View of frame size R6
Control panel
Option module 2
Option module 1 DDCS communication option module 3: RDCO
Place the warning sticker here

Control cable
X41 Detachable connection terminals (pull up)
grounding: see
section 360
degrees Terminal for optional Prevention of unexpected
grounding start-up (+Q950) or optional Safe torque off
(+Q967) function.
Connect the external AGPS or ASTO board here.
See page 77 or 83.
74
360 degrees grounding
Insulation
4
3
2
1
Double-shielded cable Single-shielded cable
When the outer surface of the shield is covered with non-conductive material:
• Strip the cable carefully (do not cut the grounding wire and the shield)
• Turn the shield inside out to expose the conductive surface.
• Wrap the grounding wire around the conductive surface.
• Slide a conductive clamp onto the conductive part.
• Fasten the clamp to the grounding plate with a screw as close as possible to the
terminals where the wires are about to be connected.
Connecting the shield wires

Single-shielded cables: Twist the grounding wires of the outer shield and connect
them through the shortest possible route to the nearest grounding hole with a cable
lug and a screw. Double-shielded cables: Connect each pair cable shield (twisted
grounding wires) with other pair cable shields of the same cable to the nearest
grounding hole with a cable lug and a screw.
Do not connect shields of different cables to the same cable lug and grounding
screw.
Leave the other end of the shield unconnected or ground it indirectly via a few
nanofarads high-frequency capacitor (e.g. 3.3 nF / 630 V). The shield can also be
grounded directly at both ends if they are in the same ground line with no significant
voltage drop between the end points.
Keep the signal wire pairs twisted as close to the terminals as possible. Twisting the
wire with its return wire reduces disturbances caused by inductive coupling.
75
Cabling of I/O and fieldbus modules
Module
As short as possible
Shield
4
3
2
1
Note: The RDIO module does not

include a terminal for cable shield
grounding. Ground the pair cable
shields here.
Pulse encoder module cabling
As short as
possible
Note 1: If the encoder is of
1
2 unisolated type, ground the encoder
3
4 cable at the drive end only. If the
encoder is galvanically isolated
from the motor shaft and the stator
frame, ground the encoder cable
Shield
shield at the drive and the encoder

RTAC end.
Note 2: Twist the pair cable wires.
Wrap copper tape around the

stripped part of the cable under the
clamp. Be careful. Do not cut the
grounding wire. Clamp as close to
the terminals as possible.
76
Fastening the control cables and covers

When all control cables are connected, fasten them together with cable ties. Units
with a connection box: fasten the cables to the entry plate with cable ties. Units with
a gland box: tighten the clamping nuts of the cable glands.
Fasten the connection box cover.
US cover
Replace the front cover.
Installation of option modules and PC

Option modules (such as fieldbus adapter, I/O extension module and the pulse
encoder interface) are inserted in the option module slots of the RMIO board (see
Connecting the control cables) and fixed with two screws. See the appropriate option
module manual for cable connections.
Fibre optic link

A DDCS fibre optic link is provided via the RDCO option module for PC tools,
master/follower link and the AIMA-01 I/O module adapter. See chapter RDCO-01/02/
03/04 DDCS communication option modules on page 169 for the connections.
Observe colouring codes when installing fibre optic cables. Blue connectors go to
blue terminals, and grey connectors to grey terminals.
77
Installation of the AGPS board (Prevention of

unexpected start-up, +Q950)

This chapter describes electrical installation of the optional Prevention of
unexpected start-up function (+Q950) of the drive, and gives instructions for starting
up, validating and using the function.
Prevention of unexpected start-up (+Q950)

The optional Prevention of unexpected start-up function includes an external AGPS
board which is connected to the drive and an external power supply. See also
chapter Prevention of unexpected start-up (option +Q950), page 48.
Installation of the AGPS board
WARNING! Dangerous voltages can be present on the AGPS board even when the
115...230 V AC supply is switched off. Follow the Safety instructions on the first
pages of this manual and the instruction in this chapter when working on the AGPS
board.
Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the mains (input power) and the
115...230 V AC source for the AGPS board is switched off during installation
and maintenance. If the drive is already connected to the mains, wait for 5 min
after disconnecting mains power.
WARNING! The supply voltage for the AGPS board is 230 V AC. If the board is
supplied with 24 V DC, the board is damaged and it needs to be replaced.

78
The following figure shows how the external AGPS board is connected to the drive.
The cable (length 3 m [10 ft]) is delivered with the AGPS board.
X2
3 m (10 ft)
X41
See
• page 72 for location of terminal X41 of the drive
• page 80 for the circuit diagram
• page 157 for the dimensions of the AGPS board
• page 124 for the technical data of the AGPS-11C board.

79
Connect the AGPS board as follows:

• Remove the enclosure cover by undoing the fixing screws (1).
• Ground the unit via the bottom plate of the enclosure or via terminal X1:1 of the
AGPS board.
• Connect the cable delivered with the kit between terminal X2 of the AGPS board
(2) and drive terminal X41.
WARNING! Use only the AGPS cable delivered with the kit. Using another cable or
modifying the cable may cause a malfunction of the drive.
• Connect a cable between connector X1 of the AGPS board (3) and the
115...230 V AC source.
• Fasten the enclosure cover back with screws.
X2
X1
115...230 V AC
3

80
Circuit diagram
This circuit diagram shows how the AGPS-11 kit is installed.
3AFE00374994

81
Start-up and validation

Action
Follow the safety instructions, see section Safety instructions on page 5.
Ensure that the drive can be run and stopped freely during the start-up.
Stop the drive (if running), switch the input power off and isolate the drive from the power line by a
disconnector.
Check the Prevention of unexpected start-up circuit connections against the circuit diagram.
Close the disconnector and switch the power on.
Test the operation of the Prevention of unexpected start-up function when the motor is stopped:
• Give a stop command for the drive (if running) and wait until the motor shaft is at standstill.
• Activate the Prevention of unexpected start-up function and give a start command for the drive.
• Ensure that the drive does not start and the motor stays at standstill.
• Deactivate the Prevention of unexpected start-up function.
Use
Activate the function as follows:
• Stop the drive. Use the stop key of the panel (local mode) or give the stop
command through the I/O or fieldbus interface.
• Open the switch activating the Prevention of unexpected start-up function of the
drive. -> The indication lamp (if installed) is lit.
• Lock the switch to the open position.
• Before starting the work on the machinery, ensure that the motor shaft is at
standstill (not freely rotating).
Inactivate the function in reverse order.
Maintenance
After the operation of the circuit is validated at start-up, it does not need any
maintenance. However, it is a good practice to check the operation of the function
when other maintenance routines of the machinery are carried out.
Dimensional drawing
See page 157.

82

83
Installation of the ASTO board (Safe torque off,

+Q967)

This chapter describes the electrical installation of the optional Safe torque off
function (+Q967) of the drive and the specifications of the board.
Safe torque off (+Q967)

The optional Safe torque off function includes an external ASTO board, which is
connected to the drive and an external power supply.
For more information on the Safe torque off function, see section Safe torque off
(option +Q967) on page 49 and ACS800-01/04/11/31/104/104LC Safe torque off
function (+Q967), Application guide (3AUA0000063373 [English]).
Installation of the ASTO board
WARNING! Dangerous voltages can be present at the ASTO board even when the
24 V DC supply is switched off. Follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of
this manual and the instruction in this chapter when working on the ASTO board.
24 V DC source for the ASTO board is switched off during installation and
maintenance. If the drive is already connected to the mains, wait for 5 min after
WARNING! The supply voltage for the ASTO-11C board is 24 V DC. If the board is
supplied with 230 V AC, the board is damaged and it needs to be replaced.

84
The following figure shows how the external ASTO board is connected the drive. The
cable (length 3 m [10 ft]) is delivered with the ASTO board.
X2
3 m (10 ft)
X41
See
• page 72 for location of terminal X41 of the drive
• page 158 for the dimensions of the ASTO-11C board
• page 124 for the technical data of the ASTO-11C board.

85
Connect the ASTO board as follows:

• Remove the cover of the enclosed ASTO unit by undoing the fixing screws (1).
• Ground the ASTO unit via the bottom plate of the enclosure or via terminal X1:2
or X1:4 of the ASTO board.
• Connect the cable delivered with the kit between terminal X2 of the ASTO board
(2) and drive terminal X41.
WARNING! Use only the ASTO cable delivered with the kit. Using another cable or
modifying the cable may cause a malfunction of the drive.
• Connect a cable between connector X1 of the ASTO board (3) and the 24 V DC
source.
• Fasten the cover of the ASTO unit back with screws.
X2
X1
Note! 24 V DC
3

86
Circuit diagram
The diagram below shows the connection between the ASTO board and the drive
when it is ready. For an example diagram of a complete Safe torque off circuit, see
page 50.
3AUA0000072542

Validate and start-up the function according to the instructions given in ACS800-
01/04/11/31/104/104LC Safe torque off function (+Q967), Application guide
(3AUA0000063373 [English]).
Dimensional drawing
See page 158.

87

This chapter shows
• external control connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 Standard Control
Program (Factory Macro)
• specifications of the inputs and outputs of the board.
Note on terminal labelling

Option modules (Rxxx) may have identical terminal designations with the RMIO
board.
Note on external power supply

External +24 V DC power supply for the RMIO board is recommended if
• the application requires a fast start after connecting the input power supply
• fieldbus communication is required when the input power supply is disconnected.
The RMIO board can be supplied from an external power source via terminal X23 or
X34 or via both X23 and X34. The internal power supply to terminal X34 can be left
connected when using terminal X23.
WARNING! If the RMIO board is supplied from an external power source via
terminal X34, the loose end of the cable removed from the RMIO board terminal
must be secured mechanically to a location where it cannot come into contact with
electrical parts. If the screw terminal plug of the cable is removed, the wire ends
must be individually insulated.
Parameter settings
In Standard Control Program, set parameter 16.9 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY to
EXTERNAL 24V if the RMIO board is powered from an external supply.

88
External control connections (non-US)

External control cable connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 Standard
Control Program (Factory Macro) are shown below. For external control connections
of other control macros and programs, see the appropriate firmware manual.
X2* RMIO
X20 X20
RMIO 1 1 VREF- Reference voltage -10 V DC, 1 kohm < RL
Terminal size: 2 2 AGND < 10 kohm
cables 0.3 to 3.3 mm2 (22 to 12 AWG) X21 X21
Tightening torque: 1 1 VREF+ Reference voltage 10 V DC, 1 kohm < RL <
0.2 to 0.4 Nm 2 2 AGND 10 kohm
(0.2 to 0.3 lbf ft) 3 3 AI1+ Speed reference 0(2) ... 10 V, Rin =
4 4 AI1- 200 kohm
5 5 AI2+ By default, not in use. 0(4) ... 20 mA, Rin =
6 6 AI2- 100 ohm
8 8 AI3- 100 ohm
rpm 9 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4)...20 mA = 0...motor nom.
10 10 AO1- speed, RL < 700 ohm
A 11 11 AO2+ Output current 0(4)...20 mA = 0...motor
12 12 AO2- nom. current, RL < 700 ohm
* optional terminal block in ACS800-02 X22 X22
and ACS800-07
1 1 DI1 Stop/Start
1) Only effective if par. 10.03 is set to
2 2 DI2 Forward/Reverse 1)
REQUEST by the user. 3 3 DI3 Not in use
4 4 DI4 Acceleration & deceleration select 2)
2)
0 = open, 1 = closed 5 5 DI5 Constant speed select 3)
DI4 Ramp times according to 6 6 DI6 Constant speed select 3)
0 parameters 22.02 and 22.03
7 7 +24VD +24 V DC max. 100 mA
8 8 +24VD
3)
9 9 DGND1 Digital ground
See par. group 12 CONSTANT
SPEEDS.
DI5 DI6 Operation 11 11 DIIL Start interlock (0 = stop) 4)
0 0 Set speed through AI1 X23 X23
1 0 Constant speed 1 1 1 +24V Auxiliary voltage output and input, non-
0 1 Constant speed 2 2 2 GND isolated, 24 V DC 250 mA 5)
1 1 Constant speed 3 X25 X25
1 1 RO1 Relay output 1: ready
4)
See parameter 21.09 START INTRL 2 2 RO1
FUNC.
3 3 RO1
Typically, terminal X22:8 is
connected to X22:11 as standard. X26 X26
5) 1 1 RO2 Relay output 2: running
Total maximum current shared
between this output and option 2 2 RO2
modules installed on the board.
3 3 RO2
X27 X27
1 1 RO3 Relay output 3: fault (-1)
Fault 2 2 RO3
3 3 RO3

89
External control connections (US)

Control Program (Factory Macro US version) are shown below. For external control
connections of other control macros and programs, see the appropriate firmware
manual.
X2* RMIO
RMIO X20 X20
Terminal size: 1 1 VREF- Reference voltage -10 V DC, 1 kohm < RL
2 2 2 AGND < 10 kohm
cables 0.3 to 3.3 mm (22 to 12 AWG)
Tightening torque: X21 X21
1 1 VREF+ Reference voltage 10 V DC, 1 kohm < RL <
0.2 to 0.4 Nm (0.2 to 0.3 lbf ft)
2 2 AGND 10 kohm
3 3 AI1+ Speed reference 0(2) ... 10 V, Rin =
4 4 AI1- 200 kohm
6 6 AI2- 100 ohm
8 8 AI3- 100 ohm
X22 X22
1 1 DI1 Start ( )
2 2 DI2 Stop ( )
* optional terminal block in ACS800-U2
and ACS800-U7
5 5 DI5 Constant speed select 3)
REQUEST by the user. 6 6 DI6 Constant speed select 3)
7 7 +24VD +24 V DC max. 100 mA
2)
0 = open, 1 = closed
8 8 +24VD
DI4 Ramp times according to
11 11 DIIL Start interlock (0 = stop) 4)
3) X23 X23
SPEEDS. 1 1 +24V Auxiliary voltage output and input, non-
DI5 DI6 Operation 2 2 GND isolated, 24 V DC 250 mA 5)
1 0 Constant speed 1 1 1 RO1 Relay output 1: ready
0 1 Constant speed 2 2 2 RO1
X26 X26
4) See parameter 21.09 START INTRL
1 1 RO2 Relay output 2: running
FUNC.
Typically, terminal X22:8 is
2 2 RO2
connected to X22:11 as standard. 3 3 RO2
5) Total maximum current shared X27 X27
between this output and option 1 1 RO3 Relay output 3: fault (-1)
Fault 2 2 RO3
3 3 RO3

90
RMIO board specifications

Analogue inputs
Two programmable differential current inputs (0 mA / 4 mA ... 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm)
and one programmable differential voltage input (-10 V / 0 V / 2 V ... +10 V,
Rin = 200 kohm).
The analogue inputs are galvanically isolated as a group.
Insulation test voltage 500 V AC, 1 min
Max. common mode voltage ±15 V DC
between the channels
Common mode rejection ratio > 60 dB at 50 Hz
Resolution 0.025% (12 bit) for the -10 V ... +10 V input. 0.5% (11 bit) for the 0 ... +10 V and
0 ... 20 mA inputs.
Inaccuracy ±0.5% (Full Scale Range) at 25 °C (77 °F). Temperature coefficient: ±100 ppm/°C
(±56 ppm/°F), max.
Constant voltage output

Voltage +10 V DC, 0, -10 V DC ± 0.5% (Full Scale Range) at 25 °C (77 °F). Temperature
coefficient: ±100 ppm/°C (±56 ppm/°F) max.
Maximum load 10 mA
Applicable potentiometer 1 kohm to 10 kohm
Auxiliary power output

Voltage 24 V DC ± 10%, short circuit proof
Maximum current 250 mA (shared between this output and option modules installed on the RMIO)
Analogue outputs
Two programmable current outputs: 0 (4) to 20 mA, RL < 700 ohm
Resolution 0.1% (10 bit)
Inaccuracy ±1% (Full Scale Range) at 25 °C (77 °F). Temperature coefficient: ±200 ppm/°C
(±111 ppm/°F) max.
Digital inputs
Six programmable digital inputs (common ground: 24 V DC, -15% to +20%) and a
start interlock input. Group isolated, can be divided in two isolated groups (see
Isolation and grounding diagram below).
Thermistor input: 5 mA, < 1.5 kohm “1” (normal temperature), > 4 kohm “0”
(high temperature), open circuit “0” (high temperature).
Internal supply for digital inputs (+24 V DC): short-circuit proof. An external 24 V DC
supply can be used instead of the internal supply.
Insulation test voltage 500 V AC, 1 min
Logical thresholds < 8 V DC “0”, > 12 V DC “1”
Input current DI1 to DI 5: 10 mA, DI6: 5 mA
Filtering time constant 1 ms

91
Relay outputs
Three programmable relay outputs
Switching capacity 8 A at 24 V DC or 250 V AC, 0.4 A at 120 V DC
Minimum continuous current 5 mA rms at 24 V DC
Maximum continuous current 2 A rms
Insulation test voltage 4 kV AC, 1 minute
DDCS fibre optic link

With optional communication adapter module RDCO. Protocol: DDCS (ABB
Distributed Drives Communication System)
24 V DC power input
Voltage 24 V DC ± 10%
(without option modules)
Maximum current consumption 1200 mA (with option modules inserted)
The terminals on the RMIO board as well as on the option modules attachable to the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low
Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178 provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil
the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m (6562 ft). Above 2000 m (6562 ft), see page 58.

92
Isolation and grounding diagram
(Test voltage: 500 V AC)

X20
1 VREF-
2 AGND
X21
1 VREF+
2 AGND
3 AI1+
4 AI1- Common mode
voltage between
5 AI2+
channels ±15 V
6 AI2-
7 AI3+
8 AI3-
9 AO1+
10 AO1-
11 AO2+
12 AO2-
X22
1 DI1
2 DI2
3 DI3
4 DI4
Jumper J1 settings:
9 DGND1
5 DI5 All digital inputs share a common

J1
6 DI6 ground. This is the default setting.
7 +24VD
8 +24VD Grounds of input groups
11 DIIL DI1…DI4 and DI5/DI6/DIIL
or
are separate (insulation
10 DGND2 voltage 50 V).
X23
1 +24 V
2 GND
X25
1 RO1
2 RO1
3 RO1
X26
1 RO2
2 RO2
3 RO2
X27
1 RO3
2 RO3
3 RO3
(Test voltage:
4 kV AC)
Ground

93

This chapter contains an installation checklist.
Checklist
Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start-up. Go
through the checklist below together with another person.
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to commission the drive. Read
and follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual. Ignoring the
safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Check that...
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The ambient operating conditions are allowed. (See Mechanical installation, Technical data:
IEC data or NEMA data, Ambient conditions.)
The unit is fixed properly on a vertical non-flammable wall. (See Mechanical installation.)
The cooling air will flow freely.
The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start. (See Planning the electrical
installation: Motor selection and compatibility, Technical data: Motor connection.)
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (See Planning the electrical installation, Electrical installation.)
The +E202 and +E200 EMC filter capacitors are disconnected if the drive is connected to an
IT (ungrounded) system.
The capacitors are reformed if stored over one year, refer to Converter modules with
electrolytic DC capacitors in the DC link, Capacitor reforming instructions (3BFE64059629
[English]).
The drive is grounded properly.
The mains (input power) voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage.
The mains (input power) connections at U1, V1 and W1 and their tightening torques are OK.
Appropriate mains (input power) fuses and disconnector are installed.
The motor connections at U2, V2 and W2 and their tightening torques are OK.
The motor cable is routed away from other cables.
94
Check that...
There are no power factor compensation capacitors in the motor cable.
The external control connections inside the drive are OK.
There are no tools, foreign objects or dust from drilling inside the drive.
Mains (input power) voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive (with bypass
connection).
Drive, motor connection box and other covers are in place.
95
Start-up and use

This chapter describes the start-up procedure and use of the drive.
Startup procedure
1. Ensure that the installation of the drive has been checked according to the
checklist in chapter Installation checklist, and that the motor and driven
equipment are ready for start.
2. Switch the power on and set-up the drive control program according to the start-
up instructions given in the drive firmware manual.
3. Validate the Prevention of unexpected start-up function (option +Q950) according
to the instructions given in chapter Installation of the AGPS board (Prevention of
unexpected start-up, +Q950).
4. Validate the Safe torque off function (option +Q967) according to the instructions
given in ACS800-01/04/11/31/104/104LC Safe torque off function (+Q967),
Application guide (3AUA0000063373 [English]).
Control panel
The user interface of the drive is the control panel (type CDP 312R). For more
information on using the control panel, see the firmware manual delivered with the
drive.
Removing the control panel

To remove the control panel from the panel holder, press down the locking clip and
pull the panel out.
Start-up and use

96
Start-up and use

97
Maintenance

This chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions.
Safety
WARNING! Read the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual before
performing any maintenance on the equipment. Ignoring the safety instructions can
cause injury or death.
Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB.
Interval Maintenance Instruction
Every 6 to 12 months Heatsink temperature check See Heatsink.

(depends on the dustiness of and cleaning
the environment)
Every year when stored Capacitor reforming See Reforming.
Every 3 years Replacement of additional See Additional fan.

cooling fan in IP55 units and in
IP21 units when included
Every 6 years Cooling fan replacement See Fan.
Every 10 years Frame size R4 and up: See Capacitors.

capacitor replacement
Consult your local ABB Service representative for more details on the maintenance.
On the Internet, go to http://www.abb.com/drives.
Maintenance
98
Heatsink
The heatsink fins pick up dust from the cooling air. The drive runs into
overtemperature warnings and faults if the heatsink is not clean. In a “normal”
environment (not dusty, not clean) the heatsink should be checked annually, in a
dusty environment more often.
Clean the heatsink as follows (when necessary):
1. Remove the cooling fan (see section Fan).
2. Blow clean compressed air (not humid) from bottom to top and simultaneously
use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust. Note: If there is a risk of
the dust entering adjoining equipment, perform the cleaning in another room.
3. Refit the cooling fan.
Fan
The lifespan of the cooling fan depends on the drive usage and ambient
temperature. See the appropriate ACS800 firmware manual for an actual signal
which indicates the hours of usage of the fan. For resetting the running time signal
after a fan replacement, refer to the firmware manual.
Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the
gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning. If the drive is
operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these
symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not use
other than ABB specified spare parts.
Fan replacement (R2, R3)

To remove the fan, release the retaining clips. Disconnect the cable. Install the new
fan in reverse order.
Bottom view
Maintenance
99
Fan replacement (R4)

1. Loosen the screws that fasten the fan mounting plate to the frame.
2. Push the fan mounting plate to the left and pull it out.
3. Disconnect the fan power cable.
4. Undo the screws that fasten the fan to the fan mounting plate.
5. Install the new fan in reverse order.
1 1 Bottom view
2
3
View from above fan
plate pulled out
4 4
4 4
Maintenance
100

1. Undo the fastening screw.
2. Open the swing-out frame and disconnect the cable.
3. Undo the fastening screws of the fan.
Maintenance
101

Note: In -0205-3 and 0255-5 units, access the fan through the opening in the
support frame of the cable connection box.
1. Remove the screw attaching the fan casing and let the casing lean down against
the limiters.
2. Slide out the cable connector and disconnect it.
3. Take off the casing and replace the fan onto the casing’s pins.
3
4. Reinstall the casing in reverse order.
Maintenance
102
Additional fan
There is an additional cooling fan in all IP55 units and most IP21 units. However,
there is no additional fan in the following IP21 units: -0003-3, -0004-3, -0005-3,
-0004-5, -0005-5 and -0006-5. The following IP55 units have two additional fans:
-0205-3 and -0255-5.
Replacement (R2, R3)

Remove the front cover. To remove the fan, release the retaining clip (1). Disconnect
the cable (2, detachable terminal). Install the new fan in reverse order.
Air flow upwards

1
2 Rotation direction
View from above when front

cover is removed
Replacement (R4, R5)

Remove the front cover. The fan is located on the lower right-hand side of the unit
(R4) or on the right-hand side of the control panel (R5). Lift the fan out and
disconnect the cable. Install the fan in reverse order.
Replacement (R6)
Remove the top cover by lifting it by the rear edge. To remove the fan, release the
retaining clips by pulling the back edge (1) of the fan upwards. Disconnect the cable
(2, detachable terminal). Install the new fan in reverse order.
Air flow upwards
Rotation direction
View from above when top

2 cover is removed
Maintenance
103
Capacitors
The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors. The lifespan
depends on drive loading and ambient temperature. Capacitor life can be prolonged
by lowering the ambient temperature.
It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure. Capacitor failure is usually followed by
a mains fuse failure or a fault trip. Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected.
Replacements for frame size R4 and up are available from ABB. Do not use other
than ABB specified spare parts.
Reforming
Reform (re-age) spare part capacitors once a year according to Converter modules
with electrolytic DC capacitors in the DC link, Capacitor reforming instructions
LEDs
This table describes LEDs of the drive.
Where LED When the LED is lit
RMIO board * Red Drive in fault state

Green The power supply on the board is OK.
Control panel mounting platform Red Drive in fault state
(with type code selection +0J400
Green The main +24 V DC power supply for the control panel and the
only)
RMIO board is OK.
* The LEDs are not visible in frame sizes R2 to R6.
Maintenance
104
Maintenance
105
Technical data

This chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive, e.g. the ratings, sizes
and technical requirements, provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and
other markings and warranty policy.
IEC data
Ratings
The IEC ratings for the ACS800-01 with 50 Hz and 60 Hz supplies are given below.
The symbols are described below the table.
ACS800-01 size Nominal No- Light-overload Heavy-duty use Frame Air flow Heat
overload
ratings use
use size dissipation
Icont.max Imax Pcont.max I2N PN I2hd Phd
A A
kW
A kW A kW m3/h W
Three-phase supply voltage 208 V, 220 V, 230 V or 240 V
-0001-2 5.1 6.5 1.1 4.7 0.75 3.4 0.55 R2 35 100
-0002-2 6.5 8.2 1.5 6.0 1.1 4.3 0.75 R2 35 100
-0003-2 8.5 10.8 1.5 7.7 1.5 5.7 1.1 R2 35 100
-0004-2 10.9 13.8 2.2 10.2 2.2 7.5 1.5 R2 35 120
-0005-2 13.9 17.6 3 12.7 3 9.3 2.2 R2 35 140
-0006-2 19 24 4 18 4 14 3 R3 69 160
-0009-2 25 32 5.5 24 5,5 19 4 R3 69 200
-0011-2 34 46 7.5 31 7.5 23 5.5 R3 69 250
-0016-2 44 62 11 42 11 32 7.5 R4 103 340
-0020-2 55 72 15 50 11 37 7.5 R4 103 440
-0025-2 72 86 18.5 69 18.5 49 11 R5 250 530
-0030-2 86 112 22 80 22 60 15 R5 250 610
-0040-2 103 138 30 94 22 69 18.5 R5 250 810
-0050-2 141 164 37 132 37 97 30 R6 405 1190
-0060-2 166 202 45 155 45 115 30 R6 405 1190
-0070-2 202 282 55 184 55 141 37 R6 405 1440
Technical data
106
overload
ratings use
A A
kW
A kW A kW m3/h W
Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V or 415 V
-0003-3 5.1 6.5 1.5 4.7 1.5 3.4 1.1 R2 35 100
-0004-3 6.5 8.2 2.2 5.9 2.2 4.3 1.5 R2 35 120
-0005-3 8.5 10.8 3 7.7 3 5.7 2.2 R2 35 140
-0006-3 10.9 13.8 4 10.2 4 7.5 3 R2 35 160
-0009-3 13.9 17.6 5.5 12.7 5.5 9.3 4 R2 35 200
-0011-3 19 24 7.5 18 7.5 14 5.5 R3 69 250
-0016-3 25 32 11 24 11 19 7.5 R3 69 340
-0020-3 34 46 15 31 15 23 11 R3 69 440
-0025-3 44 62 22 41 18.5 32 15 R4 103 530
-0030-3 55 72 30 50 22 37 18.5 R4 103 610
-0040-3 72 86 37 69 30 49 22 R5 250 810
-0050-3 86 112 45 80 37 60 30 R5 250 990
-0060-3 103 138 55 94 45 69 37 R5 250 1190
-0075-3 145 170 75 141 75 100 45 R5 405 1440
-0070-3 * 141 164 75 132 55 97 45 R6 405 1440
-0100-3 166 202 90 155 75 115 55 R6 405 1940
-0120-3 202 282 110 184 90 141 75 R6 405 2310
-0135-3 225 326 110 220 110 163 90 R6 405 2810
-0165-3 260 326 132 254 132 215 110 R6 405 3260
-0205-3 290 351 160 285 160 234 132 R6 405 4200
Three-phase supply voltage 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V, 460 V, 480 V or 500 V
-0004-5 4.9 6.5 2.2 4.5 2.2 3.4 1.5 R2 35 120
-0005-5 6.2 8.2 3 5.6 3 4.2 2.2 R2 35 140
-0006-5 8.1 10.8 4 7.7 4 5.6 3 R2 35 160
-0009-5 10.5 13.8 5.5 10 5.5 7.5 4 R2 35 200
-0011-5 13.2 17.6 7.5 12 7.5 9.2 5.5 R2 35 250
-0016-5 19 24 11 18 11 13 7.5 R3 69 340
-0020-5 25 32 15 23 15 18 11 R3 69 440
-0025-5 34 46 18.5 31 18.5 23 15 R3 69 530
-0030-5 42 62 22 39 22 32 18.5 R4 103 610
-0040-5 48 72 30 44 30 36 22 R4 103 810
-0050-5 65 86 37 61 37 50 30 R5 250 990
-0060-5 79 112 45 75 45 60 37 R5 250 1190
-0070-5 96 138 55 88 55 69 45 R5 250 1440
-0105-5 145 170 90 141 90 100 55 R5 405 2150
-0100-5 * 124 164 75 115 75 88 55 R6 405 1940
-0120-5 157 202 90 145 90 113 75 R6 405 2310
-0140-5 180 282 110 163 110 141 90 R6 405 2810
-0165-5 225 326 132 220 132 163 110 R6 405 3260
-0205-5 260 326 160 254 160 215 132 R6 405 3800
-0255-5 290 351 200 285 200 234 160 R6 405 4500
* Type not available any more
Technical data
107
overload
ratings use
A A
kW
A kW A kW m3/h W
Three-phase supply voltage 525 V, 550 V, 575 V, 600 V, 660 V or 690 V
-0011-7 13 14 11 11.5 7.5 8.5 5.5 R4 103 300
-0016-7 17 19 15 15 11 11 7.5 R4 103 340
-0020-7 22 28 18.5 20 15 15 11 R4 103 440
-0025-7 25 38 22 23 18.5 19 15 R4 103 530
-0030-7 33 44 30 30 22 22 18.5 R4 103 610
-0040-7 36 54 30 34 30 27 22 R4 103 690
-0050-7 51 68 45 46 37 34 30 R5 250 840
-0060-7 57 84 55 52 45 42 37 R5 250 1010
-0070-7 79 104 75 73 55 54 45 R6 405 1220
-0100-7 93 124 90 86 75 62 55 R6 405 1650
-0120-7 113 172 110 108 90 86 75 R6 405 1960
-0145-7 134 190 132 125 110 95 90 R6 405 2660
-0175-7 166 245 160 155 132 131 110 R6 405 3470
-0205-7 190 245 160 180 160 147 132 R6 405 4180
0009693
Symbols
Nominal ratings
Icont.max continuous rms output current. No overload capability at 40 °C (104 °F).
Imax maximum output current. Available for 10 s at start, otherwise as long as allowed by drive
temperature.
Typical ratings:
No-overload use
Pcont.max typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 60034 motors at the nominal
voltage, 230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V.
Light-overload use (10% overload capability)
I2N continuous rms current. 10% overload is allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
PN typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 60034 motors at the nominal
voltage, 230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V.
Heavy-duty use (50% overload capability)
I2hd continuous rms current. 50% overload is allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
Phd typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 60034 motors at the nominal
voltage, 230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V.
Sizing
The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage
range. To achieve the rated motor power given in the table, the rated current of the
drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current.
Note 1: The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1.5 · Phd, 1.1 · PN or
Pcont.max (whichever value is greatest). If the limit is exceeded, motor torque and
current are automatically restricted. The function protects the input bridge of the
drive against overload. If the condition exists for 5 minutes, the limit is set to
Pcont.max.
Note 2: The ratings apply at an ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F). At lower
temperatures the ratings are higher (except Imax).
Technical data
108
Note 3: Use the DriveSize PC tool for a more accurate dimensioning if the ambient
temperature is below 40 °C (104 °F) or the drive is loaded cyclically.
Derating
The load capacity (current and power) decreases if the installation site altitude
exceeds 1000 metres (3300 ft), or if the ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C
(104 °F).
Temperature derating
In the temperature range +40 °C (+104 °F) to +50 °C (+122 °F) the rated output
current is decreased 1% for every additional 1 °C (1.8 °F). The output current is
calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor.
Example If the ambient temperature is 50 °C (+122 °F), the derating factor is 100% -
1 % · 10 °C = 90% or 0.90. The output current is then 0.90 · I2N or 0.90 · I2hd.
°C
Altitude derating
In altitudes from 1000 to 4000 m (3300 to 13123 ft) above sea level, the derating is
1% for every 100 m (328 ft). For a more accurate derating, use the DriveSize PC
tool. See Installation sites above 2000 metres (6562 feet) on page 58.
Fuses
gG and aR fuses for protection against short-circuit in the input power cable or drive
are listed below. Either fuse type may be used if it operates rapidly enough.
Check from the fuse time-current curve that the operating time of the fuse is
below 0.5 seconds. The operating time depends on the supply network impedance
and the cross-sectional area and length of the supply cable. The short-circuit current
can be calculated as shown below in section Frame sizes R5 and R6.
Note 1: See also Planning the electrical installation: Thermal overload and short-circuit protection. For
UL recognized fuses, see NEMA data on page 118.
Note 2: In multicable installations, install only one fuse per phase (not one fuse per conductor).
Note 3: Larger fuses than the recommended ones must not be used.
Note 4: Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they meet the ratings and the melting curve of
the fuse does not exceed the melting curve of the fuse mentioned in the table.
Technical data
109
ACS800-01 Input Fuse

size current A A2s V Manufacturer Type IEC size
-0001-2 4.4 10 483 500 ABB Control OFAF000H10 000
-0005-2 12 16 993 500 ABB Control OFAF000H16 000
-0011-7 12 16 1100 690 ABB Control OFAA000GG16 000
00096931
Technical data
110
Frame sizes R5 and R6

Choose between gG and aR fuses according to the table under Quick guide for
selecting between gG and aR fuses on page 114, or verify the operating time by
checking that the short-circuit current of the installation is at least the value
given in the fuse table. The short-circuit current can be calculated as follows:
U
Ik2-ph =
2· Rc2 + (Zk + Xc)2
where
Ik2-ph = short-circuit current in symmetrical two-phase short-circuit
U = network line-to-line voltage (U)
Rc = cable resistance (ohm)
Zk = zk · UN2/SN = transformer impedance (ohm)
zk = transformer impedance (%)
UN = transformer rated voltage (V)
SN = nominal apparent power of the transformer (kVA)
Xc = cable reactance (ohm).
Calculation example
Drive:
• ACS800-01-0075-3
• supply voltage
Transformer:
• rated power SN = 600 kVA
• rated voltage (drive supply voltage) UN = 430 V
• transformer impedance zk = 7.2%.
Supply cable:
• length = 170 m
• resistance/length = 0.398 ohm/km
• reactance/length = 0.082 ohm/km.
UN2 (430 V)2

Zk = zk · = 0.072 · = 22.19 mohm
SN 600 kVA
ohm
Rc = 170 m · 0.398 km = 67.66 mohm
ohm
Xc = 170 m · 0.082 = 13.94 mohm
km
Technical data
111
410 V
Ik2-ph = = 2.7 kA
2· (67.66 mohm)2 + (22.19 mohm + 13.94 mohm)2
The calculated short-circuit current 2.7 kA is higher than the minimum short-circuit
current of the drive gG fuse type OFAF00H160 (2400 A). -> The 500 V gG fuse (ABB
Control OFAF00H160) can be used.
Fuse tables for frame sizes R5 and R6
Standard gG fuses
ACS800-01 size Input Min. Fuse
current short-
circuit
current 1)
A A A2s * V Manufacturer Type IEC size
-0025-2 67 1050 80 34500 500 ABB Control OFAF000H80 000
-0070-3 ** 138 2400 160 200000 500 ABB Control OFAF00H160 00
Technical data
112
Standard gG fuses
current short-
circuit
current 1)
A A A2s * V Manufacturer Type IEC size
-0100-5 ** 121 2400 160 200000 500 ABB Control OFAF00H160 00
-0050-7 52 740 63 28600 690 ABB Control OFAA0GG63 0
* maximum total I2t value for 550 V or 690 V
** Type not available any more.
1)
minimum short-circuit current of the installation
Note 1: See also Planning the electrical installation: Thermal overload and short-circuit protection. For UL recognized
fuses, see NEMA data on page 118.
Note 4: Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they meet the ratings and the melting curve of the fuse does not
exceed the melting curve of the fuse mentioned in the table.
00096931, 00556489
Technical data
113
Ultrarapid (aR) fuses

current short-
circuit
current 1)
A A A2s V Manufacturer Type IEC size
-0025-2 67 400 100 4650 690 Bussmann 170M1567D DIN000
-0030-2 81 520 125 8500 690 Bussmann 170M1568D DIN000
-0040-2 101 695 160 8500 690 Bussmann 170M1569D DIN000
-0050-2 138 1630 315 80500 690 Bussmann 170M1572D DIN000
-0060-2 163 1280 315 46500 690 Bussmann 170M3817D DIN1*
-0070-2 202 1810 400 105000 690 Bussmann 170M3819D DIN1*
-0040-3 69 400 100 4650 690 Bussmann 170M1567D DIN000
-0050-3 83 520 125 8500 690 Bussmann 170M1568D DIN000
-0060-3 100 695 160 8500 690 Bussmann 170M1569D DIN000
-0075-3 142 1630 315 80500 690 Bussmann 170M1572D DIN000
-0070-3 ** 138 1630 315 80500 690 Bussmann 170M1572D DIN000
-0100-3 163 1280 315 46500 690 Bussmann 170M3817D DIN1*
-0120-3 198 1810 400 105000 690 Bussmann 170M3819D DIN1*
-0135-3 221 2210 500 145000 690 Bussmann 170M5810D DIN2*
-0165-3 254 2620 550 190000 690 Bussmann 170M5811D DIN2*
-0205-3 286 2620 550 190000 690 Bussmann 170M5811D DIN2*
-0050-5 64 400 100 4650 690 Bussmann 170M1567D DIN000
-0060-5 78 520 125 8500 690 Bussmann 170M1568D DIN000
-0070-5 95 520 125 8500 690 Bussmann 170M1568D DIN000
-0105-5 142 1630 315 80500 690 Bussmann 170M1572D DIN000
-0100-5 ** 121 1630 315 80500 690 Bussmann 170M1572D DIN000
-0120-5 155 1280 315 46500 690 Bussmann 170M3817D DIN1*
-0140-5 180 1810 400 105000 690 Bussmann 170M3819D DIN1*
-0165-5 222 2210 500 145000 690 Bussmann 170M5810D DIN2*
-0205-5 256 2620 550 190000 690 Bussmann 170M5811D DIN2*
-0255-5 286 2620 550 190000 690 Bussmann 170M5811D DIN2*
-0050-7 52 400 100 4650 690 Bussmann 170M1567D 000
-0060-7 58 400 100 4650 690 Bussmann 170M1567D 000
-0070-7 79 520 125 8500 690 Bussmann 170M1568D 000
-0100-7 91 695 160 16000 690 Bussmann 170M1569D 000
-0120-7 112 750 200 15000 690 Bussmann 170M3815D 1*
-0145-7 131 1520 350 68500 690 Bussmann 170M3818D DIN1*
-0175-7 162 1520 350 68500 690 Bussmann 170M3818D DIN1*
-0205-7 186 1610 400 74000 690 Bussmann 170M5808D DIN2*
1) minimum short-circuit current of the installation
** Type not available any more.

Note 1: See also Planning the electrical installation: Thermal overload and short-circuit protection. For UL recognized
fuses, see NEMA data on page 118.
Note 4: Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they meet the ratings and the melting curve of the fuse does not
exceed the melting curve of the fuse mentioned in the table.
00096931, 00556489
Technical data
114
Quick guide for selecting between gG and aR fuses

The table below is a short cut in selecting between gG and aR fuses. The
combinations (cable size, cable length, transformer size and fuse type) in the table
fulfil the minimum requirements for the proper operation of the fuse.
ACS800-01 size Cable type Supply transformer minimum apparent power SN (kVA)
Copper Aluminium Max. cable length with gG fuses Max. cable length with aR fuses
10 m 50 m 100 m 10 m 100 m 200 m
-0025-2 3×25 Cu 3×35 Al 31 38 - 27 27 -
-0030-2 3×35 Cu 3×50 Al 44 55 - 33 33 -
-0040-2 3×50 Cu 3×70 Al 58 71 - 41 41 -
-0050-2 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 72 87 - 55 70 -
-0060-2 3×95 Cu 3×120 Al 85 110 - 65 70 -
-0070-2 3×120 Cu 3×185 Al 1) 99 120 - 81 81 -
-0040-3 3×25 Cu 3×35 Al 54 57 71 48 48 48
-0050-3 3×35 Cu 3×50 Al 76 82 110 58 58 58
-0060-3 3×50 Cu 3×70 Al 100 110 140 70 70 70
-0075-3 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 2) 130 140 160 99 99 140
-0070-3 * 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 130 140 160 96 96 140
-0100-3 3×95 Cu 3×120 Al 150 160 190 120 120 140
-0120-3 3×120 Cu 3×185 Al 1) 170 190 210 140 140 140
-0135-3 3×150 Cu 3×240 Al 3) 200 220 250 160 160 160
-0165-3 3×185 Cu 3×240 Al 3) 240 260 310 180 180 200
-0205-3 3×240 Cu 2×(3×95) Al 4) 232 257 310 134 153 196
-0050-5 3×25 Cu 3×35 Al 67 70 79 56 56 56
-0060-5 3×25 Cu 3×50 Al 95 110 130 68 68 68
-0070-5 3×35 Cu 3×70 Al 130 140 160 83 83 83
-0105-5 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 2) 160 170 190 130 130 150
-0100-5 * 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 160 170 190 110 120 150
-0120-5 3×95 Cu 3×120 Al 190 200 220 140 140 150
-0140-5 3×95 Cu 3×150 Al 190 200 220 160 160 160
-0165-5 3×150 Cu 3×240 Al 3) 250 260 290 200 200 200
-0205-5 3×185 Cu 3×240 Al 3) 290 320 360 230 230 230
-0255-5 3×240 Cu 2×(3×95) Al 4) 289 312 355 167 185 218
1)
This cable type cannot be used in the drive because the lead-through in the drive is too small.
2) This cable type cannot be used in the drive because the cable terminal is too small.
3) This cable type cannot be used in the drive because the lead-through in the cable connection box is too small (see the
Dimensional drawings).
4) This cable type cannot be used in the drive because the cable lug is not designed for multiple wires.
* Type not available any more.
Technical data
115
ACS800-01 size Cable type Supply transformer minimum apparent power SN (kVA)
Copper Aluminium Max. cable length with gG fuses Max. cable length with aR fuses
10 m 50 m 100 m 10 m 100 m 200 m
-0050-7 3×16 Cu 3×25 Al 65 67 70 63 63 63
-0060-7 3×16 Cu 3×25 Al 70 70 70 70 70 70
-0070-7 3×25 Cu 3×50 Al 95 95 99 95 95 95
-0100-7 3×35 Cu 3×50 Al 130 140 150 110 110 110
-0120-7 3×50 Cu 3×70 Al 180 180 190 140 140 140
-0145-7 3×70 Cu 3×95 Al 220 220 240 160 160 160
-0175-7 3×95 Cu 3×120 Al 260 260 280 200 200 200
-0205-7 3×95 Cu 3×150 Al 340 360 390 230 230 230
Note 1: The supply transformer minimum power in kVA is calculated with a zk value of 6% and frequency 50 Hz.
Note 2: This table is not intended for transformer selection - that must be done separately.
The following parameters may effect on the correct operation of the protection:
• cable length, i.e. the longer the cable the weaker the fuse protection, as the long
cable limits the fault current
• cable size, i.e. the smaller the cable the weaker the fuse protection, as the small
cable size limits the fault current
• transformer size, i.e the smaller the transformer the weaker the fuse protection,
as the small transformer limits the fault current
• transformer impedance, i.e. the higher the zk the weaker the fuse protection as
high impedance limits the fault current.
The protection can be improved by installing a larger supply transformer and/or
bigger cables, and in most cases by selecting aR fuses instead of gG fuses.
Selection of smaller fuses improves the protection, but may also affect the fuse life
time and lead to unnecessary operation of the fuses.
In case of any uncertainty regarding the drive protection, please contact your local
ABB.
Technical data
116
Cable types
The table below gives copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents.
Cable sizing is based on max. 9 cables laid on a cable ladder side by side, ambient
temperature 30 °C (86 °F), PVC insulation, surface temperature 70 °C (158 °F)
(EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-52:2001). For other conditions, size the cables
according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the load current
of the drive.
Copper cables with Aluminium cables with
concentric copper shield concentric copper shield
Max. load Cable type Max. load Cable type
current current
A mm2 A mm2
13 3×1.5 61 3×25
18 3×2.5 69 3×35
24 3×4 83 3×50
30 3×6 107 3×70
42 3×10 130 3×95
56 3×16 151 3×120
71 3×25 174 3×150
88 3×35 199 3×185
107 3×50 235 3×240
137 3×70 274 3 × (3×50) *
167 3×95 260 2 × (3×95) *
193 3×120
223 3×150
255 3×185
301 3×240
3BFA 01051905
* This cable type cannot be used in this drive because the cable lug
is not designed for multiple wires.
Technical data
117
Cable entries
Brake resistor, mains and motor cable terminal sizes (per phase), accepted cable
diameters and tightening torques are given below.
Frame U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, R+, R- Earthing PE
size Wire size Max. cable Ø Cable Ø Tightening Wire size Tightening
IP21 IP55 torque torque
mm2 mm mm Nm mm2 Nm
R2 up to 16* 21 14...20 1.2...1.5 up to 10 1.5
R3 up to 16* 21 14...20 1.2...1.5 up to 10 1.5
R4 up to 25 29 23...35 2…4 up to 16 3.0
R5 6...70 35 23...35 15 6...70 15
R6 95...240 **† 53 † 30...45 † 20...40 95 8
* 16 mm2 rigid solid cable, 10 mm2 flexible stranded cable

** with cable lugs 16...70 mm2, tightening torque 20...40 Nm. These smaller cable lugs are not included
in the delivery. See page 67.
†
In -0205-3 and -0255-5 units, the maximum cable diameter is 69 mm (IP21 units) or 40...60 mm (IP55
units).
Dimensions, weights and noise

H1: height with cable connection box
H2: height without cable connection box.
Frame IP21 IP55 Noise
size H1 H2 Width Depth Weight Height Width Depth Weight
mm mm mm mm kg mm mm mm kg dB
R2 405 370 165 226 9 528 263 241 16 62
R3 471 420 173 265 14 528 263 273 18 62
R4 607 490 240 274 26 774 377 278 33 62
R5 739 602 265 286 34 775 377 308 51 65
R6 880* 700 300 399 67* 923 420 420 77 65
* In -0205-3 and -0255-5 units, H1 is 977 mm and weight is 70 kg.
Package dimensions and weights

Frame size IP21 IP55
H1 Width Depth Weight Height Width Depth Weight
mm mm mm kg mm mm mm kg
R2 400 470 270 2 370 620 390 5
R3 430 500 270 2 370 620 390 5
R4 520 560 340 2 410 860 460 5
R5 540 670 350 2 410 860 460 5
R2-R5 580 930 560 17 580 930 560 17
with option +Q950
or +Q967
R6 549 1085 400 15 577 1250 565 20
Technical data
118
NEMA data
Ratings
The NEMA ratings for the ACS800-U1 with 60 Hz supplies are given below. The
symbols are described below the table. For sizing, derating and 50 Hz supplies, see
IEC data on page 105.
ACS800-U1 size Imax Normal use Heavy-duty use Frame Air flow Heat
size dissipation
I2N PN I2hd Phd
A A hp A hp ft3/min BTU/Hr
-0002-2 8.2 6.6 1.5 4.6 1 R2 21 350
-0003-2 10.8 8.1 2 6.6 1.5 R2 21 350
-0004-2 13.8 11 3 7.5 2 R2 21 410
-0006-2 24 21 5 13 3 R3 41 550
-0009-2 32 27 7.5 17 5 R3 41 680
-0011-2 46 34 10 25 7.5 R3 41 850
-0016-2 62 42 15 31 10 R4 61 1150
-0020-2 72 54 20 1) 42 15 2) R4 61 1490
-0025-2 86 69 25 54 20 2) R5 147 1790
-0030-2 112 80 30 68 25 2) R5 147 2090
-0040-2 138 104 40 1) 80 30 2) R5 147 2770
-0050-2 164 132 50 104 40 R6 238 3370
-0060-2 202 157 60 130 50 2) R6 238 4050
-0070-2 282 192 75 154 60 2) R6 238 4910
-0004-5 6.5 4.9 3 3.4 2 R2 21 410
-0005-5 8.2 6.2 3 4.2 2 R2 21 480
-0006-5 10.8 8.1 5 5.6 3 R2 21 550
-0009-5 13.8 11 7.5 8.1 5 R2 21 690
-0011-5 17.6 14 10 11 7.5 R2 21 860
-0016-5 24 21 15 15 10 R3 41 1150
-0020-5 32 27 20 21 15 R3 41 1490
-0025-5 46 34 25 27 20 R3 41 1790
-0030-5 62 42 30 34 25 R4 61 2090
-0040-5 72 52 40 37 30 3) R4 61 2770
-0050-5 86 65 50 52 40 R5 147 3370
-0060-5 112 79 60 65 50 R5 147 4050
-0070-5 138 96 75 77 60 R5 147 4910
-0105-5 170 141 100 100 75 R5 238 7340
-0100-5 5) 164 124 100 96 75 R6 238 6610
-0120-5 202 157 125 124 100 R6 238 7890
-0140-5 282 180 150 156 125 R6 238 9600
-0205-5 326 245 200 215 150 R6 238 12980
Technical data
119
ACS800-U1 size Imax Normal use Heavy-duty use Frame Air flow Heat
size dissipation
I2N PN I2hd Phd
Three-phase supply voltage 525 V, 575 V, 600 V
-0011-7 14 11.5 10 8.5 7.5 R4 61 1050
-0016-7 19 15 10 11 10 R4 61 1200
-0020-7 28 20 15/20 4) 15 152) R4 61 1550
-0025-7 38 23 20 20 202) R4 61 1850
-0030-7 44 30 25/30 4) 25 252) R4 61 2100
-0040-7 54 34 30 30 302) R4 61 2400
-0050-7 68 46 40 40 402) R5 147 2900
-0060-7 84 52 50 42 40 R5 147 3450
-0070-7 104 73 60 54 50 R6 238 4200
-0100-7 124 86 75 62 60 R6 238 5650
-0120-7 172 108 100 86 75 R6 238 6700
-0145-7 190 125 125 99 100 R6 238 9100
-0175-7 245 155 150 131 125 R6 238 11850
-0205-7 245 192 200 147 150 R6 238 14300
00096931
1) Overload may be limited to 5% at high speeds (> 90% speed) by the internal power limit of the drive.
The limitation also depends on motor characteristics and network voltage.
2)
Overload may be limited to 40% at high speeds (> 90% speed) by the internal power limit of the
drive. The limitation also depends on motor characteristics and network voltage.
3) Special 4-pole high-efficiency NEMA motor
4) Higher rating is available with special 4-pole high-efficiency NEMA motor
5) Type not available any more.
Symbols
Nominal ratings
temperature.
Normal use (10% overload capability)
I2N continuous rms current. 10% overload is typically allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
PN typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA rated motors (230 V,
460 V or 575 V).
I2hd continuous rms current. 50% overload is typically allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
Phd typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA rated motors (230 V,
460 V or 575 V).
Note 1: The ratings apply at an ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F). In lower temperatures the
ratings are higher (except Imax).
Sizing
See page 107.
Derating
See page 108.
Technical data
120
Fuses
UL class T fuses for branch circuit protection are listed below. Fast acting class T or
faster fuses are recommended in the USA.
Check from the fuse time-current curve that the operating time of the fuse is
below 0.5 seconds for units of frame sizes R2 to R4 and 0.1 seconds for units
of frame sizes R5 and R6. The operating time depends on the supply network
impedance and the cross-sectional area and length of the supply cable. The short-
circuit current can be calculated as shown in section Frame sizes R5 and R6 on
page 110.
Note 1: See also Planning the electrical installation: Thermal overload and short-circuit protection.
Note 3: Larger fuses must not be used.
Note 4: Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they meet the ratings and the melting curve of
the fuse does not exceed the melting curve of the fuse mentioned in the table.
ACS800-U1 type Frame size Input Fuse
current
A A V Manufacturer Type UL class
-0002-2 R2 5.2 10 600 Bussmann JJS-10 T
-0003-2 R2 6.5 10 600 Bussmann JJS-10 T
-0004-2 R2 9.2 15 600 Bussmann JJS-15 T
-0006-2 R3 18 25 600 Bussmann JJS-25 T
-0009-2 R3 24 30 600 Bussmann JJS-30 T
-0011-2 R3 31 40 600 Bussmann JJS-40 T
-0016-2 R4 38 50 600 Bussmann JJS-50 T
-0020-2 R4 49 70 600 Bussmann JJS-70 T
-0025-2 R5 64 90 600 Bussmann JJS-90 T
-0030-2 R5 75 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 T
-0040-2 R5 102 125 600 Bussmann JJS-125 T
-0050-2 R6 126 175 600 Bussmann JJS-175 T
-0060-2 R6 153 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0070-2 R6 190 250 600 Bussmann JJS-250 T
-0004-5 R2 4.1 10 600 Bussmann JJS-10 T
-0005-5 R2 5.4 10 600 Bussmann JJS-10 T
-0006-5 R2 6.9 10 600 Bussmann JJS-10 T
-0009-5 R2 9.8 15 600 Bussmann JJS-15 T
-0011-5 R2 13 20 600 Bussmann JJS-20 T
-0016-5 R3 18 25 600 Bussmann JJS-25 T
-0020-5 R3 24 35 600 Bussmann JJS-35 T
-0025-5 R3 31 40 600 Bussmann JJS-40 T
-0030-5 R4 40 50 600 Bussmann JJS-50 T
-0040-5 R4 52 70 600 Bussmann JJS-70 T
-0050-5 R5 63 80 600 Bussmann JJS-80 T
-0060-5 R5 77 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 T
-0070-5 R5 94 125 600 Bussmann JJS-125 T
-0105-5 R5 138 150 600 Bussmann JJS-150 T
-0100-5 * R6 121 150 600 Bussmann JJS-150 T
-0120-5 R6 155 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0140-5 R6 179 225 600 Bussmann JJS-225 T
-0205-5 R6 243 350 600 Bussmann JJS-350 T
Technical data
121
ACS800-U1 type Frame size Input Fuse

current
Three-phase supply voltage 525 V, 575 V, 600 V
-0011-7 R4 10 20 600 Bussmann JJS-20 T
-0016-7 R4 13 20 600 Bussmann JJS-20 T
-0020-7 R4 19 30 600 Bussmann JJS-30 T
-0025-7 R4 21 30 600 Bussmann JJS-30 T
-0030-7 R4 29 45 600 Bussmann JJS-45 T
-0040-7 R4 32 45 600 Bussmann JJS-45 T
-0050-7 R5 45 70 600 Bussmann JJS-70 T
-0060-7 R5 51 80 600 Bussmann JJS-80 T
-0070-7 R6 70 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 T
-0100-7 R6 82 125 600 Bussmann JJS-125 T
-0120-7 R6 103 150 600 Bussmann JJS-150 T
-0145-7 R6 121 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0175-7 R6 150 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0205-7 R6 188 250 600 Bussmann JJS-250 T
* Type not available any more. 00096931, 00556489
Cable types
Cable sizing is based on NEC Table 310-16 for copper wires, 75 °C (167 °F) wire
insulation at 40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature. Not more than three current-
carrying conductors in raceway or cable or earth (directly buried). For other
conditions, dimension the cables according to local safety regulations, appropriate
input voltage and the load current of the drive.
Copper cables with concentric copper
shield
Max. load Cable type
current
A AWG/MCM
18 14
22 12
31 10
44 8
57 6
75 4
88 3
101 2
114 1
132 1/0
154 2/0
176 3/0
202 4/0
224 250 MCM or 2 × 1
251 300 MCM or 2 × 1/0
00096931
Technical data
122
Cable Entries
Brake resistor, input and motor cable (per phase) terminal sizes, accepted cable
Frame U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, R+, R- Earthing PE
size Wire size Knock-out hole Ø Tightening Wire size Tightening
(UL type 1) torque torque
AWG in. lbf ft AWG lbf ft
R2 up to 6* 1.10 0.9…1.1 up to 8 1.1
R3 up to 6* 1.14 0.9...1.1 up to 8 1.1
R4 up to 4 1.38 1.5…3.0 up to 5 2.2
R5 10…2/0 1.97 11.1 10...2/0 11.1
R6 3/0…500 MCM** † 2.40 † 14.8...29.5 4/0 5.9
* 6 AWG rigid solid cable, 8 AWG flexible stranded cable

** with cable lugs 6...2/0 AWG, tightening torque 14.8...29.5 lbf ft. These smaller cable lugs are not
included in the delivery. See page 67.
†
In -0205-3 and -0255-5 units, the knockout hole diameter is 3.50 in.

H1: height with gland box
H2: height without gland box.
Frame UL type 1 UL type 12 Noise
size H1 H2 Width Depth Weight Height Width Depth Weight
in. in. in. in. lb in. in. in. lb dB
R2 15.96 14.57 6.50 8.89 20 20.78 10.35 9.49 34 62
R3 18.54 16.54 6.81 10.45 31 20.78 10.35 10.74 41 62
R4 23.87 19.29 9.45 10.79 57 30.49 14.84 10.94 73 62
R5 29.09 23.70 10.43 11.26 75 30.49 14.84 12.14 112 65
R6 34.65* 27.56 11.81 15.75 148* 36.34 16.52 16.54 170 65
* In -0205-3 and -0255-5 units, H1 is 38.46 in. and weight is 150 lb.
Package dimensions and weights

Frame size IP21 IP55
H1 Width Depth Weight Height Width Depth Weight
in. in. in. lb in. in. in. lb
R2 15.7 18.5 10.6 4.4 14.6 22.4 15.4 11
R3 16.9 19.7 10.6 4.4 14.6 22.4 15.4 11
R4 20.5 22.0 13.4 4.4 16.1 33.9 18.1 11
R5 21.26 26.4 13.8 4.4 16.1 33.9 18.1 11
R2-R5 with 22.8 36.6 22.0 37 22.8 36.6 22.0 37
option +Q950
or +Q967
R6 21.6 42.7 15.7 33 22.7 49.2 22.2 44
Technical data
123
Input power connection

Voltage (U1) 208/220/230/240 V AC 3-phase ± 10% for 230 V AC units
380/400/415 V AC 3-phase ± 10% for 400 V AC units
380/400/415/440/460/480/500 V AC 3-phase ± 10% for 500 V AC units
525/550/575/600/660/690 V AC 3-phase ± 10% for 690 V AC units
Short-circuit withstand Maximum allowable prospective short-circuit current is 65 kA when protected by fuses
strength (IEC 60439-1) given in the IEC data fuse tables.
Short-circuit current US and Canada: The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
protection (UL 508 C than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive nominal voltage when protected by
CSA C22.2 No. 14-05) fuses given in the NEMA data fuse table.
Frequency 48 to 63 Hz, maximum rate of change 17%/s
Imbalance Max. ± 3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage
Fundamental power factor 0.98 (at nominal load)
(cos phi1)
Motor connection
Voltage (U2) 0 to U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point
Frequency DTC mode: 0 to 3.2 · fFWP. Maximum frequency 300 Hz.
UNmains
fFWP = · fNmotor
UNmotor
fFWP: frequency at field weakening point; UNmains: mains (input power) voltage;
UNmotor: rated motor voltage; fNmotor: rated motor frequency
Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz
Current See section IEC data.
Power limit 1.5 · Phd, 1.1 · PN or Pcont.max (whichever value is greatest)
Field weakening point 8 to 300 Hz
Switching frequency 3 kHz (average). In 690 V units 2 kHz (average).
Maximum recommended Sizing method Max. motor cable length
motor cable length DTC control Scalar control
according to I2N and I2hd R2 to R3: 100 m (328 ft) R2: 150 m (492 ft)
according to Icont.max at R4 to R6: 300 m (984 ft) R3 to R6: 300 m (984 ft)
ambient temperatures below
30 °C (86 °F)
according to Icont.max at R2: 50 m (164 ft) Note: This applies to units with EMC filter
ambient temperatures above also.
30 °C (86 °F) R3 and R4: 100 m (328 ft)
R5 and R6: 150 m (492 ft)
Note: With cables longer than 100 m (328 ft), the EMC Directive requirements may not be
fulfilled. See section CE marking.
Efficiency
Approximately 98% at nominal power level
Technical data
124
Cooling
Method Internal fan, flow direction from bottom to top.
Free space around the unit See chapter Mechanical installation.
Degree of protection
IP21 (UL type 1) and IP55 (UL type 12). Without the connection box and front cover, the
unit must be protected against contact according to IP2x [see chapter Electrical
installation: Cabinet installation (IP21, UL type 1)].
AGPS-11C (option +Q950)

Nominal input voltage 115...230 VAC ±10%
Nominal input current 0.1 A (230 V) / 0.2 A (115 V)
Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz
Max. external fuse 16 A
X1 terminal sizes 3 x 2.5 mm2
Output voltage 15 VDC ±0.5 V
Nominal output current 0.4 A
X2 terminal block type JST B4P-VH
Ambient temperature 0...50 °C (32...122 °F)
Relative humidity Max. 90%, no condensation allowed
Dimensions (with enclosure) 167 x 128 x 52 mm (height x weight x depth)
Weight (with enclosure) 0.75 kg (1.65 lb)
Approvals C-UL, US listed
ASTO-11C (option +Q967)

Supply voltage range +24 V DC +/- 10%
Current consumption 40 mA (20mA per channel)
Supply cable A single-shielded twisted pair
Maximum cable length 300 m
Conductor min. cross 0.5 mm2, 20 AWG
section
Altitude in operation 0…2000 m (6562 ft)
Technical data
125
Ambient conditions
Environmental limits for the drive are given below. The drive is to be used in a heated,
indoor, controlled environment.
Operation Storage Transportation
installed for stationary use in the protective package in the protective package
Installation site altitude 0 to 4000 m (13123 ft) above - -
sea level [above 1000 m
(3281 ft), see section
Derating]
Drives with option +Q967:
0 to 2000 (6562 ft)
Air temperature -15 to +50 °C (5 to 122 °F). -40 to +70 °C -40 to +70 °C
No frost allowed. See section (-40 to +158 °F) (-40 to +158 °F)
Derating.
Relative humidity 5 to 95% Max. 95% Max. 95%
No condensation allowed. Maximum allowed relative humidity is 60% in the presence of
corrosive gases.
Contamination levels No conductive dust allowed.
(IEC 60721-3-3, IEC 60721-3- Boards without coating: Boards without coating: Boards without coating:
2, IEC 60721-3-1) Chemical gases: Class 3C1 Chemical gases: Class 1C2 Chemical gases: Class 2C2
Solid particles: Class 3S2 Solid particles: Class 1S3 Solid particles: Class 2S2
Boards with coating: Boards with coating: Boards with coating:
Chemical gases: Class 3C2 Chemical gases: Class 1C2 Chemical gases: Class 2C2
Atmospheric pressure 70 to 106 kPa 70 to 106 kPa 60 to 106 kPa
0.7 to 1.05 atmospheres 0.7 to 1.05 atmospheres 0.6 to 1.05 atmospheres
Vibration (IEC 60068-2) Max. 1 mm (0.04 in.) Max. 1 mm (0.04 in.) Max. 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
(5 to 13.2 Hz), (5 to 13.2 Hz), (2 to 9 Hz),
max. 7 m/s2 (23 ft/s2) max. 7 m/s2 (23 ft/s2) max. 15 m/s2 (49 ft/s2)
(13.2 to 100 Hz) sinusoidal (13.2 to 100 Hz) sinusoidal (9 to 200 Hz) sinusoidal
Shock (IEC 60068-2-27) Not allowed Max. 100 m/s2 (330 ft./s2), Max. 100 m/s2 (330 ft./s2),
11 ms 11 ms
Free fall Not allowed 250 mm (10 in.) for weight 250 mm (10 in.) for weight
under 100 kg (220 lb) under 100 kg (220 lb)
100 mm (4 in.) for weight 100 mm (4 in.) for weight
over 100 kg (220 lb) over 100 kg (220 lb)
Technical data
126
Materials
Drive enclosure • PC/ABS 2.5 mm, colour NCS 1502-Y (RAL 9002 / PMS 420 C)
• hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5 to 2 mm, thickness of coating 100 micrometres
• cast aluminium AlSi (R2 and R3)
• extruded aluminium AlSi (R4 to R6)
Package Depends on the frame size and selected options: cardboard, heavy duty cardboard or
plywood, EPS cushions (expanded polystyrene), wooden pallet
Plastic covering of the package: PE-LD, bands PP or steel.
Disposal The main parts of the drive can be recycled to preserve natural resources and energy.
Product parts and materials should be dismantled and separated.
Generally all metals, such as steel, aluminum, copper and its alloys, and precious metals
can be recycled as material. Plastics, rubber, cardboard and other packaging material can
be used in energy recovery. Printed circuit boards and DC capacitors (C1-1 to C1-x) need
selective treatment according to IEC 62635 guidelines. To aid recycling, plastic parts are
marked with an appropriate identification code.
Contact your local ABB distributor for further information on environmental aspects and
recycling instructions for professional recyclers. End of life treatment must follow
international and local regulations.
Applicable standards
• EN 50178:1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations
• EN 60204-1:2006 +A1:2009 Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1: General requirements.
Provisions for compliance: The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing
- an emergency-stop device
- a supply disconnecting device.
• EN 60529:1991 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
+ corrigendum May 1993
+ A1:2000
• IEC 60664-1:2007 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems. Part 1: Principles,
requirements and tests.
• EN 61800-3:2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC requirements and specific
test methods
• UL 508C (2002) UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, second edition
• NEMA 250 (2003) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
• CSA C22.2 No. 14-05 Industrial control equipment
(2005)
Technical data
127
CE marking
A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the unit follows the provisions of the
European Low Voltage and EMC Directives. The CE marking also verifies that the
drive, in regard to its safety functions (such as Safe torque off), conforms with the
Machinery Directive as a safety component.
Compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive

The compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive has been verified
according to standards EN 60204-1 and EN 50178.
Compliance with the European EMC Directive

The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical
equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard
(EN 61800-3:2004) covers requirements stated for drives. See section Compliance
with EN 61800-3:2004 below.
Compliance with the European Machinery Directive

The drive is an electronic product which is covered by the European Low Voltage
Directive. However, the drive can be equipped with the Safe torque off function and
other safety functions for machinery which, as safety components, are in the scope
of the Machinery Directive. These functions of the drive comply with European
harmonized standards such as EN 61800-5-2. The declaration of conformity for each
function is in the appropriate function-specific manual.
Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004
Definitions
EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic
equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment.
Likewise, the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or
system within its locality.
First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not supplying
domestic premises.
Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be
installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first
environment. Note: A professional is a person or organisation having necessary
skills in installing and/or commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC
aspects.
Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended for use in
the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment.
Technical data
128
Drive of category C4: drive of rated voltage equal to or above 1000 V, or rated
current equal to or above 400 A, or intended for use in complex systems in the
second environment.
First environment (drive of category C2)
The drive complies with the standard with the following provisions:
1. The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E202.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the hardware manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual.
4. Maximum cable length is 100 metres.
WARNING! The drive may cause radio interference if used in a residential or
domestic environment. The user is required to take measures to prevent
interference, in addition to the requirements for CE compliance listed above, if
necessary.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive equipped with EMC filter +E202 on IT
(ungrounded) systems. The supply network becomes connected to ground potential
through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the unit.
Second environment (drive of category C3)
1. Frame sizes R2…R5: The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E200. The filter is
suitable for TN (earthed) systems only.
Frame size R6: The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E210. The filter is suitable
for TN (grounded) and IT (ungrounded) systems.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual.
4. Maximum cable length is 100 metres.
WARNING! A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public
network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is
expected if the drive is used on such a network.
Technical data
129

If the provisions under Second environment (drive of category C3) cannot be met,
e.g. the drive cannot be equipped with EMC filter +E200 when installed to an IT
(ungrounded) network, the requirements of the standard can be met as follows:
1. It is ensured that no excessive emission is propagated to neighbouring low-
voltage networks. In some cases, the inherent suppression in transformers and
cables is sufficient. If in doubt, a supply transformer with static screening between
the primary and secondary windings can be used.
Medium voltage network

Supply transformer
Neighbouring network
Static screen
Point of measurement
Low voltage Low voltage

Equipment
Drive
(victim)
Equipment Equipment
2. An EMC plan for preventing disturbances is drawn up for the installation. A

template is available from the local ABB representative.
4. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual
“C-tick” marking
A “C-tick” mark is attached to each drive in order to verify compliance with the EMC
product standard (EN 61800-3:2004), required under the Trans-Tasman
Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme for levels 1, 2 and 3 in Australia and New
Zealand. See section Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004.
Marine type approvals

The ACS800-01/U1 drives with option +C132 are marine-type-approved.
For more information, see ACS800-01/U1/04/U4 Marine Supplement
[3AFE68291275 (English)].
Technical data
130
UL/CSA markings
The ACS800-01 and ACS800-U1 units of UL type 1 are cULus listed and CSA
marked.
UL checklist
• The drive is to be used in a heated, indoor controlled environment. The drive must
be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification. Cooling air must be
clean, free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive dust. See section
Ambient conditions for specific limits.
• The maximum ambient air temperature is 40 °C (104 °F) at rated current. The
current is derated for 40 to 50 °C (104 to 122 °F).
• The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100
kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive nominal voltage (600 V maximum for
690 V units) when protected by fuses given in the NEMA data fuse table. The
ampere rating is based on tests done according to UL 508C.
• The cables located within the motor circuit must be rated for at least 75 °C
(167 °F) in UL-compliant installations.
• The input cable must be protected with fuses. Circuit breakers must not be used
without fuses in the USA. Suitable IEC (class aR) fuses and UL (class T) fuses
are listed in this hardware manual.
• For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in
accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any applicable local
codes. To fulfil this requirement, use the UL classified fuses.
• For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in
accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial
• The drive provides overload protection in accordance with the National Electrical
Code (NEC). See the firmware manual for setting. Default setting is off, must be
activated at start-up.
• Brake chopper - ABB has brake choppers that, when applied with appropriately
sized brake resistors, will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative energy
(normally associated with quickly decelerating a motor). Proper application of the
brake chopper is defined in chapter Resistor braking.
Disclaimer
The manufacturer shall have no obligation with respect to any product which (i) has
been improperly repaired or altered; (ii) has been subjected to misuse, negligence or
accident; (iii) has been used in a manner contrary to the manufacturer's instructions;
or (iv) has failed as a result of ordinary wear and tear.
Technical data
131
Dimensional drawings of the ACS800-01 are shown below. The dimensions are
given in millimetres and [inches].
132
Frame size R2 (IP21, UL type 1)
64646117-B
133
64646150-B
134
64646192-B
135
64646206-C
136
64646214-B
137
64647130-B
138
64646222-B
139
64647156-B
140
64646231-B
141
Frame size R6 (IP21, UL type 1), -205-3 and -255-5 units

Note: Only measurements that differ from those of the standard Frame size R6
(IP21, UL type 1) are given below.
3AUA0000045356
142

For types -0205 and -0255-5, see page 143.
64684957-C
143
Frame size R6 (IP55, UL type 12) -0205-3 and -0255-5 units
3AUA0000057578
144
Dimensional drawings (USA)

Dimensional drawings of the ACS800-U1 are shown below. The dimensions are
given in millimetres and [inches].
145
Frame size R2 (UL type 1, IP21)
64741829-A
146
64788051-A
147
64741811-A
148
64788078-A
149
64741802-A
150
64788086-A
151
64741748-A
152
64788094-A
153
64739361-A
154
Frame size R6 (UL type 1, IP21) -0205-3 and -0255-5 units

Note: Only measurements that differ from those of the standard Frame size R6 (UL
type 1, IP21) are given below.
3AUA0000045584
155

For types -0205 and -0255-5, see page 156.
64788108-A
156
Frame size R6 (UL type 12, IP55) -0205-3 and -0255-5 units
3AUA0000057583
157
AGPS board (option +Q950)
3AFE68293898
158
ASTO board with enclosure (option +Q967)
3AUA0000068698
159
Resistor braking

This chapter describes how to select, protect and wire brake choppers and resistors.
The chapter also contains the technical data.
Availability of brake choppers and resistors for the ACS800

Frame R2 and R3 drives and 690 V units of frame size R4 have a built-in brake
chopper as standard equipment. For other units, brake choppers are optionally
available as built-in units, indicated in the type code by +D150.
Resistors are available as add-on kits.
Selecting the correct drive/chopper/resistor combination

1. Calculate the maximum power (Pmax) generated by the motor during braking.
2. Select a suitable drive / brake chopper / brake resistor combination for the
application according to the following tables (take account of other factors in the
drive selection also). The following condition must be met:
Pbr > Pmax
where
Pbr denotes Pbr5, Pbr10, Pbr30, Pbr60, or Pbrcont depending on the duty cycle.
3. Check the resistor selection. The energy generated by the motor during a 400-
second period must not exceed the resistor heat dissipation capacity ER.
If the ER value is not sufficient, it is possible to use a four-resistor assembly in which two standard
resistors are connected in parallel, two in series. The ER value of the four-resistor assembly is four
times the value specified for the standard resistor.
Resistor braking
160
Note: A resistor other than the standard resistor can be used provided that:
• its resistance is not lower than the resistance of the standard resistor.
WARNING! Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the value specified
for the particular drive / brake chopper / resistor combination. The drive and the
chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance.
• the resistance does not restrict the braking capacity needed, that is,
2
UDC
Pmax <
R
where
Pmax maximum power generated by the motor during braking
UDC voltage over the resistor during braking, e.g.,
1.35 · 1.2 · 415 V DC (when supply voltage is 380 to 415 V AC),
1.35 · 1.2 · 500 V DC. (when supply voltage is 440 to 500 V AC) or
1.35 · 1.2 · 690 V DC (when supply voltage is 525 to 690 V AC).
R resistor resistance (ohm)
• the heat dissipation capacity (ER) is sufficient for the application (see step 3
above).
Optional brake chopper and resistor(s) for the ACS800-01/U1

The nominal ratings for dimensioning the brake resistors for the ACS800-01 and
ACS800-U1 are given below at an ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F).
ACS800-01 type Braking power Brake resistor(s)
ACS800-U1 type of the chopper
and the drive
Pbrcont Type R ER PRcont
(kW) (ohm) (kJ) (kW)
230 V units
-0001-2 0.55 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0002-2 0.8 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0003-2 1.1 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0004-2 1.5 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0005-2 2.2 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0006-2 3.0 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0009-2 4.0 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0011-2 5.5 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0016-2 11 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0020-2 17 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0025-2 23 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0030-2 28 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0040-2 33 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0050-2 45 2xSAFUR125F500 2 7200 18
-0060-2 56 2xSAFUR125F500 2 7200 18
-0070-2 68 2xSAFUR125F500 2 7200 18
Resistor braking
161

and the drive
400 V units
-0003-3 1.1 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0004-3 1.5 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0005-3 2.2 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0006-3 3.0 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0009-3 4.0 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0011-3 5.5 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0016-3 7.5 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0020-3 11 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0025-3 23 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0030-3 28 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0040-3 33 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0050-3 45 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0060-3 56 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0075-3 70 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0070-3 * 68 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0100-3 83 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0120-3 113 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0135-3 132 SAFUR200F500 2.7 5400 13.5
-0165-3 132 SAFUR200F500 2.7 5400 13.5
-0205-3 160 SAFUR200F500 2.7 5400 13.5
500 V units
-0004-5 1.5 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0005-5 2.2 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0006-5 3.0 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0009-5 4.0 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0011-5 5.5 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0016-5 7.5 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0020-5 11 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0025-5 15 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0030-5 28 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0040-5 33 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0050-5 45 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0060-5 56 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0070-5 68 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0105-5 83 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0100-5 * 83 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0120-5 113 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0140-5 135 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0165-5 160 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0205-5 160 SAFUR125F500 4 3600 9
-0255-5 200 SAFUR200F500 2.7 5400 13.5
Resistor braking
162

and the drive
690 V units
-0011-7 8 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0016-7 11 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0020-7 16 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0025-7 22 SACE08RE44 44 210 1
-0030-7 28 SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0040-7 22/33 1) SACE15RE22 22 420 2
-0050-7 45 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0060-7 56 SACE15RE13 13 435 2
-0070-7 68 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0100-7 83 SAFUR90F575 8 1800 4.5
-0120-7 113 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0145-7 160 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0175-7 160 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
-0205-7 160 SAFUR80F500 6 2400 6
* Type not available any more. 00096931
Pbrcont The drive and the chopper will withstand this continuous braking power. The braking is considered continuous if the
braking time exceeds 30 s.
Note: Check that the braking energy transmitted to the specified resistor(s) in 400 seconds does not exceed ER.
R Resistance value for the listed resistor assembly. Note: This is also the minimum allowed resistance for the brake
resistor.
ER Short energy pulse that the resistor assembly withstands every 400 seconds. This energy will heat the resistor
element from 40 °C (104 °F) to the maximum allowable temperature.
PRcont Continuous power (heat) dissipation of the resistor when placed correctly. Energy ER dissipates in 400 seconds.
1)
22 kW with standard 22 ohm resistor and 33 kW with 32…37 ohm resistor
All brake resistors must be installed outside the drive. The SACE brake resistors are built in an IP21 metal housing.
The SAFUR brake resistors are built in an IP00 metal frame. Note: The SACE and SAFUR resistors are not UL
listed.
Resistor installation and wiring

All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they will
cool.
WARNING! The materials near the brake resistor must be non-flammable. The
surface temperature of the resistor is high. Air flowing from the resistor is of
hundreds of degrees Celsius. Protect the resistor against contact.
Use the cable type used for drive input cabling (refer to chapter Technical data) to
ensure the input fuses will also protect the resistor cable. Alternatively, two-
conductor shielded cable with the same cross-sectional area can be used. The
maximum length of the resistor cable(s) is 10 m (33 ft). For the connections, see the
power connection diagram of the drive.
Resistor braking
163
Protection of frame sizes R2 to R5 (ACS800-01/U1)

It is highly recommended to equip the drive with a main contactor for safety reasons.
Wire the contactor so that it opens in case the resistor overheats. This is essential
for safety since the drive will not otherwise be able to interrupt the main supply if the
chopper remains conductive in a fault situation.
Below is a simple example wiring diagram.
L1 L2 L3
OFF
Fuses 2
1 3 5 13 3
ON
2 4 6 14 4
ACS800
U1 V1 W1
 Thermal switch
(standard in ABB
K1
resistors)
Protection of frame size R6

A main contactor is not required for protecting against resistor overheating when the
resistor is dimensioned according to the instructions and the internal brake chopper
is in use. The drive will disable power flow through the input bridge if the chopper
remains conductive in a fault situation. Note: If an external brake chopper (outside
the drive module) is used, a main contactor is always required.
A thermal switch (standard in ABB resistors) is required for safety reasons. The
cable must be shielded and not longer than the resistor cable.
Resistor braking
164
With Standard Control Program, wire the thermal switch as shown below. By default,
the drive will stop by coasting when the switch opens.
RMIO:X22 or X2: X22

1 DI1
2 DI2
3 DI3
4 DI4
5 DI5
6 DI6
7 +24VD
Thermal switch 8 +24VD
(standard in ABB re- 9 DGND1
sistors) 
10 DGND2
11 DIIL
For other control programs, the thermal switch may be wired to a different digital
input. Programming of the input to trip the drive by “EXTERNAL FAULT” may be
needed. See the appropriate firmware manual.
Brake circuit commissioning

For Standard Control Program:
• Enable the brake chopper function (parameter 27.01).
• Switch off the overvoltage control of the drive (parameter 20.05).
• Check the resistance value setting (parameter 27.03).
• Frame size R6: Check the setting of parameter 21.09. If stop by coasting is
required, select OFF2 STOP.
For the use of the brake resistor overload protection (parameters 27.02...27.05),
consult an ABB representative.
WARNING! If the drive is equipped with a brake chopper but the chopper is not
enabled by parameter setting, the brake resistor must be disconnected because the
protection against resistor overheating is then not in use.
For settings of other control programs, see the appropriate firmware manual.
Note: Some brake resistors are coated with oil film for protection. At the start-up, the
coating burns off and produces a little bit of smoke. Ensure proper ventilation at the
start-up.
Resistor braking
165
External +24 V DC power supply for the RMIO

board via terminal X34

This chapter describes how to connect an external +24 V DC power supply for the
RMIO board via terminal X34. For the current consumption of the RMIO board, see
chapter Motor control and I/O board (RMIO).
Note: External power is easier to supply to the RMIO board via terminal X23, see
chapter Motor control and I/O board (RMIO).
Parameter settings
166
Connecting +24 V DC external power supply

1. Break off the tab covering the +24 V DC power input connector with pliers.
2. Lift the connector upwards.
3. Disconnect the wires from the connector (keep the connector for later use).
4. Isolate the ends of the wires individually with insulating tape.
5. Cover the isolated ends of the wires with insulating tape.
6. Push the wires inside the skeleton.
7. Connect the wires of the +24 V DC external power supply to the disconnected
connector:
if a two-way connector, + wire to terminal 1 and - wire to terminal 2
if a three-way connector, + wire to terminal 2 and - wire to terminal 3.
8. Plug the connector in.
Frame sizes R2 to R4 Frame sizes R5 and R6
4
4
3
X34
167
5 6 7
RMIO board RMIO board

1 2 3 1 2 3
X34 X34
+ - + -
8 1 2 1 2 3
Connection of a two-way Connection of a three-way

connector connector
168
169
RDCO-01/02/03/04 DDCS communication option

modules

This chapter contains a description of the RDCO-0x DDCS communication option
modules connections and the technical specifications of the RDCO-0x modules.
Overview
The RDCO-0x DDCS Communication options are add-on modules for the
• RMIO Motor Control and I/O board (also part of RDCU control units)
• BCU control units.
RDCO modules are available factory-installed as well as retrofit kits.
The RDCO module includes the connectors for fiber optic DDCS channels CH0,
CH1, CH2 and CH3. The usage of these channels is determined by the application
program; see the Firmware Manual of the drive. However, the channels are normally
assigned as follows:
CH0 – overriding system (eg. fieldbus adapter)
CH1 – I/O options and supply unit
CH2 – Master/Follower link
CH3 – PC tool (ACS800 only).
There are several types of the RDCO. The difference between the types is the
optical components. In addition, each type is available with a coated circuit board,
this being indicated by a “C” suffix, eg. RDCO-03C.
Optical component type
Module type
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3
RDCO-01(C) 10 MBd 5 MBd 10 MBd 10 MBd
The optical components at both ends of a fiber optic link must be of the same type
for the light intensity and receiver sensitivity levels to match. Plastic optical fiber
(POF) cables can be used with both 5 MBd and 10 MBd optical components. 10
MBd components also enable the use of Hard Clad Silica (HCS) cables, which allow
longer connection distances thanks to their lower attenuation.
Note: The optical component type does not reflect the actual communication speed.

170
Delivery check
The option package contains:
• RDCO-0x module
• Two screws (M3×8)
• This document.
Module layout
CH 0
GND
CH 1
Fixing Fiber optic channels

screws
CH 2
CHGND CH 3
Installation
WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work on the drive should be
carried out by qualified electricians only.
The drive and adjoining equipment must be properly earthed.
Do not work on a powered drive. Before installation, switch off the mains and other
dangerous voltages (eg. from external control circuits) to the drive. After switching off
the mains, always allow the intermediate circuit capacitors 5 minutes to discharge
before starting work on the frequency converter. It is a good practice to check (with a
voltage indicating instrument) that the drive is in fact discharged before beginning
work.
There may be dangerous voltages inside the drive from external control circuits even
when the drive mains power is shut off. Exercise appropriate care when working on
the unit. Neglecting these instructions may cause physical injury or death.
WARNING! The component boards of the drive contain integrated circuits that are
extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Wear an earthing wrist band
when handling component boards. Do not touch the boards unnecessarily. Do not
remove any board from its antistatic packaging until required.

171
WARNING! Handle the fiber optic cables with care. The maximum long term tensile
load is 1 N; the minimum short term bend radius is 35 mm. Do not touch the ends of
the fibers with bare hands as the fiber is extremely sensitive to dirt.
Use rubber grommets at cable entries to protect the cables.
The RDCO-0x module is to be inserted into the position marked “DDCS” on the
drive. On installation, the signal and power connection to the drive is automatically
made through a 20-pin connector.
The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws. The screws
also provide the earthing of module, and interconnect the GND signals of the module
and the control board.
Installation procedure
1. Access the optional module slots on the drive. Whenever necessary, refer to the
Hardware Manual of the drive for instructions on removing any covers.
2. Insert the module carefully into the slot marked with “DDCS” (BCU control unit
slot 4) on the control board until the retaining clips lock the module into position.
3. Fasten the screws included in the package. Note that correct installation of the
screws is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of
the module.
4. Lead the fiber optic cables from the external device to the appropriate channel(s)
of the RDCO. Inside the drive, route the cables as shown in its Hardware Manual.
Make sure the cables are not kinked or laid against sharp edges. Observe colour
coding so that transmitters are connected to receivers and vice versa. In case
multiple devices are to be connected to one channel, they must be connected in a
ring.
Technical data
Module types: RDCO-01(C), RDCO-02(C), RDCO-03(C), RDCO-04(C)
Ambient conditions: The applicable ambient conditions specified for the drive in its
Hardware Manual are in effect.
Connectors:
• 20-pin pinheader
• 4 transmitter/receiver connector pairs for fiber optic cable. Type: Agilent
Technologies Versatile Link. Communication speed: 1, 2 or 4 Mbit/s
Operating voltage: +5 V DC ±10%, supplied by the control unit of the drive.
Current consumption: 200 mA max.
Electromagnetic immunity: IEC 1000-4-2 (limits: industrial, second environment);
IEC 1000-4-3; IEC 1000-4-4; IEC 1000-4-6

172
Electromagnetic emissions: EN 50081-2; CISPR 11

Dimensions (mm):
30 34
95
20

Further information
Product and service inquiries
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type
designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and
service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/searchchannels.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select
Training courses.
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.com/drives and select
Document Library – Manuals feedback form (LV AC drives).
Document library on the Internet

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. Go to
www.abb.com/drives and select Document Library. You can browse the library or enter
selection criteria, for example a document code, in the search field.
Contact us
www.abb.com/drives
www.abb.com/drivespartners
3AFE64382101 Rev K (EN) 2013-06-27

ACS800
Firmware Manual
ACS800 Standard Control Program 7.x
ACS800 Standard Control Program 7.x
Firmware Manual
3AFE64527592 REV L
EN
© 2011 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

5
Table of contents
Table of contents
Introduction to the manual

Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Start-up and control through the I/O

How to start-up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
How to perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
How to control the drive through the I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
How to perform the ID Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ID Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Control panel
Overview of the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Panel operation mode keys and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Status row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Drive control with the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
How to start, stop and change direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
How to set speed reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Actual signal display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
How to select actual signals to the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
How to display the full name of the actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
How to view and reset the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
How to display and reset an active fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
About the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
How to select a parameter and change the value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Function mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
How to enter an assistant, browse and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
How to upload data from a drive to the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table of contents
6
How to download data from the panel to a drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

How to set the contrast of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Drive selection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Program features
Start-up Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
The default order of the tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
List of tasks and the relevant drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Contents of the assistant displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Block diagram: reference source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Reference types and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Reference trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Programmable analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Update cycles in the Standard Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Programmable analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Programmable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Automatic Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Table of contents
7
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Safe torque off (STO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Prevention of unexpected start-up (POUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Safely-limited speed (SLS) (AS7R firmware version only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Diagnostics and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
DC Magnetising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DC Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Flux Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Flux Optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Critical speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Scalar control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Hexagonal motor flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
AI<Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Panel Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Motor Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Motor temperature thermal model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Use of the motor thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Stall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Underload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Motor Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Earth Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Table of contents
8
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Supervision of optional IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Preprogrammed faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
DC overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
DC undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Drive temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800, frame sizes R7 and R8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Input phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Control board temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Overfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Internal fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Automatic resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Supervisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Sleep function for the process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I/O extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Adaptive Programming using the function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
DriveAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Control of a mechanical brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Operation time scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
State shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Table of contents
9
Master/Follower use of several drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Settings and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reduced Run function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Application macros
Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Factory macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
PID Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Connection example, 24 VDC / 4…20 mA two-wire sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Torque Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Sequential Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Operation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
User macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Actual signals and parameters

01 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
04 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
10 START/STOP/DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
16 SYST CTRL INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Table of contents
10
22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
23 SPEED CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
24 TORQUE CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
26 MOTOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
27 BRAKE CHOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
31 AUTOMATIC RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
32 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
33 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
34 PROCESS VARIABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
35 MOT TEMP MEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
40 PID CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
42 BRAKE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
45 ENERGY OPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
50 ENCODER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
51 COMM MODULE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
52 STANDARD MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
60 MASTER/FOLLOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
70 DDCS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
72 USER LOAD CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
85 USER CONSTANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
90 D SET REC ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
92 D SET TR ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
95 HARDWARE SPECIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
96 EXTERNAL AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
98 OPTION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fieldbus control
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Redundant fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Modbus addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Setting up communication through Advant controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
The fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Fieldbus reference selection and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used . 206
Block diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used 207
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used . 208
Table of contents
11
Block Diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used 209
Communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
ABB Drives communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
03.01 MAIN CONTROL WORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Generic Drive communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Drive commands supported by the Generic Drive communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
CONTROL WORD for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
STATUS WORD for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Diverse status, fault, alarm and limit words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
03.03 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
03.05 FAULT WORD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
03.06 FAULT WORD 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
03.07 SYSTEM FAULT WORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
03.08 ALARM WORD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
03.09 ALARM WORD 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
03.13 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
03.14 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
03.15 FAULT WORD 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
03.16 ALARM WORD 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
03.17 FAULT WORD 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
03.18 ALARM WORD 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
03.19 INT INIT FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
03.30 LIMIT WORD INV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
03.31 ALARM WORD 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
03.32 EXT IO STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
03.33 FAULT WORD 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
04.01 FAULTED INT INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
04.02 INT SC INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Fault tracing
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Warning and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Warning messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Warning messages generated by the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Analogue Extension Module

Speed control through the analogue extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Basic checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Table of contents
12
Settings of the analogue extension module and the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Parameter settings: bipolar input in basic speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Parameter settings: bipolar input in joystick mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Additional data: actual signals and parameters

Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA-01, RDNA-01, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Nxxx adapter modules (such as NPBA-12, NDNA-02, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
NPBA-12 Profibus Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
NIBA-01 InterBus-S Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
NMBP-01 ModbusPlus® Adapter and NMBA-01 Modbus Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Control block diagrams

Reference control chain, sheet 1: FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL and T CTRL macros
(continued on the next page …) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Reference control chain sheet 1: PID CTRL macro (continued on the next page …) . . . . . . . . . 270
Reference control chain sheet 2: All macros (continued on the next page …) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable and Start Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Handling of Reset and On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Index
Table of contents
13
Chapter overview
The chapter includes a description of the contents of the manual. In addition it
contains information about the compatibility, safety and intended audience.
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with Standard Control Program versions ASXR7360 and
AS7R7363. See parameter 33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION.
Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive.
• Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use
the drive. The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the
Hardware Manual.
• Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the
default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes are
given in this manual in the section describing the related user-adjustable
parameters.
Reader
The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring
practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.
Contents
The manual consists of the following chapters:
• Start-up and control through the I/O instructs in setting up the application
program, and how to start, stop and regulate the speed of the drive.
• Control panel gives instructions for using the panel.
• Program features contains the feature descriptions and the reference lists of the
user settings and diagnostic signals.
• Application macros contains a short description of each macro together with a
connection diagram.
• Actual signals and parameters describes the actual signals and parameters of the
drive.
• Fieldbus control describes the communication through the serial communication
links.

14
• Fault tracing lists the warning and fault messages with the possible causes and
remedies.
• Analogue Extension Module, describes the communication between the drive and
the analogue I/O extension (optional).
• Additional data: actual signals and parameters contains more information on the
actual signals and parameters.
• Control block diagrams contains block diagrams concerning reference control
chains and handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable and Start Interlock.

Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting
the type code and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales,
support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/drives and
selecting Sales, Support and Service network.
Product training
Training courses.


15
Chapter overview
The chapter instructs how to:
• do the start-up
• start, stop, change the direction of rotation, and adjust the speed of the motor
through the I/O interface
• perform an Identification Run for the drive.
How to start-up the drive

There are two start-up methods between which the user can select: Run the Start-up
Assistant, or perform a limited start-up. The Assistant guides the user through all
essential settings to be done. In the limited start-up, the drive gives no guidance:
The user goes through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in
the manual.
• If you want to run the Assistant, follow the instructions given in section How to
perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings) on page 15.
• If you want to perform the limited start-up, follow the instructions given in
section How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings) on
page 17.
How to perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings)

Before you start, ensure you have the motor nameplate data on hand.
SAFETY
The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the
appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions.
Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation
manual.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
- there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
- a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. (ID Run is essential only
in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.)

16
POWER-UP
Apply the main power. The control panel first shows the panel CDP312 PANEL Vx.xx
identification data … .......
… then the Identification Display of the drive … ACS800

ID NUMBER 1
… then the Actual Signal Display … 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
…after which the display suggests starting the Language Selection. 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
*** INFORMATION ***
(If no key is pressed for a few seconds, the display starts to alternate between the
Press FUNC to start
Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on selecting the language.)
Language Selection
The drive is now ready for the start-up.
SELECTING THE LANGUAGE
Press the FUNC key. Language Selection 1/1
LANGUAGE ?
[ENGLISH]
ENTER:OK ACT:EXIT
Scroll to the desired language by the arrow keys ( or ) and 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
press ENTER to accept. *** INFORMATION ***
Press FUNC to start
(The drive loads the selected language into use, shifts back to the Actual Signal guided Motor Setup
Display and starts to alternate between the Actual Signal Display and the
suggestion on starting the guided motor set-up.)
STARTING THE GUIDED MOTOR SET-UP

Press FUNC to start the guided motor set-up. Motor Setup 1/10
ENTER: Ok/Continue
(The display shows which general command keys to use when stepping through
ACT: Exit
the assistant.)
FUNC: More Info
Press ENTER to step forward. Motor Setup 2/10

MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA
Follow the instructions given on the display. AVAILABLE?
ENTER:Yes FUNC:Info

17
How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings)
Before you start, ensure you have the motor nameplate data at your hand.
SAFETY
The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the
appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions.
Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation
manual.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
- there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
- a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. (ID Run is essential
only in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.)
POWER-UP
Apply the main power. The control panel first shows the panel CDP312 PANEL Vx.xx
identification data … .......
… then the Identification Display of the drive … ACS800

ID NUMBER 1
… then the Actual Signal Display … 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
…after which the display suggests starting the Language Selection. 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
*** INFORMATION ***
(If no key is pressed for a few seconds, the display starts to alternate between the
Press FUNC to start
Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on starting the Language Selection.)
Language Selection
Press ACT to remove the suggestion on starting the language 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
selection. FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
The drive is now ready for the limited start-up. POWER 0.00 %
MANUAL START-UP DATA ENTERING (parameter group 99)

Select the language. The general parameter setting procedure is 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
described below. 99 START-UP DATA
01 LANGUAGE
The general parameter setting procedure: ENGLISH
- Press PAR to select the Parameter Mode of the panel.
- Press the double-arrow keys ( or ) to scroll the parameter groups.
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
- Press the arrow keys ( or ) to scroll parameters within a group.
99 START-UP DATA
- Activate the setting of a new value by ENTER. 01 LANGUAGE
- Change the value by the arrow keys ( or ), fast change by the double- [ENGLISH]
arrow keys ( or ).
- Press ENTER to accept the new value (brackets disappear).

18
Select the Application Macro. The general parameter setting 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
procedure is given above. 99 START-UP DATA
02 APPLICATION MACRO
The default value FACTORY is suitable in most cases. [ ]
Select the motor control mode. The general parameter setting 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
procedure is given above. 99 START-UP DATA
04 MOTOR CTRL MODE
DTC is suitable in most cases. The SCALAR control mode is recommended [DTC]
- for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is
variable
- when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal current of
the inverter
- when the inverter is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate: Note: Set the motor data to
exactly the same value as
on the motor nameplate.
ABB Motors For example, if the motor
3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4
nominal speed is 1440 rpm
IEC 200 M/L 55
No on the nameplate, setting
Ins.cl. F IP 55 the value of parameter
V Hz kW r/min A cos IA/IN t E/s 99.08 MOTOR NOM
690 Y 50 30 1475 32.5 0.83
400 D 50 30 1475 56 0.83 SPEED to 1500 rpm
660 Y 50 30 1470 34 0.83 380 V results in the wrong
380 D 50 30 1470 59 0.83 input operation of the drive.
415 D 50 30 1475 54 0.83
440 D 35 1770 59 0.83
voltage
60
Cat. no 3GAA 202 001 - ADA
6312/C3 6210/C3 180

IEC 34-1
- motor nominal voltage 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

99 START-UP DATA
Allowed range: 1/2 · UN … 2 · UN of ACS800. (UN refers to the highest voltage in
05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE
each of the nominal voltage ranges: 415 VAC for 400 VAC units, 500 VAC for 500
[ ]
VAC units and 690 VAC for 600 VAC units.)
- motor nominal current 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

99 START-UP DATA
Allowed range: approx. 1/6 · I2hd … 2 · I2hd of ACS800 (0 … 2 · I2hd if parameter
06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
99.04 = SCALAR))
[ ]
- motor nominal frequency 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

99 START-UP DATA
Range: 8 … 300 Hz
07 MOTOR NOM FREQ
[ ]
- motor nominal speed 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

99 START-UP DATA
Range: 1 …18000 rpm
08 MOTOR NOM SPEED
[ ]
-motor nominal power 1 -> 0.0 rpm O

99 START-UP DATA
Range: 0 …9000 kW
09 MOTOR NOM POWER
[ ]

19
When the motor data has been entered, two displays (warning and 1 -> 0.0 rpm O
information) start to alternate. Move to next step without pressing ACS800
** WARNING **
any key.
ID MAGN REQ
Note: If you select STANDARD ID Run, the brake is opened when
the Start command is given from the control panel and the brake 1 -> 0.0 rpm I
remains open until the STANDARD ID Run is completed. If you *** Information ***
Press green button
select ID MAGN, the brake is kept closed during the ID Run
to start ID MAGN
sequence.
Select the motor identification method.

The default value ID MAGN (ID Magnetisation) is suitable for most applications. It is applied
in this basic start-up procedure. If your selection is ID Magnetisation, move to next step
without pressing any key.
The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) should be selected if:
- The operation point is near zero speed constantly, and/or
- Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed range and
without any measured speed feedback is required.
If your selection is ID Run, continue by following the separate instructions given a few pages
ahead in section How to perform the ID Run on page 22.
IDENTIFICATION MAGNETISATION (with Motor ID Run selection ID MAGN)
Press the LOC/REM key to change to local control (L shown on the 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
first row). ** WARNING **
MOTOR STARTS
Press to start the Identification Magnetisation. The motor is
magnetised at zero speed for 20 to 60 s. Three warnings are 1 L-> 0.0 rpm I
displayed: ** WARNING **
ID MAGN
The first warning is displayed when the magnetisation starts.
The second warning is displayed while the magnetisation is on. 1 L-> 0.0 rpm O
** WARNING **
The third warning is displayed after the magnetisation is completed.
ID DONE

20
DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR

Check the direction of rotation of the motor. 1 L->[xxx] rpm I
FREQ xxx Hz
- Press ACT to get the status row visible. CURRENT xx A
- Increase the speed reference from zero to a small value by POWER xx %
pressing REF and then the arrow keys ( , , or ).
- Press to start the motor.
- Check that the motor is running in the desired direction.
- Stop the motor by pressing .
To change the direction of rotation of the motor:
- Disconnect the main power from the drive, and wait 5 minutes for forward
direction
the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge. Measure the
voltage between each input terminal (U1, V1 and W1) and earth
with a multimeter to ensure that the frequency converter is
discharged. reverse
direction
- Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the
motor terminals or at the motor connection box.
- Verify your work by applying the main power and repeating the
check as described above.
SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES
Set the minimum speed. 1 L-> 0.0 rpm O
20 LIMITS
01 MINIMUM SPEED
[ ]
Set the maximum speed. 1 L-> 0.0 rpm O

20 LIMITS
02 MAXIMUM SPEED
[ ]
Set the acceleration time 1. 1 L-> 0.0 rpm O

22 ACCEL/DECEL
Note: Check also acceleration time 2, if two acceleration times will 02 ACCELER TIME 1
be used in the application. [ ]
Set the deceleration time 1. 1 L-> 0.0 rpm O

22 ACCEL/DECEL
Note: Set also deceleration time 2, if two deceleration times will be 03 DECELER TIME 1
used in the application. [ ]
The drive is now ready for use.

21
How to control the drive through the I/O interface

The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analogue
inputs, when:
• the motor start-up is performed, and
• the default (factory) parameter settings are valid.
PRELIMINARY SETTINGS
Ensure the Factory macro is active. See parameter 99.02.
If you need to change the direction of rotation, change the setting of

parameter 10.03 to REQUEST.
Ensure the control connections are wired according to the connection See chapter Application
diagram given for the Factory macro. macros.
Ensure the drive is in external control mode. Press the LOC/REM key to In External control, there is
change between external and local control. no L visible on the first row
of the panel display.
STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR

Start by switching digital input DI1 on. 1 -> 0.0 rpm I
FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
Regulate the speed by adjusting the voltage of analogue input AI1. 1 -> 500.0 rpm I
FREQ 16.66 Hz
CURRENT 12.66 A
POWER 8.33 %
CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR

Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off. 1 -> 500.0 rpm I
FREQ 16.66 Hz
CURRENT 12.66 A
POWER 8.33 %
Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on. 1 <- 500.0 rpm I
FREQ 16.66 Hz
CURRENT 12.66 A
POWER 8.33 %
STOPPING THE MOTOR

Switch off digital input DI1. 1 -> 500.0 rpm O
FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %

22
How to perform the ID Run

The drive performs the ID Magnetisation automatically at the first start. In most
applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run. The ID Run (Standard or
Reduced) should be selected if:
• The operation point is near zero speed, and/or
• Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed
range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
The Reduced ID Run is to be performed instead of the Standard if it is not possible to
disengage the driven machine from the motor.
Note: If you select STANDARD ID Run, the brake is opened when the Start
command is given from the control panel and the brake remains open until the
STANDARD ID Run is completed. If you select ID MAGN, the brake is kept closed
during the ID Run sequence.
ID Run Procedure
Note: If parameter values (Group 10 to 98) are changed before the ID Run, check
that the new settings meet the following conditions:
• 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED < 0 rpm
• 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of motor rated speed
• 20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT > 100% · Ihd
• 20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE > 50%
• Ensure that the panel is in the local control mode (L displayed on the status row).
Press the LOC/REM key to switch between modes.
• Change the ID Run selection to STANDARD or REDUCED.
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
10 MOTOR ID RUN
[STANDARD]
• Press ENTER to verify selection. The following message will be displayed:
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
ACS800
**WARNING**
ID RUN SEL

23
• To start the ID Run, press the key. The Start Interlock (digital input DI_IL) and
Run Enable signals (parameter 16.01 RUN ENABLE) must be active.
Warning when the ID Run is Warning during the ID Run Warning after a successfully
started completed ID Run
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

ACS800 ACS800 ACS800
**WARNING** **WARNING** **WARNING**
MOTOR STARTS ID RUN ID DONE
In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID run.
However:
• The Motor ID Run can be stopped at any time by pressing the control panel stop
key ( ).
• After the ID Run is started with the start key ( ), it is possible to monitor the
actual values by first pressing the ACT key and then a double-arrow key ( ).

24

25
Control panel
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how to use the control panel CDP 312R.
The same control panel is used with all ACS800 series drives, so the instructions
given apply to all ACS800 types. The display examples shown are based on the
Standard Control Program; displays produced by other application programs may
differ slightly.
Overview of the panel
The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters.

The language is selected at start-up (parameter 99.01).
The control panel has four operation modes:
- Actual Signal Display Mode (ACT key)
- Parameter Mode (PAR key)
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz - Function Mode (FUNC key)
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 % - Drive Selection Mode (DRIVE key)
The use of single arrow keys, double arrow keys and
ENTER depend on the operation mode of the panel.
ACT PAR FUNC DRIVE The drive control keys are:
No. Use
1 Start
ENTER
2 Stop
3 Activate reference setting

7 6 3 1
LOC RESET REF 4 Forward direction of rotation
REM
5 Reverse direction of rotation

I 0 6 Fault reset
4 5 2
7 Change between Local / Remote (external)
control
Control panel
26
Panel operation mode keys and displays

The figure below shows the mode selection keys of the panel, and the basic
operations and displays in each mode.
Actual Signal Display Mode
Act. signal / Fault history Status row

ACT 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
selection
FREQ 45.00 Hz Actual signal names
CURRENT 80.00 A and values
Act. signal / Fault message
scrolling POWER 75.00 %
Enter selection mode
ENTER Accept new signal
Parameter Mode
Group selection 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O Status row

PAR Fast value change
10 START/STOP/DIR Parameter group
01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR Parameter
Parameter selection
Slow value change DI1,2 Parameter value
Enter change mode

ENTER Accept new value
Function Mode
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O Status row

FUNC Row selection
Motor Setup
Page selection
Application Macro List of functions
Speed Control EXT1
ENTER Function start
Drive Selection Mode
Drive selection ACS800 Device type

DRIVE ID number change
Enter change mode ASXR7260 xxxxxx SW loading package

ENTER Accept new value name and ID number
ID NUMBER 1
Status row
The figure below describes the status row digits.
Drive ID number Drive status

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
I = Running
Drive control status
O = Stopped
L = Local control Direction of rotation Drive reference “ “ = Run disabled
R = Remote control -> = Forward
“ “ = External control <- = Reverse
Control panel
27
Drive control with the panel

The user can control the drive with the panel as follows:
• start, stop, and change direction of the motor
• give the motor speed reference or torque reference
• give a process reference (when the process PID control is active)
• reset the fault and warning messages
• change between local and external drive control.
The panel can be used for control of the drive control always when the drive is under
local control and the status row is visible on the display.
How to start, stop and change direction

Step Action Press Key Display
1. To show the status row. 1 ->1242.0 rpm I

ACT PAR
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
FUNC
POWER 75.00 %
2. To switch to local control. 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I

LOC
(only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L FREQ 45.00 Hz
REM
on the first row of the display.) CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
3. To stop 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O

FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
4. To start 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I

FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
5. To change the direction to reverse. 1 L <-1242.0 rpm I

0 FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
6. To change the direction to forward. 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I

I FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
28
How to set speed reference

1. To show the status row. 1 ->1242.0 rpm I

ACT PAR
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
FUNC
POWER 75.00 %
2. To switch to local control. 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I

LOC
(Only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L FREQ 45.00 Hz
REM
on the first row of the display.) CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
3. To enter the Reference Setting function. REF

1 L ->[1242.0 rpm]I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
4. To change the reference. 1 L ->[1325.0 rpm]I

(slow change) FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
(fast change)
5. To save the reference. 1 L -> 1325.0 rpm I

ENTER
(The value is stored in the permanent memory; it is FREQ 45.00 Hz
restored automatically after power switch-off.) CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
29
Actual signal display mode

In the Actual Signal Display Mode, the user can:
• show three actual signals on the display at a time
• select the actual signals to display
• view the fault history
• reset the fault history.
The panel enters the Actual Signal Display Mode when the user presses the ACT
key, or if he does not press any key within one minute.
How to select actual signals to the display

Step Action Press key Display
1. To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

ACT FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
2. To select a row (a blinking cursor indicates the selected 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
row). FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
3. To enter the actual signal selection function. ENTER

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
04 CURRENT
80.00 A
4. To select an actual signal. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
05 TORQUE 70.00 %
To change the actual signal group.
5.a To accept the selection and to return to the Actual Signal 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
ENTER
Display Mode. FREQ 45.00 Hz
TORQUE 70.00 %
POWER 75.00 %
5.b To cancel the selection and keep the original selection. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
ACT PAR
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
The selected keypad mode is entered.
FUNC DRIVE
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
30
How to display the full name of the actual signals

1. To display the full name of the three actual signals. Hold 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQUENCY
ACT CURRENT
POWER
2. To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode. Release 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
ACT CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
How to view and reset the fault history
Note: The fault history cannot be reset if there are active faults or warnings.
1. To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

ACT FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
2. To enter the Fault History Display. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

1 LAST FAULT
+OVERCURRENT
6451 H 21 MIN 23 S
3. To select the previous (UP) or the next fault/warning 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
(DOWN). 2 LAST FAULT
+OVERVOLTAGE
1121 H 1 MIN 23 S
To clear the Fault History. RESET

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
2 LAST FAULT
H MIN S
4. To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I

FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Control panel
31
How to display and reset an active fault
WARNING! If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the
drive will start immediately after fault reset. If the cause of the fault has not been
removed, the drive will trip again.
1. To display an active fault. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm

ACT ACS800
** FAULT **
ACS800 TEMP
2. To reset the fault. RESET 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
About the fault history

The fault history restores information on the latest events (faults, warnings and
resets) of the drive. The table below shows how the events are stored in the fault
history.
Event Information on display

Drive detects a fault and Sequential number of the event and
A Fault History View generates a fault message LAST FAULT text.
Sign Name and Name of the fault and a “+” sign in front
code of the name.
Sequential number Power- Total power-on time.

(1 is the most recent event) on time User resets the fault message. Sequential number of the event and
LAST FAULT text.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I -RESET FAULT text.
2 LAST FAULT Total power-on time.
+DC OVERVOLT (3210)
1121 H 1 MIN 23 S Drive generates a warning Sequential number of the event and
message. LAST WARNING text.
Name of the warning and a “+” sign in
front of the name.
Total power-on time.
Drive deactivates the warning Sequential number of the event and
message. LAST WARNING text.
Name of the warning and a “-” sign in
front of the name.
Total power-on time.
Control panel
32
Parameter mode
In the Parameter Mode, the user can:
• view the parameter values
• change the parameter settings.
The panel enters the Parameter Mode when the user presses the PAR key.
How to select a parameter and change the value

1. To enter the Parameter Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

PAR 10 START/STOP/DIR
01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR
DI1,2
2. To select a group. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

11 REFERENCE SELECT
01 KEYPAD REF SEL
REF1 (rpm)
3. To select a parameter within a group. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
AI1
4. To enter the parameter setting function. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
[AI1]
5. To change the parameter value. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

- (slow change for numbers and text) 11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
[AI2]
- (fast change for numbers only)
6a. To save the new value. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
AI2
6b. To cancel the new setting and keep the original value, 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
ACT PAR
press any of the mode selection keys. 11 REFERENCE SELECT
The selected mode is entered. 03 EXT REF1 SELECT
FUNC DRIVE
AI1
Control panel
33
How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter

Most parameters define values that are used directly in the drive application
program. Source selection (pointer) parameters are exceptions: They point to the
value of another parameter. The parameter setting procedure differs somewhat from
that of the other parameters.
1. See the table above to 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O

- enter the Parameter Mode PAR 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
- select the correct parameter group and parameter
[±000.000.00]
- enter the parameter setting mode
ENTER
2. To scroll between the inversion, group, index and bit 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
fields.1) 84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[±000.000.00]
3. To adjust the value of a field. 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O

84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[±000.018.00]
4. To accept the value.

ENTER
1)
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O Inversion field inverts the selected parameter

84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM value. Plus sign (+): no inversion, minus (-) sign:
06 INPUT1 inversion.
[±001.018.00] Bit field selects the bit number (relevant only if the
Inversion field parameter value is a packed boolean word).
Group field Index field selects the parameter index.
Index field
Group field selects the parameter group.
Bit field
Note: Instead of pointing to another parameter, it is also possible to define a

constant by the source selection parameter. Proceed as follows:
- Change the inversion field to C. The appearance of the row changes. The rest of
the line is now a constant setting field.
- Give the constant value to the constant setting field.
- Press Enter to accept.
Control panel
34
Function mode
In the Function Mode, the user can:
• start a guided procedure for adjusting the drive settings (assistants)
• upload the drive parameter values and motor data from the drive to the panel.
• download group 1 to 97 parameter values from the panel to the drive. 1)
• adjust the contrast of the display.
The panel enters the Function Mode when the user presses the FUNC key.
1)
The parameter groups 98, 99 and the results of the motor identification are not included by default. The restriction
prevents downloading of unfit motor data. In special cases it is, however, possible to download all. For more information,
please contact your local ABB representative.
Control panel
35
How to enter an assistant, browse and exit

The table below shows the operation of the basic keys which lead the user through
an assistant. The Motor Setup task of the Start-up Assistant is used as an example.
The Start-up Assistant is not available in Scalar mode or when the parameter lock is
on. (99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE = SCALAR or 16.02 PARAMETER LOCK =
LOCKED or 16.10 ASSIST SEL = OFF)
1. To enter the Function Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

FUNC Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
2. To select a task or function from the list (a flashing cursor 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
indicates the selection). Motor Setup
Double arrows: To change page to see more assistants/ Application Macro
functions. Speed Control EXT 1
3. To enter the task. ENTER Motor Setup 1/10

ENTER: Ok/Continue
ACT: Exit
FUNC: More Info
4. To accept and continue. ENTER Motor Setup 2/10

MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA
AVAILABLE?
ENTER:Yes FUNC:Info
5. To accept and continue. ENTER Motor Setup 3/10

MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[0 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
6. a. To adjust the requested drive parameter. Motor Setup 3/10

MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[415 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:back
b. To ask for information on the requested value. FUNC INFO P99.05

(To scroll the information displays Set as given on the
( )
motor nameplate.
and return to the task).
FUNC, ACT
7. a. To accept a value and step forward. ENTER Motor Setup 4/10

MOTOR NOM CURRENT?
[0.0 A]
ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
b. To cancel the setting and take one step back. RESET Motor Setup 3/10
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[415 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:back
Control panel
36
8. To cancel and exit. 2 x ACT 1 L -> 0.0 rpm O

Note: 1 x ACT returns to the first display of the task. FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
How to upload data from a drive to the panel
Note:
• Upload before downloading.
• Ensure the firmware of the destination drive is the same (e.g. standard firmware).
• Before removing the panel from a drive, ensure the panel is in remote operating
mode (change with the LOC/REM key).
• Stop the drive before downloading.
Before upload, repeat the following steps in each drive:

• Setup the motors.
• Activate the communication to the optional equipment. (See parameter group 98
OPTION MODULES.)
Before upload, do the following in the drive from which the copies are to be taken:
• Set the parameters in groups 10 to 97 as preferred.
• Proceed to the upload sequence (below).
1. Enter the Function Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

FUNC Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
2. Enter the page that contains the upload, download and 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
contrast functions. UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
3. Select the upload function (a flashing cursor indicates the 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
selected function). UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
4. Enter the upload function. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

UPLOAD <=<=
5. Switch to external control. 1 -> 1242.0 rpm O

LOC
(No L on the first row of the display.) UPLOAD <=<=
REM
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
Control panel
37
6. Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the drive into

which the data will be downloaded.
How to download data from the panel to a drive

Consider the notes in section How to upload data from a drive to the panel on page
36.
1. Connect the panel containing the uploaded data to the

drive.
2. Ensure the drive is in local control (L shown on the first row 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
LOC
of the display). If necessary, press the LOC/REM key to FREQ 45.00 Hz
REM
change to local control. CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %

FUNC Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
5. Select the download function (a flashing cursor indicates 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
the selected function). UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
6. Start the download. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

DOWNLOAD =>=>
Control panel
38
How to set the contrast of the display


FUNC Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
3. Select a function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
function). UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
4. Enter the contrast setting function. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

CONTRAST [4]
5. Adjust the contrast. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm

CONTRAST [6]
6.a Accept the selected value. ENTER 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O

UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 6
6.b Cancel the new setting and retain the original value by 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
pressing any of the mode selection keys. ACT PAR FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
The selected mode is entered. FUNC DRIVE
Control panel
39
Drive selection mode

In normal use the features available in the Drive Selection Mode are not needed; the
features are reserved for applications where several drives are connected to one
panel link. (For more information, see the Installation and Start-up Guide for the
Panel Bus Connection Interface Module, NBCI, [3AFY58919748 (English)].
In the Drive Selection Mode, the user can:
• Select the drive with which the panel communicates through the panel link.
• Change the identification number of a drive connected to the panel link.
• View the status of the drives connected on the panel link.
The panel enters the Drive Selection Mode when the user presses the DRIVE key.
Each on-line station must have an individual identification number (ID). By default,
the ID number of the drive is 1.
Note: The default ID number setting of the drive should not be changed unless the
drive is to be connected to the panel link with other drives on-line.
How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number

1. To enter the Drive Selection Mode. ACS800

DRIVE
ASAAA5000 xxxxxx
ID NUMBER 1
2. To select the next drive/view. ACS800

The ID number of the station is changed by first pressing
ENTER (the brackets round the ID number appear) and ASAAA5000 xxxxxx
then adjusting the value with arrow buttons. The new value
ID NUMBER 1
is accepted with ENTER. The power of the drive must be
switched off to validate its new ID number setting.
The status display of all devices connected to the Panel 1o

Link is shown after the last individual station. If all stations
do not fit on the display at once, press the double-arrow up
Status Display Symbols:
to view the rest of them.
o = Drive stopped, direction
forward
= Drive running, direction
reverse
F = Drive tripped on a fault
3. To connect to the last displayed drive and to enter another 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
mode, press one of the mode selection keys. ACT PAR FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
FUNC
POWER 75.00 %
The selected mode is entered.
Control panel
40
Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display

Some actual values and parameters are packed boolean, i.e. each individual bit has
a defined meaning (explained at the corresponding signal or parameter). On the
control panel, packed boolean values are read and entered in hexadecimal format.
In this example, bits 1, 3 and 4 of the packed boolean value are ON:
Bit 15 Bit 0
Boolean 0000 0000 0001 1010

Hex 0 0 1 A
Control panel
41
Program features
Chapter overview
The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related
user settings, actual signals, and fault and warning messages.
Start-up Assistant
Introduction
The assistant guides the user through the start-up procedure, helping the user to
feed the requested data (parameter values) to the drive. The assistant also check
that the entered values are valid, i.e. within the allowed range. At the first start, the
drive suggests entering the first task of the assistant, Language Select,
automatically.
The Start-up Assistant is divided into tasks. The user may activate the tasks either
one after the other as the Start-up Assistant suggests, or independently. The user
may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the
assistant at all.
See chapter Control panel on how to start the assistant, browse and exit.
Note: Option modules assistant is not supported from firmware version AS7R7363
onwards.
The default order of the tasks

Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 99.02), the
Start-up Assistant decide which consequent tasks it suggests. The default tasks are
shown in the table below.
Application Default Tasks
Selection
FACTORY, SEQ Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Speed Control EXT1, Start/Stop
CTRL Control, Protections, Output Signals
HAND/AUTO Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Speed Control EXT2, Start/Stop
Control, Speed Control 1, Protections, Output Signals
T CTRL Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Torque Control, Start/Stop Control,
Speed Control EXT1, Protections, Output Signals
PID CTRL Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, PID Control, Start/Stop Control, Speed
Control EXT1, Protections, Output Signals
Program features
42
List of tasks and the relevant drive parameters

Name Description Set parameters
Language Select Selecting the language 99.01
Motor Set-up Setting the motor data 99.05, 99.06, 99.09, 99.07, 99.08,
99.04
Performing the motor identification. (If the speed limits are not in 99.10 (20.8, 20.07)
the allowed range: Setting the limits).
Application Selecting the application macro 99.02, parameters associated to
the macro
Option Modules Activating the option modules Group 98, 35, 52
Speed Control Selecting the source for the speed reference 11.03
EXT1 (If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
inversion) 13.05, 30.01)
Setting the reference limits 11.04, 11.05
Setting the speed (frequency) limits 20.02, 20.01, (20.08, 20.07)
Setting acceleration and deceleration times 22.02, 22.03
(Setting up the brake chopper if activated by parameter 27.01) (Group 27, 20.05, 14.01)
(If 99.02 is not SEQ CTRL: Setting constant speeds) (Group 12)
Speed Control Setting the source for the speed reference 11.06
EXT2 (If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
inversion) 13.05, 30.01)
Torque Control Selecting the source for the torque reference 11.06
(If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
inversion) 13.05, 30.01)
Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times 24.01, 24.02
PID Control Selecting the source for the process reference 11.06
(If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale, (13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
inversion) 13.05, 30.01)
Setting the speed (reference) limits 20.02, 20.01 (20.08, 20.07)
Setting the source and limits for the process actual value 40.07, 40.09, 40.10
Start/Stop Control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external 10.01, 10.02
control locations, EXT1 and EXT2
Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 11.02
Defining the direction control 10.03
Defining the start and stop modes 21.01, 21.02, 21.03
Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 16.01, 21.07
Setting the ramp time for the Run Enable function 22.07
Protections Setting the torque and current limits 20.03, 20.04
Output Signals Selecting the signals indicated through the relay outputs RO1, Group 14
RO2, RO3 and optional RO’s (if installed)
Selecting the signals indicated through the analogue output 15.01, 15.02, 15.03, 15.04, 15.05,
AO1, AO2 and optional AO’s (if installed). Setting the minimum, (Group 96)
maximum, scaling and inversion.
Program features
43
Contents of the assistant displays

There are two types of displays in the Start-up Assistant: The main displays and the
information displays. The main displays prompt the user to feed in information or
answer a question. The assistant steps through the main displays. The information
displays contain help texts for the main displays. The figure below shows a typical
example of both and explanations of the contents.
Main Display Information Display

1 Motor Setup 3/10 INFO P99.05
2 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE? Set as given on the motor
3 [0 V] nameplate.
4 ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
1 Name of the assistant, step Text INFO, index of parameter to

number / total number of steps be set
2 Request/question Help text …
3 Feed-in field … help text continued
4 Commands: accept value and double arrow symbol (indicates
step forward or cancel and step that the text continues)
backwards
Local control vs. external control

The drive can receive start, stop and direction commands and reference values from
the control panel or through digital and analogue inputs. An optional fieldbus adapter
enables control over an open fieldbus link. A PC equipped with DriveWindow can
also control the drive.
Local control ACS800 External control
Standard I/O
Control panel Fieldbus Slot 1

adapter
RTAC/RDIO/RAIO Slot 1 or Slot 2

module
RDCO CH0 Fieldbus adapter

CH3 module (DDCS) Nxxx
DriveWindow
(DDCS) or
Advant controller
(e.g. AC 80, AC 800M)
CH1 AIMA-01 I/O RTAC/RDIO/RAIO

(DDCS) adapter module module
Program features
44
Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in
local control. L indicates local control on the panel display.
1 L ->1242 rpm I
The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in
local mode.
External control
When the drive is in external control, the commands are given through the standard
I/O terminals (digital and analogue inputs), optional I/O extension modules and/or
the fieldbus interface. In addition, it is also possible to set the control panel as the
source for the external control.
External control is indicated by a blank on the panel display or with an R in those
special cases when the panel is defined as a source for external control.
1 ->1242 rpm I 1 R ->1242 rpm I
External Control through the Input/ External Control by control panel

Output terminals, or through the
fieldbus interfaces
The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations, EXT1 or
EXT2. Depending on the user selection, either one is active at a time. This function
operates on a 12 ms time level.
Settings
Panel key Additional information
LOC/REM Selection between local and external control
Parameter
11.02 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2
10.01 Start, stop, direction source for EXT1
11.03 Reference source for EXT1
10.02 Start, stop, direction source for EXT2
11.06 Reference source for EXT2
Group 98 OPTION Activation of the optional I/O and serial communication
MODULES
Diagnostics
Actual signals Additional information
01.11, 01.12 EXT1 reference, EXT2 reference
03.02 EXT1/EXT2 selection bit in a packed boolean word
Program features
45
Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1

The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start, stop, and
direction for external control location EXT1.
Select
DI1 / Std IO DI1
DI6 EXT1
DI6 / Std IO Start/stop/
DI7 to DI9 direction
DI1 / DIO ext 1 10.01
I/O Extensions
DI2 / DIO ext 1
See group 98
DI1 / DIO ext 2 OPTION
DI2 / DIO ext 2 MODULES.
Fb. selection
Fieldbus adapter slot 1 See chapter COMM.
CH0 / RDCO board Fieldbus control. CW
Standard Modbus® Link
KEYPAD
Control panel
DI1 / Std IO = Digital input DI1 on the standard I/O terminal block
DI1 / DIO ext 1 = Digital input DI1 on the digital I/O extension module 1
Block diagram: reference source for EXT1

The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed
reference of external control location EXT1.
AI1 / Std IO AI1, AI2, AI3, DI3, DI4 Select

AI2 / Std IO
AI3 / Std IO EXT1
AI5, AI6
DI3 / Std IO Reference
DI4 / Std IO DI11, DI12
REF1 (rpm)
11.03
AI1 / AIO ext I/O Extensions
AI2 / AIO ext See parameter
group 98 OPTION
DI1 / DIO ext 3
MODULES.
DI2 / DIO ext 3
Fieldbus adapter slot 1 Fb. selection
See chapter COMM.
CH0 / RDCO board REF
Fieldbus control.
Standard Modbus Link
Control panel KEYPAD
AI1 / Std IO = Analogue input AI1 on the standard I/O terminal block
AI1 / AIO ext = Analogue input AI1 on the analogue I/O extension module
Program features
46
Reference types and processing

The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analogue
input signal and control panel signals.
• The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs: One digital input
increases the speed, the other decreases it.
• The drive accepts a bipolar analogue speed reference. This feature allows both
the speed and direction to be controlled with a single analogue input. The
minimum signal is full speed reversed and the maximum signal is full speed
forward.
• The drive can form a reference out of two analogue input signals by using
mathematical functions: Addition, subtraction, multiplication, minimum selection,
and maximum selection.
• The drive can form a reference out of an analogue input signal and a signal
received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical
functions: addition and multiplication.
It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and
maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum
speed limits.
Settings
Parameter Additional information
Group 11 REFERENCE External reference source, type and scaling
SELECT
Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits
Group 22 ACCEL/DECEL Speed reference acceleration and deceleration ramps
Group 24 TORQUE CTRL Torque reference ramp times
Group 32 SUPERVISION Reference supervision
Diagnostics
Actual signal Additional information
01.11, 01.12 Values of external references
Group 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS The reference values in different stages of the reference processing
chain.
Parameter
Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Active reference / reference loss through a relay output
Group 15 ANALOGUE Reference value
OUTPUTS
Program features
47
Reference trimming
In reference trimming, the external %-reference (External reference REF2) is
corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable.
The block diagram below illustrates the function.
Switch Select
max.freq
Select
DIRECT (3)
max.speed max.torque
%ref PROPOR. (2)
Select 99.04 (DTC) 40.18
1 OFF (1)
AI1 Add
AI2 40.14 %ref
... Mul. %ref’
40.16
PID Mul.
40.15 40.17
tref
40.01 k
Actual Values 40.02 ti
40.03 td
40.05 .
. i
. Filter 40.04 dFiltT
40.07 40.05 errVInv
AI1 40.13 rInt
AI2 PIDmax oh1
AI3 PIDmin ol1
AI5
AI6 40.19
IMOT
%ref= The drive reference before trimming

%ref’ = The drive reference after trimming
max. speed= Par. 20.02 (or 20.01 if the absolute value is greater)
max. freq = Par. 20.08 (or 20.07 if the absolute value is greater)
max. torq = Par. 20.14 (or 20.13 if the absolute value is greater)
Settings
40.14…40.18 Trimming function settings
40.01…40.13, 40.19 PID control block settings
Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits
Program features
48
Example
The drive runs a conveyor line. It is speed-controlled but the line tension also needs
to be taken into account: If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint, the
speed will be slightly decreased, and vice versa.
To accomplish the desired speed correction, the user:
• activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the
measured tension to it
• tunes the trimming to a suitable level.
Speed controlled conveyor line
Drive rollers (pull)

Tension measurement
Simplified block diagram

Add
Speed reference Trimmed
speed reference
PID
Tension
measurement
Tension
setpoint
Program features
49
Programmable analogue inputs

The drive has three programmable analogue inputs: one voltage input (0/2 to 10 V or
-10 to 10 V) and two current inputs (0/4 to 20 mA). Two extra inputs are available if
an optional analogue I/O extension module is used. Each input can be inverted and
filtered, and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted.
Update cycles in the Standard Control Program

Input Cycle
AI / standard 6 ms
AI / extension 6 ms (100 ms 1))
1)
Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function. See group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
Settings
Group 11 REFERENCE AI as a reference source
SELECT
Group 13 ANALOGUE Processing of the standard inputs
INPUTS
30.01 Supervision of AI loss
Group 40 PID AI as a PID process control reference or actual values
CONTROL
35.01 AI in a motor temperature measurement
40.15 AI in a drive reference trimming
42.07 AI in a mechanical brake control function
98.06 Activation of optional analogue inputs
98.13 Optional AI signal type definition (bipolar or unipolar)
98.14 Optional AI signal type definition (bipolar or unipolar)
Diagnostics
Actual value Additional information
01.18, 01.19, 01.20 Values of standard inputs
01.38, 01.39 Value of optional inputs
Group 09 ACTUAL Scaled analogue input values (integer values for function block
SIGNALS programming)
Program features
50
Programmable analogue outputs

Two programmable current outputs (0/4 to 20 mA) are available as standard, and
two outputs can be added by using an optional analogue I/O extension module.
Analogue output signals can be inverted and filtered.
The analogue output signals can be proportional to motor speed, process speed
(scaled motor speed), output frequency, output current, motor torque, motor power,
etc.
It is possible to write a value to an analogue output through a serial communication
link.

Output Cycle
AO / standard 24 ms
AO / extension 24 ms (1000 ms 1) )
1)
Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function. See group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
Settings
Group 15 ANALOGUE AO value selection and processing (standard outputs)
OUTPUTS
30.20 Operation of an externally controlled AO in a communication break
30.22 Supervision of the use of optional AO
Group 35 MOT TEMP AO in motor temperature measurement
MEAS
Group 96 EXTERNAL Optional AO value selection and processing
AO
Group 98 OPTION Activation of optional I/O
MODULES
Diagnostics
01.22, 01.23 Values of the standard outputs
01.28, 01.29 Values of the optional outputs
Warning
IO CONFIG (FF8B) Improper use of optional I/O
Program features
51
Programmable digital inputs

The drive has six programmable digital inputs as a standard. Six extra inputs are
available if optional digital I/O extension modules are used.

Input Cycle
DI / standard 6 ms
DI / extension 12 ms
Settings
Group 10 START/STOP/ DI as start, stop, direction
DIR
Group 11 REFERENCE DI in reference selection, or reference source
SELECT
Group 12 CONSTANT DI in constant speed selection
SPEEDS
Group 16 SYST CTRL DI as external Run Enable, fault reset or user macro change signal
INPUTS
22.01 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal
30.03 DI as external fault source
30.05 DI in motor overtemperature supervision function
30.22 Supervision of optional I/O use
40.20 DI as sleep function activation signal (in PID process control)
42.02 DI as mechanical brake acknowledgement signal
98.03…96.05 Activation of the optional digital I/O extension modules
98.09…98.11 Naming of the optional digital inputs in the application program
Diagnostics
01.17 Values of the standard digital inputs
01.40 Values of the optional digital inputs
Warning
IO CONFIG (FF8B) Improper use of optional I/O
Fault
I/O COMM ERR (7000) Communication loss to I/O
Program features
52
Programmable relay outputs

As standard there are three programmable relay outputs. Six outputs can be added
by using the optional digital I/O extension modules. By means of a parameter setting
it is possible to choose which information to indicate through the relay output: ready,
running, fault, warning, motor stall, etc.
It is possible to write a value to a relay output through a serial communication link.

Output Cycle
RO / standard 100 ms
RO / extension 100 ms
Settings
Group 14 RELAY RO value selections and operation times
OUTPUTS
30.20 Operation of an externally controlled relay output on a communication break
Group 42 BRAKE RO in a mechanical brake control
CONTROL
Group 98 OPTION Activation of optional relay outputs
MODULES
Diagnostics
01.21 Standard relay output states
01.41 Optional relays output states
Program features
53
Actual signals
Several actual signals are available:
• Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power
• Motor speed and torque
• Supply voltage and intermediate circuit DC voltage
• Active control location (Local, EXT1 or EXT2)
• Reference values
• Drive temperature
• Operating time counter (h), kWh counter
• Digital I/O and Analogue I/O status
• PID controller actual values (if the PID Control macro is selected)
Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the control panel display. It is also
possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the
analogue outputs.
Settings
Group 15 ANALOGUE Selection of an actual signal to an analogue output
OUTPUTS
Group 92 D SET TR Selection of an actual signal to a data set (serial communication)
ADDR
Diagnostics
Group 01 ACTUAL Lists of actual signals
SIGNALS … 09
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Motor identification
The performance of Direct Torque Control is based on an accurate motor model
determined during the motor start-up.
A motor Identification Magnetisation is automatically done the first time the start
command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetised at zero speed
for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification
method is suitable for most applications.
In demanding applications a separate Identification Run can be performed.
Settings
Parameter 99.10.
Program features
54
Power loss ride-through

If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilising
the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as
the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the
operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.
Uin
TM fout UDC
(Nm) (Hz) (V d.c.) UDC
160 80 520
120 60 390
fout
80 40 260
TM
40 20 130
t(s)
1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4
UDC= Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = output frequency of the drive,
TM = Motor torque
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the
minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the supply voltage is switched off.
The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long
as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
Note: Cabinet assembled units equipped with main contactor option have a “hold
circuit” that keeps the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break.
The allowed duration of the break is adjustable. The factory setting is five seconds.
Automatic Start
Since the drive can detect the state of the motor within a few milliseconds, the
starting is immediate under all conditions. There is no restart delay. E.g. the starting
of turbining pumps or windmilling fans is easy.
Settings
Parameter 21.01.
Program features
55
Safe torque off (STO)

Safe torque off function disconnects the control voltage from the inverter power
semiconductors, i.e. the drive output voltage is cut off. See the circuit diagrams
delivered with the drive for the wirings to be made by the user.
and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore, maintenance work on electrical parts
may only be carried out after disconnecting the drive system from the input power
line.
The Safe torque off function operates as follows:

• The operator gives an STO function activation command (for example, with a
switch mounted on the control desk).
• The voltage supply of the ASTO-x1C board is disconnected.
• The drive application program receives an internal signal from the AINT board
that an STO function activation command has been given. If the STO function
activation command was given during run, the drive coasts to stop.
• The Safe torque off function is activated.
• Alarm START INHIBI is activated (03.08 Alarm Word 1 bit 0 value is 1).
• 03.03 AUX STATUS WORD bit 8 value is set to 1 (= Safe torque off function is
active) within 3 seconds.
Note: Fault START INHIBI is generated (03.03 AUX STATUS WORD bit 8 value is 1)
if the Safe torque off function is activated during motor run or if motor start command
is given when the Safe torque off function is already active.
Diagnostics
03.03 AUX STATUS WORD, bit 8 Safe torque off function activation status
03.08 ALARM WORD 1, bit 0 / Safe torque off function alarm/fault
03.03 AUX STATUS WORD, bit 8
Prevention of unexpected start-up (POUS)

The Prevention of unexpected start-up functions as Safe torque off described above,
with the following exceptions:
• POUS must not be activated during run.
• POUS requires an AGPS-x1C board (not ASTO-x1C).
Program features
56
Safely-limited speed (SLS) (AS7R firmware version only)

The SLS function limits the motor speed to a safe value.
Note: If used without a safety PLC, the SLS function does not fulfill the requirements
for SIL classification as defined in EN IEC 61800-5-2.
When the SLS function is activated, speed limits are ramped from the values of
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED to the value of 20.22 SLS
SPEED LIMIT and its additive inverse, respectively. The ramping begins at the
absolute value of the actual speed. If the actual speed is already below the SLS limit,
the limit comes into effect immediately without ramping.
When the SLS function is deactivated, the speed limits are ramped up back to the
values defined by 20.01 and 20.02, and the actual speed returns to the reference
value if it was limited by this function.
22.11 22.10
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED
Actual speed
0 20.22 SLS SPEED LIMIT
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED
SLS activated
Settings
10.09 SLS ACTIVE Selection of DI source
20.22 SLS SPEED LIMIT Safely-limited speed limit
22.10 SLS ACCELER TIME Time required for speed limit to ramp up from SLS to normal
22.11 SLS DECELER TIME Time required for speed limit to ramp down from current actual
speed to SLS
Diagnostics and control

03.04 FREQ_LIMIT, bit 15 SLS activation status
See also Safe speed functions for ACS800 cabinet-installed drives (+Q965/+Q966)
Application guide [3AUA0000090742 (English)].
Note: When SLS function is active, critical speed settings in parameter group 25 are
not in effect.
Program features
57
DC Magnetising
When DC Magnetising is activated, the drive automatically magnetises the motor
before starting. This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque, up
to 200% of motor nominal torque. By adjusting the premagnetising time, it is possible
to synchronise the motor start and e.g. a mechanical brake release. The Automatic
Start feature and DC Magnetising cannot be activated at the same time.
Settings
Parameters 21.01 and 21.02.
DC Hold
By activating the motor DC Hold feature it is possible to Motor
Speed
lock the rotor at zero speed. When both the reference DC Hold
and the motor speed fall below the preset DC hold
speed, the drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC DC hold
speed
into the motor. When the reference speed again exceeds t
the DC hold speed, the normal drive operation resumes. Speed
Reference
Settings
DC hold
Parameters 21.04, 21.05, and 21.06. speed
t
Flux Braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetisation in
the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during
braking can be converted to motor thermal energy. This feature is useful in motor
power ranges below 15 kW.
Motor TBr
Speed TN (%)
TBr = Braking Torque
No Flux Braking 60 TN = 100 Nm
40
Flux Braking
20
Flux Braking No Flux Braking
t (s) f (Hz)
50 HZ / 60 Hz
Program features
58
Braking Torque (%)

120
1 No Flux Braking
80
Rated Motor Power

40
2
1 2.2 kW 4 3
2 15 kW 0 5
f (Hz)
3 37 kW 5 10 20 30 40 50
4 75 kW 120
5 250 kW
1 Flux Braking
80
2
40 3
4
5
0 f (Hz)
5 10 20 30 40 50
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during the Flux Braking.
Therefore, Flux Braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing
the speed. The other benefits of Flux Braking are:
• The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does
not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
• The cooling of the motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases
during the Flux Braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more
efficiently than the rotor.
Settings
Parameter 26.02.
Flux Optimisation
Flux Optimisation reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when
the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive)
can be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque and speed.
Settings
Parameter 26.01.
Program features
59
Acceleration and deceleration ramps

Two user-selectable acceleration and deceleration ramps are available. It is possible
to adjust the acceleration/deceleration times and the ramp shape. Switching
between the two ramps can be controlled via a digital input.
Motor speed
The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear
and S-curve.
Linear: Suitable for drives requiring steady or slow Linear
acceleration/deceleration. S-curve
S-curve: Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads,

or other applications where a smooth transition is
required when changing the speed.
Settings 2 t (s)
Parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL.
Critical speeds
A Critical Speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid
certain motor speeds or speed bands because of e.g. mechanical resonance
problems.
Settings
Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS.
Constant speeds
It is possible to predefine 15 constant speeds. Constant speeds are selected with
digital inputs. Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference.
This function operates on a 6 ms time level.
Settings
Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS.
Program features
60
Speed controller tuning

During the motor identification, the speed controller is automatically tuned. It is,
however, possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and
derivation time, or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune Run. In
Autotune Run, the speed controller is tuned based on the load and inertia of the
motor and the machine. The figure below shows speed responses at a speed
reference step (typically, 1 to 20%).
n
nN
%
A B C D
A: Undercompensated t
B: Normally tuned (autotuning)
C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B
D: Overcompensated speed controller
The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller
output is the reference for the torque controller.
Derivative
acceleration
compensation
Proportional,
integral + Torque
Speed + Error +
reference - value + reference
Derivative
Actual speed
Settings
Parameter group 23 SPEED CTRL and 20 LIMITS.
Diagnostics
Actual signal 01.02.
Program features
61
Speed control performance figures

The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control when Direct
Torque Control is used.
T (%)
TN
Speed Control No Pulse With Pulse Tload
100
Encoder Encoder
Static speed error, + 0.1 to 0.5% + 0.01%
% of nN (10% of nominal
slip) t (s)
Dynamic speed 0.4 %sec.* 0.1 %sec.* 0.1 - 0.4 %sec
nact-nref
error
nN
*Dynamic speed error depends on speed controller tuning. TN = rated motor torque
nN = rated motor speed
nact = actual speed
nref = speed reference
Torque control performance figures

The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the
motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control,
when Direct Torque Control is used.
T (%)
TN
Torque Control No Pulse With Pulse Tref
Encoder Encoder 100
Tact
90
Linearity error + 4%* + 3%
Repeatability + 3%* + 1%
error
Torque rise time 1 to 5 ms 1 to 5 ms
*When operated around zero frequency, the error may be

greater.
10
< 5 ms t(s)
TN = rated motor torque
Tref = torque reference
Tact = actual torque
Program features
62
Scalar control
It is possible to select Scalar Control as the motor control method instead of Direct
Torque Control (DTC). In the Scalar Control mode, the drive is controlled with a
frequency reference. The outstanding performance of the default motor control
method, Direct Torque Control, is not achieved in Scalar Control.
It is recommended to activate the Scalar Control mode in the following special
applications:
• In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if
the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after
the motor identification
• If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of
the drive
• If the drive is used without a motor connected (e.g. for test purposes)
• The drive runs a medium voltage motor via a step-up transformer.
In the Scalar Control mode, some standard features are not available.
Settings
Parameter 99.04.
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive

IR Compensation is active only when the motor Motor Voltage
control mode is Scalar (see section Scalar control
on page 62). When IR Compensation is IR Compensation
activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost
to the motor at low speeds. IR Compensation is
useful in applications that require high breakaway
torque. In Direct Torque Control, no IR No compensation
Compensation is possible/needed. f (Hz)
Settings
Parameter 26.03.
Program features
63
Hexagonal motor flux

Typically the drive controls the motor flux in such a way that the rotating flux vector
follows a circular pattern. This is ideal in most applications. When operated above
the field weakening point (FWP, typically 50 or 60 Hz), it is, however, not possible to
reach 100% of the output voltage. The peak load capacity of the drive is lower than
with the full voltage.
If hexagonal flux control is selected, the motor flux is controlled along a circular
pattern below the field weakening point, and along a hexagonal pattern in the field
weakening range. The applied pattern is changed gradually as the frequency
increases from 100% to 120% of the FWP. Using the hexagonal flux pattern, the
maximum output voltage can be reached; The peak load capacity is higher than with
the circular flux pattern but the continuous load capacity is lower in the frequency
range of FWP to 1.6 · FWP, due to increased losses.
Settings
Parameter 26.05.
Programmable protection functions
AI<Min
AI<Min function defines the drive operation if an analogue input signal falls below the
preset minimum limit.
Settings
Parameter 30.01.
Panel Loss
Panel Loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as
control location for the drive stops communicating.
Settings
Parameter 30.02.
External Fault
External Faults can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an
external fault indication signal.
Settings
Parameter 30.03.
Program features
64
Motor Thermal Protection

The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal
Protection function and by selecting one of the motor thermal protection modes
available.
The Motor Thermal Protection modes are based either on a motor temperature
thermal model or on an overtemperature indication from a motor thermistor.
Motor temperature thermal model
The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following
assumptions:
1) The motor is at the estimated temperature (value of 01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST
saved at power switch off) when power is applied to the drive. When power is
applied for the first time, the motor is at the ambient temperature (30°C).
2) Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically
calculated motor thermal time and motor load curve (see the figures below). The
load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30°C.
Motor Motor Break point

Load Current 150
100% (%) Motor load curve
100
50
Temp. t Zero speed load
Rise
Speed
100%
63%
t
Motor thermal time
Use of the motor thermistor

It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor thermistor
(PTC) between the +24 VDC voltage supply offered by the drive and digital input
DI6. In normal motor operation temperature, the thermistor resistance should be less
than 1.5 kohm (current 5 mA). The drive stops the motor and gives a fault indication
if the thermistor resistance exceeds 4 kohm. The installation must meet the
regulations for protecting against contact.
Settings
Parameters 30.04 to 30.09.
Note: It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function. See
sections Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 73 and
Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I/O extension on page 75.
Program features
65
Stall Protection
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision
limits (torque, frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall
condition (warning indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
The torque and current limits, which define the stall limit, must be set according to
the maximum load of the used application. Note: Stall limit is restricted by internal
current limit 03.04 TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM.
When the application reaches the stall limit and the output frequency of the drive is
below the stall frequency: Fault is activated after the stall time delay.
Settings
Parameters 20.03, 20.13 and 20.14 (Define the stall limit.)
Underload Protection
Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The drive provides an
underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault
condition. Supervision limits - underload curve and underload time - can be chosen
as well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition (warning
indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
Settings
Motor Phase Loss

The Phase Loss function monitors the status of the motor cable connection. The
function is useful especially during the motor start: the drive detects if any of the
motor phases is not connected and refuses to start. The Phase Loss function also
supervises the motor connection status during normal operation.
Settings
Parameter 30.16.
Program features
66
Earth Fault Protection

The earth fault protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable. The
protection is based on sum current measurement.
• An earth fault in the supply cable does not activate the protection.
• In an earthed (grounded) supply, the protection activates in 200 microseconds.
• In an unearthed (ungrounded) supply, the supply capacitance should be
1 microfarad or more.
• The capacitive currents caused by shielded motor cables up to 300 metres do not
activate the protection.
• Earth fault protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped.
Note: With parallel connected inverter modules, the earth fault indication is
CUR UNBAL xx. See chapter Fault tracing.
Settings
Parameter 30.17.
Communication Fault
The Communication Fault function supervises the communication between the drive
and an external control device (e.g. a fieldbus adapter module).
Settings
Supervision of optional IO
The function supervises the use of the optional analogue and digital inputs and
outputs in the application program, and warns if the communication to the input/
output is not operational.
Settings
Parameter 30.22.
Preprogrammed faults
Overcurrent
The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 1.65 to 2.17 · Imax depending on the drive
type.
DC overvoltage
The DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 × 1.35 × U1max, where U1max is the maximum
value of the supply voltage range. For 400 V units, U1max is 415 V. For 500 V units,
U1max is 500 V. For 690 V units, U1max is 690 V. The actual voltage in the
intermediate circuit corresponding to the supply voltage trip level is 728 V DC for
400 V units, 877 V DC for 500 V units, and 1210 V DC for 690 V units.
Program features
67
DC undervoltage
The DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.6 × 1.35 × U1min, where U1min is the minimum
value of the supply voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units, U1min is 380 V. For
690 V units, U1min is 525 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit
corresponding to the supply voltage trip level is 307 V DC for 400 V and 500 V units,
and 425 V DC for 690 V units.
Drive temperature
The drive supervises the inverter module temperature. There are two supervision
limits: warning limit and fault trip limit.
Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800, frame sizes R7 and R8

Traditionally, drive temperature monitoring is based on the power semiconductor
(IGBT) temperature measurement which is compared with a fixed maximum IGBT
temperature limit. However, certain abnormal conditions such as cooling fan failure,
insufficient cooling air flow or excessive ambient temperature might cause
overheating inside the converter module, which the traditional temperature
monitoring alone does not detect. The Enhanced drive temperature monitoring
improves the protection in these situations.
The function monitors the converter module temperature by checking cyclically that
the measured IGBT temperature is not excessive considering the load current,
ambient temperature, and other factors that affect the temperature rise inside the
converter module. The calculation uses an experimentally defined equation that
simulates the normal temperature changes in the module depending on the load.
Drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the limit, and trips when
temperature exceeds the limit by 5°C.
Note: The monitoring is available for ACS800-02, -04 and -07, frame sizes R7 and
R8 with Standard Control Program version ASXR7360 (and later versions). For
ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame sizes R7 and R8, the monitoring is available with
Standard Control Program version ASXR730U (and later versions).
Types to which the enhanced drive temperature monitoring is available:

ACS800-XX -0080-2
-0100-2
-0120-2
-0140-2/3/7
-0170-2/3/5/7
-0210-2/3/5/7
-0230-2
-0260-2/3/5/7
-0270-5
-0300-2/5
-0320-3/5/7
-0400-3/5/7
Program features
68
-0440-3/5/7
-0490-3/5/7
-0550-5/7
-0610-5/7
Settings
95.10 TEMP INV AMBIENT Ambient temperature
Diagnostics
Warning/Fault Additional information
INV OVERTEMP Excessive converter module temperature
Short circuit
There are separate protection circuits for supervising the motor cable and the
inverter short circuits. If a short circuit occurs, the drive will not start and a fault
indication is given.
Input phase loss

Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the supply cable connection status by
detecting intermediate circuit ripple. If a phase is lost, the ripple increases. The drive
is stopped and a fault indication is given if the ripple exceeds 13%.
Control board temperature

The drive supervises the control board temperature. A fault indication CTRL B TEMP
is given, if the temperature exceeds 88°C.
Overfrequency
If the drive output frequency exceeds the preset level, the drive is stopped and a
fault indication is given. The preset level is 50 Hz over the operating range absolute
maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar
Control active).
Internal fault
If the drive detects an internal fault, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is
given.
Operation limits
ACS800 has adjustable limits for speed, current (maximum), torque (maximum) and
DC voltage.
Settings
Parameter group 20 LIMITS.
Program features
69
Power limit
Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit.
If the maximum allowed power is exceeded, the drive torque is automatically limited.
Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware.
For specific values refer to the appropriate hardware manual.
Automatic resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage
and “analogue input below a minimum” faults. The Automatic Resets must be
activated by the user.
Settings
Parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET.
Supervisions
The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user-
defined limits. The user may set limits for speed, current etc.
The supervision functions operate on a 100 ms time level.
Settings
Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
Diagnostics
Actual Signals Additional information
03.02 Supervision limit indicating bits in a packed boolean word
Group 14 RELAY Supervision limit indication through a relay output
OUTPUTS
Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock.
Settings
Parameters 16.02 and 16.03.
Program features
70
Process PID control

There is a built-in PID controller in the drive. The controller can be used to control
process variables such as pressure, flow or fluid level.
When the process PID control is activated, a process reference (setpoint) is
connected to the drive instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process
feedback) is also brought back to the drive. The process PID control adjusts the
drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity (actual value) at the
desired level (reference).
The control operates on a 24 ms time level.
Block diagrams
The block diagram below right illustrates the process PID control.
The figure on the left shows an application example: The controller adjusts the
speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set
pressure reference.
Example: PID Control Block Diagram

Pressure boost pump PID
%ref ref
A C S 6 0 0
40.01 k
ACS800 40.02 ti Switch
Actual Values Frequency
A C T P A R F U N C D R IV E
40.03 td
40.06 .
E N T E R
reference
L O C R E S E T R E F
i
R E M
.. 40.04 dFiltT
3
40.12 Filter
AI1
40.05 errVInv Speed
40.13 rInt
2 0 ...1 0 b a r AI2 PIDmax
reference
4 ...2 0 m A oh1
AI3 PIDmin ol1 99.04 = 0
AI5
(DTC)
AI6 40.19
3
IMOT
%ref = external reference EXT REF2 (see

parameter 11.06)
Program features
71
Settings
Parameter Purpose
99.02 Process PID control activation
40.01...40.13, 40.19, The settings of the process PID controller
40.25...40.27
32.13...32.18 The supervision limits for the process reference REF2 and the variables
ACT1 and ACT2
Diagnostics
Actual Signals Purpose
01.12, 01.24, 01.25, PID process controller reference, actual values and error value
01.26 and 01.34
Group 14 RELAY Supervision limit exceeded indication through a relay output
OUTPUTS
Group 15 ANALOGUE PID process controller values through standard analogue outputs
OUTPUTS
Group 96 EXTERNAL PID process controller values through optional analogue outputs
AO
Sleep function for the process PID control

The sleep function operates on a 100 ms time level.
The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable/disable logic. The
sleep function can be put into use only when the process PID control is active.
Compare
Mot.speed 1 Select
0
Delay
And
1<2 INTERNAL Set/Reset
DI1 t S
40.21 2 ..
.
%refActive
PIDCtrlActive & 1)
40.20 modulating
40.22
S/R
R
Or
03.02 (B1)
1)
<1 Or 1 = Activate
03.02 (B2)
sleeping
Compare
StartRq
<1 0 = Deactivate
01.34
sleeping
1 Select Delay
0
1<2 INTERNAL t
DI1
40.23 2 ..
.
40.20 40.24
Mot.speed: Actual speed of the motor

%refActive: The % reference (EXT REF2) is in use. See parameter 11.02.
PIDCtrlActive: 99.02 is PID CTRL
modulating: The inverter IGBT control is operating
Program features
72
Example
The time scheme below visualises the operation of the sleep function.
Motor Speed
td = Sleep delay, parameter 40.22

t<td td
Sleep level
Par. 40.21 Text on display
SLEEP MODE
Time
Actual Value STOP START
No inversion, i.e. par. 40.05 is NO.
twd
Wake-up level
Parameter 42.23
Time
twd = Wake-up delay, parameter 40.24
Actual Value
Inverted, i.e. par. 40.05 is YES.
Parameter 42.23
Wake-up level
twd
Time
Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump: The water consumption
falls at night. As a consequence, the PID process controller decreases the motor
speed. However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the
centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor does not stop but keeps rotating. The
sleep function detects the slow rotation, and stops the unnecessary pumping after
the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the
pressure. The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum
level and the wake-up delay has passed.
Settings
99.02 Process PID control activation
40.05 Inversion
40.20...40.24 Sleep function settings
Diagnostics
Warning SLEEP MODE on the panel display.
Program features
73
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O

This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive
control board RMIO is used as the connection interface.
RMIO board
One sensor
AI1+
Motor
AI1-
T
AO1+
AO1-
10 nF The minimum voltage
(> 630 VAC) of the capacitor must
be 630 VAC.
Three sensors RMIO board
AI1+
Motor AI1-
T T T
AO1+
AO1-
10 nF
(> 630 VAC)
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor
to the RMIO board, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts
and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of
8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement:
• The RMIO board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not
be connected to other equipment.
Or
• The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RMIO board terminals.
See also section Motor Thermal Protection on page 64.
Program features
74
Settings
15.01 Analogue output in a motor 1 temperature measurement. Set to M1 TEMP
MEAS.
35.01…35.03 Settings of motor 1 temperature measurement
Other
Parameters 13.01 to 13.05 (AI1 processing) and 15.02 to 15.05 (AO1 processing) are not effective.
At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible,
the shield is to be left unconnected.
Diagnostics
Actual values Additional information
01.35 Temperature value
Warnings
MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set alarm limit.
T MEAS ALM (FF91) Motor temperature measurement is out of acceptable range.
Faults
MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set fault limit.
Program features
75
Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I/O extension

This section describes the motor temperature measurement of one motor when an
optional analogue I/O extension module RAIO is used as the connection interface.
RAIO module
One sensor
AI1+
Motor
AI1-
T
AO1+
AO1-
10 nF
(> 630 VAC)
SHLD
The minimum voltage

Three sensors RAIO module of the capacitor must
be 630 VAC.
AI1+
Motor AI1-
T T T
AO1+
AO1-
10 nF
(> 630 VAC)
SHLD
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor
to the RAIO module, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live
parts and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage
distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the
requirement:
• The RAIO module terminals must be protected against contact and they may not
be connected to other equipment.
Or
• The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RAIO module terminals.
See also section Motor Thermal Protection on page 64.
Program features
76
Settings
35.01 … 35.03 Settings of motor 1 temperature measurement
98.12 Activation of optional analogue I/O for motor temperature measurement
Other
Parameters 13.16 to 13.20 (AI1 processing) and 96.01 to 96.05 (AO1 signal selection and processing)
are not effective.
At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible,
the shield is to be left unconnected.
Diagnostics
Actual values Additional information
01.35 Temperature value
Warnings
MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set alarm limit
T MEAS ALM (FF91) Motor temperature measurement is out of acceptable range.
Faults
MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set fault limit
Adaptive Programming using the function blocks

Conventionally, the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters. Each
parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range. The parameters make the
programming easy, but the choices are limited. The user cannot customise the
operation any further. The Adaptive Program makes freer customising possible
without the need of a special programming tool or language:
• The program is built of standard function blocks included in the drive application
program.
• The control panel is the programming tool.
• The user can document the program by drawing it on block diagram template
sheets.
The maximum size of the Adaptive Program is 15 function blocks. The program may
consist of several separate functions.
For more information, see the Application Guide for Adaptive Program
DriveAP
DriveAP is a Windows based tool for Adaptive Programming. With DriveAP it is
possible to upload the Adaptive Program from the drive and edit it with PC.
For more information, see the DriveAP User’s Manual [3AFE64540998 (English)].
Program features
77
Control of a mechanical brake

The mechanical brake is used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero
speed when the drive is stopped, or not powered.
Example
The figure below shows a brake control application example.
WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake control
function is integrated fulfils the personnel safety regulations. Note that the frequency
converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module, as defined in IEC
61800-2), is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the European
Machinery Directive and related harmonised standards. Thus, the personnel safety
of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific frequency converter
feature (such as the brake control function), but it has to be implemented as defined
in the application specific regulations.
Brake control logic is integrated in Brake control RMIO board

the drive application program. The hardware X25
brake control hardware and wirings
230 VAC
needs to be done by the user. 1 RO1
- Brake on/off control through relay 2 RO1
output RO1. 3 RO1
- Brake supervision through digital
input DI5 (optional). Emergency
- Emergency brake switch in the brake X22
brake control circuit.
5 DI5
7 +24 V
Motor Mechanical brake
Program features
78
Operation time scheme

The time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function. See
also the state machine on the following page.
1 5
Start command
External speed
reference
Inverter modulating 7
2
Motor magnetised tmd
tcd
Open brake
command
4
Internal speed
reference (actual tod 3 6
motor speed) ncs
Torque reference
Ts
time
Ts Start torque at brake release (Parameter 42.07 and 42.08)

tmd Motor magnetising delay
tod Brake open delay (Parameter 42.03)
ncs Brake close speed (Parameter 42.05)
tcd Brake close delay (Parameter 42.04)
Program features
79
State shifts
From any state
1) (rising edge)
NO
MODULATION 0/0/1
2)
OPEN
BRAKE 1/1/1
3)
A
5)
RELEASE RFG
INPUT 1/1/0
4)
RFG INPUT
TO ZERO 1/1/1
7)
10)
6)
11) CLOSE
BRAKE 0/1/1
RFG = Ramp Function 12)
A
Generator in the speed 13)
control loop (reference 8) 9)
handling).
BRAKE
ACK FAULT 0/0/1
State (Symbol NN )
X/Y/Z
- NN: State name
- X/Y/Z: State outputs/operations
X=1 Open the brake. The relay output set to brake on/off control energises.
Y=1 Forced start. The function keeps the internal Start on until the brake is closed in spite of the
status of the external Start signal.
Z=1 Ramp in zero. Forces the used speed reference (internal) to zero along a ramp.
State change conditions (Symbol )

1) Brake control active 0 -> 1 OR Inverter is modulating = 0
2) Motor magnetised = 1 AND Drive running = 1
3) Brake acknowledgement = 1 AND Brake open delay passed AND Start = 1
4) Start = 0
5) Start = 0
6) Start = 1
7) Actual motor speed < Brake close speed AND Start = 0
8) Start = 1
9) Brake acknowledgement = 0 AND Brake close delay passed = 1 AND Start = 0
Only if parameter 42.02 = OFF:
10) Brake acknowledgement = 0 AND Brake open delay passed =1
11) Brake acknowledgement = 0
12) Brake acknowledgement = 0
13) Brake acknowledgement = 1 AND Brake close delay passed = 1
Program features
80
Settings
14.01 Relay output for the brake control (set to BRAKE CTRL)
Group 42 BRAKE CONTROL Brake function settings
Diagnostics
03.01 Ramp in zero bit
03.13 The state of bit “brake open/close command”
Warnings
BRAKE ACKN (FF74) Unexpected state of brake acknowledge signal
Faults
BRAKE ACKN (FF74) Unexpected state of brake acknowledge signal
Master/Follower use of several drives

In a Master/Follower application, the system is run by several drives, the motor
shafts of which are coupled to each other. The master and follower drives
communicate via a fibre optic link. The figures below illustrate two basic application
types.
M/F Application, Overview

Solidly coupled motor shafts: Flexibly coupled motor shafts:
- Speed-controlled Master - Speed-controlled Master
- Follower follows the torque reference - Follower follows the speed reference
of the Master of the Master
External control
External control
signals
signals
n 3 n 3
Supply Supply
3 3
Master/
Follower fault 2 2 Follower Link Follower fault 2 2 Master/Follower
supervision supervision Link
3 3
Supply Supply
3 3
Settings and diagnostics

Group 60 MASTER/ Master/Follower parameters
FOLLOWER
Other
Master/Follower Application Guide [3AFE64590430 (English)] explains the functionality in further
detail.
Program features
81
Jogging
The jogging function is typically used to control a cyclical movement of a machine
section. One push button controls the drive through the whole cycle: When it is on,
the drive starts, accelerates to a preset speed at a preset rate. When it is off, the
drive decelerates to zero speed at a preset rate.
The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive. They also represent
how the drive shifts to normal operation (= jogging inactive) when the drive start
command is switched on. Jog cmd = State of the jogging input, Start cmd = State of
the drive start command.
The function operates on a 100 ms time level.
Speed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Time
Phase Jog Start Description

cmd cmd
1-2 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
2-3 1 0 Drive runs at the jogging speed.
3-4 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
4-5 0 0 Drive is stopped.
5-6 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
7-8 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the
active acceleration ramp.
8-9 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows the speed reference.
9-10 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp.
10-11 0 0 Drive is stopped.
11-12 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the
active acceleration ramp.
12-13 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows he speed reference.
13-14 1 0 Drive decelerates to the jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
15-16 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
x = State can be either 1 or 0.
Program features
82
Note: The jogging is not operational when:

• the drive start command is on, or
• the drive is in local control (L visible on the first row of the panel display).
Note: The jogging speed overrides the constant speeds.
Note: The ramp shape time is set to zero during the jogging.
Settings
10.06 Input for the on/off control of the jogging.
12.15 Jogging speed
21.10 Switch off delay for the inverter IGBT control. A delay keeps the inverter
modulation live over a short standstill period enabling a smooth restart.
22.04, 22.05 Acceleration and deceleration times used during the jogging.
22.06 Acceleration and deceleration ramp shape time: Set to zero during the
jogging.
Reduced Run function

Reduced Run function is available for parallel connected inverters. Reduced Run
function makes it possible to continue the operation with limited current if an inverter
module(s) is out of order. If one of the modules is broken, it must be removed.
Parameter change is needed to continue the run with reduced current (95.03 INT
CONFIG USER). For instructions on how to remove and reconnect an inverter
module, see the appropriate drive hardware manual.
Settings
95.03 INT CONFIG Number of existing parallel connected inverters
USER
Diagnostics
04.01 INT board fault
Faults
INT CONFIG Number of inverter modules is not equal to original number of inverters.
Program features
83
User load curve

Motor temperature rise can be limited by limiting the drive output current. The user
can define a load curve (output current as a function of frequency). The load curve is
defined by eight points by parameters 72.02...72.17. If the load curve is exceeded,
a fault / warning / current limitation is activated.
T/Tn
Normal motor load capacity
User load curve

Frequency
0 Hz 50 Hz 100 Hz
Overload
Overload supervision can be applied to the user load curve by setting parameters
72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT... 72.20 COOLING TIME according to the overload
values defined by the motor manufacturer.
The supervision is based on an integrator, ∫I2dt. Whenever the drive output current
exceeds the user load curve, the integrator is started. When the integrator has
reached the overload limit defined by parameters 72.18 and 72.19, the drive reacts
as defined by parameter 72.01 OVERLOAD FUNC. The output of the integrator is
set to zero if the current stays continuously below the user load curve for the cooling
time defined by parameter 72.20 COOLING TIME.
If the overload time 72.19 LOAD THERMAL TIME is set to zero, the drive output
current is limited to the user load curve.
Current
72.20
COOLING TIME
Overload Iuser curve
Ioutput
Frequency / Time
Program features
84
Settings
Group 72 USER LOAD User load curve
CURVE
Diagnostics
02.20 Measured motor current in percent of the user load curve current
Warnings
USER L CURVE Integrated motor current has exceeded load curve.
Faults
USER L CURVE Integrated motor current has exceeded load curve.
Program features
85
Application macros
Chapter overview
This chapter describes the intended use, operation and the default control
connections of the standard application macros. It also describes how to save a user
macro, and how to recall it.
Overview of macros
Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets. While starting up the drive,
the user typically selects one of the macros - the one that is best suited to his needs
- by parameter 99.02, makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user
macro.
There are five standard macros and two user macros. The table below contains a
summary of the macros and describes suitable applications.
Macro Suitable Applications
Factory Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant speeds
are used:
- Conveyors
- Speed-controlled pumps and fans
- Test benches with predefined constant speeds
Hand/Auto Speed control applications. Switching between two external control devices is
possible.
PID Control Process control applications e.g. different closed loop control systems such as
pressure control, level control, and flow control. For example:
- pressure boost pumps of municipal water supply systems
- level controlling pumps of water reservoirs
- pressure boost pumps of district heating systems
- material flow control on a conveyor line.
It is also possible to switch between process and speed control.
Torque Torque control applications. Switching between torque and speed control is
Control possible.
Sequential Speed control applications in which speed reference, seven constant speeds and
Control two acceleration and deceleration ramps can be used.
User The user can save the customised standard macro i.e. the parameter settings
including group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent
memory, and recall the data at a later time. Two user macros are essential when
switching between two different motors is required
Application macros
86

External +24 V power supply for the RMIO board is recommended if
Parameter settings
Application macros
87
Factory macro
All drive commands and reference settings can be given from the control panel or
from an external control location. The active control location is selected with the
LOC/REM key of the panel. The drive is speed-controlled.
In external control, the control location is EXT1. The reference signal is connected to
analogue input AI1 and Start/Stop and Direction signals are connected to digital
inputs DI1 and DI2. By default, the direction is fixed to FORWARD (parameter
10.03). DI2 does not control the direction of rotation unless parameter 10.03 is
changed to REQUEST.
Three constant speeds are selected by digital inputs DI5 and DI6. Two acceleration/
deceleration ramps are preset. The acceleration and deceleration ramps are used
according to the state of digital input DI4.
Two analogue signals (speed and current) and three relay output signals (ready,
running and inverted fault) are available.
The default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT
and POWER.
Application macros
88
Default control connections

The figure below shows the external control connections for the Factory macro. The
markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)
Effective only if parameter 10.03 is X20
switched to REQUEST by the user. 1 VREF Reference voltage -10 VDC
2 GND 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm
2)
The US default settings differ as X21
follows: 1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC
DI1 Start (Pulse: 0->1)
3 AI1+ Speed reference 0(2) … 10 V, Rin > 200 kohm
DI2 Stop (Pulse: 1->0) 4 AI1-
DI3 Forward/Reverse 5 AI2+ By default, not in use. 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin =
6 AI2- 100 ohm
3) 7 AI3+ By default, not in use. 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin =
0 = ramp times according to par.
8 AI3- 100 ohm
22.02 and 22.03. 1 = ramp times
according to par. 22.04 and 22.05. rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor nom.
10 AO1- speed, RL < 700 ohm
A 11 AO2+ Output current 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor
4)
See parameter group 12 12 AO2- nom. current, RL < 700 ohm
CONSTANT SPEEDS: X22
DI5 DI6 Operation 1 DI1 Stop/Start 2)
0 0 Set speed through AI1 2 DI2 Forward/reverse 1, 2)
1 0 Speed 1 3 DI3 By default, not in use. 2)
0 1 Speed 2 4 DI4 Acceleration & deceleration select 3)
5 DI5 Constant speed select 4)
1 1 Speed 3
6 DI6 Constant speed select 4)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
5)
See parameter 21.09. 8 +24 V
9 DGND1 Digital ground
6) 10 DGND2 Digital ground
11 DI IL Start interlock (0 = stop) 5)
between this output and optional
X23
1 +24 V Auxiliary voltage output and input, non-
2 GND isolated, 24 V DC 250 mA 6)
X25
1 RO11 Relay output 1
2 RO12 Ready
3 RO13
X26
2 RO22 Running
3 RO23
X27
1 R031 Relay output 3
Fault 2 R032 Inverted fault
3 R033
Application macros
89
Hand/Auto macro
Start/Stop and Direction commands and reference settings can be given from one of
two external control locations, EXT1 (Hand) or EXT2 (Auto). The Start/Stop/Direction
commands of EXT1 (Hand) are connected to digital inputs DI1 and DI2, and the
reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1. The Start/Stop/Direction
commands of EXT2 (Auto) are connected to digital inputs DI5 and DI6, and the
reference signal is connected to analogue input AI2. The selection between EXT1
and EXT2 is dependent on the status of digital input DI3. The drive is speed
controlled. Speed reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands can be given
from the control panel keypad also. One constant speed can be selected through
digital input DI4.
Speed reference in Auto Control (EXT2) is given as a percentage of the maximum
speed of the drive.
Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. The
default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT and
CTRL LOC.
Application macros
90

The figure below shows the external control connections for the Hand/Auto macro.
The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)
Selection between two external X20
control locations, EXT1 and EXT2. 1 VREF Reference voltage -10 VDC
2)
See parameter 21.09. X21
1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC, kohm < RL <
3) 2 GND 10 kohm
3 AI1+ Speed reference (Hand control). 0(2) … 10 V,
4 AI1- Rin > 200 kohm
5 AI2+ Speed reference (Auto control). 0(4) …
6 AI2- 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
7 AI3+ By default, not in use. 0(4) … 20 mA,
8 AI3- Rin = 100 ohm.
rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor nom.
12 AO2- nom. current, RL < 700 ohm
X22
1 DI1 Stop/Start (Hand control)
2 DI2 Forward/Reverse (Hand control)
3 DI3 Hand/Auto control select 1)
4 DI4 Constant speed 4: Par. 12.05
5 DI5 Forward/Reverse (Auto control)
6 DI6 Stop/Start (Auto control)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
X23
X25
2 RO12 Ready
3 RO13
X26
2 RO22 Running
3 RO23
X27
3 R033
Application macros
91
PID Control macro

The PID Control macro is used for controlling a process variable – such as pressure
or flow – by controlling the speed of the driven motor.
Process reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1 and process feedback
signal to analogue input AI2.
Alternatively, a direct speed reference can be given to the drive through analogue
input AI1. Then the PID controller is bypassed and the drive no longer controls the
process variable. Selection between the direct speed control and the process
variable control is done with digital input DI3.
default signals on the display of the control panel are SPEED, ACTUAL VALUE1 and
CONTROL DEVIATION.
Connection example, 24 VDC / 4…20 mA two-wire sensor
X21 / RMIO board

4…20 mA 5 AI2+ Process actual value measurement. 0(4) …
P
I 6 AI2- 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
…
X23 / RMIO board
1 +24 V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
2 GND 24 VDC, 250 mA
Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output. Thus the output signal must
be 4…20 mA, not 0…20 mA.
Application macros
92

The figure below shows the external control connections for the PID Control macro.
The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)
Selection between two external X20
control locations, EXT1 and EXT2 1 VREF Reference voltage -10 VDC
2)
In use only when the speed control X21
is active (DI3 = 0) 1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC
3) 3 AI1+ Speed ref. (speed cntrl) or process ref.
Off = Run Enable off. Drive will not
4 AI1- (process cntrl). 0(2) … 10 V, Rin > 200 kohm
start or stops. On = Run Enable on.
Normal operation. PT
5 AI2+ Process actual value measurement. 0(4) …
6 AI2- 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
5)
4)
7 AI3+ By default, not in use. 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin =
See parameter 21.09. 8 AI3- 100 ohm.
rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) … 20 mA =
5) 10 AO1- 0 … motor nom. speed, RL < 700 ohm
The sensor needs to be powered.
See the manufacturer’s instructions. A 11 AO2+ Output current 0(4) … 20 mA =
A connection example of a two-wire 12 AO2- 0 … motor nom. current, RL < 700 ohm
24 VDC / 4…20 mA sensor is shown X22
on previous page. 1 DI1 Stop/Start (speed control)
2 DI2 By default, not in use.
6)Total maximum current shared 3 DI3 Speed / process control select 1)
between this output and optional 4 DI4 Constant speed 4: Par. 12.05 2)
modules installed on the board. 5 DI5 Run Enable. 3)
6 DI6 Stop/Start (process control)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
X23
X25
2 RO12 Ready
3 RO13
X26
2 RO22 Running
3 RO23
X27
3 R033
Application macros
93
Torque Control macro

Torque Control macro is used in applications in which torque control of the motor is
required. Torque reference is given through analogue input AI2 as a current signal.
By default, 0 mA corresponds to 0 %, and 20 mA to 100 % of the rated motor torque.
The Start/Stop/Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
The Run Enable signal is connected to DI6.
Through digital input DI3 it is possible to select speed control instead of torque
control. It is also possible to change the external control location to local (i.e. to
control panel) by pressing the LOC/REM key. The panel controls the speed by
default. If torque control with panel is required, the value of parameter 11.01 should
be changed to REF2 (%).
default signals on the display of the control panel are SPEED, TORQUE and CTRL
LOC.
Application macros
94

The figure below shows the external control connections for the Torque Control
macro. The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1)Selection between external control X20

locations EXT1 and EXT2 1 VREF Reference voltage -10 VDC
2) In use only when the speed control X21
is active (DI3 = 0) 1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC
3) 3 AI1+ Speed reference. 0(2) … 10 V, Rin >
Off = Ramp times according to par.
4 AI1- 200 kohm
22.02 and 22.03. On = Ramp times
according to par. 22.04 and 22.05. 5 AI2+ Torque reference. 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin = 100
6 AI2- ohm
4)
Off = Run Enable off. Drive will not 8 AI3- 100 ohm
start or stops. On = Run Enable on.
rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor nom.
Normal operation.
5)
See parameter 21.09. 12 AO2- nom. current, RL < 700 ohm
X22
6)
Total maximum current shared 1 DI1 Stop/Start
between this output and optional 2 DI2 Forward/Reverse
modules installed on the board. 3 DI3 Speed / torque control select 1)
4 DI4 Constant speed 4: Par. 12.05 2)
5 DI5 Acceleration & deceleration select 3)
6 DI6 Run Enable 4)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
X23
X25
2 RO12 Ready
3 RO13
X26
2 RO22 Running
3 RO23
X27
3 R033
Application macros
95
Sequential Control macro

This macro offers seven preset constant speeds which can be activated by digital
inputs DI4 to DI6. Two acceleration/deceleration ramps are preset. The acceleration
and deceleration ramps are applied according to the state of digital input DI3. The
Start/Stop and Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
External speed reference can be given through analogue input AI1. The reference is
active only when all of the digital inputs DI4 to DI6 are 0 VDC. Giving operational
commands and setting reference is possible also from the control panel.
Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks.
Default stop mode is ramp. The default signals on the display of the control panel are
FREQUENCY, CURRENT and POWER.
Operation diagram
The figure below shows an example of the use of the macro.
Speed
Speed 3
Stop with
Speed 2 deceleration
ramp
Speed 1
Time
Accel1 Accel1 Accel2 Decel2
Start/Stop
Accel1/Decel1
Speed 1
Speed 2
Accel2/Decel2
Speed 3
Application macros
96

The figure below shows the external control connections for the Sequential Control
macro. The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
1) Off =
Ramp times according to par. X20
22.02 and 22.03. On = Ramp times 1 VREF Reference voltage -10 VDC
according to par. 22.04 and 22.05. 2 GND 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm
X21
2) 1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC
See parameter group 12
CONSTANT SPEEDS: 2 GND 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm
3 AI1+ External speed reference 0(2) … 10 V, Rin >
DI4 DI5 DI6 Operation
4 AI1- 200 kohm
0 0 0 Set speed through AI1
1 0 0 Speed 1 6 AI2- 100 ohm
0 1 0 Speed 2 7 AI3+ By default, not in use. 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin =
1 1 0 Speed 3 8 AI3- 100 ohm
0 0 1 Speed 4 rpm 9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor nom.
1 0 1 Speed 5 10 AO1- speed, RL < 700 ohm
0 1 1 Speed 6 A 11 AO2+ Output current 0(4) … 20 mA = 0 … motor
1 1 1 Speed 7 12 AO2- nom. current, RL < 700 ohm
X22
1 DI1 Stop/Start
3)
See parameter 21.09. 2 DI2 Forward/Reverse
3 DI3 Acceleration & deceleration selection 1)
4)
Total maximum current shared 4 DI4 Constant speed select 2)
between this output and optional 5 DI5 Constant speed select 2)
modules installed on the board. 6 DI6 Constant speed select 2)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
X23
X25
2 RO12 Ready
3 RO13
X26
2 RO22 Running
3 RO23
X27
3 R033
Application macros
97
User macros
In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to create two user
macros. The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including
Group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory, and
recall the data at a later time. The panel reference is also saved, if the macro is
saved and loaded in Local control mode. Remote control location setting is saved
into the user macro, but Local control location setting is not.
To create User Macro 1:
• Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if not performed yet.
• Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification by
changing parameter 99.02 to USER 1 SAVE (press ENTER). The storing takes 20
s to 1 min.
Note: If user macro save function is executed several times, drive memory fills up
and file compression starts. File compression can last up to 10 minutes. Macro
saving will be completed after the file compression. (Operation is indicated on the
last row of the control panel display by blinking dots).
To recall the user macro:
• Change parameter 99.02 to USER 1 LOAD.
• Press ENTER to load.
The user macro can also be switched via digital inputs (see parameter 16.05).
Note: User macro load restores also the motor settings in group 99 START-UP
DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that the settings correspond
to the motor used.
Example: The user can switch the drive between two motors without having to
adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the
motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor
identification once for both motors and then to save the data as two user macros.
When the motor is changed, only the corresponding User macro needs to be loaded,
and the drive is ready to operate.
Application macros
98
Application macros
99
Chapter overview
The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus
equivalent values for each signal/parameter. More data is given in chapter Additional
data: actual signals and parameters.

Term Definition
Absolute Maximum Value of 20.08, or 20.07 if the absolute value of the minimum limit is
Frequency greater than the maximum limit.
Absolute Maximum Value of parameter 20.02, or 20.01 if the absolute value of the minimum
Speed limit is higher than the maximum limit.
Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the
user. No user setting possible.
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel
and the integer used in serial communication.
Parameter A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive.

100
No. Name/Value Description FbEq

01 ACTUAL SIGNALS Basic signals for monitoring of the drive.
01.01 PROCESS VARIABLE Process variable based on settings in parameter group 34 PROCESS 1=1
VARIABLE.
01.02 SPEED Calculated motor speed in rpm. Filter time setting by parameter 34.04. -20000 =
-100% 20000
= 100% of
motor abs.
max. speed
01.03 FREQUENCY Calculated drive output frequency. -100 = -1 Hz
100 = 1 Hz
01.04 CURRENT Measured motor current. 10 = 1 A
01.05 TORQUE Calculated motor torque. 100 is the motor nominal torque. Filter time -10000 =
setting by parameter 34.05. -100% 10000
= 100% of
motor nom.
torque
01.06 POWER Motor power. 100 is the nominal power. -1000 =
-100% 1000 =
100% of motor
nom. power
01.07 DC BUS VOLTAGE V Measured intermediate circuit voltage. 1=1V
01.08 MAINS VOLTAGE Calculated supply voltage. 1=1V
01.09 OUTPUT VOLTAGE Calculated motor voltage. 1=1V
01.10 ACS800 TEMP Calculated IGBT temperature. 10 = 1%
01.11 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 in rpm. (Hz if value of parameter 99.04 is 1 = 1 rpm
SCALAR.)
01.12 EXTERNAL REF 2 External reference REF2. Depending on the use, 100% is the motor 0 = 0% 10000
maximum speed, motor nominal torque, or maximum process reference. = 100% 1)
01.13 CTRL LOCATION Active control location. (1,2) LOCAL; (3) EXT1; (4) EXT2. See section See descr.
Local control vs. external control on page 43.
01.14 OP HOUR COUNTER Elapsed time counter. Runs when the control board is powered. 1=1h
01.15 KILOWATT HOURS kWh counter. Counts inverter output kWh during operation (motor side - 1 = 100 kWh
generator side).
01.16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT Application block output signal. E.g. the process PID controller output 0 = 0% 10000
when the PID Control macro is active. = 100%
01.17 DI6-1 STATUS Status of digital inputs. Example: 0000001 = DI1 is on, DI2 to DI6 are off.
01.18 AI1 [V] Value of analogue input AI1. 1 = 0.001 V
01.19 AI2 [mA] Value of analogue input AI2. 1 = 0.001 mA
01.20 AI3 [mA] Value of analogue input AI3. 1 = 0.001 mA
01.21 RO3-1 STATUS Status of relay outputs. Example: 001 = RO1 is energised, RO2 and
RO3 are de-energised.
01.22 AO1 [mA] Value of analogue output AO1. 1 =0.001 mA

101

01.23 AO2 [mA] Value of analogue output AO2. 1 = 0.001 mA
01.24 ACTUAL VALUE 1 Feedback signal for the process PID controller. Updated only when 0 = 0% 10000
parameter 99.02 = PD CTRL = 100%
01.25 ACTUAL VALUE 2 Feedback signal for the process PID controller. Updated only when 0 = 0% 10000
parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL. = 100%
01.26 CONTROL DEVIATION Deviation of the process PID controller, i.e. the difference between the -10000 =
reference value and the actual value. Updated only when parameter -100% 10000
99.02 = PID CTRL. = 100%
01.27 APPLICATION MACRO Active application macro (value of parameter 99.02). See 99.02
01.28 EXT AO1 [mA] Value of output 1 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional). 1 = 0.001 mA
01.29 EXT AO2 [mA] Value of output 2 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional). 1 = 0.001 mA
01.30 PP 1 TEMP Measured heatsink temperature in inverter no. 1. 1 = 1°C
01.31 PP 2 TEMP Measured heatsink temperature in inverter no. 2 (used only in high power 1 = 1°C
units with parallel inverters).
01.34 ACTUAL VALUE Process PID controller actual value. See parameter 40.06. 0 = 0%
10000 = 100%
01.35 MOTOR 1 TEMP Measured temperature of motor 1. See parameter 35.01. 1 = 1°C/ohm
01.36 MOTOR 2 TEMP Measured temperature of motor 2. See parameter 35.04. 1 = 1°C/ohm
01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST Estimated motor temperature. Signal value is saved at power switch off. 1 = 1°C
01.38 AI5 [mA] Value of analogue input AI5 read from AI1 of the analogue I/O extension 1 = 0.001 mA
module (optional). A voltage signal is also displayed in mA (instead of V).
01.39 AI6 [mA] Value of analogue input AI6 read from AI2 of the analogue I/O extension 1 = 0.001 mA
module (optional). A voltage signal is also displayed in mA (instead of V).
01.40 DI7-12 STATUS Status of digital inputs DI7 to DI12 read from the digital I/O extension 1=1
modules (optional). E.g. value 000001: DI7 is on, DI8 to DI12 are off.
01.41 EXT RO STATUS Status of the relay outputs on the digital I/O extension modules (optional). 1 = 1
E.g. value 0000001: RO1 of module 1 is energised. Other relay outputs
are de-energised.
01.42 PROCESS SPEED REL Motor actual speed in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed. If 1=1
parameter 99.04 is SCALAR, the value is the relative actual output
frequency.
01.43 MOTOR RUN TIME Motor run time counter. The counter runs when the inverter modulates. 1 = 10 h
Can be reset by parameter 34.06.
01.44 FAN ON-TIME Running time of the drive cooling fan. 1 = 10 h
Note: Resetting of the counter is recommended when the fan is replaced.
For more information, contact your local ABB representative.
01.45 CTRL BOARD TEMP Control board temperature. 1 = 1°C
01.46 SAVED KWH Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection. 1 = 100 kWh
See parameter group 45 ENERGY OPT on page 164.
01.47 SAVED GWH Energy saved in GWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection. 1 = 1 GWh

102

01.48 SAVED AMOUNT Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This 1 = 100 cur
value is a multiplication of parameters 01.46 SAVED KWH and 45.02
ENERGY TARIFF1.
01.49 SAVED AMOUNT M Monetary savings in millions compared to direct-on-line motor 1 = 1 Mcur
connection.
01.50 SAVED CO2 Reduction in CO2 emissions in kilograms compared to direct-on-line 1 = 100 kg
motor connection. This value is calculated by multiplying saved energy in
megawatt-hours by 500 kg/MWh.
01.51 SAVED CO2 KTON Reduction in CO2 emissions in kilotons compared to direct-on-line motor 1 = 1 kton
connection.
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS Speed and torque reference monitoring signals.
02.01 SPEED REF 2 Limited speed reference. 100% corresponds to the Absolute Maximum 0 = 0% 20000
Speed of the motor. = 100% of
motor
absolute max.
speed
02.02 SPEED REF 3 Ramped and shaped speed reference. 100% corresponds to the 20000 = 100%
Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor.
02.09 TORQUE REF 2 Speed controller output. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. 0 = 0% 10000
= 100% of
motor nominal
torque
02.10 TORQUE REF 3 Torque reference. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. 10000 = 100%
02.13 TORQ USED REF Torque reference after frequency, voltage and torque limiters. 100% 10000 = 100%
corresponds to the motor nominal torque.
02.14 FLUX REF Flux reference in percent. 10000 = 100%
02.17 SPEED ESTIMATED Estimated motor speed. 100% corresponds to the Absolute Maximum 20000 = 100%
Speed of the motor.
02.18 SPEED MEASURED Measured motor actual speed (zero when no encoder is used). 100% 20000 = 100%
corresponds to the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor.
02.19 MOTOR ACCELERATIO Calculated motor acceleration from signal 01.02 MOTOR SPEED. 1=1 rpm/s.
02.20 USER CURRENT Measured motor current in percent of the user load curve current. User 10 = 1%
load curve current is defined by parameters 72.02...72.09. See section
User load curve on page 83.
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS Data words for monitoring of fieldbus communication (each signal is a 16- 2)
bit data word).
03.01 MAIN CTRL WORD A 16-bit data word. See section 03.01 MAIN CONTROL WORD on page
211.
03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD A 16-bit data word. See section 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD on page
212.
03.03 AUX STATUS WORD A 16-bit data word. See section 03.03 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD on
page 219.
03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 A 16-bit data word. See section 03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 on page 220.
03.05 FAULT WORD 1 A 16-bit data word. See section 03.05 FAULT WORD 1 on page 220.

103

03.07 SYSTEM FAULT A 16-bit data word. See section 03.07 SYSTEM FAULT WORD on page
222.
03.08 ALARM WORD 1 A 16-bit data word. See section 03.08 ALARM WORD 1 on page 222.
03.11 FOLLOWER MCW A 16-bit data word. For the contents, see Master/Follower Application
Guide [3AFE64590430 (English)].
03.13 AUX STATUS WORD 3 A 16-bit data word. See section 03.13 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 on
page 223.
03.14 AUX STATUS WORD 4 A 16-bit data word. See section 03.14 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4 on
page 224.
03.19 INT INIT FAULT A 16-bit data word. See section 03.19 INT INIT FAULT on page 226.
03.20 LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing for the codes.
03.21 2.LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest fault.
03.22 3.LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest fault.
03.23 4.LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 4th latest fault.
03.24 5.LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 5th latest fault.
03.25 LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the latest warning.
03.26 2.LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest warning.
03.27 3.LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest warning.
03.28 4.LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 4th latest warning.
03.29 5.LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 5th latest warning.
03.30 LIMIT WORD INV A 16-bit data word. See section 03.30 LIMIT WORD INV on page 227.
03.32 EXT IO STATUS Status of emergency stop and step up modules. See section 03.32 EXT
IO STATUS on page 228.
04 ACTUAL SIGNALS Signals for parallel connected inverters 2)
04.01 FAULTED INT INFO A 16-bit data word. See section 04.01 FAULTED INT INFO on page 229.
04.02 INT SC INFO A 16-bit data word. See section 04.02 INT SC INFO on page 230.
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS Signals for the Adaptive Program
09.01 AI1 SCALED Value of analogue input AI1 scaled to an integer value. 20000 = 10 V
09.02 AI2 SCALED Value of analogue input AI2 scaled to an integer value. 20000 = 20
mA
mA
mA
mA

104

09.06 DS MCW Control Word (CW) of the Main Reference data set received from the 0 ... 65535
master station through the fieldbus interface (Decimal)
09.07 MASTER REF1 Reference 1 (REF1) of the Main Reference data set received from the -32768 …
master station through the fieldbus interface 32767
09.08 MASTER REF2 Reference 2 (REF2) of the Main Reference data set received from the -32768 …
master station through the fieldbus interface 32767
09.09 AUX DS VAL1 Auxiliary data set value 1 received from the master station through the -32768 …
fieldbus interface 32767
09.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL1 Line-side converter signal selected by parameter 95.08. A 16-bit data
word.
09.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL2 Line-side converter signal selected by parameter 95.09. A 16-bit data
word.
1) Percent of motor maximum speed / nominal torque / maximum process reference (depending on the
ACS800 macro selected).
2) The contents of these data words are detailed in chapter Fieldbus control.

105
Index Name/Selection Description FbEq

10 START/STOP/DIR The sources for external start, stop and direction control
10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction
commands for external control location 1 (EXT1).
NOT SEL No start, stop and direction command source. 1
DI1 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop; 1 = start. Direction is fixed 2
according to parameter 10.3 DIRECTION.
WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is
on.
DI1,2 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. Direction through 3
digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03
DIRECTION must be REQUEST.
WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is
on.
DI1P,2P Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital 4
input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter
10.03 DIRECTION.
DI1P,2P,3 Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital 5
input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction through digital input DI3. 0 = forward, 1 =
reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be
REQUEST.
DI1P,2P,3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start forward. Pulse start 6
reverse through digital input DI2. 0 -> 1: Start reverse. Pulse stop through
digital input DI3. 1 -> ”0”: stop. To control the direction, parameter 10.03
DIRECTION must be REQUEST.
DI6 See selection DI1. 7
DI6,5 See selection DI1,2. DI6: Start/stop, DI5: direction. 8
KEYPAD Control panel. To control the direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be 9
REQUEST.
COMM.CW Fieldbus Control Word. 10
DI7,8 See selection DI1,2. DI7: start/stop, DI8: direction. 12
DI7P,8P See selection DI1P,2P. 13
DI7P,8P,9 See selection DI1P,2P,3. 14
DI7P,8P,9P See selection DI1P,2P,3P. 15
PARAM 10.04 Source selected by 10.04. 16
DI1 F, DI2 R Start, stop and direction commands through digital inputs DI1 and DI2. 17
DI1 DI2 Operation

0 0 Stop
1 0 Start forward
0 1 Start reverse
1 1 Stop
Note: Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST.

10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction
commands for external control location 2 (EXT2).
NOT SEL See parameter 10.01. 1

106

DI1 See parameter 10.01. 2
DI1,2 See parameter 10.01. 3
DI1P,2P See parameter 10.01. 4
DI1P,2P,3 See parameter 10.01. 5
DI1P,2P,3P See parameter 10.01. 6
KEYPAD See parameter 10.01. 9
COMM.CW See parameter 10.01. 10
DI7P,8P See parameter 10.01. 13
DI7P,8P,9 See parameter 10.01. 14
DI7P,8P,9P See parameter 10.01. 15
DI1 F, DI2 R See parameter 10.01. 17
10.03 REF DIRECTION Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor, or fixes the direction.
FORWARD Fixed to forward 1
REVERSE Fixed to reverse 2
REQUEST Direction of rotation control allowed 3
10.04 EXT 1 STRT PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10.04 of parameter 10.01.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value: -
+255.255.31 / C.- - Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is
32768 … C.32767 effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs.
- Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value
C to enable the constant setting.
10.05 EXT 2 STRT PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10.05 of parameter 10.02.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on -
+255.255.31 / C.- the difference.
32768 … C.32767
10.06 JOG SPEED SELECT Defines the signal that activates jogging function. The operation of the jogging
is explained in section Jogging on page 81.
NOT SEL Not selected. 1
DI3 Digital input DI3. 0 = Jogging is inactive. 1 = Jogging is active. 2

107

10.07 NET CONTROL When active, fieldbus overrides the selection of parameter 10.01. Fieldbus
Control Word (except bit 11) is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active
control location.
Note: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected
(98.07).
Note: The setting is not saved in the permanent memory (will reset to zero
when power is switched off).
0 Inactive 0
1 Active 1
10.08 NET REFERENCE When active, fieldbus overrides the selection of parameter 11.03. Fieldbus
reference REF1 is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active control
location.
Note: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected
(98.07).
Note: The setting is not saved in the permanent memory (will reset to zero
when power is switched off).
0 Inactive 0
1 Active 1
10.09 SLS ACTIVE Selects the source for the SLS (safely-limited speed) command.
Note: This parameter is available in AS7R firmware version only.
NO No DI selected for the SLS function. 1
DI1 The SLS function is activated by a falling edge of DI1, i.e. when the value of 2
DI1 becomes 0.
11 REFERENCE Panel reference type, external control location selection and external reference
SELECT sources and limits
11.01 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the type of the reference given from panel.
REF1 (rpm) Speed reference in rpm. (Frequency reference (Hz) if parameter 99.04 is 1
SCALAR.)
REF2 (%) %-reference. The use of REF2 vary depending on the application macro. For 2
example, if the Torque Control macro is selected, REF2 is the torque
reference.
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects between
the two external control locations, EXT1 or EXT2.
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = EXT1, 1 = EXT2. 1

108

EXT1 EXT1 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10.01 and 7
11.03.
EXT2 EXT2 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10.02 and 8
11.06.
COMM.CW Fieldbus Control Word, bit 11. 9
PARAM 11.09 Source selected by parameter 11.09. 16
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1
KEYPAD Control panel. The first line on the display shows the reference value. 1
AI1 Analogue input AI1. 2
Note: If the signal is bipolar (±10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. (The
selection AI1 ignores the negative signal range.)

109

AI1/JOYST Unipolar analogue input AI1 as joystick. The minimum input signal runs the 5
motor at the maximum reference in the reverse direction, the maximum input at
the maximum reference in the forward direction.
Note: Parameter 10.03 must have the value REQUEST.
WARNING! Minimum reference for joystick must be higher than 0.5 V.
Set parameter 13.01 to 2 V or to a value higher than 0.5 V and
analogue signal loss detection parameter 30.01 to FAULT. The drive
will stop in case the control signal is lost.
Speed Reference (REF1)
11.05
11.04
0
AI1
-11.04
-11.05
2 6 10
Par. 13.01 = 2 V, Par 13.02 = 10 V
Note: If the signal is bipolar (±10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. The
selection AI1/JOYST ignores the negative signal range.
AI2/JOYST See selection AI1/JOYST. 6
AI1+AI3 Summation of analogue input AI1 and AI3 7
AI2+AI3 Summation of analogue input AI2 and AI3 8
AI1-AI3 Subtraction of analogue input AI1 and AI3 9
AI2-AI3 Subtraction of analogue input AI2 and AI3 10
AI1*AI3 Multiplication of analogue input AI1 and AI3 11
AI2*AI3 Multiplication of analogue input AI2 and AI3 12
MIN(AI1,AI3) Minimum of analogue input AI1 and AI3 13
MIN(AI2,AI3) Minimum of analogue input AI2 and AI3 14
MAX(AI1,AI3) Maximum of analogue input AI1 and AI3 15
MAX(AI2,AI3) Maximum of analogue input AI2 and AI3 16
DI3U,4D(R) Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: Reference decrease. 17
Stop command or power switch off resets the reference to zero. Parameter
22.04 defines the rate of the reference change.
DI3U,4D Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: Reference decrease. The 18
program stores the active speed reference (not reset by a stop command or
power switch-off). Parameter 22.04 defines the rate of the reference change.
DI5U,6D See selection DI3U,4D. 19
COMM. REF Fieldbus reference REF1 20
COM.REF1+AI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF1 and analogue input AI1 21
COM.REF1*AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analogue input AI1 22

110

FAST COMM As with the selection COMM. REF, except the following differences: 23
- shorter communication cycle time when transferring the reference to the core
motor control program (6 ms -> 2 ms)
- the direction cannot be controlled through interfaces defined by parameters
10.01 or 10.02, nor with the control panel
- parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS is not effective
Note: If any of the following selections is true, the selection is not effective.
Instead, the operation is according to COMM. REF.
- parameter 99.02 is PID
- parameter 99.04 is SCALAR
- parameter 40.14 has value PROPORTIONAL or DIRECT
COM.REF1+AI5 See selection COM.REF1+AI1 (AI5 used instead of AI1). 24
COM.REF1*AI5 See selection COM.REF1*AI1 (AI5 used instead of AI1). 25
AI5 Analogue input AI5 26
AI5+AI6 Summation of analogue input AI5 and AI6. 30
AI5-AI6 Subtraction of analogue input AI5 and AI6. 31
AI5*AI6 Multiplication of analogue input AI5 and AI6. 32
MIN(AI5,AI6) Lower of analogue input AI5 and AI6. 33
MAX(AI5,AI6) Higher of analogue input AI5 and AI6. 34
DI11U,12D(R) See selection DI3U,4D(R). 35
DI11U,12D See selection DI3U,4D. 36

111

AI1 BIPOLAR Bipolar analogue input AI1 (-10 … 10 V). The figure below illustrates the use of 38
the input as the speed reference.
Operation Range
scaled
maxREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST
Speed Reference
minREF1
-minREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST
-scaled
maxREF1
-maxAI1 -minAI1 minAI1 maxAI1
Analogue Input Signal
minAI1 = 13.01 MINIMUM AI1

maxAI1 = 13.02 MAXIMUM AI1
scaled maxREF1 = 13.03 SCALE AI1 x 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM
minREF1 = 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the source signal used.
0 … 18000 rpm Setting range in rpm. (Hz if parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.) 1 … 18000
Example: Analogue input AI1 is selected as the reference source (value of
parameter 11.03 is AI1). The reference minimum and maximum correspond
the AI minimum and maximum settings as follows:
EXT REF1 Range
2’
1 parameter 13.01
2 parameter 13.02
1’ parameter 11.04
2’ parameter 11.05
1’
AI1 Range
1 2
Note: If the reference is given through fieldbus, the scaling differs from that of
an analogue signal. See chapter Fieldbus control for more information.

112

11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal.
0 … 18000 rpm Setting range. (Hz if value of parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.) 1 … 18000
See parameter 11.04.
11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2. REF2 is a
- speed reference in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed if parameter
99.02 = FACTORY, HAND/AUTO or SEQ CTRL.
- torque reference in percent of the motor nominal torque if parameter 99.02 =
TORQUE.
- process reference in percent of the maximum process quantity if parameter
99.02 = PID CTRL.
- frequency reference in percent of the Absolute Maximum Frequency if
parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
KEYPAD See parameter 11.03. 1
AI1 See parameter 11.03. 2
Note: If the signal is bipolar (±10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. The
selection AI1 ignores the negative signal range.
AI1/JOYST See parameter 11.03. 5
AI1+AI3 See parameter 11.03. 7
AI1-AI3 See parameter 11.03. 9
AI1*AI3 See parameter 11.03. 11
MIN(AI1,AI3) See parameter 11.03. 13
MAX(AI1,AI3) See parameter 11.03. 15
DI3U,4D(R) See parameter 11.03. 17
DI3U,4D See parameter 11.03. 18
COMM. REF See parameter 11.03. 20
COM.REF2+AI1 See parameter 11.03. 21
COM.REF2*AI1 See parameter 11.03. 22
FAST COMM See parameter 11.03. 23
COM.REF2+AI5 See parameter 11.03. 24
COM.REF2*AI5 See parameter 11.03. 25

113

DI11U,12D(R) See parameter 11.03. 35
AI1 BIPOLAR See parameter 11.03. 38
11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the source signal used.
0 … 100% Setting range in percent. Correspondence to the source signal limits: 0 … 10000
- Source is an analogue input: See example for parameter 11.04.
- Source is a serial link: See chapter Fieldbus control.
11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the source signal used.
0 … 600% Setting range. Correspondence to the source signal limits: 0 … 6000
- Source is an analogue input: See parameter 11.04.
- Source is a serial link: See chapter Fieldbus control.
11.09 EXT 1/2 SEL PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.09 of parameter 11.02.
32768 … C.32767
11.10 EXT 1 REF PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.10 of parameter 11.03.
32768 … C.32767
11.11 EXT 2 REF PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.11 of parameter 11.06.
32768 … C.32767
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed selection and values. An active constant speed overrides the
drive speed reference. See section Constant speeds on page 59.
Note: If parameter 99.04 is SCALAR, only speeds 1 to 5 and speed 15 are in
use.
12.01 CONST SPEED SEL Activates the constant speeds or selects the activation signal.
NOT SEL No constant speeds in use 1
DI1(SPEED1) Speed defined by parameter 12.02 is activated through digital input DI1. 2
1 = active, 0 = inactive.

114

DI1,2 Constant speed selection through digital input DI1 and DI2. 8
DI1 DI2 Constant speed in use

0 0 No constant speed
1 0 Speed defined by parameter 12.02
DI3,4 See selection DI1,2. 9

DI1,2,3 Constant speed selection through digital input DI1, DI2 and DI3. 11
DI1 DI2 DI3 Constant speed in use

0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 Speed defined by parameter 12.02
DI3,4,5 See selection DI1,2,3. 12

DI4,5,6 See selection DI1,2,3. 13
DI3,4,5,6 Constant speed selection through digital input DI3, 4, 5 and 6 14
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 Constant speed in use

0 0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 0 Speed defined by parameter 12.02

115

DI12 (SPEED6) Speed defined by parameter 12.07 is activated through digital input DI12. 20
12.02 CONST SPEED 1 Defines speed 1. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 … 18000 rpm Setting range 0 … 18000
12.11 CONST SPEED 10 Defines speed 10. An absolute value. Does not include the direction
information.
information.
information.
Note: If inching is in use, the parameter defines the inching 1 speed. The sign
is taken into account. See chapter Fieldbus control.
-18000 … 18000 rpm Setting range -18000 …
18000

116

information.
Note: If inching is in use, the parameter defines the inching 2 speed. The sign
is taken into account. See chapter Fieldbus control.
18000
information.
Note: If the jogging function is in use, the parameter defines the jogging speed.
The sign is not taken into account. See section Jogging on page 81.
12.16 CONST SPEED 15 Defines speed 15 or Fault speed. The program considers the sign when used
as a fault speed by parameter 30.01 and 30.02.
18000
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS The analogue input signal processing. See section Programmable analogue
inputs on page 49.
13.01 MINIMUM AI1 Defines the minimum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference,
the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting.
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this
value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.04.
0V Zero volts. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analogue input signal. 1
2V Two volts 2
TUNED VALUE The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE. 3
TUNE The value measurement triggering. Procedure: 4
- Connect the minimum signal to input.
- Set the parameter to TUNE.
Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 … 10 V.
13.02 MAXIMUM AI1 Defines the maximum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference,
the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting.
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this
value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.05.
10 V Ten volts (DC). 1
TUNED VALUE The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE. 2
TUNE Triggering of the tuning function. Procedure: 3
- Connect the maximum signal to input.
- Set the parameter to TUNE.
Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 … 10 V.

117

13.03 SCALE AI1 Scales analogue input AI1.
Example: The effect on speed reference REF1 when:
- REF1 source selection (parameter 11.03) = AI1+AI3
- REF1 maximum value setting (parameter 11.05) = 1500 rpm
- Actual AI1 value = 4 V (40% of the full scale value)
- Actual AI3 value = 12 mA (60% of the full scale value)
- AI1 scaling = 100%, AI3 scaling = 10%
AI1 AI3 AI1 + AI3
10 V 1500 rpm 20 mA 150 rpm 1500 rpm
60% 90 rpm
690 rpm
40% 600 rpm
0V 0 mA 0 rpm
0 … 1000% Scaling range 0 … 32767

13.04 FILTER AI1 Defines the filter time constant for analogue input AI1.
%
Unfiltered Signal O = I · (1 - e-t/T)
100
I = filter input (step)
63 O = filter output
Filtered Signal
t = time
T = filter time constant
t
T
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (10 ms
time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter.
0.00 … 10.00 s Filter time constant 0 … 1000
13.05 INVERT AI1 Activates/deactivates the inversion of analogue input AI1.
NO No inversion 0
YES Inversion active. The maximum value of the analogue input signal corresponds 65535
to the minimum reference and vice versa.
13.06 MINIMUM AI2 See parameter 13.01.
0 mA See parameter 13.01. 1
TUNED VALUE See parameter 13.01. 3
TUNE See parameter 13.01. 4
13.07 MAXIMUM AI2 See parameter 13.02.

118

13.08 SCALE AI2 See parameter 13.03.
0 … 1000% See parameter 13.03. 0 … 32767
13.09 FILTER AI2 See parameter 13.04.
0.00 … 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 … 1000
13.10 INVERT AI2 See parameter 13.05.
NO See parameter 13.05. 0
YES See parameter 13.05. 65535
0 … 1000% See parameter 13.03. 0 … 32767
0.00 … 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 … 1000
Note: If RAIO-01 is used with voltage input signal, 20 mA corresponds to 10 V.

0 … 1000% See parameter 13.03. 0 … 32767
0.00 … 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 … 1000

119

0 … 1000% See parameter 13.03. 0 … 32767
0.00 … 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 … 1000
14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through the relay outputs, and the relay operating
delays. See section Programmable relay outputs on page 52.
14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO1. The relay energises
when the status meets the setting.
NOT USED Not used. 1
READY Ready to function: Run Enable signal on, no fault. 2
RUNNING Running: Start signal on, Run Enable signal on, no active fault. 3
FAULT Fault 4
FAULT(-1) Inverted fault. Relay is de-energised on a fault trip. 5
FAULT(RST) Fault. Automatic reset after the autoreset delay. See parameter group 31 6
AUTOMATIC RESET.
STALL WARN Warning by the stall protection function. See parameter 30.10. 7
STALL FLT Fault trip by the stall protection function. See parameter 30.10. 8
MOT TEMP WRN Warning trip of the motor temperature supervision function. See parameter 9
30.04.
MOT TEMP FLT Fault trip of the motor temperature supervision function. See parameter 30.04. 10
ACS TEMP WRN Warning by the drive temperature supervision function. The warning limit 11
depends on the used inverter type.
ACS TEMP FLT Fault trip by the drive temperature supervision function. Trip limit is 100%. 12
FAULT/WARN Fault or warning active 13
WARNING Warning active 14
REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction. 15

120

EXT CTRL Drive is under external control. 16
REF 2 SEL External reference REF 2 is in use. 17
CONST SPEED A constant speed is in use. See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS. 18
DC OVERVOLT The intermediate circuit DC voltage has exceeded the overvoltage limit. 19
DC UNDERVOLT The intermediate circuit DC voltage has fallen below the undervoltage limit. 20
SPEED 1 LIM Motor speed at supervision limit 1. See parameters 32.01 and 32.02. 21
SPEED 2 LIM Motor speed at supervision limit 2. See parameters 32.03 and 32.04. 22
CURRENT LIM Motor current at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.05 and 32.06. 23
REF 1 LIM External reference REF1 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.11 and 24
32.12.
REF 2 LIM External reference REF2 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.13 and 25
32.14.
TORQUE 1 LIM Motor torque at supervision limit 1. See parameters 32.07 and 32.08. 26
TORQUE 2 LIM Motor torque at supervision limit 2. See parameters 32.09 and 32.10. 27
STARTED The drive has received the start command. 28
LOSS OF REF The drive has no reference. 29
AT SPEED The actual value has reached the reference value. In speed control, the speed 30
error is less or equal to 10% of the nominal motor speed.
ACT 1 LIM Process PID controller variable ACT1 at the supervision limit. See parameters 31
32.15 and 32.16.
ACT 2 LIM Process PID controller variable ACT2 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32
32.17 and 32.18.
COMM.REF3(13) The relay is controlled by fieldbus reference REF3. See chapter Fieldbus 33
control.
BRAKE CTRL On/Off control of a mechanical brake. See parameter group 42 BRAKE 35
CONTROL and section Control of a mechanical brake on page 77.
BC SHORT CIR Drive trips on a brake chopper fault. See chapter Fault tracing. 36
14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO2. The relay
energises when the status meets the setting.
NOT USED See parameter 14.01. 1
READY See parameter 14.01. 2
RUNNING See parameter 14.01. 3
FAULT See parameter 14.01. 4
FAULT(-1) See parameter 14.01. 5
FAULT(RST) See parameter 14.01. 6
STALL WARN See parameter 14.01. 7
STALL FLT See parameter 14.01. 8
MOT TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 9
MOT TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 10
ACS TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 11
ACS TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 12
FAULT/WARN See parameter 14.01. 13
WARNING See parameter 14.01. 14

121

REVERSED See parameter 14.01. 15
EXT CTRL See parameter 14.01. 16
REF 2 SEL See parameter 14.01. 17
CONST SPEED See parameter 14.01. 18
DC OVERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 19
DC UNDERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 20
SPEED 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 21
CURRENT LIM See parameter 14.01. 23
REF 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 24
TORQUE 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 26
STARTED See parameter 14.01. 28
LOSS OF REF See parameter 14.01. 29
AT SPEED See parameter 14.01. 30
ACT 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 31
ACT 2 LIM See parameter 14.01. 32
COMM. REF3(14) See parameter 14.01. 33
BRAKE CTRL See parameter 14.01. 35
BC SHORT CIR See parameter 14.01. 36
14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO3. The relay
energises when the status meets the setting.
FAULT(-1) See parameter 14.01. 5
FAULT(RST) See parameter 14.01. 6
STALL WARN See parameter 14.01. 7
STALL FLT See parameter 14.01. 8
MOT TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 9
MOT TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 10
ACS TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 11
ACS TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 12
FAULT/WARN See parameter 14.01. 13
REVERSED See parameter 14.01. 15
EXT CTRL See parameter 14.01. 16
CONST SPEED See parameter 14.01. 18

122

DC OVERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 19
DC UNDERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 20
CURRENT LIM See parameter 14.01. 23
STARTED See parameter 14.01. 28
LOSS OF REF See parameter 14.01. 29
MAGN READY The motor is magnetised and ready to give nominal torque (nominal 31
magnetising of the motor has been reached).
USER 2 SEL User Macro 2 is in use. 32
COMM. REF3(15) See parameter 14.01. 33
BRAKE CTRL See parameter 14.01. 35
BC SHORT CIR See parameter 14.01. 36
14.04 RO1 TON DELAY Defines the operation delay for the relay RO1.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Setting range. The figure below illustrates the operation (on) and release (off) 0 … 36000
delays for relay output RO1.
1
Drive status
0
1
RO1 status
0
time
tOn tOff tOn tOff
tOn 14.04
tOff 14.05
14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY Defines the release delay for relay output RO1.
0.0 … 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 … 36000
14.06 RO2 TON DELAY Defines the operation delay for relay output RO2.
0.0 … 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 … 36000
14.07 RO2 TOFF DELAY Defines the release delay for relay output RO2.
0.0 … 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 … 36000
14.08 RO3 TON DELAY Defines the operation delay for relay output RO3.
0.0 … 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 … 36000
14.09 RO3 TOFF DELAY Defines the release delay of relay output RO3.
0.0 … 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 … 36000

123

14.10 DIO MOD1 RO1 Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I/O
extension module 1 (optional, see parameter 98.03).

124

extension module no. 3 (optional, see parameter 98.05).
14.16 RO PTR1 Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.16 of parameter 14.01.
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767
32768 … C.32767

125

15 ANALOGUE Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through the analogue outputs.
OUTPUTS Output signal processing. See section Programmable analogue outputs on
page 50.
15.01 ANALOGUE Connects a drive signal to analogue output AO1.
OUTPUT1
NOT USED Not in use 1
P SPEED Value of a user-defined process quantity derived from the motor speed. See 2
parameter group 34 PROCESS VARIABLE for scaling and unit selection (%;
m/s; rpm). The updating interval is 100 ms.
SPEED Motor speed (signal 01.02 SPEED). 20 mA = motor nominal speed. The 3
updating interval is 24 ms. The value is filtered with the filter time constant
defined by parameter 34.04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM.
FREQUENCY Output frequency. 20 mA = motor nominal frequency. The updating interval is 4
24 ms.
CURRENT Output current. 20 mA = motor nominal current. The updating interval is 24 ms. 5
TORQUE Motor torque. 20 mA = 100% of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is 6
24 ms.
POWER Motor power. 20 mA = 100% of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is 7
100 ms.
DC BUS VOLT DC bus voltage. 20 mA = 100% of the reference value. The reference value is 8
540 VDC. (= 1.35 · 400 V) for 380...415 VAC supply voltage rating and
675 VDC (= 1.35 · 500 V) for 380...500 VAC supply. The updating interval is
24 ms.
OUTPUT VOLT Motor voltage. 20 mA = motor rated voltage. The updating interval is 100 ms. 9
APPL OUTPUT The reference which is given as an output from the application. For example, if 10
the PID Control macro is in use, this is the output of the process PID controller.
The updating interval is 24 ms.
REFERENCE Active reference that the drive is currently following. 20 mA = 100 % of the 11
active reference. The updating interval is 24 ms.
CONTROL DEV The difference between the reference and the actual value of the process PID 12
controller. 0/4 mA = -100%, 10/12 mA = 0%, 20 mA = 100%. The updating
interval is 24 ms.
ACTUAL 1 Value of variable ACT1 used in the process PID control. 20 mA = value of 13
parameter 40.10. The updating interval is 24 ms.
ACTUAL 2 Value of variable ACT2 used in the process PID control. 20 mA = value of 14
parameter 40.12. The updating interval is 24 ms.
COMM.REF4 The value is read from fieldbus reference REF4. See chapter Fieldbus control. 15
M1 TEMP MEAS Analogue output is a current source in a motor temperature measuring circuit. 16
Depending on the sensor type, the output is 9.1 mA (Pt 100) or 1.6 mA (PTC).
For more information, see parameter 35.01 and section Motor temperature
measurement through the standard I/O on page 73.
Note: The settings of parameters 15.02 to 15.05 are not effective.
PARAM 15.11 Source selected by 15.11 17
15.02 INVERT AO1 Inverts the analogue output AO1 signal. The analogue signal is at the minimum
level when the indicated drive signal is at its maximum level and vice versa.
NO Inversion off 0
YES Inversion on 65535

126

15.03 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value of the analogue output signal AO1.
0 mA Zero mA 1
4 mA Four mA 2
15.04 FILTER AO1 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1.
0.00 … 10.00 s Filter time constant 0 … 1000
%
100
Filtered Signal
t = time
t
T
Note: Even if you select 0 s as the minimum value, the signal is still filtered
with a time constant of 10 ms due to the signal interface hardware. This cannot
be changed by any parameters.
15.05 SCALE AO1 Scales the analogue output AO1 signal.
10 … 1000% Scaling factor. If the value is 100%, the reference value of the drive signal 100 …
corresponds to 20 mA. 10000
Example: The nominal motor current is 7.5 A and the measured maximum
current at maximum load 5 A. The motor current 0 to 5 A needs to be read as 0
to 20 mA analogue signal through AO1. The required settings are:
1. AO1 is set to CURRENT by parameter 15.01.
2. AO1 minimum is set to 0 mA by parameter 15.03.
3. The measured maximum motor current is scaled to correspond to 20 mA
analogue output signal by setting the scaling factor (k) to 150%. The value is
defined as follows: The reference value of the output signal CURRENT is the
motor nominal current i.e. 7.5 A (see parameter 15.01). To make the measured
maximum motor current correspond to 20 mA, it should be scaled equal to the
reference value before it is converted to an analogue output signal. Equation:
k · 5 A = 7.5 A => k = 1.5 = 150%
15.06 ANALOGUE See parameter 15.01.
OUTPUT2
P SPEED See parameter 15.01. 2
SPEED See parameter 15.01. 3
FREQUENCY See parameter 15.01. 4
CURRENT See parameter 15.01. 5
TORQUE See parameter 15.01. 6
POWER See parameter 15.01. 7
DC BUS VOLT See parameter 15.01. 8
OUTPUT VOLT See parameter 15.01. 9
APPL OUTPUT See parameter 15.01. 10
REFERENCE See parameter 15.01. 11
CONTROL DEV See parameter 15.01. 12
ACTUAL 1 See parameter 15.01. 13

127

COMM.REF5 The value is read from fieldbus reference REF5. See chapter Fieldbus control. 15
PARAM 15.12 Source selected by 15.12 16
15.07 INVERT AO2 See parameter 15.02.
15.08 MINIMUM AO2 See parameter 15.03.
15.09 FILTER AO2 See parameter 15.04.
0.00 … 10.00 s See parameter 15.04. 0 … 1000
15.10 SCALE AO2 See parameter 15.05.
10 … 1000% See parameter 15.05. 100 …
10000
15.11 AO1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 15.11 of parameter 15.01.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on 1000 =
+255.255.31 / C.- the difference. 1 mA
32768 … C.32767
15.12 AO2 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 15.12 of parameter 15.06.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on 1000 =
+255.255.31 / C.- the difference. 1 mA
32768 … C.32767
16 SYST CTRL INPUTS Run Enable, parameter lock etc.
16.01 RUN ENABLE Sets the Run Enable signal on, or selects a source for the external Run Enable
signal. If Run Enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start or stops if it is
running. The stop mode is set by parameter 21.07.
YES Run Enable signal is on. 1
DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Run Enable. 2
COMM.CW External signal required through the Fieldbus Control Word (bit 3). 8

128

16.02 PARAMETER LOCK Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents parameter changing.
OPEN The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed. 0
LOCKED Locked. Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel. The lock 65535
can be opened by entering the valid code to parameter 16.03.
16.03 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see parameter 16.02).
0 … 30000 Setting 358 opens the lock. The value reverts back to 0 automatically. 0 … 30000
16.04 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a
fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists.
NOT SEL Fault reset only from the control panel keypad (RESET key). 1
DI1 Reset through digital input DI1 or by control panel: 2
- If the drive is in external control mode: Reset by a rising edge of DI1.
- If the drive is in local control mode: Reset by the RESET key of the control
panel.
COMM.CW Reset through the fieldbus Control Word (bit 7), or by the RESET key of the 8
control panel.
Note: Reset through fieldbus Control Word (bit 7) is enabled automatically and
it is independent of parameter 16.04 setting if parameter 10.01 or 10.02 is set
to COMM.CW.
ON STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital input, or by the 9
RESET key of the control panel.
16.05 USER MACRO IO Enables the change of the User Macro through a digital input. See parameter
CHG 99.02. The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped. During the
change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User Macro by parameter 99.02 after changing any
parameter settings, or reperforming the motor identification. The last settings
saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and
on again or the macro is changed. Any unsaved changes will be lost.
Note: The value of this parameter is not included in the User Macro. A setting
once made remains despite the User Macro change.
Note: Selection of User Macro 2 can be supervised via relay output RO3. See
parameter 14.03 for more information.
NOT SEL User macro change is not possible through a digital input. 1
DI1 Falling edge of digital input DI1: User Macro 1 is loaded into use. Rising edge 2
of digital input DI1: User Macro 2 is loaded into use.

129

16.06 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode (LOC/REM key of the panel).
WARNING! Before activating, ensure that the control panel is not
needed for stopping the drive!
OFF Local control allowed. 0

ON Local control disabled. 65535
16.07 PARAMETER SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory.
Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when
changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection.
DONE Saving completed 0
SAVE.. Saving in progress 1
16.08 RUN ENA PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 16.08 of parameter 16.01
32768 … C.32767
16.09 CTRL BOARD Defines the source of the control board power supply.
SUPPLY Note: If an external supply is used but this parameter has value INTERNAL,
the drive trips on a fault at power switch off.
INTERNAL 24V Internal (default). 1
EXTERNAL 24V External. The control board is powered from an external supply. 2
16.10 ASSIST SEL Enables the Start-up Assistant.
OFF Assistant disabled. 0
ON Assistant enabled. 65535
16.11 FAULT RESET PTR Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 16.11 of parameter 16.04.
32768 … C.32767
16.12 RESET COUNTER Resets the cooling fan running time counter or kWh counter.
NO No reset. 0
FAN ON-TIME Resets the running time counter of the drive cooling fan indicated with 01.44 1
FAN ON-TIME.
kWh kWh counter reset. See parameter 01.15 KILOWATT HOURS. 2

130

20 LIMITS Drive operation limits. See also section Speed controller tuning on page 60.
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED Defines the allowed minimum speed. The limit cannot be set if parameter
99.04 = SCALAR.
Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e.
parameter 99.08. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also
change.
-18000 / (no. of pole Minimum speed limit. 1 = 1 rpm
pairs) … par. 20.02 Note: If the value is positive, the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction.
rpm
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED Defines the allowed maximum speed. The value cannot be set if parameter
99.04 = SCALAR.
Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e.
parameter 99.08. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also
change.
par. 20.01 … 18000 / Maximum speed limit 1 = 1 rpm
(no. of pole pairs) rpm
20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT Defines the allowed maximum motor current.

0.0 … x.x A Current limit 0 …10·x.x
20.04 TORQ MAX LIM1 Defines the maximum torque limit 1 for the drive.
0.0 … 600.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque. 0 … 60000
20.05 OVERVOLTAGE Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
CTRL Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage
control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the
overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque.
Note: If a brake chopper and resistor are connected to the drive, the controller
must be off (selection NO) to allow chopper operation.
OFF Overvoltage control deactivated. 0
ON Overvoltage control activated. 65535
20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
CTRL If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller
will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above
the lower limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load will cause
regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC link charged and preventing
an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss
ride-through functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as a centrifuge or
a fan.
OFF Undervoltage control deactivated. 0
ON Undervoltage control activated. 65535
20.07 MINIMUM FREQ Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set
only parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
-300.00 … 50 Hz Minimum frequency limit. -30000 …
Note: If the value is positive, the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction. 5000
20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set
only if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR
-50 … 300.00 Hz Maximum frequency limit -5000 …
30000

131

20.11 P MOTORING LIM Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the inverter to the motor.
0 … 600% Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power 0 … 60000
20.12 P GENERATING LIM Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the motor to the inverter.
-600 … 0% Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power -60000 … 0
20.13 MIN TORQ SEL Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive. The update interval is 100 ms.
MIN LIM1 Value of parameter 20.15. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0: Value of parameter 20.15. 1: Value of parameter 20.16. 2
AI1 Analogue input AI1. See parameter 20.20 on how the signal is converted to a 14
torque limit.
AI2 See selection AI1. 15
PARAM 20.18 Limit given by 20.18 19
NEG MAX TORQ Inverted maximum torque limit defined by parameter 20.14 20
20.14 MAX TORQ SEL Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive. The update interval is 100 ms.
MAX LIM1 Value of parameter 20.04. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0: Value of parameter 20.04. 1: Value of parameter 20.17. 2
AI1 Analogue input AI1. See parameter 20.20 on how the signal is converted to a 14
torque limit.

132

PARAM 20.19 Limit given by 20.19 19
20.15 TORQ MIN LIM1 Defines the minimum torque limit 1 for the drive.
-600.0 … 0.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque -60000 … 0
20.16 TORQ MIN LIM2 Defines the minimum torque limit 2 for the drive.
-600.0 … 0.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque -60000 … 0
20.17 TORQ MAX LIM2 Defines the maximum torque limit 2 for the drive.
0.0 … 600.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque 0 … 60000
20.18 TORQ MIN PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 20.18 of parameter 20.13
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. 100 = 1%
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 … C.32767
20.19 TORQ MAX PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 20.19 of parameter 20.14
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on 100 = 1%
+255.255.31 / C.- the difference. FbEq for the torque value is 100 = 1%.
32768 … C.32767
20.20 MIN AI SCALE Defines how an analogue signal (mA or V) is converted to a torque minimum or
maximum limit (%). The figure below illustrate the converting, when analogue
input AI1 has been set the source for a torque limit by parameter 20.13 or
20.14.
Torque limit
20.21 13.01 Minimum setting for AI1

13.02 Maximum setting for AI1
20.20 Minimum torque
20.21 Maximum torque
20.20
13.01 13.02
Analogue signal
0.0 … 600.0% %-value that corresponds to the minimum setting of the analogue input. 100 = 1%
20.21 MAX AI SCALE See parameter 20.20.
0.0 … 600.0% %-value that corresponds to the maximum setting of the analogue input. 100 = 1%
20.22 SLS SPEED LIMIT Defines the safely-limited speed limit (SLS). When the SLS function is 20000 =
activated the speed limits are ramped to 20.22 SLS SPEED LIMIT. The speed 1500 rpm
of the deceleration to SLS is defined by parameter 22.11 and acceleration from
SLS to the original speed is defined by parameter 22.10.
0…9000 rpm (0…4
times sync speed)
21 START/STOP Start and stop modes of the motor.
21.01 START FUNCTION Selects the motor starting method. See also section Automatic Start on page
54.

133

AUTO Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the 1
flying start function (starting to a rotating machine) and the automatic restart
function (stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor
flux to die away). The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as
the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all
conditions.
Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, no flying start or automatic restart is
possible by default. The flying start feature needs to be activated separately by
parameter 21.08.
DC MAGN DC magnetising should be selected if a high break-away torque is required. 2
The drive pre-magnetises the motor before the start. The pre-magnetising time
is determined automatically, being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on the
motor size. DC MAGN guarantees the highest possible break-away torque.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is
selected.
Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
CNST DC MAGN Constant DC magnetising should be selected instead of DC magnetising if 3
constant pre-magnetising time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be
simultaneous with a mechanical brake release). This selection also guarantees
the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-magnetising time is set
long enough. The pre-magnetising time is defined by parameter 21.02.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is
selected.
Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetising time has
passed although the motor magnetisation is not completed. Ensure
always in applications where a full break-away torque is essential, that
the constant magnetising time is long enough to allow generation of full
magnetisation and torque.
21.02 CONST MAGN TIME Defines the magnetising time in the constant magnetising mode. See
parameter 21.01. After the start command, the drive automatically pre-
magnetises the motor the set time.
30.0 … 10000.0 ms Magnetising time. To ensure full magnetising, set this value to the same value 30 … 10000
as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb
value given in the table below:
Motor Rated Power Constant Magnetising Time

< 10 kW > 100 to 200 ms
10 to 200 kW > 200 to 1000 ms
200 to 1000 kW > 1000 to 2000 ms
21.03 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop function.

COAST Stop by cutting of the motor power supply. The motor coasts to a stop. 1
WARNING! If the mechanical brake control function is on, the
application program uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST
(see parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL).
RAMP Stop along a ramp. See parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL. 2

134

21.04 DC HOLD Activates/deactivates the DC hold function. DC Hold is not possible if
When both the reference and the speed drop below the value of parameter
21.05, the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC
into the motor. The current is set by parameter 21.06. When the reference
speed exceeds parameter 21.05, normal drive operation continues.
SPEEDmotor
DC Hold
Ref. t
DC HOLD SPEED
t
Note: DC Hold has no effect if the start signal is switched off.
Note: Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up. In
applications where long DC hold times are required, externally ventilated
motors should be used. If the DC hold period is long, the DC hold cannot
prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor.
See section DC Hold on page 57.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
21.05 DC HOLD SPEED Defines the DC Hold speed. See parameter 21.04.
0 … 3000 rpm Speed in rpm 0 … 3000
21.06 DC HOLD CURR Defines the DC hold current. See parameter 21.04.
0 … 100% Current in percent of the motor nominal current 0 … 100
21.07 RUN ENABLE FUNC Selects the stop mode applied when the Run Enable signal is switched off. The
Run Enable signal is put into use by parameter 16.01.
Note: The setting overrides the normal stop mode setting (parameter 21.03)
when the Run Enable signal is switched off.
WARNING! The drive will restart after the Run Enable signal restores
(if the start signal is on).
RAMP STOP The application program stops the drive along the deceleration ramp defined in 1
group 22 ACCEL/DECEL.
COAST STOP The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply 2
(the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed.
WARNING! If the brake control function is on, the application program
uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST STOP (see parameter
group 42 BRAKE CONTROL).
OFF2 STOP The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply 3
(the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed. The
drive will restart only when the Run Enable signal is on and the start signal is
switched on (the program receives the rising edge of the start signal).

135

OFF3 STOP The application program stops the drive along the ramp defined by parameter 4
22.07. The drive will restart only when the Run Enable is on and the start signal
is switched on (the program receives the rising edge of the start signal).
21.08 SCALAR FLY START Activates the flying start feature in the scalar control mode. See parameters
21.01 and 99.04.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
21.09 START INTRL FUNC Defines how the Start Interlock input on RMIO board affects the drive
operation.
OFF2 STOP Drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Stop by coasting. 1
Drive stopped: 1 = Start allowed. 0 = No start allowed.
Restart after OFF2 STOP: Input is back to 1 and the drive receives rising edge
of the Start signal.
OFF3 STOP Drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Stop by ramp. The ramp time is 2
defined by parameter 22.07 EM STOP RAMP.
Drive stopped: 1 = Normal start. 0 = No start allowed.
Restart after OFF3 STOP: Start Interlock input = 1 and the drive receives rising
edge of the Start signal.
21.10 ZERO SPEED DELAY Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The function is useful in
applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay
the drive knows accurately the rotor position.
No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay

Speed Speed
Speed controller Speed controller remains live.
switched off: Motor Motor is decelerated to true 0
coasts to stop. speed.
Zero Speed Zero Speed
Time Delay Time

No Zero Speed Delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the
motor actual speed falls below an internal limit (called Zero Speed), the speed
controller is switched off. The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor
coasts to standstill.
With Zero Speed Delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the
actual motor speed falls below an internal limit (called Zero Speed), the zero
speed delay function activates. During the delay the functions keeps the speed
controller live: the inverter modulates, motor is magnetised and the drive is
ready for a quick restart.
0.0 … 60.0 s Delay time 10 = 1 s
22 ACCEL/DECEL Acceleration and deceleration times. See section Acceleration and
deceleration ramps on page 59.
22.01 ACC/DEC SEL Selects the active acceleration/deceleration time pair.
ACC/DEC 1 Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are used. See parameters 22.02 1
and 22.03.

136

ACC/DEC 2 Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are used. See parameters 22.04 2
and 22.05.
DI1 Acceleration/deceleration time pair selection through digital input DI1. 0 = 3
Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in use. 1 = Acceleration time 2
and deceleration time 2 are in use.
PAR 22.08&09 Acceleration and deceleration times given by parameters 22.08 and 22.09 15
22.02 ACCEL TIME 1 Defines the acceleration time 1 i.e. the time required for the speed to change
from zero to the maximum speed.
- If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the acceleration rate.
- If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the reference signal.
- If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the
acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits.
0.00 … 1800.00 s Acceleration time 0 … 18000
22.03 DECEL TIME 1 Defines the deceleration time 1 i.e. the time required for the speed to change
from the maximum (see parameter 20.02) to zero.
- If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the reference signal.
- If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate, the motor
speed will follow the deceleration rate.
- If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the
deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits. If there is any doubt
about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that the DC overvoltage
control is on (parameter 20.05).
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the
drive should be equipped with an electric braking option e.g. with a brake
chopper and a brake resistor.
0.00 … 1800.00 s Deceleration time 0 … 18000
22.04 ACCEL TIME 2 See parameter 22.02.
0.00 … 1800.00 s See parameter 22.02. 0 … 18000
22.05 DECEL TIME 2 See parameter 22.03.
0.00 … 1800.00 s See parameter 22.03. 0 … 18000

137

22.06 ACC/DEC RAMP Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp.
SHPE See also section Jogging on page 81.
0.00 … 1000.00 s 0.00 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for 0 … 100000
slow ramps.
0.01 … 1000.00 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for conveyors
carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is
required when changing from one speed to another. The S curve consists of
symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.
A rule of thumb Speed Linear ramp: Par. 22.06 = 0 s

A suitable relation between the Max
ramp shape time and the
acceleration ramp time is 1/5.
S-curve ramp:
Par. 22.06 > 0 s
time
Par. 22.02 Par. 22.06
22.07 EM STOP RAMP Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if
TIME - the drive receives an emergency stop command or
- the Run Enable signal is switched off and the Run Enable function has value
OFF3 (see parameter 21.07).
The emergency stop command can be given through a fieldbus or an
Emergency Stop module (optional). Consult the local ABB representative for
more information on the optional module and the related settings of the
Standard Control Program.
0.00 … 2000.00 s Deceleration time 0 … 200000
22.08 ACC PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 22.08&09 of parameter 22.01.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on 100 = 1 s
32768 … C.32767
22.09 DEC PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 22.08&09 of parameter 22.01
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. See parameter 10.04 for information on 100 = 1 s
32768 … C.32767
22.10 SLS ACCELER TIME Defines the time required for the speed limits to ramp up from the safely-limited 100 = 1 s
speed defined by parameter 20.22 to the speed limits defined by parameters
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED when the SLS function
is deactivated.
0…1800 s Speed ramp time.

138

22.11 SLS DECELER TIME Defines the time required for the speed limits to ramp down from the value 100 = 1 s
defined by parameters 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED
to the safely-limited speed defined by parameter 20.22 when the SLS function
is activated.
If the speed is already lower than the safely-limited speed, the speed does not
change.
0…1800 s Speed ramp time.
23 SPEED CTRL Speed controller variables. The parameters are not visible if parameter 99.04 =
SCALAR. See section Speed controller tuning on page 60.
23.01 GAIN Defines a relative gain for the speed controller. Great gain may cause speed
oscillation.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when
the error remains constant.
%
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time = 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
Error Value
Controller Output
Controller e = Error value
output = Kp · e
t
0.0 … 250.0 Gain 0 … 25000
23.02 INTEGRATION TIME Defines an integration time for the speed controller. The integration time
defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is
constant. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value
is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the control unstable.
%
Controller Output
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
Kp · e TD= Derivation time = 0
Kp · e e = Error value
t
TI
0.01 … 999.97 s Integration time 10 …
999970

139

23.03 DERIVATION TIME Defines the derivation time for the speed controller. Derivative action boosts
the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time,
the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the
derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise
as a PID controller.
The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances.
Note: Changing this parameter is recommended only if a pulse encoder is
used.
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time > 0
Ts= Sample time period = 1 ms
Δe = Error value change between
% two samples
Controller Output
Δe
Kp · TD ·
Ts Kp · e
Error Value
Kp · e e = Error value
t
TI
0.0 … 9999.8 ms Derivation time value. 1 = 1 ms
23.04 ACC Defines the derivation time for acceleration/(deceleration) compensation. In
COMPENSATION order to compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is
added to the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action
is described for parameter 23.03.
Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100%
of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven
machine. (The speed controller Autotune Run does this automatically, see
parameter 23.06.)
The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is
accelerated along a ramp.
No Acceleration Compensation Acceleration Compensation
% % Speed reference
Actual speed
t t
0.00 … 999.98 s Derivation time 0 … 9999

140

23.05 SLIP GAIN Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control. 100% means full
slip compensation; 0% means no slip compensation. The default value is
100%. Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of
the full slip compensation.
Example: 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite of
the full slip compensation (SLIP GAIN = 100%), a manual tachometer
measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm. The static
speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip
gain should be increased. At the 106% gain value, no static speed error exists.
0.0 … 400.0% Slip gain value. 0 … 400
23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN Start automatic tuning of the speed controller. Instructions:
- Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the rated speed.
- Change the autotuning parameter 23.06 to YES.
Note: The motor load must be connected to the motor.
NO No autotuning. 0
YES Activates the speed controller autotuning. Automatically reverts to NO. 65535
23.07 SP ACT FILT TIME Defines the time constant of the actual speed filter, i.e. time within the actual
speed has reached 63% of the nominal speed.
0...1000000 ms Time constant 1 = 1 ms
24 TORQUE CTRL Torque control variables.
Visible only if parameter 99.02 = T CNTRL and parameter 99.04 = DTC.
24.01 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the torque reference ramp up time.
0.00 … 120.00 s Time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque. 0 … 12000
24.02 TORQ RAMP DOWN Defines the torque reference ramp down time.
0.00 … 120.00 s Time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero. 0 … 12000
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Speed bands within which the drive is not allowed to operate. See section
Critical speeds on page 59.
25.01 CRIT SPEED Activates/deactivates the critical speeds function.
SELECT Example: A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to
1560 rpm. To make the drive to jump over the vibration speed ranges:
- activate the critical speeds function,
- set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.
Motor speed
(rpm) 1 Par. 25.02 = 540 rpm
2 Par. 25.03 = 690 rpm
1560
3 Par. 25.04 = 1380 rpm
1380
690 4 Par. 25.05 = 1590 rpm
540
Drive speed reference

1 2 3 4 (rpm)
Note: If parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL, the critical speeds are not in use.
OFF Inactive 0
ON Active. 65535

141

25.02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW Defines the minimum limit for critical speed range 1.
0 … 18000 rpm Minimum limit. The value cannot be above the maximum (parameter 25.03). 0 … 18000
Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, the unit is Hz.
25.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH Defines the maximum limit for critical speed range 1.
0 … 18000 rpm Maximum limit. The value cannot be below the minimum (parameter 25.02). 0 … 18000
Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, the unit is Hz.
25.04 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW See parameter 25.02.
0 … 18000 rpm See parameter 25.02. 0 … 18000
25.05 CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH See parameter 25.03.
25.06 CRIT SPEED 3 LOW See parameter 25.02.
25.07 CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH See parameter 25.03.
26 MOTOR CONTROL
26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION Activates/deactivates the flux optimisation function. See section Flux
Optimisation on page 58.
Note: The function cannot be used if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
26.02 FLUX BRAKING Activates/deactivates the flux braking function.
Note: The function cannot be used if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
See section Flux Braking on page 57.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
26.03 IR-COMPENSATION Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR compensation). The
function is useful in applications with high break-away torque, but no DTC
motor control cannot be applied. The figure below illustrates the IR
compensation. See section IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive on
page 62.
Note: The function can be used only if parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.
U /UN
(%)
Relative output voltage. IR
compensation set to 15%.
100%
Relative output voltage. No IR

15%
compensation.
f (Hz)
Field weakening point
0 … 30% Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of the motor nominal voltage 0 … 3000

142

26.04 IR STEP-UP FREQ Defines the frequency at which the step-up IR compensation reaches the 100 = 1
IR compensation used in scalar control (26.03 IR COMPENSATION).
A voltage boost is used in step-up applications to achieve higher break-away
torque. Since voltage cannot be fed to the transformer at 0 Hz, special IR
compensation is used in step-up applications. Full IR compensation starts
around slip frequency. The figure below illustrates the step-up
IR compensation.
U / UN
(%)
100%
26.03 IR
COMPENSATION
f (Hz)
26.04 IR STEP-UP Field weakening

FREQ point (FWP)
For more information, see the Sine Filters User’s Manual for ACS800 Drives
0...50 Hz Frequency
26.05 HEX FIELD WEAKEN Selects whether motor flux is controlled along a circular or a hexagonal pattern
in the field weakening area of the frequency range (above 50/60 Hz). See
section Hexagonal motor flux on page 63.
OFF The rotating flux vector follows a circular pattern. Optimal selection in most 0
applications: Minimal losses at constant load. Maximal instantaneous torque is
not available in the field weakening range of the speed.
ON Motor flux follows a circular pattern below the field weakening point (typically 65535
50 or 60 Hz) and a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening range. Optimal
selection in the applications that require maximal instantaneous torque in the
field weakening range of the speed. The losses at constant operation are
higher than with the selection NO.
26.06 FLUX REF PTR Selects the source for the flux reference, or sets the flux reference value.
+255.255.31 / C.- the difference. The range of the flux is 25 … 140%. With constant value
32768 … C.32767 settings 100% = C.10000. Typically there is no need to change this value.
26.07 FLYSTART CUR REF Defines the current reference used with flying start (start to a rotating motor) 1 = 1%
[%] when no pulse encoder is used.
If flying start fails (i.e. drive is unable to detect motor speed 01.02 SPEED):
Monitor signals 01.02 SPEED and 01.04 CURRENT with DriveWindow PC tool
and increase the reference in steps of 5% until the flying start function is
successfully performed (i.e. drive is able to detect 01.02 SPEED).
See also parameter 26.08 FLYSTART INIT DLY.
0…100% Value in percent

143

26.08 FLYSTART INIT DLY Defines together with the motor characteristics the delay before the speed 1=1
value estimated at the beginning of flying start is connected to the speed
reference ramp output. Increase the delay, if the motor starts to rotate in the
wrong direction or if the motor starts to rotate with the wrong speed reference.
See also parameter 26.07 FLYSTART CUR REF [%].
0…60 Delay
26.09 FS METHOD Activates the flux correction at low frequencies, < 3 Hz, when the torque 1=1
exceeds 30%. Effective in the motoring and generating modes.
1 = ON Active
0 = OFF Inactive
27 BRAKE CHOPPER Control of the brake chopper.
27.01 BRAKE CHOPPER Activates the brake chopper control.
CTL Note: If an external chopper (e.g. NBRA-xxx) is used, parameter must be
disabled.
OFF Inactive 0
ON Active. Note: Ensure the brake chopper and resistor are installed and the 65535
overvoltage control is switched off (parameter 20.05).
27.02 BR OVERLOAD Activates the overload protection of the brake resistor. The user-adjustable
FUNC variables are parameters 27.04 and 27.05.
NO Inactive 0
WARNING Active. If the drive detects an overload, it generates a warning. 1
FAULT Active. If the drive detects an overload, it trips on a fault. 2
27.03 BR RESISTANCE Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor. The value is used for brake
chopper protection.
0.00 … 100.00 ohm Resistance value 0 … 100
27.04 BR THERM TCONST Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor. The value is used in the
overload protection. See parameter 27.02.
With type SACE brake resistors, the parameter setting must be 200 s.
With type SAFUR brake resistors, the parameter setting must be 555 s.
0.000 … 10000.000 s Time constant 1=1
27.05 MAX CONT BR Defines the maximum continuous braking power which will raise the resistor
POWER temperature to the maximum allowed value. The value is used in the overload
protection. See parameter 27.02.
0.00 …10000 kW Power 1=1
27.06 BC CTRL MODE Selects the control mode of the braking chopper.
AS GENERATOR Chopper operation is allowed when the DC voltage exceeds the braking limit, 0
the inverter bridge modulates and the motor generates power to the drive.
The selection prevents the operation in case the intermediate circuit DC
voltage rises due to abnormally high supply voltage level. Long time supply
voltage rise would damage the chopper.
COMMON DC Chopper operation is allowed always when the DC voltage exceeds the 65535
braking limit. The selection is to be used in applications where several
inverters are connected to the same intermediate circuit (DC bus).
WARNING! Excessive supply voltage will raise the intermediate circuit
voltage above the operation limit of the chopper. If the voltage remains
abnormally high for a long period, the braking chopper will be
overloaded and damaged.

144

30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Programmable protection functions
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts when an analogue input signal falls below the set
minimum limit.
Note: The analogue input minimum setting must be set to 0.5 V (1 mA) or
above (see parameter group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS).
FAULT The drive trips on a fault and the motor coasts to stop. 1
NO Inactive 2
CONST SP 15 The drive generates a warning AI < MIN FUNC (8110) and sets the speed to 3
the value defined by parameter 12.16.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the
analogue input signal is lost.
LAST SPEED The drive generates a warning AI < MIN FUNC (8110) and freezes the speed 4
to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average
speed over the previous 10 seconds.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the
analogue input signal is lost.
30.02 PANEL LOSS Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel communication break.
FAULT Drive trips on a fault and the motor coasts to a stop. 1
CONST SP 15 The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the speed defined by 2
parameter 12.16.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a
panel communication break.
LAST SPEED The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to the level the drive was 3
operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous
10 seconds.
panel communication break.
30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT Selects an interface for an external fault signal. See section External Fault on
page 63.
NOT SEL Inactive 1
DI1 External fault indication is given through digital input DI1. 0: Fault trip. Motor 2
coasts to stop. 1: No external fault.

145

30.04 MOTOR THERM Selects how the drive reacts when the motor overtemperature is detected by
PROT the function defined by parameter 30.05. See section Motor Thermal
Protection on page 64.
FAULT The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning 1
level (95% of the allowed maximum value). The drive trips on a fault when the
temperature exceeds the fault level (100% of the allowed maximum value).
WARNING The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning 2
level (95% of the allowed maximum value).
NO Inactive 3
30.05 MOT THERM P Selects the thermal protection mode of the motor. When overtemperature is
MODE detected, the drive reacts as defined by parameter 30.04.
DTC The protection is based on the calculated motor thermal model. The following 1
assumptions are used in the calculation:
- The motor is at the estimated temperature (value of 01.37 MOTOR
TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when the power is switched on. With the
first power switch on, the motor is at the ambient temperature (30°C).
- The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the load
curve.
- The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the curve.
This applies only if the motor is overheated.
- The motor thermal time constant is an approximate value for a standard self-
ventilated squirrel-cage motor.
It is possible to finetune the model by parameter 30.07.
Note: The model cannot be used with high power motors (parameter 99.06 is
higher than 800 A).
WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool
properly due to dust and dirt.
USER MODE The protection is based on the user-defined motor thermal model and the 2
following basic assumptions:
- The motor is at the estimated temperature (value of 01.37 MOTOR
TEMP EST saved at power switch off) when the power is switched on. With the
first power switch on, the motor is at the ambient temperature (30°C).
- The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor
load curve.
- The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the curve.
This applies only if the motor is overheated.
The user-defined thermal model uses the motor thermal time constant
(parameter 30.06) and the motor load curve (parameters 30.07, 30.08 and
30.09). User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs
from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor.
WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool
properly due to dust and dirt.

146

TEMP SENSOR Motor thermal protection is activated through digital input DI6. A motor 3
thermistor, or a break contact of a thermistor relay, must be connected to digital
input DI6. The drive reads the DI6 states as follows:
DI6 Status (Thermistor resistance) Temperature

1 (0 … 1.5 kohm) Normal
0 (4 kohm or higher) Overtemperature
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor

thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation
between motor live parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation
entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment).
If the thermistor assembly does not fulfil the requirement, the other I/O
terminals of the drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay
must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input.
WARNING! Digital input DI6 may be selected for another use. Change
these settings before selecting TEMP SENSOR. In other words,
ensure that digital input DI6 is not selected by any other parameter.
The figure below shows the alternative thermistor connections. At the motor
end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not
possible, the shield is to be left unconnected.
Alternative 1
Thermistor
relay
RMIO board, X22
6 DI6
7 +24 VDC
T
Motor
Alternative 2 RMIO board, X22
6 DI6
7 +24 VDC
T 10 nF
Motor
Note: If the motor nominal current is above 800 A, the user defined motor
thermal model is used instead of the calculated model and the user must
define parameters 30.06, 30.07, 30.08 and 30.09.

147

30.06 MOTOR THERM Defines the thermal time constant for the user-defined thermal model (see the
TIME selection USER MODE of parameter 30.05).
Motor
Load
100%
Temperature
t
100%
63%
t
Motor thermal time constant
256.0 … 9999.8 s Time constant 256 … 9999
30.07 MOTOR LOAD Defines the load curve together by parameters 30.08 and 30.09. The load
CURVE curve is used in the user-defined thermal model (see the selection USER
MODE of parameter 30.05).
I/IN I = Motor current

(%) IN = Nominal motor current
150
30.07
100
50
30.08
30.09 Drive output frequency
50.0 … 150.0% Allowed continuous motor load in percent of the nominal motor current. 50 … 150
30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.09.
25.0 … 150.0% Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of the nominal motor 25 … 150
current
30.09 BREAK POINT Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.08.
1.0 … 300.0 Hz Drive output frequency at 100% load 100 …
30000

148

30.10 STALL FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The protection wakes up
if:
- the drive is at stall limit (defined by parameters 20.03, 20.13 and 20.14)
- the output frequency is below the level set by parameter 30.11 and
- the conditions above have been valid longer than the time set by parameter
30.12.
Note: Stall limit is restricted by internal current limit 03.04
TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM.
See section Stall Protection on page 65.
FAULT The drive trips on a fault. 1
WARNING The drive generates a warning. The indication disappears in half of the time set 2
by parameter 30.12.
NO Protection is inactive. 3
30.11 STALL FREQ HI Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See parameter 30.10.
0.5 … 50.0 Hz Stall frequency 50 … 5000
30.12 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function. See parameter 30.10.
10.00 … 400.00 s Stall time 10 … 400
30.13 UNDERLOAD FUNC Selects how the drive reacts to underload. The protection wakes up if:
- the motor torque falls below the curve selected by parameter 30.15,
- output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal motor frequency and
- the above conditions have been valid longer than the time set by parameter
30.14.
See section Underload Protection on page 65.
WARNING The drive generates a warning. 2
30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME Time limit for the underload function. See parameter 30.13.
0 … 600 s Underload time 0 … 600
30.15 UNDERLOAD Selects the load curve for the underload function. See parameter 30.13.
CURVE
TM/TN
TM = Motor torque
(%) TN= Nominal motor torque
100 ƒN = Nominal motor frequency
80 3
70%
60 2
50%
40 1 5
30%
20
4
0
ƒN 2.4 * ƒN
1…5 Number of the load curve 1…5

149

30.16 MOTOR PHASE Activates the motor phase loss supervision function.
LOSS See section Motor Phase Loss on page 65.
NO Inactive 0
FAULT Active. The drive trips on a fault. 65535
30.17 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth fault is detected in the motor or the
motor cable. See section Earth Fault Protection on page 66.
Note: With parallel connected R8i inverter modules (ACS800 multidrive and
large ACS800-07 units) only the selection FAULT is valid.
30.18 COMM FLT FUNC Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication break, i.e. when the
drive fails to receive the Main Reference Data Set or the Auxiliary Reference
Data Set. The time delays are given by parameters 30.19 and 30.21.
FAULT Protection is active. The drive trips on a fault and the motor coasts to a stop. 1
CONST SP 15 Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the 3
value defined by parameter 12.16.
communication break.
LAST SPEED Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to 4
the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average
speed over the previous 10 seconds.
communication break.
30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT Defines the time delay for the Main Reference data set supervision. See
parameter 30.18.
0.1 … 60.0 s Time delay 10 … 6000
30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO Selects the operation of the fieldbus controlled relay output and analogue
output in a communication break. See groups 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and 15
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS and chapter Fieldbus control. The delay for the
supervision function is given by parameter 30.21.
ZERO Relay output is de-energised. Analogue output is set to zero. 0
LAST VALUE The relay output keeps the last state before the communication loss. The 65535
analogue output gives the last value before the communication loss.
WARNING! After the communication recovers, the update of the relay
and the analogue outputs starts immediately without fault message
resetting.
30.21 AUX DS T-OUT Defines the delay time for the Auxiliary Reference data set supervision. See
parameter 30.18. The drive automatically activates the supervision 60 seconds
after power switch-on if the value is other than zero.
Note: The delay also applies for the function defined by parameter 30.20.
0.0 … 60.0 s Time delay. 0.0 s = The function is inactive. 0 … 6000

150

30.22 IO CONFIG FUNC Selects how the drive reacts in case an optional input or output channel has
been selected as a signal interface, but the communication to the appropriate
analogue or digital I/O extension module has not been set up accordingly in
parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES.
Example: The supervision function wakes up if parameter 16.01 is set to DI7,
but 98.03 is set to NO.
NO Inactive. 1
WARNING Active. The drive generates a warning. 2
30.23 LIMIT WARNING Activates/deactivates limit alarms INV CUR LIM, DC BUS LIM, MOT CUR LIM,
MOT TORQ LIM and/or MOT POW LIM. For more information, see chapter
Fault tracing.
0...255 Value in decimal. As default none of the alarms are active, i.e. parameter value -
is 0.
bit 0 INV_CUR_LIM_IND
bit 1 DC_VOLT_LIM_IND
bit 2 MOT_CUR_LIM_IND
bit 3 MOT_TORQ_LIM_IND
bit 4 MOT_POW_LIM_IND
Example: When parameter value is set to 3 (bit 0 and 1 values are 1), alarms
INV CUR LIM and DC BUS LIM are active.
31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic fault reset.
Automatic resets are possible only for certain fault types and when the
automatic reset function is activated for that fault type.
The automatic reset function is not operational if the drive is in local control (L
visible on the first row of the panel display).
See section Automatic resets on page 69.
31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time
defined by parameter 31.02.
0…5 Number of the automatic resets 0
31.02 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See parameter 31.01.
1.0 … 180.0 s Allowed resetting time 100 …
18000
31.03 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an
automatic reset. See parameter 31.01.
0.0 … 3.0 s Resetting delay 0 … 300
31.04 OVERCURRENT Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the overcurrent fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
31.05 OVERVOLTAGE Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link overvoltage
fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link undervoltage
fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the fault AI SIGNAL<MIN
(analogue input signal under the allowed minimum level).

151

NO Inactive 0
YES Active. 65535
WARNING! The drive may restart even after a long stop if the
analogue input signal is restored. Ensure that the use of this feature
will not cause danger.
31.08 LINE CONV Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the fault LINE CONV (FF51) (fault
on line side converter).
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
32 SUPERVISION Supervision limits. A relay output can be used to indicate when the value is
above/below the limit. See section Supervisions on page 69.
32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the speed supervision function and selects the type of
the supervision limit.
NO Supervision is not used. 1
LOW LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit. 2
HIGH LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit. 3
ABS LOW LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is below the set limit. The limit is supervised 4
in both rotating directions. The figure below illustrates the principle.
speed/rpm
ABS LOW LIMIT
-ABS LOW LIMIT
32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT Defines the speed supervision limit. See parameter 32.01.
- 18000 … 18000 rpm Value of the limit - 18000 …
18000
32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION See parameter 32.01.
LOW LIMIT See parameter 32.01. 2
HIGH LIMIT See parameter 32.01. 3
ABS LOW LIMIT See parameter 32.01. 4
32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT See parameter 32.01.
- 18000 … 18000 rpm See parameter 32.01. - 18000 …
18000
32.05 CURRENT Activates/deactivates the motor current supervision function and selects the
FUNCTION type of the supervision limit.
32.06 CURRENT LIMIT Defines the limit for the motor current supervision (see parameter 32.05).
0 … 1000 A Value of the limit 0 … 1000
32.07 TORQUE 1 Activates/deactivates the motor torque supervision function and selects the

152

32.08 TORQUE 1 LIMIT Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision (see parameter 32.07).
-600 … 600% Value of the limit in percent of the motor nominal torque -6000 …
6000
32.09 TORQUE 2 Activates/deactivates the motor torque supervision function and selects the
32.10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision (see parameter 32.09).
-600 … 600% Value of the limit in percent of motor nominal torque -6000 …
6000
32.11 REF1 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the external reference REF1 supervision function and
selects the type of the supervision limit.
32.12 REF1 LIMIT Defines the limit for REF1 supervision (see parameter 32.11).
0 … 18000 rpm Value of the limit 0 … 18000
32.13 REF2 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates external reference REF2 supervision function and
selects the type of the supervision limit.
32.14 REF2 LIMIT Defines the limit for REF2 supervision (see parameter 32.13).
0 … 600% Value of the limit 0 … 6000
32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the supervision function for variable ACT1 of the process
PID controller and selects the type of the supervision limit.
32.16 ACT1 LIMIT Defines the limit for ACT1 supervision (see parameter 32.15).
32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the supervision function for variable ACT2 of the process
PID controller and selects the type of the supervision limit.
32.18 ACT2 LIMIT Defines the limit for ACT2 supervision (see parameter 32.17).
33 INFORMATION Program versions, test date
33.01 SOFTWARE Displays the type and the version of the firmware package in the drive.
VERSION Note: Parameter setting cannot be changed by the user.

153

Decoding key:
ASxxxxyx
Product Series
A = ACS800
Product
S = ACS800 Standard
Firmware Version
7xyx = Version 7.xyx
33.02 APPL SW VERSION Displays the type and the version of the application program.
Note: Parameter setting cannot be changed by the user.
Decoding key:
ASAxxxyx
Product Series
A = ACS800
Product
S = ACS800 Standard
Firmware Type
A = Application Program
Firmware Version
7xyx = Version 7.xyx
33.03 TEST DATE Displays the test date.

Note: Parameter setting cannot be changed by the user.
Date value in format DDMMYY (day, month, year) -
33.04 BOARD TYPE Shows the control board type. Note: RMIO-1x boards have different type of
FLASH memory chips than RMIO-0x. Only software version ASXR7300 or
later will operate with the RMIO-1x boards.
34 PROCESS VARIABLE - user variable and unit
- filtering for the actual signals speed and torque
- reset of the run time counter
34.01 SCALE Scales the selected drive variable into a desired user-defined variable, which is
stored as an actual signal 01.01. The block diagram below illustrates the use of
the parameters that define actual signal 01.01.
PARAMETER
TABLE
Select
00.00
•••
99.99
34.03 Mul.
34.01 01.01
Select
NO
Unit for actual
FPM signal 01.01
34.02
0.00…100000.00% Scaling factor 0…100000

154

34.02 P VAR UNIT Selects the unit for the process variable. See parameter 34.01.
NO No unit is selected. 1
rpm revolutions per minute 2
% percent 3
m/s metres per second 4
A ampere 5
V volt 6
Hz hertz 7
s second 8
h hour 9
kh kilohour 10
C celsius 11
lft pounds per foot 12
mA milliampere 13
mV millivolt 14
kW kilowatt 15
W watt 16
kWh kilowatt hour 17
F fahrenheit 18
hp horsepower 19
MWh megawatt hour 20
m3h cubic metres per hour 21
l/s litres per second 22
bar bar 23
kPa kilopascal 24
GPM gallons per minute 25
PSI pounds per square inch 26
CFM cubic feet per minute 27
ft foot 28
MGD millions of gallons per day 29
iHg inches of mercury 30
FPM feet per minute 31
lbs pound 32
34.03 SELECT P VAR Selects the drive variable scaled into a desired process variable. See
parameter 34.01.
0 … 9999 Parameter index 0 … 9999
34.04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM Defines a filter time constant for actual signal 01.02 SPEED. The time constant
has an effect on all functions in which signal SPEED is used.
The actual speed value is used e.g. in speed supervision (parameter group 32
SUPERVISION) as an analogue output value (group 15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS) or as an actual signal shown on the control panel display or PC
screen.

155

0 … 20000 ms Filter time constant 0 … 20000
%
100
Filtered Signal
t = time
t
T
34.05 TORQ ACT FILT TIM Defines a filter time for the actual signal torque (actual signal 01.05). Affects
also on the torque supervision (parameters 32.07 and 32.09) and the torque
read through an analogue output.
0 … 20000 ms Filter time constant 0 … 20000
%
100
Filtered Signal
t = time
t
T
34.06 RESET RUN TIME Resets the motor running time counter (actual signal 01.43).
NO No reset. 0
YES Reset. The counter restarts from zero. 65535
35 MOT TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement. For the function description see sections
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 73 and
Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I/O extension on page
75.
35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL Activates the motor 1 temperature measurement function and selects the
sensor type.
Note: If an optional analogue I/O extension module RAIO is used for the
temperature measurement and 35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL and/or 35.04
MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL are set to 1xPT100, analogue extension module input
signal range must be set to 0...2 V (instead of 0...10 V) with DIP switches.
NOT IN USE The function is inactive. 1
1xPT100 The function is active. The temperature is measured with one Pt 100 sensor. 2
Analogue output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor. The sensor
resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over
the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
analogue input AI1 and converts it to degrees centigrade.
2XPT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using two Pt 100 sensors. 3
See selection 1xPT100.
3XPT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using three Pt 100 sensors. 4
See selection 1xPT100.

156

1...3 PTC The function is active. The temperature is supervised using one to three PTC 5
sensors or one to three KTY84-1xx silicon temperature sensors. Analogue
output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor(s). The resistance of the
sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the sensor
reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over the resistor. The
temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analogue input
AI1 and converts it into ohms. The figure below shows typical PTC sensor
resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature.
Ohm
4000
Temperature Resistance
Normal 0 … 1.5 kohm 1330
Excessive > 4 kohm
550
100
T
35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L Defines the alarm limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The alarm
indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 … 5000 ohm/°C Limit in °C or ohms. °C: parameter 35.01 is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100. -10 … 5000
(PTC/Pt100) Ohm: parameter 35.01 is 1...3 PTC.
35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L Defines the fault trip limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The fault
indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 … 5000 ohm/°C Limit in °C or ohms. °C: parameter 35.01 is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100. -10 … 5000
(PTC/Pt100) Ohm: parameter 35.01 is 1...3 PTC.
35.04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL Activates the motor 2 temperature measurement function and selects the
sensor type. Two motors can be protected only by using an optional analogue
extension module. Parameter 98.12 needs to be activated.
Note: If 98.12 is activated, the analogue I/O extension is also used for motor 1
temperature measurement (the standard I/O terminals are not in use).
Note: If an optional analogue I/O extension module RAIO is used for the
temperature measurement and 35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL and/or 35.04
MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL are set to 1xPT100, analogue extension module input
signal range must be set to 0...2 V (instead of 0...10 V) with DIP switches.
NOT IN USE See 35.01. 1
1xPT100 See 35.01. 2
2XPT100 See 35.01. 3
3XPT100 See 35.01. 4
1...3 PTC See 35.01. 5
35.05 MOT 2 TEMP ALM L Defines the alarm limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function. The
alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 … 5000 ohm/°C See 35.02. -10 … 5000
(PTC/Pt100)

157

35.06 MOT 2 TEMP FLT L Defines the fault trip limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function.
The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 … 5000 ohm/°C See 35.03. -10 … 5000
(PTC/Pt100)
35.07 MOT MOD Selects whether measured motor 1 temperature is used in the motor model
COMPENSAT compensation.
NO The function is inactive. 1
YES The temperature is used in the motor model compensation. 2
Note: Selection is effective only when Pt 100 sensor(s) are used.
YES PAR35.08 Motor temperature is brought from the automation system to the drive. 3
35.08 MOT MOD COMP The source for the motor temperature feedback when parameter 35.07 has
PTR been set to value YES PAR35.08.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value. -
+255.255.31 / C.- Example: Connection pointer via 85.01 CONSTANT1:
32768 … C.32767 35.08 MOT MOD COMP PTR = +.085.001.00.
40 PID CONTROL - process PID control (99.02 = PID CTRL)
- speed or torque reference trimming (99.02 is not PID CTRL)
- sleep function for the process PID control (99.02 = PID CTRL)
For more information, see section Process PID control on page 70.
40.01 PID GAIN Defines the gain of the process PID controller.
0.1 … 100.0 Gain value. The table below lists a few examples of the gain settings and the 10 … 10000
resulting speed changes when
- a 10% or 50% error value is connected to the controller
(error = process reference - process actual value).
- motor maximum speed is 1500 rpm (parameter 20.02)
PID Gain Speed Change: Speed Change:

10% Error 50% Error
0.5 75 rpm 375 rpm
1.0 150 rpm 750 rpm
3.0 450 rpm 1500 rpm (limited)
40.02 PID INTEG TIME Defines the integration time for the process PID controller.
Error/Controller output
O I = controller input (error)
I
O = controller output
G·I G = gain
t = time
G·I Ti = integration time
time
Ti
0.02 … 320.00 s Integration time 2 … 32000

158

40.03 PID DERIV TIME Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. The derivative
component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive
error values (EK-1 and EK) according to the following formula:
PID DERIV TIME · (EK - EK-1)/TS, in which
TS = 12 ms sample time.
E = Error = Process reference - process actual value
0.00 … 10.00 s Derivation time. 0 … 1000
40.04 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to smooth the derivative
component of the process PID controller.
0.04 … 10.00 s Filter time constant. 4 … 1000
%
100
Filtered Signal
t = time
t
T
40.05 ERROR VALUE INV Inverts the error at the process PID controller input (error = process reference -
process actual value).
NO No inversion 0
YES Inversion. 65535
With sleep function, the drive operation is as follows:
The drive enters the sleep mode when the motor speed is below the sleep
level (02.02 < 40.21) and when the process PID control actual value is smaller
than the wake-up level (01.34 < 40.23).
The drive wakes up when the process PID actual value is greater than the
wake-up level (01.34 > 40.23).
See also section Sleep function for the process PID control on page 71.
40.06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL Selects the process actual value for the process PID controller: The sources
for the variable ACT1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 40.07 and
40.08.
ACT1 ACT1 1
ACT1-ACT2 Subtraction of ACT1 and ACT 2. 2
ACT1+ACT2 Addition of ACT1 and ACT2 3
ACT1*ACT2 Multiplication of ACT1 and ACT2 4
ACT1/ACT2 Division of ACT1 and ACT2 5
MIN(A1,A2) Selects the smaller of ACT1 and ACT2 6
MAX(A1,A2) Selects the higher of ACT1 and ACT2 7
sqrt(A1-A2) Square root of the subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 8
sqA1+sqA2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of ACT2 9
40.07 ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT1. See parameter 40.06.

159

40.08 ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT2. See parameter 40.06.
40.09 ACT1 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is
selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.07. The minimum and
maximum (40.10) settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal
received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used
by the process PID controller.
-1000 … 1000% Minimum value in percent of the set analogue input range. The equation below -10000 …
instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is used as a 10000
variable ACT1.
AI1min - 13.01
ACT1 MINIMUM = · 100%
13.02 - 13.01
AI1min The voltage value received from the measuring device when
the measured process actual value is at the desired minimum
level.
13.01 AI1 minimum (parameter setting)
13.02 AI1 maximum (parameter setting)
40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is
selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.07. The minimum (40.09)
and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal received
from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the
process PID controller.
-1000 … 1000% Maximum value in percent of the set analogue input signal range. The -10000 …
equation below instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is 10000
used as a variable ACT1.
AI1max - 13.01
ACT1 MAXIMUM = · 100%
13.02 - 13.01
AI1max The voltage value received from the measuring device when
the measured process actual value is at the desired maximum
level.
13.01 AI1 minimum (parameter setting)
13.02 AI1 maximum (parameter setting)
40.11 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 40.09.

-1000 … 1000% See parameter 40.09. -10000 …
10000

160

40.12 ACT2 MAXIMUM See parameter 40.10.
-1000 … 1000% See parameter 40.10. -10000 …

10000
40.13 PID INTEGRATION Activates the integration of the process PID controller.
OFF Inactive 1
ON Active 2
40.14 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct and proportional
trimming. Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive
reference. See section Reference trimming on page 47.
Example: A speed-controlled conveyor line where the line tension also needs
to be considered: The speed reference is slightly adjusted (trimmed)
depending on the value of the measured line tension.
Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
OFF The trim function is deactivated. 1
PROPORTIONAL The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to the external 2
%-reference (REF2). See parameter 11.06.
DIRECT The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum 3
limit used in the reference control loop (maximum speed, frequency or torque).
40.15 TRIM REF SEL Selects the signal source for the trim reference. Not visible when parameter
99.02 = PID CTRL.
Example: AI5 as a trim reference
sclAI5
minAI5 = parameter 13.16
maxAI5 = parameter 13.17
sclAI5 = parameter 13.18
Trim reference
AI5 be used only with an optional

I/O extension module.
-sclAI5

PAR 40.16 Value of parameter 40.16 is used as the trim reference. 6
PAR 40.28 Value of parameter 40.28 is used as the trim reference. 7
40.16 TRIM REFERENCE Defines the trim reference value when parameter 40.15 has the value PAR
40.16 selected. Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
-100.0 … 100.0% Trim reference - 10000 …
10000

161

40.17 TRIM RANGE Defines the multiplier for the PID controller output used as the trimming factor.
ADJUST Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
-100.0 … 100.0% Multiplying factor - 10000 …
10000
40.18 TRIM SELECTION Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the speed or torque
reference.
Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
SPEED TRIM Speed reference trimming 1
TORQUE TRIM Torque reference trimming 2
DIRECT SPD T Speed reference trimming. Trim reference is added to the speed reference 3
after ramp calculations. Trimming is not effective during ramp stop, emergency
stop or at speed defined by parameter 30.18 in a fieldbus communication
break.
40.19 ACTUAL FILT TIME Defines the time constant for the filter through which the actual signals are
connected to the process PID controller.
0.04 … 10.00 s Filter time constant. 4 … 1000
%
100 I = filter input (step)
Filtered Signal t = time
t
T
40.20 SLEEP SELECTION Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the activation input.
Visible only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
See section Sleep function for the process PID control on page 71.
OFF Inactive 1
INTERNAL Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by parameters 40.21 and 2
40.23.
DI1 The function is activated/deactivated through digital input DI1. 3
Activation: Digital input DI1 = 1. Deactivation: DI1 = 0.
The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 40.21 and 40.23 are not effective.
The sleep start and stop delays are effective (parameter 40.22 and 40.24).

162

40.21 SLEEP LEVEL Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the motor speed is below a set
level (40.21) longer than the sleep delay (40.22), the drive shifts to the sleeping
mode: the motor is stopped and the control panel shows the warning message
“SLEEP MODE”.
0.0 … 7200.0 rpm Sleep start level 0 … 7200
40.22 SLEEP DELAY Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See parameter 40.21. When the
motor speed falls below the sleep level, the counter starts. When the motor
speed exceeds the sleep level, the counter resets.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Sleep start delay 0 … 36000
40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL Defines the wake-up limit for the sleep function. The drive wakes up if the
process actual value is below a set level (40.23) longer than the wake-up delay
(40.24).
0.0 … 100.0% The wake-up level in percent of the actual process value. 0 … 10000
40.24 WAKE UP DELAY Defines the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See parameter 40.23. When
the process actual value falls below the wake-up level, the wake-up counter
starts. When the process actual value exceeds the wake-up level, the counter
resets.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Wake-up delay 0 …36000
40.25 ACTUAL1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 40.25 of parameter 40.07.
32768 … C.32767
40.26 PID MINIMUM Defines the minimum limit for the PID controller output. Using the minimum and
maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed range.
Example: The process PID control is restricted to the forward rotation direction
of the motor by setting the PID minimum limit to 0% and the maximum to
100%.
-100 … 100% Limit in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor 100 = 1%
40.27 PID MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the PID controller output. Using the minimum
and maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed
range. See parameter 40.26.
-100 … 100% Limit in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor 100 = 1%
40.28 TRIM REF PTR Defines the trim reference value when parameter 40.15 has been set to value
PAR 40.28.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value: 100 = 1%
42 BRAKE CONTROL Control of a mechanical brake. The function operates on a 100 ms time level.
For the function description, see section Control of a mechanical brake on
page 77.
42.01 BRAKE CTRL Activates the brake control function.
OFF Inactive 1

163

ON Active 2
42.02 BRAKE Activates the external brake on/off supervision and selects the source for the
ACKNOWLEDGE signal. The use of the external on/off supervision signal is optional.
OFF Inactive 1
DI5 Active. Digital input DI5 is the signal source. DI5 = 1: The brake is open. 2
DI5 = 0: the brake is closed.
42.03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY Defines the brake open delay (= the delay between the internal open brake
command and the release of the motor speed control). The delay counter
starts when the drive has magnetised the motor and risen the motor torque to
the level required at the brake release (parameters 42.07 and 42.08).
Simultaneously with the counter start, the brake function energises the relay
output controlling the brake and the brake starts opening.
0.0 … 5.0 s Delay time. Set the delay the same as the mechanical opening delay of the 0 … 500
brake specified the brake manufacturer.
42.04 BRAKE CLOSE Defines the brake close delay. The delay counter starts when the motor actual
DELAY speed has fallen below the set level (parameter 42.05) after the drive has
received the stop command. Simultaneously with the counter start, the brake
control function de-energises the relay output controlling the brake and the
brake starts closing. During the delay, the brake function keeps the motor live
preventing the motor speed from falling below zero.
0.0 … 60.0 s Delay time. Set the delay time to the same value as the mechanical make-up 0 … 6000
time of the brake (= operating delay when closing) specified by the brake
manufacturer.
42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS Defines the brake close speed. See parameter 42.04.
SPD
0 … 1000 rpm Speed (an absolute value) 0 …100000
42.06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC Defines how the drive reacts in case the status of the optional external brake
acknowledgement signal does not meet the status presumed by the brake
control function.
FAULT The drive trips on a fault: fault indication and drive stops the motor. 1
42.07 START TORQ REF Selects the source for the motor starting torque reference applied at the brake
SEL release. The value is read in percent of the motor nominal torque.
NO No source selected. This is the default value. 1
PAR 42.08 Defined by parameter 42.08. 7
MEMORY The motor torque stored at the previous brake close command. 8
42.08 START TORQ REF Defines the motor starting torque at brake release if parameter 42.07 has value
PAR 40.28.

164

-300 … 300% Torque value in percent of the motor nominal torque -30000 …
30000
42.09 EXTEND RUN T Defines an extended run time for the brake control function at stop. During the
delay, the motor is kept magnetised and ready for an immediate restart.
0.0 … 60.0 s 0.0 s = Normal stop routine of the brake control function: The motor 100 = 1 s
magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay has passed.
0.1 … 60.0 s = Extended stop routine of the brake control function: The motor
magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay and the extended run
time have passed. During the extended run time, a zero torque reference is
applied, and the motor is ready for a immediate restart.
Start/Stop
Motor magnetised
Actual speed
1 = brake close speed
2 = brake close delay
3 = extended run time
1
t
2 3
42.10 LOW REF BRK HOLD Activates a brake hold function and defines the hold delay for it. The function
stabilises the operation of the brake control application when the motor
operates near zero speed and there is no measured speed feedback available
(pulse encoder).
0.0 … 60.0 s 0.0 s = inactive. 100 = 1 s
0.1 s … 60.0 s = active. When the absolute value of the motor speed reference
falls below the brake close speed:
- The brake hold delay counter starts.
- The brake is closed according to normal stop routine of the brake control
function.
During the delay, the function keeps the brake closed despite of the speed
reference value and the value of start command. When the set delay has
passed, the normal operation resumes.
45 ENERGY OPT Energy optimization settings
45.02 ENERGY TARIFF1 Price of energy per kWh. Used for reference when savings are calculated. See
parameters 01.46 SAVED KWH, 01.48 SAVED AMOUNT and 01.50 SAVED
CO2.
0.0000…1024.0000 Price of energy per kWh. 1 = 0.001
45.06 E TARIFF UNIT Specifies the currency used for the savings calculation.
LOCAL The currency is determined by the setting of parameter 99.01 Language. 0
EUR Euro 1
USD US dollar 2
45.08 PUMP REF POWER Pump power when connected directly to supply. Used for reference when
energy savings are calculated. See parameters 01.46 SAVED KWH, 01.48
SAVED AMOUNT and 01.50 SAVED CO2.

165

0… 950% Pump power in percent of nominal motor power. Note: The maximum value 1000 =
depends on the motor and is calculated in power-up or when the motor power 100%
changes.
45.09 ENERGY RESET Resets the energy counters 01.46 SAVED KWH, 01.47 SAVED GWH, 01.48
SAVED AMOUNT, 01.49 SAVED AMOUNT M, 01.50 SAVED CO2 and 01.51
SAVED CO2 KTON.
DONE Reset not requested (normal operation). 0
RESET Reset energy counters. The value reverts automatically to DONE. 1
50 ENCODER MODULE Encoder connection. Visible only when a pulse encoder module (optional) is
installed and activated by parameter 98.01.
The settings will remain the same even though the application macro is
changed.
50.01 PULSE NR States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution.
0 … 29999 ppr Pulse number in pulses per round (ppr) 0 … 29999
50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE Defines how the encoder pulses are calculated.
A -- B DIR Channel A: positive edges calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. 0
-
A-- Channel A: positive and negative edges calculated for speed. Channel B: not 1
used.
A --- B DIR Channel A: positive and negative edges are calculated for speed. Channel B: 2
direction.
A --- B --- All edges of the signals are calculated. 3
50.03 ENCODER FAULT Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in communication
between the pulse encoder and the pulse encoder interface module, or
between the module and the drive. Encoder supervision function activates if
either of the following conditions is valid:
-The difference between estimated and measured speed is greater than 20%
of the motor nominal speed.
- No pulses are received from the encoder within the defined time (see
parameter 50.04) and the drive is simultaneously at current or torque limit.
WARNING The drive generates a warning indication. 0
FAULT The drive trips on a fault, gives a fault indication and stops the motor. 65535
50.04 ENCODER DELAY Defines the time delay for the encoder supervision function (See parameter
50.03).
0 … 50000 ms Time delay 0 … 50000
50.05 ENCODER DDCS CH Defines the fibre optic channel of the control board from which the drive
program reads the signals coming from the pulse encoder interface module.
The setting is valid only if the module is connected to the drive via the DDCS
link (i.e. not to the option slot of the drive).
CH 1 Signals via channel 1 (CH1). The pulse encoder interface module must be 1
connected to CH1 instead of CH2 in applications where CH2 is reserved by a
Master station (e.g. a Master/Follower application). See also parameter 70.03.
CH 2 Signals via channel 2 (CH2). Can be used in most cases. 2
50.06 SPEED FB SEL Defines the speed feedback value used in control.
INTERNAL Calculated speed estimate 65535
ENCODER Actual speed measured with an encoder 0

166

50.07 ENC CABLE CHECK Selects the drive operation when encoder signal is missing.
Note: Monitoring is only for RTAC-03. For more information, see RTAC-03
Pulse Encoder Interface Module User’s Manual [3AFE68650500 (English)].
NO No action 0
WARNING Drive generates warning ENC CABLE. 1
FAULT Drive trips on fault ENC CABLE. 2
51 COMM MODULE The parameters are visible and need to be adjusted, only when a fieldbus
DATA adapter module (optional) is installed and activated by parameter 98.02. For
details on the parameters, refer to the manual of the fieldbus module and
chapter Fieldbus control.
These parameter settings will remain the same even though the macro is
changed.
52 STANDARD The settings for the Standard Modbus Link. See chapter Fieldbus control.
MODBUS
52.01 STATION NUMBER Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same address are not
allowed on-line.
1 … 247 Address 1=1
52.02 BAUDRATE Defines the transfer rate of the link.
600 600 bit/s 1
1200 1200 bit/s 2
2400 2400 bit/s 3
4800 4800 bit/s 4
9600 9600 bit/s 5
19200 19200 bit/s 6
52.03 PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must be used in all
on-line stations.
NONE1STOPBIT No parity bit, one stop bit 1
NONE2STOPBIT No parity bit, two stop bits 2
ODD Odd parity indication bit, one stop bit 3
EVEN Even parity indication bit, one stop bit 4
60 MASTER/ Master/Follower application. For more information, see section Master/
FOLLOWER Follower use of several drives on page 80 and a separate Master/Follower
Application Guide [3AFE64590430 (English)].
60.01 MASTER LINK MODE Defines the role of the drive on the Master/Follower link.
Note: Two Master stations are not allowed on-line. If a Follower drive is
changed to be a Master drive (or vice versa) by this parameter, the RMIO
board must be powered up again for the M/F link to work properly.
NOT IN USE The Master/Follower link is not active. 1
MASTER Master drive 2
FOLLOWER Follower drive 3
STANDBY Follower drive which reads the control signals through a fieldbus interface, not 4
from the Master/Follower link as usual.
60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR Selects the reference used in motor torque control. Typically, the value needs
to be changed only in the Follower station(s).
The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 = T CTRL.
External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable torque selector.

167

ZERO This selection forces the output of the torque selector to zero. 1
SPEED The follower speed controller output is used as a reference for motor torque 2
control. The drive is speed-controlled. SPEED can be used both in the
Follower and in the Master if
- the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are connected flexibly. (A slight
speed difference between the Master and the Follower is possible/allowed.)
- drooping is used (see parameter 60.06).
TORQUE The drive is torque-controlled. The selection is used in the Follower(s) when 3
the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are coupled solidly to each other
by gearing, a chain or other means of mechanical power transmission and no
speed difference between the drives is allowed or possible.
Note: If TORQUE is selected, the drive does not restrict the speed variation as
long as the speed is within the limits defined by parameters 20.01 and 20.02.
More definite speed supervision is often needed. In those cases, the selection
ADD should be used instead of TORQUE.
MINIMUM The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed 4
controller output, and the smaller of them is used as the reference for the
motor torque control. MINIMUM is selected in special cases only.
MAXIMUM The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed 5
controller output and the greater of them is used as the reference for the motor
torque control. MAXIMUM is selected in special cases only.
ADD The torque selector adds the speed controller output to the direct torque 6
reference. The drive is torque-controlled in the normal operating range. The
selection ADD, together with the window control, forms a speed supervision
function for a torque-controlled Follower drive. See parameter 60.03.
60.03 WINDOW SEL ON Activates the Window control function. The Window control, together with
selection ADD at parameter 60.02, forms a speed supervision function for a
torque-controlled drive. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is
T CTRL. External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable window
control.
NO Inactive 0
YES Window control is active. Selection YES is used only when parameter 60.02 65535
has value ADD. Window control supervises the speed error value (Speed
Reference - Actual Speed). In the normal operating range, window control
keeps the speed controller input at zero. The speed controller is evoked only if:
- the speed error exceeds the value of parameter 60.04 or
- the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds the value of
parameter 60.05.
When the speed error moves outside the window, the exceeding part of the
error value is connected to the speed controller. The speed controller produces
a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speed controller
(parameter 23.01) which the torque selector adds to the torque reference. The
result is used as the internal torque reference for the drive.
Example: In a load loss condition, the internal torque reference of the drive is
decreased to prevent an excessive rise of the motor speed. If window control
were inactivated, the motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the drive
were reached.
60.04 WINDOW WIDTH Defines the supervision window width above the speed reference. See
POS parameter 60.03. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is T
CTRL.
0 … 1500 rpm Positive window width 0… 20000

168

60.05 WINDOW WIDTH Defines the supervision window width below the speed reference. See
NEG parameter 60.03. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is T
CTRL.
0 … 1500 rpm Negative window width 0… 20000
60.06 DROOP RATE Defines the droop rate. The parameter value needs to be changed only if both
the Master and the Follower are speed-controlled:
- External control location 1 (EXT1) is selected (see parameter 11.02 or
- External control location 2 (EXT2) is selected (see parameter 11.02) and
parameter 60.02 is set to SPEED.
The droop rate needs to be set both for the Master and the Follower. The
correct droop rate for a process must be found out case by case in practice.
The drooping prevents a conflict between the Master and the Follower by
allowing a slight speed difference between them. The drooping slightly
decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases. The actual speed
decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and
the drive load ( = torque reference / speed controller output). At 100% speed
controller output, drooping is at its nominal level, i.e. equal to the value of the
DROOP RATE. The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the
decreasing load.
Speed Decrease =
Motor
Speed Controller Output · Drooping · Nominal Speed
Speed Example: Speed Controller output is 50%, DROOP RATE is
% of
1%, nominal speed of the drive is 1500 rpm.
nominal Speed decrease = 0.50 · 0.01 · 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm
No Drooping
100% } Par. 60.06 DROOP RATE
Drooping
Speed Controller Drive load

100% Output / %
0 … 100% Droop rate in percent of the motor nominal speed 0 … 1000

60.07 MASTER SIGNAL 2 Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 1
(speed reference).
0000 … 9999 Parameter index 0000 …
9999
60.08 MASTER SIGNAL 3 Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 2
(torque reference).
0000 … 9999 Parameter index 0000 …
9999
70 DDCS CONTROL Settings for the fibre optic channels 0, 1 and 3.
70.01 CHANNEL 0 ADDR Defines the node address for channel 0. No two nodes on-line may have the
same address. The setting needs to be changed when a master station is
connected to channel 0 and it does not automatically change the address of
the slave. Examples of such masters are an ABB Advant Controller or another
drive.
1 … 125 Address. 1 … 125
70.02 CHANNEL 3 ADDR Node address for channel 3. No two nodes on-line may have the same
address. Typically the setting needs to be changed when the drive is
connected in a ring which consists of several drives and a PC with the
DriveWindow program running.

169

1 … 254 Address. 1 … 254
70.03 CH1 BAUD RATE The communication speed of channel 1. Typically the setting needs to be
changed only if the pulse encoder interface module is connected to channel 1
instead of channel 2. Then the speed must be changed to 4 Mbit/s. See also
parameter 50.05.
8 Mbit/s 8 megabits per second 0
70.04 CH0 DDCS HW Selects the topology of the channel 0 link.
CONN
RING Devices are connected in ring topology. 0
STAR Devices are connected in a star topology. 65535
70.05 CH2 HW Selects the topology of the DDCS channel CH2 link. 1=1
CONNECTION
0 = RING Devices are connected in a ring. Forwarding of messages is enabled.
1 = STAR Devices are connected in a star. Forwarding of messages is disabled. This
selection is used with NDBU branching units.
72 USER LOAD CURVE See section User load curve on page 83.
72.01 OVERLOAD FUNC Activates the user load curve and selects how the drive reacts when the user
load curve has been exceeded.
NO User load curve is inactive. 0
WARNING The drive generates a warning USER L CURVE. Drive output current is not 1
limited.
FAULT The drive trips on a fault USER L CURVE. 2
LIMIT Drive output current is limited to Iuser curve. 3
LIMIT / WARN Drive output current is limited to Iuser curve and the drive generates a warning 4
USER L CURVE.
72.02 LOAD CURRENT 1 Defines the first current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par.
72.10 LOAD FREQ 1.
0...800% Value in percent of the nominal motor current 1=1
72.03 LOAD CURRENT 2 Defines the second current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by
par. 72.11 LOAD FREQ 2.
72.04 LOAD CURRENT 3 Defines the third current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par.
72.12 LOAD FREQ 3.
72.05 LOAD CURRENT 4 Defines the fourth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by
72.06 LOAD CURRENT 5 Defines the fifth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par.
72.14 LOAD FREQ 5.
72.07 LOAD CURRENT 6 Defines the sixth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by

170

72.08 LOAD CURRENT 7 Defines the seventh current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by
72.09 LOAD CURRENT 8 Defines the eighth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by
72.10 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the first frequency point of the load curve.
0... par. 72.11 % Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency 1=1
72.11 LOAD FREQ 2 Defines the second frequency point of the load curve.
par. 72.10... Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency 1=1
par. 72.12 %
72.12 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the third frequency point of the load curve.
par. 72.13 %
72.13 LOAD FREQ 4 Defines the fourth frequency point of the load curve.
par. 72.14 %
72.14 LOAD FREQ 5 Defines the fifth frequency point of the load curve.
par. 72.15 %
72.15 LOAD FREQ 6 Defines the sixth frequency point of the load curve.
par. 72.16 %
72.16 LOAD FREQ 7 Defines the seventh frequency point of the load curve.
par. 72.17 %
72.17 LOAD FREQ 8 Defines the eight frequency point of the load curve.
par. 72.16...600% Value in percent of the nominal motor frequency 1=1
2dt).
72.18 LOAD CURRENT Defines the overload current. Value is used by the overload integrator (∫I
LIMIT If the continuous motor load capacity (i.e. the defined user load curve) is not
100% at the nominal frequency, calculate the overload current using the
following equation:
2 2 2
72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT = I overload – I user curve + 100
where Ioverload is the motor overload and Iuser curve is the current defined by the
user load curve at the nominal frequency. User load curve is defined by
parameters 72.02...72.17.
Example: Motor overload capacity is 150% of the nominal current for
10 s / 10 min and the continuous load capacity is 80% at the nominal
frequency:
2 2 2
72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT = 150 – 80 + 100 = 162%
72.19 LOAD THERMAL TIME = 10 s
72.20 LOAD COOLING TIME = 590 s
100...800% Value in percent of the nominal motor current (99.06 MOTOR NOM 10 = 1%
CURRENT)

171

2
72.19 LOAD THERMAL Defines the overload time. Value is used by the overload integrator (∫I dt). See 10 = 1 s
TIME the example given for par. 72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT.
0.0...9999.9 s Time. If the value is set to zero, the drive output current is limited to the user
load curve defined by parameters 72.02...72.17.
72.20 LOAD COOLING Defines the cooling time. The output of the overload integrator is set to zero if
TIME the current stays continuously below the user load curve for the defined cooling
time. See the example given for par. 72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT.
0...9999 s Time 1=1s
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL Control of the Adaptive Program execution. For more information, see the
Adaptive Program Application Guide [3AFE64527274 (English)].
83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD Selects the operation mode for the Adaptive Program.
STOP Stop. The program cannot be edited. 1
RUN Run. The program cannot be edited. 2
EDIT Stop to edit mode. Program can be edited. 3
83.02 EDIT COMMAND Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by parameter
83.03. The program must be in editing mode (see parameter 83.01).
NO Home value. The value automatically restores to NO after an editing command 1
has been executed.
PUSH Shifts the block in location defined by parameter 83.03 and the following blocks 2
one location up. A new block can be placed in the emptied location by
programming the Block Parameter Set as usual.
Example: A new block needs to be placed in between the current block
number four (parameters 84.20 … 84.25) and five (parameters 84.25 …
84.29).
In order to do this:
- Shift the program to the editing mode by parameter 83.01.
- Select location number five as the desired location for the new block by
parameter 83.03.
- Shift the block in location number 5 and the following blocks one location
forward by parameter 83.02. (selection PUSH)
- Program the emptied location number 5 by parameters 84.25 to 84.29 as
usual.
DELETE Deletes the block in location defined by parameter 83.03 and shifts the 3
following blocks one step down.
PROTECT Activation of the Adaptive Program protection. Activate as follows: 4
- Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP (parameter
83.01).
- Set the passcode (parameter 83.05).
- Change parameter 83.02 to PROTECT.
When activated:
- All parameters in group 84 excluding the block output parameters are hidden
(read protected).
- It is not possible to switch the program to the editing mode (parameter 83.01).
- Parameter 83.05 is set to 0.

172

UNPROTECT Inactivation of the Adaptive Program protection. Inactivate as follows: 5
- Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP (parameter
83.01).
- Set the passcode (parameter 83.05).
- Change parameter 83.02 to UNPROTECT.
Note: If the passcode is lost, it is possible to reset the protection also by
changing the application macro setting (parameter 99.02).
83.03 EDIT BLOCK Defines the block location number for the command selected by parameter
83.02.
1 … 15 Block location number 1=1
83.04 TIMELEVEL SEL Selects the execution cycle time for the Adaptive Program. The setting is valid
for all blocks.
12 ms 12 milliseconds 1
83.05 PASSCODE Sets the passcode for the Adaptive Program protection. The passcode is
needed at activation and inactivation of the protection. See parameter 83.02.
0… Passcode. The setting restores to 0 after the protection is activated/inactivated.
Note: When activating, write down the passcode and store it in a safe place.
84 ADAPTIVE - selections of the function blocks and their input connections.
PROGRAM - diagnostics
For more information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide
84.01 STATUS Shows the value of the Adaptive Program status word. The table below shows
the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display.
Bit Display Meaning
0 1 Stopped
1 2 Running
2 4 Faulted
3 8 Editing
4 10 Checking
5 20 Pushing
6 40 Popping
8 100 Initialising
84.02 FAULTED PAR Points out the faulted parameter in the Adaptive Program. -
84.05 BLOCK1 Selects the function block for Block Parameter Set 1. See the Adaptive
Program Application Guide [3AFE64527274 (English)].
ABS 11
ADD 10
AND 2
BITWISE 26
COMPARE 16
COUNT 21
DPOT 23
EVENT 20

173

FILTER 13
MASK-SET 24
MAX 17
MIN 18
MULDIV 12
NO 1
OR 3
PI 14
PI-BAL 15
PI BIPOLAR 25
RAMP 22
SR 5
SWITCH-B 7
SWITCH-I 19
TOFF 9
TON 8
TRIGG 6
XOR 4
84.06 INPUT1 Selects the source for input I1 of Block Parameter Set 1.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value: -
Example: The state of digital input DI2 is connected to Input 1 as follows:
- Set the source selection parameter (84.06) to +.01.17.01. (The application
program stores the state of digital input DI2 to bit 1 of actual signal 01.17.)
- If you need an inverted value, switch the sign of the pointer value
(-01.17.01.).
84.07 INPUT2 See parameter 84.06.
-255.255.31 … See parameter 84.06. -
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 … C.32767
84.08 INPUT3 See parameter 84.06.
-255.255.31 … See parameter 84.06. -
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 … C.32767
84.09 OUTPUT Stores and displays the output of Block Parameter Set 1.
… …
84.79 OUTPUT Stores the output of Block Parameter Set 15. -
85 USER CONSTANTS Storage of the Adaptive Program constants and messages. For more
information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide [3AFE64527274
(English)].
85.01 CONSTANT1 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value 1=1

174

-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value 1=1
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value 1=1
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value 1=1
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value 1=1
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value 1=1
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value 1=1
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value 1=1
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value 1=1
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value 1=1
85.11 STRING1 Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block).
MESSAGE1 Message -
MESSAGE2 Message -
MESSAGE3 Message -
MESSAGE4 Message -
MESSAGE5 Message -
90 D SET REC ADDR - Addresses into which the received fieldbus data sets are written.
- Numbers of the main and auxiliary data sets.
The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02. For more information, see chapter Fieldbus control.
90.01 AUX DS REF3 Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF3 is written.
0 … 8999 Parameter index
90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE Defines the data set from which the drive reads the Control Word, Reference
REF1 and Reference REF2.
1 … 255 Data set number
90.05 AUX DS SOURCE Defines the data set from which the drive reads References REF3, REF4 and
REF5.

175

1 … 255 Data set number
92 D SET TR ADDR Main and Auxiliary Data Sets which the drive sends to the fieldbus master
station.
The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02. For more information, see chapter Fieldbus control.
92.01 MAIN DS STATUS Stores the address from which the Main Status Word is read from. Fixed value,
WORD not visible.
302 (fixed) Parameter index
92.02 MAIN DS ACT1 Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 1 is read to the Main Data
Set.
92.03 MAIN DS ACT2 Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 2 is read to the Main Data
Set.
92.04 AUX DS ACT3 Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 3 is read to the Auxiliary Data
Set.
Set.
Set.
92.07 MSW B10 PTR Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 10 is read from.
-255.255.31 … Parameter index or a constant value:
95 HARDWARE SPECIF Fan speed control, sine filter application etc.
95.01 FAN SPD CTRL Selects the speed control of the optional inverter cooling fan.
MODE
CONST 50 Hz Fan is running at constant frequency of 50 Hz when powered. 0

176

RUN/STOP Drive stopped: Fan is running at constant frequency of 10 Hz. 1
Drive running: Fan is running at constant frequency of 50 Hz.
CONTROLLED The speed of the fan is determined from IGBT temperature vs. fan speed 2
curve.
95.02 FUSE SWITCH CTRL Activates the inverter DC switch (switch fuse) monitoring function. The
monitoring must be active when the Switch Fuse Control Board (ASFC) is in
use and connected to the inverter AINT board, i.e. in all frame R8i inverters
equipped with the DC switch. The function must be inactive in units that do not
use the ASFC board with the DC switch, i.e. for frame R2i…R7i inverters and
all single drive units where no DC switch exists. The default setting (ON or
OFF) for each unit is set accordingly at the factory as default.
ACS800 IGBT pulses are always blocked when the program detects that the
DC switch is opened or inverter charging is ongoing (at power switch on). The
application program generates alarm INV DISABLED if the DC switch is
opened when the inverter is stopped. The inverter trips to fault INV DISABLED
if the DC switch is opened when the inverter is running.
OFF Inactive 0
ON Active 1
95.03 INT CONFIG USER Number of parallel connected inverter modules. Activates the Reduced Run
function. See section Reduced Run function on page 82.
1...12 Number of parallel connected inverter modules
95.04 EX/SIN REQUEST Activates the sine filter or Ex-motor application.
NO Inactive 1
EX Ex-motor application. Used with motors which comply with the ATEX directive. 2
SIN Sine filter application. See the Sine Filters User’s Manual for ACS800 Drives 3
EX&SIN EX-motor and sine filter applications. See the Sine Filters User’s Manual for 4
ACS800 Drives [3AFE68389178 (English)].
Note: This selection is not supported from firmware version AS7R7363
onwards.
95.05 ENA INC SW FREQ Activates the minimum switching frequency limitation for Ex-motor
applications. Parameter is visible if parameter 95.04 EX/SIN REQUEST is set
to EX.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active. Minimum switching frequency limit is set to 2 kHz. Used with motors 1
with an ATEX certification based on 2 kHz minimum switching frequency.

177

95.06 LCU Q PW REF Defines the reference value for the line-side converter (i.e. IGBT supply unit)
reactive power generation. Line-side converter can generate reactive power to
the supply network. This reference is written into line-side converter unit
parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2. For more information, see IGBT Supply
Control Program 7.x Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)].
Example 1: When parameter 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PERCENT,
value 10000 of parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2 equals to value 100% of
parameter 24.01 Q POWER REF (i.e. 100% of the converter nominal power
given in signal 04.06 CONV NOM POWER).
Example 2: When parameter 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to kVAr, value
1000 of parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2 equals to parameter 24.01 Q
POWER REF value calculated with the following equation: 100 · (1000 kVAr
divided by converter nominal power in kVAr)%.
Example 3: When parameter 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to PHI, value
3000 of parameter 24.02 POWER REF2 equals approximately to parameter
24.01 Q POWER REF value calculated with the following equation:
S
P P Q
cos ( 30 ) = ---- = ------------------------
S 2 2 30°
P +Q
P
Positive reference 30° denotes capacitive load.
Negative reference 30° denotes inductive load.
P = signal 01.09 POWER value
Parameter 24.03 values are converter to degrees by the line-side converter
application program: -3000...30000 = -30°...30°. Value -10000/10000 equals to
-30°/30°, since the range is limited to -3000/3000.
-10000...10000 Reference value. See par.
description.
95.07 LCU DC REF Defines the intermediate circuit DC voltage reference for the line-side
converter (i.e. IGBT supply unit). This reference is written into line-side
converter parameter 23.01 DC VOLT REF. For more information, see IGBT
Supply Control Program 7.x Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)].
0...1100 V Voltage 1=1V
95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL Selects the line-side converter address from which the actual signal 09.12 LCU
ACT SIGNAL1 is read from.
0…9999 Line-side converter parameter index. Default value 106 = line-side converter 0…9999
parameter 01.06 LINE CURRENT. For more information, see IGBT Supply
95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL Selects the line-side converter address from which the actual signal 09.13 LCU
ACT SIGNAL2 is read from.
0…9999 Line-side converter parameter index. Default value 110 = line side converter 0…9999
parameter 01.10 DC VOLTAGE. For more information, see IGBT Supply
95.10 TEMP INV AMBIENT Defines the ambient temperature for the Enhanced drive temperature
monitoring function. See Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800,
frame sizes R7 and R8 on page 67.
Note: If ambient temperature exceeds 40°C, the drive load capacity
decreases. See the derating instructions in the appropriate hardware manual.
20...50°C Temperature 10 = 1°C

178

95.11 SUPPLY CTRL Enables/disables the control and data transfer of line-side converter unit (LSU)
MODE by inverter unit (INU). The parameter 98.02 COMM.MODULE in LSU must
have the value INU COM LIM.
NONE Line-side converter control disabled. 0
LINE CONV Limited control from the inverter RMIO board DDCS channel CH1. 65535
11.02 Q REF SELECT
Inverter RMIO Line converter RMIO board PARAM 24.01

board Q POVER
98.02 COMM. MODULE AI1 REF
= INVERTER 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL AI2 24.01
AI3
Dataset 121 (CH1) Dataset 121 (CH0)
MCW (fixed) PERCENT +
MCW PARAM 24.02
kVAr
95.06 LCU Q PW REF Q-REF(fixed) 24.02 +
PHI
95.07 LCU DC REF DC REF(fixed) COSPHI

MSW MSW (fixed) 24.04
9.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL1 106 (value)
9.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL2 110 (value)
11.01 DC REF SELECT
Dataset 123 (CH1) Dataset 123 (CH0) PARAM 23.01

95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL 106 DC VOLT
95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL 110 AI1 REF
AI2 23.01
MCW = Main Control Word
MSW = Main Status Word AI3
FIELDBUS
95.12 LCU RUN PTR Selection of run command for line-side converter. When 95.11 SUPPLY CTRL
MODE is set to LINE CONV, starting of modulation can be assigned freely to a
parameter or signal using bit pointer.
-255.255.31… Parameter index or a constant value: -
32768…C.32767 effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs.
96 EXTERNAL AO Output signal selection and processing for the analogue extension module
(optional).
The parameters are visible only when the module is installed and activated by
parameter 98.06.
96.01 EXT AO1 Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module.

179

COM.REF4 See parameter 15.01. 15
96.02 INVERT EXT AO1 Activates the inversion of analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension
module.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active. The analogue signal is at a minimum level when the drive signal 65535
indicated is at its maximum and vice versa.
96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module.
Note: Actually, the setting 10 mA or 12 mA does not set the AO1 minimum but
fixes 10/12 mA to actual signal value zero.
Example: Motor speed is read through the analogue output.
- The motor nominal speed is 1000 rpm (parameter 99.08).
- 96.02 is NO.
- 96.05 is 100%.
The analogue output value as a function of the speed is shown below.
Analogue output
mA
20
Analogue output
signal minimum
12 1 0 mA
10 2 4 mA
3 10 mA
4 2 2 4 12 mA
4
3 1 1
-1000 -500 0 500 1000

Speed/rpm
0 mA 0 mA 1
4 mA 4 mA 2
10 mA 10 mA 3
12 mA 12 mA 4
96.04 FILTER EXT AO1 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module. See parameter 15.04.
0.00 … 10.00 s Filtering time constant 0 … 1000
96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O

180

10 … 1000% Scaling factor 100 …
10000
96.06 EXT AO2 Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
extension module.
COM.REF5 See parameter 15.06. 15
96.07 INVERT EXT AO2 Activates the inversion of analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension
module. The analogue signal is at its minimum level when the drive signal
indicated is at its maximum and vice versa.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2 Defines the minimum value for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
0 mA 0 mA 1
4 mA 4 mA 2
10 mA 10 mA 3
12 mA 12 mA 4
96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
0.00 … 10.00 s Filtering time constant 0 … 1000
96.10 SCALE EXT AO2 Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
10 … 1000% Scaling factor 100 …
10000
96.11 EXT AO1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96.11 of parameter 96.01. 1000 =
1 mA
32768 … C.32767

181

96.12 EXT AO2 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96.12 of parameter 96.06. 1000 =
1 mA
32768 … C.32767
98 OPTION MODULES Activation of the option modules.
The parameter settings will remain the same even though the application
macro is changed (parameter 99.02).
98.01 ENCODER MODULE Activates the communication to the optional pulse encoder module. See also
parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE.
NTAC Communication active. Module type: NTAC module. Connection interface: 0
Fibre optic DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see the
NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-up Guide
[3AFY58919730 (English)].
NO Inactive 1
RTAC-SLOT1 Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option 2
slot 1 of the drive.
RTAC-SLOT2 Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option 3
RTAC-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Optional I/O 4
module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic
DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see the RTAC-01
Pulse Encoder Interface User's Manual [3AFE64486853 (English)].
RRIA-SLOT1 Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: option slot 1 5
of the drive.
RRIA-SLOT2 Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: option slot 2 6
of the drive.
RRIA-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RRIA. Connection interface: Optional I/O 7
DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see RRIA-01
Resolver Interface Module User's Manual [3AFE68570760 (English)].
RTAC03-SLOT1 Communication active. Module type: RTAC-03. Connection interface: Option
RTAC03-SLOT2 Communication active. Module type: RTAC-03. Connection interface: Option
RTAC03-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RTAC-03. Connection interface: Optional
I/O module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre
optic DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see the RTAC-03
Pulse Encoder Interface User's Manual [3AFE68650500 (English)].
98.02 COMM. MODULE Activates the external serial communication and selects the interface. See
LINK chapter Fieldbus control.
NO No communication 1
FIELDBUS The drive communicates through an Rxxx type fieldbus adapter connected to 2
slot 1 or through an Nxxx type fieldbus adapter connected to RMIO board
channel CH0. See also parameter group 51 COMM MODULE DATA.

182

ADVANT The drive communicates with an ABB Advant OCS system via CH0 on the 3
RDCO board (optional). See also parameter group 70 DDCS CONTROL.
STD MODBUS The drive communicates with a Modbus controller via the Modbus Adapter 4
Module (RMBA) in option slot 1 of the drive. See also parameter 52
STANDARD MODBUS.
CUSTOMISED The drive communicates via a customer specified link. The control sources are 5
defined by parameters 90.04 and 90.05.
98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 1 (optional)
and defines the type and connection interface of the module.
Module inputs: See parameter 98.09 for the use of the inputs in the drive
application program.
Module outputs: See parameters 14.10 and 14.11 for selecting the drive states
that are indicated through the relay outputs.
NDIO Communication active. Module type: NDIO module. Connection interface: 1
Note: Module node number must be set to 2. For directions, see the NTAC-0x/
NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58919730
(English)].
NO Inactive 2
RDIO-SLOT1 Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 3
of the drive.
of the drive.
RDIO-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O 5
DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 2. For directions, see the RDIO
Module User’s Manual [3AFE64485733 (English)].
(English)].
NO Inactive 2
of the drive.
of the drive.
DDCS link.

183

(English)].
NO Inactive 2
of the drive.
of the drive.
DDCS link.
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE Activates the communication to the analogue I/O extension module (optional),
Module inputs:
- Values AI5 and AI6 in the drive application program are connected to module
inputs 1 and 2.
- See parameters 98.13 and 98.14 for the signal type definitions.
Module outputs:
- See parameters 96.01 and 96.06 for selecting the drive signals that are
indicated through module outputs 1 and 2.
NAIO Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic 1
DDCS link.
(English)].
NO Communication inactive 2
RAIO-SLOT1 Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 3
of the drive.
of the drive.
RAIO-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O 5
DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 5. For directions, see the RAIO
98.07 COMM PROFILE Defines the profile on which the communication with the fieldbus or another
drive is based. Visible only when fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02.
ABB DRIVES ABB Drives profile 1

184

GENERIC Generic drive profile. Typically used with the fieldbus modules that have the 2
type designation of form Rxxx (installed in the option slot of the drive).
CSA 2.8/3.0 Communication profile used by application program versions 2.8 and 3.0. 3
98.09 DI/O EXT1 DI FUNC Defines the naming of the inputs of digital I/O extension module 1 in the drive
application program. See parameter 98.03.
DI7,8 DI1 and DI2 of the module extend the number of input channels. The module 1
inputs are named DI7 and DI8.
REPL DI1,2 DI1 and DI2 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1 and DI2. 2
The inputs are named DI1 and DI2.
DI7,8,9 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module extend the number of input channels. The 3
module inputs are named DI7, DI8 and DI9.
REPL DI1,2,3 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1, DI2 4
and DI3. The inputs are named DI1, DI2 and DI3.
DI10,11,12 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module extend the number of input channels. The 3
module inputs are named DI10, DI11 and DI12.
REPL DI4,5,6 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1, DI2 4
and DI3. The inputs are named DI4, DI5 and DI6.

185

98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP Activates the communication to the analogue I/O extension module and
reserves the module for the use of the motor temperature measurement
function. The parameter also defines the type and connection interface of the
module.
For more information on the temperature measurement function, see
parameter group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS and section Motor temperature
measurement through an analogue I/O extension on page 75.
The use of the analogue inputs (AI) and outputs (AO) of the module is shown in
the table below.
Motor 1 temperature measurement

AO1 Feeds a constant current to motor 1 temperature sensor. The current
value depends on the setting of parameter 35.01:
- AO1 is 9.1 mA with selection 1xPT100
- AO1 is 1.6 mA with selection 1...3 PTC
AI1 Measures voltage over motor 1 temperature sensor.
Motor 2 temperature measurement
AO2 Feeds a constant current to motor 2 temperature sensor. The current
value depends on the setting of parameter 35.04:
- AO2 is 9.1 mA with selection 1xPT100,
- AO2 is 1.6 mA with selection 1...3 PTC
AI2 Measures voltage over motor 2 temperature sensor.
Before setting the drive parameters, ensure the module hardware settings are
appropriate for the motor temperature measurement:
1. The module node number is 9.
2. The input signal type selections are the following:
- for one Pt 100 sensor measurement, set the range to 0 … 2 V.
- for two to three Pt 100 sensors or one to three PTC sensors, set the range to
0 … 10 V.
3. The operation mode selection is unipolar.
NAIO Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic 1
DDCS link.
Note: Make the module hardware settings as described above. For
instructions, see the NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-
up Guide [3AFY58919730 (English)].
NO Inactive 2
of the drive.
Note: Make the module hardware settings as described above. The node
number is not required. For directions, see the RAIO Module User’s Manual
of the drive.
Note: Make the module hardware settings as described above. The node
number is not required. For directions, see the RAIO Module User’s Manual

186

RAIO-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O 5
DDCS link.
Note: Set the module node number to 9. For directions, see the RAIO Module
User’s Manual [3AFE64484567 (English)].
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC Defines the signal type for input 1 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI5 in
the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to
the module.
Note: The communication must be activated by parameter 98.06.
UNIPOLAR AI5 Unipolar 1
BIPOLAR AI5 Bipolar 2
98.14 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC Defines the signal type for input 2 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI6 in
the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to
the module.
Note: The communication must be activated by parameter 98.06.
UNIPOLAR AI6 Unipolar 1
BIPOLAR AI6 Bipolar 2
98.16 SIN FILT SUPERV Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module and reserves
the module for the use of the sine-filter temperature measurement.
Parameter is visible if parameter 95.04 is set to SIN or EX&SIN. Parameter
value is automatically set to NO, when parameter 95.04 value is changed.
Note: This parameter is used only in special applications.
NDIO Module type: NDIO module. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link. 1
Note: Module node number must be set to 8. For directions see the NTAC-0x/
(English)].
NO Supervision disabled. 2
RDIO-SLOT1 Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1 of the drive. 3
RDIO-SLOT2 Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 2 of the drive. 4
RDIO-DDCS Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) 5
that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link.
Module User's Manual [3AFE64485733 (English)].
99 START-UP DATA Language selection. Definition of motor set-up data.
99.01 LANGUAGE Selects the display language.
ENGLISH British English 0
ENGLISH AM American English. If selected, the unit of power used is HP instead of kW. 1
DEUTSCH German 2
ITALIANO Italian 3
ESPANOL Spanish 4
PORTUGUES Portuguese 5
NEDERLANDS Dutch 6
FRANCAIS French 7
DANSK Danish 8
SUOMI Finnish 9
SVENSKA Swedish 10

187

CESKY Czech 11
POLSKI/LOC1 Polish 12
PO-RUS/LOC2 Russian 13
99.02 APPLICATION Selects the application macro. See chapter Application macros for more
MACRO information.
Note: When you change the default parameter values of a macro, the new
settings become valid immediately and stay valid even if the power of the drive
is switched off and on. However, backup of the default parameter settings
(factory settings) of each standard macro is still available. See parameter
99.03.
FACTORY Factory for basic applications 1
HAND/AUTO Two control devices are connected to the drive: 2
- device 1 communicates through the interface defined by external control
location EXT1.
- device 2 communicates through the interface defined by external control
location EXT2.
- EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time. Switching through a digital input.
PID-CTRL PID control. For application in which the drive controls a process value. E.g. 3
pressure control by the drive running the pressure boost pump. Measured
pressure and the pressure reference are connected to the drive.
See sections Process PID control on page 70 and Sleep function for the
process PID control on page 71.
T-CTRL Torque Control macro 4
SEQ CTRL Sequential Control macro. For applications that are frequently run through a 5
pre-defined speed pattern (constant speeds and acceleration and deceleration
ramps).
USER 1 LOAD User 1 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter 6
settings and the motor model are suitable for the application.
USER 1 SAVE Save User 1 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor 7
model.
Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See
parameter 99.03.
USER 2 LOAD User 2 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter 8
settings and the motor model are suitable for the application.
USER 2 SAVE Save User 2 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor 9
model.
Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See
parameter 99.03.
99.03 APPLIC RESTORE Restores the original settings of the active application macro (99.02).
- If a standard macro (Factory, ... , Sequential Control) is active, the parameter
values are restored to the default settings (factory settings). Exceptions:
parameter settings in parameter group 99 remain unchanged. The motor
model remains unchanged.
- If User Macro 1 or 2 is active, the parameter values are restored to the last
saved values. In addition, the last saved motor model are restored. Exceptions:
Settings of parameters 16.05 and 99.02 remain unchanged.
Note: The parameter settings and the motor model are restored according to
the same principles when a macro is changed to another.
NO No action 0

188

YES Restoring 65535
99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode.
DTC Direct Torque Control mode is suitable for most applications. 0
SCALAR Scalar control is suitable in special cases where the DTC cannot be applied. 65535
The scalar control mode is recommended:
- for multimotor drives with variable number of motors
- when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output
current of the drive (inverter)
- the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
Note: The outstanding motor control accuracy of the DTC cannot be achieved
in scalar control. The differences between the scalar and DTC control modes
are pointed out in this manual in relevant parameter lists. There are some
standard features that are disabled in the scalar control mode: Motor
Identification Run (group 99 START-UP DATA), Speed Limits (group 20
LIMITS), Torque Limit (group 20 LIMITS), DC Hold (group 21 START/STOP),
DC Magnetizing (group 21 START/STOP), Speed Controller Tuning (group 23
SPEED CTRL), Torque Control (group 24 TORQUE CTRL), Flux Optimization
(group 26 MOTOR CONTROL), Flux Braking (group 26 MOTOR CONTROL),
Underload Function (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS), Motor Phase Loss
Protection (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS), Motor Stall Protection (group 30
FAULT FUNCTIONS).
For more information, see section Scalar control on page 62.
99.05 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage. Must be equal to the value on the motor
VOLTAGE rating plate.
1/2 … 2 · UN Voltage. Allowed range is 1/2 … 2 · UN of the drive. 1=1V
Note: The stress on the motor insulations is always dependent on the drive
supply voltage. This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is
lower than the rating of the drive and the supply of the drive.
99.06 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value on the motor
CURRENT rating plate. If several motors are connected to the inverter, enter the total
current of the motors.
Note: Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor
does not exceed 90 percent of the nominal current of the inverter.
0 … 2 · I2hd Allowed range: approx. 1/6 … 2 · I2hd of ACS800 (parameter 99.04 = DTC). 1 = 0.1 A
Allowed range: approx. 0 … 2 · I2hd of ACS800 (parameter 99.04 = SCALAR).
99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ Defines the nominal motor frequency.
8 … 300 Hz Nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz typically) 800 …
30000
99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the value on the motor
rating plate. The motor synchronous speed or another approximate value must
not be given instead!
Note: If the value of parameter 99.08 is changed, the speed limits in parameter
group 20 LIMITS change automatically as well.
1 … 18000 rpm Nominal motor speed 1 … 18000
99.09 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power. Set exactly as on the motor rating plate. If
POWER several motors are connected to the inverter, enter the total power of the
motors.
0 … 9000 kW Nominal motor power 0 … 90000

189

99.10 MOTOR ID RUN Selects the type of the motor identification. During the identification, the drive
MODE will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID
Run Procedure is described in chapter Start-up and control through the I/O.
Note: The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) should be selected if:
- The operation point is near zero speed, and/or
- Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide
speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
Note: The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) cannot be performed if
See section Motor identification on page 53.
ID MAGN No ID Run. The motor model is calculated at first start by magnetising the 1
motor for 20 to 60 s at zero speed. This can be selected in most applications.
STANDARD Standard ID Run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The ID Run 2
takes about one minute.
Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven equipment.
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run.
During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 … 80% of the
nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
REDUCED Reduced ID Run. Should be selected instead of the Standard ID Run: 3
- if mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the motor cannot be de-
coupled from the driven equipment)
- if flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (i.e. in case of a
motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals).
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run.
During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 … 80% of the
nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
99.11 DEVICE NAME Defines the name for the drive or application. The name is visible on the
control panel display in the Drive Selection Mode. Note: The name can be
typed only by using a drive PC tool.

190

191
Fieldbus control
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over
a communication network.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system – usually a fieldbus
controller – via an adapter module. The drive can be set to receive all of its control
information through the external control interface, or the control can be distributed
between the external control interface and other available sources, for example
digital and analogue inputs. The following diagram shows the control interfaces and
I/O connections of the drive.
Fieldbus
controller
Fieldbus
(* (*
ACS800 Other
devices
Advant
Fieldbus adapter Controller controller
Rxxx (e.g. AC 800M,
Modbus AC 80)
Slot 1
RMIO board
(*
RMBA-01 adapter
std. Modbus link
Slot 1 or 2 I/O adapter
RTAC/RDIO/RAIO
CH1
RDCO comm. AIMA-01 I/O
module (DDCS) adapter module
CH0 Fieldbus adapter

(DDCS) Nxxx
or
Data Flow
Control Word (CW)
References
Process I/O (cyclic)
Status Word (SW)
Actual values
Parameter R/W requests/responses Service messages (acyclic)
(*
Either an Rxxx or Nxxx, and an RMBA-01 adapter can be connected to the drive simultaneously.
Fieldbus control
192
Redundant fieldbus control

It is possible to connect two fieldbuses to the drive with the following adapter
configuration:
• Type Rxxx fieldbus adapter module (not RMBA-01) is installed in drive slot 1.
• RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter module is installed in drive slot 2.
E.g. PROFIBUS Modbus
ACS800
RMIO board
RPBA-01 adapter
PROFIBUS-DP link
Slot 1
RMBA-01 adapter
std. Modbus link
Slot 2
The control (i.e. the Main Reference data set, see section The fieldbus control
interface on page 202) is activated by setting parameter 98.02 to FIELDBUS or
STD MODBUS.
In case there is a communication problem with one fieldbus, the control can be
switched to the other fieldbus. Switching between the buses can be controlled
e.g. with adaptive programming. Parameters and signals can be read by both
fieldbuses, but simultaneous cyclical writing to the same parameter is forbidden.
Fieldbus control
193
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module

Fieldbus adapters for several communication protocols are available (e.g.
PROFIBUS® and Modbus®). Rxxx type fieldbus adapter modules are mounted in
expansion slot 1 of the drive. Nxxx type fieldbus adapter modules are connected to
channel CH0 of the RDCO module.
Note: For instructions on setting up an RMBA-01 module, see section Setting up
communication through the Standard Modbus Link on page 195.
Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the adapter module must be
mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the
hardware manual of the drive, and the module manual.
The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up
communication through a fieldbus adapter.
Parameter Alternative Setting for Function/Information
settings fieldbus control
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION
98.02 NO FIELDBUS Initialises communication between drive and

FIELDBUS fieldbus adapter module. Activates module set-up
ADVANT parameters (Group 51).
STD MODBUS
CUSTOMISED
98.07 ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by the
GENERIC GENERIC or drive. See section Communication profiles on page
CSA 2.8/3.0 CSA 2.8/3.0 210.
ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION
51.01 MODULE – – Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module.

TYPE
51.02 (FIELDBUS These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the module manual.
PARAMETER 2) Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily visible.
•••
51.26 (FIELDBUS
PARAMETER 26)
51.27 FBA PAR (0) DONE – Validates any changed adapter module
REFRESH* (1) REFRESH configuration parameter settings. After refreshing,
the value reverts automatically to DONE.
51.28 FILE CPI xyz (binary coded – Displays the required CPI firmware revision of the
FW REV* decimal fieldbus adapter as defined in the configuration file
stored in the memory of the drive. The CPI firmware
version of the fieldbus adapter (refer to par. 51.32)
must contain the same or a later CPI version to be
compatible. x = major revision number; y = minor
revision number; z = correction number. Example:
107 = revision 1.07.
Fieldbus control
194
Parameter Alternative Setting for Function/Information

settings fieldbus control
51.29 FILE xyz (binary coded – Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration
CONFIG ID* decimal) file identification stored in the memory of the drive.
This information is drive application program-
dependent.
51.30 FILE xyz (binary coded – Displays the fieldbus adapter module configuration
CONFIG REV* decimal) file revision stored in the memory of the drive.
x = major revision number; y = minor revision
number; z = correction number. Example: 1 =
revision 0.01.
51.31 FBA (0) IDLE – Displays the status of the adapter module.
STATUS* (1) EXEC. INIT IDLE = Adapter not configured.
(2) TIME OUT
EXEC. INIT = Adapter initialising.
(3) CONFIG
ERROR TIME OUT = A timeout has occurred in the
(4) OFF-LINE communication between the adapter and the drive.
(5) ON-LINE CONFIG ERROR = Adapter configuration error.
(6) RESET The major or minor revision code of the CPI
program revision in the drive is not the revision
required by the module (refer to par. 51.32) or
configuration file upload has failed more than five
times.
OFF-LINE = Adapter is off-line.
ON-LINE = Adapter is on-line.
RESET = Adapter performing a hardware reset.
51.32 FBA CPI FW – – Displays the CPI program revision of the module
REV* inserted in slot 1. x = major revision number;
y = minor revision number; z = correction number.
Example: 107 = revision 1.07.
51.33 FBA APPL – – Displays the application program revision of the

FW REV* module inserted in slot 1. x = major revision
number; y = minor revision number; z = correction
number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.
*Parameters 51.27 to 51.33 are only visible when type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is installed.
After the module configuration parameters in group 51 have been set, the drive
control parameters (section Drive control parameters on page 199) must be checked
and adjusted where necessary.
The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when
parameter 51.27 is activated.
Fieldbus control
195
Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link

An RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter installed in slot 1 or 2 of the drive forms an interface
called the Standard Modbus Link. The Standard Modbus Link can be used for
external control of the drive by a Modbus controller (RTU protocol only).
Before configuring the drive for Modbus control, the adapter module must be
mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the
hardware manual of the drive, and the module manual.
The following table lists the parameters, which need to be defined when setting up
communication through the standard Modbus link.
Parameter Alternative settings Setting for control Function/Information
through Standard
Modbus Link
98.02 NO STD MODBUS Initialises communication between drive

FIELDBUS (Standard Modbus Link) and Modbus-protocol
ADVANT controller. Activates communication parameters
STD MODBUS in group 52.
CUSTOMISED
98.07 ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by the
GENERIC drive. See section Communication profiles on
CSA 2.8/3.0 page 210.
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
52.01 1 to 247 – Specifies the station number of the drive on the

Standard Modbus Link.
52.02 600 – Defines the communication speed for the

1200 Standard Modbus Link.
2400
4800
9600
19200
52.03 ODD – Selects the parity setting for the Standard

EVEN Modbus Link.
NONE1STOPBIT
NONE2STOPBIT
After the communication parameters in group 52 have been set, the drive control
parameters (section Drive control parameters on page 199) must be checked and
adjusted where necessary.
Fieldbus control
196
Modbus addressing
In the Modbus controller memory, the Control Word, the Status Word, the
references, and the actual values are mapped as follows:
Data from fieldbus controller to drive Data from drive to fieldbus controller
Address Contents Address Contents
40001 Control Word 40004 Status Word
40002 Reference 1 40005 Actual 1
More information on Modbus communication is available from the Modicon

website http://www.modicon.com.
Fieldbus control
197
Setting up communication through Advant controller

The Advant controller is connected via DDCS link to channel CH0 of the RDCO
module.
• AC 800M Advant Controller
DriveBus connection: CI858 DriveBus Communication Interface required. See CI858
DriveBus Communication Interface User’s Manual, [3AFE 68237432 (English)].
Optical ModuleBus connection: TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical
ModuleBus Port Interface required. See section Optical ModuleBus connection
below.
For more information, see AC 800M Controller Hardware Manual [3BSE027941
(English)], AC 800M/C Communication, Protocols and Design Manual [3BSE028811
(English),] ABB Industrial Systems, Västerås, Sweden.
• AC 80 Advant Controller
Optical ModuleBus connection: TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical
ModuleBus Port Interface required. See section Optical ModuleBus connection
below.
• CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI)
Optical ModuleBus connection
TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required.
The TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface is equipped with 5 MBd optical
components and the TB810 is equipped with 10 MBd components. All optical
components on a fibre optic link must be of the same type since 5 MBd components
do not match with 10 MBd components. The choice between TB810 and TB811
depends on the equipment it is connected to. With RDCO Communication Option
Module, the Interface is selected as follows:
Optional ModuleBus Port DDCS Communication Option Module
Interface
RDCO-01 RDCO-02 RDCO-03
TB811 × ×
TB810 ×
If branching unit NDBU-85/95 is used with CI810A, TB810 Optical ModuleBus Port
Interface must be used.
Fieldbus control
198
The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up
communication between the drive and Advant controller.
Parameter Alternative settings Setting for control through Function/Information
CH0
98.02 NO ADVANT Initialises communication between drive

FIELDBUS (fibre optic channel CH0) and Advant
ADVANT controller. The transmission speed is
STD MODBUS 4 Mbit/s.
CUSTOMISED
98.07 ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by
GENERIC the drive. See section Communication
CSA 2.8/3.0 profiles on page 210.
70.01 0-254 AC 800M ModuleBus 1...125 Defines the node address for DDCS
AC 80 ModuleBus 17-125 channel CH0.
FCI (CI810A) 17-125
70.04 RING Selects the topology of the channel CH0

STAR link.
After the communication initialisation parameters have been set, the drive control
parameters (section Drive control parameters on page 199) must be checked and
adjusted where necessary.
In an Optical ModuleBus connection, channel 0 address (parameter 70.01) is
calculated from the value of the POSITION terminal in the appropriate database
element (for the AC 80, DRISTD) as follows:
1. Multiply the hundreds of the value of POSITION by 16.
2. Add the tens and ones of the value of POSITION to the result.
For example, if the POSITION terminal of the DRISTD database element has the
value of 110 (the tenth drive on the Optical ModuleBus ring), parameter 70.01 must
be set to 16 × 1 + 10 = 26.
Fieldbus control
199
Drive control parameters

After the fieldbus communication has been set up, the drive control parameters
listed in the table below must be checked and adjusted where necessary.
The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus
interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The
Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
The fieldbus signal routes and message composition are explained later in section
The fieldbus control interface on page 202.
Parameter Setting for Function/Information
fieldbus control
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION
10.01 COMM.CW Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except 03.01 Main Control Word bit 11)
when EXT1 is selected as the active control location. See also par. 10.07.
10.02 COMM.CW Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except 03.01 Main Control Word bit 11)
when EXT2 is selected as the active control location.
10.03 FORWARD Enables rotation direction control as defined by parameters 10.01 and
REVERSE or 10.02. The direction control is explained in section Reference handling on
REQUEST page 204.
10.07 0 or 1 Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par. 10.01 so that the fieldbus
Control Word (except 03.01 Main Control Word bit 11) is enabled when
EXT1 is selected as the active control location.
Note 1: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected
(see par. 98.07).
Note 2: Setting not saved into permanent memory.
10.08 0 or 1 Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par. 11.03 so that Fieldbus
reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is selected as the active control
location.
Note 1: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected
(see par. 98.07).
Note 2: Setting not saved into permanent memory.
11.02 COMM.CW Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection by fieldbus Control Word bit 11 EXT CTRL
LOC.
11.03 COMM.REF1 Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is selected as the active
FAST COMM control location. See section References on page 203 for information on
COM.REF1+AI1 the alternative settings.
COM.REF1+AI5
COM.REF1*AI1 or
COM.REF1*AI5
11.06 COMM.REF2 Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is selected as the active
FAST COMM control location. See section References on page 203 for information on
COM.REF2+AI1 the alternative settings.
COM.REF2+AI5
COM.REF2*AI1 or
COM.REF2*AI5
Fieldbus control
200

fieldbus control
OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION
14.01 COM.REF3 Enables relay output RO1 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 13.
15.01 COMM.REF4 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF4 to analogue output AO1.
Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA
15.06 COMM.REF5 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF5 to analogue output AO2.
Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS
16.01 COMM.CW Enables the control of the Run Enable signal through fieldbus 03.01 Main
Control Word bit 3.
Note: Must be set to YES when the Generic Drive communication profile is
selected (see par. 98.07).
16.04 COMM.CW Enables fault reset through fieldbus 03.01 Main Control Word bit 7.
Note: Reset through fieldbus Control Word (03.01 bit 7) is enabled
automatically and it is independent of parameter 16.04 setting if parameter
10.01 or 10.02 is set to COMM.CW.
16.07 DONE; SAVE Saves parameter value changes (including those made through fieldbus
control) to permanent memory.
COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.18 FAULT Determines drive action in case fieldbus communication is lost.

NO CONST SP15 Note: The communication loss detection is based on monitoring of
LAST SPEED received Main and Auxiliary data sets (whose sources are selected with
parameters 90.04 and 90.05 respectively).
30.19 0.1 … 60.0 s Defines the time between Main Reference data set loss detection and the
action selected with parameter 30.18.
30.20 ZERO Determines the state in which relay outputs RO1 to RO3 and analogue
LAST VALUE outputs AO1 and AO2 are left upon loss of the Auxiliary Reference data set.
30.21 0.0 … 60.0 s Defines the time between Auxiliary Reference data set loss detection and
the action selected with parameter 30.18.
Note: This supervision function is disabled if this parameter, or parameters
90.01, 90.02 and 90.03 are set to 0.
FIELDBUS REFERENCE TARGET SELECTION
90.01 0 … 8999 Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference
REF3 is written.
Format: xxyy, where xx = parameter group (10 to 89), yy = parameter
Index. E.g. 3001 = parameter 30.01.
Fieldbus control
201

fieldbus control
REF4 is written.
Format: see parameter 90.01.
REF5 is written.
90.04 1 (Fieldbus Control) or If 98.02 is set to CUSTOMISED, this parameter selects the source from
81 (Standard Modbus which the drive reads the Main Reference data set (comprising the fieldbus
Control) Control Word, fieldbus reference REF1, and fieldbus reference REF2).
90.05 3 (Fieldbus Control) or If 98.02 is set to CUSTOMISED, this parameter selects the source from
83 (Standard Modbus which the drive reads the Auxiliary Reference data set (comprising fieldbus
Control) references REF3, REF4 and REF5).
ACTUAL SIGNAL SELECTION FOR FIELDBUS
92.01 302 (Fixed) The Status Word is transmitted to as the first word of the Main Actual Signal
data set.
92.02 0 … 9999 Selects the Actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the
second word (ACT1) of the Main Actual Signal data set.
Format: (x)xyy, where (x)x = actual signal group or parameter group, yy =
actual signal or parameter index. E.g. 103 = actual signal 1.03
FREQUENCY; 2202 = parameter 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1.
Note: With the Generic Drive communication profile active (par. 98.07 =
GENERIC), this parameter is fixed to 102 (actual signal 1.02 SPEED – in
DTC motor control mode) or 103 (1.03 FREQUENCY – in Scalar mode).
92.03 0 … 9999 Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the third
word (ACT2) of the Main Actual Signal data set.
92.04 0 … 9999 Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the first
word (ACT3) of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set.
92.05 0 … 9999 Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the
second word (ACT4) of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set.
92.06 0 … 9999 Selects the actual signal or parameter value to be transmitted as the third
word (ACT5) of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set.
92.07 -255.255.31…+255.255.31 Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 10 is read
/ C.-32768 … C.32767 from.
/ C.-32768 … C.32767 from.
/ C.-32768 … C.32767 from.
Fieldbus control
202
The fieldbus control interface

The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive employs data sets.
One data set (abbreviated DS) consists of three 16-bit words called data words
(DW). The Standard Control Program supports the use of four data sets, two in each
direction.
The two data sets for controlling the drive are referred to as the Main Reference data
set and the Auxiliary Reference data set. The sources from which the drive reads the
Main and Auxiliary Reference data sets are defined by parameters 90.04 and 90.05
respectively. The contents of the Main Reference data set are fixed. The contents of
the Auxiliary Reference data set can be selected using parameters 90.01, 90.02 and
90.03.
The two data sets containing actual information on the drive are referred to as the
Main Actual Signal data set and the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set. The contents of
both data sets are partly selectable with the parameters at group 92.
Data from fieldbus controller to drive Data from drive to fieldbus controller
Word Contents Selector Word Contents Selector
*Index Main Reference data set DS1 *Index Main Actual Signal data set DS2
1 1st word Control Word (Fixed) 4 1st word Status Word (Fixed)
2 2nd word Reference 1 (Fixed) 5 2nd word Actual 1 **Par. 92.02
3 3rd word Reference 2 (Fixed) 6 3rd word Actual 2 Par. 92.03
*Index Auxiliary Reference data set DS3 *Index Aux. Actual Signal data set DS4
7 1st word Reference 3 Par. 90.01 10 1st word Actual 3 Par. 92.04
8 2nd word Reference 4 Par. 90.02 11 2nd word Actual 4 Par. 92.05
9 3rd word Reference 5 Par. 90.03 12 3rd word Actual 5 Par. 92.06
*The index number is required when data word allocation to process data is defined
via the fieldbus parameters at group 51. This function is dependent on the type of the
fieldbus adapter.
**With the Generic Drive communication profile active, Actual 1 is fixed to actual
signal 01.02 SPEED (in DTC motor control mode) or 01.03 FREQUENCY (in Scalar
mode).
The update time for the Main Reference and Main Actual Signal data sets is 6
milliseconds; for the Auxiliary Reference and Auxiliary Actual Signal data sets, it is
100 milliseconds.
Fieldbus control
203
The Control Word and the Status Word

The Control Word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. It is effective when the active control location (EXT1 or EXT2, see
parameters 10.01 and 10.02) is set to COMM.CW, or if par. 10.07 is set to 1 (with
Generic Drive communication profile only).
The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive switches
between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control Word.
The Status Word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to
the fieldbus controller.
See section Communication profiles on page 210 for information on the composition
of the Control Word and the Status Word.
References
References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (indicating
reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from
the corresponding positive reference value.
Fieldbus reference selection and correction
Fieldbus reference (called COM.REF in signal selection contexts) is selected by
setting a Reference selection parameter – 11.03 or 11.06 – to COMM.REFx, FAST
COMM, COM.REFx+AI1, COM.REFx+AI5, COM.REFx*AI1 or COM.REFx*AI5.
(With Generic Drive communication profile, fieldbus reference is also selected when
par. 10.08 is set to 1.) The latter four selections enable correction of the fieldbus
reference using analogue inputs as shown below. (An optional RAIO-01 Analogue
I/O Extension Module is required for use of Analogue input AI5).
COMM.REF1 (in 11.03) or COMM.REF2 (in 11.06)
The fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction.
FAST COMM
The fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. The reference is
read every 2 milliseconds if either of the following conditions is met:
• Control location is EXT1, par. 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is DTC, and par. 40.14
TRIM MODE is OFF
• Control location is EXT2, par. 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is DTC, par. 40.14
TRIM MODE is OFF, and a torque reference is used.
In any other event, the fieldbus reference is read every 6 milliseconds.
Note: The FAST COMM selection disables the critical speed function.
Fieldbus control
204
COM.REF1+AI1; COM.REF1+AI5; COM.REF1*AI1; COM.REF1*AI5 (in 11.03)

COM.REF2+AI1; COM.REF2+AI5; COM.REF2*AI1; COM.REF2*AI5 (in 11.06)
These selections enable the correction of the fieldbus reference as follows:
Parameter Setting Effect of AI1/AI5 Input Voltage on Fieldbus Reference
COM.REFx+AI1
Fieldbus Reference
COM.REFx+AI5 Correction Coefficient
(100 + 0.5 × [par. 13.03])%
100%
(100 – 0.5 × [par. 13.03])%

0 5V 10 V AI1/AI5 Input
Voltage
COM.REFx*AI1
COM.REFx*AI5 Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
100%
50%
0%
0 5V 10 V AI1/AI5 Input
Voltage
Reference handling
The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location (EXT1 and
EXT2) using the parameters in group 10. Fieldbus references are bipolar, i.e. they
can be negative or positive. The following diagrams illustrate how group 10
parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the reference
REF1/REF2.
Notes:
• With the ABB Drives communication profile, 100% reference is defined by
parameters 11.05 (REF1) and 11.08 (REF2).
• With the Generic Drive communication profile, 100% reference is defined by
parameter 99.08 in DTC motor control mode (REF1), or 99.07 in scalar control
mode (REF1), and by parameter 11.08 (REF2).
• External reference scaling parameters 11.04 and 11.07 are also in effect.
For information on the scaling of the fieldbus reference, see section Fieldbus
reference scaling on page 214 (for ABB Drives profile) or Fieldbus reference scaling
on page 217 (for Generic Drive profile).
Fieldbus control
205
*Direction determined by the sign of Direction determined by digital command,

COM.REF e.g. digital input, control panel
par. 10.03 Resultant Resultant

DIRECTION = REF1/2 REF1/2
FORWARD
Max.Ref. Max.Ref.
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Ref. 1/2 Ref. 1/2
-100% 100% -100% 100%
-163% 163% -163% 163%
–[Max.Ref.] –[Max.Ref.]

DIRECTION = REF1/2 REF1/2
REVERSE
Max.Ref. Max.Ref.
-163% 163% -163% 163%

Fieldbus -100% 100% Fieldbus -100% 100%
Ref. 1/2 Ref. 1/2

DIRECTION = REF1/2 REF1/2 Direction Command:
REQUEST FORWARD
Max.Ref. Max.Ref.
-163%
Fieldbus -100% Fieldbus
Ref. 1/2 Ref. 1/2
100% -100% 100%
163% -163% 163%
Direction Command:
REVERSE
*Direction is determined by the sign of COM.REF when

par. 10.01/10.02 EXTx STRT/STP/DIR is set to COMM.CW
OR
par. 11.03/11.06 EXT REFx SELECT is set to FAST COMM.
Actual Values
Actual Values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations
of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected with the parameters in group
92. The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depends on the
selected function; please refer to chapter Actual signals and parameters.
Fieldbus control
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Rxxx
206
fieldbus adapter is used DI1 11.02
•
•
COMM.CW •
10.01 03.01
DI1 MAIN CW
Fieldbus control
30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC
DATA •
Fieldbus Words 1 … n ** 30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT •
SET COMM.CW •
Adapter TABLE
Slot1 10.02
Word 1 NO MAIN
1 AI1
(Control word) DS 1 FIELD- REFERENCE
2 •
Word 2 BUS DATA SET • 01.11
3 COMM.REF •
(Speed/freq ref.*) 4 ADVANT EXT REF1
DS CW
Word 3 5 DS 2 STD 11.03
PAR 6 MODBUS REF1
3 AI1
… 7 CUSTOM- REF2 •
8 DS 3 ISED • 01.12
DS COMM.REF •
Word n 9 EXT REF2
PAR 10 98.02 11.06
n
11 DS 4
12
13
14 DS 5 PARAMETER
15 Bits
13…15 90.01 TABLE
••• Relay Outputs

(see 14.01…14.03) 10.01
NO
Fieldbus specific selectors 97
FIELD-
in Group 51** 98 DS 33 BUS
Addresses for words 3 … n in 99 AUXILIARY 10.02
ADVANT
format xxyy REFERENCE
••• STD DATA SET
xx Address MODBUS
00 yy = word no. in data set 90.02 •••
CUSTOM- REF3
table ISED Analogue Output
01 … xx = par. group REF4 AO1 (see 15.01) 89.99
99 yy = par. index 98.02 REF5
in parameter table
•••
90.03 •••
30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO Analogue Output
30.21 AUX REF DS T-OUT AO2 (see 15.06)
•••
* Depends on the selected motor control mode (parameter 99.04).

** See the fieldbus adapter user’s manual for more information.
Block diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Rxxx
fieldbus adapter is used
DATA SET
TABLE
ACTUAL SIGNAL/ 1 Words 1 … n *** Fieldbus

PARAMETER 92.01 * DS 1 2 Adapter
TABLE 3 (Slot 1)
4 Word 1
MAIN DS 2 5 (STATUS WORD)
1.01 ACTUAL SIGNAL 6 Word 2
DATA SET 7 (ACT1**)
DS
92.02 ** STATUS WORD* DS 3 8 Word 3
1.02 9 PAR
ACT1** 3
10 …
ACT2 DS 4 11
••• DS
12 Word n
PAR n
92.03 •••
3.99
97
DS 33 98
••• 99
•••
10.01 92.04 Fieldbus specific selectors
in Group 51 ***
••• AUXILIARY Addresses for words 3 … n in
ACTUAL SIGNAL format xxyy
DATA SET xx Address
••• 92.05 00 yy = word no. in data set
ACT3
table
ACT4
01 … xx = par. group
ACT5
••• 99 yy = par. index
in parameter table
99.99 92.06
* Fixed to 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD (bits 10, 13 and 14 are programmable).
** Fixed to 01.02 SPEED (DTC control) or 01.03 FREQUENCY (Scalar control) when Generic communication profile is used.
*** See the fieldbus adapter user’s manual for more information.
Fieldbus control
207
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Nxxx
208
DI1 11.02
•
DATA 30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC •
COMM.CW •
Fieldbus control
SET 30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT
TABLE 10.01 03.01
NO DI1 MAIN CW
3 words FIELD- MAIN •
DS 1 •
Fieldbus (6 bytes) BUS REFERENCE COMM.CW •
Adapter ADVANT DATA SET
10.02
(CH0) DS 2 STD
MODBUS
CW AI1
1 REF1 •
• CUSTOM- • 01.11
3 words DS 3 • ISED COMM.REF •
• REF2 EXT REF1
(6 bytes)
255 11.03
90.04 98.02
DS 4 AI1
•
• 01.12
COMM.REF •
Modbus EXT REF2
•••
Controller 11.06
40001 3 words
40002 DS 81
(6 bytes)
40003 Standard NO
Modbus FIELD-
DS 82 Bits PARAMETER
Link BUS
13…15 90.01 TABLE
(RMBA) ADVANT
40007 (Slot 1/2) AUXILIARY Relay Outputs
3 words STD
40008 DS 83 REFERENCE (see 14.01…14.03) 10.01
(6 bytes) MODBUS
40009 DATA SET
1 CUSTOM-
•
DS 84 • ISED REF3
• 10.02
255
98.02 REF4
90.05
••• REF5
90.02 •••
Analogue Output
AO1 (see 15.01) 89.99
30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO
30.21 AUX REF DS T-OUT
•••
90.03
Analogue Output
AO2 (see 15.06)
Block Diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Nxxx
DATA SET
TABLE
ACTUAL SIGNAL/
PARAMETER 92.01* DS 1
TABLE
MAIN 3 words
DS 2
1.01 (6 bytes) Fieldbus
ACTUAL SIGNAL
DATA SET Adapter
92.02 STATUS WORD* DS 3 (CH0)
1.02
ACT1**
ACT2 3 words
DS 4
••• (6 bytes)
92.03 •••
3.99
Modbus
DS 81 Controller
•••
40004
3 words
DS 82 40005
10.01 (6 bytes) Standard
92.04 40006
Modbus
DS 83 Link
••• AUXILIARY
ACTUAL SIGNAL 40010
DATA SET 3 words
DS 84 40011
99.99 (6 bytes)
92.05 40012
ACT3
ACT4
•••
ACT5
92.06
* Fixed to 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD (bits 10, 13 and 14 are programmable).
** Fixed to 01.02 SPEED (DTC motor control) or 0103 FREQUENCY (Scalar control) when Generic communication profile is used.
Fieldbus control
209
210
Communication profiles
The ACS800 supports three communication profiles:
• ABB Drives communication profile
• Generic Drive communication profile.
• CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile.
The ABB Drives communication profile should be selected with type Nxxx fieldbus
adapter modules, and when the manufacturer-specific mode is selected (via the
PLC) with type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules.
The Generic Drive profile is supported by type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules only.
The CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile can be selected for backward compatibility
with Application Program versions 2.8 and 3.0. This eliminates the need for
reprogramming the PLC when drives with the above-mentioned program versions
are replaced.
ABB Drives communication profile

The ABB Drives communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
ABB DRIVES. The Control Word, Status Word, and reference scaling for the profile
are described below.
The ABB Drives communication profile can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2.
The Control Word commands are in effect when par. 10.01 or 10.02 (whichever
control location is active) is set to COMM.CW.
Fieldbus control
211
03.01 MAIN CONTROL WORD

The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 1.
Bit Name Value Enter STATE/Description
0 OFF1 CONTROL 1 Enter READY TO OPERATE.
0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (22.03/22.05). Enter OFF1 ACTIVE;
proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
0 Emergency OFF, coast to stop.
Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
2 OFF3 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
0 Emergency stop, stop within time defined by par. 22.07. Enter OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed
to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Warning: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
3 INHIBIT_ 1 Enter OPERATION ENABLED. (Note: The Run Enable signal must be active; see
OPERATION parameter 16.01. If par. 16.01 is set to COMM.CW, this bit also activates the Run
Enable signal.)
0 Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED.
4 RAMP_OUT_ 1 Normal operation.
ZERO Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED.
0 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero.
Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED.
0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 Normal operation. Enter OPERATING.
ZERO 0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
7 RESET 0⇒1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Enter SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0 Continue normal operation.
8 INCHING_1 1 Not in use.
1⇒0 Not in use.
9 INCHING_2 1 Not in use.
1⇒0 Not in use.
10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
0 Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control Word and Reference.
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control enabled.
Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if par. 11.02 is set to COMM.CW.
0 Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if par. 11.02 is set to COMM.CW.
12 … Reserved
15
Fieldbus control
212
03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD

The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 1.
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON.
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE.
0 OFF1 ACTIVE.
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED.
0 OPERATION INHIBITED.
3 TRIPPED 1 FAULT.
0 No fault.
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive.
0 OFF2 ACTIVE.
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive.
0 OFF3 ACTIVE.
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0
7 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm.
0 No Warning/Alarm.
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is within tolerance limits
i.e in speed control the speed error is less than or equal to 10% of the nominal
motor speed).
0 Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside tolerance limits).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).
0 Drive control location: LOCAL.
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Bit is read from the address defined by parameter 92.07 MSW B10 PTR.
The default value is signal 03.14 bit 9 ABOVE_LIMIT: Actual frequency or
speed value equals or exceeds the supervision limit (par. 32.02).
0 Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External Control Location EXT2 selected.
0 External Control Location EXT1 selected.
12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received.
0 No External Run Enable received.
13 Bit is read from the address defined by parameter 92.08 MSW B13 PTR.
By default no address has been selected.
14 Bit is read from the address defined by parameter 92.09 MSW B14 PTR.
By default no address has been selected.
15 1 Communication error detected by fieldbus adapter module (on fibre optic
channel CH0).
0 Fieldbus adapter (CH0) communication OK.
Fieldbus control
213
SWITCH-ON
MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)
ABB Drives
Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
Communication
NOT READY Profile
TO SWITCH ON (SW Bit0=0)
A B C D
CW = Control Word
SW = Status Word
n = Speed
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
I = Input Current
(CW Bit3=0)
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
READY TO f = Frequency
OPERATION SWITCH ON (SW Bit0=1)
INHIBITED (SW Bit2=0)
from any state
operation
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
inhibited
Fault
READY TO
FAULT
OPERATE (SW Bit1=1) (SW Bit3=1)
from any state

(CW Bit7=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0) and SW Bit12=1)
OFF1 from any state from any state

ACTIVE (SW Bit1=0) Emergency Stop Emergency OFF
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
(CW Bit3=1
n(f)=0 / I=0 and
OFF3 OFF2
SW Bit12=1)
B C D ACTIVE (SW Bit5=0) ACTIVE (SW Bit4=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
(CW Bit4=0)
OPERATION
C D
ENABLED (SW Bit2=1)
A
(CW Bit5=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)
D RFG: OUTPUT
ENABLED
B
(CW Bit6=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED
C
(CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
OPERATING
(SW Bit8=1)
D
Figure 1 State Machine for the ABB Drives communication profile.
Fieldbus control
214
Fieldbus reference scaling

With the ABB Drives communication profile active, fieldbus references REF1 and
REF2 are scaled as shown in the table below.
Note: Any correction of the reference is applied before scaling. See section
References on page 203.
Ref. Application Range Reference type Scaling Notes
No. Macro used
(par. 99.02)
REF1 (any) -32768 ... Speed or Frequency -20000 = -[par. 11.05] Final reference limited by
32767 (not with -1 = -[par. 11.04] 20.01/20.02 [speed] or
FAST COMM) 20.07/20.08 [frequency].
0 = [par. 11.04]
20000 = [par. 11.05]
Speed or Frequency -20000 = -[par. 11.05] Final reference limited by

with FAST COMM 0=0 20.01/20.02 [speed] or
20.07/20.08 [frequency].
20000 = [par. 11.05]
REF2 FACTORY, -32768 ... Speed or Freq. (not -20000 = -[par. 11.08] Final reference limited by
HAND/AUTO, 32767 with FAST COMM) -1 = -[par. 11.07] 20.01/20.02 [speed] or
or SEQ CTRL 0 = [par. 11.07] 20.07/20.08 [frequency].
20000 = [par. 11.08]
Speed or Freq. with -20000 = -[par. 11.08] Final reference limited by

FAST COMM 0=0 20.01/20.02 [speed] or
20000 = [par. 11.08] 20.07/20.08 [frequency].
T CTRL or -32768 ... Torque (not with -10000 = -[par. 11.08] Final reference limited by
M/F (optional) 32767 FAST COMM) -1 = -[par. 11.07] par. 20.04.
0 = [par. 11.07]
10000 = [par. 11.08]
Torque with -10000 = -[par. 11.08] Final reference limited by

FAST COMM 0=0 par. 20.04.
10000 = [par. 11.08]
PID CTRL -32768 ... PID Reference -10000 = -[par. 11.08]

32767 (not with -1 = -[par. 11.07]
FAST COMM) 0 = [par. 11.07]
10000 = [par. 11.08]
PID Reference with -10000 = -[par. 11.08]

FAST COMM 0=0
10000 = [par. 11.08]
Fieldbus control
215
Generic Drive communication profile

The Generic Drive communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
GENERIC. The Generic Drive profile realises the device profile for drives – speed
control only – as defined by specific fieldbus standards such as PROFIDRIVE for
PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet™, Drives and Motion Control for
CANopen®, etc. Each device profile specifies its Control and Status Words,
Reference and Actual value scaling. The profiles also define Mandatory services
which are transferred to the application interface of the drive in a standardised way.
The Generic Drive communication profile can be used through both EXT1 and
EXT2*. The proper functioning of the Generic Drive profile requires that Control
Word commands are enabled by setting parameter 10.01 or 10.02 (whichever
control location is active) to COMM.CW (or par. 10.07 to 1) and by setting parameter
16.01 to YES.
*For vendor specific support of EXT2 reference, see appropriate fieldbus manual.
Note: The Generic Drive profile is only available with type Rxxx fieldbus adapter
modules.
Fieldbus control
216
Drive commands supported by the Generic Drive communication profile

Name Description
STOP The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed according to the active deceleration ramp
(parameter 22.03 or 22.05).
START The drive accelerates to the set reference value according to the active acceleration ramp (par.
22.02 or 22.04). The direction of rotation is determined by the sign of the reference value and the
setting of par. 10.03.
COAST STOP The drive coasts to stop, i.e. the drive stops modulating. However, this command can be
overridden by the Brake Control function, which forces the drive to decelerate to zero speed by the
active deceleration ramp. When the Brake Control function is active, Coast stop and Emergency
coast stop (OFF2) commands given after the Emergency ramp stop (OFF3) coast the drive to
a stop.
QUICK STOP The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed within the emergency stop deceleration time
defined by par. 22.07.
CURRENT LIMIT The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed according to the set current limit (par. 20.03) or
STOP (CLS) torque limit (20.04), whichever is first reached. The same procedure is valid in case of a Voltage
Limit Stop (VLS).
INCHING1 With this command active, the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 12 (defined by par.
12.13). After the command is removed, the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed.
Note: The speed reference ramps are not effective. The speed change rate is only limited by the
current (or torque) limit of the drive.
Note: Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2.
Note: Not effective in Scalar control mode.
INCHING2 With this command active, the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 13 (defined by par.
12.14). After the command is removed, the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed.
Note: The speed reference ramps are not effective. The speed change rate is only limited by the
current (or torque) limit of the drive.
Note: Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2.
Note: Not effective in Scalar control mode.
RAMP OUT ZERO When active, forces the output of the reference function generator to zero.
RAMP HOLD When active, freezes the reference function generator output.
FORCED TRIP Trips the drive. The drive will indicate fault FORCED TRIP.
RESET Resets an active fault.
Fieldbus control
217
Fieldbus reference scaling

With the Generic Drive communication profile active, the speed reference value
received from the fieldbus and the actual speed value received from the drive are
scaled as shown in the table below.
Note: Any correction of the reference (see section References on page 203) is
applied before scaling.
Ref. Application Range Reference Speed reference Actual speed Notes
No. Macro used type scaling scaling*
(par. 99.02)
REF1 (any) -32768... Speed or 0=0 0=0

32767 Frequency 20000 = 20000 = [par.
[par. 99.08 (DTC) / 99.08 (DTC) /
99.07 (scalar)]** 99.07 (scalar)]**
REF2 FACTORY, -32768... Speed or Freq. -20000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0 Final reference
HAND/AUT 32767 (not with -1 = -[par. 11.07] 20000 = [par. limited by
or SEQ FAST COMM) 0 = [par. 11.07] 99.08 (DTC) / 20.01/20.02
CTRL 20000 = [par. 11.08] 99.07 (scalar)]** [speed] or
20.07/20.08
[frequency]
Speed or Freq. -20000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0 Final reference

with 0=0 20000 = [par. limited by
FAST COMM 20000 = [par. 11.08] 99.08 (DTC) / 20.01/20.02
99.07 (scalar)]** [speed] or
20.07/20.08
[frequency]
T CTRL or -32768... Torque -10000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0 Final reference

M/F 32767 (not with -1 = -[par. 11.07] 20000 = [par. limited by par.
(optional) FAST COMM) 0 = [par. 11.07] 99.08 (DTC) / 20.04
10000 = [par. 11.08] 99.07 (scalar)]**
Torque with -10000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0 Final reference

FAST COMM 0=0 20000 = [par. limited by par.
10000 = [par. 11.08] 99.08 (DTC) / 20.04
99.07 (scalar)]**
PID CTRL -32768... PID Reference -10000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0

32767 (not with -1 = -[par. 11.07] 20000 = [par.
FAST COMM) 0 = [par. 11.07] 99.08 (DTC) /
10000 = [par. 11.08] 99.07 (scalar)]**
PID Reference -10000 = -[par. 11.08] 0=0

with 0=0 20000 = [par.
FAST COMM 10000 = [par. 11.08] 99.08 (DTC) /
99.07 (scalar)]**
* With DTC the filter time of the actual speed value can be adjusted using parameter 34.04.
** Note: The maximum reference value is 163% (i.e. 163% = 1.63 · value of parameter 99.08/99.07 value).
Fieldbus control
218
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile

The CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
CSA 2.8/3.0. The Control Word and Status Word for the profile are described below.
CONTROL WORD for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile
Bit Name Value Description
0 Reserved
1 ENABLE 1 Enabled.
0 Coast to stop.
2 Reserved
3 START/STOP 0 ⇒ 1 Start.
0 Stop according to parameter 21.03 STOP FUNCTION.
4 Reserved
5 CNTRL_MODE 1 Select control mode 2.
0 Select control mode 1.
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 RESET_FAULT 0 ⇒ 1 Reset drive fault.
9 … 15 Reserved
STATUS WORD for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile

Bit Name Value Description
0 READY 1 Ready to start.
0 Initialising, or initialising error.
1 ENABLE 1 Enabled.
0 Coast to stop.
2 Reserved
3 RUNNING 1 Running with selected reference.
0 Stopped.
4 Reserved
5 REMOTE 1 Drive in Remote mode
0 Drive in Local mode
6 Reserved
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive at reference
0 Drive not at reference
8 FAULTED 1 A fault is active.
0 No active faults
9 WARNING 1 A warning is active.
0 No active warnings
10 LIMIT 1 Drive at a limit
0 Drive at no limit
11 … 15 Reserved
The reference and actual scaling is equal to that of the ABB Drives profile.
Fieldbus control
219
Diverse status, fault, alarm and limit words

03.03 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD
Bit Name Description
0 Reserved
1 OUT OF WINDOW Speed difference is out of the window (in speed control)*.
2 Reserved
3 MAGNETIZED Flux has been formed in the motor.
4 Reserved
5 SYNC RDY Position counter synchronised.
6 1 START NOT Drive has not been started after changing the motor
DONE parameters in group 99.
7 IDENTIF RUN Motor ID Run successfully completed.

DONE
8 START INHIBITION Safe torque off function or Prevention of unexpected start-up is

active.
9 LIMITING Control at a limit. See actual signal 3.04 LIMIT WORD 1 below.
10 TORQ CONTROL Torque reference is followed*.
11 ZERO SPEED Absolute value of motor actual speed is below zero speed limit
(4% of synchronous speed).
12 INTERNAL SPEED Internal speed feedback followed.

FB
13 M/F COMM ERR Master/Follower link (on CH2) communication error*.
14 … 15 Reserved
*See the Master/Follower Application Guide [3AFY58962180 (English)].
Fieldbus control
220
03.04 LIMIT WORD 1

Bit Name Active Limit
0 TORQ MOTOR LIM Pull-out limit
1 SPD_TOR_MIN_LIM Speed control torque min. limit
2 SPD_TOR_MAX_LIM Speed control torque max. limit
3 TORQ_USER_CUR_LIM User-defined current limit
4 TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM Internal current limit
5 TORQ_MIN_LIM Any torque min. limit
6 TORQ_MAX_LIM Any torque max. limit
7 TREF_TORQ_MIN_LIM Torque reference min. limit
8 TREF_TORQ_MAX_LIM Torque reference max. limit
9 FLUX_MIN_LIM Flux reference min. limit
10 FREQ_MIN_LIMIT Speed/Frequency min. limit
11 FREQ_MAX_LIMIT Speed/Frequency max. limit
12 DC_UNDERVOLT DC undervoltage limit
13 DC_OVERVOLT DC overvoltage limit
14 TORQUE LIMIT Any torque limit
15 FREQ_LIMIT Any speed/frequency limit
03.05 FAULT WORD 1

0 SHORT CIRC For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
1 OVERCURRENT
2 DC OVERVOLT
3 ACS800 TEMP
4 EARTH FAULT
5 THERMISTOR
6 MOTOR TEMP
7 SYSTEM_FAULT A fault is indicated by the System Fault Word (Actual

Signal 3.07).
8 UNDERLOAD For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
9 OVERFREQ
10 … 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
221
03.06 FAULT WORD 2

0 SUPPLY PHASE For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
1 NO MOT DATA
2 DC UNDERVOLT
3 Reserved
4 RUN ENABLE For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
5 ENCODER ERR
6 I/O COMM
7 CTRL B TEMP
8 EXTERNAL FLT
9 OVER SWFREQ
10 AI < MIN FUNC
11 PPCC LINK
12 COMM MODULE
13 PANEL LOSS
14 MOTOR STALL
15 MOTOR PHASE
Fieldbus control
222
03.07 SYSTEM FAULT WORD

0 FLT (F1_7) Factory default parameter file error
1 USER MACRO User Macro file error
2 FLT (F1_4) FPROM operating error
3 FLT (F1_5) FPROM data error
4 FLT (F2_12) Internal time level 2 overflow
8 FLT (F2_16) State machine overflow
9 FLT (F2_17) Application program execution error
10 FLT (F2_18) Application program execution error
11 FLT (F2_19) Illegal instruction
12 FLT (F2_3) Register stack overflow
13 FLT (F2_1) System stack overflow
14 FLT (F2_0) System stack underflow
15 Reserved
03.08 ALARM WORD 1

0 START INHIBIT For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
1 Reserved
2 THERMISTOR For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
3 MOTOR TEMP
4 ACS800 TEMP
5 ENCODER ERR
6 T MEAS ALM
7 … 11 Reserved
12 COMM MODULE For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
13 Reserved
14 EARTH FAULT For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
223
03.09 ALARM WORD 2

0 Reserved
1 UNDERLOAD For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
2, 3 Reserved
4 ENCODER For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
5, 6 Reserved
7 POWFAIL FILE (FFA0) Error in restoring POWERFAIL.DDF
8 ALM (OS_17) Error in restoring POWERDOWN.DDF
9 MOTOR STALL For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
10 AI < MIN FUNC
11, 12 Reserved
13 PANEL LOSS For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
14, 15 Reserved
03.13 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3

0 REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction.
1 EXT CTRL External control is selected.
2 REF 2 SEL Reference 2 is selected.
3 CONST SPEED A Constant Speed (1…15) is selected.
4 STARTED The drive has received a Start command.
5 USER 2 SEL User Macro 2 has been loaded.
6 OPEN BRAKE The Open Brake command is ON. See group 42 BRAKE
CONTROL.
7 LOSS OF REF The reference has been lost.
8 STOP DI STATUS The state of the interlock input on the RMIO board.
9 READY Ready to function: Run enable signal on, no fault
10 DATASET STATUS Data set has not been updated.
11 MACRO CHG Macro is changing or is being saved.
12…15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
224
03.14 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4

0 SPEED 1 LIM Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision

limit 1. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
1 SPEED 2 LIM Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision

limit 2. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
2 CURRENT LIM Motor current has exceeded or fallen below the set
supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
3 REF 1 LIM Reference 1 has exceeded or fallen below the set

4 REF 2 LIM Reference 2 has exceeded or fallen below the set

5 TORQUE 1 LIM The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the
TORQUE1 supervision limit. See group 32
SUPERVISION.
6 TORQUE 2 LIM The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the
TORQUE2 supervision limit. See group 32
SUPERVISION.
7 ACT 1 LIM PID controller actual value 1 has exceeded or fallen below
the set supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
8 ACT 2 LIM PID controller actual value 2 has exceeded or fallen below
the set supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
9 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 = Actual frequency or speed value equals or exceeds the

supervision limit (par. 32.02).
0 = Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision
limit.
10 … Reserved
15
03.15 FAULT WORD 4

0 CHOKE OTEMP Step-up module fault
1 MOTOR 1 TEMP For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
2 MOTOR 2 TEMP
3 BRAKE ACKN
4 … 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
225
03.16 ALARM WORD 4

0 FAN OTEMP Step-up module fan overtemperature alarm
1 MOTOR 1 TEMP For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
2 MOTOR 2 TEMP
3 BRAKE ACKN
4 SLEEP MODE
5 MACRO CHANGING User or Application macro is being saved or loaded
6 … 15 Reserved
03.17 FAULT WORD 5

0 BR BROKEN For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
1 BR WIRING
2 BC SHORT CIR
3 BR OVERHEAT
4 BC OVERHEAT
5 IN CHOKE TEMP
6 PP OVERLOAD
7 INV DISABLED
8 TEMP DIF
9 POWERF INV xx/

POWERFAIL
10 INT CONFIG
11 USER L CURVE
12 Reserved
13 INV OVERTEMP For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
14...15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
226
03.18 ALARM WORD 5

0 REPLACE FAN For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
1 SYNCRO SPEED
2 BR OVERHEAT
3 BC OVERHEAT
4 IN CHOKE TEMP
5 PP OVERLOAD
6 INV DISABLED
7 CUR UNBAL
8 INV CUR LIM
9 DC BUS LIM
10 MOT CUR LIM
11 MOT TORQ LIM
12 MOT POW LIM
13 USER L CURVE
14 Reserved
15 BATT FAILURE For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
03.19 INT INIT FAULT

0 AINT FAULT Wrong EPLD version
1 AINT FAULT Wrong AINT board revision
2 AINT FAULT Du/dt limitation hardware failure
3 AINT FAULT Current measurement scaling error
4 AINT FAULT Voltage measurement scaling error
5 … 15 Reserved
This signal is active with AINT board.
Fieldbus control
227
03.30 LIMIT WORD INV

The LIMIT WORD INV Word includes faults and warnings, which occur when the
output current limit of the drive is exceeded. The current limit protects the drive in
various cases, e.g. integrator overload, high IGBT temperature etc.
0 INTEGRAT 200 Current limit at 200% integrator overload. Temperature

model is not active.*
1 INTEGRAT 150 Current limit at 150% integrator overload. Temperature

model is not active.*
2 INT LOW FREQ Current limit at high IGBT temperature with low output
frequency (<10 Hz). Temperature model is not active.*
3 INTG PP TEMP Current limit at high IGBT temperature. Temperature model

is not active.*
4 PP OVER TEMP Current limit at high IGBT temperature. Temperature model

is active.
5 PP OVERLOAD Current limit at high IGBT junction to case temperature.

Temperature model is active.
If the IGBT junction to case temperature continues to rise in
spite of the current limitation, PP OVERLOAD alarm or fault
occurs. See chapter Fault tracing
6 INV POW LIM Current limit at inverter output power limit
7 INV TRIP CUR Current limit at inverter overcurrent trip limit
8 OVERLOAD CUR Maximum inverter overload current limit. See par. 20.03.
9 CONT DC CUR Continuous dc-current limit
10 CONT OUT CUR Continuous output current limit (Icont.max)
11...15 Reserved
*Not active with ACS800 Factory macro default settings.
03.31 ALARM WORD 6

0 INV OVERTEMP For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
1...2 Reserved
3 ENC CABLE For the possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
4…15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
228
03.32 EXT IO STATUS

0 EMSTOP MODULE Emergency stop module is not communicating with the

ERROR drive software.
1 EMSTOP OFF2 CMD DI1 of emergency stop module. See 03.01 MAIN
CONTROL WORD bit1 OFF2 CONTROL.
2 EMSTOP OFF3 CMD DI2 of emergency stop module. See 03.01 MAIN
CONTROL WORD bit2 OFF3 CONTROL.
3 FREE DI3 of emergency stop module.
4 EMSTOP OFF3 STATUS RO1 of emergency stop module. See 03.02 MAIN STATUS
WORD bit5 OFF_3_STA. Bit inverted.
5 EMSTOP TRIP STATUS RO2 of emergency stop module. See 03.02 MAIN STATUS
WORD bit3 TRIPPED.
6 STEPUP MODULE Step up module is not communicating with the drive

ERROR software.
7 STEPUP CHOKE FLT DI1 of Step-Up module. For the possible causes and
CMD remedies, see chapter Fault tracing: CHOKE OTEMP
(FF82).
8 STEPUP FAN ALM CMD DI2 of Step-Up module. For possible causes and remedies,
see chapter Fault tracing: FAN OTEMP (FF83).
9 FREE DI3 of Step-Up module.
10 STEPUP MODULATING RO1 of Step-Up module. Drive is modulating.

STATUS
11 STEPUP TRIP STATUS RO2 of Step-Up module. See 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD
bit3 TRIPPED.
12-15 Reserved
03.33 FAULT WORD 6

0…1 Reserved
2 ENC CABLE For possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault
tracing.
3…15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
229
04.01 FAULTED INT INFO

The FAULTED INT INFO Word includes information on the location of faults PPCC
LINK, OVERCURRENT, EARTH FAULT, SHORT CIRCUIT, ACS800 TEMP,
TEMP DIF and POWERF INV (see 03.05 FAULT WORD 1, 03.06 FAULT WORD 2,
03.17 FAULT WORD 5 and chapter Fault tracing).
0 INT 1 FLT INT 1 board fault
12...14 Reserved
15 PBU FLT PBU board fault
Used only with parallel connected inverters.
Fieldbus control
230
Inverter Block Diagram
RMIO Motor Control and I/O Board

Upper-leg IGBTs INT Main Circuit Interface Board
RMIO INT PBU PPCS Link Branching Unit
Lower-leg IGBTs
U V W
Inverter Unit Block Diagram (2 to 12 parallel inverters)
RMIO PBU INT3

INT1 INT2
1 2 3
INT INT INT
U V W U V W U V W ...
04.02 INT SC INFO

The INT SC INFO Word includes information on the location of the SHORT CIRCUIT
fault (see 03.05 FAULT WORD 1 and chapter Fault tracing).
0 U-PH SC U Phase U upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
1 U-PH SC L Phase U lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
2 V-PH SC U Phase V upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
3 V-PH SC L Phase V lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
4 W-PH SC U Phase W upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
5 W-PH SC L Phase W lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
6...15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
231
Fault tracing
Chapter overview
The chapter lists all warning and fault messages including the possible cause and
corrective actions.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. The Safety
Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual must be read
before you start working with the drive.
Warning and fault indications

A warning or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status.
Most warning and fault causes can be identified and corrected using this information.
If not, an ABB representative should be contacted.
If the drive is operated with the control panel detached, the red LED in the panel
mounting platform indicates the fault condition. (Note: Some drive types are not fitted
with the LEDs as standard).
The four digit code number in brackets after the message is for the fieldbus
communication. (See chapter Fieldbus control.)
How to reset
The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad RESET key, by digital input or
fieldbus, or switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been
removed, the motor can be restarted.
Fault history
When a fault is detected, it is stored in the Fault History. The latest faults and
warnings are stored together with the time stamp at which the event was detected.
The fault logger collects 64 of the latest faults. When the drive power is switched off,
16 of the latest faults are stored.
See chapter Control panel for more information.
Fault tracing
232
Warning messages generated by the drive

WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO
ACS800 TEMP Drive IGBT temperature is excessive. Fault trip Check ambient conditions.
(4210) limit is 100%. Check air flow and fan operation.
3.08 AW 1 bit 4 Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against unit power.
AI < MIN FUNC Analogue control signal is below minimum Check for proper analogue control signal
(8110) allowed value due to incorrect signal level or levels.
3.09 AW 2 bit 10 failure in control wiring. Check control wiring.
(programmable Check Fault Function parameters.
Fault Function
30.01)
AD [message] Message generated by an EVENT block in the Consult the documentation or author of the
Adaptive Program. Adaptive Program.
BACKUP USED PC stored backup of drive parameters is Wait until download is completed.
(FFA3) downloaded into use.
BATT FAILURE APBU branching unit memory backup battery With parallel connected inverters, enable
(5581) error caused by backup battery by setting actuator 6 of switch
- incorrect APBU switch S3 setting S3 to ON.
3.18 AW 5 bit 15
- too low battery voltage. Replace backup battery.
BC OVERHEAT Brake chopper overload Stop drive. Let chopper cool down.
(7114) Check parameter settings of resistor overload
3.18 AW 5 bit 3 protection function (see parameter group 27
BRAKE CHOPPER).
Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
Check that drive supply AC voltage is not
excessive.
BRAKE ACKN Unexpected state of brake acknowledge signal See parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL.
(FF74) Check connection of brake acknowledgement
3.16 AW 4 bit 3 signal.
BR OVERHEAT Brake resistor overload Stop drive. Let resistor cool down.
3.18 AW 5 bit 2 protection function (see parameter group 27
BRAKE CHOPPER).
CALIBRA DONE Calibration of output current transformers is Continue normal operation.

(FF37) completed.
CALIBRA REQ Calibration of output current transformers is Calibration starts automatically. Wait for a
(FF36) required. Displayed at start if drive is in scalar while.
control (parameter 99.04) and scalar fly start
feature is on (parameter 21.08).
Fault tracing
233
COMM MODULE Cyclical communication between drive and Check status of fieldbus communication. See
(7510) master is lost. chapter Fieldbus control, or appropriate
3.08 AW 1 bit 12 fieldbus adapter manual.
(programmable Check parameter settings:
Fault Function - group 51 COMM MODULE DATA (for fieldbus
30.18, 30.19) adapter)
- group 52 STANDARD MODBUS (for
Standard Modbus Link).
Check Fault Function parameters.
Check cable connections.
Check if master can communicate.
DC BUS LIM Drive limits torque due to too high or too low Informative alarm
(3211) intermediate circuit DC voltage. Check Fault Function parameters.
3.18 AW5 bit 9
(programmable
Fault Function
30.23)
EARTH FAULT Drive has detected load unbalance typically Check there are no power factor correction
(2330) due to earth fault in motor or motor cable. capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.
3.08 AW 1 bit 14 Check that there is no earth fault in motor or
(programmable motor cables:
Fault Function - measure insulation resistances of motor and
30.17) motor cable.
If no earth fault can be detected, contact your
local ABB representative.
ENC CABLE Pulse encoder phase signal is missing. Check pulse encoder and its wiring.
(7310) Check pulse encoder interface module and its
3.31 AW 6 bit 3 wiring.
(programmable
Fault Function
50.07)
ENCODER A<>B Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is Interchange connection of pulse encoder
(7302) connected to terminal of phase B and vice phases A and B.
3.09 AW 2 bit 4 versa.
ENCODER ERR Communication fault between pulse encoder Check pulse encoder and its wiring, pulse
(7301) and pulse encoder interface module and encoder interface module and its wiring,
3.08 AW 1 bit 5 between module and drive parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE
settings.
FAN OTEMP Excessive temperature of drive output filter fan. Stop drive. Let it cool down.
(FF83) Supervision is in use in step-up drives. Check ambient temperature.
3.16 AW 4 bit 0 Check fan rotates in correct direction and air
flows freely.
HW RECONF RQ Inverter type (e.g. sr0025_3) has been Wait until alarm POWEROFF! activates and
(FF38) changed. Inverter type is usually changed at switch control board power off to validate
factory or during drive implementation. inverter type change.
Fault tracing
234
ID DONE Drive has performed motor identification Continue drive operation.

(FF32) magnetisation and is ready for operation. This
warning belongs to normal start-up procedure.
ID MAGN Motor identification magnetisation is on. This Wait until drive indicates that motor
(FF31) warning belongs to normal start-up procedure. identification is completed.
ID MAGN REQ Motor identification is required. This warning Start Identification Magnetisation by pressing
(FF30) belongs to normal start-up procedure. Drive Start key, or select ID Run and start (see
expects user to select how motor identification parameter 99.10).
should be performed: By Identification
Magnetisation or by ID Run.
ID N CHANGED Drive ID number has been changed from 1. Change ID number back to 1. See chapter
(FF68) Control panel.
ID RUN Motor identification Run is on. Wait until drive indicates that motor
(FF35) identification Run is completed.
ID RUN SEL Motor Identification Run is selected, and drive Press Start key to start Identification Run.
(FF33) is ready to start ID Run. This warning belongs
to ID Run procedure.
IN CHOKE TEMP Excessive input choke temperature Stop drive. Let it cool down.
(FF81) Check ambient temperature.
3.18 AW 5 bit 4 Check that fan rotates in correct direction and
air flows freely.
INV CUR LIM Internal inverter current or power limit has Reduce load or increase ramp time.
(2212) been exceeded. Limit inverter actual power or decrease line-
3.18 AW 5 bit 8 side converter reactive power generation
(programmable reference value (parameter 95.06 LCU Q PW
Fault Function REF).
30.23) Check Fault Function parameters.
INV DISABLED Optional DC switch has opened while unit was Close DC switch.
(3200) stopped. Check AFSC-0x Fuse Switch Controller unit.
3.18 AW 5 bit 6
Fault tracing
235
INV OVERTEMP Converter module temperature is excessive. Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds
(4290) 40°C, ensure that load current does not
exceed derated load capacity of drive. See
3.31 AW 6 bit 0
appropriate hardware manual.
Check that ambient temperature setting is
correct (parameter 95.10).
Check converter module cooling air flow and
fan operation.
Cabinet installation: Check cabinet air inlet
filters. Change when necessary. See
Modules installed in cabinet by user: Check
that cooling air circulation in cabinet has been
prevented with air baffles. See module
installation instructions.
Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of
converter module for dust pick-up. Clean when
necessary.
IO CONFIG Input or output of optional I/O extension or Check Fault Function parameters.
(FF8B) fieldbus module has been selected as signal Check parameter group 98 OPTION
(programmable interface in application program but MODULES.
Fault Function communication to appropriate I/O extension
30.22) module has not been set accordingly.
MACRO CHANGE Macro is restoring or User macro is being Wait until drive has finished task.
(FF69) saved.
MOD BOARD T Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter Check inverter fan.

(FF88) module. Check ambient temperature.
09.11 AW 3 bit 14
MOD CHOKE T Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i Check inverter fan.
(FF89) inverter module. Check ambient temperature.
09.11 AW 3 bit 13 Check liquid cooling system.
MOT CUR LIM Drive limits motor current according to current Reduce load or increase ramp time.
(2300) limit defined by parameter 20.03 MAXIMUM Increase parameter 20.03 MAXIMUM
CURRENT. CURRENT value.
3.18 AW 5 bit 10
Fault Function
30.23)
MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in stall region due to e.g. Check motor load and drive ratings.
(7121) excessive load or insufficient motor power. Check Fault Function parameters.
3.09 AW 2 bit 9
(programmable
Fault Function
30.10)
MOTOR STARTS Motor Identification Run starts. This warning Wait until drive indicates that motor
(FF34) belongs to ID Run procedure. identification is completed.
Fault tracing
236
MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be Check motor ratings, load and cooling.
(4310) too high) due to excessive load, insufficient Check start-up data.
3.08 AW 1 bit 3 motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect
(programmable start-up data.
Fault Function
30.04…30.09)
MOTOR 1 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded Check value of alarm limit.
(4312) alarm limit set by parameter 35.02. Check that actual number of sensors
3.16 AW 4 bit 1 corresponds to value set by parameter.
Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor
cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling
surfaces, etc.
MOTOR 2 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded Check value of alarm limit.
(4313) alarm limit set by parameter 35.05. Check that actual number of sensors
3.16 AW 4 bit 2 corresponds to value set by parameter.
Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor
cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling
surfaces, etc.
MOT POW LIM Drive limits motor power according to limits Informative alarm
(FF86) defined by parameters 20.11 and 20.12. Check parameter 20.11 P MOTORING LIM
3.18 AW 5 bit 12 and 20.12 P GENERATING LIM settings.
Fault Function
30.23)
MOT TORQ LIM Drive limits motor torque according to Informative alarm
(FF85) calculated motor pull-out torque limit and Check parameter 20.13 MIN TORQ SEL and
minimum and maximum torque limits defined 20.14 MAX TORQ SEL settings.
3.18 AW 5 bit 11
by parameters 20.13 and 20.14.
Fault Function If LIMIT WORD 1 bit 0 TORQ MOTOR LIM
30.23) is 1,
- check motor parameter settings (parameter
group 99 START-UP DATA)
- ensure that ID run has been completed
successfully.
PANEL LOSS Control panel selected as active control Check panel connection (see appropriate
(5300) location for drive has ceased communicating. hardware manual).
3.09 AW 2 bit 13 Check control panel connector.
(programmable Replace control panel in mounting platform.
Fault Function Check Fault Function parameters.
30.02)
POINTER ERROR Source selection (pointer) parameter points to Check source selection (pointer) parameter
(FFD0) non existing parameter index. settings.
->POWEROFF! Inverter type (e.g. sr0025_3) has been Switch control board power off to validate
(FF39) changed. Inverter type is usually changed at inverter type change.
factory or during drive implementation.
Fault tracing
237
PPCC LINK Fibre optic link to INT board is faulty. Check fibre optic cables or galvanic link. With
(5210) frame sizes R2-R6 link is galvanic.
3.06 FW 2 bit 11 If RMIO is powered from external supply,
ensure that supply is on. See parameter 16.09
CTRL BOARD SUPPLY.
Check signal 03.19. Contact ABB
representative if any of faults in signal 3.19 are
active.
PPCC LINK xx INT board fibre optic connection fault in Check connection from inverter module Main
(5210) inverter unit of several parallel connected Circuit Interface Board, INT to PPCC
inverter modules. xx refers to inverter module Branching Unit, PBU. (Inverter module 1 is
3.06 FW 2 bit 11 and
4.01
number. connected to PBU INT1 etc.)
active.
PP OVERLOAD Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. Increase ramp time.

(5482) This can be caused by excessive load at low Reduce load.
frequencies (e.g. fast direction change with
3.18 AW 5 bit 5
excessive load and inertia).
REPLACE FAN Running time of inverter cooling fan has Replace fan.
(4280) exceeded its estimated life time. Reset fan run time counter 01.44.
3.18 AW 5 bit 0
RUN ENABLE No Run enable signal received. Check setting of parameter 16.01. Switch on
(FF8E) signal or check wiring of selected source.
3.06 FW 2 bit 4
SLEEP MODE Sleep function has entered sleeping mode. See parameter group 40 PID CONTROL.
(FF8C)
3.16 AW 4 bit 4
START INHIBI Safe torque off function has been activated Close Safe torque off function switch. If switch
(FF7A) while drive was stopped. is closed and warning is still active, check
Or: Optional start inhibit hardware logic is power supply at ASTO board input terminals.
AW 1 bit 0
activated. Replace ASTO board.
Or: Check start inhibit circuit (AGPS board).
START INTERL No Start Interlock signal received. Check circuit connected to Start Interlock input
(FF8D) on RMIO board.
SYNCRO SPEED Value of motor nominal speed set to parameter Check nominal speed from motor rating plate
(FF87) 99.08 is not correct: Value is too near and set parameter 99.08 exactly accordingly.
synchronous speed of motor. Tolerance is
3.18 AW 5 bit 1
0.1%. This warning is active only in DTC mode.
Fault tracing
238
TEMP DIF xx y Excessive temperature difference between Check cooling fan.

(4380) several parallel connected inverter modules. Replace fan.
xx (1...12) refers to inverter module number
4.01 FAULTED INT Check air filters.
INFO
and y refers to phase (U, V, W).
Alarm is indicated when temperature difference

is 15°C. Fault is indicated when temperature
difference is 20°C.
Excessive temperature can be caused e.g. by

unequal current sharing between parallel
connected inverters.
THERMISTOR Motor temperature is excessive. Motor thermal Check motor ratings and load.
(4311) protection mode selection is TEMP SENSOR. Check start-up data.
3.08 AW 1 bit 2 Check thermistor connections to digital input
(programmable DI6.
Fault Function
30.04…30.05)
T MEAS ALM Motor temperature measurement is out of Check connections of motor temperature
(FF91) acceptable range. measurement circuit. See chapter Program
3.08 AW 1 bit 6 features for circuit diagram.
UNDERLOAD Motor load is too low due to e.g. release Check for problem in driven equipment.
(FF6A) mechanism in driven equipment. Check Fault Function parameters.
3.09 AW 2 bit 1
(programmable
Fault Function
30.13)
USER L CURVE Integrated motor current has exceeded load Check parameter group 72 USER LOAD
(2312) curve defined by parameters in group 72 CURVE settings.
USER LOAD CURVE. Reduce load.
3.18 AW 5 bit 13
Fault tracing
239
Warning messages generated by the control panel

DOWNLOADING Download function of panel has failed. No data Make sure panel is in local mode.
FAILED has been copied from panel to drive. Retry (there might be interference on link).
Contact ABB representative.
DRIVE IS Downloading is not possible while motor is Stop motor. Perform downloading.
RUNNING running.
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
NO Cabling problem or hardware malfunction on Check Panel Link connections.

COMMUNICATION Panel Link Press RESET key. Panel reset may take up to
(X) half a minute, please wait.
(4) = Panel type not compatible with drive Check panel type and drive application
application program version program version. Panel type is printed on
panel cover. Application program version is
stored in parameter 33.02.
NO FREE ID Panel Link already includes 31 stations. Disconnect another station from link to free ID
NUMBERS ID number.
NUMBER
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE
NOT UPLOADED No upload function has been performed. Perform upload function before downloading.
DOWNLOADING See chapter Control panel.
NOT POSSIBLE
UPLOADING Upload function of panel has failed. No data Retry (there might be interference on link).
FAILED has been copied from drive to panel. Contact ABB representative.
WRITE ACCESS Certain parameters do not allow changes while Stop motor, then change parameter value.
DENIED motor is running. If tried, no change is
PARAMETER accepted, and warning is displayed.
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE Parameter lock is on. Open parameter lock (see parameter 16.02).
Fault tracing
240
Fault messages generated by the drive

FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO
ACS800 TEMP Drive IGBT temperature is excessive. Fault trip Check ambient conditions.
(4210) limit is 100%. Check air flow and fan operation.
3.05 FW 1 bit 3 Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
ACS TEMP xx y Excessive internal temperature in inverter unit Check ambient conditions.
(4210) of several parallel connected inverter modules. Check air flow and fan operation.
3.05 FW 1 bit 3 and xx (1...12) refers to inverter module number
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
4.01 and y refers to phase (U, V, W).
AI < MIN FUNC Analogue control signal is below minimum Check for proper analogue control signal
(8110) allowed value due to incorrect signal level or levels.
3.06 FW 2 bit 10 failure in control wiring. Check control wiring.
Fault Function
30.01)
AD [message] Message generated by an EVENT block in the Consult the documentation or author of the
Adaptive Program. Adaptive Program.
BACKUP ERROR Failure when restoring PC stored backup of Retry.

(FFA2) drive parameters. Check connections.
Check that parameters are compatible with
drive.
BC OVERHEAT Brake chopper overload Let chopper cool down.

3.17 FW 5 bit 4 protection function (see parameter group 27
BRAKE CHOPPER).
excessive.
BC SHORT CIR Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT(s) Replace brake chopper.
(7113) Ensure brake resistor is connected and not
3.17 FW 5 bit 2 damaged.
BRAKE ACKN Unexpected state of brake acknowledge signal See parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL.
(FF74) Check connection of brake acknowledgement
3.15 FW 4 bit 3 signal.
BR BROKEN Brake resistor is not connected or it is Check resistor and resistor connection.
(7110) damaged. Check that resistance rating meets
3.17 FW 5 bit 0 Resistance rating of brake resistor is too high. specifications. See appropriate drive hardware
manual.
Fault tracing
241
BR OVERHEAT Brake resistor overload Let resistor cool down.

3.17 FW 5 bit 3 protection function (see parameter group 27
BRAKE CHOPPER).
excessive.
BR WIRING Wrong connection of brake resistor Check resistor connection.

(7111) Ensure brake resistor is not damaged.
3.17 FW 5 bit 1
CHOKE OTEMP Excessive temperature of drive output filter. Let drive cool down.
(FF82) Supervision is in use in step-up drives. Check ambient temperature.
Check filter fan rotates in correct direction and
air flows freely.
COMM MODULE Cyclical communication between drive and Check status of fieldbus communication. See
(7510) master is lost. chapter Fieldbus control, or appropriate
3.06 FW 2 bit 12 fieldbus adapter manual.
(programmable Check parameter settings:
Fault Function - group 51 COMM MODULE DATA (for fieldbus
30.18, 30.19) adapter), or
- group 52 STANDARD MODBUS (for
Standard Modbus Link).
Check cable connections.
Check if master can communicate.
CTRL B TEMP Control board temperature is above 88°C. Check ambient conditions.
(4110) Check air flow.
3.06 FW 2 bit 7 Check main and additional cooling fans.
CURR MEAS Current transformer failure in output current Check current transformer connections to Main
(2211) measurement circuit Circuit Interface Board, INT.
CUR UNBAL xx Drive has detected excessive output current Check there are no power factor correction
(2330) unbalance in inverter unit of several parallel capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.
3.05 FW 1 bit 4 and connected inverter modules. This can be Check that there is no earth fault in motor or
4.01 caused by external fault (earth fault, motor, motor cables:
(programmable motor cabling, etc.) or internal fault (damaged
- measure insulation resistances of motor and
Fault Function inverter component). xx (1...12) refers to
motor cable.
30.17) inverter module number.
DC HIGH RUSH Drive supply voltage is excessive. When Check supply voltage level, drive rated voltage
(FF80) supply voltage is over 124% of unit voltage and allowed voltage range of drive.
rating (415, 500 or 690 V), motor speed rushes
to trip level (40% of nominal speed).
Fault tracing
242
DC OVERVOLT Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage. Check that overvoltage controller is on

(3210) DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 × 1.35 × U1max, (parameter 20.05).
3.05 FW 1 bit 2 where U1max is maximum value of supply Check supply voltage for static or transient
voltage range. For 400 V units, U1max is 415 V. overvoltage.
For 500 V units, U1max is 500 V. For 690 V
Check brake chopper and resistor (if used).
units, U1max is 690 V. Actual voltage in
intermediate circuit corresponding to the Check deceleration time.
supply voltage trip level is 728 V DC for 400 V Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable).
units, 877 V DC for 500 V units, and Retrofit frequency converter with brake
1210 V DC for 690 V units. chopper and brake resistor.
DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check main supply and fuses.
(3220) due to missing supply voltage phase, blown
3.06 FW 2 bit 2 fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault.
DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.6 × 1.35 × U1min,
where U1min is minimum value of supply
voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units,
U1min is 380 V. For 690 V units, U1min is 525 V.
Actual voltage in intermediate circuit
corresponding to supply voltage trip level is
307 V DC for 400 V and 500 V units, and
425 V DC for 690 V units.
EARTH FAULT Drive has detected load unbalance typically Check there are no power factor correction
(2330) due to earth fault in motor or motor cable. capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.
3.05 FW 1 bit 4 Check that there is no earth fault in motor or
(programmable motor cables:
Fault Function - measure insulation resistances of motor and
30.17) motor cable.
ENC CABLE Pulse encoder phase signal is missing. Check pulse encoder and its wiring.
(7310) Check pulse encoder interface module and its
3.33 FW 6 bit 2 wiring.
(programmable
Fault Function
50.07)
ENCODER A<>B Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is Interchange connection of pulse encoder
(7302) connected to terminal of phase B and vice phases A and B.
versa.
ENCODER ERR Communication fault between pulse encoder Check pulse encoder and its wiring, pulse
(7301) and pulse encoder interface module and encoder interface module and its wiring and
3.06 FW 2 bit 5 between module and drive parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE
settings.
EXTERNAL FLT Fault in external device. (This information is Check external devices for faults.
(9000) configured through one of programmable Check parameter 30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT.
3.06 FW 2 bit 8 digital inputs.)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.03)
Fault tracing
243
FORCED TRIP Generic Drive Communication Profile trip See appropriate communication module
(FF8F) command manual.
GD DISABLED AGPS power supply of parallel connected R8i Check Prevention of Unexpected Start-up
(FF53) inverter module has been switched off during circuit.
run. X (1…12) refers to inverter module Replace AGPS board of R8i inverter module.
number.
ID RUN FAIL Motor ID Run is not completed successfully. Check maximum speed (parameter 20.02). It
(FF84) should be at least 80% of motor nominal speed
(parameter 99.08).
IN CHOKE TEMP Excessive input choke temperature Stop drive. Let it cool down.
(FF81) Check ambient temperature.
3.17 FW 5 bit 5 Check that fan rotates in correct direction and
air flows freely.
INT CONFIG Number of inverter modules is not equal to Check status of inverters. See signal 04.01
(5410) original number of inverters. FAULTED INT INFO.
03.17 FW 5 bit 10 Check fibre optic cables between APBU and
inverter modules.
If Reduced Run function is used, remove
faulted inverter module from main circuit and
write number of remaining inverter modules
into parameter 95.03 INT CONFIG USER.
Reset drive.
INV DISABLED Optional DC switch has opened while unit was Close DC switch.
03.17 FW 5 bit 7 running or start command was given. Check AFSC-0x Fuse Switch Controller unit.
(3200)
INV OVERTEMP Converter module temperature is excessive. Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds
(4290) 40°C, ensure that load current does not
exceed derated load capacity of drive. See
3.17 FW 5 bit 13
Check that ambient temperature setting is
correct (parameter 95.10).
Check converter module cooling air flow and
fan operation.
Cabinet installation: Check cabinet air inlet
filters. Change when necessary. See
Modules installed in cabinet by user: Check
that cooling air circulation in cabinet has been
prevented with air baffles. See module
installation instructions.
Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of
converter module for dust pick-up. Clean when
necessary.
Reset and restart after problem is solved and
let converter module cool down.
Fault tracing
244
I/O COMM ERR Communication error on control board, Check connections of fibre optic cables on
(7000) channel CH1 channel CH1.
3.06 FW 2 bit 6 Electromagnetic interference Check all I/O modules (if present) connected to
channel CH1.
Check for proper earthing of equipment. Check
for highly emissive components nearby.
LINE CONV Fault on line side converter Shift panel from motor side converter control
(FF51) board to line side converter control board.
See line side converter manual for fault
description.
MOD BOARD T Overtemperature in AINT board of inverter Check inverter fan.

(FF88) module. Check ambient temperature.
MOD CHOKE T Overtemperature in choke of liquid cooled R8i Check inverter fan.
(FF89) inverter module. Check ambient temperature.
Check liquid cooling system.
MOTOR PHASE One of motor phases is lost due to fault in Check motor and motor cable.
(FF56) motor, motor cable, thermal relay (if used) or Check thermal relay (if used).
3.06 FW 2 bit 15 internal fault.
Check Fault Function parameters. Disable this
(programmable protection.
Fault Function
30.16)
MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in stall region due to e.g. Check motor load and drive ratings.
(7121) excessive load or insufficient motor power. Check Fault Function parameters.
3.06 FW 2 bit 14
(programmable
Fault Function
30.10…30.12)
MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be Check motor ratings and load.
(4310) too high) due to excessive load, insufficient Check start-up data.
3.05 FW 1 bit 6 motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect
(programmable start-up data.
Fault Function
30.04…30.09)
MOTOR 1 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded Check value of fault limit.
(4312) fault limit set by parameter 35.03. Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor
3.15 FW 4 bit 1 cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling
surfaces, etc.
MOTOR 2 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded Check value of fault limit.
(4313) fault limit set by parameter 35.06. Let motor cool down. Ensure proper motor
3.15 FW 4 bit 2 cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling
surfaces, etc.
NO MOT DATA Motor data is not given or motor data does not Check motor data parameters
(FF52) match with inverter data. 99.04…99.09.
3.06 FW 2 bit 1
Fault tracing
245
OVERCURR xx Overcurrent fault in inverter unit of several Check motor load.

(2310) parallel connected inverter modules. xx (1...12) Check acceleration time.
3.05 FW 1 bit 1 and refers to inverter module number.
Check motor and motor cable (including
4.01
phasing).
Check encoder cable (including phasing).
Check motor nominal values from group 99
START-UP DATA to confirm that motor model
is correct.
Check that there are no power factor correction
or surge absorbers in motor cable.
OVERCURRENT Output current exceeds trip limit. Check motor load.

(2310) Check acceleration time.
3.05 FW 1 bit 1 Check motor and motor cable (including
phasing).
Check that there are no power factor correction
capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.
Check encoder cable (including phasing).
OVERFREQ Motor is turning faster than highest allowed Check minimum/maximum speed settings.
(7123) speed due to incorrectly set minimum/ Check adequacy of motor braking torque.
3.05 FW 1 bit 9 maximum speed, insufficient braking torque or
Check applicability of torque control.
changes in load when using torque reference.
Check need for brake chopper and resistor(s).
Trip level is 50 Hz over operating range
absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque
Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar
Control active). Operating range limits are set
by parameters 20.01 and 20.02 (DTC mode
active) or 20.07 and 20.08 (Scalar Control
active).
OVER SWFREQ Switching frequency is too high. Check motor parameter settings (parameter
(FF55) group 99 START-UP DATA)
3.06 FW 2 bit 9 Ensure that ID run has been completed
successfully.
PANEL LOSS Control panel or DriveWindow selected as Check panel connection (see appropriate
(5300) active control location for drive has ceased hardware manual).
3.06 FW 2 bit 13 communicating. Check control panel connector.
(programmable Replace control panel in mounting platform.
Fault Function
30.02)
Check DriveWindow connection.
PARAM CRC CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) error Switch control board power off and on again.
(6320) Reload firmware to control board.
Replace control board.
POWERFAIL INT board powerfail in several inverter units of Check that INT board power cable is
(3381) parallel connected inverter modules. connected.
3.17 FW 5 bit 9 Check that POW board is working correctly.
Replace INT board.
Fault tracing
246
POWERF INV xx INT board powerfail in inverter unit of several Check that INT board power cable is
(3381) parallel connected inverter modules. xx (1...12) connected.
refers to inverter module number. Check that POW board is working correctly.
3.17 FW 5 bit 9 and
4.01 Replace INT board.
PPCC LINK Fibre optic link to INT board is faulty. Check fibre optic cables or galvanic link. With
(5210) frame sizes R2-R6 link is galvanic.
3.06 FW 2 bit 11 If RMIO is powered from external supply,
ensure that supply is on. See parameter 16.09
CTRL BOARD SUPPLY.
active.
PPCC LINK xx INT board fibre optic connection fault in Check connection from inverter module Main
(5210) inverter unit of several parallel connected Circuit Interface Board, INT to PPCC
inverter modules. xx refers to inverter module Branching Unit, PBU. (Inverter module 1 is
3.06 FW 2 bit 11 and
4.01
number. connected to PBU INT1 etc.)
active.
PP OVERLOAD Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. Check motor cables.

(5482) This fault protects IGBT(s) and it can be
activated by short circuit at output of long
3.17 FW 5 bit 6
motor cables.
SC INV xx y Short circuit in inverter unit of several parallel Check motor and motor cable.
(2340) connected inverter modules. xx (1...12) refers Check power semiconductors (IGBTs) of
to inverter module number and y refers to inverter module.
3.05 FW 1 bit 0, 4.01 phase (U, V, W).
and 4.02
SHORT CIRC Short-circuit in motor cable(s) or motor Check motor and motor cable.
(2340) Check there are no power factor correction
3.05 FW 1 bit 0 and capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.
4.02
Output bridge of converter unit is faulty. Contact ABB representative.
SLOT OVERLAP Two option modules have same connection Check connection interface selections in group
(FF8A) interface selection. 98 OPTION MODULES.
START INHIBI Safe torque off has been activated during Close Safe torque off switch. If switch is closed
(FF7A) motor run or motor start command has been and fault is still active, check power supply at
3.03 bit 8 given when Safe torque off is active. ASTO board input terminals. Replace ASTO
Or: Optional start inhibit hardware logic is board.
activated. Or: Check start inhibit circuit (AGPS board).
SUPPLY PHASE Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating Check main supply fuses.
(3130) due to missing supply voltage phase, blown Check for main supply imbalance.
3.06 FW 2 bit 0 fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault.
Trip occurs when DC voltage ripple is 13% of
DC voltage.
Fault tracing
247
TEMP DIF xx y Excessive temperature difference between Check cooling fan.

(4380) several parallel connected inverter modules. xx Replace fan.
(1...12) refers to inverter module number and y
3.17 FW 5 bit 8 and Check air filters.
4.01
refers to phase (U, V, W).
Alarm is indicated when temperature difference

is 15°C. Fault is indicated when temperature
difference is 20°C
Excessive temperature can be caused e.g. by

unequal current sharing between parallel
connected inverters.
THERMAL MODE Motor thermal protection mode is set to DTC See parameter 30.05.
(FF50) for high-power motor.
THERMISTOR Motor temperature is excessive. Motor thermal Check motor ratings and load.
(4311) protection mode selection is TEMP SENSOR. Check start-up data.
3.05 FW 1 bit 5 Check thermistor connections to digital input
(programmable DI6.
Fault Function
30.04…30.05)
UNDERLOAD Motor load is too low due to e.g. release Check for problem in driven equipment.
(FF6A) mechanism in driven equipment. Check Fault Function parameters.
3.05 FW 1 bit 8
(programmable
Fault Function
30.13…30.15)
USER L CURVE Integrated motor current has exceeded load Check parameter group 72 USER LOAD
(2312) curve defined by parameter group 72 USER CURVE settings.
LOAD CURVE. After motor cooling time specified by
3.17 FW 5 bit 11
parameter 72.20 LOAD COOLING TIME has
elapsed, fault can be reset.
USER MACRO No User Macro saved or file is defective. Create User Macro.
(FFA1)
3.07 SFW bit 1
Fault tracing
248
Fault tracing
249
Chapter overview
The chapter describes the use of analogue extension module RAIO as an speed
reference interface of ACS800 equipped with Standard Control Program.
Speed control through the analogue extension module

Two variants are described:
• Bipolar Input in Basic Speed Control
• Bipolar Input in Joystick Mode
Only the use of a bipolar input (± signal range) is covered here. The use of unipolar
input corresponds to that of a standard unipolar input when:
• the settings described below are done, and
• the communication between the module and the drive is activated by parameter
98.06.
Basic checks
Ensure the drive is:
• installed and commissioned, and
• the external start and stop signals are connected.
Ensure the extension module:
• settings are adjusted. (See below.)
• is installed and reference signal is connected to AI1.
• is connected to the drive.
Settings of the analogue extension module and the drive

• Set the module node address to 5 (not required if installed to the option slot of the
drive).
• Select the signal type for the module input AI1 (switch).
• Select the operation mode (unipolar/bipolar) of the module input (switch).
• Ensure the drive parameter settings correspond to the mode of the module inputs
(parameter 98.13 and 98.14).
• Set the drive parameters (see the appropriate section on the following pages).

250
Parameter settings: bipolar input in basic speed control

The table below lists the parameters that affect the handling of the speed reference
received through the extension module bipolar input AI1 (AI5 of the drive).
Parameter Setting
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE RAIO-SLOT1
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC BIPO AI5
10.03 DIRECTION FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST(1
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT1
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI5
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM minREF1
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM maxREF1
13.16 MINIMUM AI5 minAI5
13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 maxAI5
13.18 SCALE AI5 100%
13.20 INVERT AI5 NO
(2
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION
The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input AI1 of
the extension module.
Operation Range
scaled
maxREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST1)
Speed Reference
minREF1
-minREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST1)
-scaled
maxREF1

1) For
the negative speed range, the drive must receive a separate reverse command.
2) Set if supervision of living zero is used.

251
Parameter settings: bipolar input in joystick mode

The table below lists the parameters that affect the handling of the speed and
direction reference received through the extension module bipolar input AI1 (AI5 of
the drive).
Parameter Setting
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE RAIO-SLOT1
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC BIPO AI5
10.03 DIRECTION FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST(1
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT1
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI5/JOYST
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM minREF1
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM maxREF1
13.16 MINIMUM AI5 minAI5
13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 maxAI5
13.18 SCALE AI5 100%
13.20 INVERT AI5 NO
(2
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION
The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input AI1 of
the extension module in joystick mode.
Operation Range
scaled
maxREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST1)
Speed Reference
minREF1
-minREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST1)
-scaled
maxREF1

1) Enables the use of both positive and negative speed range.

2)
Set if supervision of living zero is used.

252

253
Chapter overview
This chapter lists the actual signal and parameter lists with some additional data. For
the descriptions, see chapter Actual signals and parameters.

Term Definition
PB Profibus equivalent for drive parameters communicating through

the NPBA-12 Profibus Adapter.
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on

the panel and the integer used in serial communication.
Absolute Maximum Frequency Value of 20.08, or 20.07 if the absolute value of the minimum limit
is greater than the maximum limit.
Absolute Maximum Speed Value of parameter 20.02, or 20.01 if the absolute value of the
minimum limit is higher than the maximum limit.
W Write access is not allowed when the motor is running.
Fieldbus addresses
Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA-01, RDNA-01, etc.)
See the appropriate fieldbus adapter module User’s Manual.
Nxxx adapter modules (such as NPBA-12, NDNA-02, etc.)

NPBA-12 Profibus Adapter
All versions
• see column PB in the tables below.
Version 1.5 or later
• see NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Installation and Start-Up
Guide [3BFE64341588 (English)].
Reading or writing a drive parameter can be done also by converting the parameter
group (PNU) and the parameter index (subindex) into hexadecimal.
Example: drive parameter 12.07:
12 = 0C(hex)
07 = 07(hex) => 0C07.
Request label for request parameter value is 6. Request label for change parameter
value is 7. Note: Not every parameter has Profibus equivalent value (PB).

254
NIBA-01 InterBus-S Adapter

• xxyy · 100 + 12288 converted into hexadecimal, where xxyy = drive parameter
number
Example: The index number for drive parameter 13.09 is 1309 + 12288 = 13597
(dec) = 351D (hex)
NMBP-01 ModbusPlus® Adapter and NMBA-01 Modbus Adapter
• 4xxyy, where xxyy = drive parameter number

255
Actual signals
Index Name Short name FbEq Unit Range PB
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01.01 PROCESS VARIABLE PROC VAR 1=1 According to 1
parameter 34.02
01.02 SPEED SPEED -20000 = -100% rpm 2
20000 = 100% of
motor absolute max.
speed
01.03 FREQUENCY FREQ -100 = -1 Hz 100 = 1 Hz 3
Hz
01.04 CURRENT CURRENT 10 = 1 A A 4
01.05 TORQUE TORQUE -10000 = -100% % 5
10000 = 100% of
motor nominal torque
01.06 POWER POWER -1000 = -100% 1000 % 6
= 100% of motor
nominal power
01.07 DC BUS VOLTAGE V DC BUS V 1=1V V 7
01.08 MAINS VOLTAGE MAINS V 1=1V V 8
01.09 OUTPUT VOLTAGE OUT VOLT 1=1V V 9
01.10 ACS800 TEMP ACS TEMP 10 = 1% % 10
01.11 EXTERNAL REF 1 EXT REF1 1 = 1 rpm rpm 11
01.12 EXTERNAL REF 2 EXT REF2 0 = 0% 10000 = % 12
100% 1)
01.13 CTRL LOCATION CTRL LOC (1,2) LOCAL; (3) LOCAL; EXT1; 13
EXT1; (4) EXT2 EXT2
01.14 OP HOUR COUNTER OP HOURS 1=1h h 14
01.15 KILOWATT HOURS KW HOURS 1 = 100 kWh kWh 15
01.16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT APPL OUT 0 = 0% 10000 = % 16
100%
01.17 DI6-1 STATUS DI6-1 1=1 17
01.18 AI1 [V] AI1 [V] 1 = 0.001 V V 18
01.19 AI2 [mA] AI2 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 19
01.20 AI3 [mA] AI3 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 20
01.21 RO3-1 STATUS RO3-1 1=1 21
01.22 AO1 [mA] AO1 [mA] 1 =0.001 mA mA 22
01.23 AO2 [mA] AO2 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 23
01.24 ACTUAL VALUE 1 ACT VAL1 0 = 0% 10000 = % 24
100%
01.25 ACTUAL VALUE 2 ACT VAL2 0 = 0% 10000 = % 25
100%
01.26 CONTROL DEVIATION CONT DEV -10000 = -100% % 26
10000 = 100%
01.27 APPLICATION MACRO MACRO 1…7 According to 27
parameter 99.02
01.28 EXT AO1 [mA] EXT AO1 1 = 0.001 mA mA 28
01.29 EXT AO2 [mA] EXT AO2 1 = 0.001 mA mA 29
01.30 PP 1 TEMP PP 1 TEM 1 = 1°C °C 30
01.31 PP 2 TEMP PP 2 TEM 1 = 1°C °C 31
01.32 PP 3 TEMP PP 3 TEM 1 = 1°C °C 32
01.33 PP 4 TEMP PP 4 TEM 1 = 1°C °C 33
01.34 ACTUAL VALUE ACT V 0 = 0% 10000 = % 34
100%
01.35 MOTOR 1 TEMP M 1 TEMP 1 = 1°C/ohm °C 35
01.36 MOTOR 2 TEMP M 2 TEMP 1 = 1°C/ohm °C 36
01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST MOTOR TE 1 = 1°C °C 37
01.38 AI5 [mA] AI5 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 38

256

01.39 AI6 [mA] AI6 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 39
01.40 DI7-12 STATUS DI7...12 1=1 40
01.41 EXT RO STATUS EXT RO 1=1 41
01.42 PROCESS SPEED REL P SPEED 1=1 % 42
01.43 MOTOR RUN TIME MOTOR RUN TIME 1 = 10 h h 43
01.44 FAN ON-TIME FAN TIME 10 h = 1 h 44
01.45 CTRL BOARD TEMP CTRL B T 1=1 °C 45
01.46 SAVED KWH SAV KWH 1 = 100 kWh kWh 0…999 999 46
01.47 SAVED GWH SAV GWH 1 = 1 GWh GWh 1…8388607 47
01.48 SAVED AMOUNT SAV AM 1 = 100 cur local; EUR; USD 0…999 999 48
01.49 SAVED AMOUNT M SAV AM M 1 = 1 Mcur local; EUR; USD 1…8388607 49
01.50 SAVED CO2 SAV CO2 1 = 100 kg kg 0…999 999 50
01.51 SAVED CO2 KTON SAV CO2K 1 = 1 kton kton 1…8388607 -
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS
02.01 SPEED REF 2 S REF 2 0 = 0% 20000 = rpm 51
02.02 SPEED REF 3 S REF 3 100% of motor rpm 52
absolute max. speed
02.09 TORQUE REF 2 T REF 2 0 = 0% 10000 = % 59
02.10 TORQUE REF 3 T REF 3 100% of motor % 60
02.13 TORQ USED REF T USED R nominal torque % 63
02.14 FLUX REF FLUX REF 0 = 0% 10000 = % 64
100%
02.17 SPEED ESTIMATED SPEED ES 0 = 0% 20000 = rpm 67
02.18 SPEED MEASURED SPEED ME 100% of motor rpm 68
absolute max. speed
02.19 MOTOR MOTOR AC 1 = 1 rpm/s. rpm/s 69
ACCELERATIO
02.20 USER CURRENT USER CUR 10 = 1% % 70
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS 2)
03.01 MAIN CTRL WORD MAIN CW 0...65535 76
(Decimal)
03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD MAIN SW 0...65535 77
(Decimal)
03.03 AUX STATUS WORD AUX SW 0...65535 78
(Decimal)
03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 LIMIT W1 0...65535 79
(Decimal)
03.05 FAULT WORD 1 FAULT W1 0...65535 80
(Decimal)
(Decimal)
03.07 SYSTEM FAULT SYS FLT 0...65535 82
(Decimal)
03.08 ALARM WORD 1 ALARM W1 0...65535 83
(Decimal)
(Decimal)
03.11 FOLLOWER MCW FOLL MCW 0...65535 86
(Decimal)
03.13 AUX STATUS WORD 3 AUX SW 3 0...65535 88
(Decimal)
03.14 AUX STATUS WORD 4 AUX SW 4 0...65535 89
(Decimal)
(Decimal)
(Decimal)

257

(Decimal)
(Decimal)
03.19 INT INIT FAULT INT INIT 0...65535 94
(Decimal)
03.20 LATEST FAULT LAST FLT 0...65535 95
(Decimal)
03.21 2.LATEST FAULT 2.FAULT 0...65535 96
(Decimal)
(Decimal)
(Decimal)
(Decimal)
03.25 LATEST WARNING LAST WRN 0...65535 100
(Decimal)
03.26 2.LATEST WARNING 2.WARN 0...65535
(Decimal)
(Decimal)
(Decimal)
(Decimal)
03.30 LIMIT WORD INV LIMIT WO 0...65535 -
(Decimal)
03.31 ALARM WORD 6 ALARM W6 0...65535 -
(Decimal)
03.32 EXT IO STATUS E IO ST - - 0…65535 -
(Decimal)
03.33 FAULT WORD 6 FAULT W6 0…65535
(Decimal)
04 ACTUAL SIGNALS
04.01 FAULTED INT INFO FLTD INT 0...65535
(Decimal)
04.02 INT SC INFO INT SC 0...65535
(Decimal)
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS
09.01 AI1 SCALED AI1 SCAL 20000 = 10 V 0…20000 -
09.02 AI2 SCALED AI2 SCAL 20000 = 20 mA 0…20000 -
09.06 DS MCW DS MCW 0...65535 (Decimal) 0...65535 -
(Decimal)
09.07 MASTER REF1 M REF1 -32768…32767 -32768…32767 -
09.08 MASTER REF2 M REF2 -32768…32767 -32768…32767 -
09.09 AUX DS VAL1 AUX DSV1 -32768…32767 -32768…32767 -
09.10 AUX DS VAL2 AUX DSV2 -32768…32767 -32768…32767 -
09.11 AUX DS VAL3 AUX DSV3 -32768…32767 -32768…32767 -
09.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL1 LCU ACT1 1=1 - -
09.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL2 LCU ACT2 1=1 - -
1) Percent of motor max. speed / nominal torque / max. process reference (depending on the ACS800 macro selected).
2) The contents of these data words are detailed in chapter Fieldbus control. For the contents of Actual Signal 3.11, see the
Master/Follower Application Guide [3AFE64590430 (English)].

258
Parameters
Index Name/Selection FACTORY HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL T-CTRL SEQ CTRL PB W
10 START/STOP/DIR
10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2 (US: DI1,2 DI1 DI1,2 DI1,2 101 W
DI1P,2P,3)
10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR NOT SEL DI6,5 DI6 DI1,2 NOT SEL 102 W
10.03 REF DIRECTION FORWARD REQUEST FORWARD REQUEST REQUEST 103 W
10.04 EXT 1 STRT PTR 0 0 0 0 104 W
10.05 EXT 2 STRT PTR 0 0 0 0 0 105 W
10.06 JOG SPEED SELECT NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 106 W
10.07 NET CONTROL 0 0 0 0 0 107
10.08 NET REFERENCE 0 0 0 0 0 108
10.09 SLS ACTIVE NO NO NO NO NO 109
11 REFERENCE SELECT
11.01 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) 126
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT1 DI3 DI3 DI3 EXT1 127 W
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 128 W
11.04 EXT REF 1 MINIMUM 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 129
11.05 EXT REF 1 MAXIMUM 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 130
11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT KEYPAD AI2 AI1 AI2 AI1 131 W
11.07 EXT REF 2 MINIMUM 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 132
11.08 EXT REF 2 MAXIMUM 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 133
11.09 EXT 1/2 SEL PTR 0 0 0 0 0 134
11.10 EXT 1 REF PTR 0 0 0 0 0 135
11.11 EXT 2 REF PTR 0 0 0 0 0 136
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS
12.01 CONST SPEED SEL DI5,6 DI4(SPEED4) DI4(SPEED4) DI4(SPEED4) DI4,5,6 151 W
12.02 CONST SPEED 1 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 152
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
13.01 MINIMUM AI1 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 176
13.02 MAXIMUM AI1 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 177
13.03 SCALE AI1 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 178
13.04 FILTER AI1 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 179
13.05 INVERT AI1 NO NO NO NO NO 180
13.06 MINIMUM AI2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 181
13.07 MAXIMUM AI2 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 182
13.08 SCALE AI2 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 183
13.09 FILTER AI2 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 184
13.13 SCALE AI3 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 188
13.14 FILTER AI3 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 189

259

13.18 SCALE AI5 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 193
13.19 FILTER AI5 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 194
13.23 SCALE AI6 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 198
13.24 FILTER AI6 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 199
14 RELAY OUTPUTS
14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT READY READY READY READY READY 201 W
14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING 202 W
14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) 203 W
14.04 RO1 TON DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 204 W
14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 205 W
14.10 DIO MOD1 RO1 READY READY READY READY READY 210 W
14.11 DIO MOD1 RO2 RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING 211 W
14.12 DIO MOD2 RO1 FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 212 W
14.13 DIO MOD2 RO2 WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 213 W
14.14 DIO MOD3 RO1 REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL 214 W
14.15 DIO MOD3 RO2 AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED 215 W
14.16 RO PTR1 0 0 0 0 0 216 W
14.17 RO PTR2 0 0 0 0 0 217 W
14.18 RO PTR3 0 0 0 0 0 218 W
14.19 RO PTR4 0 0 0 0 0 219 W
14.20 RO PTR5 0 0 0 0 0 220 W
14.21 RO PTR6 0 0 0 0 0 221 W
14.22 RO PTR7 0 0 0 0 0 222 W
14.23 RO PTR8 0 0 0 0 0 223 W
14.24 RO PTR9 0 0 0 0 0 224 W
15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED 226 W
15.02 INVERT AO1 NO NO NO NO NO 227
15.03 MINIMUM AO1 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 228
15.04 FILTER AO1 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 229
15.05 SCALE AO1 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 230
15.06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT2 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 231 W
15.07 INVERT AO2 NO NO NO NO NO 232
15.08 MINIMUM AO2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 233
15.09 FILTER AO2 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 234
15.10 SCALE AO2 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 235
15.11 AO1 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 236
15.12 AO2 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 237
16 SYS CTRL INPUTS
16.01 RUN ENABLE YES YES DI5 DI6 YES 251 W
16.02 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN 252
16.03 PASS CODE 0 0 0 0 0 253
16.04 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 254 W
16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 255 W
16.06 LOCAL LOCK OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 256
16.07 PARAMETER SAVE DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE 257
16.08 RUN ENA PTR 0 0 0 0 0 258

260

16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL 259
24V 24V 24V 24V 24V
16.10 ASSIST SEL ON ON ON ON ON 260
16.11 FAULT RESET PTR 0 0 0 0 0 261
16.12 RESET COUNTER NO NO NO NO NO 262
20 LIMITS
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) 351
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) 352
20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT type specific type specific type specific type specific type specific 353
20.04 TORQ MAX LIM1 300% 300% 300% 300% 300% 354
20.05 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL ON ON ON ON ON 355
20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL ON ON ON ON ON 356
20.07 MINIMUM FREQ - 50 Hz - 50 Hz - 50 Hz - 50 Hz - 50 Hz 357
20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 358
20.11 P MOTORING LIM 300% 300% 300% 300% 300% 361
20.12 P GENERATING LIM -300% -300% -300% -300% -300% 362
20.13 MIN TORQ SEL NEG MAX NEG MAX NEG MAX NEG MAX NEG MAX 363
TORQ TORQ TORQ TORQ TORQ
20.14 MAX TORQ SEL MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 364
20.15 TORQ MIN LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 365
20.16 TORQ MIN LIM2 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 366
20.17 TORQ MAX LIM2 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 367
20.18 TORQ MIN PTR 0 0 0 0 0 368
20.19 TORQ MAX PTR 0 0 0 0 0 369
20.20 MIN AI SCALE 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 370
20.21 MAX AI SCALE 300% 300% 300% 300% 300% 371
20.22 SLS SPEED LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 372 W
21 START/STOP
21.01 START FUNCTION AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO 376 W
21.02 CONST MAGN TIME 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 377 W
21.03 STOP FUNCTION COAST COAST COAST COAST RAMP 378
21.04 DC HOLD NO NO NO NO NO 379
21.05 DC HOLD SPEED 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm 380 W
21.06 DC HOLD CURR 30% 30% 30% 30% 30% 381 W
21.07 RUN ENABLE FUNC COAST STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP 382
21.08 SCALAR FLY START NO NO NO NO NO 383
21.09 START INTRL FUNC OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP 384
21.10 ZERO SPEED DELAY 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 385
22 ACCEL/DECEL
22.01 ACC/DEC SEL DI4 ACC/DEC 1 ACC/DEC 1 DI5 DI3 401 W
22.02 ACCEL TIME 1 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 402
22.03 DECEL TIME 1 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 403
22.04 ACCEL TIME 2 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 404
22.05 DECEL TIME 2 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 405
22.06 ACC/DEC RAMP SHPE 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 406
22.07 EM STOP RAMP TIME 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 407
22.08 ACC PTR 0 0 0 0 0 408
22.09 DEC PTR 0 0 0 0 0 409
22.10 SLS ACCELER TIME 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 410 W
22.11 SLS DECELER TIME 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 411 W
23 SPEED CTRL
23.01 GAIN 10 10 10 10 10 426
23.02 INTEGRATION TIME 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 427
23.03 DERIVATION TIME 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 428
23.04 ACC COMPENSATION 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.12 s 429
23.05 SLIP GAIN 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 430
23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN NO NO NO NO NO 431
23.07 SP ACT FILT TIME 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms 432

261

24 TORQUE CTRL
24.01 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00 s 451
24.02 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00 s 452
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS
25.01 CRIT SPEED SELECT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 476
25.02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 477
25.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 478
26 MOTOR CONTROL
26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION NO NO NO NO NO 501 W
26.02 FLUX BRAKING YES YES YES YES YES 502 W
26.03 IR-COMPENSATION 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 503 W
26.04 IR STEP-UP FREQ 0 0 0 0 0 504 W
26.05 HEX FIELD WEAKEN NO NO NO NO NO 505 W
26.06 FLUX REF PTR C.10000 C.10000 C.10000 C.10000 C.10000 506 W
26.07 FLYSTART CUR REF [%] 60% 60% 60% 60% 60% 507 W
26.08 FLYSTART INIT DLY 25 25 25 25 25 508 W
26.09 FS METHOD OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 509 W
27 BRAKE CHOPPER
27.01 BRAKE CHOPPER CTL OFF OFF OFF OFF 526 W OFF
27.02 BR OVERLOAD FUNC NO NO NO NO 527 NO
27.03 BR RESISTANCE 528
27.04 BR THERM TCONST 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 529
27.05 MAX CONT BR POWER 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 530
27.06 BC CTRL MODE COMMON DC COMMON DC COMMON DC COMMON DC COMMON DC 531
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 601
30.02 PANEL LOSS FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 602
30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 603
30.04 MOTOR THERM PROT NO NO NO NO NO 604
30.05 MOT THERM P MODE DTC/USER DTC/USER DTC/USER DTC/USER DTC/USER 605
MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE
30.06 MOTOR THERM TIME (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) 606
30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 607
30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD 74.0% 74.0% 74.0% 74.0% 74.0% 608
30.09 BREAK POINT 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 609
30.10 STALL FUNCTION FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 610
30.11 STALL FREQ HI 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 611
30.12 STALL TIME 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s 612
30.13 UNDERLOAD FUNC NO NO NO NO NO 613
30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s 614
30.15 UNDERLOAD CURVE 1 1 1 1 1 615
30.16 MOTOR PHASE LOSS NO NO NO NO NO 616
30.17 EARTH FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 617
30.18 COMM FLT FUNC FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 618
30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 619
30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO 620
30.21 AUX DS T-OUT 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 621
30.22 IO CONFIG FUNC WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 622
30.23 LIMIT WARNING 0 0 0 0 0 623
31 AUTOMATIC RESET
31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0 0 0 0 0 626
31.02 TRIAL TIME 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 627
31.03 DELAY TIME 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 628
31.04 OVERCURRENT NO NO NO NO NO 629

262

31.05 OVERVOLTAGE NO NO NO NO NO 630
31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE NO NO NO NO 631
31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN NO NO NO NO NO 632
31.08 LINE CONV NO NO NO NO NO 633
32 SUPERVISION
32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 651
32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 652
32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 653
32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 654
32.05 CURRENT FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 655
32.06 CURRENT LIMIT 0 0 0 0 0 656
32.07 TORQUE 1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 657
32.08 TORQUE 1 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 658
32.09 TORQUE 2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 659
32.10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 660
32.11 REF1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 661
32.12 REF1 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 662
32.13 REF2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 663
32.14 REF2 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 664
32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 665
32.16 ACT1 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 666
32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 667
32.18 ACT2 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 668
33 INFORMATION
33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) 676
33.02 APPL SW VERSION (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) 677
33.03 TEST DATE (Date) (Date) (Date) (Date) (Date) 678
33.04 BOARD TYPE (Control board (Control board (Control board (Control board (Control board 679
type) type) type) type) type)
34 PROCESS VARIABLE
34.01 SCALE 100 100 100 100 100 701
34.02 P VAR UNIT % % % % % 702
34.03 SELECT P VAR 142 142 142 142 142 703
34.04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 704
34.05 TORQ ACT FILT TIM 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 705
34.06 RESET RUN TIME NO NO NO NO NO 706
35 MOT TEMP MEAS
35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE 726
35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L 110 110 110 110 110 727
35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L 130 130 130 130 130 728
35.04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE 729
35.05 MOT 2 TEMP ALM L 110 110 110 110 110 730
35.06 MOT 2 TEMP FLT L 130 130 130 130 130 731
35.07 MOT MOD COMPENSAT YES YES YES YES YES 732
35.08 MOT MOD COMP PTR 0 0 0 0 0 733
40 PID CONTROL
40.01 PID GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 851
40.02 PID INTEG TIME 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 852
40.03 PID DERIV TIME 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 853
40.04 PID DERIV FILTER 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 854
40.05 ERROR VALUE INV NO NO NO NO NO 855
40.06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 856
40.07 ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 857
40.08 ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 858
40.09 ACT1 MINIMUM 0 0 0 0 0 859
40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 860
40.11 ACT2 MINIMUM 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 861
40.12 ACT2 MAXIMUM 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 862

263

40.13 PID INTEGRATION ON ON ON ON ON 863
40.14 TRIM MODE OFF OFF OFF OFF 864
40.15 TRIM REF SEL AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 865
40.16 TRIM REFERENCE 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 866
40.17 TRIM RANGE ADJUST 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 867
40.18 TRIM SELECTION SPEED TRIM 868
40.19 ACTUAL FILT TIME 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s 869
40.20 SLEEP SELECTION not visible not visible OFF not visible not visible 870
40.21 SLEEP LEVEL not visible not visible 0.0 rpm not visible not visible 871
40.22 SLEEP DELAY not visible not visible 0.0 s not visible not visible 872
40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL not visible not visible 0% not visible not visible 873
40.24 WAKE UP DELAY not visible not visible 0.0 s not visible not visible 874
40.25 ACTUAL1 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 875
40.26 PID MINIMUM -100.0% -100.0% -100.0% -100.0% -100.0% -
40.27 PID MAXIMUM 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% -
40.28 TRIM REF PTR 0 0 0 0 0 -
42 BRAKE CONTROL
42.01 BRAKE CTRL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF -
42.02 BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF -
42.03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
42.04 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD 10 rpm 10 rpm 10 rpm 10 rpm 10 rpm -
42.06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT -
42.07 START TORQ REF SEL NO NO NO NO NO -
42.08 START TORQ REF 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% -
42.09 EXTEND RUN T 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
42.10 LOW REF BRK HOLD 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
45 ENERGY OPT
45.02 ENERGY TARIFF1 0 c/E 0 c/E 0 c/E 0 c/E 0 c/E -
45.06 E TARIFF UNIT EUR EUR EUR EUR EUR -
45.08 PUMP REF POWER 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% -
45.09 ENERGY RESET DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE -
50 ENCODER MODULE
50.01 PULSE NR 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 1001
50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE A --- B --- A --- B --- A --- B --- A --- B --- A --- B --- 1002
50.03 ENCODER FAULT WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 1003
50.04 ENCODER DELAY 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1004
50.05 ENCODER DDCS CH CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 1005
50.06 SPEED FB SEL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL 1006
50.07 ENC CABLE CHECK NO NO NO NO NO 1007
51 COMM MOD DATA 1026
...
52 STANDARD MODBUS
52.01 STATION NUMBER 1 1 1 1 1 1051
52.02 BAUDRATE 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 1052
52.03 PARITY ODD ODD ODD ODD ODD 1053
60 MASTER/FOLLOWER
60.01 MASTER LINK MODE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE 1195
60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR not visible not visible not visible TORQUE not visible 1196
60.03 WINDOW SEL ON not visible not visible not visible NO not visible 1167
60.04 WINDOW WIDTH POS not visible not visible not visible 0 not visible 1198
60.05 WINDOW WIDTH NEG not visible not visible not visible 0 not visible 1199
60.06 DROOP RATE 0 0 0 0 0 1200
60.07 MASTER SIGNAL 2 202 202 202 202 202 1201
60.08 MASTER SIGNAL 3 213 213 213 213 213 1202
70 DDCS CONTROL
70.01 CHANNEL 0 ADDR 1 1 1 1 1 1375
70.02 CHANNEL 3 ADDR 1 1 1 1 1 1376

264

70.03 CH1 BAUDRATE 4 Mbit/s 4 Mbit/s 4 Mbit/s 4 Mbit/s 4 Mbit/s 1377
70.04 CH0 DDCS HW CONN RING RING RING RING RING 1378
70.05 CH2 HW CONNECTION RING RING RING RING RING
72 USER LOAD CURVE
72.01 OVERLOAD FUNC NO NO NO NO NO 1411
72.02 LOAD CURRENT 1 500 500 500 500 500 1412
72.03 LOAD CURRENT 2 500 500 500 500 500 1413
72.04 LOAD CURRENT 3 500 500 500 500 500 1414
72.05 LOAD CURRENT 4 500 500 500 500 500 1415
72.06 LOAD CURRENT 5 500 500 500 500 500 1416
72.07 LOAD CURRENT 6 500 500 500 500 500 1417
72.08 LOAD CURRENT 7 500 500 500 500 500 1418
72.09 LOAD CURRENT 8 500 500 500 500 500 1419
72.10 LOAD FREQ 1 0 0 0 0 0 1420
72.11 LOAD FREQ 2 0 0 0 0 0 1421
72.12 LOAD FREQ 3 0 0 0 0 0 1422
72.13 LOAD FREQ 4 0 0 0 0 0 1423
72.14 LOAD FREQ 5 0 0 0 0 0 1424
72.15 LOAD FREQ 6 0 0 0 0 0 1425
72.16 LOAD FREQ 7 0 0 0 0 0 1426
72.17 LOAD FREQ 8 0 0 0 0 0 1427
72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT 800 800 800 800 800 1428
72.19 LOAD THERMAL TIME 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
72.20 LOAD COOLING TIME 0 0 0 0 0
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL
83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT 1609 W
83.02 EDIT COMMAND NO NO NO NO NO 1610
83.03 EDIT BLOCK 0 0 0 0 0 1611
83.04 TIMELEVEL SEL 100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms 1612
83.05 PASSCODE 0 0 0 0 0 1613
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
84.01 STATUS 1628
84.02 FAULTED PAR 1629
84.05 BLOCK1 NO NO NO NO NO 1630
84.06 INPUT1 0 0 0 0 0 1631
84.07 INPUT2 0 0 0 0 0 1632
84.08 INPUT3 0 0 0 0 0 1633
84.09 OUTPUT 0 0 0 0 0 1634
… … …
1644
84.79 OUTPUT 0 0 0 0 0 -
85 USER CONSTANTS
85.01 CONSTANT1 0 0 0 0 0 1645
85.02 CONSTANT2 0 0 0 0 0 1646
85.03 CONSTANT3 0 0 0 0 0 1647
85.04 CONSTANT4 0 0 0 0 0 1648
85.05 CONSTANT5 0 0 0 0 0 1649
85.06 CONSTANT6 0 0 0 0 0 1650
85.07 CONSTANT7 0 0 0 0 0 1651
85.08 CONSTANT8 0 0 0 0 0 1652
85.09 CONSTANT9 0 0 0 0 0 1653
85.10 CONSTANT10 0 0 0 0 0 1654
85.11 STRING1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 1655

265

90 D SET REC ADDR
90.01 AUX DS REF3 0 0 0 0 0 1735
90.02 AUX DS REF4 0 0 0 0 0 1736
90.03 AUX DS REF5 0 0 0 0 0 1737
90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE 1 1 1 1 1 1738
90.05 AUX DS SOURCE 3 3 3 3 3 1739
92 D SET TR ADDR
92.01 MAIN DS STATUS WORD 302 302 302 302 302 1771
92.02 MAIN DS ACT1 102 102 102 102 102 1772
92.03 MAIN DS ACT2 105 105 105 105 105 1773
92.04 AUX DS ACT3 305 305 305 305 305 1774
92.05 AUX DS ACT4 308 308 308 308 308 1775
92.06 AUX DS ACT5 306 306 306 306 306 1776
92.07 MSW B10 PTR 3.014.09 3.014.09 3.014.09 3.014.09 3.014.09 1777
92.08 MSW B13 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 1778
92.09 MSW B14 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 1779
95 HARDWARE SPECIF
95.01 FAN SPD CTRL MODE CONTROLLED 1825
95.02 FUSE SWITCH CTRL Inverter type dependent 1826
95.03 INT CONFIG USER 0 0 0 0 0 1827
95.04 EX/SIN REQUEST 1 1 1 1 1 1828
95.05 ENA INC SW FREQ 0 0 0 0 0 1829
95.06 LCU Q PW REF 0 0 0 0 0 1830
95.07 LCU DC REF 0 0 0 0 0 1831
95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL 106 106 106 106 106 1832
95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL 110 110 110 110 110 1833
95.10 TEMP INV AMBIENT 40°C 40°C 40°C 40°C 40°C 1834
95.11 SUPPLY CTRL MODE type specific type specific type specific type specific type specific 1835
95.12 LCU RUN PTR C.00000 C.00000 C.00000 C.00000 C.00000 1836
96 EXTERNAL AO
96.01 EXT AO1 SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED 1843
96.02 INVERT EXT AO1 NO NO NO NO NO 1844
96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 1845
96.04 FILTER EXT AO1 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 1846
96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 1847
96.06 EXT AO2 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 1848
96.07 INVERT EXT AO2 NO NO NO NO NO 1849
96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 1850
96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 1851
96.10 SCALE EXT AO2 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 1852
96.11 EXT AO1 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 1853
96.12 EXT AO2 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 1854
98 OPTION MODULES
98.01 ENCODER MODULE NO NO NO NO NO 1901
98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK NO NO NO NO NO 1902
98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 NO NO NO NO NO 1903
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE NO NO NO NO NO 1906
98.07 COMM PROFILE ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES 1907
98.09 DI/O EXT1 DI FUNC DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 1909
98.10 DI/O EXT2 DI FUNC DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 1910
98.11 DI/O EXT3 DI FUNC DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12 1911
98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP NO NO NO NO NO 1912
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR 1913
AI5 AI5 AI5 AI5 AI5
98.14 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR UNIPOLAR 1914
AI6 AI6 AI6 AI6 AI6

266

98.16 SIN FILT SUPERV NO NO NO NO NO 1915
99 START-UP DATA
99.01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH 1926
99.02 APPLICATION MACRO FACTORY HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL T CTRL SEQ CTRL 1927 W
99.03 APPLIC RESTORE NO NO NO NO NO 1928 W
99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC 1929
99.05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 1930 W
99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 1931 W
99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 1932 W
99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED 2900 rpm 2900 rpm 2900 rpm 2900 rpm 2900 rpm 1933 W
99.09 MOTOR NOM POWER 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 1934 W
99.10 MOTOR ID RUN MODE ID MAGN ID MAGN ID MAGN ID MAGN ID MAGN 1935 W
99.11 DEVICE NAME 1936

267
Chapter overview
Diagram Related
diagrams
Reference control chain, sheet 1 Continued on

Valid when FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL or T CTRL macro is active (see parameter 99.02). sheet 2
Reference control chain, sheet 1 Continued on

Valid when PID CTRL macro is active (see parameter 99.02). sheet 2
Reference control chain, sheet 2 Continued from

Valid with all macros (see parameter 99.02). sheet 1
Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable Start Interlock -

Valid with all macros (see parameter 99.02).
Handling of Reset and On/Off -

Valid with all macros (see parameter 99.02).

268
Reference control chain, sheet 1: FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL and

T CTRL macros (continued on the next page …)

269
… continued from the previous page

270
Reference control chain sheet 1: PID CTRL macro (continued on the next
page …)

271

272
Reference control chain sheet 2: All macros (continued on the next page …)

273

274
Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable and Start Interlock

275
Handling of Reset and On/Off

The diagram below is a detail to the previous diagram (Handling of Start, Stop, Run
Enable and Start Interlock).
RESET FROM PANEL
RESET FROM FIELDBUS OR MAIN CW / B7 (RESET)
IN LOCAL MODE
16.04 EXT RESET

AND
31 AUTORESET AND
AND
AND MAIN CW / B0 (ON/OFF)
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON

OR
SWITCH ON INHIBITED
FIELDBUS CW / B0

276

277
Index
A Application macros 85
factory 85, 87
ABB drives communication profile 210 hand/auto 85, 89
Absolute maximum frequency 99, 253 PID control 85, 91
Absolute maximum speed 99, 253 reference control chain diagram 270
ACCEL TIME 1 136 sequential control 85, 95
ACCEL/DECEL 135 torque control 85, 93
Acceleration user 85, 97
compensation 139 Application, selection for start-up assistant 41
motor 102 Automatic resets 69
ramps 59 Automatic start 54
settings 59 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 223
speed reference ramps 46 AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4 224
times 20
times, setting 42
B
Actual signals 53, 255–257
defined 99 Boolean values 40
diagnostics 44, 52, 53
display mode 29 C
displaying the full names 30
parameters 52, 53 Cable connection, monitoring 65
PID control 71 Clearing
settings 52, 53 fault history 30
speed controller 60 Communication
speed controller tuning 60 fault protection 66
user-defined variables 69 profiles 210–218
Actual values 53 using a fieldbus adapter module 193
actual signals 52, 53 Communication profiles 210–218
analogue outputs 50 ABB drives 210
defined 205 generic drive 215
digital inputs 51 Constant speeds 59
relay outputs 52 Control block diagrams 267–275
Adapter module, fieldbus 192 Control board temperature fault 68
Advent controller 197–198 Control panel
AI 63 basic keys 35
ALARM WORD 1 222 display mode 29
ALARM WORD 2 223 downloading drive data 37
ALARM WORD 4 225 drive control 27–28
ALARM WORD 5 226 overview 25–26
ALARM WORD 6 227 setting the display contrast 38
Analogue extension module 249 upload drive data 36
Analogue inputs Control word 203
optional, supervising 66 CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile 218
Analogue outputs Critical speeds 59
diagnostics 50
optional, supervising 66 D
parameters 50 DC
settings 50 hold 57
APPLICATION MACRO 101, 187
Index
278
intermediate circuit protection 69 Fault history

magnetising 57 clearing 30
overvoltage fault 66 viewing and resetting 30
undervoltage fault 67 FAULT WORD 1 220
DECEL TIME 1 136 FAULT WORD 2 221
Deceleration FAULT WORD 4 224
compensation 139 FAULT WORD 5 225
ramps 59 FAULT WORD 6 228
settings 59 FAULTED INT INFO 229
Default tasks, start-up assistant 41 Faults
Diagnostics communication, protection 66
actual signals 44, 52, 53 DC overvoltage 66
analogue outputs 50 earth, protection 65
digital inputs 51 external, settings 63
relay outputs 52 overcurrent 66
speed controller 60 preprogrammed 66
supervision of user-defined variables 69 control board temperature 68
Digital inputs DC undervoltage 67
diagnostics 51 drive temperature 67
optional, supervising 66 Enhanced drive temperature monitoring 67
parameters 51 input phase loss 68
settings 51 internal fault 68
Digital outputs overfrequency 68
optional, supervising 66 short circuit 68
Display contrast, setting 38 Features of the program 41–84
Displaying Fieldbus adapter
actual signal full names 30 communication parameters 193–194
fault history 30 module 192
Drive Fieldbus addresses 253
changing panel link ID number 39 Fieldbus control 191–230
data, downloading to the control panel 37 connecting two fieldbuses to a drive 192
data, uploading to the control panel 36 control word, status word 203
IR compensation for scalar controlled 62 interface 202–209
reference types and processing 46 References 203
start-up 15 Fieldbus reference scaling
temperature fault 67 ABB drives communication profile 214
Drive control CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile 218
parameters 199–201 generic drive 217
using I/O interface 21 Fieldbus, equivalent, defined 99
Flux braking 57, 58
E Flux optimisation 58
Earth fault protection 65

G
Energy optimizing 101, 164
EXT IO STATUS 228 Generic drive communication profile 215
External control 44
diagnostics 44 H
reference source diagram 45
stop, start, direction diagram 45 Hand/auto macro 85, 89
External fault 63 Hexagonal motor flux 63
F I
Factory macros 85–87 ID run procedure 22–23
Input bridge protection 69
Index
279
Input phase loss fault 68 Parameter settings, bipolar input in joystick mode
INT INIT FAULT 226 251
INT SC INFO 230 Parameters
Integer scaling 67 actual signals 52, 53
Internal fault 68 Advent controller 197–198
AI 63
K analogue outputs 50
automatic reset 69
Keys on the control panel 35 communication fault protection 66
data tables 258
L defined 99
LIMIT WORD 1 220 digital inputs 51
LIMIT WORD INV 227 drive control 199–201
Limits, adjustable 68 earth fault protection 65
Local control 44 external fault 63
fieldbus adapter 193–194
hexagonal motor flux 63
M
IR compensation 62
Macros motor phase loss 65
factory 85, 87 motor stall protection 65
hand/auto 85, 89 motor temperature 64
overview 85 motor underload protection 65
PID control 85, 91 operation limits 68
reference control chain diagram 270 optional analogue inputs and outputs 66
sequential control 95 parameter lock 69
defined 85 reference trimming 47
torque control 85, 93 relay outputs 52
user 97 scalar control 62
defined 85 selecting and changing values 32
Modbus speed controller tuning 60
adapter module 192 standard modbus link 195–196
addressing 196 start-up assistant 41
link, communication parameters 195–196 supervision 69
Motor PB, defined 253
identification 53 Performance figures
phase loss 65 speed controller 60
stall protection 65 torque control 60
temperature measurement using standard I/O PID control
72, 73 block diagrams 70
temperature thermal model 64 macro 85, 91
thermal protection 64 macro, reference control diagram 270
underload protection 65 parameters 71
settings 71
O sleep function 71
Power limit 69
Operation limits 68 Power loss ride-through 54
Overcurrent fault 66 Preprogrammed faults 66
Overfrequency fault 68 control board temperature 68
DC undervoltage 67
P drive temperature 67
Panel link ID number, changing 39 Enhanced drive temperature monitoring 67
Panel loss 63 input phase loss 68
Parameter lock 69 internal fault 68
overfrequency 68
Index
280
short circuit 68 flux braking 58

Prevention of unexpected start-up (POUS) 55 flux optimisation 58
Program features 41–84 hexagonal motor flux 63
Programmable IR compensation 62
analogue outputs 50 limits 68
digital inputs 51 local control 44
relay outputs 52 motor phase loss 65
Protection functions 63 motor stall protection 65
motor temperature 64
R motor underload protection 65
optional analogue inputs 66
Ramps optional analogue outputs 66
acceleration 59 optional digital inputs 66
deceleration 59 optional digital outputs 66
Reference parameter lock 69
control chain diagrams 270 PID control 71
handling 204 reference trimming 47
source relay outputs 52
EXT 1 45 scalar control 62
types and processing 46 speed controller 60
trimming 47 supervision 69
Relay outputs Short circuit fault 68
diagnostics 52 Sleep function 71
parameters 52 example 72
settings 52 Speed controller tuning 60
Resets, automatic 69 Speed reference
Resetting acceleration/deceleration ramps 46
fault history 30 parameters 250
Stall protection 65
S Start-up 15
Safe torque off (STO) 55 automatic start 54
Safely-limited speed (SLS) 56 basic settings 17–20
Scalar control 62 guided 15–16
Sequential control macro 95 Start-up assistant
defined 85 application selection 41
Setting, acceleration times 42 default tasks 41
Settings tasks and parameters 41
acceleration 59 Status word 203
actual signals 52, 53 auxiliary 219
AI 63 CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile 218
analogue outputs 50 Supervising user-selectable variables 69
automatic reset 69 SYSTEM FAULT WORD 222
automatic start 54 System overview 191
communication fault protection 66
constant speed 59 T
critical speeds 59 Temperature
DC hold 57 calculation method 64
DC magnetising 57 measurement using standard I/O 72, 73
deceleration 59 Torque control
digital inputs 51 macro 85, 93
earth fault protection 65 performance figures 60
external control 44 Tuning the speed controller 60
external fault 63
Index
281
U
Underload protection 65
User macros 97
defined 85
user-defined, supervising 69
V
Variables 69
Viewing fault history 30
Index
282
Index
3AFE64527592 REV L / EN
ABB Oy ABB Inc. ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co. Ltd.

Drives Automation Technologies No. 1, Block D, A-10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu
P.O. Box 184 Drives & Motors Chaoyang District
FI-00381 HELSINKI 16250 West Glendale Drive Beijing, P.R. China, 100015
FINLAND New Berlin, WI 53151 Telephone +86 10 5821 7788
Telephone +358 10 22 211 USA Fax +86 10 5821 7618
Telefax +358 10 22 22681 Telephone 262 785-3200 Internet www.abb.com/drives
Internet www.abb.com/drives 1-800-HELP-365
Fax 262 780-5135
ABB Drives User’s Manual
Pulse Encoder Interface Module

RTAC-01
Pulse Encoder Interface Module
RTAC-01
User’s Manual
3AFE 64486853 REV A EN
EFFECTIVE: 1.5.2002

Safety instructions
Overview This chapter states the general safety instructions that

must be followed when installing and operating the
RAIO-01 Analogue I/O Extension module.
The material in this chapter must be studied before
attempting any work on, or with, the unit.
In addition to the safety instructions given below, read
the complete safety instructions of the specific drive you
are working on.
General safety WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance

instructions work on the drive should be carried out by qualified
electricians only.
The drive and adjoining equipment must be properly
earthed.
Do not attempt any work on a powered drive. After
switching off the mains, always allow the intermediate
circuit capacitors 5 minutes to discharge before working
on the frequency converter, the motor or the motor
cable. It is good practice to check (with a voltage
indicating instrument) that the drive is in fact discharged
before beginning work.
The motor cable terminals of the drive are at a
dangerously high voltage when mains power is applied,
regardless of motor operation.
There can be dangerous voltages inside the drive from
external control circuits even when the drive mains
power is shut off. Exercise appropriate care when
working on the unit. Neglecting these instructions can
cause physical injury or death.
RTAC-01 User’s manual iii

Safety instructions
iv RTAC-01 User’s manual

Table of contents
Safety instructions
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
General safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Table of contents
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
What this manual contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Chapter 2 – Overview
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
The RTAC-01 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Module layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Delivery check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Warranty and liability information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Chapter 3 – Installation
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Terminal designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Encoder wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Phasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Encoder output types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Node address selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
RTAC-01 User’s manual v

Table of contents
Chapter 4 – Fault tracing

Diagnostic LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Option slot installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
I/O Module Adapter installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Appendix A – Technical data
vi RTAC-01 User’s manual

Intended The manual is intended for the people who are

audience responsible for commissioning and using an RTAC-01
Pulse Encoder Interface module with the ACS 800
drive. The reader is expected to have a basic
knowledge of electrical fundamentals, electrical wiring
practices and how to operate the drive.
Before you start It is assumed that the drive is installed and ready to
operate before starting the installation of the extension
module.
In addition to conventional installation tools, have the
drive manuals available during the installation as they
contain important information not included in this
manual. The drive manuals are referred to at various
points of this document.
RTAC-01 User’s manual 1-1

What this manual This manual contains information on the wiring,

contains configuration and use of the RTAC-01 module.
Safety instructions are featured in the first few pages
of this manual.
Chapter 2 – Overview contains a short description of
the RTAC-01 Pulse Encoder Interface module, a
delivery checklist and warranty information.
Chapter 3 – Installation contains instructions for
module hardware settings, mounting and cabling.
Chapter 4 – Fault tracing explains fault tracing and
the LED indications of the RTAC-01 module.
Appendix A contains technical data.
1-2 RTAC-01 User’s manual

Overview This chapter contains a short description of the Pulse

Encoder Interface module, a delivery checklist, and
warranty information.
The RTAC-01 The RTAC-01 Pulse Encoder Interface module offers an

module interface for a digital pulse encoder connection. A pulse
encoder should be used if accurate speed or position
(angle) feedback from the motor shaft is required.
Module layout
Node ID selector (S1)

345
F0 1 2
67
AB E 89
CD
Fixing screw (GND)

RTAC-01
PULSE ENCODER INTERFACE
GND
CHA
CHB
WD/
INIT
NODE ID
Diagnostic LEDs
X2
X1
CHASSIS
V OUT
CHA+
CHB+
SHLD
SHLD
CHZ+
CHA-
CHB-
+15V
+24V
CHZ-
V IN
0V
0V
12345678 123456
Fixing screw
(CHASSIS)
Terminal block for
encoder signals (X2)
Terminal block for encoder
power connections (X1)

Delivery check The option package contains:

• RTAC-01 module
• Encoder supply voltage selection jumper
• Two screws (M3×8 mm)
• This manual.
Compatibility The RTAC-01 is compatible with ACS 800 Standard

Application Program version ASXR7000 or later.
Warranty and The warranty for your ABB drive and options covers
liability manufacturing defects. The manufacturer carries no
information responsibility for damage due to transport or unpacking.
In no event and under no circumstances shall the
manufacturer be liable for damages and failures due to
misuse, abuse, improper installation, or abnormal
conditions of temperature, dust, or corrosives, or
failures due to operation above rated capacities. Nor
shall the manufacturer ever be liable for consequential
and incidental damages.
The period of manufacturer's warranty is 12 months,
and not more than 18 months, from the date of delivery.
Extended warranty may be available with certified start-
up. Contact your local distributor for details.
Your local ABB Drives company or distributor may have
a different warranty period, which is specified in their
sales terms, conditions, and warranty terms.
If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive,
contact your local distributor or ABB Drives office.
The technical data and specifications are valid at the
time of printing. ABB reserves the right to subsequent
alterations.

WARNING! Follow the safety instructions given in this

guide and in the ACS 800 Hardware Manual.
Mounting The RTAC-01 is to be inserted into the position marked

SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 on the drive. The module is held in
place with plastic retaining clips and two screws. The
screws also provide the earthing of the I/O cable shield
connected to the module, and interconnect the GND
signals of the module and the RMIO board.
On installation of the module, the signal and power
connection to the drive is automatically made through a
38-pin connector.
The module can alternatively be mounted on a DIN rail-
mountable AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter (not available
at the time of publication).
Mounting procedure:
1. Insert the module carefully into SLOT 1 or SLOT 2
on the RMIO board until the retaining clips lock the
module into position.
2. Fasten the two screws (included) to the stand-offs.
Note: Correct installation of the screws is essential for

fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation
of the module.

Terminal
designations
X1 Marking Description
1 0V Encoder power supply, either 15 or 24 V DC (according

to jumper selection on terminals 4, 5 and 6).
2 0V (0 V is also used with single-ended encoder connection
for balancing the A+, B+ and/or Z+ conductors. See
3 V OUT Figures 3-3 to 3-6.)
4 +15V Encoder supply voltage selection:

Terminals 4 and 5 connected: 15 V (default)
5 V IN Terminals 5 and 6 connected: 24 V
(Jumper is supplied with the RTAC module)
6 +24V Max. 5 watts (see Power consumption below)
Connected internally on the circuit board.
X2 Marking Description
1 SHLD For earthing of the encoder cable shields. Internally

Shield
2 SHLD connected to the frame.
3 A+ A • Max. signal frequency: 200 kHz

• Signal levels:
4 A- A “1” > 7.6 V, “0” < 5 V (for 15 V supply)
“1” > 12.2 V, “0” < 8 V (for 24 V supply)
5 B+ B • Input channels isolated from the logic, power supply,
6 B- B and earth
• When the drive runs in the Forward direction,
7 Z+ Z channel A should lead channel B by 90° (electrical)
• Channel Z: One pulse per revolution (used in
8 Z- Z positioning applications only)

Power Without an external power supply, the RTAC-01 can

consumption supply 5 W (at either 15 V or 24 V DC) to the encoder.
For higher power, an external power supply is required.
As the power consumption of the module depends on
many factors (e.g. max. speed of the motor, encoder
pulse number per revolution, encoder cable length and
leakage capacitance), it should be checked on each
occasion if an external power supply is needed. See the
encoder documentation for details. Figure 3-2 shows
the approximate power consumption of an encoder with
differential outputs, based on actual measurements.
The external power supply should be connected as
shown below.
Note: With an external power supply, the voltage

selection jumper should be removed from X1.
RTAC
X1
0V 1 0V
2 0V
Vcc 3 V OUT
Vcc 0V
4 +15V
5 V IN
6 +24V
X2
2 SHLD
Figure 3-1 External power supply connection diagram

Encoder power Cable length

consumption
300 m
Pidle + 2.0 W
Pidle + 1.75 W
150 m
Pidle + 1.5 W
Pidle + 1.25 W
100 m
Pidle + 1.0 W
Pidle + 0.75 W
Pidle + 0.5 W
20 m
Pidle + 0.25 W
Pidle
EPN = 1024 ppr: 0 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000 Motor
EPN = 2048 ppr: 0 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 speed
(rpm)
EPN = 512 ppr: 0 600 1200 1800 2400 3000 3600 4200 4800 5400 6000
EPN = Encoder pulse number

Pidle = Encoder power consumption when idle. See encoder documentation.
Figure 3-2 Approximate power consumption of an encoder for four different

cable lengths. The chart is based on a measurement with a 24 V DC, 1024 ppr
pulse encoder with differential outputs coupled to a motor shaft rotating at 1500
rpm.

Encoder wiring The pulse encoder should be connected to the RTAC

module with a cable specified below.
Cable 4 × (2+1) Twisted pair cable with individual

construction and overall shields.
Conductor cross-
0.5 to 1.0 mm2
sectional area
Dependent on encoder output type as follows:
300 m (differential push-pull)
Maximum cable length
200 m (single-ended push-pull)
100 m (open collector or emitter)
Either a single-ended or differential connection can be

used, but the manufacturer’s recommendations should
be taken into account. Starting on page 3-8, there are
wiring diagrams for different encoder output types.
Compare encoder documentation and the diagrams
below to determine the output type.
Note: The cable shields should be earthed at the RTAC

module only if the encoder is not isolated from the
motor and earth. However, if the encoder is isolated
from the motor and earth, the cable shields are to be
connected to the encoder housing also.
Note: Do not route the encoder cables parallel to power

(eg. motor) cables.

Phasing When the encoder is connected correctly, running the

drive in the Forward (positive speed reference) direction
should produce a positive encoder speed feedback.
On incremental encoders, the two output channels,
usually marked 1 and 2 or A and B, are 90° (electrical)
apart from each other. When rotated clockwise, most
encoders – but not all – have channel 1 leading channel
2 as illustrated below. Determine the leading channel by
referring to the encoder documentation or by measuring
with an oscilloscope.
A or 1
A or 1
B or 2
B or 2
Z or 0
Z or 0
The encoder output channel that leads when the drive

runs Forward should be connected to RTAC input A, the
output channel that trails to RTAC input B.
The zero reference output channel (usually marked 0, N
or Z) needs to be connected in positioning applications
only.

Encoder output The diagram presents some typical encoder output

types types. The following pages include wiring diagrams for
each output type.
Open collector Open emitter

Push-pull
(Sinking) (Sourcing)
VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC
RL1
RL
OUT OUT OUT

RL2 RL
VCC = Encoder input power supply voltage

RL = Load resistor at encoder output channel

Wiring diagrams
Encoder output type: Push-pull
Output pulse order in Forward rotation: 1, 2

1
2
(With encoders with 2 as the leading output,

1 and 2 should be wired to RTAC terminals B+ and A+ respectively.
1 and 2 should be wired to RTAC terminals B- and A- respectively.)
Differential connection
RTAC
X2
1 SHLD
2 SHLD
1 3 A+
1 4 A-
2 5 B+
2 6 B-
0 7 Z+
0 8 Z-
VCC 0V
X1
1 0V
2 0V
3 V OUT
4 +15V
Encoder supply 15V
5 V IN
voltage selection 24V
6 +24V
(15 or 24 V)
Figure 3-3 Differential wiring of pulse encoders with push-pull outputs

Encoder output type: Push-pull

1
2

1 and 2 should be wired to RTAC terminals B+ and A+ respectively.
1 and 2 should be wired to RTAC terminals B- and A- respectively.)
Single-ended connection
RTAC
X2
1 SHLD
2 SHLD
1 3 A+
4 A-
2 5 B+
6 B-
0 7 Z+
8 Z-
VCC 0V
X1
1 0V
2 0V
3 V OUT
4 +15V
Encoder supply 15V
5 V IN
6 +24V
(15 or 24 V)
Figure 3-4 Single-ended wiring of pulse encoders with push-pull outputs

Encoder output type: Open collector (Sinking)

1
2

1 and 2 should be wired to RTAC terminals B+ and A+ respectively)
RTAC
X2
1 SHLD
2 SHLD
1 3 A+
4 A-
2 5 B+
6 B-
0 7 Z+
8 Z-
VCC 0V
24V: 1.8…2.2 kΩ
15V: 1.0…1.5 kΩ
0.5 W
X1
1 0V
2 0V
3 V OUT
4 +15V
Encoder supply 15V
5 V IN
6 +24V
(15 or 24 V)
Figure 3-5 Wiring of pulse encoders with open collector (sinking) outputs.

Encoder output type: Open emitter (Sourcing)

1
2

1 and 2 should be wired to RTAC terminals B+ and A+ respectively)
RTAC
X2
1 SHLD
2 SHLD
1 3 A+
4 A-
2 5 B+
6 B-
0 7 Z+
8 Z-
VCC 0V
24V: 1.8…2.2 kΩ
15V: 1.0…1.5 kΩ
0.5 W
X1
1 0V
2 0V
3 V OUT
4 +15V
Encoder supply 15V
5 V IN
6 +24V
(15 or 24 V)
Figure 3-6 Wiring of pulse encoders with open emitter (sourcing) outputs.

Node address If the RTAC-01 module is mounted onto external I/O

selection Module Adapter AIMA-01, choose the proper node ID
for the module using the node ID selector (S1).
The settings 0…F correspond to node IDs 16…31. The
default setting is 0 (node ID 16).
Setting the node ID is not required when the module is
mounted into SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 on the drive.
Programming The RTAC-01 is programmed through drive parameters.

These parameters must be checked and adjusted. For
further information, see the drive Firmware Manual,
Parameter Groups 50 and 98.

Diagnostic LEDs There are three diagnostic LEDs on the RTAC-01

module. The CHA (green) and CHB (green) LEDs show
the activity on channels A and B. The WD/INIT (yellow)
LED shows the status of the module.
WD/INIT is lit when the drive is configuring the module
at power-up.
Option slot In case the LED does not go out after one second:
installation
• The configuration has failed.
- Cycle the power supply of the drive.
• The module has a hardware failure.
- Ensure the 38-pin connector is properly inserted.
- Contact an ABB service representative.
I/O Module Adapter • There is no communication with the drive.
installation
- Check that the drive is powered.
- Check the module node ID.
- Check that the fibre optic cables are connected
correctly (transmitters to receivers) and the
connectors properly inserted.
- Check the fibre optic cables visually for dirt or
flaws.
- Ensure the 38-pin connector is properly inserted.
- Try new fibre optic cables.
- Contact an ABB service representative.


Dimensions:
34 mm
CHASSIS
RTAC-01
PULSE ENCODER INTERFACE
GND
12345678 123456
SHLD
F0 1
SHLD
BCDE
23
45
67
CHA 89A
CHA+
CHB
CHA-
CHB+
X2 WD/
95 mm
INIT
CHB-
NODE ID
CHZ+
CHZ-
0V
0V
V OUT
+15V
X1
V IN
+24V
20
62 mm
mm
Mounting: Into an option slot of the RMIO board of the

drive or onto external I/O Module Adapter (AIMA-01).
Degree of protection: IP 20
Ambient conditions: The applicable ambient
conditions specified for the drive in its Hardware Manual
are in effect.
Hardware settings:
• Rotary switch for node ID selection (range 16…31)
Connectors:
• 38-pin parallel bus connector
• Two (one 6-pole, one 8-pole) non-detachable screw-
type terminal blocks for max. 2.5 mm2 wire.
RTAC-01 User’s manual A-1

Encoder interface:
• CH A, CH B, CH Z, differential or single-ended
• Output voltage 1: +24 V DC ±10%, 5 W max., short-
circuit proof
• Output voltage 2: +15 V DC ±10%, 5 W max., short-
circuit proof
• Signal levels:
"1" >7.6 V, "0" < 5 V (for 15 V supply)
"1" >12.2 V, "0" < 8 V (for 24 V supply)
• Frequency: 200 kHz (max.)
• Speed feedback resolution: 0.00305% (15 bits)
• Speed feedback accuracy: 50 ppm
• Maximum encoder cable length:
- 300 m (differential push-pull)
- 200 m (single-ended push-pull)
- 100 m (open collector or emitter)
• Isolated from the logic and earth. Test voltage:
1.5 kV AC, 1 minute
General
• Max. power consumption:
140 mA (5 V) + 55 mA (24 V)
• Estimated min. lifetime: 100 000 h
• All materials UL/CSA-approved
• Complies with EMC standards EN 50081-2 and
EN 50082-2
A-2 RTAC-01 User’s manual

3AFE 64486853 REV A EN
EFFECTIVE: 1.5.2002
RTAC-01
ABB Oy ABB Inc.

AC Drives Drives & Power Products
P.O. Box 184 16250 West Glendale Drive
FIN-00381 Helsinki New Berlin, WI 53151
FINLAND USA
Telephone:+358 10 222 000 Telephone:262 785-8378
Fax: +358 10 222 2681 800 243-4384
Internet: www.abb.com Fax: 262 780-5135
ACS800
Hardware Manual
ACS800-11 Drives (5.5 to 110 kW)
ACS800-U11 Drives (7.5 to 125 hp)
List of related manuals
Drive hardware manuals and guides Code (English)
ACS800-11/U11 Drives Hardware Manual (5.5 to 110 kW, 7.5 to 125 hp) 3AFE68367883
Drive firmware manuals and guides

ACS800 Standard Control Program Firmware Manual and 3AFE64527592
ACS800 IGBT Supply Control Program Firmware Manual 3AFE68315735
ACS800 System Control Program Firmware Manual and 3AFE64670646
ACS800 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine Control Program 3AFE64492641
Supplement to Firmware Manual for System Control Program
ACS800 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine Drive Control Program 3AFE68437890
Supplement to Firmware Manual for ACS800 Standard Control Program
ACS800 Crane Control Program Firmware Manual 3AFE68775230
ACS800 Master/Follower Application Guide 3AFE64590430
ACS800 Pump Control Application Program Firmware Manual 3AFE68478952
ACS800 Extruder Control Program Supplement 3AFE64648543
ACS800 Centrifuge Control Program Supplement 3AFE64667246
ACS800 Traverse Control Program Supplement 3AFE64618334
ACS800 Winch Control Program (+N698) Firmware Manual 3AUA0000031177
ACS800 Rod Pump Light Control Program Firmware Manual 3AUA0000005304
etc.
Option manuals and guides

ACS800-01/04/11/31/104/104LC Safe torque off function (+Q967), 3AUA0000063373
Application guide
RDCO-01/02/03 DDCS Communication Option Modules 3AFE64492209
AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter User's Manual 3AFE64661442
NBRA-6xx Braking Choppers Installation and Start-up Guide 3AFY58920541
ACS800 Vibration Damper Installation Guide 3AFE68295351
Manuals and quick guides for I/O extension modules, fieldbus adapters, etc.
You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. See section
Document library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover. For manuals not available in the
Document library, contact your local ABB representative.
ACS800-11/U11 manuals
ACS800-11 Drives
5.5 to 110 kW
ACS800-U11 Drives
7.5 to 125 hp
Hardware Manual
3AFE68367883 Rev C
EN
 2013 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

5
Safety instructions

This chapter contains the safety instructions which you must follow when installing,
operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or
damage may occur to the drive, motor or driven equipment. Read the safety
instructions before you work on the unit.
Use of warnings and notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual: warnings and
notes. Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or
death and/or damage to the equipment. They also tell you how to avoid the danger.
Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a
subject. The warning symbols are used as follows:
Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause

physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.
General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by

electricity, which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the
equipment.
Electrostatic discharge warning warns of electrostatic discharge which
can damage the equipment.
Safety instructions
6

These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor.
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment:
• Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive.
• Never work on the drive, motor cable or motor when main power is applied.
After disconnecting the input power, always wait for 5 min to let the intermediate
circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive, motor or
motor cable.
Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least 1 Mohm)
that:
1. voltage between drive input phases U1, V1 and W1 and the frame is close to
0 V.
2. voltage between terminals UDC+ and UDC- and the frame is close to 0 V.
• Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the
external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may cause
dangerous voltages inside the drive even when the main power on the drive is
switched off.
• Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive or drive
modules.
• When reconnecting the motor cable, always check that the phase order is
correct.
• After maintaining or modifying a drive safety circuit or changing circuit boards

inside the module, retest the functioning of the safety circuit according to the
start-up instructions.
• Do not change the electrical installations of the drive except for the essential
control and power connections. Changes may affect the safety performance or
operation of the drive unexpectedly. All customer-made changes are on the
customer's responsibility.
Note:
• The motor cable terminals on the drive are at a dangerously high voltage when
the input power is on, regardless of whether the motor is running or not.
• The brake control terminals (UDC+, UDC-, R+ and R- terminals) carry a

dangerous DC voltage (over 500 V).
• Depending on the external wiring, dangerous voltages (115 V, 220 V or 230 V)

may be present on the terminals of relay outputs RO1 to RO3.
Safety instructions
7
• At installation sites above 2000 m (6562 ft), the terminals of the RMIO board
and optional modules attached to the board do not fulfil the Protective Extra
Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178 and EN 61800-5-1.
• The Prevention of unexpected start-up function (option +Q950) does not

remove the voltage from the main and auxiliary circuits.
• The Safe torque off function (option +Q967) does not remove the voltage from
the main and auxiliary circuits.
Grounding
These instructions are intended for all who are responsible for the grounding of the
drive.
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury, death,
increased electromagnetic interference and equipment malfunction:
• Ground the drive, motor and adjoining equipment to ensure personnel safety in
all circumstances, and to reduce electromagnetic emission and pick-up.
• Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized as required by

safety regulations.
• In a multiple-drive installation, connect each drive separately to protective

earth (PE).
• ACS800-11: In European CE compliant installations and in other installations

where EMC emissions must be minimized, make a 360° high frequency
grounding of cable entries in order to suppress electromagnetic disturbances.
In addition, connect the cable shields to protective earth (PE) in order to meet
safety regulations.
• Drives with EMC filter option +E202 or +E200 are not suitable for use in an IT
system (an ungrounded power system or a high-resistance-grounded [over
30 ohms] power system). Before connecting the drive to the power system,
disconnect the EMC filter capacitors as described in section IT (ungrounded)
systems on page 70.
Note:
• Power cable shields are suitable for equipment grounding conductors only
when adequately sized to meet safety regulations.
• As the normal leakage current of the drive is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA

DC (stated by EN 61800-5-1, 4.3.5.5.2), a fixed protective earth connection is
required.
Safety instructions
8
Mechanical installation and maintenance

These instructions are intended for all who install and service the drive.
• Handle the unit carefully.
• ACS800-11: The drive is heavy. Do not lift it alone. Do not lift the unit by the
front cover. Place the unit only on its back.
Do not tilt!
• Beware of hot surfaces. Some parts, such as heatsinks of power

semiconductors, remain hot for a while after disconnection of the electrical
supply.
• Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive when installing.
Electrically conductive dust inside the unit may cause damage or
malfunctioning.
• Ensure sufficient cooling.
• Do not fasten the drive by riveting or welding.
Safety instructions
9
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause damage to the printed
circuit boards:
• The printed circuit boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic

discharge. Wear a grounding wrist band when handling the boards. Do not
touch the boards unnecessarily.
Fibre optic cables
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause equipment malfunction

and damage to the fibre optic cables:
• Handle the fibre optic cables with care. When unplugging optic cables, always
grab the connector, not the cable itself. Do not touch the ends of the fibres with
bare hands as the fibre is extremely sensitive to dirt. The minimum allowed
bend radius is 35 mm (1.4 in.).
Safety instructions
10
Operation
These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation of the drive or operate
the drive.
• Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure that the motor
and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range
provided by the drive. The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at
speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly
to the power line.
• Do not activate automatic fault reset functions of the Standard Control Program
if dangerous situations can occur. When activated, these functions will reset
the drive and resume operation after a fault.
• Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device (disconnecting means);
instead, use the control panel keys and , or commands via the I/O
board of the drive. The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC
capacitors (i.e. power-ups by applying power) is five in ten minutes.
• The Safe torque off function (option +Q967) can be used for stopping the drive
in emergency stop situations. In the normal operating mode, use the Stop
command instead.
Note:
• If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive (with
Standard Control Program) will start immediately after fault reset unless the
drive is configured for 3-wire (a pulse) start/stop.
• When the control location is not set to Local (L not shown in the status row of
the display), the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive. To stop
the drive using the control panel, press the LOC/REM key and then the stop
key .
Safety instructions
11

These are additional warnings concerning permanent magnet motor drives. Ignoring
the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.
Note: Controlling a permanent magnet motor is only allowed using the ACS800
Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor Drive Control Program.
WARNING! Do not work on the drive when the permanent magnet motor is rotating.
Also, when the supply power is switched off and the inverter is stopped, a rotating
permanent magnet motor feeds power to the main circuit of the drive including the
input power terminals.
Before installation and maintenance work on the drive:
• Stop the motor.
• Ensure that the motor cannot rotate during work.
• Ensure that there is no voltage on the drive power terminals:
Alternative 1) Disconnect the motor from the drive with a safety switch or by other
means. Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input, output or DC
terminals (U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+, UDC-).
Alternative 2) Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input, output
or DC terminals (U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+, UDC-). Ground the drive output
terminals temporarily by connecting them together as well as to the PE.
Alternative 3) If possible, both of the above.
Start-up and operation
WARNING! Do not run the motor over the rated speed. Motor overspeed leads to
overvoltage which may damage the capacitors in the intermediate circuit of the drive.
Safety instructions
12
Safety instructions
13
Table of contents
List of related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Safety instructions
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Use of warnings and notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation and maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Mechanical installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Permanent magnet motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installation and maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Start-up and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Table of contents

Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Categorization according to the frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Categorization according to the plus code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Installation and commissioning flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Operation principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Line-side converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
AC voltage and current waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
DDCS communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Main circuit and control diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Control block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connection diagram of the RMIO board in the line-side converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Type code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table of contents
14
Unpacking the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Checking the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Moving the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Requirements for the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Free space around the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Mounting the drive on the wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Units without vibration dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Units with vibration dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cabinet installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Preventing cooling air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Unit above another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Installing cabinet duct plates (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Installation kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Assembly drawing for cabinet duct plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Motor selection and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Protecting the motor insulation and bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Requirements table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Permanent magnet motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Supply connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Disconnecting device (disconnecting means) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Thermal overload and short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Thermal overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Ground fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Emergency stop devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Prevention of unexpected start-up (option +Q950) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Safe torque off (option +Q967) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Safe torque off circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Selecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Alternative power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Motor cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Additional US requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Armored cable / shielded power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table of contents
15
Power factor compensation capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Equipment connected to the motor cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Installation of safety switches, contactors, connection boxes, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Bypass connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using a contactor between the drive and the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Protecting the relay output contacts and attenuating disturbances in case of inductive loads. . . . . 65
Selecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Relay cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Control panel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Installation sites above 2000 metres (6562 feet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Routing the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Control cable ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Checking the insulation of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Supply cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Motor and motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IT (ungrounded) systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Disconnecting the EMC filter capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Units of frame size R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Units of frame size R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Conductor stripping lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Allowed wire sizes, tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Wall installed units (European version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Power cable installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Wall installed units (US version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Warning sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Cabinet installed units (IP00, UL type open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Connecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Terminals .............................................................. 78
360 degrees grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Connecting the shield wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Cabling of I/O and fieldbus modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Pulse encoder module cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fastening the control cables and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Installation of optional modules and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Connecting a PC to the motor-side RMIO board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Prevention of unexpected start-up (+Q950) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Installation of the AGPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table of contents
16
Start-up and validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Safe torque off (+Q967). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Installation of the ASTO board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Validation and start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Note on terminal labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
External control connections (non-US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
External control connections (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
RMIO board specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Constant voltage output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Auxiliary power output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
DDCS fibre optic link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
24 VDC power input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Start-up and use

Start-up and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
To control the line-side converter... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
To control the motor-side converter... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Removing the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Table of contents
17
Line-side converter actual signals and parameters in the motor-side converter control program . 103
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
95 HARDWARE SPECIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ACS800-11/U11 specific parameters in the IGBT Supply Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
31 AUTOMATIC RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Fixed parameters with the ACS800-11 and ACS800-U11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Maintenance
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Main cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fan replacement (R5, R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Additional fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Replacement (R5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Replacement (R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Reforming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fault tracing
Faults and warnings displayed by the CDP 312R control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Conflicting ID numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Technical data
IEC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Temperature derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Altitude derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Mains cable fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Dimensions, weights and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
NEMA data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Table of contents
18
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Input cable fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Cable Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Input power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Motor connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
AGPS-11C (option +Q950) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
ASTO-11C (option +Q967) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Compliance with the European EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Compliance with the European Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
First environment (drive of category C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
“C-tick” marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
UL/CSA markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
UL checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Frame size R5 (IP21, UL type 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Frame size R6 (IP21, UL type 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Cabinet duct plates (optional), frame size R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Cabinet duct plates (optional), frame size R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Package (frame size R5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Package (frame size R6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
AGPS board with enclosure (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ASTO board with enclosure (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
External +24 V power supply for the RMIO boards via terminal X34
Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Connecting +24 V external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
RMIO board of the motor-side converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
RMIO board of the line-side converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Frame size R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Frame size R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Table of contents
19
Further information
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Document library on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Table of contents
20
Table of contents
21

This chapter describes the intended audience and contents of this manual. It
contains a flowchart of steps in checking the delivery, installing and commissioning
the drive. The flowchart refers to chapters/sections in this manual and other
manuals.
Intended audience
This manual is intended for people who plan the installation, install, commission, use
and service the drive. Read the manual before working on the drive. The reader is
expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical components and
electrical schematic symbols.
This manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.
Special US instructions for installations within the United States that must be
installed per the National Electrical Code and local codes are marked with (US).
Categorization according to the frame size

Some instructions, technical data and dimensional drawings which concern only
certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size R2, R3, ... or R8.
The frame size is not marked on the drive designation label. To identify the frame
size of your drive, see the rating tables in chapter Technical data.
The ACS800-11/U11 is manufactured in frame sizes R5 and R6.
Categorization according to the plus code

The instructions, technical data and dimensional drawings which concern only
certain optional selections are marked with plus codes, e.g. +E202. The options
included in the drive can be identified from the plus codes visible on the type
designation label of the drive. The plus code selections are listed in chapter
Operation principle and hardware description under Type code.

22
Contents
The chapters of this manual are briefly described below.
Safety instructions give safety instructions for the installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance of the drive.
Introduction to this manual lists the steps in checking the delivery and installing and
commissioning the drive and refers to chapters/sections in this manual and other
manuals for particular tasks.
Operation principle and hardware description describes the drive.
Mechanical installation instructs in how to place and mount the drive.
Planning the electrical installation instructs in the motor and cable selection,
protections and cable routing.
Electrical installation shows how to wire the drive.
describes the electrical installation of the optional Prevention of unexpected start-up
function (+Q950).
Installation of the ASTO board (Safe torque off, +Q967) describes the electrical
installation of the optional Safe torque off function (+Q967).
Motor control and I/O board (RMIO) shows the external control connections to the
I/O board.
Installation checklist contains a list for checking the mechanical and electrical
installation of the drive.
Start-up and use contains guide lines of the start-up and use of the drive
Actual signals and parameters contains listings of parameters specific to the
ACS800-11 and ACS800-U11.
Maintenance contains preventive maintenance instructions.
Fault tracing contains guidelines for fault tracing.
Technical data contains the technical specifications of the drive, e.g. the ratings,
sizes and technical requirements and provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE
and other markings.
Dimensional drawings contains the dimensional drawings of the drive.
External +24 V power supply for the RMIO boards via terminal X34 describes how to
connect an external +24 V power supply for the RMIO board via terminal X34.

23
Installation and commissioning flowchart
Task See
Identify the frame size of your drive: R5 or R6. Technical data / IEC data or NEMA data
Plan the installation. Technical data

Check the ambient conditions, ratings, required Planning the electrical installation
cooling air flow, input power connection, compatibility
of the motor, motor connection, and other technical
data.
Select the cables. Option manual (if optional equipment is
included)
Unpack and check the units. Mechanical installation: Unpacking the unit.
Check that all necessary optional modules and If the converter has been non-operational for
equipment are present and correct. more than one year, the converter DC link
Only intact units may be started up. capacitors need to be reformed, see
Maintenance: Capacitors.
If the drive is about to be connected to an IT Type code

(ungrounded) system, check that the drive is not
Electrical installation: IT (ungrounded) systems.
equipped with EMC filtering intended for grounded
systems, or disconnect the EMC filter capacitors.
Check the installation site. Mechanical installation: Before installation

Technical data
Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet. Mechanical installation
Route the cables. Planning the electrical installation: Routing the

cables
Check the insulation of the motor and the motor Electrical installation: Checking the insulation of
cable. the installation

24
Task See
Connect the power cables. Electrical installation

Connect the motor cable.
Connect the control and auxiliary control cables. Electrical installation, Motor control and I/O
board (RMIO), and the optional module manual
delivered with the module.
Check the installation. Installation checklist
Commission the drive. Start-up and use, appropriate application

program firmware manual
Term / Abbreviation Description

AGPS Power supply board for IGBT gate driver boards. Used in implemen-
tation of the optional Prevention of unexpected start-up function.
AIMA I/O module adapter. An extension unit for mounting I/O extension
modules outside the drive unit.
ASTO Safe torque off board. An optional board used to implement the Safe
torque off function.
CDP 312R Control panel type
DDCS Distributed drives communication system; a protocol used in optical
fiber communication.
DTC Direct torque control
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
GCUR Current measurement board
GDIO Charging diode board
GINT Main circuit board
GRFC Filter board
GRFCU EMC filter unit
GVAR Varistor board
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor
IT system Type of supply network that has no (low-impedance) connection to
ground/earth.
PCC Point of common coupling
POUS Prevention of unexpected start-up
RAIO Analog I/O extension module

25
RCAN CANopen adapter module

RCNA ControlNet adapter module
RDCO DDCS communication module
RDIO Digital I/O extension module
RDNA DeviceNet™ adapter module
RETA Ethernet adapter module for Modbus/TCP and EtherNet/IP protocols
RFI Radio-frequency interference
RIBA InterBus-S adapter module
RLON LONWORKS® adapter module
RMBA Modbus adapter module
RMBP Modbus plus adapter module
RMIO Supply/motor control and I/O board
RPBA PROFIBUS-DP adapter module
RRFC RFI filter board (filter board for meeting the EMC requirements)
RRIA Resolver adapter module
RTAC Pulse encoder adapter module
STO Safe torque off
THD Total harmonic distortion
TN system Type of supply network that provides a direct connection to ground
(earth)

26

27

This chapter describes the operating principle and construction of the drive in short.
Product overview
The ACS800-11/U11 is a four-quadrant wall mountable drive for controlling AC
motors. The main circuit consists of two IGBT converters, a line-side converter and a
motor-side converter, integrated into the same frame.
IP21 (UL type 1)
Cooling fan
Control panel
CDP 312R
Heatsink
Front cover
Connection box cover
Frame size R6

28
Motor-side converter RMIO board
I/O terminals
Line-side converter RMIO board

UDC+
UDC-
X41
U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2
Power cable terminals
PE
Frame size R5 without front and connection box covers

29
Line-side converter RMIO board
Motor-side converter RMIO board

UDC+
UDC-
I/O terminals
X41
U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2
Power cable terminals
PE
Frame size R6 without front and connection box covers

30
Terms
Line-side converter: A converter that is connected to the supply network and is
capable of transferring energy from the network to the DC link or from the DC link to
the network.
Motor-side converter: A converter that is connected to the motor and controls the
motor operation.
Four-quadrant operation: Operation of a machine as a motor or generator in
quadrants I, II, III and IV as shown below. In quadrants I and III, the machine
operates as a motor, whereas in quadrants II and IV as a generator (regenerative
braking).
Torque
II I
Speed
III IV
Operation principle
The line-side and motor-side converters consist of six insulated gate bipolar
transistors with free wheeling diodes.
The converters have their own control programs. The parameters of both programs
can be viewed and changed using one control panel. The control panel can be
switched between the converters as described in chapter Start-up and use.
Line-side converter
The IGBT supply module rectifies three phase AC current to direct current for the
intermediate DC link of the drive. The intermediate DC link is further supplying the
motor-side converter that runs the motor. The line filter suppresses the AC voltage
and current harmonics.
The IGBT supply module is a four-quadrant switching-mode converter, i.e. the power
flow through the converter is reversible. By default, the converter controls the DC link
voltage to the peak value of the line-to-line voltage. The DC voltage reference can be
set also higher by a parameter. The control of the IGBT power semiconductors is
based on the Direct Torque Control (DTC) method also used in the motor control of
the drive. Two line currents and the DC link voltage are measured and used for the
control.

31
AC voltage and current waveforms

The AC current is sinusoidal at a unity power factor. The IGBT supply unit does not
generate characteristic current or voltage overtones like a traditional 6- or 12-pulse
bridge does.
The Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) in current is given in chapter Technical data:
Input power connection. The THD in voltage depends slightly on the Short Circuit
Ratio in the Point of Common Coupling (PCC). The high frequency switching and
high du/dt slightly distort the voltage waveform at the input of the converter.
Typical line current (i) and voltage (u) waveforms are shown below.
u (V)
t (ms)
i (A)
t (ms)
Example spectra of the current and voltage distortion at the output of the transformer
are shown below. Each harmonic is presented as compared to fundamental voltage
(reference value = 1). n denotes the ordinal number of the harmonic.
Test 13 Test 13
1.6 1.6
1.4 1.4
1.2 1.2
1.0 1.0
0.8 IL1 [A] 0.8 UL12 [%]
0.6 0.6
0.4 0.4
0.2 0.2
0.0 0.0
n n
2
5
8
17
20
23
32
35
44
47
50
11
14
26
29
38
41
35
2
8
11
14
17
20
23
26
29
32
38
41
44
47
50

32
Motor control
The motor control is based on the Direct Torque Control (DTC) method. Two phase
currents and DC link voltage are measured and used for the control. The third phase
current is measured for earth fault protection.

The drive contains the following printed circuit boards as standard:
• main circuit board (GINT)
• motor control and I/O board (RMIO), 2 pcs
• EMC filter unit (GRFCU) when EMC equipment is selected
• filter boards (GRFC or RRFC)
• varistor board (GVAR)
• control panel (CDP 312R)
• current measurement board (GCUR, in frame size R5 only)
• charging diode board (GDIO).
DDCS communication modules

The drive includes an RDCO-03 module in the line-side converter and another
RDCO module in the motor-side converter.

External
control via
analogue/
digital
inputs and
outputs
X39 X39 Optional module 1:

RMBA, RAIO, RDIO,
RMIO board of RMIO board of
RDNA, RLON, RIBA,
the line-side the motor-side
RPBA, RCAN, RCNA,
converter converter
ID number 1
RMBP, RETA, RRIA
ID number 2
Input = ~ Output
power power Application or RTAC
~ = Line-side
specific program Optional module 2: RTAC,
converter
and motor RAIO, RRIA or RDIO
control program
UDC+ UDC- control program DDCS communication
Main circuit and control diagram
DDCS module: RDCO-03 (default),

Simplified main circuit RDCO-03 CH1 RDCO-01 or RDCO-02
CH0
Note: The AIMA-01 I/O Module
Adapter can be used to extend
the number of I/O extension
modules, see page 81.
Optional
EMC
filter LCL filter
U1 U2
K1 V2
V1 M
W2 3~
W1
Line-side converter Motor-side converter

Varistor
connection
UDC+ UDC-

33
34
Fieldbus control interface

Optional fieldbus modules cannot be inserted in the optional module slots of the
RMIO board of the line-side converter. Fieldbus control of the line-side converter is
performed via the motor-side converter RMIO board as shown in the block diagram
below.
Control block diagram

The figure below shows the parameters for DC and reactive power reference
selection. The AMC table contains actual values and parameters of the line-side
converter.
11.02 Q REF SELECT

Motor-side Line-side converter
PARAM 24.01
converter RMIO RMIO board
112.04 SUPPLY CTRL 98.02 COMM. MODULE AI1

MODE = LINE CONV = INVERTER 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL AI2 24.01
Dataset 121 (CH1) AI3

Dataset 121 (CH0) Q POWER REF
MCW MCW (fixed) PERCENT
kVAr + PARAM 24.02
95.06 LCU Q POW REF Q-REF(fixed) 24.02 +
PHI
95.07 LCU DC REF (V) DC REF(fixed) COSPHI

MSW MSW (fixed)
24.04
9.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL 1 106 (value)
9.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2 110 (value)
11.01 DC REF SELECT
Dataset 123 (CH1) Dataset 123 (CH0) PARAM 23.01

95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL 106
95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL DC VOLT REF
110 AMC AI1
table AI2 23.01
AI3
FIELD BUS
MCW = Main Control Word

MSW = Main Status Word

35
Connection diagram of the RMIO board in the line-side converter

Internal connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 IGBT Supply Control
Program are shown below. Do not change the connections.
X20
Terminal block size: 1 VREF- Reference voltage -10 VDC,
cables 0.3 to 3.3 mm2 (22 to 12 AWG) 2 GND 1 kohm < RL < 10 kohm
Tightening torque: X21
0.2 to 0.4 N·m (0.2 to 0.3 lbf·ft) 1 VREF+ Reference voltage 10 VDC,
3 AI1+ By default, not in use. 0(2)...10 V,
4 AI1- Rin > 200 kohm
5 AI2+ By default, not in use. 0(4)...20 mA,
6 AI2- Rin = 100 ohm
7 AI3+ By default, not in use. 0(4)...20 mA,
8 AI3- Rin = 100 ohm
9 AO1+ By default, not in use. 0(4)...20 mA,
10 AO1- RL < 700 ohm
11 AO2+ By default, not in use. 0(4)...20 mA,
12 AO2- RL < 700 ohm
1)
non-programmable I/O X22
1 DI1 Acknowledgement of converter fan 1)
2)
External earth (ground) fault 2 DI2 Stop/Start
indication via digital input DI4: See 3 DI3 Acknowledgement from main contactor 1)
parameter 30.04 EXT EARTH FAULT.
4 DI4 By default not in use. 2)
3)
External alarm/fault indication via 5 DI5 By default not in use. 3)
digital input DI5: See parameter 30.05 6 DI6 By default not in use.
EXT EVENT. 7 +24V +24 VDC max. 100 mA
8 +24V
4) START command via digital input
9 DGND Digital ground
DI7: See parameter 16.01 RUN BIT
10 DGND Digital ground
SEL.
11 DI7(DIIL) By default not in use. 4)
X23
1 +24V Auxiliary voltage output and input, non-
2 GND isolated, 24 VDC 250 mA
X25
1 RO11 Relay output 1: By default not in
2 RO12 use.
3 RO13
X26
1 RO21 Relay output 2: By default not in
2 RO22 use.
3 RO23
X27
1 RO31 Relay output 3: Main contactor
2 RO32 control 1)
3 RO33
+ 24 VDC
-

36
Type code
The type code contains information on the specifications and configuration of the
drive. The first digits from left express the basic configuration (for example,
ACS800-11-0025-3 or ACS800-U11-0025-3). The optional selections are given
thereafter, separated by plus signs (for example, +E200 and +K454). The main
selections are described below. Not all selections are available for all types. For
more information, refer to ACS800 Ordering Information (EN code: 3AFY64556568,
available on request).
Selection Alternatives
Product series ACS800 product series
Type 11 Regenerative, wall mounted. When no options are selected: IP21,
Control Panel CDP 312R, DDCS communication option module
RDCO-03, no EMC filter, Standard Control Program, cable connection
box (cabling from below), boards with coating, one set of English
manuals.
U11 Regenerative, wall mounted (USA). When no options are selected: UL
type 1, Control Panel CDP 312R, DDCS communication option module
RDCO-03, no EMC filter, US version of the Standard Control Program
(three-wire start/stop as default setting), US gland/conduit plate, boards
with coating, one set of English manuals.
Size Refer to Technical data: IEC data or NEMA data.
Voltage range 2 208/220/230/240 VAC
(nominal rating in bold) 3 380/400/415 VAC
5 380/400/415/440/460/480/500 VAC
7 525/575/600/690 VAC
Option codes (+ codes)
Filters E200 EMC/RFI filter for second environment TN (grounded) system,
unrestricted distribution.
E202 EMC/RFI filter for first environment TN (grounded) system, restricted
distribution.
Cabling H357 European lead-through plate
H358 US/UK gland/conduit plate
Control panel 0J400 No control panel
Fieldbus K... Refer to ACS800 Ordering Information (EN code: 3AFY64556568).
I/O L...
control program N...
Manual language R...
Safety features Q950 Prevention of unexpected start-up
Q967 Safe torque off (STO) function without safety relay
Specialities P904 Extended warranty
Duct plates for cabinet installation can be ordered with kit codes:
frame size R5: 68654122
frame size R6: 68654131

37

This chapter contains unpacking instructions, the delivery checklist and the
mechanical installation instructions of the drive.
Unpacking the unit

The drive is delivered in a box that also contains:
• plastic bag containing: screws (M3), clamps and cable lugs (2 mm2, M3) for
grounding the control cable screens
• residual voltage warning stickers
• hardware manual
• appropriate firmware manuals and guides
• optional module manuals
• delivery documents.
38
To unpack the package, cut the bands (A) and remove the outer box (B) and sleeve
(C).
3AUA0000075717
Checking the delivery

Check that all items listed in section Unpacking the unit are present.
Check that there are no signs of damage. Before attempting installation and
operation, check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify
that the unit is of the correct type. The label includes an IEC and NEMA rating, C-UL,
CSA and CE markings, a type code and a serial number, which allow individual
recognition of each unit. The first digit of the serial number refers to the
manufacturing plant. The next four digits refer to the unit’s manufacturing year and
week, respectively. The remaining digits complete the serial number so that there
are no two units with the same serial number.
39
The type designation label is attached to the heatsink and the serial number label to
the lower part of the back plate of the unit. Example labels are shown below.
Type designation label
Serial number label
Moving the unit

Lift the unit using the lifting holes at the top and bottom.
Lifting a unit of frame size R6
40
Before installation
The drive must be installed in an upright position with the cooling section facing a
wall. Check the installation site according to the requirements below. Refer to
chapter Dimensional drawings for frame details.
WARNING! Do not remove the protective film that covers the unit before the
installation procedure is complete. It protects the unit from pieces of wire cuttings or
other solid particles that can penetrate the unit during installation. Remove the film
just before starting up the unit.
Requirements for the installation site

See chapter Technical data for the allowed operation conditions of the drive.
Wall
The wall should be as close to vertical as possible, of non-flammable material and
strong enough to carry the weight of the unit. Check that there is nothing on the wall
to inhibit the installation.
Floor
The floor/material below the installation should be non-flammable.
41
Free space around the unit

Required free space around the drive to enable cooling air flow, service and
maintenance is shown below in millimetres and [inches].
200 [7.9]
50 [2.0] 50 [2.0]
200 [7.9]
IP21 (UL 1) Cooling air flow
Mounting the drive on the wall
Units without vibration dampers

1. Mark the locations for the four holes. The mounting points are shown in chapter
Dimensional drawings.
2. Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations.
3. Position the drive onto the screws on the wall. Note: Lift the drive by its lifting
holes, not by its cover.
4. Tighten the screws in the wall securely.
Units with vibration dampers

In applications with considerable vibration in the frequency range of 50 Hz to
100 Hz, vibration dampers can be used. See ACS800 Vibration Damper Installation
Guide [3AFE68295351 (English)].
42
Appropriate vibration dampers are GC3-50MS (kit code 68295581):

• for units of frame size R5, four dampers
• for units of frame size R6, six dampers
Note that the kit only includes four vibration dampers, but units of frame size R6
require six. Two dampers are installed in the middle.
Cabinet installation
The drive can be installed in a cabinet without the plastic front, top and connection
box covers and without the lead-through plate. Vibration dampers are not needed.
The required distance between parallel units is 50 millimetres (1.97 in.) in
installations without the front cover. The cooling air entering the unit must not exceed
+40 °C (+104 °F).
You can also use duct plates in the cabinet installation, see section Installing cabinet
duct plates (optional) on page 43.
Preventing cooling air recirculation

Prevent air recirculation inside and outside the cabinet.
Example
HOT
AREA
Main air flow out
Air baffle plates
COOL AREA
Main air flow in
43
Unit above another

Lead the out-coming hot cooling air away from the air input of the drive above.
Example
max.+40 °C (+104 °F)
Installing cabinet duct plates (optional)

If the drive is installed in a cabinet that is inside a cooling air duct, duct plates can be
used to lead the air flow.
With the cabinet duct plates, the IP protection class of the drive inside the cabinet is
IP21 and IP20 outside the cabinet.
Installation kits
Separate installation kits for cabinet duct plates can be ordered with the following kit
codes:
• frame size R5: 68654122
• frame size R6: 68654131.
The installation kit contains the following parts:
• left collar (A in the figure on page 45)
• right collar (B)
• top collar (C)
• bottom collar (D).
44
Screws are not included in the installation kit. The following screws are needed:
• frame size R5:
18 pieces: M5X12, torque 3 N·m (2.2 lbf·ft)
2 pieces: M4X16, torque 1.2 N·m (0.9 lbf·ft)
• frame size R6:
20 pieces: M5X12, torque 3 N·m (2.2 lbf·ft)
Before you start
Prepare the cabinet by following the requirements given in this manual and the
dimensional drawings on pages 134 and 135.
The drive must always be fixed into the cabinet by using the original 4 fixing holes on
the bottom plate, never by the collars only.
The cabinet supports (E) can be installed before or after installing the drive, but it
may be easier to install the drive before the supports.
Installation
The following figure shows the installation procedure for a drive of frame size R5. In
frame size R6, the design of the bottom collar (D) is slightly different.
1. After the drive and cabinet supports (E) have been installed, install the left (A) and
right collars (B) by pushing them first in the grooves on both sides of the drive,
and fasten them with 10 pcs of M5x12 screws (frame size R6: 12 pcs) in the
cabinet supports.
2. Fix 4 pcs of M5x12 screws in the left (A) and right collars (B), and install the top
collar (C) against the left and right collars through the screws.
3. Push down the top collar in the groove on the top of the drive and tighten the
screws.
4. Fix 4 pcs of M5x12 screws in the left (A) and right collars (B), and install the
bottom collar (D) against the left and right collars through the screws.
5. Push up the bottom collar in the groove on the bottom of the drive and tighten the
screws.
6. Fix the bottom collar to the drive with 2 pcs of M4x16 screws (frame size R6:
M4x25).
7. Secure the bottom collar to the drive with additional 2 pcs of M4x12 screws.
Note: If you install other parts in the cabinet, make sure that the top and bottom
collars can be removed easily for maintenance purposes.
45
Assembly drawing for cabinet duct plates
B
C
A
2
1 4
46
47

This chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when selecting the motor,
cables, protections, cable routing and way of operation for the drive system.
Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable
local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any
installation which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if
the recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience
problems that the warranty does not cover.
Motor selection and compatibility

1. Select the motor according to the rating tables in chapter Technical data. Use the
DriveSize PC tool if the default load cycles are not applicable.
2. Check that the motor ratings lie within the allowed ranges of the drive control
program:
• motor nominal voltage is 1/2 ... 2 · UN of the drive
• motor nominal current is 1/6 ... 2 · I2hd of the drive in DTC control and
0 ... 2 · I2hd in scalar control. The control mode is selected by a drive parameter.
3. Check that the motor voltage rating meets the application requirements:
If the drive is equipped … and … … then the motor voltage
with … rating should be …
IGBT supply DC link voltage will not be increased UN
ACS800-11, -U11 from nominal (parameter setting)
DC link voltage will be increased from UACeq2
nominal (parameter setting)
UN = Rated input voltage of the drive

UACeq2 = UDC/1.41
UDC = the maximum DC link voltage of the drive in VDC.
For resistor braking: UDC= 1.21 × nominal DC link voltage.
For units with IGBT supply: See the parameter value.
Note: Nominal DC link voltage is (in VDC):
UN × 1.35 when the IGBT supply is stopped or
UN × 1.41 when the IGBT supply is on.
See notes 7 and 8 below the Requirements table on pages 53.

4. Consult the motor manufacturer before using a motor in a drive system where the
motor nominal voltage differs from the AC power source voltage.

48
5. Ensure that the motor insulation system withstands the maximum peak voltage in
the motor terminals. See the Requirements table below for the required motor
insulation system and drive filtering.
Example 1: When the supply voltage is 440 V and a drive with a diode supply is
operating in motor mode only, the maximum peak voltage in the motor terminals
can be approximated as follows: 440 V · 1.35 · 2 = 1190 V. Check that the motor
Example 2: When the supply voltage is 440 V and the drive is equipped with an
IGBT supply, the maximum peak voltage in the motor terminals can be
approximated as follows: 440 V · 1.41 · 2 = 1241 V. Check that the motor
Protecting the motor insulation and bearings

The output of the drive comprises – regardless of output frequency – pulses of
approximately 1.35 times the equivalent mains network voltage with a very short rise
time. This is the case with all drives employing modern IGBT inverter technology.
The voltage of the pulses can be almost double at the motor terminals, depending on
the attenuation and reflection properties of the motor cable and the terminals. This in
turn can cause additional stress on the motor and motor cable insulation.
Modern variable speed drives with their fast rising voltage pulses and high switching
frequencies can generate current pulses that flow through the motor bearings, which
can gradually erode the bearing races and rolling elements.
The stress on motor insulation can be avoided by using optional ABB du/dt filters.
du/dt filters also reduce bearing currents.
To avoid damage to motor bearings, the cables must be selected and installed
according to the instructions given in the hardware manual. In addition, insulated N-
end (non-driven end) bearings and output filters from ABB must be used according
to the following table. Two types of filters are used individually or in combinations:
• optional du/dt filter (protects motor insulation system and reduces bearing
currents).
• common mode filter (mainly reduces bearing currents).

49
Requirements table
The following table shows how to select the motor insulation system and when an
optional drive du/dt and common mode filters and insulated N-end (non-drive end)
motor bearings are required. Ignoring the requirements or improper installation may
shorten motor life or damage the motor bearings and voids the warranty.

voltage (AC line
Manufacturer
PN < 100 kW 100 kW < PN < 350 kW PN > 350 kW

and or or
PN < 134 hp 134 hp < PN < 469 hp PN > 469 hp
and or or
A Random- UN < 500 V Standard - +N + N + CMF
B wound M2_,
500 V < UN < 600 V Standard + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
B M3_ and
M4_ or
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
(cable length <
150 m)
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced - +N + N + CMF
(cable length >
150 m)
Form-wound 380 V < UN < 690 V Standard n.a. + N + CMF PN < 500 kW: + N +
HX_ and CMF
AM_ PN > 500 kW: + N +
CMF + du/dt
Old* form- 380 V < UN < 690 V Check with the motor + du/dt with voltages over 500 V + N + CMF
wound HX_ manufacturer.
and modular
Random- 0 V < UN < 500 V Enamelled wire with + N + CMF
wound HX_ fibre glass taping
500 V < UN < 690 V + du/dt + N + CMF
and AM_ **
HDP Consult the motor manufacturer.

50

voltage (AC line
Manufacturer
PN < 100 kW 100 kW < PN < 350 kW PN > 350 kW

and or or
PN < 134 hp 134 hp < PN < 469 hp PN > 469 hp
and or or
N Random- UN < 420 V Standard: ÛLL = - + N or CMF + N + CMF
O wound and 1300 V
form-wound
N 420 V < UN < 500 V Standard: ÛLL = 1300 + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
- V
or
A
+ du/dt + CMF
B
or
B
1600 V, 0.2
500 V < UN < 600 V Reinforced: ÛLL = + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt+ N + CMF
1600 V
or
+ du/dt + CMF
or
1800 V
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced: ÛLL = + du/dt + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + CMF
1800 V
Reinforced: ÛLL = - N + CMF N + CMF
2000 V, 0.3
***
* manufactured before 1.1.1998

** For motors manufactured before 1.1.1998, check for additional instructions with the motor
manufacturer.
*** If the intermediate DC circuit voltage of the drive is increased from the nominal level by resistor
braking or by the IGBT supply unit control program (parameter selectable function), check with the
motor manufacturer if additional output filters are needed in the applied drive operation range.

51
Note 1: The abbreviations used in the table are defined below.

Abbreviation Definition
UN nominal voltage of the supply network
ÛLL peak line-to-line voltage at motor terminals which the motor insulation must withstand
PN motor nominal power
du/dt du/dt filter at the output of the drive +E205
CMF common mode filter +E208
N N-end bearing: insulated motor non-driven end bearing
n.a. Motors of this power range are not available as standard units. Consult the motor
manufacturer.
Note 2: Explosion-safe (EX) motors

If you use an explosion-safe (EX) motor, follow the rules in the requirements table
above. In addition, consult the motor manufacturer for any further requirements.
Note 3: ABB high-output motors and IP23 motors
particular frame size in EN 50347:2001. This table shows the requirements for ABB
random-wound motor series (for example, M3AA, M3AP and M3BP).
Nominal AC supply Requirement for
voltage Motor ABB du/dt and common mode filters, insulated N-end motor
insulation bearings
system PN < 100 kW 100 kW < PN < 200 kW PN > 200 kW
PN < 140 hp 140 hp < PN < 268 hp PN > 268 hp
UN < 500 V Standard - +N + N + CMF
500 V < UN < 600 V Standard + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + du/dt + CMF
or
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced + du/dt + N + du/dt + N + du/dt + CMF

52
Note 4: Non-ABB high-output and IP23 motors

particular frame size in EN 50347:2001. The table below shows the requirements for
random-wound and form-wound non-ABB motors with nominal power smaller than
350 kW. For bigger motors, consult the motor manufacturer.
Nominal AC Requirement for
supply voltage Motor insulation ABB du/dt filter, insulated N-end bearing and ABB common
system mode filter
PN < 100 kW 100 kW < PN < 350 kW
or or
frame size < IEC 315 IEC 315 < frame size < IEC 400
PN < 134 hp 134 hp < PN < 469 hp
or or
frame size < NEMA 500 NEMA 500 < frame size < NEMA 580
UN < 420 V Standard: ÛLL = + N or CMF + N + CMF
1300 V
420 V < UN < 500 V Standard: ÛLL = + du/dt + (N or CMF) + N + du/dt + CMF
1300 V
or
1600 V, 0.2
microsecond rise
time
500 V < UN < 600 V Reinforced: ÛLL = + du/dt + (N or CMF) + du/dt + N + CMF
1600 V
or
1800 V
600 V < UN < 690 V Reinforced: ÛLL = + N + du/dt + N + du/dt + CMF
1800 V
Reinforced: ÛLL = N + CMF N + CMF
2000 V, 0.3
microsecond rise
time ***
*** If the intermediate DC circuit voltage of the drive is increased from the nominal level by resistor braking,
check with the motor manufacturer if additional output filters are needed in the applied drive operation
range.
Note 5: HXR and AMA motors

All AMA machines (manufactured in Helsinki) for drive systems have form-wound
windings. All HXR machines manufactured in Helsinki starting 1.1.1998 have form-
wound windings.
Note 6: ABB motors of types other than M2_, M3_, HX_ and AM_
Use the selection criteria given for non-ABB motors.

53
Note 7: Resistor braking of the drive

When the drive is in braking mode for a large part of its operation time, the
intermediate circuit DC voltage of the drive increases, the effect being similar to
increasing the supply voltage by up to 20 percent. The voltage increase should be
taken into consideration when determining the motor insulation requirement.
Example: Motor insulation requirement for a 400 V application must be selected as if
the drive were supplied with 480 V.
Note 8: Drives with an IGBT supply unit
If voltage is raised by the drive (this is a parameter selectable function), select the
motor insulation system according to the increased intermediate circuit DC voltage
level, especially in the 500 V supply voltage range.
Note 9: Calculating the rise time and the peak line-to-line voltage
The peak line-to-line voltage at the motor terminals generated by the drive as well as
the voltage rise time depend on the cable length. The requirements for the motor
insulation system given in the table are “worst case” requirements covering
installations with 30 metre and longer cables. The rise time can be calculated as
follows: t = 0.8 · ÛLL/(du/dt). Read ÛLL and du/dt from the diagrams below. Multiply
the values of the graph by the supply voltage (UN). In case of drives with an IGBT
supply unit or resistor braking, the ÛLL and du/dt values are approximately 20 %
higher.
3.0 5.5
ÛLL/UN 5.0
2.5 du/dt
------------- (1/s)
4.5 UN
2.0 4.0
3.5
1.5
3.0
ÛLL/UN
1.0 2.5
du/dt
------------- (1/s)
UN 2.0
0.5
1.5
0.0 1.0
100 200 300 100 200 300
Cable length (m) Cable length (m)
With du/dt Filter Without du/dt Filter
Note 10: Sine filters protect the motor insulation system. Therefore, du/dt filter can
be replaced with a sine filter. The peak phase-to-phase voltage with the sine filter is
approximately 1.5 × UN.

54

Only one permanent magnet motor can be connected to the inverter output.
It is recommended to install a safety switch between the permanent magnet motor
and the drive output. The switch is needed to isolate the motor during any
maintenance work on the drive.
Supply connection
Disconnecting device (disconnecting means)

Install a hand-operated input disconnecting device (disconnecting means) between
the AC power source and the drive. The disconnecting device must be of a type that
can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work.
EU
To meet the European Union Directives, according to standard EN 60204-1, Safety
of Machinery, the disconnecting device must be one of the following types:
• switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-23B (EN 60947-3)
• disconnector that has an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching
devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the
disconnector (EN 60947-3)
• circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2.
US
The disconnecting means must conform to the applicable safety regulations.
Fuses
See section Thermal overload and short-circuit protection.
Thermal overload and short-circuit protection
Thermal overload protection

The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload
when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional thermal protection devices are needed.
WARNING! If the drive is connected to multiple motors, a separate thermal overload

switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor. These
devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short-circuit current.
The drive protects the motor cable and motor in a short-circuit situation when the
motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive.

55
Short-circuit protection
Protect the input cable and drive against short-circuit according to the following
guide lines.
Circuit diagram Drive type Short-circuit
protection
DRIVE IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH INPUT FUSES
ACS800-11 Protect the drive and
Distribution Drive or drive ACS800-U11 input cable with fuses.
board Input cable module See footnote 1).
1)
~ M
~ 3~
1) Size the fuses according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and
the rated current of the drive. Only gG and aR fuses are allowed, see section Mains
cable fuses on page 117.
Standard gG fuses (US: CC or T for ACS800-U11) will protect the input cable in
short-circuit situations, restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining
equipment in case of a short-circuit inside the drive.
Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0.1 seconds. The operating
time depends on the fuse type (gG or aR), supply network impedance and the cross-
sectional area, material and length of the supply cable. In case the 0.1 seconds
operating time is exceeded with gG fuses (US: CC/T/L), ultrarapid (aR) fuses will in
most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level. The US fuses must be
of the “non-time delay” type.
For fuse ratings, see chapter Technical data.
Note: Circuit breakers must not be used.

56
Ground fault protection

The drive is equipped with an internal ground fault protective function to protect the
unit against ground faults in the motor and motor cable. This is not a personal safety
or a fire protection feature. The ground fault protective function can be disabled with
a parameter, refer to the appropriate ACS800 Firmware Manual.
The EMC filter of the drive includes capacitors connected between the main circuit
and the frame. These capacitors and long motor cables increase the ground leakage
current and may cause fault current circuit breakers to function.
Emergency stop devices

For safety reasons, install the emergency stop devices at each operator control
station and at other operating stations where emergency stop may be needed.
Note: Pressing the stop key ( ) on the control panel of the drive does not generate
an emergency stop of the motor or separate the drive from dangerous potential.

57
Prevention of unexpected start-up (option +Q950)

The ACS800-11/U11 can be equipped with an optional Prevention of unexpected
start-up function according to standards:
• IEC/EN 60204-1:1997,
• ISO/DIS 14118:2000,
• EN 1037:1996,
• EN ISO 12100:2003,
• EN 954-1:1996,
• EN ISO 13849-2:2003.
The Prevention of unexpected start-up (POUS) function disables the control voltage
of the power semiconductors, thus preventing the drive from generating the AC
voltage required to rotate the motor. By using this function, short-time operations
be performed without switching off the AC power supply to the drive.
The operator activates the Prevention of unexpected start-up function by opening a
switch on a control desk. An indicating lamp on the control desk will light, signalling
that the prevention is active. The switch can be locked out.
The user must install on a control desk near the machinery:
• switching/disconnecting device for the circuitry. “Means shall be provided to
prevent inadvertent, and/or mistaken closure of the disconnecting device.”
EN 60204-1:1997.
• indicating lamp; on = starting the drive is prevented, off = drive is operative.
For connections to the drive, see the circuit diagram delivered with the drive.
WARNING! The Prevention of unexpected start-up function does not disconnect the
voltage of the main and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work
on electrical parts of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after isolating the
drive system from the main supply.
Note: The Prevention of unexpected start-up function is not intended for stopping
the drive. If the Prevention of unexpected start-up function is activated when the
drive is running, the control voltage of the inverter power semiconductors is cut off
and the motor coasts to a stop.
For detailed instructions for installation, start-up, use and maintenance of the
function, see chapter Installation of the AGPS board (Prevention of unexpected
start-up, +Q950).

58
Safe torque off (option +Q967)

The drive supports the Safe torque off (STO) function according to standards:
• EN 61800-5-2:2007,
• EN ISO 13849-1:2008,
• IEC 61508,
• IEC 61511:2004,
• EN 62061:2005.
The function also corresponds to Prevention of unexpected start-up of EN 1037.
The STO may be used where power removal is required to prevent an unexpected
start-up. The function disables the control voltage of the power semiconductors of
the drive output stage, thus preventing the drive from generating the voltage
required to rotate the motor (see diagram below). By using this function, short-time
operations (like cleaning) and/or maintenance work on non-electrical parts of the
machinery can be performed without switching off the power supply to the drive.
and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work on electrical parts
of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after isolating the drive system from
the main supply.
Note: The Safe torque off function can be used for stopping the drive in emergency
stop situations. In the normal operating mode, use the Stop command instead. If a
running drive is stopped by using the function, the drive will trip and stop by coasting.
If this is not acceptable, e.g. causes danger, the drive and machinery must be
stopped using the appropriate stopping mode before using this function.
Note concerning permanent magnet motor drives in case of a multiple IGBT
power semiconductor failure: In spite of the activation of the Safe torque off
function, the drive system can produce an alignment torque which maximally rotates
the motor shaft by 180/p degrees. p denotes the pole pair number.
For more information on the installation of the Safe torque off function, see chapter
For more information on the Safe torque off function and the relevant safety data,
see ACS800-01/04/11/31/104/104LC Safe torque off function (+Q967), Application
guide (3AUA0000063373 [English]).
An example circuit diagram is shown below.

59
Safe torque off circuit diagram

60
Selecting the power cables
General rules
Dimension the mains (input power) and motor cables according to local
regulations:
• The cable must be able to carry the drive load current. See chapter Technical
data for the rated currents.
• The cable must be rated for at least 70 °C (158 °F) maximum permissible
temperature of conductor in continuous use. For US, see Additional US
requirements.
• The inductance and impedance of the PE conductor/cable (grounding wire) must
be rated according to permissible touch voltage appearing under fault conditions
(so that the fault point voltage will not rise excessively when a ground fault
occurs).
• 600 VAC cable is accepted for up to 500 VAC. 750 VAC cable is accepted for up
to 600 VAC. For 690 VAC rated equipment, the rated voltage between the
conductors of the cable should be at least 1 kV.
For drive frame size R5 and larger, or motors larger than 30 kW (40 hp), symmetrical
shielded motor cable must be used (figure below). A four-conductor system can be
used up to frame size R4 with up to 30 kW (40 hp) motors, but shielded symmetrical
motor cable is recommended.
WARNING! Do not use unshielded single-core supply cables in IT (ungrounded)

networks. A dangerous voltage can become present on the non-conductive outer
sheath of the cable. This can cause injury or death.
Note: When continuous conduit is employed, shielded cable is not required.

A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but shielded symmetrical cable
is recommended. To operate as a protective conductor, the shield conductivity must
be as follows when the protective conductor is made of the same metal as the phase
conductors:
Cross-sectional area of the phase Minimum cross-sectional area of the
conductors corresponding protective conductor
S (mm2) Sp (mm2)
S < 16 S
16 < S < 35 16
35 < S S/2
Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of symmetrical shielded cable

reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor
bearing currents and wear.
The motor cable and its PE pigtail (twisted shield) should be kept as short as
possible in order to reduce electromagnetic emission.

61
Alternative power cable types

Power cable types that can be used with the drive are represented below.
Recommended
Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase conductors A separate PE conductor is required if the conductivity
and a concentric or otherwise symmetrically of the cable shield is < 50 % of the conductivity of the
constructed PE conductor, and a shield phase conductor.
PE conductor Shield
and shield Shield
PE
PE
PE Shield
A four-conductor system:
three phase conductors
and a protective
conductor
Not allowed for motor cables Not allowed for motor cables with phase
conductor cross section larger than 10 mm2
[motors > 30 kW (40 HP)].
The following power cable type is not allowed.

Symmetrical shielded cable with individual shields for each phase
PE
conductor is not allowed on any cable size for input and motor cabling.
Motor cable shield

To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio-frequency emissions, the
shield conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor conductivity. The
requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield. The minimum
requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below. It consists of a
concentric layer of copper wires with an open helix of copper tape. The better and
tighter the shield, the lower the emission level and bearing currents.
Copper wire screen Helix of copper tape Inner insulation

Insulation jacket
Cable core

62
Additional US requirements
Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or
shielded power cable must be used for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not
used. For the North American market, 600 VAC cable is accepted for up to 500 VAC.
1000 VAC cable is required above 500 VAC (below 600 VAC). For drives rated over
100 amperes, the power cables must be rated for 75 °C (167 °F).
Conduit
Where conduits must be coupled together, bridge the joint with a ground conductor
bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint. Bond the conduits also to the drive
enclosure. Use separate conduits for input power, motor, brake resistor, and control
wiring. When conduit is employed, type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor
cable or shielded cable is not required. A dedicated ground cable is always required.
Note: Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit.
Armored cable / shielded power cable
Six conductor (3 phases and 3 ground) type MC continuous corrugated aluminium
armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers (trade
names in parentheses):
• Anixter Wire & Cable (Philsheath)
• BICC General Corp (Philsheath)
• Rockbestos Co. (Gardex)
• Oaknite (CLX).
Shielded power cables are available from Belden, LAPPKABEL (ÖLFLEX) and
Pirelli.

63
Power factor compensation capacitors

Power factor compensation is not needed with AC drives. However, if a drive is to be
connected in a system with compensation capacitors installed, note the following
restrictions.
WARNING! Do not connect power factor compensation capacitors to the motor

cables (between the drive and the motor). They are not meant to be used with AC
drives and can cause permanent damage to the drive or themselves.
If there are power factor compensation capacitors in parallel with the three phase
input of the drive:
1. Do not connect a high-power capacitor to the power line while the drive is
connected. The connection will cause voltage transients that may trip or even
damage the drive.
2. If capacitor load is increased/decreased step by step when the AC drive is
connected to the power line: Ensure that the connection steps are low enough not
to cause voltage transients that would trip the drive.
3. Check that the power factor compensation unit is suitable for use in systems with
AC drives i.e. harmonic generating loads. In such systems, the compensation unit
should typically be equipped with a blocking reactor or harmonic filter.
Equipment connected to the motor cable
Installation of safety switches, contactors, connection boxes, etc.

To minimize the emission level when safety switches, contactors, connection boxes
or similar equipment are installed in the motor cable between the drive and the
motor:
• EU: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure with 360 degrees grounding for the
shields of both the incoming and outgoing cable, or connect the shields of the
cables otherwise together.
• US: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure in a way that the conduit or motor
cable shielding runs consistently without breaks from the drive to the motor.
Bypass connection
WARNING! Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2, V2
and W2. If frequent bypassing is required, employ mechanically connected switches
or contactors. Mains (line) voltage applied to the output can result in permanent
damage to the unit.

64
Using a contactor between the drive and the motor

Implementing the control of the output contactor depends on how you select the
drive to operate.
When you have selected to use DTC motor control mode, and motor ramp stop,
open the contactor as follows:
2. Wait until the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed.
When you have selected to use DTC motor control mode, and motor coast stop, or
scalar control mode, open the contactor as follows:
WARNING! When the DTC motor control mode is in use, never open the output
contactor while the drive controls the motor. The DTC motor control operates
extremely fast, much faster than it takes for the contactor to open its contacts. When
the contactor starts opening while the drive controls the motor, the DTC control will
try to maintain the load current by immediately increasing the drive output voltage to
the maximum. This will damage, or even burn the contactor completely.

65
Protecting the relay output contacts and attenuating disturbances in case

of inductive loads
Inductive loads (relays, contactors, motors) cause voltage transients when switched
off.
The relay contacts on the RMIO board are protected with varistors (250 V) against
overvoltage peaks. In spite of this, it is highly recommended to equip inductive loads
with noise attenuating circuits [varistors, RC filters (AC) or diodes (DC)] in order to
minimize the EMC emission at switch-off. If not suppressed, the disturbances may
connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form
a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system.
Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible. Do not
install protective components at the RMIO board terminal block.
RMIO
Relay outputs
Varistor X25
1 RO1
2 RO1
230 VAC
3 RO1
RC filter X26
1 RO2
2 RO2
230 VAC
3 RO2
Diode X27
1 RO3
2 RO3
24 VDC
3 RO3

66
Selecting the control cables

All control cables must be shielded.
Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure a, e.g. JAMAK by NK Cables,
Finland) for analogue signals. This type of cable is recommended for the pulse
encoder signals also. Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal. Do not
use common return for different analogue signals.
A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals but
single-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure b) is also usable.
a b
A double-shielded twisted A single-shielded twisted
pair cable pair cable
Run analogue and digital signals in separate, shielded cables.

Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in
the same cables as digital input signals. It is recommended that the relay-controlled
signals be run as twisted pairs.
Never mix 24 VDC and 115/230 VAC signals in the same cable.
Relay cable
The cable type with braided metallic screen (e.g. ÖLFLEX by LAPPKABEL,
Germany) has been tested and approved by ABB.
Control panel cable

In remote use, the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed 3
metres (10 ft). The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel
option kits.

67
Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I/O
WARNING! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts
and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non-
conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.
To fulfil this requirement, the connection of a thermistor (and other similar
components) to the digital inputs of the drive can be implemented in three alternate
ways:
1. There is double or reinforced insulation between the thermistor and live parts of
the motor.
2. Circuits connected to all digital and analogue inputs of the drive are protected
against contact and insulated with basic insulation (the same voltage level as the
drive main circuit) from other low voltage circuits.
3. An external thermistor relay is used. The insulation of the relay must be rated for
the same voltage level as the main circuit of the drive. For connection, see
ACS800 Firmware Manual.
Installation sites above 2000 metres (6562 feet)
WARNING! Protect against direct contact when installing, operating and servicing
the RMIO board wiring and optional modules attached to the board. The Protective
Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178 and IEC 61800-5-1 are
not fulfilled at altitudes above 2000 m (6562 ft).
Routing the cables

Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives
can be run in parallel installed next to each other. It is recommended that the motor
cable, input power cable and control cables be installed on separate trays. Avoid
long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables in order to decrease
electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output
voltage.
Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are arranged at an
angle as near to 90 degrees as possible. Do not run extra cables through the drive.
The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the
grounding electrodes. Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local
equalizing of potential.

68
A diagram of the cable routing is shown below.
Motor cable
Drive
min 300 mm (12 in.)
Power cable
min 200 mm (8 in.) 90 ° min 500 mm (20 in.)
Control cables
Control cable ducts
230 V 230 V
24 V (120 V) 24 V (120 V)
Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is Lead 24 V and 230 V (120 V) control
insulated for 230 V (120 V) or insulated cables in separate ducts inside the
with an insulation sleeving for 230 V cabinet.
(120 V).

69

This chapter describes the electrical installation procedure of the drive.
WARNING! The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a qualified
electrician. Follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual. Ignoring
the safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the mains (input power) during
the installation. If the drive is already connected to the mains, wait for 5 min
after disconnecting mains power.
Checking the insulation of the installation
Drive
Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests on any part of the
drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has been tested for insulation
between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory. Also, there are voltage-
limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically.
Supply cable
Check the insulation of the supply (input) cable according to local regulations before
connecting to the drive.
70
Motor and motor cable

Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows:
1. Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor, and disconnected from the
drive output terminals U2, V2 and W2.
2. Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the
Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 1000 V DC. The
insulation resistance of an ABB motor must exceed 100 Mohm (reference value
at 25 °C or 77 °F). For the insulation resistance of other motors, please consult
the manufacturer’s instructions. Note: Moisture inside the motor casing will
reduce the insulation resistance. If moisture is suspected, dry the motor and
repeat the measurement.
U1
M
V1
3~
ohm W1
PE
Drives with EMC filter option +E202 or +E200 are not suitable for use in an IT
(ungrounded) system as such. Disconnect the EMC filter capacitors before
connecting the drive to an ungrounded system as described below.
WARNING! If a drive with an EMC filter +E202 or +E200 is installed on an IT system

(an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded [over 30 ohms] power
system), the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter
capacitors of the drive. This may cause danger, or damage the unit.
71
Disconnecting the EMC filter capacitors

Units of frame size R5
Remove the two screws shown below. Note: Depending on the EMC filter type and
the nominal voltage of the drive, there may be only one screw.
Note: When the capacitors of EMC filter +E202 or +E200 are disconnected, the
EMC Directive requirements in the second environment will not be fulfilled. See
chapter Technical data: CE marking.
Units of frame size R6
Remove the two screws shown below. Note: Depending on the EMC filter type and
the nominal voltage of the drive, there may be only one screw.
Note: When the capacitors of EMC filter +E202 are disconnected, the EMC Directive
requirements may not be fulfilled in first environment, but are fulfilled in the second
environment.
When the capacitors of EMC filter +E200 are disconnected, the EMC Directive
requirements in the second environment are still fulfilled. See chapter Technical
data: CE marking.
72
Connecting the power cables
Diagram
Drive
INPUT OUTPUT
PE U1 V1 W1 UDC+ UDC- U2 V2 W2
1) 2)
3) 4)
(PE) PE (PE)
5)
V1
U1 W1
For alternatives, see
Planning the electrical 3 ~
installation: Motor
(disconnecting means) L1 L2 L3
1), 2) Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end

If shielded cable is used (not required but For minimum radio frequency interference:
recommended), use a separate PE cable (1) or a • ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead-through of
cable with a grounding conductor (2) if the the motor terminal box
conductivity of the input cable shield is < 50% of the
conductivity of the phase conductor.
Ground the other end of the input cable shield or PE
conductor at the distribution board. 360 degrees grounding
3) 360 degrees grounding recommended if shielded
cable is used
Conductive gaskets
4) 360 degrees grounding required
• or ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows:
flattened width > 1/5 · length.
b > 1/5 · a
5) Use a separate grounding cable if the conductivity of
the cable shield is < 50% of the conductivity of the b
a
phase conductor and there is no symmetrically
constructed grounding conductor in the cable (see
Planning the electrical installation: Selecting the
power cables).
Note:
If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding
conductor in the motor cable in addition to the
conductive shield, connect the grounding conductor to
the grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends.
Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable
for motors > 30 kW (40 hp). Connecting its fourth
conductor at the motor end increases bearing currents
and causes extra wear.
73
Conductor stripping lengths

Strip the conductor ends as follows to fit them inside the power cable connection
terminals.
Frame size Stripping length
mm in.
R5 16 0.63
R6 28 1.10
Allowed wire sizes, tightening torques

See Technical data: Cable entries.
Wall installed units (European version)

Power cable installation procedure
1. Remove the connection box cover.
2. Remove the front cover by releasing the retaining clip with a screw driver and
lifting the cover from the bottom outwards.
3. Remove the clear plastic shroud of the phase conductor terminals.
4. Cut adequate holes into the rubber grommets and slide the grommets onto the
cables. Slide the cables through the holes of the bottom plate.
5. Strip off the outer sheathing of the cables under the 360 degrees grounding
clamps. Fasten the clamps onto the stripped parts of the cables.
6. Tighten the grounding clamps onto the twisted shields of the cables.
7. Connect the phase conductors of the mains cable to the U1, V1 and W1 terminals
8. Cut holes to the clear plastic shroud for the conductors in frame size R5 and in
cable lug installations of frame size R6.
9. Press the clear plastic shroud onto the phase conductor terminals.
10.Secure the cables outside the unit mechanically. Connect the control cables as
described in section Connecting the control cables on page 78. Fasten the
covers, see Fastening the control cables and covers on page 81.
74
Views of frame size R5
9 9
1
8
U1 V1 W1 UDC+ UDC- U2 V2 W2
PE 6
5
5
75
Frame sizes R6: Cable lug installation [16 to 70 mm2 (6 to 2/0 AWG) cables]
Remove the screw terminals. Fasten the cable lugs

to the remaining bolts with M10 nuts.
Isolate the ends of
the cable lugs with
PE 6
insulating tape or
shrink tubing.
Shroud on the conductor terminals (screw

terminal installation)
5 5
9 9
Frame size R6: Screw terminal installation [95 to 210 mm2 (3/0 to 400 MCM)] cables
PE 6
a
a. Connect the cable to the terminal.
b. Connect the terminal to the drive.
WARNING! If the wire size is less than
95 mm2 (3/0 AWG), a cable lug must
5 5 be used. A cable of wire size less than
95 mm2 (3/0 AWG) connected to this
terminal will loosen and may damage
the drive.
76
Wall installed units (US version)

1. Remove the connection box cover.
2. Remove the front cover by releasing the retaining clip with a screw driver and
lifting the cover from the bottom outwards.
8 8
3 3
2 4 4
3. Remove the gland plate by undoing the fastening screws.

4. Make the cable entry holes in the gland plate by breaking off the suitable knock-
out plates with a screw driver.
5. Fasten the cable glands to the opened holes of the gland plate.
6. Lead the cables through the glands.
7. Fasten the gland plate (3).
8. Connect the grounding conductors of the input and motor cables to the grounding
clamps.
9. Remove the clear plastic shroud as shown in section Power cable installation
procedure on page 73.
10.Connect the phase conductors of the input cable to the U1, V1 and W1 terminals
See Wall installed units (European version) for cabling figures. In case of a cable
lug installation, use UL listed cable lugs and tools given below or corresponding
to meet UL requirements.
77
Wire size Compression lug Crimping tool

kcmil/AWG Manufacturer Type Manufacturer Type No. of crimps
Ilsco CRC-2 Ilsco IDT-12 1
Ilsco CRA-1-38 Ilsco IDT-12 1
1/0 Burndy YA25-L4BOX Burndy MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRB-0 Ilsco IDT-12 1
2/0 Burndy YAL26T38 Burndy MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRA-2/0 Ilsco IDT-12 1
11.Tighten the clamping nuts of the cable glands.

After connecting the control cables, fasten the clear plastic shroud and front covers.
Warning sticker
There are warning stickers in different languages inside the packing box of the drive.
Attach a warning sticker in the language of your choice onto the plastic skeleton
above the power cable terminals.
Cabinet installed units (IP00, UL type open)

The drive can be installed in a cabinet without the plastic front, top and connection
box covers and without the lead-through plate.
It is recommended:
• to ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the cabinet entry. Grounding with the
360 degrees grounding clamps at the connection box back plate is then not
needed.
• to lead the cable unstripped as close to the terminals as possible. Ground the
twisted shields of the power cables under the PE and grounding clamps.
Secure the cables mechanically.
Protect the RMIO board terminals X25 to X27 against contact when input voltage
exceeds 50 VAC.
Cover the power cable terminals with the clear plastic shroud as shown in section
Power cable installation procedure on page 73.
Cabinet duct plates can also be used, see section Installing cabinet duct plates
(optional) on page 43.
78
Connecting the control cables

Lead the cable through the control cable entry (1).
Connect the control cables as described below. Connect the conductors to the
appropriate detachable terminals of the RMIO board [refer to chapter Motor control
and I/O board (RMIO)]. Tighten the screws to secure the connection.
Terminals
Control panel
Optional module 2
Optional module 1
DDCS communication module: RDCO

Channel CH1 is used for the internal communication
between the line-side and motor-side converters.
Control cable
grounding: see Detachable connection terminals (pull up)
section 360
degrees
grounding
79
360 degrees grounding
Insulation
4
3
2
1
Double-shielded cable Single-shielded cable
When the outer surface of the shield is covered with non-conductive material:
• Strip the cable carefully (do not cut the grounding wire and the shield)
• Turn the shield inside out to expose the conductive surface.
• Wrap the grounding wire around the conductive surface.
• Slide a conductive clamp onto the conductive part.
• Fasten the clamp to the grounding plate with a screw as close as possible to the
terminals where the wires are about to be connected.
Connecting the shield wires

Single-shielded cables: Twist the grounding wires of the outer shield and connect
them through the shortest possible route to the nearest grounding hole with a cable
lug and a screw. Double-shielded cables: Connect each pair cable shield (twisted
grounding wires) with other pair cable shields of the same cable to the nearest
grounding hole with a cable lug and a screw.
Do not connect shields of different cables to the same cable lug and grounding
screw.
Leave the other end of the shield unconnected or ground it indirectly via a few
nanofarads high-frequency capacitor (e.g. 3.3 nF / 630 V). The shield can also be
grounded directly at both ends if they are in the same ground line with no significant
voltage drop between the end points.
Keep the signal wire pairs twisted as close to the terminals as possible. Twisting the
wire with its return wire reduces disturbances caused by inductive coupling.
80
Cabling of I/O and fieldbus modules
Module
As short as possible
Shield
4
3
2
1
Note: The RDIO module does not

include a terminal for cable shield
grounding. Ground the pair cable
shields here.
Pulse encoder module cabling
Note 1: If the encoder is of unisolated type,

ground the encoder cable at the drive end
only. If the encoder is galvanically isolated
RTAC from the motor shaft and the stator frame,
As short as possible ground the encoder cable shield at the drive
and the encoder end.
Note 2: Twist the pair cable wires.
Shield
4
3
2
1
Wrap copper tape around the

stripped part of the cable under the
clamp. Be careful. Do not cut the
grounding wire. Clamp as close to
the terminals as possible.
81
Fastening the control cables and covers

When all control cables are connected, fasten them together with cable ties. Units
with a connection box: fasten the cables to the entry plate with cable ties. Units with
a gland box: tighten the clamping nuts of the cable glands.
Fasten the connection box cover.
Replace the front cover.
Installation of optional modules and PC

Optional modules (such as fieldbus adapters, I/O extension modules and pulse
encoder interface modules) are inserted in the optional module slots of the RMIO
board (see section Connecting the control cables) and fixed with two screws. See
the appropriate optional module manual for cable connections.
Note: Two RDCO modules are provided for the DDCS fibre optic link between the
RMIO boards of the line-side and motor-side converters. Channel CH0 of the
RDCO-03 module in the line-side converter and channel CH1 of the RDCO module
in the motor-side converter are used for the internal communication.
The number of optional modules connected to the motor-side RMIO board can be
extended by using the AIMA-01 I/O module adapter. The AIMA-01 I/O module
adapter is connected to the RMIO board using a fibre optic link. The line-side and
motor-side RMIO boards of the drive are already connected to an internal DDCS
ring, which must be customized to connect the AIMA-01 module adapter in the same
ring.
82
In the example below, one AIMA-01 I/O module adapter is connected to the RMIO
boards of the line-side and motor-side converters.
RMIO board of RMIO board of

the line-side the motor-side
converter *) converter
RDCO RDCO
CH0 CH1
AIMA-01 I/O
module adapter
*) WARNING! In frame size R6, you must remove the top cover to reach the RMIO board.
Read and follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual. Ignoring the safety
instructions can cause injury or death.
For more information, see AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter User's Manual
(3AFE68295351 [English]).
Connecting a PC to the motor-side RMIO board

Connect the PC to channel CH3 of the RDCO module in the motor-side converter
using a fibre optic cable and a suitable adapter.
Make sure that you connect the PC to the correct RMIO board. For the locations of
the RMIO boards on the drive, see section Product overview on page 27.
For more information on the RDCO module, see RDCO-01/02/03 DDCS
Communication Option Modules (3AFE64492209 [English]).
83
Installation of the AGPS board (Prevention of

unexpected start-up, +Q950)

This chapter describes the electrical installation of the optional Prevention of
unexpected start-up function (+Q950) of the drive.
Prevention of unexpected start-up (+Q950)

The optional Prevention of unexpected start-up function includes an AGPS board
which is connected to the drive and an external power supply. See also section
Prevention of unexpected start-up (option +Q950) on page 57.
Installation of the AGPS board
WARNING! Dangerous voltages can be present on the AGPS board even when the
115...230 V supply is switched off. Follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of
this manual and the instruction in this chapter when working on the AGPS board.
115...230 V source for the AGPS board is switched off during installation and
WARNING! The supply voltage for the AGPS board is 115...230 V AC. If the board is
supplied with 24 V DC, the board is damaged and it needs to be replaced.
See
• page 27 for location of terminal block X41 of the drive
• page 137 for the dimensions of the AGPS board
• section AGPS-11C (option +Q950) in chapter Technical data for the technical
data of the board.
Note: Maximum cable length between AGPS terminal block X2 and the drive
terminal block is restricted to 10 metres (33 ft).

84
Connect the AGPS board as follows:

• Remove the enclosure cover by undoing the fixing screws (1).
• Ground the bottom plate of the enclosure or via terminal X1:1 of the AGPS board.
• Connect the cable delivered with the kit between terminal block X2 of the AGPS
board (2) and drive terminal block X41.
WARNING! Use only the AGPS cable delivered with the kit. Using another cable or
modifying the cable may cause a malfunction of the drive and the safety function.
• Connect a cable between connector X1 of the AGPS board (3) and the
115...230 V source.
• Fasten the enclosure cover back with screws.
X2
X1
115...230 V
3

85
Circuit diagram
This circuit diagram shows how the AGPS-11 kit is installed.
Drive
115/230 VAC
N
3AFE00374994

Action
Follow the safety instructions, see section Safety instructions on page 5.
Ensure that the drive can be run and stopped freely during the start-up.
Stop the drive (if running), switch the input power off and isolate the drive from the power line by a
disconnector.
Check the Prevention of unexpected start-up circuit connections against the circuit diagram.
Close the disconnector and switch the power on.
Test the operation of the Prevention of unexpected start-up function when the motor is stopped:
• Give a stop command for the drive (if running) and wait until the motor shaft is at standstill.
• Activate the Prevention of unexpected start-up function and give a start command for the drive.
• Ensure that the drive does not start and the motor stays at standstill.
• Deactivate the Prevention of unexpected start-up function.

86
Use
Activate the function as follows:
• Stop the drive. Use the stop key of the panel (local mode) or give the stop
command through the I/O or fieldbus interface.
• Open the switch activating the Prevention of unexpected start-up function of the
drive. -> The indication lamp (if installed) is lit.
• Lock the switch to the open position.
• Before starting the work on the machinery, ensure that the motor shaft is at
standstill (not freely rotating).
Inactivate the function in reverse order.
Maintenance
After the operation of the circuit is validated at start-up, it does not need any
maintenance. However, it is a good practice to check the operation of the function
when other maintenance routines of the machinery are carried out.
Dimensional drawing
See page 137.

87
Installation of the ASTO board (Safe torque off,

+Q967)

This chapter describes the electrical installation of the optional Safe torque off
function (+Q967) of the drive and the specifications of the board.
Safe torque off (+Q967)

The optional Safe torque off function includes an ASTO board, which is connected to
the drive and an external power supply.
For more information on the Safe torque off function, see section Safe torque off
(option +Q967) on page 58 and ACS800-01/04/11/31/104/104LC Safe torque off
function (+Q967), Application guide (3AUA0000063373 [English]).
Installation of the ASTO board
WARNING! Dangerous voltages can be present at the ASTO board even when the
24 V supply is switched off. Follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of this
manual and the instruction in this chapter when working on the ASTO board.
24 V source for the ASTO board is switched off during installation and
WARNING! The supply voltage for the ASTO-11C board is 24 V DC. If the board is
supplied with 230 V AC, the board is damaged and it needs to be replaced.

88
See
• page 27 for location of terminal block X41 of the drive
• page 138 for the dimensions of the ASTO-11C board
• section ASTO-11C (option +Q967) in chapter Technical data for the technical data
of the ASTO-11C board.
Note: Maximum cable length between ASTO terminal block X2 and the drive
terminal block is restricted to 3 metres (9.8 ft).
Connect the ASTO board as follows:
• Remove the cover of the enclosed ASTO unit by undoing the fixing screws (1).
• Ground the ASTO unit via the bottom plate of the enclosure or via terminal X1:2
or X1:4 of the ASTO board.
• Connect the cable delivered with the kit between terminal block X2 of the ASTO
board (2) and drive terminal block X41.
WARNING! Use only the ASTO cable delivered with the kit. Using another cable or
modifying the cable may cause a malfunction of the drive and the safety function.
• Connect a cable between connector X1 of the ASTO board (3) and the 24 V
source.
• Fasten the cover of the ASTO unit back with screws.
X2
X1
24 V
3

89
Circuit diagram
The diagram below shows the connection between the ASTO board and the drive
when it is ready. For an example diagram of a complete Safe torque off circuit, see
page 59.
3AUA0000072542
Validation and start-up

Validate and start-up the function according to the instructions given in ACS800-
(3AUA0000063373 [English]).
Dimensional drawing
See page 138.

90

91

This chapter shows
• external control connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 Standard Control
Program (Factory Macro)
• specifications of the inputs and outputs of the board.
Note on terminal labelling

Optional modules (Rxxx) may have identical terminal designations with the RMIO
board.

External +24 V power supply for the RMIO board is recommended if
Parameter settings

92
External control connections (non-US)

Control Program (Factory Macro) are shown below. For external control connections
of other application macros and programs, see the appropriate Firmware Manual.
X2* RMIO
X20 X20
RMIO 1 1 VREF- Reference voltage -10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL <
Terminal block size: 2 2 AGND 10 kohm
cables 0.3 to 3.3 mm2 (22 to 12 AWG) X21 X21
Tightening torque: 1 1 VREF+ Reference voltage 10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL <
0.2 to 0.4 N·m 2 2 AGND 10 kohm
(0.2 to 0.3 lbf·ft) 3 3 AI1+ Speed reference 0(2) ... 10 V, Rin >
4 4 AI1- 200 kohm
6 6 AI2- 100 ohm
8 8 AI3- 100 ohm
* optional terminal block in ACS800-02 X22 X22
and ACS800-07
1 1 DI1 Stop/Start
1)
Only effective if par. 10.03 is set to 2 2 DI2 Forward/Reverse 1)
REQUEST by the user. 3 3 DI3 Not in use
2)
0 = open, 1 = closed 5 5 DI5 Constant speed select 3)
DI4 Ramp times according to 6 6 DI6 Constant speed select 3)
7 7 +24VD +24 VDC max. 100 mA
8 8 +24VD
3)
SPEEDS. 10 10 DGND2 Digital ground
DI5 DI6 Operation
1 0 Constant speed 1 1 1 +24V Auxiliary voltage output and input, non-
0 1 Constant speed 2 2 2 GND isolated, 24 VDC 250 mA 5)
1 1 Constant speed 3 X25 X25
1 1 RO1 Relay output 1: ready
4) See parameter 21.09 START INTRL
2 2 RO1
FUNC.
5)
3 3 RO1
X26 X26
modules installed on the board. 1 1 RO2 Relay output 2: running
2 2 RO2
3 3 RO2
X27 X27
Fault 2 2 RO3
3 3 RO3

93
External control connections (US)

Control Program (Factory Macro US version) are shown below. For external control
connections of other application macros and programs, see the appropriate
Firmware Manual.
X2* RMIO
RMIO X20 X20
Terminal block size: 1 1 VREF- Reference voltage -10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL <
2 2 AGND 10 kohm
cables 0.3 to 3.3 mm2 (22 to 12 AWG)
Tightening torque: X21 X21
1 1 VREF+ Reference voltage 10 VDC, 1 kohm < RL <
0.2 to 0.4 N·m
2 2 AGND 10 kohm
(0.2 to 0.3 lbf·ft)
3 3 AI1+ Speed reference 0(2) ... 10 V, Rin >
4 4 AI1- 200 kohm
6 6 AI2- 100 ohm
8 8 AI3- 100 ohm
X22 X22
1 1 DI1 Start ( )
2 2 DI2 Stop ( )
* optional terminal block in ACS800-U2
and ACS800-U7
5 5 DI5 Constant speed select 3)
REQUEST by the user. 6 6 DI6 Constant speed select 3)
7 7 +24VD +24 VDC max. 100 mA
2)
0 = open, 1 = closed
8 8 +24VD
DI4 Ramp times according to
3) X23 X23
SPEEDS. 1 1 +24V Auxiliary voltage output and input, non-
DI5 DI6 Operation 2 2 GND isolated, 24 VDC 250 mA 5)
1 0 Constant speed 1 1 1 RO1 Relay output 1: ready
X26 X26
4)
See parameter 21.09 START INTRL 1 1 RO2 Relay output 2: running
FUNC.
5) Total maximum current shared 2 2 RO2
between this output and optional 3 3 RO2
modules installed on the board. X27 X27
Fault 2 2 RO3
3 3 RO3

94
RMIO board specifications

Analogue inputs
Two programmable differential current inputs (0 mA / 4 mA ... 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm)
and one programmable differential voltage input
(-10 V / 0 V / 2 V ... +10 V, Rin > 200 kohm).
The analogue inputs are galvanically isolated as a group.
Isolation test voltage 500 VAC, 1 min
Max. common mode voltage ±15 VDC
between the channels
Common mode rejection ratio > 60 dB at 50 Hz
Resolution 0.025% (12 bit) for the -10 V ... +10 V input. 0.5% (11 bit) for the 0 ... +10 V and
0 ... 20 mA inputs.
Inaccuracy ± 0.5% (Full Scale Range) at 25 °C (77 °F). Temperature coefficient: ± 100 ppm/°C
(± 56 ppm/°F), max.
Constant voltage output

Voltage +10 VDC, 0, -10 VDC ± 0.5% (Full Scale Range) at 25 °C (77 °F). Temperature
coefficient: ± 100 ppm/°C (± 56 ppm/°F) max.
Maximum load 10 mA
Applicable potentiometer 1 kohm to 10 kohm
Auxiliary power output

Voltage 24 VDC ± 10%, short circuit proof
Maximum current 250 mA (shared between this output and optional modules installed on the RMIO)
Analogue outputs
Two programmable current outputs: 0 (4) to 20 mA, RL < 700 ohm
Resolution 0.1% (10 bit)
Inaccuracy ± 1% (Full Scale Range) at 25 °C (77 °F). Temperature coefficient: ± 200 ppm/°C
(± 111 ppm/°F) max.
Digital inputs
Six programmable digital inputs (common ground: 24 VDC, -15% to +20%) and a start
interlock input. Group isolated, can be divided in two isolated groups (see Isolation
and grounding diagram below).
Thermistor input: 5 mA, < 1.5 kohm “1” (normal temperature), > 4 kohm “0”
(high temperature), open circuit “0” (high temperature).
Internal supply for digital inputs (+24 VDC): short-circuit proof. An external 24 VDC
supply can be used instead of the internal supply.
Isolation test voltage 500 VAC, 1 min
Logical thresholds < 8 VDC “0”, > 12 VDC “1”
Input current DI1 to DI 5: 10 mA, DI6: 5 mA
Filtering time constant 1 ms

95
Relay outputs
Three programmable relay outputs
Switching capacity 8 A at 24 VDC or 250 VAC, 0.4 A at 120 VDC
Minimum continuous current 5 mA rms at 24 VDC
Maximum continuous current 2 A rms
Isolation test voltage 4 kVAC, 1 minute
DDCS fibre optic link

With optional communication adapter module RDCO. Protocol: DDCS (ABB
Distributed Drives Communication System)
24 VDC power input
Voltage 24 VDC ± 10%
(without optional modules)
Maximum current consumption 1200 mA (with optional modules inserted)
The terminals on the RMIO board as well as on the optional modules attachable to the board fulfil the Protective Extra
Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178 provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also
fulfil the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m (6562 ft). Above 2000 m (6562 ft), see page 67.

96
Isolation and grounding diagram
(Test voltage: 500 V AC)

X20
1 VREF-
2 AGND
X21
1 VREF+
2 AGND
3 AI1+
4 AI1- Common mode
voltage between
5 AI2+
channels ±15 V
6 AI2-
7 AI3+
8 AI3-
9 AO1+
10 AO1-
11 AO2+
12 AO2-
X22
1 DI1
2 DI2
3 DI3
4 DI4
Jumper J1 settings:
9 DGND1
5 DI5 All digital inputs share a common

J1
6 DI6 ground. This is the default setting.
7 +24VD
8 +24VD Grounds of input groups
11 DIIL DI1…DI4 and DI5/DI6/DIIL
or
are separate (isolation
10 DGND2 voltage 50 V).
X23
1 +24 V
2 GND
X25
1 RO1
2 RO1
3 RO1
X26
1 RO2
2 RO2
3 RO2
X27
1 RO3
2 RO3
3 RO3
(Test voltage:
4 kV AC)
Ground

97

This chapter contains an installation checklist.
Checklist
Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start-up. Go
through the checklist below together with another person.
Check that...
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The ambient operating conditions are allowed. (See Mechanical installation, Technical data:
IEC data or NEMA data)
The unit is fixed properly on a vertical non-flammable wall. (See Mechanical installation.)
The cooling air will flow freely.
The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start. (See Planning the electrical
installation: Motor selection and compatibility, Technical data: Motor connection.)
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (See Planning the electrical installation, Electrical installation.)
The +E202 and +E200 EMC filter capacitors are disconnected if the drive is connected to an
IT (ungrounded) system. (See Electrical installation: IT (ungrounded) systems)
The capacitors are reformed if stored over one year, refer to Converter modules with
electrolytic DC capacitors in the DC link, Capacitor reforming instructions (3BFE64059629
[English]).
The drive is grounded properly.
The mains (input power) voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage.
The mains (input power) connections at U1, V1 and W1 and their tightening torques are OK.
Appropriate mains (input power) fuses and disconnector are installed.
The motor connections at U2, V2 and W2 and their tightening torques are OK.
The motor cable is routed away from other cables.
98
Check that...
There are no power factor compensation capacitors in the motor cable.
The external control connections inside the drive are OK.
There are no tools, foreign objects or dust from drilling inside the drive.
Mains (input power) voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive (with bypass
connection).
Drive, motor connection box and other covers are in place.
99
Start-up and use

This chapter describes the start-up procedure and use of the drive, and the control
panel control of the line-side and motor-side converters.
Start-up and use
Remove the protective film covering the unit.

Perform the start-up procedure as described in the appropriate application program
firmware manual. The parameters of the line-side converter control program
need not be set in a normal start-up procedure or in normal use. However, it is
recommended to set parameter 16.15 START MODE to LEVEL:
• if the motor is started and stopped frequently. This prolongs the lifespan of the
charging contactor.
• when starting the motor without delay after the start command is required.
• If the drive is connected to a common DC bus. Otherwise, the charging resistor
may be damaged.
For setting of parameter 16.15 START MODE, change the control panel to control
the line-side converter as shown on page 100.
Note:
• By default, the control panel controls the RMIO board of the motor-side converter
(ID number 1). If the control panel is set to control the RMIO board of the line-side
converter (ID number 2), the drive does not stop by pressing the control panel
Stop key in local control mode. Have the control panel control the RMIO board of
the motor-side converter in normal use.
• Do not change the ID numbers of the converters from the default settings. If the
ID numbers of the line-side and motor side converters are set equal, the control
panel stops communicating.
Start-up and use

100
Drives with option +Q950: Validate and perform the start-up procedure of the
Prevention of unexpected start-up function according to instructions given in chapter
Drives with option +Q967: Validate and perform the start-up procedure of the Safe
torque off function according to instructions given in ACS800-
(3AUA0000063373 [English]).
Control panel
The drive is equipped with a control panel (type CDP 312R). The CDP 312R is the
user interface of the line-side converter and the motor-side converter of the drive,
providing the essential controls such as Start/Stop/Direction/Reset/Reference, and
the parameter settings for the control programs. More information on using the
control panel can be found in the Firmware Manual delivered with the drive.
The control panel is wired to both the line-side converter and the motor-side
converter using a Y-splitter. The converter that is currently being controlled is
indicated by the converter name on the drive display; the suffix “MR” denotes motor-
side converter, “LR” denotes line-side converter. The control is switched between the
converters as follows:
To control the line-side converter...

Step Action Press key Display (example)
1. Enter the Drive Selection Mode.

Note: In local control mode, the motor-side converter trips ACS 800 0050_5MR
if parameter 30.02 PANEL LOSS is set to FAULT. Refer to DRIVE
ASXR7xxx
the appropriate control program firmware manual.
ID-NUMBER 1
2. Scroll to ID number 2.
ACS 800 0050_5LR
IXXR7xxx
ID-NUMBER 2
3. Verify the change to the line-side converter and display the

warning or fault text. 2 -> 380.0 V
ACT ACS 800 0050_5LR
** FAULT **
DC OVERVOLT (3210)
WARNING! The drive does not stop by pressing the control panel Stop key in local
control mode.
Start-up and use

101
To control the motor-side converter...

Step Action Press key Display (example)
1. Enter the Drive Selection Mode.

ACS 800 0050_5LR
DRIVE
IXXR7xxx
ID-NUMBER 2
2. Scroll to ID number 1.
ACS 800 0050_5MR
ACXR7xxx
ID-NUMBER 1
3. Verify the change to the motor-side converter.

1 L -> 0.0 rpm I
ACT FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
Removing the control panel

To remove the control panel from the panel holder, press down the locking clip and
pull the panel out.
Start-up and use

102
Start-up and use

103

This chapter contains listings of parameters specific to the ACS800-11 and
ACS800-U11.
Line-side converter actual signals and parameters in the motor-side

converter control program
This section describes the actual signals and parameters of the line-side converter
control program which are copied to the motor-side converter control program. The
user can view two actual signals (by default, measured line current and intermediate
circuit DC voltage) and change the values of the copied parameters without
changing the control panel between two control boards and programs. In normal
use, there is no need to set these or other parameters of the line-side converter
control program. For more information on the parameters, refer to ACS800 IGBT
Supply Control Program Firmware Manual [3AFE68315735 (English)].

Term Definition
Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the
user. No user setting possible.
Def. Default value
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the control
panel and the integer used in serial communication.
Parameter A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive.

104
Actual signals
No. Name/Value Description FbEq Def.
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS Signals from the line converter.
09.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL 1 Line converter signal selected by par. 95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL. 1=1 106
09.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2 Line converter signal selected by par. 95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL. 1=1 110
Parameters
No. Name/Value Description FbEq Def.
95 HARDWARE SPECIF Line converter references and actual signal selections.
95.06 LCU Q POW REF Reactive power reference for the line converter i.e. the value for 0
par. 24.02 Q POWER REF2 in the IGBT Supply Control Program.
Scaling example 1: 10000 equals to a value of 10000 of
parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2 and 100% of par. 24.01 Q
POWER REF (i.e. 100% of the converter nominal power given in
par. 04.06 CONV NOM POWER) when par. 24.03 Q POWER
REF2 SEL is set to PERCENT.
Scaling example 2: Par. 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to
kVAr. A value of 1000 of par. 95.06 equals to 1000 kVAr of par.
24.02 Q POWER REF2. Value of par. 24.01 Q POWER REF is
then 100 · (1000 kVAr divided by converter nominal power in
kVAr)%.
Scaling example 3: Par. 24.03 Q POWER REF2 SEL is set to
PHI. A value of 10000 of par. 95.06 equals to a value of 100 deg
of parameter 24.02 Q POWER REF2 which is limited to 30 deg.
The value of par. 24.01 Q POWER REF will be determined
approximately according to the following equation where P is read
from actual signal 1.06 POWER:
S
P P Q
cos 30 = --- = -----------------------
S 2 2 30 deg
P +Q
P
Positive reference 30 deg denotes capacitive load.
Negative reference 30 deg denotes inductive load.
Par. 24.02 -30 -10 0 10 30 (deg)

Par. 95.06
-10000 -3000 -1000 0 1000 3000 +10000
-10000 ... +10000 Setting range. 1=1

95.07 LCU DC REF (V) DC voltage reference for line converter i.e. the value for par. 23.01 0
DC VOLT REF.
0 … 1100 Setting range in volts. 1=1V
95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL Selects the line-side converter address from which actual signal 106
09.12 LCU ACT SIGNAL 1 is read.
0 … 10000 Parameter index. 1=1
95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL Selects the line-side converter address from which actual signal 110
09.13 LCU ACT SIGNAL 2 is read.
0 … 10000 Parameter index. 1=1

105
ACS800-11/U11 specific parameters in the IGBT Supply Control Program

The signals and parameters of the IGBT Supply Control Program which are specific
to the ACS800-11 and ACS800-U11 are described in the tables below. These
parameters need not be set in a normal start-up. For more information on
parameters of the IGBT Supply Control Program, refer to ACS800 IGBT Supply
Control Program Firmware Manual [3AFE68315735 (English)].

Term Definition
B Boolean data type
C Character string data type
Def. Default value data type
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: the scaling between the value shown on the control
panel and the integer used in serial communication
I Integer data type
R Real data type
T. Data type (see B, C, I, R)
Parameters
No. Name/Value Description T./FbEq Def.
16 SYSTEM CTR Parameter lock, parameter back-up etc.
INPUTS
16.15 START MODE Selects I/O control start mode when par. 98.01 COMMAND SEL is B EDGE
set to I/O.
LEVEL Starts converter by level of control command. Control command is 0
selected by parameter 98.01 COMMAND SEL and 98.02 COMM.
MODULE.
WARNING! After a fault reset, the converter will start if the
start signal is on.
EDGE Starts converter by EDGE of control command. Control command is 1

selected by parameter 98.01 COMMAND SEL and 98.02 COMM.
MODULE.

106
No. Name/Value Description T./FbEq Def.

31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic fault reset.
Automatic resets are possible only for certain fault types and when
the automatic reset function is activated for that fault type.
The automatic reset function is not operational if the drive is in local
control (L visible on the first row of the control panel display).
WARNING! If the start command is selected and it is ON,
the line converter may restart immediately after automatic
fault reset. Ensure that the use of this feature will not cause
danger.
WARNING! Do not use these parameters when the drive is
connected to a common DC bus. The charging resistors
may be damaged in an automatic reset.
31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs I 0
within the time defined by parameter 31.02 TRIAL TIME.
0…5 Number of the automatic resets 0
31.02 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See R 30 s
parameter 31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS.
1.0 … 180.0 s Allowed resetting time 100 …
18000
31.03 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before R 0s
attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 31.01 NUMBER OF
TRIALS.
0.0 … 3.0 s Resetting delay 0 … 300
31.04 OVERCURRENT Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the line converter B NO
overcurrent fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
31.05 OVERVOLTAGE Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link B NO
overvoltage fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link B NO
undervoltage fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535

107
Fixed parameters with the ACS800-11 and ACS800-U11

When the IGBT Supply Control Program is loaded into the ACS800-11 or
ACS800-U11, the following parameters are set to the default values given in the
table below.
Parameter Default value If changed,
11.01 DC REF SELECT FIELDBUS the default values will be
11.02 Q REF SELECT PARAM 24.02 restored on the next power-
up.
98.01 COMMAND SEL MCW. Note: If par. 16.15 START
MODE is set to LEVEL, the default
value is changed to I/O on the next
RMIO board power-up.
98.02 COMM. MODULE INU COM LIM
30.02 EARTH FAULT FAULT. the default values will not

Note: The ACS800-11/U11 line be restored on the next
converter is not equipped with power-up. Do not change.
internal earth fault supervision. If the default values are
changed, the drive will not
70.01 CH0 NODE ADDR 120 operate.
70.19 CH0 HW CONNECTION RING
70.20 CH3 HW CONNECTION RING
71.01 CH0 DRIVEBUS MODE NO

108

109
Maintenance

This chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions.
Safety
WARNING! Read the Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual before
performing any maintenance on the equipment. Ignoring the safety instructions can
cause injury or death.
Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB.
Interval Maintenance Instruction
Every 6 to 12 months Heatsink temperature check See Heatsink.

Depends on the dustiness of and cleaning
the environment.
Every year when stored Capacitor reforming See Reforming.
Every 3 years Change of additional cooling See Additional fan.

fan
Every 6 years Main cooling fan change See Main cooling fan.
Every 10 years Capacitor change See Capacitors.
Consult your local ABB Service representative for more details on the maintenance.
On the Internet, go to http://www.abb.com/drivesservices.
Maintenance
110
Heatsink
The heatsink fins pick up dust from the cooling air. The drive runs into
overtemperature warnings and faults if the heatsink is not clean. In a “normal”
environment (not dusty, not clean) the heatsink should be checked annually, in a
dusty environment more often.
Clean the heatsink as follows (when necessary):
1. Remove the cooling fan (see section Main cooling fan).
2. Blow clean compressed air (not humid) from bottom to top and simultaneously
use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust. Note: If there is a risk of
the dust entering adjoining equipment, perform the cleaning in another room.
3. Replace the cooling fan.
Main cooling fan

The lifespan of the cooling fan depends on the drive usage and ambient
temperature. See the appropriate ACS800 firmware manual for an actual signal
which indicates the hours of usage of the fan. For resetting the running time signal
after a fan replacement, please contact ABB.
Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the
gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning. If the drive is
operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these
symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not use
other than ABB specified spare parts.
Maintenance
111
Fan replacement (R5, R6)

1. Loosen the fastening screws of the top plate.
2. Push the top plate backwards.
3. Lift the top plate up.
4. Disconnect the fan supply wires (detachable connector).
5. Lift the fan up.
1 1
5
4
Additional fan
Replacement (R5)
Remove the front cover. The fan is located on the right-hand side of the control panel
(R5). Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable. Install the new fan in reverse order.
Maintenance
112
Replacement (R6)
Remove the top cover by lifting it by the rear edge. To remove the fan, release the
retaining clips by pulling the back edge (1) of the fan upwards. Disconnect the cable
(2, detachable terminal). Install the new fan in reverse order.
View from above when top

cover is removed
Air flow upwards 1
2
Rotation
direction
Capacitors
The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors. The lifespan
depends on drive loading and ambient temperature. Capacitor life can be prolonged
by lowering the ambient temperature.
It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure. Capacitor failure is usually followed by
a mains fuse failure or a fault trip. Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected.
Replacements are available from ABB. Do not use other than ABB specified spare
parts.
Reforming
Reform (re-age) spare part capacitors once a year according to Converter modules
with electrolytic DC capacitors in the DC link, Capacitor reforming instructions
Maintenance
113
Fault tracing

This chapter describes the fault and warning messages displayed on the control
panel and the LEDs of the drive. For a detailed description of the fault and warning
messages, see the appropriate firmware manual.
Faults and warnings displayed by the CDP 312R control panel

The control panel displays the Warning and Fault messages of the unit (that is, line-
side converter or motor-side converter) the panel is currently controlling.
In addition, the panel indicates the active warnings and faults in the unit that is not
currently being controlled. The information between the units is delivered through a
separate serial communication channel.
An active warning or fault state in the line-side converter (ID:2) is indicated by
flashing messages WARNING, ID:2 or FAULT, ID:2 on the control panel display
when the panel is controlling the line-side converter.
FAULT, ID:2
ACS 800 0490_3MR
*** FAULT ***
LINE CONV (FF51)
To display the warning or fault identification text, switch the control panel to view the
line-side converter as described in section Control panel on page 100.
Information on warnings and faults concerning the line-side converter are described
in ACS800 IGBT Supply Control Program Firmware Manual [3AFE68315735
(English)].
The warnings and faults concerning the motor-side converter are described in the
control program (e.g. Standard Control Program) Firmware Manual.
Conflicting ID numbers
If the ID numbers of the line-side and the motor-side converters are set equal, the
control panel stops functioning. To clear the situation:
• Disconnect the panel cable from the RMIO board of the motor-side converter, and
connect it to the RMIO board of the line-side converter.
• Set the ID number of the line-side converter RMIO board to 2. For the setting
procedure, see the control program (e.g. Standard Control Program) Firmware
Manual.
• Disconnect the panel cable from the line-side converter RMIO board, and
reconnect it to the motor-side converter RMIO board.
Fault tracing
114
• Reconnect the panel cable to the RMIO board of the motor-side converter again
and set the ID number to 1.
LEDs
This table describes LEDs of the drive.
Where LED When the LED is lit
RMIO board * Red Drive in fault state

Green The power supply on the board is OK.
Control panel mounting platform Red Drive in fault state
Green The main +24 V power supply for the control panel and the
RMIO board is OK.
* The LEDs are not visible
Fault tracing
115
Technical data

This chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive, e.g. the ratings, sizes
and technical requirements, provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and
other markings and warranty policy.
IEC data
Ratings
The IEC ratings for the ACS800-11 with 50 Hz and 60 Hz supplies are given below.
The symbols are described below the table.
ACS800-11 type Nominal No- Light-overload Heavy-duty use Frame Air flow Heat
overload
ratings use
A A
kW
A kW A kW m3/h W
-0011-2 34 52 7.5 32 7.5 26 5.5 R5 350 505
-0016-2 47 68 11 45 11 38 7.5 R5 350 694
-0020-2 59 90 15 56 15 45 11 R5 350 910
-0025-2 75 118 22 69 18.5 59 15 R5 350 1099
-0030-2 88 137 22 83 22 72 18.5 R5 350 1315
-0040-2 120 168 37 114 30 84 22 R6 405 1585
-0050-2 150 234 45 143 45 117 30 R6 405 2125
-0060-2 169 264 45 157 45 132 37 R6 405 2530
-0016-3 34 52 15 32 15 26 11 R5 350 550
-0020-3 38 61 18.5 36 18.5 34 15 R5 350 655
-0025-3 47 68 22 45 22 38 18.5 R5 350 760
-0030-3 59 90 30 56 30 45 22 R5 350 1000
-0040-3 72 118 37 69 37 59 30 R5 350 1210
-0050-3 86 137 45 83 45 65 30 R5 350 1450
-0060-3 120 168 55 114 55 88 45 R6 405 1750
-0070-3 150 234 75 143 75 117 55 R6 405 2350
-0100-3 165 264 90 157 75 132 75 R6 405 2800
-0020-5 31 52 18.5 29 18.5 25 15 R5 350 655
-0025-5 36 61 22 34 22 30 18.5 R5 350 760
-0030-5 47 68 30 45 30 37 22 R5 350 1000
-0040-5 58 90 37 55 37 47 30 R5 350 1210
-0050-5 70 118 45 67 45 57 37 R5 350 1450
-0060-5 82 130 55 78 45 62 37 R5 350 1750
-0070-5 120 168 75 114 75 88 55 R6 405 2350
-0100-5 139 234 90 132 90 114 75 R6 405 2800
-0120-5 156 264 110 148 90 125 75 R6 405 3400
-0060-7 57 86 55 54 45 43 37 R6 405 1750
-0070-7 79 120 75 75 55 60 55 R6 405 2350
-0100-7 93 142 90 88 75 71 55 R6 405 2800
00184674
Technical data
116
Symbols
Nominal ratings
Icont.max continuous rms output current. No overload capability at 40 °C (104 °F).
temperature.
Typical ratings:
No-overload use
Pcont.max typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 60034 motors at the nominal
voltage, 230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V.
Light-overload use (10% overload capability)
I2N continuous rms current. 10% overload is allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
PN typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 60034 motors at the nominal
voltage, 230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V.
I2hd continuous rms current. 50% overload is allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
Phd typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most IEC 60034 motors at the nominal
voltage, 230 V, 400 V, 500 V or 690 V.
Sizing
The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range. To achieve
the rated motor power given in the table, the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to
the rated motor current.
Note 1: The maximum allowed momentary motor shaft power is limited to approximately 1.3 · Pcont.max.
If the limit is exceeded, motor torque and current are automatically restricted. The function protects the
input bridge and LCL filter of the drive against overload.
Note 2: The ratings apply at an ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F). At lower temperatures the
Note 3: Use the DriveSize PC tool for a more accurate dimensioning if the ambient temperature is
below 40 °C (104 °F) or the drive is loaded cyclically.
Derating
The load capacity (current and power) decreases if the installation site altitude exceeds 1000 metres
(3300 ft), or if the ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C (104 °F).
Temperature derating
In the temperature range +40 °C (+104 °F) to +50 °C (+122 °F) the rated output current is decreased
1 % for every additional 1 °C (1.8 °F). The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given
in the rating table by the derating factor.
Example If the ambient temperature is 50 °C (+122 °F), the derating factor is 100% - 1 % · 10 °C =
90 % or 0.90. The output current is then 0.90 · I or 0.90 · I . °C
2N 2hd
Altitude derating
In altitudes from 1000 to 4000 m (3300 to 13123 ft) above sea level, the derating is 1% for every 100 m
(328 ft). For a more accurate derating, use the DriveSize PC tool.
Technical data
117
Mains cable fuses

Fuses for short-circuit protection of the mains cable are listed below. The fuses also
protect the adjoining equipment of the drive in case of a short-circuit. Check that the
operating time of the fuse is below 0.1 seconds. The operating time depends on
the supply network impedance and the cross-sectional area and length of the supply
cable. See also Planning the electrical installation: Thermal overload and short-
circuit protection. For UL recognized fuses, see NEMA data.
Note 3: Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they meet the ratings.
ACS800-11 type Input Fuse
current A A2s * V Manufacturer Type IEC size
00184674
* maximum total I2t value for 550 V
Technical data
118
aR fuses
ACS800-11 type Input Fuse
current 2
A A s (@660V) V Manufacturer Fuse Type DIN 43620
size

-0011-2 32 63 1450 690 Bussmann 000 170M1565
-0016-2 44 80 2550 690 Bussmann 000 170M1566
-0020-2 55 100 4650 690 Bussmann 000 170M1567
-0025-2 70 125 8500 690 Bussmann 000 170M1568
-0030-2 82 125 8500 690 Bussmann 000 170M1568
-0040-2 112 160 7500 690 Bussmann 1* 170M3814
-0050-2 140 200 15000 690 Bussmann 1* 170M3815
-0060-2 157 250 28500 690 Bussmann 1* 170M3816
-0016-3 32 63 1450 690 Bussmann 000 170M1565
-0020-3 35 80 2550 690 Bussmann 000 170M1566
-0025-3 44 80 2550 690 Bussmann 000 170M1566
-0030-3 55 100 4650 690 Bussmann 000 170M1567
-0040-3 67 125 8500 690 Bussmann 000 170M1568
-0050-3 80 125 8500 690 Bussmann 000 170M1568
-0060-3 112 160 7500 690 Bussmann 1* 170M3814
-0070-3 140 200 15000 690 Bussmann 1* 170M3815
-0100-3 153 250 28500 690 Bussmann 1* 170M3816
-0020-5 29 63 1450 690 Bussmann 000 170M1565
-0025-5 33 80 2550 690 Bussmann 000 170M1566
-0030-5 44 80 2550 690 Bussmann 000 170M1566
-0040-5 54 100 4650 690 Bussmann 000 170M1567
-0050-5 65 125 8500 690 Bussmann 000 170M1568
-0060-5 76 125 8500 690 Bussmann 000 170M1568
-0070-5 112 160 7500 690 Bussmann 1* 170M3814
-0100-5 129 200 15000 690 Bussmann 1* 170M3815
-0120-5 145 250 28500 690 Bussmann 1* 170M3816
-0060-7 53 100 4650 690 Bussmann 000 170M1367
-0070-7 73 125 8500 690 Bussmann 000 170M1368
-0100-7 86 160 7500 690 Bussmann 1* 170M3164
00184674
Technical data
119
Cable types
The table below gives copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents.
Cable sizing is based on max. 9 cables laid on a cable ladder side by side, ambient
temperature 30 °C, PVC insulation, surface temperature 70 °C (158 °F)
(EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-2/2001). For other conditions, size the cables
according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the load current
of the drive.
Copper cables with concentric Aluminium cables with concentric
copper shield copper shield
Max. load Cable type Max. load Cable type
current current
2
A mm A mm2
34 3x6 61 3x25
47 3x10 75 3x35
62 3x16 91 3x50
79 3x25 117 3x70
98 3x35 143 3x95
119 3x50 165 3x120
153 3x70 191 3x150
186 3x95 218 3x185
215 3x120
249 3x150
284 3x185
00096931
Cable entries
Mains, DC link and motor cable terminal sizes (per phase), accepted cable
Frame size U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+,UDC- Earthing PE
Wire size Max. cable Ø Tightening Wire size Tightening
IP21 torque torque
mm2 mm N·m mm2 N·m
R5 6…70 35 10 6…35 15
R6 95...185 * 53 20…40 16...95 8
* with cable lugs 16...70 mm2, tightening torque 20...40 N·m

Frame size IP21 Noise
Height Width Depth Weight
mm mm mm kg dB
Drive
R5 816 265 390 65 70
R6 970 300 439 100 73
Package
R5 1085 400 549 5
R6 1145 400 585 4
Technical data
120
NEMA data
Ratings
The NEMA ratings for the ACS800-U11 and ACS800-11 with 60 Hz supplies are
given below. The symbols are described below the table. For sizing, derating and
50 Hz supplies, see IEC data.
ACS800-U11 type Imax Normal use Heavy-duty use Frame Air flow Heat
ACS800-11 type size dissipation
I2N PN I2hd Phd
-0011-2 52 32 10 26 7.5 R5 206 1730
-0016-2 68 45 15 38 10 R5 206 2380
-0020-2 90 56 20 45 10 R5 206 3110
-0025-2 118 69 25 59 15 R5 206 3760
-0030-2 137 83 30 72 20 R5 206 4500
-0040-2 168 114 40 84 25 R6 238 5420
-0050-2 234 143 50 117 30 R6 238 7260
-0060-2 264 157 60 132 40 R6 238 8650
-0020-5 52 29 20 25 15 R5 206 2240
-0025-5 61 34 25 30 20 R5 206 2600
-0030-5 68 45 30 37 25 R5 206 3420
-0040-5 90 55 40 47 30 R5 206 4140
-0050-5 118 67 50 57 40 R5 206 4960
-0060-5 130 78 60 62** 50** R5 206 5980
-0070-5 168 114 75 88 60 R6 238 8030
-0100-5 234 132 100 114 75 R6 238 9570
-0120-5 264 148* 125* 125 100 R6 238 11620
-0060-7 86 54 50 43 40 R6 238 5980
-0070-7 120 75 60 60 50 R6 238 8030
-0100-7 142 88 75 71 60 R6 238 9570
00184674
* 156 A, motor power < 125 hp and a reactive power reference of 0 allowed with 460 V
**
65 A, motor power < 50 hp and a reactive power reference of 0 allowed with 460 V
Symbols
Nominal ratings
temperature.
Normal use (10% overload capability)
I2N continuous rms current. 10% overload is typically allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
PN typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA rated motors (230 V,
460 V or 575 V).
I2hd continuous rms current. 50% overload is typically allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
Phd typical motor power. The power ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA rated motors (230 V,
460 V or 575 V).
Note 1: The ratings apply at an ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F). In lower temperatures the
Technical data
121
Input cable fuses

The ratings of UL listed fuses for branch circuit protection are listed below. The fuses
also prevent damage to the adjoining equipment of the drive in case of a short-circuit
inside the drive. Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0.1 seconds.
The operating time depends on the supply network impedance and the cross-
sectional area and length of the supply cable. The fuses must be of the “non-time
delay” type. See also Planning the electrical installation: Thermal overload and
short-circuit protection.
Note 3: Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they meet the ratings.
ACS800-U11 type Input Fuse
ACS800-11 type current
-0011-2 32 40 600 Bussmann JJS-40 T
-0016-2 44 70 600 Bussmann JJS-70 T
-0020-2 55 80 600 Bussmann JJS-80 T
-0025-2 70 90 600 Bussmann JJS-90 T
-0030-2 82 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 T
-0040-2 112 150 600 Bussmann JJS-150 T
-0050-2 140 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0060-2 157 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0020-5 29 40 600 Bussmann JJS-40 T
-0025-5 33 50 600 Bussmann JJS-50 T
-0030-5 44 70 600 Bussmann JJS-70 T
-0040-5 54 80 600 Bussmann JJS-80 T
-0050-5 65 90 600 Bussmann JJS-90 T
-0060-5 76 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 T
-0070-5 112 150 600 Bussmann JJS-150 T
-0100-5 129 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0120-5 145 200 600 Bussmann JJS-200 T
-0060-7 53 80 600 Bussmann JJS-80 T
-0070-7 73 100 600 Bussmann JJS-100 T
-0100-7 86 125 600 Bussmann JJS-125 T
00184674
Technical data
122
Cable types
Cable sizing is based on NEC Table 310-16 for copper wires, 75 °C (167 °F) wire
insulation at 40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature. Not more than three current-
carrying conductors in raceway or cable or earth (directly buried). For other
conditions, dimension the cables according to local safety regulations, appropriate
input voltage and the load current of the drive.
Copper cables with concentric copper shield
Max. load Cable type
current
A AWG/kcmil
31 10
44 8
57 6
75 4
88 3
101 2
114 1
132 1/0
154 2/0
176 3/0
202 4/0
224 250 MCM or 2 x 1
251 300 MCM or 2 x 1/0
273 350 MCM or 2 x 2/0
00096931
Cable Entries
Input, DC link and motor cable (per phase) terminal sizes, accepted cable diameters
and tightening torques are given below.
Frame size U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+, UDC- Grounding PE
Wire size Wire Ø Tightening Wire size Tightening
(UL type 1) torque torque
AWG in. lbf·ft AWG lbf·ft
R5 4...2/0 1.39 11.1 4...2/0 11.1
R6 3/0 ... 350 MCM * 2.09 14.8...29.5 4/0 5.9
* with cable lugs 6...2/0 AWG, tightening torque 14.8...29.5 lbf·ft
Dimensions and weights

Frame size UL type 1 Noise
Height Width Depth Weight
in. in. in. lb dB
Drive
R5 32.03 10.43 15.35 143 70
R6 38.19 11.81 17.28 220 73
Package
R5 42.72 15.75 21.61 11
R6 45.08 15.75 23.03 9
Technical data
123
Input power connection

Voltage (U1) 208/220/230/240 VAC 3-phase ± 10% for 230 VAC units
380/400/415 VAC 3-phase ± 10% for 400 VAC units
380/400/415/440/460/480/500 VAC 3-phase ± 10% for 500 VAC units
525/550/575/600/660/690 VAC 3-phase ± 10% for 690 VAC units
The output voltage can be raised with setting of parameter 23.01 DC VOLT REF. Example:
With 400 V supply voltage and 700 VDC intermediate DC circuit voltage, it is possible to
run a 500 V motor at the motor nominal voltage.
400 VAC ~ 700 VDC 500 VAC

M
3~
~
Prospective short-circuit Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current in the supply is 65 kA in a second
current (IEC 60439-1, providing that the mains cable of the drive is protected with appropriate fuses.
UL 508C) US and Canada: The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 65 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive nominal voltage when protected by T
class fuses.
Frequency 48 to 63 Hz, maximum rate of change 17%/s
Imbalance Max. ± 3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage
Voltage dips Max. 25%
Fundamental power factor 1.00 (fundamental at nominal load)
(cos phi1)
Harmonic distortion THD current < 0.05 · I1cont.max if supply network voltage is not distorted by other loads and
when the drive operates at the nominal load.
Motor connection
Voltage (U2) 0 to U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point
Frequency DTC mode: 0 to 3.2 · fFWP. Maximum frequency 300 Hz.
UNmains
fFWP = · fNmotor
UNmotor
fFWP: frequency at field weakening point; UNmains: mains (input power) voltage;
UNmotor: rated motor voltage; fNmotor: rated motor frequency
Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz
Current See section IEC data or NEMA data.
Power limit Approximately 1.3 · Pcont.max
Field weakening point 8 to 300 Hz
Switching frequency 3 kHz (average)
Maximum recommended 300 m (984 ft). Additional restriction for units with EMC filtering (type code selections
motor cable length +E202 and +E200): max. motor cable length is 100 m (328 ft). With longer cables the EMC
Directive requirements may not be fulfilled.
Efficiency
Approximately 97% at nominal power level
Technical data
124
Cooling
Method Internal fan, flow direction from bottom to top.
Free space around the unit See chapter Mechanical installation.
Degree of protection
IP21 (UL type 1). IPXXD from above.
Without the front cover, the unit must be protected against contact according to IP2x, see
chapter Electrical installation: Cabinet installed units (IP00, UL type open).
AGPS-11C (option +Q950)

Nominal input voltage 115...230 VAC ±10%
Nominal input current 0.1 A (230 V) / 0.2 A (115 V)
Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz
Max. external fuse 16 A
Output voltage 15 VDC ±0.5 V
Approvals C-UL, US listed
ASTO-11C (option +Q967)

Supply voltage range +24 V DC +/- 10%
Current consumption 40 mA (20mA per channel)
Supply cable A single-shielded twisted pair
Maximum cable length 300 m
Conductor min. cross 0.5 mm2, 20 AWG
section
Altitude in operation 0…2000 m (6562 ft)
Technical data
125
Ambient conditions
Environmental limits for the drive are given below. The drive is to be used in a heated,
indoor, controlled environment.
Operation Storage Transportation
installed for stationary use in the protective package in the protective package
Installation site altitude 0 to 4000 m (13123 ft) above - -
sea level [above 1000 m
(3281 ft), see section
Derating]
Drives with option +Q967:
0 to 2000 (6562 ft)
Air temperature -15 to +50 °C (5 to 122 °F). -40 to +70 °C -40 to +70 °C
No frost allowed. See section (-40 to +158 °F) (-40 to +158 °F)
Derating.
Relative humidity 5 to 95% Max. 95% Max. 95%
No condensation allowed. Maximum allowed relative humidity is 60% in the presence of
corrosive gases.
Contamination levels No conductive dust allowed.
(IEC 60721-3-3, IEC 60721-3- Boards with coating: Boards with coating: Boards with coating:
2, IEC 60721-3-1) Chemical gases: Class 3C2 Chemical gases: Class 1C2 Chemical gases: Class 2C2
Atmospheric pressure 70 to 106 kPa 70 to 106 kPa 60 to 106 kPa
0.7 to 1.05 atmospheres 0.7 to 1.05 atmospheres 0.6 to 1.05 atmospheres
Vibration (IEC 60068-2) Max. 1 mm (0.04 in.) Max. 1 mm (0.04 in.) Max. 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
(5 to 13.2 Hz), (5 to 13.2 Hz), (2 to 9 Hz),
2 2 2 2
max. 7 m/s (23 ft/s ) max. 7 m/s (23 ft/s ) max. 15 m/s2 (49 ft/s2)
(13.2 to 100 Hz) sinusoidal (13.2 to 100 Hz) sinusoidal (9 to 200 Hz) sinusoidal
Shock (IEC 60068-2-27) Not allowed Max. 100 m/s2 (330 ft./s2), Max. 100 m/s2 (330 ft./s2),
11 ms 11 ms
Free fall Not allowed 250 mm (10 in.) for weight 250 mm (10 in.) for weight
under 100 kg (220 lb) under 100 kg (220 lb)
100 mm (4 in.) for weight 100 mm (4 in.) for weight
over 100 kg (220 lb) over 100 kg (220 lb)
Materials
Drive enclosure • PC/ABS 2.5 mm, colour NCS 1502-Y (RAL 9002 / PMS 420 C)
• hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5 to 2 mm, thickness of coating 100 micrometres
• extruded aluminium AlSi
Package Cardboard, plywood, PP bands (straps), PE plastic
Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural
resources. The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable. All
metal parts can be recycled. The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under
controlled circumstances, according to local regulations. Most recyclable parts are marked
with recycling marks.
If recycling is not feasible, all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit
boards can be landfilled. The DC capacitors (C1-1 to C1-x) contain electrolyte and the
printed circuit boards contain lead, both of which are classified as hazardous waste within
the EU. They must be removed and handled according to local regulations.
For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions,
please contact your local ABB distributor.
Technical data
126
Applicable standards
The drive complies with the following standards.
• EN 50178:1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations
• EN 60204-1:2006/ AC:2010 Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1: General requirements.
Provisions for compliance: The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing
- an emergency-stop device
- a supply disconnecting device.
• EN 60529:1991 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
+ corrigendum May 1993
+ A1:2000
• EN 60664-1:2007 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems. Part 1: Principles,
requirements and tests.
• EN 61800-3:2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC requirements and specific
test methods
• EN 61800-5-1:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 5-1: Safety requirements -
Electrical, thermal and energy
• UL 508C UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, third edition
• NEMA 250-2003 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
• CSA C22.2 No. 14-05 Industrial control equipment
CE marking
A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the unit follows the provisions of the
European Low Voltage and EMC Directives. The CE marking also verifies that the
drive, in regard to its safety functions (such as Safe torque off), conforms with the
Machinery Directive as a safety component.
Compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive

The compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive has been verified
according to standards EN 60204-1 and EN 61800-5-1.
Compliance with the European EMC Directive

The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical
equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard
(EN 61800-3:2004) covers requirements stated for drives. See section Compliance
with EN 61800-3:2004 below.
Compliance with the European Machinery Directive

The drive is an electronic product which is covered by the European Low Voltage
Directive. However, the drive can be equipped with the Safe torque off function and
other safety functions for machinery which, as safety components, are in the scope
of the Machinery Directive. These functions of the drive comply with European
harmonized standards such as EN 61800-5-2. The declaration of conformity for each
function is in the appropriate function-specific manual.
Technical data
127
Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004
Definitions
EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic
equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment.
Likewise, the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or
system within its locality.
First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not supplying
domestic premises.
Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be
installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first
environment. Note: A professional is a person or organisation having necessary
skills in installing and/or commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC
aspects.
Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended for use in
the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment.
Drive of category C4: drive of rated voltage equal to or above 1000 V, or rated
current equal to or above 400 A, or intended for use in complex systems in the
second environment.
First environment (drive of category C2)
1. The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E202.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the Hardware Manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the Hardware Manual.
4. The maximum cable length is 100 metres.
WARNING! The drive may cause radio interference if used in a residential or
domestic environment. The user is required to take measures to prevent
interference, in addition to the requirements for CE compliance listed above, if
necessary.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive equipped with EMC filter +E202 on IT
(unearthed) systems. The supply network becomes connected to earth potential
through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the unit.
1. The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E200. See also page 70.
4. The maximum cable length is 100 metres.
Technical data
128

If the provisions under Second environment (drive of category C3) cannot be met,
e.g. the drive cannot be equipped with EMC filter +E200 when installed to an IT
(unearthed) network, the requirements of the EMC Directive can be met as follows:
1. It is ensured that no excessive emission is propagated to neighbouring low-
voltage networks. In some cases, the inherent suppression in transformers and
cables is sufficient. If in doubt, a supply transformer with static screening between
the primary and secondary windings can be used.
Medium voltage network

Supply transformer
Neighbouring network
Static screen
Point of measurement
Low voltage Low voltage

Equipment
Drive
(victim)
Equipment Equipment
2. An EMC plan for preventing disturbances is drawn up for the installation. A

template is available from the local ABB representative.
“C-tick” marking
A “C-tick” mark is attached to each drive in order to verify compliance with the EMC
product standard (EN 61800-3:2004), required under the Trans-Tasman
Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme for levels 1, 2 and 3 in Australia and New
Zealand. See section Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004.
Technical data
129
UL/CSA markings
The ACS800-U11 and ACS800-11 drives of UL type 1 are cULus listed and cCSAus
certified.
UL checklist
• The drive is to be used in a heated, indoor controlled environment. The drive must
be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification. Cooling air must be
clean, free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive dust. See section
Ambient conditions for specific limits.
• The maximum ambient air temperature is 40 °C (104 °F) at rated current. The
current is derated for 40 to 50 °C (104 to 122 °F).
• The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 kA
rms symmetrical amperes at the drive nominal voltage (600 V maximum for 690 V
units) when protected by T class fuses.
• The cables located within the motor circuit must be rated for at least 75 °C
(167 °F) in UL-compliant installations.
• The input cable must be protected with fuses. Circuit breakers must not be used
without fuses in the USA. Suitable IEC (class aR) fuses and UL (class T) fuses
are listed in the hardware manual.
• For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in
accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any applicable local
• For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in
accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial
• The drive provides overload protection in accordance with the National Electrical
Code (NEC). See ACS800 Firmware Manual for setting. Default setting is off,
must be activated at start-up.
Technical data
130
Technical data
131
The dimensions are given in millimetres and [inches].
132
US gland/conduit plate
Diameters of knock-out holes:
50 mm [1.97 in.], 22.7 mm
[.89 in.]. The unit is UL type 1
when equipped with the US
gland plate.
68406200
US gland/conduit
plate
Diameters of knock-
out holes: 63.5 mm
[2.50 in.], 22.7 mm
[.89 in.]. The unit is
UL type 1 when
equipped with the
US gland plate.
68405726
133
134
Cabinet duct plates (optional), frame size R5
135
Cabinet duct plates (optional), frame size R6
136
Package (frame size R5)

549 [21.61]
1085 [42.72] 400 [15.75]
Package (frame size R6)

585 [23.03]
1145 [45.08] 400 [15.75]
137
AGPS board with enclosure (optional)
3AFE68293898
138
ASTO board with enclosure (optional)
3AUA0000068698
139
External +24 V power supply for the RMIO boards

via terminal X34

This chapter describes how to connect an external +24 V power supply for the RMIO
boards of the motor-side and line-side converters via terminal X34. For current
consumption of the RMIO board, see chapter Motor control and I/O board (RMIO).
Note: For the motor-side converter RMIO board, external power is easier to supply
via terminal X23, see chapter Motor control and I/O board (RMIO).
Parameter settings
In Standard Application Program, set parameter 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY to
140
Connecting +24 V external power supply
RMIO board of the motor-side converter

1. Break off the tab covering the +24 VDC power input connector with pliers.
2. Pull the connector outwards.
3. Disconnect the wires from the connector (keep the connector for later use).
4. Isolate the ends of the wires individually with insulating tape.
5. Cover the isolated ends of the wires with insulating tape.
6. Push the wires into the inside of the skeleton.
7. Connect the wires of the +24 V external power supply to the disconnected
connector:
if a two-way connector, + wire to terminal 1 and - wire to terminal 2
if a three-way connector, + wire to terminal 2 and - wire to terminal 3.
8. Plug the connector in.
2
X34
1
3
4 4
141
7 8
RMIO board
1 2 3
X34
+ -
1 2
Connection of a two-way
connector
RMIO board
1 2 3
X34
+ -
1 2 3
Connection of a three-way
connector
142
RMIO board of the line-side converter

Frame size R5
The location of terminal X34 in the line-side converter is shown below. Connect the
external +24 V supply to the board as described in steps 2 to 8 in section RMIO
board of the motor-side converter.
Terminal X34
Frame size R6
1. Remove the top cover by releasing the retaining clip with a screw driver and lifting
the cover upwards.
2. Disconnect the DDCS communication module by undoing the fastening screws
and disconnecting the fibre optic cables. Disconnect other optional modules if
present.
3. Disconnect the control panel cable.
4. Disconnect the additional fan cable (detachable terminal) and release the strain
relief.
5. Remove the I/O terminal blocks.
6. Undo the fastening screws of the upper plastic cover.
7. Lift the cover carefully upwards by the lower sides.
8. Disconnect the control panel cable from the RMIO board.
143
9. Lift the upper plastic cover off.

10.Connect the external +24 V supply to the board as described in steps 2 to 5, 7
and 8 in section RMIO board of the motor-side converter.
11.Reconnect all disconnected cables and fasten the covers in reverse order.
1
4
4
6 2
2
3
5 5 5
7 7
144
Further information
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type
designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and
service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/drives and selecting Sales,
Support and Service network.
Product training
Training courses.

Document library on the Internet

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. Go to
www.abb.com/drives and select Document Library. You can browse the library or enter
selection criteria, for example a document code, in the search field.
Contact us
3AFE68367883 Rev C (EN) 2013-03-04

www.abb.com/drives
www.abb.com/drivespartners
ABB Drives
User’s Manual
PROFIBUS DP Adapter Module
RPBA-01
PROFIBUS DP Adapter Module
RPBA-01
User’s Manual
3AFE 64504215 REV F EN
EFFECTIVE: 20.06.2005

5
Safety instructions
Overview
This chapter states the general safety instructions that must be
followed when installing and operating the RPBA-01 PROFIBUS
DP Adapter module.
The material in this chapter must be studied before attempting any
work on, or with, the unit.
In addition to the safety instructions given below, read the
complete safety instructions of the specific drive you are working
on.
General safety instructions

WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work on the
drive should be carried out by qualified electricians.
The drive and adjoining equipment must be properly earthed.
Do not attempt any work on a powered drive. After switching off
the mains, always allow the intermediate circuit capacitors 5
minutes to discharge before working on the frequency converter,
the motor or the motor cable. It is good practice to check (with a
voltage indicating instrument) that the drive is in fact discharged
before beginning work.
The motor cable terminals of the drive are at a dangerously high
voltage when mains power is applied, regardless of motor
operation.
There can be dangerous voltages inside the drive from external
control circuits even when the drive mains power is shut off.
Exercise appropriate care when working on the unit. Neglecting
these instructions can cause physical injury or death.
Safety instructions
6
Safety instructions
7
Table of contents
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
General safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
What this manual contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terms used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Further information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PROFIBUS standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
The RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Delivery check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Warranty and liability information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Quick start-up guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
PLC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Mechanical and electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Drive configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Parameter setting examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table of contents
8
Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
General cabling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Bus termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Node selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
PROFIBUS connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Configuring the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
PROFIBUS connection configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Control locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DP-V0 communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Service Access Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Communication start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
PPO message types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Parameter handling in cyclic communication (DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
DP-V1 communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Service Access Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Communication start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
PPO message types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table of contents
9
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
DP-V1 read/write request sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Parameter data transfer examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fault tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
PROFIdrive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Definitions and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

PROFIBUS definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
PROFIBUS abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

RPBA-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
PROFIBUS link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Table of contents
10
Table of contents
11
Introduction
Intended audience
The manual is intended for the people who are responsible for
commissioning and using an RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter
module. The reader is expected to have a basic knowledge of
electrical fundamentals, electrical wiring practices and how to
operate the drive.
Before you start

It is assumed that the drive is installed and ready to operate before
starting the installation of the extension module.
In addition to conventional installation tools, have the drive
manuals available during the installation as they contain important
information not included in this manual. The drive manuals are
referred to at various points of this document.
What this manual contains

This manual contains information on the wiring, configuration and
use of the RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module.
Safety instructions are featured in the first few pages of this
manual.
Overview contains a short description of the PROFIBUS protocol
and the RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module, a delivery
checklist, and information on the manufacturer’s warranty.
Quick start-up guide contains a short description of how to set
up the RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module.
Mechanical installation contains placing and mounting
instructions for the module.
Electrical installation contains wiring, bus termination and
earthing instructions.
Introduction
12
Programming explains how to program the master station and

the drive before the communication through the adapter module
can be started.
DP-V0 communication contains a description of how data is
transmitted through the RPBA-01 module using the
PROFIBUS-DP (DP-V0) protocol.
DP-V1 communication contains a description of how data is
transmitted through the RPBA-01 module using the DP-V1
extension of the PROFIBUS DP protocol.
Fault tracing explains how to trace faults with the status LEDs on
the RPBA-01 module.
PROFIBUS parameters presents the PROFIBUS Profile-specific
parameters.
Definitions and abbreviations explains definitions and
abbreviations concerning the PROFIBUS protocol family.
Technical data contains information on physical dimensions,
configurable settings and connectors of the module and the
specification of the PROFIBUS link.
Introduction
13
Terms used in this manual

Communication Module
Communication Module is a name for a device (e.g. a fieldbus
adapter) through which the drive is connected to an external
communication network (e.g. a fieldbus). The communication with
the module is activated with a drive parameter.
Data Sets and Data Words
Each data set consists of three 16-bit words, ie. data words. The
Control Word (sometimes called the Command Word) and the
Status Word, References and Actual Values (see the chapters DP-
V0 communication and DP-V1 communication) are types of data
words; the contents of some data words are user-definable.
RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module
The RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module is one of the
optional fieldbus adapter modules available for ABB drives. The
RPBA-01 is a device through which an ABB drive is connected to
a PROFIBUS network.
Parameter
A parameter is an operating instruction for the drive. Parameters
can be read and programmed with the drive control panel, or
through the RPBA-01 module.
Further information
Further information is available on the World Wide Web from
www.profibus.com.
Introduction
14
Introduction
15
Overview
Overview
This chapter contains a short description of the PROFIBUS
standard and the RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module, a
delivery checklist and warranty information.
PROFIBUS standard
PROFIBUS is an open serial communication standard that
enables data exchange between all kinds of automation
components. There are three main variations of PROFIBUS:
PROFIBUS-FMS (Fieldbus Message Specification),
PROFIBUS-DP (Decentralised Periphery) and PROFIBUS-PA
(Process Automation). The RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter
module supports the PROFIBUS DP protocol, including its DP-V1
extension.
The physical transmission medium of the bus is a twisted pair
cable (according to the RS-485 standard). The maximum length of
the bus cable is 100 to 1200 metres, depending on the selected
transmission rate (see Technical data chapter). Up to 31 nodes
can be connected to the same PROFIBUS network segment
without the use of repeaters. With repeaters, it is possible to
connect 127 nodes (including repeaters and master station) to the
network.
In PROFIBUS communication, the master station – usually a
programmable logic controller (PLC) – polls the nodes which
respond and take the actions requested by the master. It is also
possible to send a command to several nodes at the same
broadcast; in this case the nodes do not send a response
message to the master.
The PROFIBUS protocol family is specified in the IEC 61158
standard. The communication with a drive is defined in the
PROFIdrive Profile – The PROFIBUS Profile for Adjustable Speed
Overview
16
Drives. For further information on PROFIBUS, refer to the above-

mentioned standards.
The RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module

The RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module is an optional
device for ABB drives which enables the connection of the drive to
a PROFIBUS network. The drive is considered as a slave on the
PROFIBUS network. Through the RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP
Adapter module, it is possible to:
• give control commands to the drive
(Start, Stop, Run enable, etc.)
• feed a motor speed or torque reference to the drive
• give a process actual value or a process reference to the PID
controller of the drive
• read status information and actual values from the drive
• change drive parameter values
• reset a drive fault.
The PROFIBUS commands and services supported by the
RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module are discussed in the
chapters DP-V0 communication and DP-V1 communication.
Please refer to the user documentation of the drive as to which
commands are supported by the drive.
The adapter module is mounted into an option slot on the motor
control board of the drive. See the Hardware Manual of the drive
for module placement options.
Configuration of the master station requires a type definition
(GSD) file. For DP-V0 communication, the file is available from
www.profibus.com or an ABB representative (the filename is
ABB_0812.GSD). For DP-V1 communication, the type definition
(GSD) file is available from an ABB representative (the filename is
ABB10812.GSD).
Overview
17
PROFIBUS Slave Bus connector X1

master stations (see chapter
Electrical installation)
Fixing screw
(GND)
(frame)
DIP switch for
ABB Drive selecting bus
termination
Rotary node
ABB Drive
address
selection switches
Diagnostic LEDs
Top view (See chapter Side view
Fault tracing)
Figure 1. The construction of the PROFIBUS link and the

RPBA-01 Adapter module.
Compatibility
The RPBA-01 is compatible with all master stations that support
the PROFIBUS DP protocol.
Delivery check
The option package for the RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter
module contains:
• PROFIBUS DP Adapter module, type RPBA-01
• two screws (M3x10)
• this manual.
Overview
18
Warranty and liability information

The manufacturer warrants the equipment supplied against
defects in design, materials and workmanship for a period of
twelve (12) months after installation or twenty-four (24) months
from date of manufacturing, whichever first occurs. The local ABB
office or distributor may grant a warranty period different to the
above and refer to local terms of liability as defined in the supply
contract.
The manufacturer is not responsible for
• any costs resulting from a failure if the installation,
commissioning, repair, alternation, or ambient conditions of the
drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the
documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant
documentation
• units subjected to misuse, negligence or accident
• units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by
the purchaser.
In no event shall the manufacturer, its suppliers or subcontractors
be liable for special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages,
losses or penalties.
If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive, please
contact the local distributor or ABB office. The technical data,
information and specifications are valid at the time of printing. The
manufacturer reserves the right to modifications without prior
notice.
Overview
19
Quick start-up guide
Overview
This chapter presents the steps to take during the start-up of the
RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter Module. For more detailed
information, see the chapters Mechanical installation, Electrical
installation, and Programming elsewhere in this manual.
WARNING! Follow the safety instructions given in this manual and

the Hardware Manual of the drive.
PLC configuration
• Install the RPBA-01 GSD file (e.g. ABB_0812.GSD).

20
• Select the operation mode (PROFIDRIVE, i.e. Generic, or

VENDOR SPECIFIC, i.e. ABB Drives).

21
• Set the PPO type, baud rate and node number.
Mechanical and electrical installation

• Set the node address using the rotary switches on the module.
(If the node address is set by software, set the switches to the
“0” position.)
• Set the bus termination switch to the desired position.
• Insert the RPBA-01 into its specified slot in the drive (SLOT2 for
ACS550, SLOT1 for ACS800).
• Fasten the two screws.
• Plug the fieldbus connector to the module.
Drive configuration
• Power up the drive.
• The detailed procedure of activating the drive for
communication with the module is dependent on the drive type.
Normally, a parameter must be adjusted to activate the
communication. Refer to the Firmware Manual of the drive for

22
information on the communication settings. With an ACS550

drive, set parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK to EXT FBA.
With an ACS800, set parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK
to FIELDBUS and parameter 98.07 COMM PROFILE to ABB
DRIVES or GENERIC (according to PLC hardware
configuration).
• If the configuration is correct, parameter group 51 should
appear in the parameter list of the drive and show the status of
the bus configuration parameters.
• If the node address is to be set by software, set the required
address at parameter 51.02 NODE ADDRESS.

23
Parameter setting examples

Generic drives profile (PROFIdrive) with PPO Type 1 (DP-V0)
Drive parameter Setting
ACS800 ACS550
10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR COMM.CW COMM

11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT COMM. REF COMM
16.01 RUN ENABLE COMM.CW COMM
16.04 FAULT RESET SEL COMM.CW COMM
98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK FIELDBUS –
98.02 COMM PROT SEL – EXT FBA
98.07 COMM PROFILE GENERIC –
51.01 MODULE TYPE PROFIBUS DP*

51.02 NODE ADDRESS 3
51.03 BAUDRATE 12000*
51.04 PPO-type PPO1*
51.21 DP MODE 0
51.27 FBA PAR REFRESH REFRESH
*Read-only or automatically detected
The RPBA-01 uses data-consistent communication, meaning that

the whole data frame is transmitted during a single program cycle.
Some PLCs handle this internally, but others must be
programmed to transmit data-consistent telegrams. For example,

24
Siemens Simatic S7 requires the use of special functions SFC15

and SFC14.
The start/stop commands and reference are according to the

PROFIdrive profile. (See the PROFIBUS state machine on page
77.) The reference value ±16384 (4000h) corresponds to the
nominal speed of the motor (parameter 99.08) in forward and
reverse directions.

25
ABB DRIVES profile (Vendor-specific) with PPO Type 2 (DP-V0)

Drive parameter Setting
ACS800 ACS550

11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT COMM.CW COMM
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT COMM. REF COMM
16.01 RUN ENABLE COMM.CW COMM
16.04 FAULT RESET SEL COMM.CW COMM
98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK FIELDBUS –
98.02 COMM PROT SEL – EXT FBA
98.07 COMM PROFILE ABB DRIVES –
51.01 MODULE TYPE PROFIBUS DP*

51.02 NODE ADDRESS 4
51.03 BAUDRATE 1500*
51.04 PPO-TYPE PPO2*
51.05 PZD3 OUT 1202 (CONST SPEED 1)**
51.06 PZD3 IN 104 (CURRENT)**
51.07 PZD4 OUT 2501 (CRIT SPEED SEL)**
51.08 PZD4 IN 105 (TORQUE)**
51.09 PZD5 OUT 2502 (CRIT SPEED 1 LO)**
51.10 PZD5 IN 106 (POWER)**
51.11 PZD6 OUT 2503 (CRIT SPEED 1 HI)**
51.12 PZD6 IN 107 (DC BUS VOLTAGE)**
••• •••
51.21 DP MODE 0
51.27 FBA PAR REFRESH REFRESH
*Read-only or automatically detected; **Example

26
From the PLC programming point, the ABB DRIVES profile is

similar to the Generic profile as shown in the first example.
The start/stop commands and reference are according to the ABB
DRIVES profile. (See the drive manuals for more information.)
If REF1 is used, the reference value ±20000 (decimal)
corresponds to the speed or frequency set by parameter 11.05
(EXT REF1 MAXIMUM) in the forward and reverse directions. If
REF2 is used, whether the limit 11.08 (EXT REF2 MAXIMUM)
corresponds to ±20000 or ±10000 is dependent on the drive type
and/or the application macro selected.
The minimum and maximum 16-bit integer values that can be
given through the fieldbus are -32768 and 32767 respectively.

27
WARNING! Follow the safety instructions given in this manual and

in the Hardware Manual.
Mounting
The RPBA-01 is to be inserted into its specific position in the drive.
The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two
screws. The screws also provide the earthing of the I/O cable
shield connected to the module, and interconnect the GND signals
of the module and the control board of the drive.
On installation of the module, the signal and power connection to
the drive is automatically made through a 34-pin connector.
Mounting procedure:
• Insert the module carefully into its position inside the drive until
the retaining clips lock the module into position.
• Fasten the two screws (included) to the stand-offs.
• Set the bus termination switch of the module to the required
position.
Note: Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling the

EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module.
Note: Make sure the drive is properly grounded. For more

information, see the drive documentation.
28
29
Overview
This chapter contains:
• general cabling instructions
• instructions for setting module node address number and bus
termination
• instructions for connecting the module to the PROFIBUS DP
network.
WARNING! Before installation, switch off the drive power supply.

Wait five minutes to ensure that the capacitor bank of the drive is
discharged. Switch off all dangerous voltages connected from
external control circuits to the inputs and outputs of the drive.
General cabling instructions

Arrange the bus cables as far away from the motor cables as
possible. Avoid parallel runs. Use bushings at cable entries.
Bus termination
The DIP switch on the front of the RPBA-01 module is used to
switch on bus termination. Bus termination prevents signal
reflections from the cable ends. Bus termination must be set to ON
if the module is the last or first module on the network. When using
PROFIBUS specific D-sub connectors with built-in termination, the
RPBA-01 termination must be switched off.
30
Note: The built-in termination circuitry of the RPBA-01 is of the

active type, so the module has to be powered for the termination
to work. If the module needs to be switched off during operation of
the network, the bus can be terminated by connecting a 220 ohm,
1/4 W resistor between the A and B lines.
Bus termination OFF Bus termination ON
ON ON
Figure 2. Bus termination switch
Node selection
Use the rotary node address selectors on the module to select the
node address number. The node address number is a decimal
number ranging from 01 to 99. The left selector represents the first
digit and the right selector the second digit. The node address can
be changed during operation, but the module must be re-initialised
for changes to take effect.
Note: When 00 is selected, the node number is defined by a

parameter in the fieldbus parameter group of the drive.
10x 1x
901 901
23
23
78
78
45 6 45 6
Figure 3. Node selectors
31
PROFIBUS connection
The bus cable is connected to connector X1 on the RPBA-01.
The connector pin allocation described below follows the
PROFIBUS standard.
5 1
X1
9 6
X1 Description
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 B Data positive (Conductor 1 in twisted pair).
4 RTS Request To Send
5 GND Isolated ground
BUS
6 +5V Isolated 5V DC voltage supply
7 Not used
8 A Data negative (Conductor 2 in twisted pair).
9 Not used
Housing SHLD PROFIBUS cable shield. Internally connected
to GND BUS via an RC filter and directly to
CHGND.
+5V and GND BUS are used for bus termination. Some devices,
like optical transceivers (RS485 to fibre optics) might require
external power supply from these pins.
RTS is used in some equipment to determine the direction of

transmission. In normal applications only the line A, line B and
shield are used.
32
PROFIBUS wiring example

The PROFIBUS cable shields are directly earthed at all nodes.
In the example below a recommended Siemens 6ES7 972-
0BA12-0XA0 connector (not included in the delivery) is connected
to the RPBA-01 module. The cable is a standard PROFIBUS
cable consisting of a twisted pair and screen.
Siemens 6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0 connector
X1 SHLD X1 SHLD
A 1 A 1
RPBA-01 RPBA-01
B 2 B 2
A 3 A 3
PROFIBUS B 4 B 4
MASTER
A
B
GND
Figure 4. Connection diagram for the standard PROFIBUS cable
Note: Further information on PROFIBUS wiring is available from

the publication “PROFIBUS RS 485-IS User and Installation
Guideline” (www.profibus.com, order no. 2.262).
33
Programming
Overview
This chapter gives information on configuring the PROFIBUS
master station and the drive for communication through the
RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module.
Configuring the system

After the RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter module has been
mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions
in previous chapters, the master station and the drive must be
prepared for communication with the module.
Configuration of the master station requires a type definition
(GSD) file. For DP-V0 communication, the file is available from
www.profibus.com or an ABB representative (the filename is
ABB_0812.GSD). For DP-V1 communication, the type definition
(GSD) file is available from an ABB representative (the filename is
ABB10812.GSD).
Please refer to the master station documentation for more
information.
PROFIBUS connection configuration

The detailed procedure of activating the module for
communication with the drive is dependent on the drive type.
(Normally, a parameter must be adjusted to activate the
communication. See the drive documentation.)
As communication between the drive and the RPBA-01 is
established, several configuration parameters are copied to the
drive. These parameters – shown below in Table 5 – must be
checked first and adjusted if necessary. The alternative selections
for these parameters are discussed in more detail below the table.
Programming
34
Note: The new settings take effect only when the module is
powered up the next time or when the module receives a ‘Fieldbus
Adapter parameter refresh’ command from the drive.
Data transfer rates supported

The RPBA-01 supports the following PROFIBUS communication
speeds: 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s, 45.45 kbit/s, 93.75 kbit/s, 187.5
kbit/s, 500 kbit/s, 1.5 Mbit/s, 3 Mbit/s, 6 Mbit/s, 12 Mbit/s.
The RPBA-01 automatically detects the communication speed
and PPO-type used.
Table 5. The RPBA-01 configuration parameters.
Par. Parameter name Alternative settings Default
no. setting
1 MODULE TYPE (Read-only) PROFIBUS DP
2 NODE ADDRESS 0 to 126 3
3 BAUD RATE 1) (12000) 12 Mbit/s; (6000) 6 Mbit/s; 1500
(3000) 3 Mbit/s; (1500) 1.5 Mbit/s;
(500) 500 kbit/s; (187) 187.5 kbit/s;
(93) 93.75 kbit/s; (45) 45.45 kbit/s;
(19) 19.2 kbit/s; (9) 9.6 kbit/s;
(Read-only)
4 PPO-TYPE 1) (1) PPO 1; (2) PPO 2; (3) PPO 3; (1) PPO 1
(4) PPO 4; (5) PPO 5; (6) PPO 6;
(Read-only)
5 PZD3 OUT 0 to 32767 with format xxyy, where 0
xx = Parameter Group and
yy = Parameter Index.
See description below.
6 PZD3 IN See PZD3 OUT above 0
7 PZD4 OUT See PZD3 OUT above 0
... ...
Programming
35
19 PZD10 OUT See PZD3 OUT above 0

21 DP MODE (0) DPV0; (1) DPV1 0
27 FB PAR REFRESH REFRESH; DONE DONE
1)
The value is automatically updated (Read-only).
Note: Set also the extended Parameter Data (see page 67) to
ensure proper operation of the RPBA-01 with the drive.
1 MODULE TYPE
This parameter shows the module type as detected by the drive.
The value cannot be adjusted by the user.
If this parameter is undefined, the communication between the
drive and the module has not been established.
2 NODE ADDRESS
Each device on the PROFIBUS network must have a unique node
number. This parameter is used to define a node number for the
drive it is connected to, if the node address selection switches are
set to the zero position. When the node address selector switches
are used to define the node address (node address selectors not
in zero position) this parameter indicates the set node address.
3 BAUD RATE
Indicates the communication speed detected in kbit/s.
12000 = 12 Mbit/s
6000 = 6 Mbit/s
3000 = 3 Mbit/s
1500 = 1.5 Mbit/s
500 = 500 kbit/s
187 = 187.5 kbit/s
93 = 93.75 kbit/s
45 = 45.45 kbit/s
19 = 19.2 kbit/s
9 = 9.6 kbit/s
Programming
36
4 PPO-TYPE
This parameter indicates the detected PPO message type for the
PROFIBUS communication. See Figures 6 and 10 in the chapters
DP-V0 communication and DP-V1 communication respectively for
the supported PPO message types.
5 PZD3 OUT
This parameter represents process data word 3 of the PPO type
received by the drive over the PROFIBUS network. The content is
defined by a decimal number in the range of 0 to 32767 as follows:
0 not used
1 - 99 data set area of the drive
101 - 9999 parameter area of the drive
10000 - 32767 not supported by the drive
The data set area is allocated as follows:

1 data set 1 word 1
2 data set 1 word 2
3 data set 1 word 3
4 data set 2 word 1
5 data set 2 word 2
6 data set 2 word 3
7 data set 3 word 1
...
99 data set 33 word 3
The parameter area is allocated as follows:

Parameter number with format xxyy, where xx is the parameter
group number (1 to 99) and yy is the parameter number index
inside the group (01 to 99).
Programming
37
6 PZD3 IN
Process data word 3 of the PPO type sent from the drive to the
PROFIBUS network.
The content is defined by a decimal number in the range of 0 to
32767. See parameter PZD3 OUT for description of decimal
number allocation.
7 to 20 PZD4 OUT to PZD10 IN
See parameters PZD3 OUT and PZD3 IN.
21 DP MODE
Selects the PROFIBUS protocol version (DP-V0 or DP-V1).
Note: For DP-V0, GSD file version 1 or 2 (ABB_0812.GSD) must

be used. For DP-V1, GSD file version 3 or higher
(ABB10812.GSD) must be used.
27 FBA PAR REFRESH

Any parameter changes take effect only after the module is
restarted. Alternatively, this parameter can be set to REFRESH.
The parameter will automatically revert to DONE.
Control locations
ABB drives can receive control information from multiple sources
including digital inputs, analogue inputs, the drive control panel
and a communication module (e.g. RPBA-01). ABB drives allow
the user to separately determine the source for each type of
control information (Start, Stop, Direction, Reference, Fault Reset,
etc.). In order to give the fieldbus master station the most
complete control over the drive, the communication module must
be selected as source for this information. See the user
documentation of the drive for information on the selection
parameters.
Programming
38
Programming
39
DP-V0 communication
Overview
This chapter describes the PROFIBUS messaging used in the
communication with the drive when the RPBA-01 module is in DP-
V0 mode.
PROFIBUS DP
The RPBA-01 module supports the PROFIBUS-DP protocol
according to EN 50170 standard. PROFIBUS DP is a distributed
I/O system which enables the master to use a large number of
peripheral modules and field devices. The data transfer is mainly
cyclic: the master reads the input information from the slaves and
sends the output information back to the slaves.
The PROFIBUS DP protocol uses so-called PPOs
(Parameter/Process Data Objects) in cyclic communication. See
Figure 6 for the different PPO types and their composition.
Service Access Points

The services of the PROFIBUS Data Link Layer (Layer 2) are
used by PROFIBUS DP through Service Access Points (SAPs).
Precisely defined functions are assigned to individual SAPs.
For further information on Service Access Points, refer to the
manual of the PROFIBUS master, PROFIdrive – The PROFIBUS
Profile for Adjustable Speed Drives (version 2.0), or the EN 50170
standard.
DP-V0 communication
40
Communication start-up
The following Service Access Points (SAPs) are used to initiate
DP communication:
SAP no. Short Name Name
0 (Default) Data_Exch Transfer Input and Output Data
61 Set_Prm Send Parameter Data
62 Chk_Cfg Check Configuration Data
60 Slave_Diag Read Slave Diagnostic
SAP 61 (Set_Prm)
This SAP is used in the parameterisation of the drive.
Prm_Data (Parameter Data Standard)
Type: Octet String - Length: 8
Byte Value Description
0 B8h Station_Status
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
Reserved
WD_On
1 = Watchdog on
Freeze_Req
1 = Slave is requested to process in freeze mode
Sync_Req
1 = Slave is requested to process in SYNC mode
00 = Min TSDR and slave-related
Unlock_Req parameters may be overwritten
10 = Slave locked for other masters. All
Lock_Req parameters can be carried over
x1 = Slave released for other masters
1-2 Watchdog Factors 1 and 2 (set by the PROFIBUS master)

WdFactor1 × WdFactor2 × 10 ms = monitoring time of the
slave to verify that the master is still active.
3 0Bh Minimum Station Delay Respond Time
Time after which a slave station is allowed to send response
frames to the master. Calculated by multiplying the Hex
value with tBit (time required for transmitting one bit).
4-5 0812h Vendor Identification (for the RPBA-01: 0812h)
6 00h Group Identification
DP-V0 communication
41
7 - Reserved
Prm_Data (Parameter Data Extended)
8 10h Header byte
(default) 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Fail-safe mode. Defines the action taken when the PLC
is switched from ‘RUN’ to ‘STOP’ mode.
00 = STOP (default)
01 = LAST SPEED
02 = USE FAIL-SAFE. The values of the PZDs are
defined by bytes 11-30 in the Prm_Data telegram.
Control zero mode. Defines the action taken if a

PROFIBUS telegram containing only zeros is received.
00 = USE FRAME (default). Note that, with this setting,
the drive might not be stopped (if it is running) since
also bit 10 (Remote Command) in the control word
is zero. However, the other PZD’s may still be
updated, but have the value zero.
01 = IGNORE
Operation mode. Determines which control/status word

and reference/actual values are used.
00 = PROFIDRIVE (i.e. Generic drive profile)
01 = VENDOR SPECIFIC (i.e. ABB Drives profile)
(default). With this setting,
• Fail-safe mode ‘STOP’ equals ‘LAST SPEED’
• the control word is forwarded unchanged to the
drive
• if the drive has a parameter for selection of
operation mode (i.e. communication profile),
make sure that the operation modes of the
RPBA-01 and the drive match.
Reserved
9 - 10 0-65536 Cut off time out in milliseconds.

11 - 12 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD1 (CW)
13 - 14 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD2 (REF)
15 - 16 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD3
17 - 18 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD4
19 - 20 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD5
21 - 22 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD6
23 - 24 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD7
DP-V0 communication
42
25 - 26 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD8

27 - 28 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD9
29 - 30 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD10
The extended Parameter Data bytes are configured via the
PROFIBUS network configuration tool. The functions are defined
in the GSD file.
SAP 62 (Chk_Cfg)
SAP 62 selects the PPO type to be used. The table below gives
the Hex values that must be sent to the drive to select the PPO
type.
Cfg_Data (Configuration Data)
Type: Octet String - Length: 4 to 28
PPO Type Hex Values Description Length in Bytes
1 F3 F1 4 PKW + 2 PZD words 12
3 F1 0 PKW + 2 PZD words 4
DP-V0 communication
43
SAP 60 (Slave_Diag)
This SAP gives diagnostic information on the slave station.
Diag_Data (Diagnostic Data)
Type: Octet String - Length: 6 (Standard) + 2 (Extended Diagnosis)
Byte Description
0 Station_Status_1
x x x x x x x x
Diag.Station_Non_Existent (Set by Master, reset by Slave)
Slave not found
Diag.Stagion_Not_Ready (Set by Slave)
Slave not ready for data exchange
Diag.Cfg_Fault (Set by Slave)
Received configuration data does not match original configuration data
Diag.Ext_Diag (Set by Slave)

Diagnostic entry present in slave-specific diagnostic area
Diag.Not_Supported (Set by Slave)
Service not supported by slave
Diag.Invalid_Slave_Response (Set by Master, reset by Slave)
Invalid response by slave
Diag.Prm_Fault (Set by Slave)
Invalid parameter or parameter value
Diag.Master_Lock (Set by Master, reset by Slave)
Slave is parameterised by another master
1 Station_Status_2
x 0 x x x 1 x x
Diag.Prm_Req (Set by Slave)
Slave requires re-configuration and re-parameterisation
Diag.Stat_Diag (Set by Slave)
Static diagnosis. Slave (temporarily) unable to provide valid
data
Always set to 1 by slave

Diag.WD_On (Set by Slave)
Watchdog on
Diag.Freeze_Mode (Set by Slave)
Freeze command received by slave
Diag.Sync_Mode (Set by Slave)
Sync command received by slave
Reserved
Diag.Deactivated (Set by Master, reset by Slave)
Slave is inacive
DP-V0 communication
44

Byte Description
2 Station_Status_3
x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Reserved
Diag.Ext_Diag_Overflow (Set by Slave)
3 Diag.Master_Add
The address of the master that parameterised this slave
4 - 5 Ident_Number (for RPBA-01: 0812h)
6 Ext_Diag_Data
The number of bytes reserved for Extended Diagnosis
(including this byte)
Fixed to 2
7 Ext_Diag_Data
Bit 0 = Communication temporarily lost
Bit 1 = Communication permanently lost
Bit 2 - 7 = Not used
SAP 0 (Data_Exchange)
Allows the master to send output data to a slave station and to
simultaneously request input data from the same station.
Outp_Data (Output Data)
Type: Octet String - Length: 4 to 28 (depending on the selected PPO Type)
Inp_Data (Input Data)
DP-V0 communication
45
PPO message types
Parameter Process data

Fixed area Freely mappable area
identification
DW1.1 DW1.2 DW1.3 DW3.1 DW3.2 DW3.3 DW5.1 DW5.2 DW5.3 DW7.1
OUT area IND VALUE CW REF PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10
IN area ID IND VALUE SW ACT PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10
PKW DW2.1 DW2.2 DW2.3 DW4.1 DW4.2 DW4.3 DW6.1 DW6.2 DW6.3 DW8.1
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
OUT area – Data sent from Master to Slave (control data)

IN area – Data sent from Slave to Master (actual data)
Parameter Identification:
ID – Parameter Identification
IND – Index for Arrays
VALUE – Parameter Value (Max. 4 bytes)
PKW –Parameter ID/Value
Process Data:
CW – Control Word (see Table 7.)
SW – Status Word (see Table 8.)
REF – Reference
ACT – Actual Value
PZD – Process Data (application-specific)
DW – Data Word
Figure 6. PPO message types
DP-V0 communication
46

The Control Word (PROFIBUS Parameter 967) is the principal
means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. It is sent by
the fieldbus master station to the drive, the adapter module acting
as a gateway. The drive switches between its states according to
the bit-coded instructions on the Control Word, and returns status
information to the master in the Status Word (PROFIBUS
Parameter 968).
The contents of the Control Word and the Status Word are
detailed in Tables 7 and 8 respectively; see the drive
documentation for information on the drive-specific bits. The drive
states are presented in the PROFIBUS State Machine (Figure 9).
References
References are 16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit
integer. A negative reference (indicating reversed direction of
rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the
corresponding positive reference.
including analogue and digital inputs, the drive control panel and a
communication module (e.g. RPBA-01). In order to have the drive
controlled through PROFIBUS, the communication module must
be defined as the source for control information, e.g. Reference.
In the Vendor Specific mode, the scaling of the integer received
from the master as Reference is drive-specific. See its
programming manual for available control source selections and
Reference scaling factors.
In PROFIdrive mode, the speed reference (REF) in hexadecimal
(0…4000h) corresponds to 0…‘motor nominal speed’.
Actual Values
Actual Values are 16-bit words containing information on the
operation of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected
by a drive parameter. The scaling of the integers sent to the
DP-V0 communication
47
master as Actual Values depends on the selected function, refer to

the drive documentation.
In PROFIdrive mode, the actual speed (ACT) in hexadecimal
Table 7. The Control Word (PROFIBUS Parameter 967). The

upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 9.
Bit Name Value Proceed to STATE/Description
0 ON 1 Proceed to READY TO OPERATE
OFF1 0 Emergency OFF, stop by the selected deceleration ramp.
Proceed to OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed further to READY
TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3)
are active
1 OFF2 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)
Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed further to SWITCH-
ON INHIBIT
0 Emergency stop, stop according to fastest possible
deceleration mode. Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed
further to SWITCH-ON INHIBIT. Warning: Ensure motor
and driven machine can be stopped using this stop
mode.
3 OPERATION_ 1 Proceed to ENABLE OPERATION
ENABLE
0 Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBIT
ZERO Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ENABLE
OUTPUT
0 Stop according to selected stop type
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Normal operation.
Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ENABLE
ACCELERATOR
0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held)
DP-V0 communication
48

6 RAMP_IN_ 1 Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING
ZERO
0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero
Note: The function of this bit may depend on the ramp
parameter settings of the drive. See the drive documentation.
7 RESET 0 ⇒ 1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCH-
ON INHIBIT.
0 (Continue normal operation)
8 INCHING_1 Inching 1. (See the drive documentation for information)
10 REMOTE_ 1 Fieldbus control enabled
CMD 0 Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control
Word and Reference
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled
11 Drive-specific. (See the drive documentation for
to information)
15
Table 8. The Status Word (PROFIBUS Parameter 968). The upper

case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 9.
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 ENABLE OPERATION
0 DISABLE OPERATION
3 TRIPPED 1 FAULT
0 No fault
DP-V0 communication
49

4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE
0 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE
7 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm
0 No Warning/Alarm
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value
(i.e. is within tolerance limits)
0 Actual value differs from reference value
(= is outside tolerance limits)
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Actual frequency or speed value equals or is greater
than supervision limit.
0 Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision
limit.
11 Drive-specific
to
15
DP-V0 communication
50
SWITCH-ON
MAINS OFF INHIBIT (SW Bit6=1)
Power ON OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)

PROFIdrive
State Machine
NOT READY
TO SWITCH ON (SW Bit0=0) CW = Control Word
A B C D
SW = Status Word
n = Speed
(CW=xxxx xxxx xxxx x110) I = Input Current
(CW Bit3=0) RFG = Ramp Function
Generator
READY TO
SWITCH ON f = Frequency
OPERATION (SW Bit0=1)
INHIBIT (SW Bit2=0)
from any state
operation ON (CW=xxxx xxxx xxxx x111)
inhibited
Fault
READY TO Main contactor ON FAULT

from any state

(CW Bit7=1)
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)

ACTIVE (SW Bit1=0) Emergency Stop Emergency Stop
Enable operation OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0 (CW Bit3=1) OFF3 OFF2
ACTIVE (SW Bit5=0) ACTIVE (SW Bit4=0)
B C D
n(f)=0 / I=0
Main contactor OFF
(CW Bit4=0)
C D ENABLE
A (CW Bit4=0 Bit5=0 Bit6=0)
(CW Bit5=0) (CW Bit4=1)
Inching 1 or 2 ON
(CW Bit8=1 or Bit9=1)
D RFG: ENABLE
OUTPUT INCHING 1
B or
(CW Bit6=0) (CW Bit5=1) INCHING 2
ACTIVE
RFG: ENABLE Inching 1 or 2 OFF
state ACCELERATION (CW Bit8=0 or Bit9=0)
C
(CW Bit6=1) Inching pause
condition
rising edge OPERATING ‘n=0 or f =0’ and ‘I=0’
of the bit (SW Bit8=1) and inching pause expired
D
Figure 9. The PROFIdrive state machine
DP-V0 communication
51
Parameter handling in cyclic communication (DP)

In cyclic PROFIBUS DP communication, parameter data is
transferred in PPO message types 1, 2 and 5 (see Figure 6.). The
Parameter Identification part consists of eight bytes (see below).
Parameter
Identification Process Data
CW REF
ID IND VALUE SW ACT (PD1, PD2...)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Request Label
Response Label Parameter Number (PNU)
*Request Signal
*Not used (=0)
The Request Label is used by the master when transmitting data

to the slave, while the Response Label is used by the slave as a
positive or negative acknowledgement. The tables below show the
Request/Response functions.
Request labels (from Master to Slave)
Request Function Response labels
Ackn. (+) Ackn. (-)
0 No task 0 –
1 Request parameter value 1, 2 7
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7, 8
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7, 8
4 Request description element (not supported) 3 7
5 Change description element (not supported) 3 7, 8
6 Request parameter value (array) 4, 5 7, 8
7 Change parameter value (array word) 4 7, 8
8 Change parameter value (array double word) 5 7,8
9 Request number of array elements 6 7
DP-V0 communication
52
Response label (Acknowledgement from Slave to Master)

Ackn. Function
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer description element
4 Transfer parameter value (array word)
5 Transfer parameter value (array double word)
6 Transfer number of array elements
7 Task cannot be executed, followed by error number
0 = Illegal parameter number
1 = Parameter value cannot be changed
2 = Lower or upper limit violated
3 = Erroneous subindex
4 = No array
5 = Incorrect data type
6 = Setting not allowed (can only be reset)
7 = Descriptive element cannot be changed
9 = Descriptive data not available
11 = No parameter change rights
15 = Text array not available
17 = Task cannot be executed due to operating status
(e.g. parameter is currently read-only)
18 = Other error
101 = Vendor specific error
102 = Request not supported
103 = Request cannot be completed due to communication error
110 = Failure during write to non-volatile memory
111 = Request aborted due to time-out
120 = Parameter cannot be mapped to PZD
(size mismatch or non-existent)
121 = Parameter cannot be mapped to PZD (end of memory)
122 = Parameter cannot be mapped to PZD (multiple PZD write)
130 = Cannot map Control Word bit (parameter 933 - 937,
e.g. double mapping of bits)
140 = Cannot change mode to TORQUE (frequency is used)
8 No parameter change rights for PKW interface
9 Parameter data signal (word)
10 Parameter data signal (double word)
DP-V0 communication
53
The allocation of data sets, drive parameters and PROFIdrive

parameters to the Parameter Identification part of the PPO type is
shown below. The Index column corresponds to the parameter
number (PNU) in the ID part of Parameter Identification. The Sub-
index column corresponds to the IND part of Parameter
Identification. The Example No. column refers to the examples on
the following pages.
Data set area
Range Example
Index Sub-index Request Label
(Decimal) No.
0h 1h 1
0h 2h 2
R/W 6/7 1, 2
•••
0h 63h 99
Drive parameters
Range Example
(Decimal) No.
0h 65h 101
0h 66h 102
R/W* 6/7 1, 2
•••
27h 0Fh 9999
*Write access depends on drive parameter type, or operation mode.
DP-V0 communication
54
PROFIdrive parameters
Range Example
(Decimal) No.
2h 2
3h 3
393h 915 R/W 6/7 6
••• •••
9h 9
2h 2
3h 3
394h 916 R/W 6/7 7
••• •••
9h 9
396h 0h 918 R/W 1/2 3, 4
•••
0h 1
9h 9
11h 17
3B3h 947 R 6 5
19h 25
21h 33
29h 41
•••
3CCh 0h 972 R/W 1/2 3,4
The complete PROFIdrive parameter list for the RPBA-01 can be

found as a separate chapter elsewhere in this manual.
Note: Continuous (cyclic) writing of PROFIdrive parameters

should be avoided as the values of these parameters are stored in
the flash memory of the RPBA-01. The estimated lifetime of the
flash memory is 1,000,000 program/erase cycles, and continuous
writing will cause the memory to fail prematurely.
DP-V0 communication
55
Example 1: Reading a drive parameter (or data set)

To determine the parameter number and subindex for drive
parameter reading, multiply the parameter number by one
hundred and then convert it to hexadecimal. The low byte is the
subindex (IND), and the high byte is the parameter number (PNU).
For example reading parameter 84.11 INPUT 1 from the drive:
84.11 × 100 = 8411 = 20DBh.
Parameter number is 20 and subindex is DB.
Request (Read parameter value [array])

Parameter Number (20h)
Subindex (DBh)*
CW REF PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6
Req 60 20 DB 00 00 00 00 00 04 7F 34 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Resp 40 20 DB 00 00 00 00 64 03 37 34 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
SW ACT PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6

Parameter Value (100 Dec)
Subindex (DBh)*
Response (Change parameter value [array])
*2nd byte reserved
DP-V0 communication
56
Example 2: Writing a drive parameter (or data set)

parameter writing, multiply the parameter number by one hundred
and then convert it to hexadecimal. The low byte is the subindex
(IND), and the high byte is the parameter number (PNU). For
example write parameter 12.02 CONSTANT SPEED.1:
12.02 × 100 = 1202 = 04B2h.
Parameter is 04 and subindex is B2.
Request (Change parameter value [array])

Subindex (B2h)*
Req 70 04 B2 00 00 00 00 64 04 7F 34 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Resp 40 04 B2 00 00 00 00 64 03 37 34 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Subindex (B2h)*
Response (Transfer parameter value [array])
*2nd byte reserved
DP-V0 communication
57
Example 3: Reading a PROFIdrive parameter (word)

In this example, PROFIBUS Parameter No. 918 is used to read
the station number of the slave.
Request (Parameter value read)
Parameter Number (918 Dec)
IND Param. Value CW REF
Request 13 96 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 7F 34 15
Read:
Response 13 96 00 00 00 00 00 02 03 37 34 15
IND Param. Value SW ACT
Response (Parameter value updated)
The slave returns its station number (2).
DP-V0 communication
58
Example 4: Writing a PROFIdrive parameter (word)

In this example, current parameter settings are saved to the
FLASH memory of the drive. This is done by setting the value of
PROFIBUS Parameter No. 971 (3CBh) to 1.
Note that the drive always observes the Control Word (CW)
and Reference (REF) bytes. The values shown below are
examples.
Request (Parameter value write)
IND Param. Value CW REF
Request 23 CB 00 00 00 00 00 01 04 7F 34 15
Write:
Response 13 CB 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 37 34 15
IND Param. Value SW ACT
Response (Parameter value updated)
DP-V0 communication
59
Example 5: Reading a PROFIdrive parameter (array)

In this example, PROFIBUS Parameter No. 945 is used to read
the code of the latest acknowledged fault. As shown in Table 22
on page 103, parameter 945 is of the array type with subindexes
1, 9, 17 and 25.
Request (Request parameter value [array])
Subindex (Latest acknowledged fault)*

Param. Value CW REF
Request 63 B1 09 00 00 00 00 00 04 7F 34 15
Read:
Response 43 B1 09 00 00 00 23 00 03 37 34 15
Param. Value SW ACT

Subindex (Latest acknowledged fault)*
*2nd byte reserved
The slave returns the code of the latest acknowledged fault

(2300h). The fault codes are according to the DRIVECOM
standard. See also the User’s Manual of the drive for drive specific
fault codes.
The implementation of the PROFIdrive profile in the RPBA-01
supports the storage of the active and the five latest occurred
different faults in the fault buffer. The fault codes can be accessed
by PROFIdrive parameters 945 and 948 (see Table 22 on page
101). The value zero indicates no fault. The subindexes of these
parameters are related to each other, i.e. parameter 945 with
subindex 1 relates to subindex of parameter 948.
DP-V0 communication
60
Example 6: Configuring the process data written to the drive

PROFIBUS parameter 915 can be used to define which data is
written cyclically to a drive parameter as application-specific
process data.
In the example below, the value of drive parameter
12.02 CONSTANT SPEED 1 (4B2h) is selected to be taken from
PZD3. The parameter will continue to be updated with the
contents of PZD3 in each Request frame until a different selection
is made.
Subindex (IND) defines which process data word the required
data is taken from. Parameter Value selects the drive parameter to
which that word is mapped.

Subindex (03 = PZD3)*
Req 73 93 03 00 00 00 04 B2 04 7F 34 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Resp 43 93 03 00 00 00 04 B2 03 37 34 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

*2nd byte reserved
Subsequently, the contents of PZD3 in each Request frame are

written to drive parameter 12.02 CONSTANT SPEED 1 until a
different selection is made.
DP-V0 communication
61
Example 7: Configuring the process data read from the drive

PROFIBUS Parameter No. 916 can be used to define which data
is read cyclically from the drive as application-specific process
data.
In the example below, drive parameter 1.04 CURRENT (68h) is
selected to be transmitted by the drive as PZD3. The selection is
in force until it is superseded by another selection.
data is transmitted in, and Parameter Value defines which drive
parameter is mapped to that word.

Req 73 94 03 00 00 00 00 68 04 7F 34 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Resp 43 94 03 00 00 00 00 68 03 37 34 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

*2nd byte reserved
Subsequent response frames:

Resp xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx 00 0B xx xx xx xx xx xx
PZD3 (Value of Drive Parameter 1.04)
DP-V0 communication
62
DP-V0 communication
63
DP-V1 communication
Overview
This chapter describes the PROFIBUS messaging used in the
communication with the drive when the RPBA-01 module is in DP-
V1 mode.
PROFIBUS DP
The RPBA-01 module supports the PROFIBUS-DP protocol
according to EN 50170 standard. PROFIBUS DP is a distributed
I/O system which enables the master to use a large number of
peripheral modules and field devices. The data transfer is mainly
cyclic: the master reads the input information from the slaves and
sends the output information back to the slaves.
The PROFIBUS DP protocol uses so-called PPOs
(Parameter/Process Data Objects) in cyclic communication. See
Figure 10 for the different PPO types and their composition.
Service Access Points

The services of the PROFIBUS Data Link Layer (Layer 2) are
used by PROFIBUS DP through Service Access Points (SAPs).
Precisely defined functions are assigned to individual SAPs.
For further information on Service Access Points, refer to the
manual of the PROFIBUS master, PROFIdrive – The PROFIBUS
Profile for Adjustable Speed Drives (version 3.1), or the EN 50170
standard.
DP-V1 communication
64
Communication start-up
The following Service Access Points (SAPs) are used to initiate
DP communication:
SAP no. Short Name Name
51 Server_SAP Acyclic Read/Write
61 Set_Prm Send Parameter Data
62 Chk_Cfg Check Configuration Data
60 Slave_Diag Read Slave Diagnostic Information
0 (Default SAP) Data_Exch Transfer Input and Output Data
SAP 61 (Set_Prm)
This SAP is used in the parameterisation of the drive.
Prm_Data (Parameter Data Standard)
Byte Value Description
0 B8h Station_Status
MSB 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 LSB
Reserved
WD_On
1 = Watchdog on
Freeze_Req
1 = Slave is requested to process in freeze mode
Sync_Req
1 = Slave is requested to process in SYNC mode
00 = Min TSDR and slave-related
Unlock_Req parameters may be overwritten
10 = Slave locked for other masters.
Lock_Req All parameters can be carried over
x1 = Slave released for other masters
1-2 Watchdog Factors 1 and 2 (set by the PROFIBUS master)

WdFactor1 × WdFactor2 × 10 ms = monitoring time of the
slave to verify that the master is still active.
3 0Bh Minimum Station Delay Respond Time
Time after which a slave station is allowed to send response
frames to the master. Calculated by multiplying the hex
value with tBit (time required for transmitting one bit).
4-5 0812h Vendor Identification (for the RPBA-01: 0812h)
6 00h Group Identification
DP-V1 communication
65
7 DPV1_Status_1
MSB x 0 x 0 0 x x x LSB
Dis_Start_Control (Disable Stop-Bit Control)

0 = Start bit monitoring in receiver enabled
1 = Start bit monitoring in receiver disabled
Dis_Stop_Control (Disable Stop-Bit Control)

0 = Stop bit monitoring in receiver enabled
1 = Stop bit monitoring in receiver disabled
WD_Base (Watchdog time base)

0 = 10 ms
1 = 1 ms
Reserved
Publisher_Enabled
0 = Slave not operated in DXB Publisher mode
1 = Slave operated in DXB Publisher mode
(Not supported)
Fail_Safe. Not supported.
DPV1_Enable
0 = Slave operated in DP mode
1 = Slave operated in DP-V1 mode
DP-V1 communication
66
8 DPV1_Status_2
MSB x x x x x x 0 x LSB
Chk_Cfg_Mode
0 = Chk_Cfg according to EN 50170 (default state)
1 = User-specific evaluation of Chk_Cfg
Reserved. To be parameterised with ‘0’.

Enable_Update_Alarm
0 = Enable_Update_Alarm disabled
1 = Enable_Update_Alarm enabled (Not supported)
Enable_Status_Alarm
0 = Enable_Status_Alarm disabled
1 = Enable_Status_Alarm enabled (Not supported)
Enable_Manufacturer_Specific_Alarm
0 = Enable_Manufacturer_Specific_Alarm disabled
1 = Enable_Manufacturer_Specific_Alarm enabled
(Not supported)
Enable_Diagnostic_Alarm
0 = Enable_Diagnostic_Alarm disabled
1 = Enable_Diagnostic_Alarm enabled (Not
supported)
Enable_Process_Alarm
0 = Enable_Process_Alarm disabled
1 = Enable_Process_Alarm enabled (Not supported)
Enable_Pull_Plug_Alarm
0 = Enable_Pull_Plug_Alarm disabled
1 = Enable_Pull_Plug_Alarm enabled (Not
supported)
9 DPV1_Status_3
MSB 0 0 0 x x x x x LSB
Alarm_Mode. Limits the number of active alarms.

0 = 1 alarm of each type 1 = 2 alarms in total
2 = 4 alarms in total 3 = 8 alarms in total
Prm_Structure
0 = Prm telegram according to EN 50170
1 = Prm telegram in structure form (DPV2 extension)
(Not supported)
IsoM_Req (Isochron Mode Request)

0 = Isochron Mode disabled
1 = Isochron Mode enabled (Not supported)
Reserved. To be parameterised with ‘0’.
DP-V1 communication
67
Prm_Data (Parameter Data Extended)

10 10h Header byte
(default) MSB 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 LSB
Fail-safe mode. Defines the action taken when the

PLC is switched from ‘RUN’ to ‘STOP’ mode.
00 = STOP (default)
01 = LAST SPEED
02 = USE FAIL-SAFE. The values of the PZDs are
defined by bytes 11-30 in the Prm_Data
telegram.
Control zero mode. Defines the action taken if a

PROFIBUS telegram containing only zeros is
received.
00 = USE FRAME (default). Note that, with this
setting, the drive might not be stopped (if it is
running) since also bit 10 (Remote Command)
in the control word is zero. However, the other
PZD’s may still be updated, but have the value
zero.
01 = IGNORE
Operation mode. Determines which control/status

word and reference/actual values are used.
00 = PROFIDRIVE (i.e. Generic drive profile)
01 = VENDOR SPECIFIC (i.e. ABB Drives profile)
(default). With this setting,
• Fail-safe mode ‘STOP’ equals ‘LAST SPEED’
• the control word is forwarded unchanged to
the drive
• if the drive has a parameter for selection of
operation mode (i.e. communication profile),
make sure that the operation modes of the
RPBA-01 and the drive match.
Reserved
11 - 12 0-65536 Cut off time out in milliseconds. 0 = Cut off disabled.

13 - 14 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD1 (CW)
15 - 16 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD2 (REF)
17 - 18 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD3
19 - 20 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD4
21 - 22 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD5
23 - 24 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD6
25 - 26 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD7
DP-V1 communication
68
27 - 28 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD8

29 - 30 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD9
31 - 32 0-65536 Fail-safe, PZD10
The extended Parameter Data bytes are configured via the
PROFIBUS network configuration tool. The functions are defined
in the GSD file.
SAP 62 (Chk_Cfg)
SAP 62 selects the PPO type to be used. The table below gives
the Hex values that must be sent to the drive to select the PPO
type.
Cfg_Data (Configuration Data)
Type: Octet String - Length: 4 to 28
*PKW **PZD
PPO Hex
PROFIdrive parameter enabled size in size in
Type Values
bytes bytes
1 F3 F1 Acyclic Parameter Read 8 4
3 F1 Acyclic Parameter Read/Write 0 4
*PKW: “Parameter-Kennung-Wert” (Parameter ID Value)

**PZD: “Prozeßdaten” (Process data)
With PPO1, PPO2 and PPO5, reading/writing parameters is only
possible cyclically through the Parameter Identification (PKW)
channel. With PPO3, PPO4 or PPO6, acyclic parameter
reading/writing is available via the DP-V1 parameter read/write
service.
The PPO type can be changed during runtime. However, the
RPBA-01 will go offline while the configuration is being updated.
DP-V1 communication
69
SAP 60 (Slave_Diag)
This SAP gives diagnostic information on the slave station.
Byte Description
0 Station_Status_1
MSB x x x x x x x x LSB
Diag.Station_Non_Existent (Set by Master, reset by Slave)

Slave not found
Diag.Stagion_Not_Ready (Set by Slave)
Slave not ready for data exchange
Diag.Cfg_Fault (Set by Slave)
Received configuration data does not match original config. data
Diag.Ext_Diag (Set by Slave)
Diagnostic entry present in slave-specific diagnostic area
Diag.Not_Supported (Set by Slave)
Service not supported by slave
Diag.Invalid_Slave_Response (Set by Master, reset by
Slave)
Invalid response by slave
Diag.Prm_Fault (Set by Slave)
Invalid parameter or parameter value
Diag.Master_Lock (Set by Master, reset by Slave)
Slave is parameterised by another master
1 Station_Status_2
MSB x 0 x x x 1 x x LSB
Diag.Prm_Req (Set by Slave)

Slave requires re-configuration and re-parameterisation
Diag.Stat_Diag (Set by Slave)
Static diagnosis. Slave (temporarily) unable to provide
valid data
Always set to 1 by slave

Diag.WD_On (Set by Slave)
Watchdog on
Diag.Freeze_Mode (Set by Slave)
Freeze command received by slave
Diag.Sync_Mode (Set by Slave)
Sync command received by slave
Reserved
Diag.Deactivated (Set by Master, reset by Slave)
Slave is inactive
DP-V1 communication
70

Byte Description
2 Station_Status_3
MSB x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSB
Reserved
Diag.Ext_Diag_Overflow (Set by Slave)
3 Diag.Master_Add
The address of the master that parameterised this slave
4 - 5 Ident_Number (for RPBA-01: 0812h)
6 Header Byte
7 Status Type = Status Message (0x81)
8 Slot Number (0x00)
9 Specifier (0x00)
10 Communication Diagnostic
MSB 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x LSB
Communication temporarily lost

Communication permanently lost
Reserved
SAP 0 (Data_Exchange)
Allows the master to send output data to a slave station and to
simultaneously request input data from the same station.
Outp_Data (Output Data)
Inp_Data (Input Data)
DP-V1 communication
71
PPO message types
Parameter Process data

Fixed area Freely mappable area
identification
Parameter
channel
DW1.1 DW1.2 DW1.3 DW3.1 DW3.2 DW3.3 DW5.1 DW5.2 DW5.3 DW7.1
OUT area IND VALUE CW REF PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10
IN area ID IND VALUE SW ACT PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10
PKW DW2.1 DW2.2 DW2.3 DW4.1 DW4.2 DW4.3 DW6.1 DW6.2 DW6.3 DW8.1
Type 1 DP-V0
Type 2 DP-V0
Type 3 DP-V1
Type 4 DP-V1
Type 5 DP-V0
Type 6 DP-V1
OUT area – Data sent from Master to Slave (control data)

IN area – Data sent from Slave to Master (actual data)
Parameter Identification:
ID – Parameter Identification
IND – Index for Arrays
VALUE – Parameter Value (Max. 4 bytes)
PKW – Parameter ID/Value
Process Data:
CW – Control Word (see Table 11.)
SW – Status Word (see Table 12.)
REF – Reference
ACT – Actual Value
PZD – Process Data (application-specific)
DW – Data Word
Figure 10. PPO message types
DP-V1 communication
72

The Control Word (PROFIBUS Parameter 967) is the principal
means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. It is sent by
the fieldbus master station to the drive, the adapter module acting
as a gateway. The drive switches between its states according to
the bit-coded instructions on the Control Word, and returns status
information to the master in the Status Word (PROFIBUS
Parameter 968).
The contents of the Control Word and the Status Word are
detailed in Tables 11 and 12 respectively; see the drive
documentation for information on the drive-specific bits. The drive
states are presented in the PROFIBUS State Machine (Figure 13).
References
References are 16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit
integer. A negative reference (indicating reversed direction of
rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the
corresponding positive reference.
including analogue and digital inputs, the drive control panel and a
communication module (e.g. RPBA-01). In order to have the drive
controlled through PROFIBUS, the communication module must
be defined as the source for control information, e.g. Reference.
In the Vendor Specific mode, the scaling of the integer received
from the master as Reference is drive-specific. See its
programming manual for available control source selections and
Reference scaling factors.
In PROFIdrive mode, the speed reference (REF) in hexadecimal
(0 … 4000h) corresponds to 0 … ‘motor nominal speed’.
Actual Values
Actual Values are 16-bit words containing information on the
operation of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected
by a drive parameter. The scaling of the integers sent to the
DP-V1 communication
73
master as Actual Values depends on the selected function, refer to

the drive documentation.
In PROFIdrive mode, the actual speed (ACT) in hexadecimal
Table 11. The Control Word (PROFIBUS Parameter 967). The

0 ON 1 Proceed to READY TO OPERATE
OFF1 0 Emergency OFF, stop by the selected deceleration ramp.
Proceed to OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed further to READY
TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3)
are active
Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed further to SWITCH-
ON INHIBIT
0 Emergency stop, stop according to fastest possible
deceleration mode. Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed
further to SWITCH-ON INHIBIT. Warning: Ensure motor
and driven machine can be stopped using this stop
mode.
3 OPERATION_ 1 Proceed to ENABLE OPERATION
ENABLE
0 Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBIT
ZERO Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ENABLE
OUTPUT
0 Stop according to selected stop type
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Normal operation.
Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ENABLE
ACCELERATOR
0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held)
DP-V1 communication
74

6 RAMP_IN_ 1 Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING
ZERO
0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero
Note: The function of this bit may depend on the ramp
parameter settings of the drive. See the drive documentation.
7 RESET 0 ⇒ 1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCH-
ON INHIBIT.
0 (Continue normal operation)
10 REMOTE_ 1 Fieldbus control enabled
CMD 0 Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control
Word and Reference
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled
11 Vendor-specific bit as defined by PROFIdrive parameter
933.
934.
935.
936.
937.
DP-V1 communication
75
Table 12. The Status Word (PROFIBUS Parameter 968). The

0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 ENABLE OPERATION
0 DISABLE OPERATION
3 TRIPPED 1 FAULT
0 No fault
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE
0 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE
7 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm
0 No Warning/Alarm
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value
(i.e. is within tolerance limits)
0 Actual value differs from reference value
(= is outside tolerance limits)
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Actual frequency or speed value equals or is greater
than supervision limit.
0 Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision
limit.
DP-V1 communication
76

11 Vendor-specific bit as defined by PROFIdrive
parameter 939. (See the drive documentation.)
DP-V1 communication
77
SWITCH-ON
MAINS OFF INHIBIT (SW Bit6=1)
Power ON OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)

PROFIBUS
State Machine
NOT READY
TO SWITCH ON (SW Bit0=0) CW = Control Word
A B C D
SW = Status Word
n = Speed
(CW=xxxx xxxx xxxx x110) I = Input Current
(CW Bit3=0) RFG = Ramp Function
Generator
READY TO
SWITCH ON f = Frequency
INHIBIT (SW Bit2=0)
from any state
operation ON (CW=xxxx xxxx xxxx x111)
inhibited
Fault
READY TO Main contactor ON FAULT

from any state

(CW Bit7=1)
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)

ACTIVE (SW Bit1=0) Emergency Stop Emergency Stop
Enable operation OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0 (CW Bit3=1) OFF3 OFF2
ACTIVE (SW Bit5=0) ACTIVE (SW Bit4=0)
B C D
n(f)=0 / I=0
Main contactor OFF
(CW Bit4=0)
C D ENABLE
A (CW Bit4=0 Bit5=0 Bit6=0)
(CW Bit5=0) (CW Bit4=1)
Inching 1 or 2 ON
(CW Bit8=1 or Bit9=1)
D RFG: ENABLE
OUTPUT INCHING 1
B or
(CW Bit6=0) (CW Bit5=1) INCHING 2
ACTIVE
RFG: ENABLE Inching 1 or 2 OFF
state ACCELERATION (CW Bit8=0 or Bit9=0)
C
(CW Bit6=1) Inching pause
condition
rising edge OPERATING ‘n=0 or f =0’ and ‘I=0’
of the bit (SW Bit8=1) and inching pause expired
D
Figure 13. The PROFIBUS state machine
DP-V1 communication
78
DP-V1 read/write request sequence

A read/write service on a drive parameter is illustrated below.
Master DP-V1 Slave

PROFIdrive Write request DB47 Parameter request
Parameter request
Write response
without data
Read request DB47

without data
Parameter
Read response (–) processing
without data
Read request DB47

without data
PROFIdrive Read response

Parameter response with data Parameter response
The messaging employs DP-V1 data units. The PROFIdrive

parameter request is contained within the DP-V1 request as data.
Likewise, the DP-V1 response contains the PROFIdrive
parameter response as data.
A write request (Function number 5Fh – see Table 15 below) is
first sent containing the parameter request.
If the write request is valid, the RPBA-01 acknowledges it with DP-
V1 write response code 5Fh with no data. The master will then
send a read request. If the RPBA-01 is still busy performing the
internal parameter request, it will return a negative response with
the DP-V1 error code B5h (State conflict). In this case, the read
DP-V1 communication
79
request will be repeated by the master until the RPBA-01 has the
PROFIdrive response data ready.
If the write request is invalid, a negative response is returned with
a DP-V1 error code (see Table 17).
DP-V1 communication
80
PROFIBUS SD2 telegram for SAP 51

The Read/Write service uses a variable-length PROFIBUS SD2
telegram shown below.
DP header DP trailer
SD LE LEr SD DA SA FC DSA SSA DU FCS ED
68h x x 68h xx xx x xx xx x… xx 16h
SD = Start Delimiter
LE = Length
LEr = Length repeated
DA = Destination Address
SA = Source Address
FC = Function Code
DSAP = Destination Service Access Point
SSAP = Source Service Access Point
DU = Data Unit for DP services
FCS = Frame Checking Sequence
ED = End Delimiter
Data unit
DP-V1 Command/Response PROFIdrive V3 Parameter Channel
Request/Response header
DU0 DU1 DU2 DU3 Data
(see Table 18/19 below)
Byte Meaning Value

DU0 Function number See Table 15 below
DU1 Slot number 1 = Drive parameter access
DU2 Index 47 (0x2F)
DU3 Data length (Depends on type of message)
DU4…DUn PROFIdrive data
Figure 14. PROFIBUS SD2 telegram
DP-V1 communication
81
Table 15. DP-V1 function numbers

Value Meaning
0x48 Idle REQ, RES
0x51 Data transport REQ, RES
0x56 Resource manager REQ
0x57 Initiate REQ, RES
0x58 Abort REQ
0x5C Alarm REQ, RES
0x5E Read REQ, RES
0x5F Write REQ, RES
0xD1 Data transport negative response
0xD7 Initiate negative response
0xDC Alarm negative response
0xDE Read negative response
0xDF Write negative response
Table 16. DP-V1 error response

Byte Meaning and value
DU0 Function number = 0xDF (Error Write) = 0xDE (Error Read)
DU1 Error_Decode = 0x80 (DP-V1)
PROFIdrive: Always 128 (DP-V1 codes)
DU2 Error_Code_1: Error class/error code (see Table 17 below)
DU3 Error_Code_2: Always 0
DP-V1 communication
82
Table 17. DP-V1 error response: Error codes
MSB x x x x x x x x LSB
Error class Meaning Error code

0…9 (Reserved)
10 (0x0A) Application 0 = Read error
1 = Write error
2 = Module failure
3 … 7 = Reserved
8 = Version conflict
9 = Feature not supported
10 … 15 = User-specific
11 (0x0B) Access 0 = Invalid index
1 = Write length error
2 = Invalid slot
3 = Type conflict
4 = Invalid area
5 = State conflict
6 = Access denied
7 = Invalid range
8 = Invalid parameter
9 = Invalid type
12 (0x0C) Resource 0 = Read constraint conflict
1 = Write constraint conflict
2 = Resource busy
3 = Resource unavailable
4 … 7 = Reserved
13 … 15 User-specific
DP-V1 communication
83
Table 18. PROFIdrive Request header

Byte/
Field(s) Description Range
Word
Request Unique identification set by the master. 1 … 255 Byte
Reference Changed for each new request.
Request ID Request type for the issued block. Request Byte
Parameter (01h)
Change
Parameter (02h)
Axis To be set to 0 or 1. 0 … 255 Byte
No. of Number of parameters that are present 1 … 37 Byte
Parameters in the request.
Attribute Type of object being accessed. Value (10h) Byte
Note: “Text” is not supported. Description (20h)
Text (30h)
No. of Number of array elements accessed or 0, 1 … 234 Byte
Elements length of string accessed. Set to 0 if
non-array parameters are used.
Parameter Address of the parameter that is being 1 … 65535 Word
Index accessed. “0” is allowed by RPBA-01.
Subindex Addresses the first array element of the 0 … 65535 Word
parameter or the beginning of a string
access or the text array, or the
description element that is being
accessed.
Format* See Table 20. See Table 20 Byte
Number of Number of values following. 0 … 234 Byte
Values*
Values* The values of the request. In case of – See
odd number of bytes, a zero byte is Format
appended to ensure the word structure field
of the telegram.
*Only if Request ID is 02h (Change Parameter). The Format, Number of Values
and Values fields are repeated for other parameters.
DP-V1 communication
84
Table 19. PROFIdrive Response header

Field(s) Description Range
Response Mirrored from the request. 1 … 255
Reference
Response Response from the slave. In case any Request Param OK (01h)
ID requested services fail, a “not Request Param NAK (81h)
acknowledged” (NAK) response will be Change Param OK (02h)
indicated. Change Param NAK (82h)
Axis To be set to 1. 0 … 255
No. of Number of parameters that are present 1 … 37
Parameters in the response.
Format* See Table 20. See Table 20
Number of Number of values following. 0 … 234
Values*
Values* The values of the request. In case of –
odd number of bytes, a zero byte is
appended to ensure the word structure
of the telegram.
*Only if Response ID is 01h (Request Parameter OK). The Format, Number of
Values and Values fields are repeated for other parameters.
Table 20. Data types for Format field

Code Type
0x00 (Reserved)
0x01 … 0x36 Standard data types
0x37 … 0x3F (Reserved)
0x40 Zero
0x41 Byte
0x42 Word
0x43 Double word
0x44 Error
0x45 … 0xFF (Reserved)
DP-V1 communication
85
Table 21. PROFIdrive Parameter Request error codes

Error # Meaning Used at
00h Impermissible parameter Access to unavailable parameter
number
01h Parameter value cannot be Change access to a parameter value
changed that cannot be changed
02h Low or high limit exceeded Change access with value outside the
limits
03h Invalid subindex Access to unavailable subindex
04h No array Access with subindex to non-indexed
parameter
05h Incorrect data type Change access with value that does
not match the data type of the
parameter
06h Setting not permitted (can only Change access with value unequal to 0
be reset) when this is not permitted
07h Description element cannot be Change access to a description
changed element that cannot be changed
09h No description data available Access to unavailable description
(parameter value is available)
0Bh No operation priority Change access rights without rights to
change parameters
0Fh No text array available Access to text array that is not available
(parameter value is available)
11h Request cannot be executed Access is temporarily not possible for
because of operating mode reasons that are not specified in detail
14h Value impermissible Change access with a value that is
within limits but is not permissible for
other long-term reasons (parameter
with defined single values)
15h Response too long The length of the current response
exceeds the maximum transmittable
length
DP-V1 communication
86
16h Parameter address Illegal value or value that is not

impermissible supported for the attribute, number of
elements, parameter number or sub-
index, or a combination
17h Illegal format Write request: Illegal format or format of
parameter data that is not supported
18h Number of values inconsistent Write request: Number of values of
parameter data does not match number
of elements at the parameter address
65h … Manufacturer-specific –
FF
65h Vendor-specific error Vendor-specific error
66h Request not supported Request not supported
67h Communication error Request cannot be completed because
of communication error
6Dh
6Eh Non-volatile error Failure during write to non-volatile
memory
6Fh Time-out error Request aborted because of timeout
77h
78h PZD map failure Parameter cannot be mapped to PZD
(size mismatch or non-existent)
79h PZD memory failure Parameter cannot be mapped to PZD
(out of memory)
7Ah Multiple PZD map Parameter cannot be mapped to PZD
(multiple PZD write)
7Bh … Manufacturer-specific –
81h
82h Control word bit map Cannot map Control word bit
(parameter 933…937, e.g. double
mapping of bits)
DP-V1 communication
87
8Bh
8Ch Set torque mode error Cannot change mode to TORQUE
(frequency is used)
90h Illegal Request ID The request ID of the response is illegal
8Dh … Manufacturer-specific –
FFh
DP-V1 communication
88
Parameter data transfer examples

The following examples show how parameter data is transferred
using the DP-V1 mechanisms READ and WRITE.
Note: Only the “Data unit” part of the SD2 telegram is presented in
the examples. See Figure 14 on page 80.
Example 1a: Reading a drive parameter

subindex (IND), and the high byte is the parameter index (PNU).
For example, drive parameter number 12.04 corresponds to 12.04
× 100 = 1204 = 4B4h.
DP-V1 Write request (Read parameter value):
Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Request reference
Request ID (01h = Request Parameter)
Axis
Number of parameters
Attribute (10h = Value)
Number of elements
Parameter index
Subindex
DP 5F 01 2F 0A 05 01 01 01 10 01 00 04 00 B4 DP
header DP-V1 Command PROFIdrive V3 Parameter Channel trailer
DP-V1 communication
89
Positive Read response to DP-V1 Read request:

Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Response reference (mirrored)
Response ID
Axis
Format (42h = Word)
Number of values
Parameter value
DP 5E 01 2F 08 05 01 01 01 42 01 05 64 DP
header DP-V1 Response PROFIdrive V3 Parameter Channel trailer
Negative response to PROFIdrive Read request:

Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Response ID
Axis (mirrored)
Format (44h = Error)
Number of values
PROFIdrive error code
DP 5E 01 2F 08 05 81 01 01 44 01 00 14 DP
DP-V1 communication
90
Example 1b: Reading 3 drive parameters

In this example, three parameters (12.04, 12.05 and 12.06) are
read using one telegram.
DP-V1 Write request (Read parameter value):
Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Request reference
Request ID (01h = Request Parameter)
Axis
Number of elements
Parameter index
Subindex
DP 5F 01 2F 16 06 01 01 03 10 01 00 04 00 B4
•••
header DP-V1 Command PROFIdrive V3 Parameter Channel
10 01 00 04 00 B5
••• •••
(Par. Channel continued)
10 01 00 04 00 B6 DP
•••
(Par. Channel continued) trailer
DP-V1 communication
91
Positive Read response to DP-V1 Read request:

Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Response ID
Axis
Format (42h = Word)
Number of values
Parameter value
DP 5F 01 2F 10 06 01 01 03 42 01 01 90
•••
header DP-V1 Response PROFIdrive V3 Parameter Channel
42 01 03 84
••• •••
(Par. Channel cont’d)
42 01 01 F4 DP
•••
(Par. Channel cont’d) trailer
The values 190h (400), 384h (900) and 1F4h (500) are returned.
Example 2a: Writing a drive parameter

subindex (IND), and the high byte is the parameter index (PNU).
For example, drive parameter number 12.02 corresponds to 12.02
× 100 = 1202 = 4B2h.
DP-V1 communication
92
Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Request reference
Request ID (02h = Change)
Axis
Number of elements
Parameter index
Subindex
Format (42h = Word)
Number of values
Value
DP 5F 01 2F 0E 07 02 01 01 10 01 00 04 00 B2 42 01 02 58 DP
Slot number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Request reference (mirrored)
Response ID
Axis (mirrored)
5E 01 2F 04 07 02 01 01
DP DP
header PROFIdrive V3 trailer
DP-V1 Response
Parameter Channel
DP-V1 communication
93
Example 2b: Writing 2 drive parameters

In this example, the values 300 (12Ch) and 500 (1F4h) are written
to drive parameters 12.02 (4B2h) and 12.03 (4B3h) respectively
using one telegram.
Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Request reference
Request ID (02h = Change Parameter)
Axis
Number of elements
Parameter index
Subindex
DP 5F 01 2F 14 08 02 01 02 10 01 00 04 00 B2
•••
header DP-V1 Command PROFIdrive V3 Parameter Channel
10 01 00 04 00 B3
••• •••
(Par. Channel continued)
42 01 01 2C
••• •••
(Par. Channel cont’d)
42 01 01 F4 DP
•••
(Par. Channel cont’d) trailer
Value
Number of values
Format (42h = Word)
DP-V1 communication
94
Slot number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Response ID
Axis (mirrored)
5E 01 2F 04 08 02 01 02
DP DP
header PROFIdrive V3 trailer
DP-V1 Response
Parameter Channel
Example 3: Reading a PROFIdrive parameter

In this example, PROFIBUS parameter No. 918 (396h) is used to
read the station number of the slave.
DP-V1 Write request (Reading a PROFIdrive parameter):
Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Request reference
Request ID
Axis
Attribute
Number of elements
Parameter index
Subindex
DP 5F 01 2F 0A 09 01 01 01 10 00 03 96 00 00 DP
DP-V1 communication
95
DP-V1 Read response

Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Response ID
Axis (mirrored)
Format (42h = Word)
Number of values
Value or error values
DP 5E 01 2F 08 09 01 01 01 42 01 23 00 DP
The slave returns the code of the latest acknowledged fault

(2300h). The fault codes are according to the DRIVECOM
standard. See also the User’s Manual of the drive for drive specific
fault codes.
The implementation of the PROFIdrive profile in the RPBA-01
supports the storage of the active and the five latest occurred
different faults in the fault buffer. The fault codes can be accessed
by PROFIdrive parameters 945, 947 and 948 (see Table 22 on
page 101). The value zero indicates no fault. The subindexes of
these parameters are related to each other, i.e. parameter 945
with subindex 1 relates to subindex of parameter 947 and 948.
Example 4: Configuring the process data written to the drive

PROFIBUS parameter No. 915 (393h) can be used to define
which data is written cyclically to a drive parameter as application-
specific process data.
In the example below, the value of drive parameter 12.06 (4B6h) is
selected to be taken from PZD3. The parameter will continue to be
updated with the contents of PZD3 in each Request frame until a
different selection is made.
data is taken from. Parameter Value selects the drive parameter to
which that word is mapped.
DP-V1 communication
96
DP-V1 Write request

Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Request reference
Request ID (02h = Change)
Axis
Number of elements
Parameter index
Subindex
Format (42h = Word)
Number of values
Value
DP 5F 01 2F 0E 0A 02 01 01 10 01 03 93 00 03 42 01 04 B6 DP
DP-V1 Read response

Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Response ID
Axis (mirrored)
Format (42h = Word)
Number of values
DP 5E 01 2F 08 0A 01 01 01 42 01 00 68 DP
Subsequently, the contents of PZD3 in each Request frame are

written to drive parameter 12.06 until a different selection is made.
DP-V1 communication
97
Example 5: Determining the source of process data read from the

drive
PROFIBUS Parameter No. 916 (394h) can be used to define
which data is read cyclically from the drive as application-specific
process data. In the example below, the parameter is used to
determine which drive parameter the contents of PZD3 are taken
from. Subindex (IND) defines which process data word the
required data is transmitted in.
DP-V1 Write request
Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Request reference
Request ID (01h = Read)
Axis
Number of elements
Parameter index
Subindex
DP 5F 01 2F 0A 0B 01 01 01 10 01 03 94 00 03 DP
DP-V1 Read response

Function number
Slot number
Index
Data length
Response ID
Axis (mirrored)
Format (42h = Word)
Number of values
DP 5E 01 2F 08 0B 01 01 01 42 01 04 B5 DP
Value indicates the source of PZD3 as drive param. 12.05 (4B5h).
DP-V1 communication
98
DP-V1 communication
99
Fault tracing
LED indications
The RPBA-01 module is equipped with three diagnostic LEDs.
The description of the LEDs is below.
Host
ERROR
Indication
Off-line On-line
Name Colour Function

Flashing 1 Hz - Error in configuration:
Internal configuration mismatch.
Flashing 2 Hz - Error in User Parameter data:
The length/contents of the User Parameter data
set during initialisation of the module is not equal
ERROR
to the length/contents set during configuration of

Red
the network. Check that the selected DP mode
matches the GSD file used (see configuration
parameter 21 DP MODE on page 37).
Flashing 4 Hz - Error in initialisation of the
PROFIBUS communication ASIC.
Off - No diagnostics present
Lit - Module is On-Line and data exchange is
Off-Line On-Line
Green possible.
Off - Module is not On-Line
Lit - Module is Off-Line and no data exchange is
Red possible.
Off - Module is not Off-Line
Fault tracing
100
Host
ERROR
Indication
Off-line On-line
Name Colour Function

Host Indication
Green Lit - Link functional
Lit - Link lost permanently

Red
Flashing - Link lost temporarily
Fault tracing
101
Table 22. PROFIdrive profile-specific parameters.
Para- R/W* Data type Description

meter
915 R/W Array [10] Unsigned16 Assignment PZD1 to PZD10 in PPO-write
916 R/W Array [10] Unsigned16 Assignment PZD1 to PZD10 in PPO-read
918 R/W Unsigned16 Node address. Writing this parameter will
change the node address if the rotary
switches have the setting 0. Module re-
start required.
919 R Octet String4 Device system number.
927 R/W Unsigned16 Operator control rights (parameter
identification, PKW).
Value Mode
0 Parameters cannot be
written, only read (927 can
be written)
1 Parameters can be written
and read (default).
928 R/W Unsigned16 Control rights (process data, PZD).
Value Mode
0 PZD part is disabled, i.e.
Receipt of new PZD data is
ignored
1 PZD part is enabled
(default).
929 R Unsigned16 Selected PPO-type
Value PPO-type Configuration
1 PPO1 F3h, F1h
2 PPO2 F3h, F5h
3 PPO3 F1h
4 PPO4 F5h
5 PPO5 F3h, F9h
102

meter
930 R/W Unsigned16 Selection switch for operation mode.
Value Mode
1 Speed control mode: Control
word and status word for
frequency/speed used.
8001h Speed control mode: Control
word and status word for
torque used.
933 R/W Unsigned16 Selection switch for Control word, bit 11.
Value Module Control word bit
0 None
1 to 5 Vendor specific 1 to 5*
* The meaning of vendor specific bits is
defined by drive application program.
(See parameter 933 for coding)
939 R/W Unsigned16 Selection switch for Status word, bit 11.
Value Module Status word bit
0 None
1 to 3 Vendor specific 1 to 3*
* The meaning of vendor specific bits is
defined by drive application program.
103

meter
945 R Array[64] Unsigned16 Fault code (coded according to
DRIVECOM profile).
Subindex Contents
1 Active fault
9 **Last ackn. fault
17 **Second last ackn. fault
25 **Third last ackn. fault
33 **Fourth last ackn. fault
41 **Fifth last ackn. fault
947 R Array [64] Unsigned16 Fault number.
Subindex Contents
See parameter 945.
948 R Array [64] Unsigned16 Time difference. Seconds since the last
fault occured.
Subindex Contents
See parameter 945.
952 R/W Unsigned16 Number of faults occured. Writing a zero
clears the value.
953 R Unsigned16 **Last alarm
954 R Unsigned16 **Second last alarm
955 R Unsigned16 **Third last alarm
956 R Unsigned16 **Fourth last alarm
957 R Unsigned16 **Fifth last alarm
958 R Unsigned16 Sixth last alarm (not supported)
959 R Unsigned16 Seventh last alarm (not supported)
960 R Unsigned16 Eighth last alarm (not supported)
961 R Octet String4 Hardware configuration (manufacturer
specific ID of the drive)
104

meter
963 R Unsigned16 Detected baud rate:
0 = 12 Mbit/s
1 = 6 Mbit/s
2 = 3 Mbit/s
3 = 1.5 Mbit/s
4 = 500 kbit/s
5 = 187.5 kbit/s
6 = 93.75 kbit/s
7 = 45.45 kbit/s
8 = 19.2 kbit/s
9 = 9.6 kbit/s
255 = Invalid baud rate
964 R Unsigned16 Identification number of this device
(0812h)
965 R Octet String2 Profile number of this device (0302h)
Profile 3, Version 2
967 R Unsigned16 Control word (CW)
968 R Unsigned16 Status word (SW)
970 R/W Unsigned16 Load parameter record
Value Description
0 No action
1 Restore factory settings
The parameter must do a zero-to-one
transition and the motor must be stopped.
971 R/W Unsigned16 Save parameter record
Value Description
0 No action
1 Save the drive parameters
to non-volatile memory
105

meter
972 R/W Unsigned16 Software reset
Value Description
0 No action
1 Re-boot PROFIBUS module
* Read and/or Write
** Support depends on drive type
106
107
Definitions and abbreviations
PROFIBUS definitions
Acyclic Communication in which messages are sent only once
Communication on request
Array Parameter consisting of data fields of equal data type
Broadcast Non-acknowledged message from master to all bus
participants (compare Multicast)
Command Word See Control Word
Communication Any object of a real device that can be communicated
Object with (variable, program, data range, etc.). Stored locally
in the Object Dictionary.
Control Word 16-bit word from master to slave with bit-coded control
signals (sometimes called the Command Word).
Cyclic Communication in which Parameter-/Process Data-
Communication Objects are sent cyclically at pre-defined intervals
Device Class Classification according to the number of profile
functions included in the device
Drivecast Broad- and Multicast, a special message frame for
drives
Fault Event that leads to tripping of the device
GSD File ASCII-format device description file in a specified form.
Each device (active & passive stations) on PROFIBUS
has to have its own GSD File.
Index Access reference for Objects in PROFIBUS
Information Report Non-acknowledged message from master to one or all
groups of bus participants

108
Master Control system with bus initiative. In PROFIBUS

terminology, master stations are also called active
stations.
Multicast Non-acknowledged message from master to one group
of bus participants (compare Broadcast)
Name Symbolic name of a parameter
Nibble Set of 4 bits
Object Dictionary Local storage of all Communication Objects recognised
by a device
Object List List of all accessible objects
Parameter Value that can be accessed as Object, e.g. variable,
constant, signal
Parameter Number Parameter address
Parameter/Process Special object that contains Parameter and Process
Data Object Data
Process Data Data that contains Control Word and Reference value
or Status Word and Actual value. May also contain
other (user-definable) control information.
Profile Adaptation of the protocol for certain application field,
e.g. drives
Request Label Coded information specifying the required service for
the parameter part sent from master to slave
Response Label Coded information specifying the required service for
the parameter part sent from slave to master
Slave Passive bus participant. In PROFIBUS terminology,
slave stations (or slaves) are also called passive
stations. Also referred to as node.
Status Word 16-bit word from slave to master with bit-coded status
messages

109
Warning Signal caused by an existing alarm which does not lead

to tripping of the device
PROFIBUS abbreviations
The text in italics is the original German term.
.con Confirmation
.ind Indication
.req Request
.res Response
ACT Actual Value
Istwert
AK Request Label/Response Label
Auftragskennung/Antwortkennung
ALI Application Layer Interface
CR Communication Reference
Kommunikationsreferenz (Kommunikationsbeziehung)
DP Decentralised Periphery
Dezentrale Peripherie
DP-ALI Application Layer Interface for DP
DP-V1 PROFIBUS DP Extensions to the EN 50170 standard,
including e.g. acyclic data exchange
FDL Fieldbus Data Link
FMS Fieldbus Message Specification
FSU Manufacturer Specific Interface
Firmenspezifischer Umsetzer
HIW Main Actual Value
Hauptistwert
HSW Main Reference
Hauptsollwert

110
ISW see ACT

KR (KB) see CR
PA Process Automation
Prozessautomatisierung
PD Process Data
Prozessdaten
PKE Parameter Identification
Parameter-Kennung
PKW Parameter Identification Value
Parameter-Kennung-Wert
PNU Parameter Number
Parameternummer
PPO Parameter/Process Data Object
Parameter-/Prozessdaten-Objekt
PWE Parameter Value
Parameter-Wert
PZD see PD
PZDO Process Data Object
Prozessdatenobjekt
SAP Service Access Point
SOW Reference
Sollwert
SPM Request Signal
Spontanmeldung
STW Control Word
Steuerwort
ZSW Status Word
Zustandswort

111
Technical data
RPBA-01
Enclosure:
34 mm
95 mm
20 62 mm
mm
Mounting: Into the option slot on the control board of the drive.
Ambient conditions: The applicable ambient conditions specified
for the drive in its Hardware Manual are in effect.
Hardware settings:
• Rotary switches for node address selection (address range
00 to 99)
• DIP switch for bus termination selection
Technical data
112
Software settings:
• Input/Output/User Parameter data/Diagnostics format
• Maximum cyclic I/O data size: 28 bytes in, max 28 bytes out,
max. 56 bytes total
• Maximum acyclic I/O data size: 240 bytes in, max. 240 bytes
out, max. 480 bytes total
• Maximum User Parameter data/Diagnostics length: 26 bytes
Connectors:
• 34-pin parallel bus connector
• 9-pin female DSUB connector
Current consumption:
• 350 mA max. (5 V), supplied by the control board of the drive
General:
• Estimated min. lifetime: 100 000 h
• All materials UL/CSA-approved
• Complies with EMC standards EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2
Technical data
113
PROFIBUS link
Compatible devices: All devices compatible with the PROFIBUS
DP protocol
Size of the link: 127 stations including repeaters (31 stations and
1 repeater per segment)
Medium: Shielded, twisted pair RS-485 cable
• Termination: built in the module
• Specifications:
Line A Line B
Parameter Unit
PROFIBUS DP DIN 19245 Part 1
Impedance 135 to 165 100 to 130 W
(3 to 20 MHz) (f > 100 kHz)
Capacitance < 30 < 60 pF/m
Resistance < 110 – Ω /km
Wire gauge > 0.64 > 0.53 mm

Conductor area > 0.34 > 0.22 mm2
• Maximum bus length:

Transfer rate
≤ 93.75 187.5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000
(kbit/s)
Line A (m) 1200 1000 400 200 100 100 100
Line B (m) 1200 600 200 – – – –
Topology: Multi-drop
Serial communication type: Asynchronous, half Duplex
Transfer rate: 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s, 45.45 kbit/s, 93.75 kbit/s,
187.5 kbit/s, 500 kbit/s, 1.5 Mbit/s, 3 Mbit/s, 6 Mbit/s, or 12 Mbit/s
(automatically detected by RPBA-01)
Protocol: PROFIBUS DP
Technical data
114
Technical data
3AFE64504215 REV F EN
EFFECTIVE: 20.06.2005
ABB Oy ABB Inc.

AC Drives Automation Technologies
P.O. Box 184 Drives & Motors
FIN-00381 HELSINKI 16250 West Glendale Drive
FINLAND New Berlin, WI 53151
Telephone +358 10 22 11 USA
Fax +358 10 22 22681 Telephone 262 785-3200
Internet http://www.abb.com 800-HELP-365
Fax 262 780-5135
Installation and Softstarters
Maintenance manual
PST / PSTB
Installation and maintenance manual
PST30... PST1050
PST30...PSTB1050 Installation and maintenance manual
Introduction..................................................................... 1.1 - 1.3 1
Quickstart................................................................ 2.1 - 2.3 2
Description.................................................................... 3.1 - 3.10 3
Mounting......................................................................... 4.1 - 4.3 4
Connection...................................................................... 5.1 - 5.9 5
Human Machine Interface (HMI)..................................... 6.1 - 6.7 6
Settings and configuration........................................... 7.1 - 7.23 7
Fieldbus communication (option).................................... 8.1 - 8.2 8
Maintenance................................................................... 9.1 - 9.2 9
Functions.................................................................. 10.1 - 10.19 10
Troubleshooting...........................................................11.1 - 11.6 11
Diagrams..................................................................... 12.1 - 12.5 12
Low Voltage Products & Systems

ABB Inc. • 888-385-1221 • www.abb-control.com 1SXU 132 021 M0201
General information about this manual
1 General 3 Safety signs

This is the Installation and maintenance manual for Softstarters PST30...
3:1 Use of Caution, Warning and Information
PSTB1050
Document number: 1SXU 132 021 M0201
Edition: 01
Revision: 01
1 Issue Date: April 11, 2005

Caution!
Date subject to change without notice. Caution icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result
We reserve all rights to this document, even in the event that a patent is in personal injury.
issued and a different commercial proprietary right is registered. Improper
use, in particular reproduction and dissemination to third parties, is not
permitted.
This document has been carefully checked. If the user nevertheless
detects any errors, please notify us as soon as possible.
The data contained in this manual is intended solely for the product de-
scription and is not to be deemed to be a statement of guaranteed proper-
! Warning!
Warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result
ties. In the interests of our customers, we constantly seek to ensure that in corruption of software or damage to equipment/property.
our products are developed to the latest technological standards.
As a result, it is possible that there may be some differences between the
softstarter and the information in this manual.
Author’s address: Information!

Low Voltage Products and Systems Alerts the reader to pertinent facts and conditions.
ABB Inc.
1206 Hatton Road
Wichita Falls, TX 76302
Tel: 888.385.1221
940.397.7000
Fax: 940.397.7085
Web: www.abb-control.com
2 Safety
This section describes warning and information signs used in this manual.
The user should pay close attention to these signs.
The softstarter should be installed by authorized personnel only.
This manual is a part of the softstarter and should always be accessible to
personnel working with this product.
The manual should always be read before performing any installation or
commissioning tasks.
II Low Voltage Products & Systems

1SXU 132 021 M0201 ABB Inc. • 888-385-1221 • www.abb-control.com
Installation and maintenance
Chapter 1manual
PST30...PSTB1050 Introduction
1
About the documentation for the softstarter .......................................................... 1.2
About the installation and commissioning manual ................................................ 1.2
Intended audience ......................................................................................... 1.2
General....................................................................................................... 1.2
Requirements.............................................................................................. 1.2
Chapters included.................................................................................................. 1.2
Revision notes........................................................................................................ 1.3
Acronyms and abbreviations.................................................................................. 1.3
Low Voltage Products & Systems 1.1

Chapter 1
Introduction
1:1 About the documentation for the softstarter

For the softstarter, the following documents are available:
PST30/PSTB1050 Softstarters
Installation and Maintenance manual
Document ID: 1SXU 132 021 M0201 - English
1SFC132003M0101 (German)
1 1SFC132003M0101 (German)
1SFC132003M3401 (Swedish)
1SFC132003M0301 (French)
1SFC132003M0901 (Italian)
1SFC132003M0701 (Spanish)
1SFC132003M3101 (Dutch)
1SFC132003M1601 (Portuguese)
1SFC132003M1801 (Finnish)
1SFC132003M1101 (Russian)
1SFC132003M2001 (Chinese
1SFC132003M1901 (Turkish)
Soft Starter Catalog

Document ID: 1SXU 132 019 C0201
For other documents related to the PST Softstarters, see www.abb-control.com/products/softstarters.htm#type_pst
1:2 About the installation and commissioning manual

This manual contains instructions on how to install and commission the softstarter. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical instal-
lation and installation of communication devices. It also covers how to energize, set, configure and verify settings.
For the quickest possible start, read Chapter 2 “ Quickstart” .
1:2.1 Intended audience

1:2.1.1 General
The installation and commissioning manual is intended for personnel responsible for installing, commissioning and maintaining the softstarter.
1:2.1.2 Requirements
All personnel who interact with the softstarter must have a basic knowledge in handling electric equipment. The commissioning and maintenance per-
sonnel must be well experienced in using this kind of equipment.
1:2.2 Chapters included

• Introduction introduces the reader to this manual.
• Quickstart contains information on how to install the softstarter and put it into operation in the quickest and safest way. This chapter is intended for
the experienced user.
• Description describes the softstarter in general, its functions and specifications.
• Mounting contains information on receiving, unpacking and mounting the softstarter.
• Connection contains instructions on how to make the electrical connections as well as connections for communication devices.
• Human-Machine Interface describes the local Human-Machine Interface, how it works and what it contains.
• Settings and configuration describes all possible settings and how to navigate in the menu system.
• Fieldbus communication describes how to install and set up the fieldbus communication.
• Maintenance describes what maintenance is required.
• Functions describes all functions included in the softstarter. This chapter also describes parameter ranges and default values.
• Trouble shooting contains instructions on how to quickly find and correct the most common faults.
• Diagrams contains a number of electrical diagrams for the softstarter itself. It also contains some typical application diagrams.
1.2 Low Voltage Products & Systems

Chapter 1
Introduction
1:2.3 Revision notes

Please check www.abb-control.com/products/softstarters.htm#type_pst for latest information on revisions.
1.2.4 Acronyms and abbreviations

The following acronyms and abbreviations are used in this manual.
Acronym/abbreviation Description 1
LED Light Emitting Diode
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
SCR Silicon Controlled Rectifier
IT Information Technology
HMI Human-Machine Interface
FBP Fieldbusplug
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PCB Printed Circuit Board
TOR Top of Ramp (full voltage)

Notes

Chapter 2manual
PST30...PSTB1050 Quickstart
Connection..............................................................................................................2.2
Configuration...........................................................................................................2.3
Start of the motor.....................................................................................................2.3 2

Chapter 2
Quickstart
This chapter is a short guide on how to connect, configure and start the softstarter in the quickest
1 and safest way.
2
Power on Fault Protection
! Warning!
Mounting and installing the softstarter shall be done in accordance with local laws and
regulations and must be performed by authorized personnel only.
Do not change any parameters in the Service Settings menu.
2 3
2:1 Connection
1. Mount the softstarter according to Chapter 4 “ Mounting” .
2. Be aware of the ambient temperature. Derating is required above 40 °C (104 °F). See Chapter
4 3 for more information.
Figure 1: 3. Connect the main circuit: terminals 1L1 - 3L2 - 5L3 to the line side and terminals
1 Status indication LEDs 2T1 - 4T2 - 6T3 to the motor side.
2 LCD display 4. Connect the control voltage: terminals 1 and 2 (100-250V 50/60Hz).
3 Selection keys for selecting, changing and storing parameters
4 Navigation keys for navigating in the menus 5. Connect the functional ground: terminal 3.
* Arrows shown in the display indicate that the value/menu is
possible to change or scroll
Information!
The wire shall be as short as possible, and be connected to the mounting plate.The
mounting plate should also be grounded.
6. Connect the start/stop circuits: terminal 4, 5, 8, 9 and 10 according to Figure 2. 24 VDC only!
7. Verify that the main and control voltage corresponds to the softstarter ratings.
8. Switch on the control voltage.
9. The green “Power on” LED should be lit and the LCD should appear as shown in Figure 3.
Figure 2: Standard connection PST
Figure 3: Top level

Chapter 2
Quickstart
2:2 Configuration
Application Setting 1. Enter the Application Setting by pressing the left selection key twice. Press Select using the
left selection key. See Figure 4.
Select Back
Figure 4: Application setting menu 2. Select the appropriate type of load by using the navigation keys. See Figure 5.
3. Press Store Set and Next to continue or Back to previous parameter using the selection
keys. See Figure 6.
Centrifugal Pump 4. Set Ie (motor FLA) using the navigation keys.
In Line connected = rated motor current
Store Set Back Inside Delta connected = 58% (1/( 3)) of the rated motor current. For example, if the soft
Figure 5: Centrifugal pump starter is connected in line with a 100A motor, Ie = 100A. If the softstarter is connected inside
the delta of a 100A motor, Ie = 58A. See Figure 7.
5. Press Store and Next to continue or press Back to access the previous parameter. See Fig- 2
Centrifugal Pump ure 8.
Next Back 6. Set the required overload class using the navigation keys. See Figure 9.
Figure 6: Centrifugal pump stored 7. Press Store and Next to continue or press Back to access the previous parameter. See Fig-
ure 10.
Setting Ie 99.0A 8. If an external by-pass contactor is used set Ext ByPass to Yes using the navigation keys.
(PST30...300 only). See Figure 11.
Store 9. Press Store and Next to continue or Back to previous parameter using the selection keys.
Figure 7: Setting Ie See Figure 12.
10. Select Yes if ready or Tune Set if ramp times, initial voltage, current limit etc. need to be
Setting Ie 99.0A adjusted. See Figure 13.
Next Back 11. To change language, see Section 7:2.5.
Figure 8: Setting Ie stored
2:3 Start of the motor
1. Switch on the main voltage.
OL Class 10 2. Give a start command to the softstarter.
Store (To start the softstarter from the keypad, enter the LOCAL CONTROL menu, select Start/
Figure 9: OL Class Stop and press Start. The motor must be stopped before leaving this menu.)
OL Class 10
Next Back
Figure 10: OL Class stored
Ext ByPass No
Store
Figure 11: External Bypass
Ext ByPass No
Next Back
Figure 12: External Bypass stored
Ready?
Yes Tune Set
Figure 13: Ready / Tune Set

Notes

Chapter 3manual
PST30...PSTB1050 Description
Overview.................................................................................................................3.2
Functions.................................................................................................................3.2
Markings and connections.......................................................................................3.3
Type designation.....................................................................................................3.4
Industrial IT..............................................................................................................3.4
3
Environmental influence..........................................................................................3.4
Specifications..........................................................................................................3.4
Technical data.........................................................................................................3.5
General..............................................................................................................3.5
Semi-conductor fuses........................................................................................3.5
Softstarter types.................................................................................................3.6
Weights..............................................................................................................3.7
PSTB AC3 (Across the line) Contactor Ratings.................................................3.7
UL Information....................................................................................................3.7
Dimensions..............................................................................................3.8 - 3.10

Chapter 3 - Description
This chapter describes the softstarter in general, specifications and available accessories and
spare parts.
3:1 Overview
The PST softstarter is a microprocessor-based softstarter designed with the latest technology for
the soft start and soft stop of squirrel cage motors. The softstarter has several advanced motor
protection features as standard.
The softstarter is designed to be used with or without a by-pass contactor except for the larger
sizes, PSTB370...1050 where the bypass contactor is integrated. In an emergency, it is possible
to start the motor across the line with the integrated bypass contactor. See Section 3:8.4 for AC3
ratings.
The keypad on the front is designed to be as user-friendly as possible, with a clear text display. It
is possible to choose between twelve different languages (default is English).
The softstarter can be controlled in four ways:
• Hardware inputs
3 • Keypad control (local)
• Fieldbus communication interface
• Remote keypad (option)
The integrated fans for cooling are operated only during ramping (start/stop) and when the tem-
perature of the heat sink is too high. The temperature is monitored by a thermistor.
Only one type of control method can be enabled simultaneously.
Default selection is hardware inputs.

Information!
Keypad control has the highest priority and overrides all other control methods.
3:2 Functions
The PST softstarter has several integrated protection and warning functions. Almost any type of
fault can be detected and displayed.
All available protections, warnings and fault indications are listed below.
Start/Stop functions
• Start ramp
• Stop ramp (also called soft stop or decel)
• Initial voltage
• Step down voltage
• Current limit
• Kick Start
• Extended start range
• Extended stop range
• Sequence start

Protection functions
• Motor overload protection
• Locked rotor protection
• Motor underload protection
• High current protection
• Phase imbalance protection
• Phase reversal protection
• SCR overload protection
• PTC input for motor protection
• Shorted SCR

Warning functions
• Warning high current
• Warning low current
• Warning motor overload
• Warning SCR overload

Fault Supervision functions
• Internal softstarter faults
• Shorted SCR
• Non conducting SCR
• Open circuit motor side
• Over-temperature heat sink
• Phase loss
• Frequency out of range
• Fieldbus communication
• Non-closing by-pass contactor
• Non-opening by-pass contactor
3
Other functions
• Jog
• Real time clock
• Event log
• Keypad password
3:3 Markings and connections
Line side
connection
Bypass connection
(PST30...300 only)
Control voltage Ue Terminal marking

of control circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
L N
100-250V
50/60 Hz Stop Start In0 In1 Vc Vn Vp Vp K4 K5 K6
Green
Red
Yellow
Display
Keypad
Terminal marking
of main circuit
1L1 B1 3L2 B2 5L3 B3
Order code
2T1 4T2 6T3
1SFA 894 007 R1002 Made in Sweden

Fieldbus connection
IEC 947-4-2 72: AC-53a: 8-1.6: 80-6
Technical data Us: 100-250V AC/DC
Ie: 37-72A
Ue:
In line
220-230 380-400
18,5 37
500
45
V
kW
according to UL 508 Overload Capacity 115% of Continuous
IEC 947-4-2 Uc: 100-250V AC/DC

FLA: 37-68A
Ue
In line
208
20
220-240 440-480
20 50
V
Hp
LISTED
IND. CONT. EQ
7F39
Fuse 250A TYPOWER ZILOX
CAUTION Max short circuit current 65kA at 480V Wire 1-8 Al Cu 75C only, 35lb-in
Keypad PTC Fieldbus
Technical data
according to
UL 508
Us:
100-
Ie:
37-7 250V
2A AC/D
UL C
Ue:
Uc:
100- In line
FLA 250V Ove 220-
: 37-6 AC/D rload 230
Cap 18,5 380-
CA 8A C
acity 400
UT Ue
ION 115% 37 500
Fuse In of Con
Max 250A line 208 tinuo 45 V
shor TYP us kW
t circu OW 20 220-
ER 240
it curr
ZILO 20 440-
ent X 480
65kA LIS
PTC connection
Key at 50 V INDTED
pad Hp . CO 7F3
NT. 9
External keypad
EQ
.
PTC
Wire
1-8
Al
Cu
connection
75C
only
, 35lb
Fie -in
ldb
us
3
30
20
12 91011
1213
5678
Serial number
1234
10
00
01
16
1S
Motor side connection
Figure 1: Markings and connections

3:4 Type designation

PST B 370-600 -70
]
]
]
]
]
Control Voltage
70 = 100 - 250V 50/60 Hz
Main Voltage
600 = 208 - 600V 50/60 Hz
690 = 400 - 690V 50/60 Hz
Current Rating
600 = 208 - 600V 50/60 Hz
690 = 400 - 690V 50/60 Hz
Bypass contactor
3 600 = 208 - 600V 50/60 Hz
690 = 400 - 690V 50/60 Hz
Softstarter type
3:4 Industrial IT
Thanks to ABB’s broad program of product standardisation, today’s Industrial IT components are - whether they are products or systems, hardware or
software - the building blocks of larger solutions, incorporating functionalities that will allow seamless interactions in real-time automation and informa-
tion systems.
At the product level, ABB’s Industrial IT enabled symbol ensures that all the products can fully interact. All product information pertaining to these
products is available in electronic format, based on Aspect ObjectTM technology. The Industrial IT commitment from ABB ensures that every product is
equipped with the tools necessary to install, operate and maintain it efficiently throughout the product’s life cycle.
The PST softstarters is an Industrial IT enabled product. Documentation such as brochures, catalogues, certificates and drawings can be found at :
www.abb-control.com/products/softstarters.htm#type_pst.
3:6 Environmental influence

The product is designed to minimize the environmental affects during manufacturing and use of the product. Most of the materials used are recyclable.
3:7 Specifications
Item Specification
Degree of protection (main circuit) IP 10 for PST30...72; IP 00 for PST85...1050
Operating position Vertical at ± 10°
Ambient temperature Storage: -25°C to +70°C (-13°C to 158°F)
Operation
Without derating 0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)
With derating +40° C to +50°C (104°F to 122°F) of 0.8% / °C (1.8%/°F)
Altitude 1000 m (3281 ft.) above sea level without derating
1000 - 4000 m (3281 - 13,123 ft.) by derating 1% for each 333 ft above 3300 ft.
Pollution degree 3
Relative humidity 5 - 95% (non-condensing)
Standards UL508
IEC 60947-1
IEC 60947-4-2
EN 60947--1
PTC input IEC 60947-8 Mark A detectors, DIN 44081 and DIN 44082
Marine approvals Contact your ABB sales office

3:8 Technical data

3:8.1 General
Item Technical data

Rated insulation voltage, Ui 690V
Rated operational voltage, Ue 208-690 V (in two modes)
Rated control voltage, Us 100 - 250 V 50/60 Hz
Rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Voltage tolerances +10% to -15%
Frequency tolerances ±5%
Rated impulse withstand voltage 2 kV
Number of controlled phases 3
3
Programmable inputs 24 VDC, 10 mA
Output relays 250 VAC, Ith = 5A, le = 1.5A (AC-15)
Battery back-up D20mm Lithium 3V CR2032
PTC input 2825 ohm ±20% switch off resistance
1200 ohm ±20% switch on resistance
Cooling system Fan
Recommended fuse for control circuit 6A Delayed
MCB use C characteristics
Service factor 115% (100% for PSTB1050)
Communication protocols AS-Interface DeviceNet / Profibus DP /
Modbus
3:8.2 Semi-conductor fuses
Softstarter type Bussmann fuses Holders

A Type
PST30 80 170M1366 170H1007
PST37 125 170M1368 170H1007
PST44 160 170M1369 170H1007
PST50 160 170M1369 170H1007
PST60 200 170M1370 170H1007
PST72 250 170M1371 170H1007
PST85 315 170M1372 170H1007
PST105 400 170M3019 170H3004
PST142 450 170M3020 170H3004
PST175 500 170M3021 170H3004
PST210 630 170M5012 170H3004
PST250 700 170M5013 170H3004
PST300 900 170M5015 170H3004
PSTB370 700 170M5013 170H3004

3:8.3 Softstarter types

Type PST30 PST37 PST44 PST50
Connection method Inline Delta Inline Delta Inline Delta Inline Delta
Rated Current Ie (A) 30 52 37 64 44 76 50 85
Motor rating at 480V (HP) 20 30 25 40 30 50 40 60
Motor rating 380-415V (KW) 15 25 18.5 30 22 37 25 45
AC-3 Rating with integrated Bypass (A) – – – –
Power loss at rated current (W) 100 120 140 160
Control power requirements (VA) 5 5 5 5

3 Rated Current Ie (A) 60 105 72 124 85 147 105 181
Motor rating 380-415V (KW) 30 55 37 59 45 75 55 90

Motor rating 380-415V (KW) 75 132 90 160 110 184 132 220
Type PST300 PSTB370 PSTB470 PSTB570

Motor rating 380-415V (KW) 160 257 200 355 250 450 315 475
Contactor type – AF302 AF302 AF480
AC-3 Rating with integrated Bypass (A) – 302 302 480
Control power requirements (VA) 15 20/480 20/480 25/900
Type PSTB720 PSTB840 PSTB1050

Connection method Inline Delta Inline Delta Inline Delta
Rated Current Ie (A) 720 1247 840 1455 1050 1810
Motor rating at 480V (HP) 600 1000 700 1200 900 1500
Motor rating 380-415V (KW) 400 670 450 780 560 875
Contactor type AF580 AF750 AF750
AC-3 Rating with integrated Bypass (A) 590 720 720
Power loss at rated current (W) 110 170 170
Control power requirements (VA) 25/860 25/860 25/860

3:8.4 Weights
Type Weight in kg Weight in lbs

PST30...50 4.8 10.6
PST60...72 5.0 11.0
PST85 11.2 24.7
PST105...142 13.0 28.7
PST175...210 21.5 47.4
PST250...300 23.0 50.7
PST370...470 31.0 68.3
PSTB570 52.0 114.6
PSTB720 55.0 121.3
PSTB840...1050 60.0 132.3 3
3:8.5 PSTB AC3 Integrated contactor ratings
PST type PSTB370 PSTB470 PSTB570 PSTB720 PSTB840 PSTB1050

Contactor type AF300 AF300 AF460 AF580 AF750 AF750
AC3 Rating @ 480V HP 250 250 400 500 600 600
AC3 Rating A 302 302 480 590 720 720
3:8.6 UL information
Equipment suitable for use in a circuit with maximum available fault current as shown when protected by devices indicated.
Model Rating (kA) Max V Fuse (A) MCCB (A)

PST30...142 10 600 Any UL Listed Any UL Listed
PST175...300 18 600 Any UL Listed Any UL Listed
PSTB370...470 30 600 Any UL Listed Any UL Listed
PSTB570 30 600 Any UL Listed Any UL Listed
PSTB720 42 600 1200/L 1200
PSTB840 42 600 1200/L 1200
PSTB1050 85 480 - 800
PSTB1050 85 600 1200/L -
PSTB1050 42 600 - 1200

Inches
[[ Millimeters
3:8.7 Dimensions
PST30...72
Figure 1: Dimensions PST30...72
PST85...142

Inches
[[ Millimeters
PSTB175...300
PSTB370...470
Figure 4: Dimensions PSTB370...470

Inches
[[ Millimeters
PSTB570...1050
Figure 5: Dimensions PSTB570...1050

Chapter 4manual
PST30...PSTB1050 Mounting
Receiving, unpacking and checking........................................................................4.2

Intermediate storage..........................................................................................4.2
Mounting..................................................................................................................4.2
Handling when mounting...................................................................................4.2
Requirements.....................................................................................................4.2
Minimum distance to wall/front...........................................................................4.2
Minimum enclosure sizes...................................................................................4.3
4

Chapter 4
Mounting
This chapter describes instructions on how to receive the softstarter and how to mount it in the proper
way.
4:1 Receiving, unpacking and checking

• Check that the package is turned with the correct side up, Figure 1.
• Check for transport damages
• Remove transport casing.
• Visually inspect the softstarter
• Check that the serial number corresponds with the delivery documents
Figure 1: Package • Check the softstarter as well as the package. If you find any damages, please contact the transport
company or supplier immediately.
4:1.1 Intermediate storage

Until the softstarter is mounted, it should be stored in its package.
4
4:2 Mounting
4:2.1 Handling when mounting
The softstarter is available in five physical sizes. Models PST30 to PST300 can be taken out of the
packages and mounted without lifting equipment.
For all other models, lifting equipment is recommended due to the weight.
See Chapter 3 “Description”, for weights.
1SFC132044F0001

! Warning!
Do not lift the softstarter by the connection bars. Lifting by the connection bars may cause
damage to the product.
Figure 2: Airways
4:2.2 Requirements
See Chapter 3 “Description” for environmental requirements.
4:2.3 Minimum distance to wall/front
A
To ensure a suitable cooling, the softstarter must be mounted vertically and in such a way that the
airways are not blocked, see Figure 2.
Use the table below and Figure 3 for minimum distances between wall/front of the PST softstarter.
Information!
The values are minimum distances.
A B C
Softstarter type
mm in mm in mm in
B B A
PST30...72 100 3.94 10 0.39 20 0.79
PST85...300 100 3.94 10 0.39 20 0.79
PST175...300 100 3.94 10 0.39 20 0.79
PSTB370...470 150 5.91 15 0.59 20 0.79
C PSTB570...1050 150 5.91 15 0.59 20 0.79
Figure 3: Minimum distances, wall/front

Chapter 4 - Mounting
4:2.4 Minimum enclosure sizes

In applications where the softstarter is installed in an enclosure, the following minimum
enclosure sizes and fan capacities are recommended.
Minimum enclosure dimensions

Fan capacity
Softstarter type W H D
mm in mm in mm in m3/h ft3/min
PST30...72 300 12 400 16 250 10 42 25
PST85...300 400 16 500 20 300 12 95 60
PST175...300 500 20 600 24 300 12 210 125
PSTB370...470 600 24 600 24 400 16 210 125
PSTB570...1050 750 30 900 36 400 16 210 125.00
Dimensions and drilling plan: See Chapter 3, “Description”

4

Notes

Chapter 5manual
PST30...PSTB1050 Connection
General ..................................................................................................................5.2
Electrical connection..............................................................................................5.2
Main circuit........................................................................................................5.2
External Bypass contactor................................................................................5.3
Protective earthing............................................................................................5.3
Control voltage and control circuit.....................................................................5.4
Control voltage, terminals 1 and 2............................................................5.4
Grounding, terminal 3...............................................................................5.4
Start and Stop, terminals 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11................................................5.4
Programmable inputs, terminals 6 and 7..................................................5.5
Programmable output relay K4, terminals 12, 13 and 14.........................5.6 5
Programmable output relay K5, terminals 15, 16 and 17.........................5.7
Programmable output relay K6 terminals 18, 19 and 20..........................5.7
PTC input..................................................................................................5.7
Connection of communication devices (optional)...................................................5.8
Fieldbus communication...................................................................................5.8
External keypad................................................................................................5.8
Transferring parameters....................................................................................5.8
Uploading parameters..............................................................................5.8
Technical data...........................................................................................5.9

Chapter 5
Connection
This chapter describes the electrical connections as well as connections for communication
devices (optional) that must be made before the softstarter can be operated.
5:1 General
PST30...
PSTB1050
Caution!
All wiring and connection must be carried out by a qualified electrician, and in
accordance with installation standards and safety regulations.
Figure 1: In Line Connection
See Chapter 2 “ Quickstart”.
5:2 Electrical connection
5:2.1 Main circuit

Softstarters PST30...PSTB1050 can be connected both “In Line”, see Figure 1, and “In-
PST30... side Delta”, see Figure 2.
PSTB1050
5
Connect the line side to terminals 1L1, 3L2, 5L3.
Connect the motor to terminals 2T1, 4T2, 6T3 on the motor side.
The terminal marking is printed on the front label.
For torque requirements and cable sizes, see Figure 5.
Figure 2: Inside Delta connection
5L3
3L2
1L1
Line side
Motor side
20
19
18
K6
17
16
15 1S
14 K5 FA
13 IEC 894 00
100947- 7
Us:
12 Ie:
37-
-25
0V 4-2
11 K4
UL
72A AC
/DC
10 Vp Ue 72:
AC Ma
9 Uc:
100
:
In line
-53a
de
in
8
-25 220
Vp FLA 0V Ov
erlo -23 Sw
: 37- AC 18, 0 380 : 8- ed
7
ad en
Vn CA 68A
/DC Ca
pac 5 1.6:
-40
6 Vc UT
ION Ue ity
115 37
0
5 In1 Fus In line

%
of Co
500
3 4 In0 Ma e 250
x sho A
208 ntin 45 V
Start
TY uou
rt circ 220 s kW
2
PO 20
Stop uit WER -24
1 cur ZIL
ren OX 20
0
440
-48
100-250V
t 65k 0
A at LIS
Hz Ke 50 V INDTED
50/60 y-P
ad Hp . CO7F
NT 39
. EQ
.
PT
C
Wir
e 1-8
Al
Cu
75C
onl
y, 35l
b-in
FIE
LD
BU
S
en
ed
Sw
in
de 39
Ma V 7F .
1.6:500 D . EQ in
kW lb-
TE NT 35
: 8- LIS CO C on
ly, SS
3a0-400 45 IND. 75 BU
C-5 38
LD
Cu FE
: A 30 37
Al
7 V 1-8
4 00 72 22180-2,5 ntinuous 80 Wi
re
89 : Co 44
0-4
FA 4-2 Ue line %
of
40
1S 7- /DC In pacity 115 220-2
C 9450V AC d Ca 20
8
IE: 10 A
0-2
erl
oa
Us Ov C
-72 Ue OX at PT
37
Ie:
/DC R ZIL kA
WE nt 65
V AC
UL100-250
PO rre
TY it cu
0A
: A 25 circu ad
se
Uc
37
-68 Fu x short Key-P
A: Ma
FL
ION
UT
CA
2T1 4T2 6T3

Figure 3: Connection of line side and motor side

Chapter 5
Connection
5:2.1.1 External Bypass contactor

B3
B2
B1 An external by-pass contactor can be used for softstarter sizes PST30...300 (built in for
PSTB370...1050).
Connect the contactor to terminals B1, B2 and B3 on the line side and terminals 2T1, 4T2
and 6T3 on the motor side.
The terminal markings are printed on the front label.
20
19
18
17
K6
16
15
K5
14
13
12
11 K4
10 Vp
9
8 Vp
7 Vn
6 Vc
5 In1
3 4 In0
Start
1 2 Stop
100-250V
Hz
50/60
Information!
Figure 4: External bypass contactor Do not use terminals B1, B2 or B3 for the “Inside Delta” connection. The current
connection measurement will be wrong.
5:2.1.2 Protective earthing

Softstarters type PST85...PSTB1050 should be earthed using the terminals as shown in
Figure 5 (one connection is sufficient).
Warning!
Do not operate machine with the grounding wire disconnected 5
PST 30...72
2
1L1 B1 3L2 B2 5L3 B3 4 mm 1 x 6 ...... 70 mm
2 x 6 ...... 35 mm 2
M8 !WG 1...8
14
1 x 6 ...... 70 mm 22
2 x 6 ...... 35 mm
14
2T1 4T2 6T3 6 Nm - 53 lb.in
PST 85...142
1L1 B1 3L2 B2 5L3 B3
M8
2T1 4T2 6T3 9 Nm - 80 lb.in
PST 175...300
Figure 5: Protective earthing. 1L1 B1 3L2 B2 5L3 B3
M8
2T1 4T2 6T3 18 Nm - 160 lb.in
PSTB 370...470
1L1 3L2 5L3
M10
2T1 4T2 6T3 40 Nm - 354 lb.in
PSTB 570...1050
1L1 3L2 5L3
M12
2T1 4T2 6T3 45 Nm - 443 lb.in
Figure 6: Tightening torques and cable sizes

Chapter 5
Connection
5:2.2 Control voltage and control circuit

N 5:2.2.1 Control voltage, terminals 1 and 2
L Connect the hot and neutral and phase to terminals 1 and 2.
Information!
6
7
8
Vc
Check that you have the correct control voltage Us.
5 In1
3 4 In0
Start
1 2 Stop
V
100-250Hz
50/60
5:2.2.2 Grounding, terminal 3

Figure 7: Control voltage
Connect the cable to a grounding point close to the softstarter. The cable should be as short as possible. A
suitable grounding point would be next to the softstarter on the mounting plate, see Figure 8. The mounting
plate should also be grounded.
Information!
This is not a protective ground, it is a functional ground. The grounding cable should be
as short as possible. Maximum length: 1.5 ft.
5
5:2.2.3 Start and Stop, terminals 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11
7
6
5

In1
3 4p
In0
Start
1 2 Sto
100-250V
Hz
50/60
Internal control voltage

The softstarter has a built-in holding circuit which does not require any external power source for start and
Figure 8: Functional ground stop, See Figure 10.
A conventional circuit with a HOA switch is also possible, see Figure 11.
12
11
10 Vp
9 Vp
8 Vn
7 Vc
6 In1
5
3 4 rt In
0
Sta
1 2 Stop
V
100-250
Hz
50/60
Figure 9: Terminals 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11
Figure 10: Holding circuit (momentary start signal required) Figure 11: Conventional circuit (maintained start signal required)
M3 3,5x0,6
? 0,14 ... 2,5 mm 2
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
AWG 12 ... 22
0,14 ... 2,5 mm2
0,5 Nm - 4,3 lb.in

Chapter 5
Connection
External control voltage

The softstarter can, if required, also be used with an external 24 V DC source from a PLC or similar.
Connect the cables according to Figure 13 or Figure 14 depending on which type of control method is
used.
5
Figure 13: Holding circuit with external control voltage (momentary start signal required) Figure 14: Conventional circuit with external control voltage (maintained start signal is required)
5:2.2.4 Programmable inputs, terminals 6 and 7

The softstarter has two programmable inputs.
In0: default, reset event
In1: default, reset event
See Chapter 7 “ Settings and configuration” for programming.
Connect the cables according to Figure 16 or Figure 17 depending on whether the internal or external
12
source is being used.
11
10 Vp
9 Vp
8 Vn
7 Vc
6 In1
5
3 4 In0
Start
1 2 Stop
V
100-250
50/60Hz
Information!
See next page for multiple motor (sequence) starting
Figure 15: Terminals 6, 7
Figure 16: Internal control voltage Figure 17: External control voltage
M3 3,5x0,6
? 0,14 ... 2,5 mm 2
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
AWG 12 ... 22
0,14 ... 2,5 mm2
0,5 Nm - 4,3 lb.in

Chapter 5
Connection
Programmable Inputs (Sequence start)

When sequence start is going to be used, the wiring should be according to Figure 18 or Figure 19.
The start command (Terminal 5, 6 and 7) must be maintained during th complete starting sequence;
otherwise, a direct stop will be performed.
Soft stop can only be performed for the motor currently fed by the softstarter and will be achieved by
opening the Stop command (Terminal 4).
2nd Start seq.

3rd Start seq.
2nd Start seq.
1st Start seq.

3rd Start seq.
1st Start seq.
Stop
Stop
+
DC
-
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
L N L N
100-250V 100-250V
50/60 Hz Stop Start In0 In1 Vc Vn Vp Vp K4 K5 K6 50/60 Hz Stop Start In0 In1 Vc Vn Vp Vp K4 K5 K6
Figure 18: Internal control voltage Figure 19: External control voltage
5:2.2.5 Programmable output relay K4, terminals 12, 13 and 14

The output relay gives a signal depending on the selected function.
Default: Run
Connect the cables to terminal 12, 13 and 14.
M3 3,5x0,6
? 0,14 ... 2,5 mm 2
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
AWG 12 ... 22
0,14 ... 2,5 mm2
0,5 Nm - 4,3 lb.in
Figure 21: Tightening torques and cable dimensions (1 mm=0,0394 in)

20
19
18
K6
17
16
15
K5
14
13
12
11 K4
10 Vp
9 Vp
8 Vn
7 Vc
6 In1
In0
Figure 20: Terminals 12, 13, 14

Chapter 5
Connection

Default: Top of ramp
20
19
18
K6
17
16
15
K5
14
13
12
11 K4
10 Vp
9 Vp
8 Vn
7 Vc
6 In1
In0

Default: Event
5
20
19
18
17 K6
16
15
K5
14
13
12
11 K4
10 Vp
9 Vp
8 Vn
7 Vc
6 In1
In0
5:2.2.8 PTC input

If the motor is protected by PTC elements, the cables must be connected to terminals PTC, see Figure 24.
1S
FA
894
IE 007
Us: C 94
100
-25 7-4- R1
Ie: 002
AC 2
37- 0V
72A
/DC
UL
Ue: 72
Uc: 508 : AC Ma
100 In de
FLA -25
0V Ove line 220-53a
-23
in
Sw
: 37- AC rloa
d Cap 18, 0 380: 8- ed
en
CA 68A /DC
acit
5 1.6:
-40
UT Ue y 115 0
ION %
37 500
Fus In line of Con
Ma e 250 208 tinu 45 V
x sho A ous
TYP
rt circ 220 kW
OW 20 -24
uit ER 0
cur ZIL 440
ren OX 20 -48
t 65k 0
A at LIS
Ke 50 V INDTED
y-P . CO7F
ad Hp
NT 39
. EQ
.
PT
C
Wir
e 1-8
Al
Cu
75C
onl
y, 35l
b-in
FE
LD
BU
SS
M3 3,5x0,6
? 0,14 ... 2,5 mm 2
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
AWG 12 ... 22
0,14 ... 2,5 mm2
0,5 Nm - 4,3 lb.in
Figure 24: PTC connection

Chapter 5
Connection
5:3 Connection of communication devices (optional)

5:3.1 Fieldbus communication
The fieldbus communication plug must be connected to the communication interface on the front of the PST,
17
18
19
20
K6
see Figure 26. Make sure that the plug is in correct position and tighten the screw with 0.8 Nm (7.1 lb in) and
additional 1/4 turn.
16
15
K5
14
13
12
11 K4
10
9 Vp
8
7 Vp
6 Vn
5
For programming and other information, see Chapter 7 “ Settings and configuration” and Chapter 8 “ Field-
3 4 In1
Vc
1 2 t In0
L N Star
Stop
50V Hz
100-2 C, 50/60
AC/D
bus communication (option)”.
B3
5L3
B2
3L2
den
B1 Swe
1L1 e in 9
Mad V 7F3EQ.
6T3 .6: kW TED T. 35lb
-in
8-1 500 LIS . CON SS
a: 400 45 IND 75C
only,
DBU
4T2 -53380- Cu FEL
: AC230 37 us
Al
7 V 1-8
4 00 72 220-
2T1
tinuo Wire
18,5 480
89 Con 440-
1S
FA -2 Ue:line of
240
7-4 C In acity 115% 220-
94 AC/D Cap 208
IEC100-250V rload
Us: 2A Ove
37-7 Ue X PTC
Ie: at
C R ZILO
65kA
AC/D OWE nt
UL100-250V TYPit curre
250At circu Pad
Uc: 8A
Fuseshor Key-
: 37-6 Max
FLA
ION
UT
CA
Figure 26: Fieldbus plug
Made in Sweden Made in Sweden
Key-Pad PTC Fieldbus Key-Pad PTC Fieldbus
5
Figure 27: Principle of a fieldbus network with PST softstarters connected
5:3.2 External keypad

An external keypad for door mounting can be connected to the softstarter. A 3-meter cable including both the
serial communication and the power supply to the keypad makes the connection.
The external keypad can also be used for transferring parameters from one softstarter to another during
commissioning (temporarily handheld). Note that NEMA 4/4X cannot be achieved when the keypad is not
mounted.
When thee external keypad is used, both keypads will work in parallel but the softstarter keypad always has
the highest priority if the keys on both units are pressed simultaneously.

Figure 28: External keypad
5:3.3 Transferring parameters

16
17
18
19
20
K6
To transfer (copy) parameters from one softstarter to another, connect the keypad to the chosen softstarter and follow the
sequence below.
15
K5
14
13
12
11 K4
10
9 Vp
8
7 Vp
6 Vn
5
3 4 In1
Vc
1 2 In0
L N Start
Stop
V Hz
100-250 50/60
AC/DC,
B2
5L3
B3
5:3.3.1 Uploading parameters
3L2 en
B1 Swed
1L1 in

Made
: V 7F39 .
D . EQ
6T3 kW 35lb-in
8-1.6
0
500
45 LISTECONT only, USS
3a: IND. 75C
Enter the menu Transfer par. Select To Keypad and confirm by pressing Select. A text Load to Keypad will be displayed..
4T2 380-40 Cu FELDB
AC-50 37
V 1-8
Al
2T1 007 72: 220-23
18,5
ous 0 Wire
A 894 Ue: of
Continu 440-48
0
1SF 4-2 In
line
ty 115% 220-24
947-0V
AC/DC
Capaci 208
IEC100-25 ad
Us: Overlo
37-72A Ue PTC
Ie: ZILOX at
ER 65kA
AC/DC
UL100-250V TYPOW current
d
250Acircuit
Uc: Fuseshort Key-Pa
37-68A
FLA: Max
ION
CAUT
Continue by pressing Execute and then Yes when the text Are You Sure is displayed. Transfer OK will now be displayed
Figure 29: Upload
if the transmission was successful. Otherwise, Transfer Not OK will be displayed.

Chapter 5
Connection
5:3.3.2 Downloading parameters

To download the parameters, connect the keypad to the chosen softstarter and select To Starter. A text
Load to Start will be displayed. Continue by pressing Execute and then Yes when the text Are You Sure is
14
15
16
17
K5
18
19
20
K6
displayed. Transfer OK will now be displayed if the transmission was successful; otherwise, Transfer Not OK
will be displayed. Set the parameter Setting le and confirm by pressing Next.
13
12
11 K4
10
9 Vp
8
7 Vp
6 Vn
5
3 4 In1
Vc
1 2 In0
L N Start
Stop
Hz
100-250V50/60
AC/DC,
B3
5L3
B2
3L2 en
B1 Swed
1L1 in
Made
: V 7F39 .
D . EQ
6T3 kW 35lb-in
8-1.6
0
500
LISTECONT only, USS
4T2 3a:
380-40
45
IND. Cu
75C
FELDB
AC-50 37
V 1-8
Al
2T1 007 72: 220-23
18,5
ous 0 Wire
A 894 Ue: of
Continu 440-48
0
1SF 4-2 In
line
ty 115% 220-24
947-0V
AC/DC
d Capaci 208
IEC100-25
Us: Overloa
37-72A Ue PTC
Ie: ZILOX at
ER 65kA
AC/DC
UL100-250V TYPOW current
d
250Acircuit
Uc: Fuseshort Key-Pa
37-68A
FLA: Max
ION
CAUT
Figure 30: Download

Information!
The parameters in the menu Service Settings will not be transferred.
To learn how to operate the keypad, see Chapter 6 “Human-Machine Interface (HMI)”
5:3.3.3 Technical data
Display LCD type

Signal indication LEDs Power on: Green
Protection: Yellow
Fault: Red
Ambient temperature Storage: -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to 158°F)
Operation: 0°C to +50°C (32°F to 122°F)
UL approval Type 1 5
Type 4X Indoor
Type 12
Marine approvals Contact your ABB sales office

Notes

Chapter 6manual
PST30...PSTB1050 Human Machine Interface (HMI)
Overview........................................................................................................ 6.2
Application................................................................................................ 6.2
Design....................................................................................................... 6.2
Password.................................................................................................. 6.3
Setting password................................................................................. 6.3
Wrong password................................................................................. 6.3
Locking/unlocking the keypad................................................................... 6.3
Menu tree....................................................................................................... 6.4
Overview................................................................................................... 6.4
Top level.................................................................................................... 6.4
Settings menu........................................................................................... 6.5
Local Control menu................................................................................... 6.5
Start/Stop the motor............................................................................ 6.6
Jog...................................................................................................... 6.6 6
DOL start............................................................................................. 6.6
Event Log menu........................................................................................ 6.7
Status Information menu........................................................................... 6.7
Reset Events menu................................................................................... 6.7

Chapter 6
Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
This chapter describes how the human-machine interface (keypad and display) works.
1
2
6:1 Overview
6:1.1 Application
The Human-Machine Interface is used for several purposes such as programming the softstarter, i.e setup of
inputs and outputs, protection functions, warning levels, fieldbus communication, etc. The HMI is also used for
3 monitoring, local control and receiving status information from the softstarter.
4 6:1.2 Design
Figure 1: Human-Machine Interface
1 Status indication LEDs The HMI consists of:
2 LCD display • Status indication LED indicators
3 Selection keys • LCD display
4 Navigation keys • Selection and Navigation keys
1 The LED indicators work as follows:

Power on Fault Protection LED Color Description
Power on Green Control voltage connected
Setting Ie 100A Fault Red Indicates faults
Change Back
Protection Yellow Indicates protective function has activated
1 When a Fault or Protection LED is activated, the LCD displays the actual fault or protection.
The keypad is based on the same user concept as today’s mobile phones.
Setting Ie 100A
The LCD contains two rows with 20 characters each.
Store Cancel
The top row presents various information depending on its state. The bottom row indicates which function is
Figure 2: Menu examples currently selected.
6
1 Scrolling icons A scrolling icon indicates what parameter or setting value is possible to change at the position.
The Selection keys normally have more than one function, such as selecting, changing and storing parameters.
U = 0% I = 0.0A See the text on the bottom row of the LCD.
Menu The Navigation keys are used for navigating through the various menus to the desired setting.
Figure 3: Top level When selecting from a list, the scrolling is done in a closed loop fashion.
SETTINGS The functionality of the keypad is illustrated by the following example:

Select Back Changing the rated motor current (Setting Ie).
Figure 4: SETTINGS menu 1. You will find the setting as well as a short explanation and the path to it in Chapter 10 “ Functions”.
Path in menu:
Application Setting
Menu/SETTINGS/Functional Settings/
Select Back Start/Stop /Setting Ie
Figure 5: Application Setting menu
2. The top level of the softstarter start menu looks as in Figure 3. Press the left selection key to enter the menu.
Functional Settings The display now appears as in Figure 4.
Select Back 3. Press the left selection key to select SETTINGS. The display appears as in Figure 5.
Figure 6: Functional settings menu 4. Press the lower navigation key until the display appears as in Figure 6.
Start/Stop 5. Press the left selection key to select Functional settings. Press the left selection key to select Start/Stop,
Figure 7.
Select Back
Figure 7: Start/stop menu
6. Press the left selection key to Change the Setting Ie, Figure 8.
The display now appears as in Figure 9.
Setting Ie 100A 7. Use the navigation keys to set the rated current. If you want to quit, you select Cancel, using the right selec
Change Back tion key. Otherwise, you store the new setting by selecting Store with the left selection key. The display should
Figure 8: Setting Ie menu now appear as in Figure 10.
8. Press the right selection key four times to return to top level.
Setting Ie 100A
Store Cancel
Figure 9: Setting Ie menu, changing menu
Setting Ie 99.5A
Change Back
Figure 10: Setting Ie menu, changing setting

Chapter 6
6:1.3 Password
Change Password To lock the keypad from control and change of settings, a password can be set. When the keypad is locked, all
Select Back menus are available but no changes or actions can be initiated.
Figure 11: Change password
6:1.3.1 Setting password

New Password 1 The default password is always 1.
Store Back 1 Press the upper navigation key once to enter the parameter Change Password.
Figure 12: New password
2 Select Change Password, Figure 11
3 Set the new password (No or 1...255) using the navigation keys.
New Password 1 Select Store and Next, Figure 12 and Figure 13.
Next Select Back to return to top level.
Figure 13: New password stored
6:1.3.2 Wrong password

Wrong Password
If an incorrect password is entered, the text “Wrong Password” will be displayed, Figure 14.
Next
Figure 14: Wrong password A support code will be given, Figure 15. The code can be ignored and an unlimited number of attempts can be
made.
If you are unable to unlock the keypad, note the support code and contact your local ABB sales office.
Support Code 1
Next
Figure 15: Support code
6:1.4 Locking/unlocking the keypad

Keypad is Active
Lock 1 Press the upper navigation key twice to enter the parameter Keypad is Figure 16. The keypad is unlocked if 6
Figure 16: Keypad is menu
the display indicates Active in the upper right corner.
2 Lock the keypad

Keypad is Locked Select Lock.
Unlocked Back Enter the correct password.
Figure 17: Locked keypad menu Select Enter. Keypad is now locked.
Select Back to return to top level.
3 Unlock the keypad.

Select Unlock.
Enter the correct password.
Select Enter. The keypad is now active.
Select Back to return to top level.

Chapter 6
6:2 Menu tree

6:2.1 Overview
The menu tree includes menus for:
• Settings
• Local Control
• Event Log
• Status information
• Reset events
Top level Settings Application setting
Basic settings
Functional settings Start / Stop
Presentation settings Protections
Service settings Warnings
All settings Faults
Changed settings Inputs
Reset all settings Outputs
Operation mode Fieldbus

Local Control Start / Stop Seq. Start
Jog
DOL Start
Event Log
Status Information
Reset Events
6
Figure 18: Menu tree
Top level Settings 6:2.2 Top Level

Top Level contains general softstarter information, and the menus can be reached from
Local Control here.
Use the navigation keys to cycle through the various menus.
Press Select to enter a menu.
Press Back to return to previous state
Event Log
Status Information Menu Description
Reset Events Settings Set up softstarter parameters

Figure 19: Top level Local control Control the softstarter
Present the Event Log, faults, protections,
Event log
warnings
Status Information Present various information
Reset Events Reset of events

Chapter 6
Top level 6:2.3 Settings menu

Settings Application setting The settings menu is used to set up the softstarter parameters for various applications.
Basic settings Use the navigation keys to cycle through the various sub menus.
Functional settings
Function Description
Presentation settings
Application setting Predefined parameters for typical ap-
Service settings
plications
All settings Basic settings The basic and most used start/stop
settings
Changed settings
Functional settings Language, date, time, etc.
Reset all settings
Service settings Service and repair settings
Operation mode
All settings A list with all possible settings
Local Control
Changed settings A list of all changed settings
Reset all settings Reset all settings to factory default
Event Log settings
Status Information Operation mode Test mode for softstarter
Reset Events Figure 20: Settings menu

Figure 20: Settings menu
Top level
Settings
6:2.4 Local Control menu
Local Control Start / Stop The Local Control menu is used to start or stop the motor from the keypad. When local con-
trol is selected, the softstarter can only be controlled by the keypad.
Jog The previous type of control is activated when exiting local control.
Three different selections are possible (see the table below).
6
DOL Start
Event Log Press navigation keys to view different types of local control.
Status Information
Reset Events
Figure 21: Local control menu Information!
The LOCAL CONTROL menu can not be entered if Sequence start is selected.
Once the motor has been started in this menu, it must first be stopped before you leave the
menu. If the motor is already running when the menu is entered, it is possible to leave the
menu without stopping the motor.

Function Description
Start/stop To start and stop the motor with the
keypad
Jog To run the motor as long as Jog is
pressed
DOL start To start and stop the motor with the built-
(PSTB370...PSTB1050 only) in by-pass contactor. (See Chapter 3 for
AC3 ratings.)
Figure 21: Local control menu

Chapter 6
Top level 6:2.4.1 Start/Stop the motor

Settings
Start
Enter the Start/Stop menu, Figure 22.
Local Control Start / Stop Select Start. The motor will now start and run according to the set parameters.
Jog Stop
DOL Start Select Stop. The motor will stop according to the set parameters. It is possible to press the stop
Event Log
command during the start ramp if necessary.
Status Information
Reset Events
Figure 22: Start/Stop menu
Top level 6:2.4.2 Jog

Settings
Enter the Jog menu, Figure 23.
Select Jog. The motor will start and accelerate to rated speed according to the set parameters as
Local Control Start / Stop long as the Jog command is activated.
The motor stops immediately as soon as the command is released.
Jog
DOL Start
Event Log
Status Information
Reset Events
Figure 23: Jog menu
Top level 6:2.4.3 DOL start

Settings
(PSBT370...1050 only)
6 Local Control Start / Stop Start from the softstarter
Jog If necessary, the motor can be started DOL (Direct On Line/across the line) with the integrated by-
pass contactor.
DOL Start
Event Log Select the DOL start menu, Figure 24.
Status Information Select DOL start to close the integrated by-pass contactor.
Reset Events Select Stop to open the contactor.
Figure 24: DOL start menu

! Warning!
The rated motor current must never exceed the AC-3 rating of the integrated by-pass contactor.
See Chapter 3 for AC3 ratings.
100-250V
50/60 Hz
8 8
Figure 25: Connection when the contactor is operated Figure 26: Connection when the by-pass contactor is operated
from the keypad (factory wiring). separately (emergency DOL)

Chapter 6
Top level 6:2.5 Event Log menu

Settings
The Event Log menu is used to check the event log in the softstarter. When entering this menu, the
twenty latest events in the log are presented, in chronological order with the latest event as No. 1,
Local Control the second latest as No. 2 etc.
The events are presented with “type of event”, date and time.
Use the navigation keys to view all entries in the event log.
Event Log
Status Information
Reset Events
Figure 25: Event log menu
Top level 6:2.6 Status Information menu

Settings
The Status information menu is used to present various information.
Use the navigation keys to cycle through the various sub menus.
Local Control If the unit is connected “inside delta”, the displayed phase currents, L1, L2 & L3 are inside delta cur-
rent values.
Event Log Display text Function

Status Information Frequency Measured frequency
Reset Events Phase seq Phase sequence indication

Figure 26: Status information menu Connection Type of connection, In Line/Inside Delta
Phase L1 Phase current L1
6
Run time Total run time of the motor
No. of Starts Run counter
SW Ver. CU Software version CU.
SW Ver. FU Software version FU.
SW Ver KP 1 Software version External Keypad
DB Version Database version
MAC Address Internal addressing
LV Board No Serial No of the LV PCB
1 Only if connected.
Top level 6:2.7 Reset Events menu

Settings
The Reset Events menu is entered automatically when a fault has occurred or a protection is acti-
vated. It can also be entered through the main menu.
Local Control Use the navigation keys to view all events. Each event can be reset.
Event Log
Status Information
Reset Events
Figure 27: Reset events menu

Notes

Chapter 7manual
PST30...PSTB1050 Settings and configuration
Settings................................................................................................................ 7.2
Overview of all accessible settings (different menus)............................. 7.3 - 7.7
Description of menus............................................................................................ 7.8
Top level.......................................................................................................... 7.8
Application Setting................................................................................ 7.9 - 7.10
Basic Settings............................................................................................... 7.10
Functional Settings........................................................................................7.11
Start/Stop.................................................................................................7.11
Protections.................................................................................... 7.12 - 7.13
Warnings................................................................................................. 7.14
Faults............................................................................................ 7.14 - 7.15
Inputs...................................................................................................... 7.16
Outputs.................................................................................................... 7.17
Sequence start.............................................................................. 7.18 - 7.19
Presentation Settings.................................................................................... 7.20 7
Service Settings............................................................................................ 7.21
All Settings.................................................................................................... 7.21
Changed Settings.................................................................................... 7.21
Reset all Settings.................................................................................... 7.22
Operation (test) mode............................................................................. 7.22
Changed settings.................................................................................... 7.23
Reset all settings..................................................................................... 7.23

Chapter 7
Settings and configuration
7:1 Settings
Settings can be done in three different ways:
• Keypad
• Fieldbus communication
• External keypad (optional)
With the keypad, settings can be done as individual parameter settings or by selecting pre-
defined parameters for different applications.
The unit has one complete set of parameters but some parameters have extra settings (i.e.,
sequence start). All default parameters are stored in the unit in case a full reset to default values
is required. When the fieldbus communication is selected, most parameters can also be modified
from this interface.
! Caution!
The motor may start unexpectedly if there is a start signal present when doing any of the actions
listed below:
• Switching from one type of control to another (fieldbus control / hardware control)
• Re-programmming the programmable inuts
• Reset all Settings (programmable input set to Enable).

Chapter 7
7:1.1 Overview of all accessible settings (different menus)

Top Application Basic Functional Presentation All Reset all
Setting/parameter
level setting settings settings settings settings settings
Password X
Keypad lock/unlock X
Reset to factory default setting X
Application type X
Setting le X X X X
Overload class X X X X
External By-pass X X X X
Start ramp Tune Set X X X
Stop ramp Tune Set X X X
Initial voltage Tune Set X X X
End voltage Tune Set X X X
Step down voltage Tune Set X X X
Current limit Tune Set X X X
Kick start X X
Kick level X X
Kick time X X
Start range X X
Stop range X X
Overload protectcion X X
Overload start class X X
Overload run class X X
Overload operation X X
Locked rotor protection X X
Locked rotor protection level X X
Locked rotor protection time X X
Locked rotor protection operation X X
Underload protection X X
7
Underload protection level X X
Underload protection time X X
Underload protection operation X X
Phase imbalance protection X X
Phase imbalance protection level X X
Phase imbalance protection operation X X
High current protection X X
High current protection operation X X
Phase reversal protection X X
Phase reversal protection operation X X
PTC protection X X
PTC protection operation X X
By-pass fault operation X X
Warning high current X X
Warning high current level X X
Warning low current X X
Warning low current level X X
Warning overload X X
Warning overload level X X
Warning thyristor (SCR) overload X X
Phase loss fault operation X X
Fieldbus fault operation X X
Frequency fault operation X X

Chapter 7
7:1.1 Overview of all accessible settings (different menus) cont.

Top Application Basic Functional Presentation All Reset all
Setting/parameter
level setting settings settings settings settings settings
Heat sink over-temperature operation X X
Shorted thyristor (SCR) fault operation X X
Programmable input, In0 X X
Programmable input, In1 X X
Programmable output relay, K4 X X
Programmable software output, V7 X X
Event for relay K4 X X
Event for SW output V7 X X
Fieldbus control X X
Fieldbus type X X
Fieldbus address X X
No. of sequences (sequence start) X X
1st Setting Ie X X
2nd Setting Ie X X
3rd Setting Ie X X
Start ramp 1 X X
Start ramp 2 X X
Start ramp 3 X X
Initial voltage 1 X X
Current limit 1 X X
Current limit 2 X X
7 Current limit 3
Language
X
X
X
X
LCD auto off X X
Date type X X
Date year X X
Date month X X
Date day X X
Time hour X X
Time minutes X X

Chapter 7

Display Setting Default Actual
Description text range value setting
Setting current Setting Ie 9.0...1207A Individual

Time for start ramp Start Ramp 1...30s, 1...120s 10s
Time for stop ramp Stop Ramp 0...30s, 0...120s 0s
Initial voltage for start ramp Init Volt 30...70% 30%
End voltage for stop ramp End Volt 30...70% 30%
Step down voltage Step down 30...100% 100%
Level of the current limit Current Lim 2.0...7.0xle 4.0xle
Selection of kick start Kick Start Yes, No No
Level of kick start Kick Level 50...100% 50%
Time for kick start Kick Time 0.1...1.5s 0.2s
Range for start ramp Start Range 1-30s, 1-120s 1-30s
Range for stop ramp Stop Range 0-30s, 0-120s 0-30s
Overload protection Overload No, Normal, Dual Normal
Overload class OL Class 10A, 10, 20, 30 10
Overload class, Dual type, Start class OL Class S 10A, 10, 20, 30 10
Overload class, Dual type, Run class OL Class R 10A, 10, 20, 30 10
Type of operation for overload protection OL Op Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind Stop-M
Locked rotor protection Locked Rotor Yes, No No
Trip level for locked rotor protection Lock R Lev 0.5...8.0xle 4.0xle
Trip time for locked rotor protection Lock R Time 0.2...10s 1.0s
Type of operation for locked rotor protection Lock R Op Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind Stop-M
Underload protection Underload Yes, No No
Trip level for underload protection Underl Lev 0.4...0.8xle 0.5xle
Trip time for underload protection Underl Time 1...30s 10s
Type of operation for underload protection Underl Op Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind Stop-M
Phase imbalance protection Phase Imb Yes, No No
Trip level for phase imbalance protection Ph Imb Lev 10...80% 80%
7
Type of operation for imbalance protection Ph Imb Op Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind Stop-M
High current protection High I Yes, No No
Type of operation for high current protection High I Op Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind Stop-M
Phase reversal protection Phase Rev Yes, No No
Type of operation for phase reversal protection Ph Rev Op Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind Stop-M
PTC protection PTC Yes, No No
Type of operation for PTC protection PTC Op Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind Stop-M
Use of external by-pass contactor Ext ByPass Yes, No No
Type of operation, by-pass doesn’t open BP Closed Op Stop-M, Stop A Stop-M
Type of operation, by-pass doesn’t close BP Open Op Stop-M, Stop A Stop-M
High current warning Warn I=High Yes, No No
Trip level for high current warning Wa I=H Lev 0.5...5.0xle 1.2xle
Low current warning Warn I=Low Yes, No No
Trip level for low current warning Wa I=L Lev 0.4...1.0xle 0.8xle
Motor overload warning Warn OL Yes, No No
Trip level for motor overload warning Wa OL Lev 40...99% 90%
Thyristor overload warning Warn SCR OL Yes, No No
Type of operation for phase loss fault Ph Loss Op Stop-M, Stop-A Stop-M
Type of operation for fieldbus fault FB Fault Op Stop-M, Stop-A Stop-M
Type of operation for frequency fault Freq F Op Stop-M, Stop-A Stop-M
Type of operation for heatsink overtemp fault HS Temp Op Stop-M, Stop-A Stop-M
Type of operation for shorted thyristor fault SCR SC Op Stop-M, Stop-A Stop-M
None, Reset,
Function of programmable input In0 In0 Enable Jog, DOL, Reset
Start 2, FB-Dis

Chapter 7

Description
text range value setting
None, Reset,
Function of programmable input In1 In1 Enable Jog, DOL, Reset
Start 3, FB-Dis
Function of programmable output relay K4 Relay K4 Run, TOR, Event Run
Function of programmable output relay K5 Relay K5 Run, TOR, Event TOR
Function of programmable output relay K6 Relay K6 Run, TOR, Event Event
Function of programmable software relay V7 SW Outp V7 Run, TOR, Event Event
Overload event of relay K4 K4 Overload Yes, No No
Fault event of relay K4 K4 Fault Yes, No No
Shunt fault of relay K4 K4 Shunt Fault Yes, No No
High current event of relay K4 K4 High I Yes, No No
Thyristor overload event of relay K4 K4 SCR OL Yes, No No
Locked rotor event of relay K4 K4 Lock Rot Yes, No No
Underload event of relay K4 K4 Underload Yes, No No
Phase imbalance event of relay K4 K4 Phase Imb Yes, No No
PTC event of relay K4 K4 PTC Yes, No No
Phase reversal event of relay K4 K4 Phase Rev Yes, No No
Warning motor overload event of relay K4 K4 Warn OL Yes, No No
Warning thyristor overload event of relay K4 K4 Wa SCR OL Yes, No No
Warning high current event of relay K4 K4 Wa I=High Yes, No No
Warning low current event of relay K4 K4 Wa I=Low Yes, No No
Overload event of relay K5 K5 Overload Yes, No No
Fault event of relay K5 K5 Fault Yes, No No
Shunt fault of relay K5 K5 Shunt Fault Yes, No No
High current event of relay K5 K5 High I Yes, No No
7
Overload event of relay K6 K6 Overload Yes, No Yes
Fault event of relay K6 K6 Fault Yes, No Yes
Shunt fault of relay K6 K6 Shunt Fault Yes, No Yes
High current event of relay K6 K6 High I Yes, No Yes
Overload event of relay V7 V7 Overload Yes, No Yes
Fault event of relay V7 V7 Fault Yes, No Yes
High current event of relay V7 V7 High I Yes, No Yes
Thyristor overload event of relay V7 V7 SCR OL Yes, No No
Locked rotor event of relay V7 V7 Lock Rot Yes, No No
Underload event of relay v7 V7 Underload Yes, No No
Phase imbalance event of relay V7 V7 Phase Imb Yes, No No

Chapter 7

Description
text range value setting
PTC event of relay V7 V7 PTC Yes, No No
Phase reversal event of relay V7 V7 Phase Rev Yes, No No
Warning motor overload event of relay V7 V7 Warn OL Yes, No No
Warning thyristor overload event of relay V7 V7 Wa SCR OL Yes, No No
Warning high current event of relay V7 V7 Wa I=High Yes, No No
Warning low current event of relay V7 V7 Wa I=Low Yes, No No
Control of the softstarter with the fieldbus Fieldb Ctrl Yes, No No
Type of fieldbus protocol used Fieldb Type AS-Int, Other Other
Fieldbus address Fieldb Addr 0...1000 0
Number of sequences for sequence start No of Seq No, 2, 3 No
1st sequence, time for start ramp Start Ramp 1 1...30s, 1...120s 10s
1st sequence, initial voltage for start ramp Init Volt 1 30...70% 30%
1st sequence, current limit level Curr Lim 1 2.0...7.0xle 4.0xle
1st sequence, setting current 1st Set le 9.0...1207A Individual
2nd sequence, time for start ramp Start Ramp 2 1...30s, 1...120s 10s
2nd sequence, initial voltage for start ramp Init Volt 2 30...70% 30%
2nd sequence, current limit level Curr Lim 2 2.0...7.0xle 4.0xle
2nd sequence, setting current 2st Set le 9.0...1207A Individual
3rd sequence, time for start ramp Start Ramp 3 1...30s, 1...120s 10s
3rd sequence, initial voltage for start ramp Init Volt 3 30...70% 30%
3rd sequence, current limit level Curr Lim 3 2.0...7.0xle 4.0xle
3rd sequence, setting current 3st Set le 9.0...1207A Individual
US/UK, FI, SE, PT,
Language to use on the display Language NL, IT, FR, ES, DE, Indiividual
CN, RU, TR
Time for display automatic turn off LCD Auto Off 1...255min 15min
Type of date presentation Date Type ISO, CE, US ISO
Year Date Year 2001...2060 Individual
Month Date Month 1...12 Individual
Day Date Day 1...31 Individual 7
Hour Time Hour 0...23 Individual
Minutes Time Min 0...59 Individual

Chapter 7
U=†††0% †I=0.0A
7:2 Description of menus
Menu For detailed description of each function, see Chapter 10 “ Functions” .
Change Password Uin † OK
Select Back Back 7:2.1 Top level
Keypad is Active Motor Temp 0% This level contains information about output voltage, current, heat sink temperature, real time clock
Lock Back Back and more. From this menu, the keypad can be locked/unlocked and a password can be set. It is
also possible to enter all top level menus.
2003-01-30 11:08 SCR Temp 60%
Back Back
In=0000 Out = 0000

Back
Figure 1: Top level display loop
Display at start up
5 )!
When switching on the control voltage, the LCD will first display the text “Hello”, and after a few
-ENU seconds switch to the Top Level start position, Figure 2.
Figure 2: Top level (start position)
2003-02-05 10:33 Real time clock

The real time clock displays the present date and time. To set date, time and display types, see
Back “Presentation Settings.”
Figure 3: Real time clock
Uin status
Uin OK
The softstarter checks and displays the status of the input voltage (line side).
Back

Figure 4: Uin status

Motor temperature
Motor Temp 0%
The consumed thermal capacity of the motor is displayed. 0% means that the motor is in cold state.
Back 50% means that half the capacity is consumed, etc.
Figure 5: Motor temperature
7
In = 0000 Out = 0000 Status of inputs/outputs
Back The status of the Programmable inputs and outputs is displayed with “0” for not activated or “1” for
Figure 6: Input/outputs activated. The figures have the following functions:
In=0100 Start signal high
In=1000 Stop signal high
In=0010 In0 high
In=0001 In1 high
Out=1000 Relay K4 activated
Out=0001 SW V7 activated
SCR Temp 60% SCR Temperature

Back The temperature of the SCRs in the softstarter is displayed as a percentage of the maximum value.
Figure 7: SCR temperature

Keypad is Active Keypad status

Back Information on whether the keypad is locked or unlocked. How to operate, see Chapter 6 “Human-
Figure 8: Keypad status Machine Interface (HMI)”.
Change Password Change Password

Select Back Menu for changing the password, How to operate, see Chapter 6 “Human-Machine Interface (HMI)”.
Figure 9: Change Password

Chapter 7
7:2.2 Application Setting

Top level
Settings Application setting The Application setting menu consists of predefined parameters for the selected applica-
tion and should be used if an easy and quick set-up is required. Only a few parameters
Basic settings need to be set to allow the start of the motor. All necessary input data will show up in an
Functional settings automatic loop.
Presentation settings Enter the Application setting
Service settings Enter the menu by selecting Application Setting.
All settings Select what type of application the softstarter is used for by pressing Store Set. If the
desired application is not listed, select the one closest to the application and choose Tune
Changed settings Set (see below). Possible applications are:
Reset all settings
• Centrifugal Pump
Operation mode • Hydraulic Pump
Figure 10: Application setting menu • Centrifugal Fan
• Axial Fan
• Compressor
• Conveyor
Application Setting • Crusher
Select • Mixer
Figure 11: Application setting menu • Bow Thruster
Confirm the selected application by pressing Next. If the wrong application type was
Centrifugal Pump selected, press Back and select the correct type.
Store Set Back
Figure 12: Application type

Centrifugal Pump
Next Back
Figure 13: Confirming application type
Setting Ie 100A
Store
Figure 14: Setting Ie menu
Setting Ie (motor FLA) 7
Setting Ie 100A
Set the motor full load current (i.e. rated motor current if the unit is connected In Line).
Next Back For units connected Inside Delta, the Setting Ie must be set according to the current in the
Figure 15: Confirming Setting Ie
delta circuit = 58% (1/( 3)) of the rated motor current.
Press Store to save the data after setting the current.
OL Class 10 Confirm the Setting Ie by pressing Next. If the wrong value is set, press Back and set the
Store correct value.
Figure 16: Overload class
Overload class (OL Class)
Select the desired overload class. Available classes:
OL Class 10 • 10A
Next Back • 10
Figure 17: Confirming OL Class • 20
• 30
Ext ByPass Yes Press Store to save the selected class.
Store Confirm the selected overload class by pressing Next. If the wrong overload class was
Figure 18: External By-Pass selected, press Back and select the correct class.
External By-Pass contactor (Ext ByPass)

Ext ByPass Yes If an External Bypass contactor is used, set the parameter to Yes, otherwise select No.
Next Back Press Store to save the data.
Figure 19: Confirming External By-Pass
Confirm the selection of external by-pass by pressing Next. If the wrong selection was
Ready? made, press Back and correct the selection.
Yes Tune Set Tune Set
Figure 20: Ready?/Tune Set menu
The configuration of the application setting menu is now complete. If no tuning of the set-
tings is desired, it is possible to return to the top level by pressing Yes.
If tuning some parameters is desired, select Tune Set.

Chapter 7
Tuning parameters
Ready? Six parameters can be tuned individually if a more specific adjustment is required. Each
Yes Back parameter is described in Chapter 10 “ Functions” .
Figure 21: All tuning parameters have been passed • Start ramp
• Stop ramp
• Initial voltage
• End voltage
• Current limit level
When all tuning parameters have been cycled through, the following information will be
displayed, Figure 21. Select Yes if all necessary parameters are tuned. If a new tuning is
required, select Back and follow the step Tune Set above
Top level
Settings Application setting
7:2.3 Basic Settings
Basic settings The Basic settings menu consists of the most common start/stop parameters required for
the set-up. Each parameter can be adjusted separately. For a detailed description of each
Functional settings
parameter, see Chapter 10 “ Functions” .
Presentation settings Enter the Basic settings
Service settings Enter the menu by selecting Basic Settings.
All settings Setting Ie (motor FLA)
Set the current that the softstarter will be exposed to (i.e. rated motor current, if the unit is
Changed settings connected In Line).
Reset all settings
Operation mode
Figure 22: Basic Settings menu
Information!
For units connected Inside Delta the Setting Ie must be set according to the current in the
delta circuit = 58% (1/( 3)) of the rated motor current. Press Store to save the data after
setting the current
External By-Pass contactor (Ext ByPass)

Set the parameter to Yes if an External By-pass Contactor is used, otherwise select No.
7 Start ramp
Set the ramp time for start.

Stop ramp
Set the ramp time for stop (softstop). Note that this function should only be used for
applications with small flywheel masses, for example pumps and conveyors (minimizes
product damage during the stop).
Initial voltage (Init Volt)

Set the initial voltage level.
End voltage (End Volt)

Set the end voltage level.

Step down
Set the level of the step down voltage. This function is only present if softstop is selected.

Current limit (Current Lim)
Set the current limit level for the start.

Overload Class (OL Class)
Select the desired overload class.
The configuration of the basic setting menu is now completed. It is possible to return to
the top level by pressing Back 3 times.

Chapter 7
7:2.4 Functional Settings

Top level The Functional setting menu consists of groups with parameters arranged by function
Settings Application setting such as protection, warning, fault, fieldbus communication etc. This menu should be
Basic settings used if a more advanced set-up is required. For a detailed description of each param-
eter, see Chapter 10 “ Functions” .
Functional settings
Enter the Functional settings
Presentation settings Enter the menu by selecting Functional Settings.
Service settings

All settings
Changed settings
Reset all settings

Operation mode
Figure 23: Functional Settings menu
7:2.4.1 Start/Stop
Settings To set parameters related to start and stop, enter the Start/Stop group. The following
Functional settings Start / Stop parameters are available in this group:
Protections • Setting Ie
• External By-Pass
Warnings • Start ramp
• Stop ramp
Faults
• Initial voltage
Inputs • End voltage
Outputs
• Current limit level
Fieldbus • Kick start
• Kick level
Seq. Start • Kick time
Figure 24: Start/Stop group
• Start range
• Stop range
To set parameters from Setting Ie to Current limit level, see “Basic Settings”.
Kick Start 7
Activate the Kick Start function by entering this menu. Press Store to save the
selection.

Kick Level
Set the required level of the Kick Start. Press Store to save the data.
This menu will only be visible if Kick Start is activated.

Kick Time
Set the required time for the kick start. Press Store to save the data.
This menu will only be visible if Kick Start is activated.

Start Range
The ramp time for start can be set between 1 and 30 seconds as default. If required,
the range can be extended up to 120 seconds by entering this menu. Press Store to
save the data.

Stop Range
The ramp time for stop can be set between 0 and 30 seconds as default. If required,
the range can be extended up to 120 seconds by entering this menu. Press Store to
save the data.
The configuration of the parameters in the Start/Stop group is now completed. It is pos-
sible to return to top level by pressing Back three times. To configure the protections,
proceed to that menu.

Chapter 7
7:2.4.2 Protections
Settings
Functional settings Start / Stop To set parameters related to the protections, enter the Protections group.
Protections Overload
Select the required overload type for the application. The following selections are available:
Warnings • No
• Normal
Faults
• Dual
Inputs Press Store to save the selected type.
Outputs If overload “Normal” is selected, the following settings will be available:
Fieldbus
Overload class (OL Class)
Select the overload class. Following classes are available:
Seq. Start • 10A
Figure 25: Protections group • 10
• 20
• 30
Press Store to save the selected class.
Overload type of operation (OL Op)

Select what operation should be initiated if the overload relay is activated:
Stop–M The motor will stop and a manual reset is required.
Stop–A The motor will stop and an automatic reset is performed.
Ind Only indication will be given.
Press Store to save the selected operation.
If overload “Dual” is selected, the following settings will be available:

Overload start class (OL Class S)
Select the required overload class during start condition. The following overload classes
are available:
• 10A
• 10
• 20
• 30
7

Overload run class (OL Class R)
Select the required overload class during continuous run. The following overload classes
are available:
• 10A
• 10
• 20
• 30
Locked Rotor
Activate the protection if required by changing to Yes.
If “Yes” is selected, the following settings will be available:
Locked rotor level (Lock R Lev)
Set the level of the locked rotor protection.
Available only if the protection is selected.
Locked rotor time (Lock R Time)
Set the time for the locked rotor protection.
Locked rotor type of operation (Lock R Op)
Select what operation should be initiated if the locked rotor protection is activated:

Chapter 7
Underload
Underload level (Underl Lev)
Set the level of the underload protection.
Underload time (Underl Time)
Set the time for the underload protection.
Underload type of operation (Underl Op)
Select what operation should be initiated if the underload protection is activated:
Phase imbalance (Phase Imb)
Phase imbalance level (Ph Imb Lev)
Set the level of the phase imbalance protection.
Phase imbalance type of operation (Ph Imb Op)
Select what operation should be initiated if the phase imbalance protection is activated:
High current (High I)
Activate the high current protection if required by changing to Yes.
If “Yes” is selected, the following setting will be available:
High current type of operation (High I Op)
Select what operation should be initiated if the high current protection is activated: 7
Stop–A The motor will stop and automatic reset is performed.
Phase reversal (Phase Rev)
Activate the phase reversal protection if required by changing to Yes. If “Yes” is selected,
the following setting will be available:
Phase reversal type of operation (Ph Rev Op)
Select what operation should be initiated if the phase reversal protection is activated:
PTC
Activate the PTC protection if required by changing to Yes.
If “Yes” is selected, the following setting will be available:
PTC type of operation (PTC Op)
Select what operation should be initiated if the PTC protection is activated:

Chapter 7
Settings
7:2.4.3 Warnings
Functional settings Start / Stop To set parameters related to the warnings, enter the Warnings group:
Protections Warning high current (Warn I=High)
Activate the warning function if required by changing to Yes.
Warnings Press Store to save the selected operation
Faults

Warning high current level (Wa I=H Lev)
Inputs Set the level of the high current warning.
Available only if the function is selected.
Outputs
Fieldbus
Warning low current (Warn I=Low)
Seq. Start Activate the warning function if required by changing to Yes.
Figure 26: Warnings group Press Store to save the selected operation.

Warning low current level (Wa I=L Lev)
Set the level of the low current warning.

Warning overload (Warn OL)
Activate the warning function if required by changing to Yes.

Warning overload level (Wa OL Lev)
Set the level of the overload warning.

Settings Warning SCR overload (Warn SCR OL)
Functional settings Start / Stop Activate the warning function if required by changing to Yes.
Protections

Warnings 7:2.4.4 Faults
Phase loss type of operation (Ph Loss Op)
7
Faults
Select what operation should be initiated if a phase loss fault occurs:
Inputs Stop–M The motor will stop and a manual reset is required.
Outputs Stop–A The motor will stop and an automatic reset is performed.
Fieldbus

Seq. Start Fieldbus fault type of operation (FB Fault Op)
Figure 27: Faults group Select what operation should be initiated if a fieldbus communication fault occurs:

Chapter 7
Frequency fault type of operation (Freq F Op)

Select what operation should be initiated if the frequency fault occurs (out of range):
Heat sink type of operation (HS Temp Op)

Select what operation should be initiated if an over-temperature occurs:
Shorted SCR type of operation (SCR SC Op)

Select what operation should be initiated if a fault occurs with shorted thyristor:
By-pass doesn’t open operation

Select what operation should be asserted if the contactor does not open:
By-pass doesn’t close operation (BP Open Op)

Select what operation should be asserted if the contactor does not close:
Fault Connection, Fault Open SCR, Fault Line Side and Fault Intern
Selected operation for the faults listed above is always:
7

Chapter 7
7:2.4.5 Inputs
Settings
Functional settings Start / Stop To set parameters related to the programmable inputs, enter the Inputs group.
Protections First programmable input (In0)

Select the required function for the input In0.
Warnings
Press Store to save/activate the selected function.
Faults One of the following functions can be selected:
None No specific function (not activated).
Inputs
Reset Reset of a fault or overload condition.
Outputs
Enable When In0=0 the softstarter stops immediately.
Fieldbus When In0=1 the softstarter is in normal operation.
Overrides all other inputs except local control.
Seq. Start
Jog Performs a start ramp until command is released. The motor stops
Figure 28: Inputs group
immediately when the input is opened.
DOL Open/close the bypass contactor (PSTB370...PSTB1050) only if setting
Ie is equal to or lower than AC-3 rating.
Start2 Start signal for 2nd parameter set-up.
FB-Dis Disable the fieldbus communication. The softstarter can be controlled
by hard wire inputs instead.

! Caution!
The motor may start unexpectedly if there is a start signal present when doing any of the
actions listed below:
• Switching from one type of controol to another (fieldbus control/hardwire control)
• Re-programming the programmable inputs.
• Reset all Settings (programmable input set to Enable)
Second programmable input (In1)

Select the required function for the input In1.
One of the following functions can be selected:
7 None No specific function (not activated).
Reset Reset an event.
Enable When the In1=0 the softstarter stops immediately.
When In1=1 the softstarter is in normal operation.
Overrides all other inputs except local control.
Jog Performs a start ramp until command is released.
The motor stops immediately when the input opens.
DOL Open/close the bypass contactor (PSTB370...PSTB1050) only if setting Ie is
equal to or lower than AC-3 rating.
Start3 Start signal for 3rd parameter set-up.
FB-Dis Disable the fieldbus communication. The softstarter can be controlled by
hard-wire inputs instead.

! Caution!

Chapter 7
7:2.4.6 Outputs
Settings
Functional settings Start / Stop To set parameters related to the programmable outputs, enter the Outputs group.
Relay K4
Protections
Select the required function for output relay K4.
Warnings One of the following functions can be selected:
Faults
Run Run indication.
TOR Top of ramp indication.
Inputs Event Indication of selected event(s) . The following events can be selected individually:
Outputs • Motor overload protection • Shunt fault
• Fault • Low current warning
Fieldbus
• High current protection • High current warning
Seq. Start • SCR overload protection • SCR overload warning
Figure 29: Outputs group • Locked rotor protection • Overload warning
• Underload protection • Phase reversal protection
• Phase imbalance protection • PTC protection
Relay K5
Run Run indication.
Event Indication of selected event(s), see relay K4.
Relay K6
Run Run indication.
SW Outp V7
Select the required function for the fieldbus communication output SW Outp V7.
One of the following functions can be selected: 7
Run Run indication.
Settings
Fieldbus
Functional settings Start / Stop To set parameters related to the fieldbus communication, enter the Fieldbus group.
Fieldbus control (Fieldb Ctrl)
Protections
Activate the fieldbus control by changing to Yes.
Warnings Press Store to save the selected function.
Faults Fieldbus type (Fieldb Type)
Select what fieldbus type is used.
Inputs AS-Interface Used for AS-I protocol.
Other Used for protocols other than AS-I (i.e., DeviceNet, Profibus DP, Modbus).
Outputs
Fieldbus Fieldbus address (Fieldb Addr)
Seq. Start Set a unique address number between 1 and 1000 for fieldbus communication.
Figure 30: Fieldbus group
Press Store to save the selected function.

! Caution!

Chapter 7
7:2.4.8 Sequence start

Settings
Functional settings Start / Stop The sequence start function can be used for starting several motors or multiple speed mo-
tors with different parameter sets such as individual ramp times, initial voltages, current
Protections limits etc.
Up to three individual parameter sets can be used simultaneously.
Warnings
Faults
Inputs
Information!
Outputs The LOCAL CONTROL menu can not be entered if Sequence start is selected.
Fieldbus Number of sequences (No of Seq)
Seq. Start To set parameters related to a sequence start, enter the Seq Start group.
Select the required number of parameter sets for the application.
Figure 31: Sequence start group
The following selections are available:
No Sequence start is not activated.
The softstarter is in normal operation.
2 Two different parameter sets will be used.
3 Three different parameter sets will be used.
First sequence setting current (1st Set Ie)
Set the current for the first parameter group and press Store to save the value.
This parameter will only be displayed if parameter
No of Seq is set to 2 or 3.
Second sequence setting current (2nd Set Ie)
Set the current for the second parameter group.
Press Store to save the value.
No of Seq is set to 2 or 3.
Information!
If sequence start was used and the parameter No of Seq is changed to No, the overload
7 protection will automatically be set to Normal regardless of previous settings.
Third sequence setting current (3rd Set Ie)
Set the current for the third parameter group.
Press Store to save the value.
No of Seq is set to 3.
Function of first programmable input (In0)
This parameter will automatically be set as Start2.
Function of second programmable input (In1)
This parameter will automatically be set as Start3.
Overload
The overload protection is not activated when sequence start is selected.
To activate the motor overload protection, enter this group and change to the required
function.
Information!
The overload protection should not be used when starting several motors since the total
starting time will become too long and the protection will trip.Normally the overload should
be turned off and each motor should have separate overload protection.

Chapter 7
First sequence parameters (1st Seq .Param.)

To set parameters related to the first sequence, enter the 1st Seq. Param. group.
Following parameters can be adjusted:
1st Set Ie Setting current.
Start Ramp1 Ramp time for start.
Init Volt1 Initial voltage.
Curr Lim1 Current limit level.
Press Store to save the selected parameter.
Second sequence parameters (2nd Seq .Param.)

To set parameters related to the second sequence, enter the 2nd Seq. Param. group.
The following parameters can be adjusted:
2nd Set Ie Setting current.
Curr Lim2 Current limit.
Third sequence parameters (3rd Seq .Param.)
To set parameters related to the third sequence, enter the 3rd Seq. Param. group.
The following parameters can be adjusted:
3rd Set Ie Setting current.
Curr Lim3 Current limit.
Information!
For wiring and operation of the start/stop signals, see Chapter 5, “Connection” under
programmable inputs.

Chapter 7
7:2.5 Presentation Settings

Top level
Settings Application setting The Presentation setting menu consists of parameters for the LCD set-up. The presenta-
tion language can be chosen among 12 different languages. The real-time clock for the
Basic settings softstarter can be set in this menu.
Functional settings Enter the Presentation settings
Enter the menu by selecting Presentation Set.
Presentation language
Service settings To set the desired presentation language on the LCD, press Change and Store the
selected language. Country codes are based on ISO 3166.
All settings
Available languages are:
Changed settings
Language Abbreviation in LCD Language Abbreviation in LCD
Reset all settings English US/UK Italian IT
Operation mode Chinese CN Dutch NL
Figure 32: Presentation Settings menu German DE Portuguese PT
Spanish ES Swedish SE
French FR Finnish FI
Russian RU Turkish TR
Information!
In case the wrong language is selected, follow the “emergency instructions” below to
reach this parameter. (Start from the top level.)
Press left selection key twice.
Press lower navgation key three times.
Press left selection key twice.
Use the navigation keys to find the required language abbeviation.
Press left selection key to save the parameter.
LCD Auto Off
The LCD will be switched off automatically by a pre-set time between 1 - 255 minutes. If
the display has switched off, touch any of the keys to turn it on again.
Date Type
7 The date can be presented in three different ways. Depending on the selected type, the
following will be displayed at the top level:
Date type Display on the LCD
ISO Year - Month - Day
US Month - Day - Year
CE Day - Month - Year
Date Year
To set the year in the real time clock, press Change to enter the setting level. Press Store
to save the set value.
Date Month
To set the month in the real time clock, press Change to enter the setting level. Press
Store to save the set value.
Date Day
To set the day in the real time clock, press Change to enter the setting level. Press Store
to save the set value.
Time Hour
To set the hours in the real time clock, press Change to enter the setting level. Press
Time Min
To set the minutes in the real time clock, press Change to enter the setting level. Press
The configuration of the presentation setting menu is now completed. It is possible to
return to the top level by pressing Back 3 times.

Chapter 7
7:2.6 Service Settings

Top level
Settings The service setting menu consists of parameters used for maintenance and repair. This
Application setting
menu should only be used by authorized service personnel.
Basic settings
Functional settings
Service settings

! Warning!
If parameters are changed, the softstarter can be damaged or malfunction. The
All settings warranty will be void if these parameters are changed without factory authoriza-
tion.
Changed settings
Reset all settings
Operation mode
Figure 33: Service Settings menu
(for authorized personnel only)
Top level 7:2.7 All Settings

Settings Application setting The All setting menu consists of all the available settings. Each parameter can be
Basic settings adjusted separately within this menu. For a detailed description of each parameter, see
Chapter 10 “ Functions” .
Functional settings Enter the All settings
Presentation settings Enter the menu by selecting All Settings.
Service settings
All settings
Changed settings
Reset all settings
Operation mode
Figure 34: All Settings menu 7

Top level 7:2.7.1 Changed Settings
Settings Application setting The Changed settings menu consists of the parameters that have been changed in
contrast to the factory default setting. If no parameters have been changed, the LCD will
Basic settings display No Changed Settings.
Functional settings
Service settings
All settings
Changed settings
Reset all settings
Operation mode
Figure 35: Changed Settings menu

Chapter 7
7:2.7.2 Reset All Settings

Top level To reset all the changed parameters back to factory default settings, enter this menu.
Settings Application setting
Confirmation of reset will be displayed as Done on the LCD. The supply voltage should
Basic settings also be disconnected and reconnected.
Functional settings The real time clock, the hour run meter, the number of starts and the presentation lan-
guage will not be affected by the reset.
Service settings
All settings
Changed settings

! Caution!
The motor may start unexpectedly if there is a start signal present when doing any
Reset all settings
of the actions listed below.
Operation mode • Switching from one type of control to another (fieldbus control / hardwire control)
Figure 36: Reset all Settings menu • Re-programming the programmable inputs
Top level 7:2.7.3 Operation (test) mode

Settings Application setting The Operation mode makes it possible to switch between two different modes in the
softstarter: a demo mode and the regular operation mode. By entering the demo mode,
Basic settings programmable inputs/outputs, start and stop circuits, by-pass contactor etc. can be
Functional settings tested before the unit is put into operation. As long as the unit is in demo mode, the color
on the display is inverted (except on the external keypad).
!
Service settings
All settings
Caution!
Changed settings Never enter the demo mode with the main voltage connected. The by-pass contactor will
close at TOR and may start the motor.
Reset all settings
7
Operation mode
Figure 37: Reset all Settings menu
Information!
Operation Mode The total run time of the motor and the total number of starts will be counted also
Select Back during demo mode. When exiting demo mode, these values will be reset to previous
Figure 38: Display appearance in normal mode values. Parameters changed and the Event Log will be kept when exiting demo mode.
Operation Mode
Select Back
Figure 39: Display appearance in demo mode

Chapter 7
Top level 7:2.7.1 Changed Settings

Settings Application setting The Changed settings menu consists of all parameters that have been changed from
the factory default setting.
Basic settings
If no parameters have been changed, the LCD will display No Changed Settings.
Functional settings
Service settings

All settings
Changed settings
Reset all settings

Figure 40: Changed Settings menu
Top level 7:2.7.2 Reset all Settings

Settings Application setting To reset all the changed parameters back to factory default setting, enter this menu.
Basic settings Confirmation of reset will be displayed as Done on the LCD.
The real time clock, the hour run meter, and the total number of starts will not be af-
Functional settings fected by the reset.
Service settings
All settings
Changed settings
Reset all settings

Figure 41: Reset all Settings menu

Notes

Chapter 8manual
PST30...PSTB1050 Fieldbus communication (option)
Overview................................................................................................................. 8.2
Required accessories........................................................................................ 8.2
Instructions......................................................................................................... 8.2

Chapter 8
Fieldbus communication (option)
8:1 Overview
The PST softstarter has an interface on the front for connecting the ABB fieldbus plug is
used for fieldbus communication. Through this interface, it is possible to control the soft-
starter, achieve status information, as well as upload and down-load parameters.
The interface between the softstarter and the eplug is always the same. Independent of
softstarter size, it is possible to connect any fieldbus protocol in the future since the protocol
is defined in the eplug itself.
The following fieldbus protocols are available:
• AS-Interface
• DeviceNet
• Profibus DP
• Modbus
8:1.1 Required accessories

To connect the softstarter to a fieldbus system, the following accessories are required:
• Fieldbusplug for appropriate protocol (check that the cable length is sufficient).
• Connectors for bus connection.
• End plug (some protocols).
• Software for PLC set-up.
8:1.2 Instructions
Made in Sweden Made in Sweden
To set up I/O, parameters, etc., please visit www.abb-control.com, go to the Literature
Key-Pad PTC Fieldbus Key-Pad PTC Fieldbus
Library, select “3. Technical Manual Download Library” and scroll down the page to
locate the Softstarter technical literature library. Engineering document packages can be
downloaded for all available protocols.
Figure 1: Principle of a fieldbus network with PST softstarters connected

Chapter 9manual
PST30...PSTB1050 Maintenance
Regular maintenance....................................................................................... 9.2

Service and repair............................................................................................ 9.2

Chapter 9
Maintenance
This chapter describes the maintenance required for the softstarter. In principle, the product is
maintenance free but some items should be checked regularly.
Caution!
Do not open the softstarter or touch any live parts when the main and control voltage
is connected.
9:1 Regular maintenance

• Check that all mounting bolts/screws are fastened. Tighten if necessary.
• Check that all connections of main, control and supply circuits are fastened.
• Tighten the terminal screws and bolts on the connection bars, if necessary.
• Check that the cooling airways are free from dirt and dust. If required, use pressurised air to clean.
• Check external filters. Clean, if necessary.
• Check that the fan is working and rotating freely. The blades should rotate without any resistance and
this can be checked at voltage free state.
• Check the real time clock and adjust if necessary.
In case of a fault or if a fault can not be reset, see Chapter 11, “ Trouble shooting”.
9:2 Service and repair

A spare parts list and all necessary instruction for softstarter repair can be found at www.abb-control.com
Information!
Service and repair should be performed by authorized personnel only. Unauthorized repair may affect
warranty.

Chapter 10
PST30...PSTB1050 Functions
Setting Current....................................................................................................10.3
Start Ramp..........................................................................................................10.3
Stop Ramp..........................................................................................................10.3
Initial voltage.......................................................................................................10.4
End voltage.........................................................................................................10.4
Step down voltage...............................................................................................10.4
Current limit.........................................................................................................10.4
Kick Start.............................................................................................................10.5
Kick Start Level...................................................................................................10.5
Kick Start Time....................................................................................................10.5
Start ramp range.................................................................................................10.5
Stop ramp range..................................................................................................10.5
Motor overload protection....................................................................................10.6
Overload class.....................................................................................................10.6
Overload class, dual type, start class..................................................................10.6
Overload class, dual type, run class....................................................................10.6
Overload protection, type of operation................................................................10.7
Locked rotor protection........................................................................................10.7
Locked rotor protection, trip level........................................................................10.7
Locked rotor protection time................................................................................10.7
Locked rotor protection, type of operation...........................................................10.7
Underload protection...........................................................................................10.8
Underload protection level...................................................................................10.8
Underload protection time...................................................................................10.8
Underload protection, type of operation..............................................................10.8
Phase imbalance protection................................................................................10.8
Phase imbalance protection level........................................................................10.9
Phase imbalance protection, type of operation...................................................10.9
10
High current protection........................................................................................10.9
High current protection, type of operation...........................................................10.9
Phase reversal protection....................................................................................10.9
Phase reversal protection, type of operation.....................................................10.10
PTC protection..................................................................................................10.10
PTC protection, type of operation......................................................................10.10
External By-Pass...............................................................................................10.10
High current warning.........................................................................................10.10
High current warning level................................................................................. 10.11
Low current warning.......................................................................................... 10.11
Low current warning level.................................................................................. 10.11
Overload warning.............................................................................................. 10.11
Overload warning level...................................................................................... 10.11
SCR overload warning...................................................................................... 10.11
Phase loss fault, type of operation....................................................................10.12
Fieldbus fault, type of operation........................................................................10.12
Frequency fault, type of operation.....................................................................10.12
Heatsink over-temperature fault, type of operation...........................................10.12
SCR short circuit fault, type of operation...........................................................10.13
Programmable inputs In0 and In1.....................................................................10.13
Programmable outputs, Relay K4, K5 and K6...................................................10.14
Programmable software output V7....................................................................10.14
Fieldbus control.................................................................................................10.15
Fieldbus type.....................................................................................................10.15
Fieldbus address...............................................................................................10.15
Sequence start, number of sequences..............................................................10.15
Start ramp, first sequence.................................................................................10.16
Initial voltage, first sequence.............................................................................10.16
Current limit, first sequence...............................................................................10.16
Setting current, first sequence...........................................................................10.16
Start ramp, second sequence...........................................................................10.16
Initial voltage, second sequence.......................................................................10.16
Current limit, second sequence.........................................................................10.17
Setting current, second sequence.....................................................................10.17
Start ramp, third sequence................................................................................10.17
Initial voltage, third sequence............................................................................10.17
Current limit, third sequence.............................................................................10.17
Setting current, third sequence.........................................................................10.17
Language..........................................................................................................10.18
LCD displaly automatic switch-off......................................................................10.18
Password...........................................................................................................10.18
Date type...........................................................................................................10.18
Year...................................................................................................................10.18
Month................................................................................................................10.19
Day....................................................................................................................10.19
Hour...................................................................................................................10.19
Minutes..............................................................................................................10.19
By-Pass doesn’t open, type of operation (BP Closed Op).................................10.19
By-Pass doesn’t close, type of operation (BP Open Op)...................................10.19
10

Chapter 10
Functions
This chapter describes all possible settings and functions in the softstarter, as well as the
easiest way of finding them. The respective default values, setting ranges and parameter
texts shown in the display are also described.
10:1 Setting Current

Path in menu:
Start/Stop / Setting Ie
The setting of this parameter shall be according to the current the softstarter is exposed to. If
the motor is connected In Line, set the rated motor current (see rating plate on the motor).
Information!
If the motor is connected Inside Delta, set the current in the Delta circuit by multiplying the
rated motor current by 1/( 3) = 58% (or .58).
Parameter text Default value Setting range Description

Individual 9...1207A divided into
Setting Ie Rated motor current
(size related 19 overlapping ranges
10:2 Start Ramp

Path in menu:
Start/Stop / Start Ramp
When a start signal is given, the softstarter performs a start ramp by gradually increasing the
output voltage to the motor. The start ramp continues until full voltage is applied to the motor.
Figure 1: Start ramp 1...30s, 1...120s

Start Ramp 10s (Range depends on Time for start ramp
Start Range)
10:3 Stop Ramp

Path in menu:
Start/Stop / Stop Ramp
When a stop signal is given, the softstarter performs a stop ramp by gradually decreasing the
output voltage to the motor. If the ramp time is set to 0, the softstarter will completely remove
Figure 2: Stop ramp the voltage when a stop command is given.
10
Information!
This parameter shall be set to 0 for applications when large masses are involved!

1...30s, 1...120s
Stop Ramp 0s (Range depends on Time for stop ramp
Stop Range)

Chapter 10
Functions
10:4 Initial voltage

U Path in menu:
Start/Stop / Init Volt
This parameter makes it possible to set the voltage level where the start ramp begins. If the
initial voltage is set too low, it will cause unneccessary long starting times and unnecessary
70% heating of the motor.

30% Initial voltage for Start
Init Volt 30% 30...70%
Ramp
Figure 3: Initial voltage for Start Ramp
U 10:5 End voltage

Path in menu:
100% Menu/SETTINGS/Functional Settings/
Start/Stop / End Volt
This parameter makes it possible to set the voltage level where the stop ramp ends. This
70% function will be active only if parameter Stop ramp is used.
Initial voltage for Stop
30% End Volt 30% 30...70%
Ramp
Figure 4: End voltage for Stop ramp
U
Example 50% 10:6 Step down voltage
100%
Path in menu:
End
voltage Start/Stop / Step Down
30% 30%
When stopping a motor using the stop ramp, the speed will not decrease immediately. The
Stop
step down voltage function makes it possible to set a level where the motor speed decreas-
Time es as soon as the stop ramp begins. By using, a more optimized stopping of the motor is
Figure 5: Step down voltage for Stop ramp
achieved. It is mainly used for pump applications.
Voltage value to which
the softstarter will
Step down 100% 30...100% step down at stop and
where it will begin the
stop ramp
10
U
100%
Fixed 10:7 Current limit
voltage Path in menu:
Current limit Menu/SETTINGS/Functional Settings/
setting reached Start/Stop / Current Lim
30%
It is possible to limit the starting current by using this function. When the current limit is
reached, the output voltage stays stable until the current level falls below the limit, then the
t1 t2 Time ramping continues.
t1 + t2 = set ramp time
I
5
Information!
Current limit The starting current must be high enough to make it possible for the motor to reach the rated speed. The
setting lowest possible current depends on the performance of the motor and the characteristics of the load.
2 Parameter text Default value Setting range Description
Level of the current
Current Lim 4.0 x le 2.0...7xle
Figure 6: Current limit limit
Time

Chapter 10
Functions
10:8 Kick Start

Path in menu:
Start/Stop / Kick Start
In some applications it may be necessary to kick loose the motor i.e. initial friction, and
therefore a kick start can be used. With this function, a selectable fixed voltage is applied
during a settable time. Note that the current limit function is disabled during kick start.
Figure 7: Kick start Parameter text Default value Setting range Description
Kick start No Yes, No Selection of Kick Start
10:9 Kick Start Level

Path in menu:
Start/Stop / Kick Level
With this parameter it is possible to set the level of the kick start. It is active only if kick start
is selected.
Kick Level 50% 50...100% Level of Kick Start
10:10 Kick Start Time

Path in menu:
Start/Stop / Kick Time
This parameter makes it possible to set the time of the kick start. It is active only if kick start
is selected.
Kick Time 0.2s 0.1...1.5s Time for Kick Start
10:11 Start ramp range

Path in menu:
Start/Stop / Start Range
The time of the start ramp is settable up to 30 seconds as default, but if required the range
could be extended up to 120 seconds by this parameter.
A long start ramp time will increase the risk of tripping the overload protection.
Selectable range for
Start range 1-30s 1-30s, 1-120s
start ramp 10
10:12 Stop ramp range

Path in menu:
Start/Stop / Stop Range
The time for the stop ramp is settable up to 30 seconds as default, but if required the range
could be extended up to 120 seconds by this parameter.
Selectable range for
Start range 0-30s 0-30s, 0-120s
stop ramp

Chapter 10
Functions
10:13 Motor overload protection

Path in menu:
Protections/Overload
This parameter makes it possible to set the required function of the integrated motor over-
load protection. If an overload occurs, the motor stops and a reset is necessary before a
restart is possible.
The motor overload protection has three different modes:
No The protection is not activated
Normal The protection is in normal operation
Dual The protection has two classes, one during start and another during
continuous run

Overload Normal No, Normal, Dual Overload protection
Information!
The motor thermal temperature is stored in the event of a power loss.
1000 10:14 Overload class

Path in menu:
Protections/Overload/OL Class
100
This parameter makes it possible to set the required overload class. Four different classes
A are available according to Figure 8.
B • Class 10A
10 • Class 10
C • Class 20
D • Class 30
1 Parameter text Default value Setting range Description
OL Class 10 10A, 10, 20, 30 Overload class
10:15 Overload class, dual type, start class

1 2 3 4 5 6 Path in menu:
Figure 8: Tripping curves for the electronic overload Menu/SETTINGS/Functional Settings/
Protections/Overload/Dual Class S
A Class 30
B Class 20 This parameter makes it possible to set the required overload class during start. When full
voltage is reached, there will be a switch-over to run class after 30 seconds (see below).
C Class 10
10 D Class 10A Parameter text Default value Setting range Description
OL Class S 10 10A, 10, 20, 30 Overload class
10:16 Overload class, dual type, run class

Path in menu:
Protections/Overload/Dual Class R
This parameter makes it possible to set the required overload class during continuous run.
The run class is activated 30 seconds after full voltage has been reached.
Overload class, Dual
OL Class R 10 10A, 10, 20, 30
type, Run class


Chapter 10
Functions
10:17 Overload protection, type of operation

Path in menu:
Protections/Overload/OL Op

This parameter makes it possible to select between three different actions when the protec-
tion is activated. It is active only if the motor overload protection is selected.
Stop-M The motor stops and a manual reset is required before restart.
Stop-A The motor stops and an automatic reset is performed when the fault
disappears (motor temp <80%)
Ind The motor continues to run but a fault indication is given

Overload class, Dual
OL Class R 10 10A, 10, 20, 30
type, Run class

10:18 Locked rotor protection
Path in menu:
Protections/Locked Rotor
If the motor current exceeds the set level and the set time when the motor is running at full
voltage, this protection is activated. The protection starts monitoring when full voltage is
applied to the motor.
Locked rotor No Yes, No Locked rotor protection
10:19 Locked rotor protection, trip level

Path in menu:
Protections/Locked Rotor/Lock R Lev
This function makes it possible to set the level of the locked rotor protection. It is active only
if Locked rotor protection is selected.
Trip level for locked
Lock R Lev 4.0 x Ie 0.5...8.1 xle
rotor protection
10:20 Locked rotor protection time

Path in menu:
Protections/Locked Rotor/Lock R Time
This parameter makes it possible to set the delay time from detection until activation of the
10
protection. It is active only if Locked rotor protection is selected.
Trip time for locked
Lock R Time 1.0s 0.2...10.0s
rotor protection
10:21 Locked rotor protection, type of operation

Path in menu:
Protections/Locked Rotor/Lock R Op
tion is activated. It is active only if the Locked rotor protection is selected.
disappears
Ind The motor continues to run but a fault indication is given.
Type of operation for
Lock R Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind
locked rotor protection

Chapter 10
Functions
10:22 Underload protection

Path in menu:
Protections/Underload
If the motor current falls below the set level and the set time when the motor is running at
full voltage, the protection is activated. The protection starts monitoring when full voltage is
applied to the motor.
Underload No Yes, No Underload protection
Information!
This protection could be used to avoid for example a pump running dry or detecting a
broken belt.
10:23 Underload protection level

Path in menu:
Protections/Underload/Underl Lev
This parameter makes it possible to set the level of the underload protection. It is active only
if the underload protection is selected.
Trip level for Underload
Underl Lev 0.5 x Ie 0.4...0.8xle
protection
10:24 Underload protection time

Path in menu:
Protections/Underload/Underl Time
This parameter makes it possible to set the delay time from detection until the protection is
activated. It is active only if underload protection is selected.
Trip time for Underload
Underl Time 10s 1....30s
protection
10:25 Underload protection, type of operation

Path in menu:
Protections/Underload/Underl Op
tion is activated. It is active only if the underload protection is selected.
10 Stop-M The motor stops and a manual reset is required before restart
disappears

Underl Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind
Underload protection
10:26 Phase imbalance protection

Path in menu:
Protections/Phase Imb
If the current in one phase differs from another phase by more than the set level, the protec-
tion is activated. The protection starts monitoring 30 seconds after full voltage and trips after
10 seconds of imbalance.
Phase Imb No Yes, No Phase imbalance protection

Chapter 10
Functions
10:27 Phase imbalance protection level

Path in menu:
Protections/Phase Imb/Ph Imb Lev
This parameter makes it possible to set the level of the phase imbalance protection. It is
active only if the Phase imbalance protection is selected.

Trip level for Phase
Ph lmb Lev 80% 10...80%
imbalance protection
10:28 Phase imbalance protection, type of operation

Path in menu:
Protections/Phase Imb/Phase Imb Op
tion is activated. It is active only if the phase imbalance protection is selected.
Stop-M The motor stops and a manual reset is required before restart
disappears

Type of operation
Ph lmb Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind. for Phase imbalance
protection
10:29 High current protection

Path in menu:
Protections/High I
This is a current protection with a fixed level of 8 x Ie during 200 ms. The protection is
activated if the current exceeds this level and time.

High I No Yes, No High current protection
10:30 High current protection, type of operation

Path in menu:
Protections/High I/High I Op
tion is activated. It is active only if the high current protection is selected.
Stop-A The motor stops and an automatic reset is performed when the fault 10
disappears

High I Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind
high current protection
10:31 Phase reversal protection

Path in menu:
Protections/Phase Rev
The softstarter accepts any phase sequence but if this protection is selected, the phase
sequence must be L1, L2, L3 or else the protection is activated.
Phase reveral protec-
Phase Rev No Yes, No
tion

Chapter 10
Functions
10:32 Phase reversal protection, type of operation

Path in menu:
Protections/Phase Rev/Ph Rev Op
tion is activated. It is active only if the phase reversal protection is selected.
disappears

Type of operation fro
Ph Rev Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind phase reversal
protection
10:33 PTC protection

Path in menu:
Protections/PTC
The softstarter has an input for an external PTC thermistor that can be used independent of
the built-in electronic overload protection status.
PTC No Yes, No PTC protection
10:34 PTC protection, type of operation

Path in menu:
Protections/PTC/PTC Op
tion is activated. It is active only if the PTC protection is selected.
disappears

PTC Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A, Ind
PTC protection
10:35 External bypass

10 Path in menu:
Start/Stop/Ext ByPass
This parameter defines whether an external bypass contactor is used or not.
An external bypass
Ext ByPass No Yes, No
contactor is used
10:36 High current warning

Path in menu:
Warnings/Warn I=High
If the function is selected, a warning signal will be given provided that the current during full
voltage is higher than the set value. The measurement starts 30 seconds after full voltage
is reached.
Warn I = High No Yes, No High current warning

Chapter 10
Functions
10:37 High current warning level

Path in menu:
Warnings/Warn I=High/Wa I=H Lev
This parameter makes it possible to set the indication level of the high current warning function.
Trip level for high cur-
WA I=H Lev 1.2 x Ie 0.5...5.0 x Ie
rent warning
10:38 Low current warning

Path in menu:
Warnings/Warn I=Low
If the function is selected, a warning signal will be given provided that the current during full
voltage is lower than the set value. The measurement starts 30 seconds after full voltage
is reached.
WA I=Low No Yes, No Low current warning
10:39 Low current warning level

Path in menu:
Warnings/Warn I=Low/Wa I=L Lev
This parameter makes it possible to set the indication level of the low current warning function.
Trip level for low
WA I=L Lev 0.8 x Ie 0.4...1.0 x Ie
current warning
10:40 Overload warning

Path in menu:
Warnings/Warn OL
If the function is selected, a warning signal will be given that the overload protection will be
activated if the motor load does not decrease.
Warn OL No Yes, No Overload warning
10:41 Overload warning level

Path in menu:
Menu/SETTINGS/Functional Settings/ 10
Warnings/Warn OL/Wa OL Lev
This parameter makes it possible to set the indication level of the motor overload protection.
The actual trip level of the protection is represented by 100%.
Trip level for overload
Wa OL Lev 90% 40...99%
warning
10:42 SCR overload warning

Path in menu:
Warnings/Warn SCR OL
If this function is selected, a warning signal will be given that the SCR overload protection
will be activated if the current does not decrease. The warning level is 90%.
Warn SCR OL No Yes, No SCR overload warning

Chapter 10
Functions
10:43 Phase loss fault, type of operation

Path in menu:
Faults/Ph Loss Op
This parameter makes it possible to select between two different actions if a phase loss fault
occurs.
disappears

Ph Loss Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A
phase loss fault
10:44 Fieldbus fault, type of operation

Path in menu:
Faults/FB Fault Op
This parameter makes it possible to select between two different actions if a fault occurs in
the fieldbus communication.
disappears

FB Fault Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A
fieldbus fault
10:45 Frequency fault, type of operation

Path in menu:
Faults/Freq F Op
This parameter makes it possible to select between two different actions if the frequency is
out of range (frequency fault).
disappears

Freq F Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A
frequency fault
10
10:46 Heatsink over-temperature fault, type of operation

Path in menu:
Faults/HS Temp Op
This parameter makes it possible to select between two different actions if the heat sink
temperature of the softstarter is too high.
disappears

HS Temp Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A heat sink overtempera-
ture fault

Chapter 10
Functions
10:47 SCR short circuit fault, type of operation

Path in menu:
Faults/SCR SC Op
If one or several thyristors are shorted, this parameter makes it possible to select between
two different actions.
disappears

SCR SC Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A
SCR short circuit fault
10:48 Programmable inputs In0 and In1

Path in menu:
Inputs/In0 / In1
The softstarter has two programmable inputs, In0 and In1. They can be used for different
purposes depending on the selected function, independently of each other.
None, Reset, Enable,
Function of program-
In0 Reset Jog, DOL, Start 2,
mable input In0
FB-Dis
None, Reset, Enable,
In1 Reset Jog, DOL, Start 3,
mable input In1
FB-Dis

! Caution!
actions listed below.
• Switching from one type of control to another (fieldbus control / hardwire control)
• Re-programming the programmable inputs
Figure 9: Internal control voltage
10
Figure 10: External control voltage

Chapter 10
Functions
10:49 Programmable outputs – Relay K4, K5 and K6

Path in menu:
Outputs/Relay K4 / K5 / K6
Switch over relays
The softstarter has three programmable output relays that can be used for different pur-
poses depending on the selected function, independently of each other.
Relay K4 has default setting Run, relay K5 has default setting Top of Ramp and relay K6
has default setting Event.
Run signal is given during start ramp, running, and stop ramp if used. Can be used to con-
trol an isolation contactor.
Top of Ramp signal is given when full voltage to the motor is applied. Can be used to control
an external by-pass contactor.
The event function has several alternatives that can be switched On/Off as required.
Each output relay can be programmed to any combination of events below:
• Motor Overload Protection • Shunt fault
• Fault • Low current warning
• High Current Protection • High current warning
• SCR Overload Protection • SCR Overload Warning
• Locked Rotor Protection • Overload Warning
• Underload Protection • Phase Reversal Protection
• Phase Imbalance Protection • PTC Protection
Description
Fault group consists of:
• By-pass contactor does not close
• Phase loss fault
• Fieldbus fault
• Frequency fault
• Heat sink temp. fault
Shunt fault group consists of:
• By-pass contactor does not open
• Shorted thyristor
This signal can be used to trip an upstream breaker in case the softstarter is not able to
stop the motor.

Relay K4 Run Run, TOR, Event
mable relay output K4
Relay K5 TOR Run, TOR, Event
mable relay K5
Relay K6 Event Run, TOR, Event
10 mable relay output K6
10:50 Programmable software output V7

Path in menu:
Outputs/SW Outp V7
If the softstarter is used with fieldbus communication, a fourth output is available. This is a
software output only and the signal can be taken only through the fieldbus interface.
(See 50 “ Programmable outputs, Relay K4, K5 and K6” for further explanations.)

SW Outp V7 Event Run, TOR, Event mable software output
V7

Chapter 10
Functions
10:51 Fieldbus control

Path in menu:
Fieldbus/Fieldb Ctrl
If the softstarter is going to be used with fieldbus communication, the fieldbus interface must
be activated before any action can be taken.

! Caution!
actions listed below.
• Switching from one type of control to another (fieldbus control / hardwire control)
• Re-programming the programmable inputs

Fieldb Ctrl No Yes, No Control of the softstarter with fieldbus
10:52 Fieldbus type

Path in menu:
Fieldbus/Fieldb Ctrl/Fieldb Type
When the fieldbus communication is used, the present type of fieldbus must be selected.
The following fieldbus types are available in the softstarter:
• AS-Interface
• DeviceNet
• Profibus DP
• Modbus

Type of fieldbus, AS-Interface=short protocol
Fieldb type Other AS-Int, Other
Other=long protocol
10:53 Fieldbus address

Path in menu:
Fieldbus/Fieldb Addr
With this parameter, it is possible to set a fieldbus address for the softstarter. Select a suit-
able, non-occupied number as the address.
Fieldb Addr 0 0...1000 Fieldbus address

10
10:54 Sequence start, number of sequences
Path in menu:
Seq Start/No of Seq
The softstarter can start motors with up to three different parameter sets (1st parameter set,
2nd parameter set and 3rd parameter set). This function can be used for starting motors in
a sequence (one by one) and also for starting two or three speed motors where different
starting parameters are required for each speed.

No of Seq No No, 2, 3 Number of sequences for sequence start
Information!
The LOCAL CONTROL menu cannot be entered if Sequence start is selected.

Chapter 10
Functions
10:55 Start ramp, first sequence

Path in menu:
Seq Start/1st Seq. Param./Start Ramp1
This parameter makes it possible to set the start ramp time for the first parameter set.
Start Ramp1 10 s 1...30s, 1...120s First sequence, time for start ramp
10:56 Initial voltage, first sequence

Path in menu:
Seq Start/1st Seq. Param./Init Volt1
This parameter makes it possible to set the initial voltage for the first parameter set.
Init Volt1 30% 30...70% First sequence, initial voltage for start ramp
10:57 Current limit, first sequence

Path in menu:
Seq Start/1st Seq. Param./Curr Lim1
This parameter makes it possible to set the current limit level for the first parameter set.
Curr Lim1 4 x Ie 2.0...7.0xle First sequence, current limit
10:58 Setting current, first sequence

Path in menu:
Seq Start/1st Seq. Param./1st Set Ie
This parameter makes it possible to set the rated motor current for the first parameter set.
9...1207A divided into 19 over-
1st Set Ie Ir First sequence, current limit
lapping ranges
10:59 Start ramp, second sequence

10 Path in menu:
Seq Start/2nd Seq. Param./Start Ramp2
This parameter makes it possible to set the start ramp time for the second parameter set.
Start Ramp2 10s 1...30s, 1...120s Second sequence, time for start ramp
10:60 Initial voltage, second sequence

Path in menu:
Seq Start/2nd Seq. Param./Init Volt2
This parameter makes it possible to set the initial voltage for the second parameter set.
Init Volt2 30% 30...70% Second sequence, initial voltage for start ramp

Chapter 10
Functions
10:61 Current limit, second sequence

Path in menu:
Seq Start/2nd Seq. Param./Curr Lim2
This parameter makes it possible to set the current limit level for the second parameter set.
Curr Lim2 4 x Ie 2.0...7.0xle Second sequence, current limit
10:62 Setting current, second sequence

Path in menu:
Seq Start/2nd Seq. Param./2nd Set Ie
This parameter makes it possible to set the rated motor current for the second parameter
set.
9...1207A divided into 19
2 Set Ie Ir Second sequence, current limit
overlapping ranges
10:63 Start ramp, third sequence

Path in menu:
Seq Start/3rd Seq. Param./Start Ramp3
This parameter makes it possible to set the start ramp time for the third parameter set.
Start Ramp3 10s 1...30s, 1...120s Third sequence, time for start ramp
10:64 Initial voltage, third sequence

Path in menu:
Seq Start/3rd Seq. Param./Init Volt3
This parameter makes it possible to set the initial voltage for the third parameter set.
Init Volt3 30% 30...70% Third sequence, initial voltage for start ramp
10:65 Current limit, third sequence

Path in menu:
10
Seq Start/3rd Seq. Param./Curr Lim3
This parameter makes it possible to set the current limit level for the third parameter set.
Curr Lim3 4 x Ie 2.0...7.0xle Third sequence, current limit
10:66 Setting current, third sequence

Path in menu:
Seq. Start/3rd Seq. Param./3rd Set Ie
This parameter makes it possible to set the rated motor current for the third parameter set.
9...1207A divided into 19 Third sequence, motor rated
3rd Set le Ir
overlapping ranges current

Chapter 10
Functions
10:67 Language
Path in menu:
Menu/SETTINGS/Presentation Set./Language
The text on the LCD display can be presented in 12 different languages. This parameter
makes it possible to select among the following languages:
• English • Turkish
• Chinese • Russian
• German • Finnish
• Spanish • Swedish
• French • Portuguese
• Italian • Dutch
US/UK, CN, DE, ES,
Language to use on
Language By country FR, IT, NL, PT, SE, FI,
display
RU, TR

10:68 LCD display automatic switch-off

Path in menu:
Menu/SETTINGS/Presentation Set./LCD Auto Off
The LCD display on the softstarter will be automatically switched off by a pre-set time. This
time is always calculated from the last key activation.
With this parameter, it is possible to set this time.
Time for display auto-
LCD Auto Off 15 min 1...255 min
matic turn off.
10:69 Password
Path in menu: Top level
Press Upper navigation key once.
This parameter makes it possible to set a password to lock the keypad. All menus are avail-
able when the keypad is locked but no changes or actions can be done.
Change Password No No, 1...255 Password for display
10:70 Date type

Path in menu:
Menu/SETTINGS/Presentation Set./Date Type
This parameter makes it possible to select the required type of date presentation on the
10 LCD display.
The following three options are available:
• ISO Year - Month - Day
• CE Day - Month - Year
• US Month - Day - Year
Type of date presenta-
Date Type ISO ISO, CE, US
tion
10:71 Year
Path in menu:
Menu/SETTINGS/Presentation Set./Date Year
This parameter makes it possible to set the current year for the real time clock.
Date Year Individual 2001...2060 Year

Chapter 10
Functions
10:72 Month
Path in menu:
Menu/SETTINGS/Presentation Set./Date Month
This parameter makes it possible to set the current month for the real time clock.
Date Month Individual 1...12 Month
10:73 Day
Path in menu:
Menu/SETTINGS/Presentation Set.Date Day
This parameter makes it possible to set the current day for the real time clock.
Date Day Individual 1...31 Day

10:74 Hour
Path in menu:
Menu/SETTINGS/Presentation Set./Time Hour
This parameter makes it possible to set the current hour for the real time clock.

Time Hour Individual 0...23 Hour
10:75 Minutes
Path in menu:
Menu/SETTINGS/Presentation Set./Time Min
This parameter makes it possible to set the current minutes for the real time clock.

Time Min Individual 0...59 Minutes
10:76 By-pass doesn’t open, type of operation (BP Closed Op)

Path in menu:
Menu/SETTINGS/Functional Settings/Faults/BP Closed Op
This parameter makes it possible to select between two different actions of the softstarter if
the by-pass contactor does not open in a proper way.
Stop-A The motor stops and an automatic reset is performed when the fault disappears
BP Closed Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A

Type of operation if the 10
bypass does not open

10:77 By-pass doesn’t close, type of operation (BP Open Op)

Path in menu:
Menu/SETTINGS/Functional Settings/Faults/BP Open Op
This parameter makes it possible to select between two different actions of the softstarter if
the by-pass contactor does not close in a proper way.
Stop-A The motor stops and an automatic reset is performed when the fault disappears

Type of operation if the
BP Open Op Stop-M Stop-M, Stop-A
bypass does not close

Notes
10

Chapter 11
PST30...PSTB1050 Troubleshooting
General.....................................................................................................11.2
Overview of indications.............................................................................11.2
General problems and faults . ..................................................................11.2
Start up faults............................................................................................11.3
Fault indication................................................................................11.3 - 11.4
Protection indication........................................................................11.5 - 11.6
11

Chapter 11
Troubleshooting
11:1 General
This chapter is a guide that can be used in case problems arise with the softstarter or the application.
The softstarter normally indicates a fault with LED Fault, and the LCD displays what type of fault it is. When a protection is activated, it will be indicated with LED Protection
and the LCD displays what type of protection is active.
Faults not displayed in the softstarter can also be found in this chapter.
11:2 Overview of indications

This table shows in which state the different indications for protections, faults and warning may show up.
Active when selected Always active Active when selected

LCD indication
Fault Wrong Freq

Fault Phase Loss
Fault FB Timeout
Fault Connection
Fault Open SCR
Fault BP Closed
Prot Locked Rot
Prot Phase Rev

Prot Phase Imb
Prot Underload
Fault Line Side
Fault HS Temp
Fault BP Open
Warn SCR OL
Fault Kick-Cur
Prot Motor OL
Fault SC SCR
Prot SCR OL
Warn I=High
Warn I=Low
Prot High I
Prot PTC
Warn OL
Stand by X – – X – – X X – – – – X – – X1 – – X X – –
At start signal X – – X – X X X X X X X X X2 X – X1 – – X X – –
Ramp up X – – X – – X X X – – – X – X X1 – – X X – –
TOR X X X X X – X X X – – – X – X X1 – X3 X X X X
At stop signal X – – X – – X X X – – – X X4 X X1 X3 – X X – –
Ramp down X – – X – – X X X – – – X X X X 1
– – X X – –
1) Only if Fieldbus control is selected
2) Only if Kick-start is selected.
3) Only if by-pass is used.
4) Only if by-pass is not used.
11:3 General problems and faults

Status Possible cause Solution
Motor humming/starts without given start signal Shorted SCR Check and replace
By-pass contactor stuck in the closed position Check and correct the reason
Bad motor sound during start and operation Inside Delta connection wrong Check and correct the wiring
Bad motor sound during stop Wrong ramp time for stop Try different ramp times (some adjustments may be
necessary for best result)
Motor does not start when giving start command using Control wiring not correct Check connections for start and stop
the hardware inputs Start and stop command given at the same time Check that start and stop command is not given at the
Keypad is in Local Control menu same time
Check that the keypad is not in Local Control menu
Check that parameter Fieldbus Ctrl is set to No.
Motor does not start when giving start command using Setting of fieldbus parameter wrong Check that parameter Fieldbus Ctrl is set to Yes
the fieldbus communication Check that bit “Enable” is used
Check that programmable inputs have correct settings
Displayed current in LCD does not correspond to mo- Inside Delta connection If the softstarter is connected inside Delta, the current
tor current displayed is 58% (1/( 3)) of the motor current.
Displayed current in LCD is not stable The motor is too small Check that the softstarter corresponds to the m
The load on the motor is too small (current is out of
measuring range)
Loading of parameters does not work properly Fieldbus settings See Chapter 8 Fieldbus for actual fieldbus type
11

Chapter 11
Troubleshooting
11:4 Start up faults

LCD Auto shut off the keypad Touch any key onn the keypad
Connect the control voltage according to the circuit

Control voltage is not connected
diagram
11:5 Fault indication

Power on Fault Protection The main contactor or circuit breaker is open Check and close contactor / breaker or any external
switching device
Fault Phase Loss Fuse blown Check and replace the fuse in all (3) three phases
Reset Back Any external device open / tripped Check upstream disconnect or fuses. Check all power
cable connections..
Main contactor opens too quickly
Add a time delay before opening
Power on Fault Protection The motor connection is not correct In Line connected
• Check that there are no connections missing to the
motor
Fault Connection • Check that the connections are carried out correctly
Shorted SCR at start • Check and replace
Reset Back Inside Delta connected
• Check that there are no connections missing to the
motor
• Check that the circuits are closed and correspond to
the circuit diagram
Shorted SCR at start • Check and replace
Frequency fault The frequency is out of range. (47.5 - 52.5Hz or Check and correct the frequency
Power on Fault Protection 57-63 Hz)
Fault Wrong Freq

Reset Back
Line side fault The main voltage is not correct on the line side Check and correct voltage on the line side
Fault Line Side

Reset Back
By-Pass does not open fault The by-pass contactor is not opening properly Without by-pass
Power on Fault Protection • Check that the parameter Ext byPass is set to No.
With by-pass
• Check why the contactor is not opening and make
Fault BP Closed
11
necessary actions.
• Check that the parameter Ext ByPass is set to Yes
Reset Back
By-Pass does not close fault The by-pass contactor is not closing properly Without by-pass
Power on Fault Protection • Check that the parameter Ext byPass is set to No.
With by-pass
• Check why the contactor is not closing and make
Fault BP Open necessary actions.
• Check that the parameter Ext ByPass is set to Yes
Reset Back
Chapter 11
Troubleshooting
11:5 Fault indication (cont.)

Heat sink over-temperature Temperature too high on the heat sink. If the fault Check that the fans are working in a proper way
Power on Fault Protection remains after reset, the heat sink temperature is too Check that the cooling airways are free from dirt and
warm. dust
Check that the ambient temperature is not too high
Fault HS Temp
Reset Back
Kick-current fault Parameter Setting Ie is set too low In Line connected
Power on Fault Protection • Set the value acccording to the rated motor current
Inside Delta
• Set the value according to 58% (1/( 3)) of the rated
Fault Kick Cur motor current
Reset Back
Shorted SCR fault One or several SCRs are shorted Check and replace. Contact your ABB sales office for
Power on Fault Protection replacement parts.
Fault SC SCR
Reset Back
Non conducting SCR fault One or several SCRs are not conducting Check and replace. Contact your ABB sales office for
Power on Fault Protection replacement parts.
Fault Open SCR

Reset Back
Fieldbus fault The fieldbus commmunication is not working Check that the fieldbusplug is connected correctly
Power on Fault Protection Check that the correct type of fieldbusplug is used
Check that the paramter Fieldbus Type is set accord-
ing to the present fieldbus type
Fault FB Timeout
Reset Back
Internal faults An internal communication fault of the softstarter has Disconnect and reconnect the control voltage (Ue) and
Power on Fault Protection occurred make a restart.
If the same fault remains, contact your ABB sales
office
Fault Intern 1
Reset Back
Fault Intern 2
Reset Back
Fault Intern 3
Reset Back
11 Fault Intern 4
Reset Back

Chapter 11
Troubleshooting
11:6 Protection indication

Motor overload protection The motor has been exposed to an overload condition In Line
Power on Fault Protection because the current over a certain time is too high. At start
(The load on the motor shaft is too high). Check and correct the reason for the overload. Check
that current limit level is not set too low.
Prot Motor OL Check that the ramp time for start is not too long.
Check that correct overload class is used.
Reset Back Check that parameter Setting Ie is correct.
Continuous run
Check and correct the reason for the overload.
Inside Delta
At start
Check that current limit level is not seet too low.
Check that the ramp time for start is not too long.
Check that correct overload class is used.
Check that parameter Setting Ie is set to 58% (1/ 3))
of the rated motor current.
Continuous run
Underload protection The motor current is below set level and time Check and correct the reason for the underload
Power on Fault Protection Check that the settings are according to the operation
conditions
Prot Underload
Reset Back
Locked rotor protection The motor is running stiff for some reason. Check the bearings of the motor and load
Power on Fault Protection A damaged bearing or a stuck load could be possible Check that the load is not running stiff.
causes
Prot Locked Rot

Reset Back
High current protection A fault current, higher than 8 times the softstarter rat- Check the circuits including the motor for any insula-
Power on Fault Protection ing has occured tion fault, phas to phase or ground fault
Prot High I
Reset Back
Phase imbalance protection Unbalance in the phase currents Check the main voltage and the motor circuit
Power on Fault Protection Restart the motor and check the phase currents
Prot Phase Imb.

Reset Back
Phase reversal protection The phase sequence is not correct Check the phase sequence on the line side to (L1-
Power on Fault Protection L2-L3)
Prot Phase Rev

Reset Back
11

Chapter 11
Troubleshooting
11:6 Protection indication (cont.)

PTC protection An over-temperature is detected by the PTC thermis- Check that the PTC circuit is closed and that the inputs
Power on Fault Protection tors in the motor are connected
Check and correct the reason for the overheating
Prot PTC
Reset Back
SCR overload protection The softstarter is too small Check and replace the softstarters with one of a
Power on Fault Protection Too many starts/hour suitable size
The ramp time for start is too long Check and decrease number of starts/hour
Check that current limit level is not set too low
Prot SCR OL Check that the ramp time for start is not too long
Reset Back
11

Chapter 12
PST30...PSTB1050 Diagrams
Circuit Inline diagram, PST30..PST300................................................................12.2

Circuit Inside Delta diagram, PST30..PST300.....................................................12.3
Circuit Inline diagram, PSTB370...PSTB1050.......................................................12.4
Circuit Inside Delta diagram, PSTB370...PSTB1050............................................12.5
12

Chapter 12
Diagrams
12:1 Circuit Inline PST30...PST300
Figure 1: Circuit diagram PST30...3000
12
Terminal 3 is a functional ground, it is not a protective ground. It shall be connected to the
mounting plate.

Chapter 12
Diagrams
12:2 Circuit Inside Delta PST30...PST300
(IGHVOLTAGE
Figure 2: Circuit diagram PST30...3000 12
Terminal 3 is a functional ground, it is not a protective ground. It shall be connected to the

mounting plate.
Chapter 12
Diagrams
12:3 Circuit Inline PSTB370...PSTB1050
Figure 3: Circuit diagram PSTB370...PSTB1050
12
Terminal 3 is a functional ground, it is not a protective ground. It shall be connected to

the mounting plate.
Chapter 12
Diagrams
12:4 Circuit Inside Delta PSTB370...PSTB1050
(IGHVOLTAGE
12
Figure 4: Circuit diagram PSTB370...PSTB1050

Notes
12

Notes

Notes

No. 1SXU 132 021 M0201
Publication LV 021
April, 2005
ABB Inc.
1206 Hatton Road
Wichita Falls, TX 76302
Telephone 888-385-1221; 940-397-7000
Fax 940-397-7085
http://www.abb-control.com
6.
TRANSMITTERS
Technical Information
Nivotester FTC325
Point level switch
With intrinsically safe signal circuit for connection
to a capacitance sensor
Applications Your benefits

• Point level detection in tanks containing liquids and • Intrinsically safe signal circuit [EEx ia] IIC for using
silos containing bulk solids. For capacitance sensors, sensors in hazardous areas
which may also be used in hazardous areas of category • Calibration using operating keys
ATEX II (1) GD • High functional safety thanks to:
• Overfill protection for tanks containing flammable or – fail-safe pulse-frequency modulation (PFM) or
non-flammable fluids hazardous to water 3-WIRE technology
• Dry running protection – Checkable relay function
for pumps • Compact housing for easy series mounting on a
• Two-point control (s with 3-WIRE) standard DIN rail in the cabinet
• Pluggable terminal blocks make wiring easy
• Can be used with FEI57S (PFM), FEI53 (3-WIRE)
• Limit value and alarm relay
• WHG approval (PFM)
• Protection against maloperation and manipulation
– each change of the device configuration leads to
signaling via the red LED and a fault message
TI00380F/00/EN/13.13
71214509
Nivotester FTC325
Table of contents
Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Supplementary Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 System Information (SI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Technical Information (TI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Operating manual (KA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Certificates (only for PFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Overvoltage category as per EN 61010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Protection class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Ambient temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Climatic and mechanical application class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Design, dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Operating concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Type of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Overfill protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Other standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Protective housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2 Endress+Hauser
Nivotester FTC325
Function and system design

Measuring principle Function
Probe and tank (or ground tube/counterpotential) form a capacitor whose capacitance changes with the level
of the product.
PFM 3–WIRE
The electronic insert FEI57 converts the change of The electronic insert FEI53 converts the change of
capacitance into a change of frequency, which switches the capacitance into a voltage signal, which switches the
output relay in the Nivotester FTC325 PFM. output relay in the Nivotester FTC325 3-WIRE.
Signal transmission
The signal input of the Nivotester FTC325 point level switch is galvanically isolated from the power supply and
from the output.
PFM 3–WIRE
The Nivotester supplies the capacitance sensor with The Nivotester supplies the capacitance sensor with direct
intrinsically safe direct current via a two-wire cable and from current via a two-wire cable and receives the voltage signal
there receives a frequency, which signals whether the point via a third wire, which signals whether the point level has
level has been reached or not. been reached or not.
Here, the transmitter superimposes current impulses (PFM The measuring capacitance lies in the range from
signals) with a pulse width of approx. 200 μs and a current 10 pF to 350 pF.
intensity of approx. 10 mA on the supply current. The This corresponds to a voltage of 3V to 12V.
measuring capacitance lies in the range from 20 pF to 350 pF.
This corresponds to a transmission frequency of
185 Hz to 116 Hz.
Signal evaluation
The Nivotester analyses the frequency or the voltage signal, and switches the output relay for the level alarm.
The switching state of the relay (energized or de-energized) is displayed on the front panel of the Nivotester by
means of two yellow light emitting diodes.
Fail-safe circuit
The choice of fail-safe circuit affects how the relay works in quiescent current fail-safe mode.
• MAX = Maximum fail-safe mode: the relay de-energizes when the level rises above the switch point (probe
covered), a fault occurs or the power fails. For use with overfill protection, for instance.
• MIN = Minimum fail-safe mode: the relay de-energizes when the level falls below the switch point (probe
uncovered), a fault occurs or the power fails. For use with dry running protection or pump protection, for
instance.
PFM
Level Probe Probe

uncovered covered
NC NO NC NO
MAX
22 23 24 15 16 15 16 22 23 24 15 16 15 16
CH1 CH1
NC NO NC NO
MIN 22 23 24 15 16 15 16 22 23 24 15 16 15 16
CH1 CH1
L00–FTC325xx–15–06–xx–en–001
Function of the point level indicator dependent on the level and fail-safe circuit.
Endress+Hauser 3
Nivotester FTC325
3–WIRE
Level Probe Probe

uncovered covered
MAX
4 5 6 17 15 16 4 5 6 17 15 16
CH1 CH1
MIN
4 5 6 17 15 16 4 5 6 17 15 16
CH1 CH1
L00-FTC325xx-15-06-xx-en-002
Function of the point level indicator dependent on the level and fail-safe circuit.
Function monitoring
To increase operational safety the Nivotester is equipped with a function monitoring facility. A fault is displayed
by the red light emitting diode and de-energizes the relay for the level alarm and the alarm relay. A fault is
reported if the Nivotester is no longer receiving a measuring signal. This occurs, for example, when:
• there is a short-circuit
• the signal line to the sensor is interrupted
• the sensor electronics are defective
• the Nivotester's input switching is defective
After calibration, every further change to the device configuration de-energizes the relay.
A fault message is signaled via the red LED.
Calibration key (red)

Calibration is carried out automatically by means of operating keys. This makes setting via rotary switches
inapplicable.
The test/correction key (green – FTC325 PFM only):

• allows for a function check of the output relay and alarm relay.
• confirms a change in the operating mode - e.g. by changing the switching delay after initial calibration. This
enables a correction of the operating mode without requiring recalibration. The changed settings are saved
by pressing the operating key.
Additional switch functions

• An adjustable switching delay of 0 to 45 s allows for the relay to be switched with a delay when the probe
is covered or uncovered. In the opposite direction, each switching delay is 0.2 s.
• Two-point control (s function, FTC325 3-WIRE)  ä 6
• A potentiometer (rotary switch) for shifting the switch point allows safe operation of the system, even with
media that are prone to buildup.
Measuring device A simple measuring system consists of a capacitance sensor, a Nivotester FTC325 and the control or signal
instruments. The following sensors can be used in conjunction with the electronic inserts (FEIx) listed.
FTC325 PFM FTC325 3-WIRE
Liquicap M FTI51, FTI52 with FEI57S FEI53
Solicap M FTI55, FTI56 with FEI57S FEI53
Solicap S FTI77 with FEI57S FEI53
4 Endress+Hauser
Nivotester FTC325
Probe construction
Example: Material εr Conductivity Build-up Type of probe mounting
full partial with without

insulation insulation ground tube ground tube
Solvents, fuels <3 low low –
Dry bulk solids <3 low low – –
Moist bulk solids >3 average average –
Aqueous liquids low –

>3 strong
and alcohols
strong – –
Sludge >3 strong very strong – –

L00-FTC625xx-05-06-xx-en-000
Nivotester FTC325 PFM Nivotester FTC325 3-WIRE
The measuring system consists of: The measuring system consists of:
• Sensor • Sensor
– capacitance probe – one or two capacitance probes
– electronic insert – electronic insert
– FEI57S – FEI53
• Nivotester FTC325 PFM • Nivotester FTC325 3-WIRE
• Control or signal instruments • Control or signal instruments
Point level detection with FTC325 PFM
FTC325 T
CH1
L00–FTC325xx–14–06–xx–xx–001
Partially or fully insulated probe
Endress+Hauser 5
Nivotester FTC325
Point level detection with FTC325 3-WIRE
3-WIRE
FTC325
CH1
L00-FTC325xx-14-06-xx-xx-002
Partially or fully insulated probe
MAX
Δs 3-WIRE
FTC325
MIN
CH1
L00-FTC325xx-14-06-xx-xx-004
Two-point control with fully insulated probe
1 2
12 3 4 5 6
1 EC61
FEI53 /
EC61
Coaxial cable
3-WIRE
FTC325
Ds
CH1
L00-FTC325xx-14-06-xx-en-001
Two-point control with two fully or partially insulated probes and an electronic insert FEI53.
The probes are connected by a coaxial cable.
6 Endress+Hauser
Nivotester FTC325
Input
Measured variable The limit signal is generated at a MIN or MAX level, depending on the selection
Measuring range The measuring range is dependent on the mounting location of the probes.
Input signal FTC325 PFM

• FTC325 PFM input: galvanically isolated from power supply and output
• Type of protection: intrinsic safety [Ex ia] IIC
• Connectable sensors:
Liquicap M (FTI51, FTI52) with FEI57S
Solicap M (FTI55, FTI56) with FEI57S
Solicap S (FTI77) with FEI57S
• Sensor's power supply: from Nivotester FTC325 PFM
• Connecting cable: two-wire, shielding not required, except for strong electromagnetic interferences (see also
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)  ä 10)
• Cable resistance: max. 25  per wire
• Signal transmission: pulse-frequency modulation (PFM)
FTC325 3-WIRE
• FTC325 3-WIRE input: galvanically isolated from power supply and output
• Type of protection: version for non-hazardous areas
• Connectable sensors:
Liquicap M (FTI51, FTI52) with FEI53S
Solicap M (FTI55, FTI56) with FEI53S
Solicap S (FTI77) with FEI53S
• Sensor's power supply: from Nivotester FTC325 3-WIRE
• Connecting cable: three-wire, shielding not required, except for strong electromagnetic interferences (see
also Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)  ä 10)
• Cable resistance: max. 25  per wire
• Signal transmission: voltage change is transmitted via a separate wire
Endress+Hauser 7
Nivotester FTC325
Output
Output signal FTC325 PFM and FTC325 3-WIRE
• Relay output: a potential-free change-over contact for the level alarm
• Quiescent current fail-safe circuit: MIN/MAX fail-safe mode can be selected using the DIL switch
• Alarm relay: potential-free changeover contact for fault indication; with the PFM version, only two contacts
are available (quote NC (normally closed) or NO (normally open) when ordering a PFM device)
• Switching delay: 0 to 45 s
Relay switches when covering or uncovering the probe, depending on the setting
• Switching capacity of relay contacts:
U~ maximum 253 V
I~ maximum 2 A
P~ maximum 500 VA at cos   0.7
U- maximum 40 V
I- maximum 2 A
P- maximum 80 W
• Service life: at least 105 switching cycles at maximum contact load

• Function indicators: light emitting diodes for operation, level alarm, fault and level signal
(lights up as long as the probe is covered)
Signal on alarm Limit relay de-energized; fault indication via red LED, alarm relay de-energized
Galvanic All input and output channels and relay contacts are provided with secure galvanic isolation from each other.
isolation In the case of simultaneous connection of the power supply circuit or the alarm relay contacts to the functional
extra-low voltage, the secure galvanic isolation is guaranteed up to a voltage of 150 V AC.
Overvoltage category as per II

EN 61010
Protection class II (double or increased insulation)
Power supply
Electrical connection Terminal blocks
The removable terminal blocks are isolated after intrinsically safe connections (top of device) and non-
intrinsically safe connections (bottom of device). Furthermore, the terminal blocks are also color-coded. Blue
is for the intrinsically safe area and gray for the non-intrinsically safe area. These distinctions allow for safe cable
routing.
Sensor connection
(To the upper, blue/gray terminal blocks).
Use a usual commercial instrument cable or multi-core cable for measuring purposes for the connecting cable
between the Nivotester FTC325 and the sensor. Cable resistance of maximum 25  per wire.
If strong electromagnetic interferences have to be expected, e.g. from machines or radios, a shielded cable must
be used. Only connect the shielding to the grounding connection in the sensor, not to the Nivotester.
Use of measuring cell in potentially explosive atmospheres

Compliance with the national explosion protection regulations for the design and laying of intrinsically safe
signal line is mandatory.
High-reliability values for capacitance and inductance are contained in Safety Instructions XA 195F.
Connection of signal and control instruments

(To the lower, gray terminal blocks)
The relay function must be observed dependent on the level and fail-safe circuit.
If a device with high inductance (e.g. contactor, solenoid valve, etc.) is connected, a spark suppressor must be
added to protect the relay contact.
8 Endress+Hauser
Nivotester FTC325
Supply voltage connection

(To the lower, gray terminal blocks)
Voltage versions, see ordering information  ä 14.
A fuse (T 200 mA) is built into the power supply circuit, so that it is not necessary to pre-connect a fine-wire
fuse. The Nivotester is equipped with reverse polarity protection.
Supply voltage Alternating current version (AC):

• Voltage ranges: 85 to 253 V, 50/60 Hz
Direct current version (DC):

• Voltage range: 20 to 60 V
• Power supply direct current: maximum 100 mA
• Permitted residual ripple within the tolerance: Uss = maximum 2 V
Power consumption AC version

maximum 6.0 VA
DC version
maximum 2.0 W (at Umin 20 V)
Installation
Installation instructions Installation location
The Nivotester must be housed outside of hazardous areas in a cabinet. A protective housing ( ä 14
"Accessories") is also available for installation outdoors.
! Note!
The devices should be installed in locations which are protected from direct solar radiation, weather and
impacts. This is of particular importance in hot climates.
Orientation
EX EX
£50 (2) £50 (2) ?

£50 (2)
EN 60715
EX
TH35-7,5/15
mm (in)
L00-FTW325xx-06-06-xx-xx-000
Endress+Hauser 9
Nivotester FTC325
Environment
Ambient temperatures • For single mounting: –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
• For series mounting without lateral spacing: –20 to +50 °C (–4 to +122 °F)
• Storage temperature: –25 to +85 °C (–77 to +185 °F)
• Installation of a maximum of three Nivotester devices in the protective housing: –20 to +40 °C (–4 to +104
°F)
Climatic and mechanical 3K3: in accordance with DIN EN 60721-3-3

application class 3M2: in accordance with DIN EN 60721-3-3
Degree of protection IP20 (as per EN 60529)
Electromagnetic compatibility Interference emission to EN 61326; Equipment Class B

(EMC) Interference immunity to EN 61326; Annex A (Industrial) and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 (EMC)
Mechanical construction
Design, Dimensions: 3-WIRE PFM
dimensions
22,5 (0,89) 45 (1,77) 112 (4,41)
x2 x1
108 (4,25)
95 (3,74)
x2 x1
L00-FTxxxxxx-06-06-xx-xx-004
! Note!
mm (in)
Weight approx. 250 g (8.81 oz)
Materials • Housing: polycarbonate, light gray (RAL 7035)

• Front cover: polypropylene PPN, blue
• Fixing bracket for securing on the DIN rail: polyamide PA6, black (RAL 9005)
10 Endress+Hauser
Nivotester FTC325
Terminals Nivotester FTC325 PFM

• 2 screw terminals: probe supply
• 3 screw terminals: limit relay
• 2 screw terminals: alarm relay
• 2 screw terminals: power supply
Nivotester FTC325 3-WIRE

• 3 screw terminals: probe supply + signal
• 4 screw terminals:
– 3 limit value relay
– 1 for contact 3 of the alarm relay
• 4 screw terminals:
– 2 AC/DC supply (power supply)
– 2 alarm relay
Connection cross-section
maximum 1 x 2.5 mm (0.1 in) or 2 x 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
FTC325 PFM FTC325 3-WIRE

1 1
* *
PFM T
3-WIRE
FTC325 FTW 325
FTC325
2 2
* *
1 2 1 2
* * * *
– + – + S
11 12 22 23 24 11 12 13 4 5 6 17
Probe supply Limit relay Probe supply/ Limit relay

signal
NC NO
L1/L+ N/L– or L1/L+ N/L–
1 2 15 16 15 16 1 2 15 16
Power supply 1 alarm relay Power supply Alarm relay
L00–FTC325xx–04–06–xx–en–001
Endress+Hauser 11
Nivotester FTC325
Operability
Operating concept Onsite configuration with switches behind the folding front panel
Display elements 1. red light emitting diode: fault indication

2. green light emitting diode: standby
3. yellow light emitting diode (left): "limit relay energized"
4. yellow light emitting diode (right): "probe uncovered/covered"
Level indication independent of the selected fail-safe circuit
Operating elements Nivotester FTC325 PFM

A Calibration for covered or uncovered probe
B DIL switch 1–4: switching delay (3 s, 6 s, 12 s, 24 s) = max. 45 s
DIL switch 5: delay when covering or uncovering the probe
DIL switch 6: no function
DIL switch 7: min/max fail-safe mode
DIL switch 8: no function
C Switch point shift for buildup compensation (16-stage)
D Correction key (green)
E Calibration key (red)
A
N
O
1 2
E
B
N
O1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
E
N
O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B D D
- +
11 12
C
2 1
2 3s
1 6s
3
12 s
4
T 24 s
5
6 t S
MIN 7 Offset
MAX
8
L+ L-
L1 N 22 23 24
CH1
1 2 15 16
L00–FTC325xx–03–06–06–xx–001
12 Endress+Hauser
Nivotester FTC325
Operating elements Nivotester FTC325 3-WIRE

A Calibration for covered or uncovered probe
B DIL switch 1–4: switching delay (3 s, 6 s, 12 s, 24 s) = max. 45 s
DIL switch 5: delay when covering or uncovering the probe
DIL switch 6: min/max fail-safe mode
DIL switch 7: two-position controller mode (ON/OFF)
DIL switch 8: calibration switch points (upper/lower) for operation as two-position controller
C Switch point shift for buildup compensation (infinitely variable)
E Calibration key (red)
N
O
1 2 3
E
N
O
1
B E
N
O
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N
O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 8
3362
B
C
3362
X1 X2
– + s
11 12 13
1 2 3 4
3s
2 6s
1 12s
24s
ts
5 6 7 8
T
MIN MAX
Off s
s cal_ s
Offset
4 5 6 17
L+ L-
L1 N
1 2 15 16
L00-FTC325xx-03-06-06-xx-002
Certificates and approvals

CE mark The device meets the legal requirements of the EC Directives.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
Ex approval Endress+Hauser Sales Centers provide information about the currently available versions for use in hazardous
areas (ATEX Ex ia IIC; FM IS; CSA IS).
All the relevant data for explosion protection is contained in separate Ex documentation  ä 14
"Supplementary Documentation", which can be requested.
! Note!
Suitable for powering devices with an IP54 housing in explosive dust atmospheres.
Type of protection [Ex ia] IIC (only for FTC325 PFM)
Overfill protection WHG (only for FTC325 PFM)
Endress+Hauser 13
Nivotester FTC325
Other standards and Other standards and guidelines which were observed during the conceptual design and development of the
guidelines Nivotester FTC325.
• EN 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
• EN 61010: Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use
• EN 61326: Interference emission (Equipment Class B), interference immunity (Annex A - Industrial)
Ordering information
Detailed ordering information is available from the following sources:
• In the Product Configurator on the Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com  Select country 
Instruments  Select device  Product page function: Configure this product
• From your Endress+Hauser Sales Center: www.endress.com/worldwide
! Hinweis! Product Configurator - the tool for individual product configuration

• Up-to-the-minute configuration data
• Depending on the device: Direct input of measuring point-specific information such as measuring range or
operating language
• Automatic verification of exclusion criteria
• Automatic creation of the order code and its breakdown in PDF or Excel output format
• Ability to order directly in the Endress+Hauser Online Shop
Accessories
Protective housing The protective housing in protection class IP66 is equipped with an integrated DIN rail and closed by a
transparent cover, which can also be lead-sealed.
Dimensions:
W/H/D: 180/182/165 (mm); 7,09/7,17/6,5 (in)
Technical data:
• Degree of protection (EN 60529): IP66
• Lower housing section: fiber-glass reinforced polycarbonate, grey
• Upper housing section: polycarbonate, transparent
• Cover screws: polyamide, 4 pieces, 2 of which can be lead-sealed
• Seal: PU seal
• Top-hat rail (EN 50022): galvanized
• Cable entries: 5 pieces M 20x1.5
• Part number: 52010132
Supplementary Documentation
System Information (SI) • Capacitance level measurement
SI00001F/00
Technical Information (TI) Capacitance level probes

• Liquicap M FTI51, FTI52
TI00417F/00
• Solicap M FTI55, FTI56
TI00418F/00
• Solicap S FTI77
TI00433F/00
14 Endress+Hauser
Nivotester FTC325
Protective housing
• Protective housing
TI00367F/00
Operating manual (KA) • Nivotester FTC325 PFM

KA00221F/00
• Nivotester FTC325 3-WIRE
KA00222F/00
Certificates (only for PFM) ATEX:

• Nivotester FTC325, FTC625
XA00195F/00
WHG (DIBt):
• Nivotester FTC325
ZE00211F/00
Endress+Hauser 15
Instruments International
Endress+Hauser
Instruments International AG
Kaegenstrasse 2
4153 Reinach
Switzerland
Tel.+41 61 715 81 00
Fax+41 61 715 25 00
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com
TI00380F/00/EN/13.13
71214509
FM 9.0
71214509
Industrial Ethernet Switch - FL SWITCH SFNB 8TX - 2891002

Ethernet switch, 8 TP RJ45 ports, automatic detection of data transmission speed of 10/100 Mbps (RJ45),
autocrossing function
Product Features
■ Auto negotiation and autocrossing detection simplifies installation and setup
■ Local diagnostic indicators with LEDs
■ RJ45 ports support a transmission speed of 10/100 Mbps
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
GTIN

Technical data
Note
area
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 110 mm
Depth 70 mm
Ambient conditions
Permissible humidity (operation) 5 % ... 95 % (non-condensing)
Permissible humidity (storage/transport) 5 % ... 95 % (non-condensing)
05/23/2016 Page 1 / 4

Technical data
Interfaces
Interface 1 Ethernet (RJ45)
No. of ports 8 (RJ45 ports)
Connection method RJ45
Note on connection method Auto negotiation and autocrossing
Transmission physics Ethernet in RJ45 twisted pair
Function
Unmanaged switch / auto negotiation, complies with IEEE 802.3, store
Basic functions
and forward switching mode
Status and diagnostic indicators LEDs: US, link and activity per port
Network expansion parameters

Cascading depth Network, linear, and star structure: any
Maximum conductor length (twisted pair) 100 m
Supply voltage
Residual ripple 3.6 VPP (within the permitted voltage range)
Supply voltage range 9 V DC ... 32 V DC
Typical current consumption 140 mA (at US = 24 V DC)
Max. current consumption 380 mA (@9 V DC)
General
Type AX Block design
Net weight 385 g
Housing material Aluminum

Noise emission EN 61000-6-4
UL, USA / Canada Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27250501

eCl@ss 4.1 27250501
eCl@ss 5.0 19030117
eCl@ss 5.1 19030117
eCl@ss 6.0 19170106
eCl@ss 7.0 19170106
05/23/2016 Page 2 / 4

Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 8.0 19170106
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000734

ETIM 3.0 EC000734
ETIM 4.0 EC000734
ETIM 5.0 EC000734
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 43172901

UNSPSC 7.0901 43201404
UNSPSC 11 43172015
UNSPSC 12.01 43201410
UNSPSC 13.2 43201410
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / EAC / EAC / KC / cULus Listed
Ex Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / UL Listed / cUL Listed / UL Listed / cUL Listed / cULus Listed
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Listed
cUL Listed
EAC
EAC
05/23/2016 Page 3 / 4

Approvals
KC
cULus Listed

05/23/2016 Page 4 / 4
Industrial Ethernet Switch - FL SWITCH SFN 6TX/2FX - 2891314

Ethernet switch, 6 TP RJ45 ports, 2 FO ports, 100 Mbps full duplex in SC-D format, automatic detection of data
transmission speed of 10 or 100 Mbps (RJ45), autocrossing function
Product Features
■ Auto negotiation and autocrossing detection simplifies installation and setup
■ Local diagnostic indicators with LEDs
■ The switch also offers cable locking and port blocking
■ QoS-prioritized (Quality of Service) messages
■ RJ45 ports support a transmission speed of 10/100 Mbps; fiber optic ports support 100 Mbps
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Technical data
Note
area
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 120 mm
Depth 70 mm
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature (operation) 0 °C ... 60 °C
05/26/2016 Page 1 / 5

Technical data
Ambient conditions
Air pressure (storage/transport) 66 kPa ... 108 kPa (up to 3500 m above mean sea level)
Interfaces
Interface 1 Ethernet (RJ45)
No. of ports 6 (RJ45 ports)
Connection method RJ45
Note on connection method Auto negotiation and autocrossing
Transmission physics Ethernet in RJ45 twisted pair
Interface 2 Fiber optic interface
No. of ports 2 (SC multi-mode)
Connection method SC
Transmission physics multi-mode fiberglass
Transmission speed 100 MBit/s (full duplex)
Transmission length 2000 m (Fiberglass 50/125)
2000 m (Fiberglass 62.5/125)
Wavelength 1300 nm
Function
Unmanaged switch / auto negotiation, complies with IEEE 802.3, store and
Basic functions
forward switching mode
Status and diagnostic indicators LEDs: US, link and activity per port
Network expansion parameters

Cascading depth Network, linear, and star structure: any
Maximum conductor length (twisted pair) 100 m
Supply voltage
Residual ripple 3.6 VPP (within the permitted voltage range)
Supply voltage range 9 V DC ... 32 V DC
Typical current consumption typ. 230 mA (at US = 24 V DC)
General
Type AX Block design
Net weight 365 g
05/26/2016 Page 2 / 5

Technical data
General
Housing material Aluminum

Developed in acc. with standard IEC 61000-6.2
Test standard IEC 61000-4-2 (ESD)
Test result Criterion B
Test standard IEC 61000-4-3 (immunity to radiated interference)
Test result Criterion A
Test standard IEC 61000-4-4 (burst)
Test standard IEC 61000-4-5 (surge)
Test standard IEC 61000-4-6 (immunity to conducted interference)
Test standard IEC 61000-4-8 (immunity to magnetic fields)
Test standard EN 55022 (emitted interference)
Test section 500 V DC 1 min.
Noise emission EN 61000-6-4
Vibration (storage/transport) 5g, 150 Hz, in acc. with IEC 60068-2-6
Free from substances that could impair the application of coating In acc. with VW specification
Vibration (operation) In acc. with IEC 60068-2-6: 5g, 150 Hz
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27250501

eCl@ss 4.1 27250501
eCl@ss 5.0 27250501
eCl@ss 5.1 27250501
eCl@ss 6.0 19170106
eCl@ss 7.0 19170106
eCl@ss 8.0 19170106
05/26/2016 Page 3 / 5

Classifications
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000734

ETIM 3.0 EC000734
ETIM 4.0 EC000734
ETIM 5.0 EC000734
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 43172015

UNSPSC 7.0901 43201404
UNSPSC 11 43172015
UNSPSC 12.01 43201410
UNSPSC 13.2 43201410
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / EAC / EAC / KC / cULus Listed
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Listed
cUL Listed
EAC
05/26/2016 Page 4 / 5

Approvals
EAC
KC
cULus Listed

05/26/2016 Page 5 / 5
Electronic Weight Sensors
OL3000 A, WT1, WT2
Weight sensors WT1 & WT2

Article number: WT1 & WT2
Application areas: Weight sensors for hoisting equipment
Accuracy: WT1; 10%
WT2; 5% Overload use; 1% WT1
Output: Balanced signal
Power supply: 5V Dc
Size: WT1; 100 x 65 x 40-50 mm
WT2; 15 x 60 x 52-80 mm
Wire size: WT1; 6-15 mm, 0-3,5T on the unit
WT2; 14-28 mm, 0-8,5T on the unit

Amplifier OL3000A & OL3000C
Article number: OL3000A, OL3000c
Application: Amplifier for weight sensors,
Din rail mounted
Accuracy: < 0,1%
Output 4-20 mA
Size: 54 x 90 x 61 mm WT2
Features: relays (nO) triggers at a user set level
OL3000 A
EZ-LIGHT® TL50HZ High Brightness
Universal AC Voltage Tower Light
Datasheet
Multi-Color General-Purpose or Audible Indicators
• Similar in design and construction to standard TL50 Tower Lights, but

more than 4 times brighter, improving visibility in areas with high levels
of ambient light.
• Rugged, cost-effective, and easy-to-install multi-segment indicators
• Illuminated segments provide easy-to-see operator guidance and
indication of equipment status
• Displays up to 5 colors
• Available in black or light gray housing
• Audible models available with standard, sealed, or omni-directional
audible element
• Compact devices are completely self-contained - no controller needed
• 85 to 264 V ac operation
• No assembly required
Non-Audible Models
Model1 # of LED Colors LED Function2 Connection3 Inputs
TL50HZR 1 Red
TL50HZGR 2 Green, Red 4-wire PVC cable
TL50HZGYR 3 Green, Yellow, Red 85-264 V ac
TL50HZBGYR 4 Blue, Green, Yellow, Red 5-wire PVC cable
TL50HZWBGYR 5 White, Blue, Green, Yellow, Red 6-wire PVC cable
NOTE: Audible Models are listed on the next page.
For additional models and colors, visit Banner Engineering website at www.bannerengineering.com.
1 Cabled Black models only are listed. For gray housing, add suffix C at the end of the model number (cabled models) or before the QP (pigtail
models), for example, TL50HZRC or TL50HZRCQP.
2 The first color listed is the bottom color, going up in successive order. Contact the factory for other colors and color combinations. Five color
options are only available in non-audible cabled models. Four color options are only available in audible cabled models.
3 Cabled models only are listed; mating cordset required for pigtail models (see Cordsets on page 4). For 150 mm (5.9 in) PVC pigtail with QD,
add QP to the end of the model number, for example, TL50HZRQP.
Original Document 25 August 2015

169422 Rev. E
169422
EZ-LIGHT® TL50HZ High Brightness Universal AC Voltage Tower Light
Audible Models
# of LED
Standard Audible Models4 LED Function5 Connection6 Inputs
Colors
TL50HZRA 1 Red
4-wire PVC cable
TL50HZGRA 2 Green, Red
85-264 V
ac
TL50HZGYRA 3 Green, Yellow, Red 5-wire PVC cable
TL50HZBGYRA 4 Blue, Green, Yellow, Red 6-wire PVC cable
Sealed Audible Models4

# of LED
LED Function5 Connection6 Inputs
Colors
Continuous Pulsed at 1.6 Hz Staccato
TL50HZRALS TL50HZRALS3 TL50HZRALS4 1 Red

4-wire PVC cable
TL50HZGRALS TL50HZGRALS3 TL50HZGRALS4 2 Green, Red
85-264 V
ac
TL50HZGYRALS TL50HZGYRALS3 TL50HZGYRALS4 3 Green, Yellow, Red 5-wire PVC cable
TL50HZBGYRALS TL50HZBGYRALS3 TL50HZBGYRALS4 4 Blue, Green, Yellow, Red 6-wire PVC cable
Omni-Directional Sealed Audible Models4

# of LED
Colors
TL50HZRAOS TL50HZRAOS3 TL50HZRAOS4 1 Red

4-wire PVC cable
TL50HZGRAOS TL50HZGRAOS3 TL50HZGRAOS4 2 Green, Red
85-264 V
ac
TL50HZGYRAOS TL50HZGYRAOS3 TL50HZGYRAOS4 3 Green, Yellow, Red 5-wire PVC cable
TL50HZBGYRAOS TL50HZBGYRAOS3 TL50HZBGYRAOS4 4 Blue, Green, Yellow, Red 6-wire PVC cable
Omni-Directional Sealed Audible Models with Intensity

Adjustment4 # of LED
Colors
TL50HZRAOSI TL50HZRAOS3I TL50HZRAOS4I 1 Red

4-wire PVC cable
TL50HZGRAOSI TL50HZGRAOS3I TL50HZGRAOS4I 2 Green, Red
85-264 V
ac
TL50HZGYRAOSI TL50HZGYRAOS3I TL50HZGYRAOS4I 3 Green, Yellow, Red 5-wire PVC cable
TL50HZBGYRAOSI TL50HZBGYRAOS3I TL50HZBGYRAOS4I 4 Blue, Green, Yellow, Red 6-wire PVC cable
Specifications
Supply Voltage and Current Supply Protection Circuitry
85–264 V ac; 50 or 60 Hz Protected against reverse polarity and transient voltages
Indicators—maximum current per LED color: Input Response Time
80 mA at 85 V ac Indicator On/Off: 500 ms (maximum)
60 mA at 120 V ac Connections
40 mA at 240 V ac 4-wire, 5-wire, or 6-wire 2 m (6.5 ft) integral cable; 4-pin or 5-pin 150
35 mA at 264 V ac mm (6 in) PVC pigtail with QD, depending on model
Standard Audible Alarm: 30 mA maximum current Indicators

Sealed Audible Alarm: 35 mA maximum current LEDs are independently selected; 1 to 5 colors (Green, Red, Yellow,
Omni-Directional Sealed Audible Alarm: 45 mA maximum current Blue, White) depending on model
4 Cabled Black models only are listed. For gray housing, add suffix C at the end of the model number (cabled models) or before the QP (pigtail
models), for example, TL50HZRC or TL50HZRCQP.
5 The first color listed is the bottom color, going up in successive order. Contact the factory for other colors and color combinations. Five color
options are only available in non-audible cabled models. Four color options are only available in audible cabled models.
6 Cabled models only are listed; mating cordset required for pigtail models (see Cordsets on page 4). For 150 mm (5.9 in) PVC pigtail with QD,
add QP to the end of the model number, for example, TL50HZRQP.
2 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: +1-763-544-3164 P/N 169422 Rev. E

Audible Adjustment Audible Alarm

Standard Audible Alarm: Unscrew the cover (up to 1.5 turns Standard Audible Alarm: 2.7 kHz ± 500 Hz oscillation frequency;
maximum) to adjust the audible intensity. (Do not exceed 1.5 turns or maximum intensity 92 dB at 1 m (3.3 ft) (typical)
the cover may detach during operation.) For maximum intensity, rotate Sealed Audible Alarm: 2.9 kHz ± 250 Hz oscillation frequency;
the center plug 180° counterclockwise to remove it. maximum intensity 94 dB at 1 m (3.3 ft) (typical)
Sealed Audible Alarm and Omni-Directional Sealed Audible Omni-Directional Sealed Audible Alarm: 2.1 kHz ± 250 Hz
Alarm with Intensity Adjustment: Rotate the front cover until the oscillation frequency; maximum intensity 99 dB at 1 m (3.3 ft) (typical)
desired intensity is reached. Omni-Directional Sealed Audible Alarm with Intensity
Omni-Directional Sealed Audible Alarm: No adjustment. Adjustment: 2.1 kHz ± 250 Hz oscillation frequency; maximum
Leakage Current Immunity intensity 95 dB at 1 m (3.3 ft) (typical)
500 µA Construction
Application Note: The use of relay output PLC is recommended since Bases and Covers: ABS
there is no leakage current. Solid state output PLCs often have leakage Light Segment: Polycarbonate
current above 1 mA and, therefore, turn the light on in the off state. To
counteract the leakage current, a shunt resistor must be used. A
resistor must be applied from the neutral wire of the device to the hot
wire of each channel of the device.
Operating Conditions Required Overcurrent Protection

Non-Audible:−40 °C to +50 °C (−40 °F to +122 °F)
Standard and Sealed Audible: −20 °C to +50 °C (−4 °F to +122 °F) WARNING: Electrical connections must be
95% at +50 °C maximum relative humidity (non-condensing) made by qualified personnel in accordance
with local and national electrical codes and
Vibration and Mechanical Shock regulations.
All models meet Mil Std. 202F requirements. Method 201A (vibration:
10 to 60 Hz max., double amplitude 0.06", maximum acceleration Overcurrent protection is required to be provided by end product
10G). Also meets IEC 947-5-2 requirements: 30G 11 ms duration, half application per the supplied table.
sine wave. Overcurrent protection may be provided with external fusing or via
Environmental Rating Current Limiting, Class 2 Power Supply.
Non-Audible and Sealed Audible: IEC IP67 Supply wiring leads < 24 AWG shall not be spliced.
Standard Audible: IEC IP50 For additional product support, go to http://
www.bannerengineering.com.
Certifications
Supply Wiring Required Overcurrent Protection
(AWG) (Amps)
20 5.0
22 3.0
24 2.0
26 1.0
28 0.8
30 0.5
Dimensions
Tower Height (H)

4x 26.9
# of
[1.06] Colors Omni-Directional
Non-Audible Standard Audible* Sealed Audible
Sealed Audible
H
1 130.2 mm (5.1 in) 161.0 mm (6.3 in) 184.1 mm (7.2 in) 198.1 mm (7.8 in)
2 170.9 mm (6.7 in) 201.7 mm (7.9 in) 224.8 mm (8.9 in) 238.8 mm (9.4 in)
19
[0.75] 3 211.6 mm (8.3 in) 242.4 mm (9.5 in) 265.5 mm (10.5 in) 279.5 mm (11.0 in)
M30 x 1.5 4 252.3 mm (9.9 in) 283.1 mm (11.1 in) 306.2 mm (12.1 in) 320.2 mm (12.6 in)
45 5 293.0 mm (11.5 in) - - -

[1.77]
Ø50
1/2-14 NPSM [1.97]
* Tower height (H) with top unscrewed approximately 3.5 mm to allow sound to escape
P/N 169422 Rev. E www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: +1-763-544-3164 3

Wiring Diagram
4-wire 5-wire 6-wire
Indicator 3
Color Neutral
Indicator 3 1 85-264V ac
Color Neutral C1 Hot
Indicator 4
Neutral 1 85-264V ac
Color 2
C1 Hot C2
1 85-264V ac
C1 Hot 2 4
C2 C3
2
C2/A 4 5
C3 C4
3
C3/A 5
C4/A 6
C5/A
1 = Brown C1 = Color 1 1 = Brown C1 = Color 1 1 = Brown C1 = Color 1

2 = Blue C2 = Color 2 2 = Blue C2 = Color 2 2 = Blue C2 = Color 2
3 = Black C3 = Color 3 3 = White C3 = Color 3 3 = White C3 = Color 3
4 = White A = Audible 4 = Black C4 = Color 4 4 = Black C4 = Color 4
5 = Gray A = Audible 5 = Gray C5 = Color 5
6 = Red A = Audible
Accessories
Cordsets
4-Pin Micro-Style Cordsets
Model Length Style Dimensions Pinout (Female)
MQAC2-406 1.83 m (6 ft)

3 4
MQAC2-415 4.57 m (15 ft) 42 Typ.
1
Straight 2
1/2-20 UNF-28 1 = Brown
MQAC2-430 9.14 m (30 ft)
ø 14.5 2 = Blue
3 = Black
4 = White
5-Pin Micro-Style Cordsets
Model Length Style Dimensions Pinout
MQAC2-506 1.83 m (6 ft)
MQAC2-515 4.57 m (15 ft) 3 4

42 Typ.
2
1 5
Straight
1/2-20 UNF-28
MQAC2-530 9.14 m (30 ft) 1 = Brown
ø 14.5
2 = Blue
3 = White
4 = Black
5 = Gray
4 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: +1-763-544-3164 P/N 169422 Rev. E

Mounting Brackets
SMB30A 45 SMB30FA
• Right-angle bracket with • Swivel bracket with tilt and 83.2
curved slot for versatile C pan movement for precise
orientation 61 adjustment
• Clearance for M6 (¼ in) B • Mounting hole for 30 mm
hardware sensor
A 36.3 B 68.9
• Mounting hole for 30 mm • 12-ga. 304 stainless steel
sensor 69 • Easy sensor mounting to A
• 12-ga. stainless steel extrude rail T-slot
• Metric and inch size bolt
Hole center spacing: A to B=40 available
Hole size: A=ø 6.3, B= 27.1 x 6.3, C=ø 30.5
Bolt thread: SMB30FA, A= 3/8 - 16 x 2 in; SMB30FAM10, A= M10 -
1.5 x 50
Hole size: B= ø 30.1
45
SMB30MM SMBAMS30P
70 57
• 12-ga. stainless steel bracket • Flat SMBAMS series bracket C
with curved mounting slots • 30 mm hole for mounting
for versatile orientation C sensors A
57 93
• Clearance for M6 (¼ in) • Articulation slots for 90°+
B B
hardware rotation
• Mounting hole for 30 mm • 12-ga. 300 series stainless
A
sensor steel
Hole center spacing: A = 51, A to B = 25.4 Hole center spacing: A=26.0, A to B=13.0
Hole size: A = 42.6 x 7, B = ø 6.4, C = ø 30.1 Hole size: A=26.8 x 7.0, B=ø 6.5, C=ø 31.0
67
SMBAMS30RA SMB30SC
45
• Right-angle SMBAMS series • Swivel bracket with 30 mm B
bracket C mounting hole for sensor
• 30 mm hole for mounting 53 • Black reinforced 58
A
sensors thermoplastic polyester
B
• Articulation slots for 90°+ • Stainless steel mounting and
rotation swivel locking hardware
48 29
• 12-ga. (2.6 mm) cold-rolled included A
steel
Hole center spacing: A=ø 50.8
Hole center spacing: A=26.0, A to B=13.0 Hole size: A=ø 7.0, B=ø 30.0
Hole size: A=26.8 x 7.0, B=ø 6.5, C=ø 31.0
All measurements are listed in millimeters (inches), unless noted otherwise.
LMB Sealed Right-Angle Bracket

Model Description Construction
LMB30RA Black polycarbonate

Direct-Mount Models: Bracket kit with base, 30
mm adapter, set screw, fasteners, o-rings, and
LMB30RAC gaskets Gray polycarbonate
LMBE12RA Pipe-Mount Models: Bracket kit with base, ½-14 Black polycarbonate
pipe adapter, set screw, fasteners, o-rings, and
gaskets. For use with stand-off pipe (listed and
LMBE12RAC Gray polycarbonate
sold separately)
P/N 169422 Rev. E www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: +1-763-544-3164 5

Elevated Mount System

Model Features Components
SA-M30TE12 - Black Acetal • Streamlined black acetal or white UHMW stand-

off pipe adapter/cover
• Connects between 30 mm light base and ½ in.
SA-M30TE12C - White UHMW NPSM/DN15 pipe
• Mounting hardware included
Polished 304 Black Anodized Clear Anodized

Stainless Steel Aluminum Aluminum
SOP-E12-150SS SOP-E12-150A SOP-E12-150AC • Elevated-use stand-off pipe (½ in. NPSM/DN15)

150 mm (6 in) long 150 mm (6 in) long 150 mm (6 in) long • Polished 304 stainless steel, black anodized
aluminum, or clear anodized aluminum surface
SOP-E12-300SS SOP-E12-300A SOP-E12-300AC • ½ in. NPT thread at both ends
300 mm (12 in) long 300 mm (12 in) long 300 mm (12 in) long • Compatible with most industrial environments
SOP-E12-900SS SOP-E12-900A SOP-E12-900AC

900 mm (36 in) long 900 mm (36 in) long 900 mm (36 in) long
SA-E12M30 - Black Acetal • Streamlined black acetal or white UHMW

mounting base adapter/cover
• Connects between ½ in. NPSM/DN15 pipe and 30
SA-E12M30C - White UHMW mm (1-3/16 in) drilled hole
• Mounting hardware included
Pipe Mounting Flange

Pipe Mounting Flange
Model Features Construction
1/2-14 54
• For use elevated stand-off pipes (½ NPSM
4x ø5.5
in, NPSM/DN15) Die-cast zinc base with
SA-F12 ø28
• M5 mounting hardware and nitrile black paint
gasket included 10 ø70
Banner Engineering Corp. Limited Warranty

Banner Engineering Corp. warrants its products to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one year following the date of shipment. Banner Engineering Corp.
will repair or replace, free of charge, any product of its manufacture which, at the time it is returned to the factory, is found to have been defective during the warranty
period. This warranty does not cover damage or liability for misuse, abuse, or the improper application or installation of the Banner product.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE), AND WHETHER ARISING UNDER COURSE OF PERFORMANCE, COURSE
OF DEALING OR TRADE USAGE.
This Warranty is exclusive and limited to repair or, at the discretion of Banner Engineering Corp., replacement. IN NO EVENT SHALL BANNER ENGINEERING CORP. BE
LIABLE TO BUYER OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY EXTRA COSTS, EXPENSES, LOSSES, LOSS OF PROFITS, OR ANY INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY PRODUCT DEFECT OR FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT, WHETHER
ARISING IN CONTRACT OR WARRANTY, STATUTE, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHERWISE.
Banner Engineering Corp. reserves the right to change, modify or improve the design of the product without assuming any obligations or liabilities relating to any product
previously manufactured by Banner Engineering Corp.
www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: +1-763-544-3164

1D Gyro sensor + inclination sensor with current
interface
IS1A45G015P58
Characteristics:
1-dimensional inclination sensor with measurement

range ±45°
1- dimensional gyro sensor with measurement
range ±15 °/s
4...20 mA current interface
5-pole M12 sensor connector
Robust, impact-resistant plastic housing
Suitable for industrial and mobile use:
- Temperature range: - 40 °C ... + 80 °C
- Degree of protection: IP65/67
The combined gyro-inclination sensor is suitable to measure the rotational speed and inclination of one axis.
The full-scale readings are calibrated factory made at 25 °C.
The extremely robust plastic housing makes the sensor a suitable angle measurement device in rough
surroundings for different applications.
Applications:
Agricultural and forestry machines

Marine applications
Utility vehicles
Cranes and hoisting technology
Industry automation
Document: PR-24950-00-DB-1-4-E-IS1A45G015P58 Page: 1/3

Technical Data:
General Parameters: Ta = 25 °C
Measurement axes 1 axis
Measurement range gyro / inclination ± 15 °/s ± 45°
Resolution (at zero point) gyro / 0.015 °/s 0.05°
inclination
Nonlinearity gyro / inclination (sine) max. ± 0.035 °/s ± 0.3°
Temperature coefficient (zero point) max. 0.005 °/s/K 0.025°
gyro / inclination
Cross sensitivity max. 5 %
Critical frequency gyro / inclination typically 7 Hz / 7 Hz (other values on request)
Operating temperature - 40 °C ... 80 °C
Characteristics
Interface Current loop 4...20 mA ; max. burden-resistor at U=11 V : 250 Ohm
Calculation formula
Gyro value [°/s] / Angle value [°]  Imeas−12mA
8 mA ∗range value arcsin
[ 
Imeas −12 mA
8 mA
∗sin rangevalue
]
Electrical Parameters
Supply voltage 11 V DC ... 30 V DC
Current consumption max. 120 mA
Mechanical Parameters
Connector 5-pole M12 sensor connector, IEC 61076-2-101, IEC 60947-2
Mounting 4 x hexagon socket screws M5 DIN 912; Strongly recommended: use 4x spring washers
DIN 6796 when mounting this sensor!
Degree of Protection IP65/67 min locking torque of the sensor connector: 0.9 Nm
Shock survival max. 3 500 g
Dimensions 66 mm x 90 mm x 36 mm
Weight about 200 g
Standards
ISO13766 (earthmoving machines Test pulse 5 min Level 1
EMC)
ISO 10605:2001 Severity level IV: direct discharge ± 8 kV ; air discharge ± 15 kV
VDE 0879-2:1999, CISPR25 radio Measured with absorber room method
interference suppression Narrow band peak value: @ 0.15 MHz...1 GHz max 19 dB (µV/m)
Broad band peak value: @ 0.15 MHz...1 GHz max 35 dB (µV/m)
ISO 7637-2: 2004 (24 V System) 27 V Impulses 1-4: severity level 3; Impulse 5: severity level 1
ISO 11452-5: 2005 strip line AM 80 % 1 kHz 60 V/m
IEC 60068-2-6 vibration sinusoidal, 3 5 – 2000 Hz; ± 1, 5 mm (p-p) / 30 ms-2; transit frequency 57 Hz
axis cycle rate 1 Okt./min; test duration 2 hrs each in 3 axis (X, Y, Z)
IEC 60068-2-27 Ea shock transport, 3 50 g, 11 ms, 1/s, 3/axis
axis
DIN-IEC 60068-2-14 Na TW (-40... Transition period 1 min; retention period 1 h; 5 cycles; specimen passive
+80)°C
DIN EN 60068-2-14 Test Nb (-40... Temperature gradient 3 K/min; retention period 1 h; 5 cycles; specimen active
+80)°C
DIN-IEC 60068-2-2Bb (B dry heat) +85 °C
DIN-IEC 60068-2-2 Ab (test group A low -40 °C
temperature)
DIN-IEC 60068-2-32 1x free fall per axis from 1 m height

Dimensioned Drawing:
Plug Connector Allocation:
Pin Allocation
1 Supply voltage (V+)
2 Sensor signal gyro (Gyro-OUT)
3 GND supply (V- / GND)
4 Sensor signal inclination (INCL-OUT)
5 Reference potential for sensor signal
(GND-SENS)
Order information:
Product type Description/Distinction Article number

IS1A45G015P58 1-dimensional, inclination ± 45°, gyro ± 15 °/s, 4 ... 20 mA PR-24950-00
© 2012 GEMAC - Gesellschaf t f ür Mikroelektronikanwendung Chemnitz mbH Datum: 25.01.12

Subject to changes without notice · Any kind of duplication, reprocessing and translation of this document as well as excerpts f rom it require the written
permission of GEMAC - Gesellschaf t f ür Mikroelektronikanwendung Chemnitz mbH.

FO converters - FL MC EF WDM-A SC - 2902658

FO converter (replacement device A), for full duplex transmission from 10/100Base-T(X) to individual simplex
fiberglass with WDM (wavelength division multiplex) technology, SC simplex fiber optic connection (1310/1550
nm). Device set (type A and type B) required for operation.
Product Features
■ Full duplex communication with only one fiber
■ Transmission ranges up to 38 km
■ Auto negotiation
■ Auto MDI/MDI-X switch-over
■ Link fault pass through (LFP) and far end fault (FEF) functions for easy connection monitoring
■ Data rates 10/100 Mbps
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Technical data
Note
area
Dimensions
Width 22.5 mm
Height 99 mm
Depth 114.5 mm
Ambient conditions
05/26/2016 Page 1 / 7

Technical data
Ambient conditions
Altitude 5000 m (For restrictions see manufacturer's declaration)
2000 m (With UL approval)
General
Electrical isolation according to IEEE 802.3
VCC // FE // Ethernet
± 1.3 µs (Store&Forward mode, 10/100 Mbps, depending on the frame
Latency
size)
Test voltage data interface/power supply 1.5 kVrms (50 Hz, 1 min.)
Standards/regulations EN 60950-1
Electromagnetic compatibility Conformance with EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
Net weight 120 g
Housing material PA 6.6-FR
Color green
492 Years (Telcordia standard, 25°C temperature, 21% operating cycle (5
MTBF
days a week, 8 hours a day))
133 Years (Telcordia standard, 40°C temperature, 34.25% operating cycle
(5 days a week, 12 hours a day))
1400 Years (SN 29500 standard, temperature 25°C, operating cycle 21 %
MTTF
599 Years (SN 29500 standard, temperature 40 °C, operating cycle 34.25
% (5 days a week, 12 hours a day))
101 Years (SN 29500 standard, temperature 40°C, operating cycle 100 %
Conformance CE-compliant
 II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc X (Please follow the special installation
ATEX
instructions in the documentation!)
UL, USA / Canada cULus listed UL 508
Class I, Zone 2, AEx nA IIC T4
Class I, Zone 2, Ex nA IIC T4 Gc X
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Power supply
Supply voltage range 18 V DC ... 30 V DC (Screw connection)
18 V DC ... 30 V DC (as an alternative or redundant, via backplane bus
contact and system current supply)
05/26/2016 Page 2 / 7

Technical data
Power supply
Typical current consumption < 110 mA (24 V DC)
Protective circuit Reverse polarity protection
Connection method Plug-in screw terminal block (COMBICON), redundancy possible
Max. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 14
Min. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 24
Serial interface
Interface 1 Ethernet interface, 10/100BASE-T(X) in acc. with IEEE 802.3u
Connection method RJ45 socket, shielded
Transmission medium Copper
Transmission length 100 m (twisted pair, shielded)
Auto-negotiation modes Auto
Link through Link fault pass through
Basic functions Store-and-forward media converter
MDI-/MDI-X switchover Auto-MDI(X)
Signal LEDs Activity, link status, 10/100 Mbps
Optical interface FO
Transmit capacity, minimum ≥ -14 dBm ((9/125 µm) dynamic in link mode (average))
Transmit capacity, maximum ≤ -8 dBm ((9/125 µm) dynamic in link mode (average))
Minimum receiver sensitivity -31 dBm (dynamic in link mode (average))
Overrange receiver -3 dBm (dynamic in link mode (average))
Wavelength 1310 nm
1550 nm
Transmission length incl. 3 dB system reserve 38 km (With F-E 9/125 0.36 dB/km)
34 km (With F-E 9/125 0.4 dB/km)
05/26/2016 Page 3 / 7

Technical data
28 km (With F-E 9/125 0.5 dB/km)
21 km (with F-G 62,5/125 0,7 dB/km F 1000)
5.5 km (with F-G 62.5/125 2.6 dB/km F 600)
21 km (with F-G 50/125 0,7 dB/km F 1200)
9 km (with F-G 50/125 1,6 dB/km F 800)
Transmission medium Multi-mode fiberglass
Single-mode fiberglass
Connection method SC simplex

Type of test Free fall in acc. with IEC 60068-2-32
Test result 1m
Type of test Vibration resistance in acc. with EN 60068-2-6/IEC 60068-2-6
Test result 5g, 10-150 Hz, 2.5 h, in XYZ direction
Type of test Shock in acc. with EN 60068-2-27/IEC 60068-2-27
Test result 25g, 11 ms period, half-sine shock pulse
Free from substances that could impair the application of coating according to P-VW 3.10.7 57 65 0 VW-AUDI-Seat central standard
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
Designation Air clearances and creepage distances
ATEX  II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc X
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27230207

eCl@ss 4.1 27230207
05/26/2016 Page 4 / 7

Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 5.0 27230207
eCl@ss 5.1 27230207
eCl@ss 6.0 27230207
eCl@ss 7.0 27230207
eCl@ss 8.0 19179290
eCl@ss 9.0 19179290
ETIM
ETIM 3.0 EC000310

ETIM 4.0 EC000310
ETIM 5.0 EC001467
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211506

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121008
UNSPSC 11 39121008
UNSPSC 12.01 39121008
UNSPSC 13.2 39121008
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / DNV / cULus Listed
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Listed
05/26/2016 Page 5 / 7

Approvals
cUL Listed
DNV
cULus Listed
Drawings
Dimensional drawing Schematic diagram
1 2 3 4
114,5 22,5
11 VCC
VCC 10 FEF
LINK
FEF
LINK 9
5
99
8 2
6
FL MC EF WDM-A SC
Ord.-No.: 29 02 658 7 FL MC EF WDM-A SC
Ord.-No.: 29 02 658
Front view
Schematic diagram Schematic diagram
10 1 2
D
N
G
2
S
U
D
N
G
1
S
U
ON 6
1 1
D
N
G
2
S
U
D
N
G
1
S
U
C
VC
F
FE
K
LIN
C
VC
F
FE
K
LIN
3 11
MC o.
FL rd.-N
O
00
MM4
13 0285
EF 29
ST
9
8 00
MM4
85
13 02
ST
4
7
EF 29
MC o.
FL rd.-N
O
Connect SC simplex plug 6

5
Function elements
05/26/2016 Page 6 / 7

Schematic diagram
LED permanent flashing
FL MC EF 1300
GN - VCC Device ON
RD - FEF Far End Fault
YE - LINK Link FO Activity FO
GN - RJ45 Full Duplex
GN/YE - RJ45 100/10 MBit/s Activity CU
DIP ON OFF (DEFAULT)

6 Local Link Link Pass Through
5 not used not used
4 Pass Pause Frame Drop Pause Frame
3 Half Duplex Full Duplex
2 10 MBit/s 100 MBit/s
1 Fixed Data Rate Autonegotiation
ON
6
DIP switches
Block diagram

05/26/2016 Page 7 / 7
FO converters - FL MC EF WDM-B SC - 2902659

FO converter (replacement device B), for full duplex transmission from 10/100Base-T(X) to individual simplex
fiberglass with WDM (wavelength division multiplex) technology, SC simplex fiber optic connection (1550/1310
nm). Device set (type A and type B) required for operation.
Product Features
■ Full duplex communication with only one fiber
■ Transmission ranges up to 38 km
■ Auto negotiation
■ Auto MDI/MDI-X switch-over
■ Link fault pass through (LFP) and far end fault (FEF) functions for easy connection monitoring
■ Data rates 10/100 Mbps
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Technical data
Note
area
Dimensions
Width 22.5 mm
Height 99 mm
Depth 114.5 mm
Ambient conditions
05/26/2016 Page 1 / 7

Technical data
Ambient conditions
Altitude 5000 m (For restrictions see manufacturer's declaration)
2000 m (With UL approval)
General
VCC // FE // Ethernet
± 1.3 µs (Store&Forward mode, 10/100 Mbps, depending on the frame
Latency
size)
Test voltage data interface/power supply 1.5 kVrms (50 Hz, 1 min.)
Net weight 120 g
Housing material PA 6.6-FR
Color green
492 Years (Telcordia standard, 25°C temperature, 21% operating cycle (5
MTBF
days a week, 8 hours a day))
133 Years (Telcordia standard, 40°C temperature, 34.25% operating cycle
 II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc X (Please follow the special installation
ATEX
instructions in the documentation!)
Power supply
Supply voltage range 18 V DC ... 30 V DC (Screw connection)
18 V DC ... 30 V DC (as an alternative or redundant, via backplane bus
contact and system current supply)
Typical current consumption < 110 mA (24 V DC)
Protective circuit Reverse polarity protection
Connection method Plug-in screw terminal block (COMBICON), redundancy possible
05/26/2016 Page 2 / 7

Technical data
Power supply
Max. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 14
Min. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 24
Serial interface
Interface 1 Ethernet interface, 10/100BASE-T(X) in acc. with IEEE 802.3u
Connection method RJ45 socket, shielded
Transmission medium Copper
Transmission length 100 m (twisted pair, shielded)
Auto-negotiation modes Auto
Link through Link fault pass through
Basic functions Store-and-forward media converter
MDI-/MDI-X switchover Auto-MDI(X)
Signal LEDs Activity, link status, 10/100 Mbps
Transmit capacity, minimum ≥ ((9/125 µm) dynamic in link mode (average))
Transmit capacity, maximum ≤ -8 dBm ((9/125 µm) dynamic in link mode (average))
Minimum receiver sensitivity min. -31 dBm (dynamic in link mode (average))
Overrange receiver -3 dBm (dynamic in link mode (average))
Wavelength 1550 nm
1310 nm
Transmission length incl. 3 dB system reserve 38 km (With F-E 9/125 0.36 dB/km)
34 km (With F-E 9/125 0.4 dB/km)
28 km (With F-E 9/125 0.5 dB/km)
21 km (with F-G 62,5/125 0,7 dB/km F 1000)
5.5 km (with F-G 62.5/125 2.6 dB/km F 600)
21 km (with F-G 50/125 0,7 dB/km F 1200)
9 km (with F-G 50/125 1,6 dB/km F 800)
Transmission medium Multi-mode fiberglass
05/26/2016 Page 3 / 7

Technical data
Single-mode fiberglass
Connection method SC simplex

Type of test Free fall in acc. with IEC 60068-2-32
Test result 1m
Type of test Vibration resistance in acc. with EN 60068-2-6/IEC 60068-2-6
Test result 5g, 10-150 Hz, 2.5 h, in XYZ direction
Type of test Shock in acc. with EN 60068-2-27/IEC 60068-2-27
Test result 25g, 11 ms period, half-sine shock pulse
Free from substances that could impair the application of coating according to P-VW 3.10.7 57 65 0 VW-AUDI-Seat central standard
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
Designation Air clearances and creepage distances
ATEX  II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc X
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27230207

eCl@ss 4.1 27230207
eCl@ss 5.0 27230207
eCl@ss 5.1 27230207
eCl@ss 6.0 27230207
eCl@ss 7.0 27230207
eCl@ss 8.0 19179290
eCl@ss 9.0 19179290
05/26/2016 Page 4 / 7

Classifications
ETIM
ETIM 3.0 EC000310

ETIM 4.0 EC000310
ETIM 5.0 EC001467
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211506

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121008
UNSPSC 11 39121008
UNSPSC 12.01 39121008
UNSPSC 13.2 39121008
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / DNV / cULus Listed
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Listed
cUL Listed
DNV
05/26/2016 Page 5 / 7

Approvals
cULus Listed
Drawings
Dimensional drawing Schematic diagram
1 2 3 4
114,5 22,5
11 VCC
VCC 10 FEF
LINK
FEF
LINK 9
5
99
8 2
6
FL MC EF WDM-A SC
Ord.-No.: 29 02 658 7 FL MC EF WDM-A SC
Ord.-No.: 29 02 658
Front view
Schematic diagram Schematic diagram
10 1 2
D
N
G
2
S
U
D
N
G
1
S
U
ON 6
1 1
D
N
G
2
S
U
D
N
G
1
S
U
C
VC
F
FE
K
LIN
C
VC
F
FE
K
LIN
3 11
MC o.
FL rd.-N
O
00
MM4
85
13 02
EF 29
ST
9
8 00
MM4
13 0285
ST
4
7
EF 29
MC o.
FL rd.-N
O
Connect SC simplex plug 6

5
Function elements
05/26/2016 Page 6 / 7

Schematic diagram
LED permanent flashing
FL MC EF 1300
GN - VCC Device ON
RD - FEF Far End Fault
YE - LINK Link FO Activity FO
GN - RJ45 Full Duplex
GN/YE - RJ45 100/10 MBit/s Activity CU
DIP ON OFF (DEFAULT)

6 Local Link Link Pass Through
5 not used not used
4 Pass Pause Frame Drop Pause Frame
3 Half Duplex Full Duplex
2 10 MBit/s 100 MBit/s
1 Fixed Data Rate Autonegotiation
ON
6
DIP switches
Block diagram

05/26/2016 Page 7 / 7
DATASHEET
Industrial splice distributor with metal housing for DIN-RAIL, unassembled Art.-No. 53705.1V3
6 x SC-simplex front plate

(for SC, LC adapter)
6 x SC-duplex front plate

(for SC, LC, ST adapter)
12 x SC-simplex front plate

(for SC adapter)
adapters and front plate not included
Specifications
• Rugged metal housing
• DIN Rail holder with screw set included
• Incl. splice cassette, splice holder and 1 x cable gland M20
• Dimensions (W x H x D): 61 x 115 x 113 mm
Art.No. 53705.1V3 File 53705.1V3_NEU.indd

Description Industrial splice distributor with metal housing for DIN-RAIL, unassembled
Created Date Last revision Date Proved Date
Frederik Dotzki 23.09.2013 BT 17.10.2013 BT 17.10.2013
Page 1
EFB Elektronik GmbH | Striegauer Str. 1 | 33719 Bielefeld | www.efb-elektronik.de
fon +49(0)521/40418-0 | fax +49(0)521/40418-50 | info@efb-elektronik.de
DATASHEET
Drawings/ Figures
No. Description Q‘ty

1 Housing (part 1) 1
2 Housing (part 2) 1
3.1 Front plate (not included in delivery)
3.2.1 Rivet 1
3.2.2 Mounting plate 1
4 Pan head tapping screws 8

Page 2
DATASHEET
Drawings/ Figures
No. Description Q‘ty

1 Rivet 1
2 Mounting plate 1
Order Data
Art.-No. Type
53705.1V3 Industrial splice distributor with metal housing for DIN-RAIL, unassembled
Art.-No. Accessories
53705.2V2 Front panel for 6 x SC duplex or LC quad
53705.3V2 Front panel for 6 x LC duplex or SC simplex
53705.4V2 Front panel for 12 x SC simplex

Page 3
Technical Information
Solicap M FTI55, FTI56

Capacitance
Point level switch for bulk solids
Application
Solicap M is used for point level detection in bulk solids
and can be operated in minimum or maximum fail-safe
mode.
Due to its robust construction, it can also be used to
provide accurate measurements in applications with very
high tensile loads (up to 60 kN for rope version) or lateral
loads (up to 300 Nm for rod version).
In combination with Fieldgate (for remote interrogation
of measured values using internet technology),
Solicap M represents an ideal solution for material
provisioning and logistical optimization (inventory
control).
Your benefits
• Extremely robust design for harsh process conditions
• Easy and fast commissioning as calibration is
performed at the press of a button
• Universal application thanks to wide range of
certificates and approvals
• Two-stage overvoltage protection against static
discharges from the silo
• Active buildup compensation for bulk solids that tend
to cake
• Use in safety systems with specific requirements
in terms of functional safety to SIL2/SIL3 in
conjunction with electronic insert FEI55
• Increased safety due to permanent automatic
monitoring of electronics
• Reduction in storage costs thanks to easy-to-shorten
rod model (for partial insulation) and rope model (for
partial and full insulation)
• Two-point control (e.g. for controlling a handling
device)
TI418F/00/en
71110976
Table of contents
Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Electronic versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Electronic insert FEI53 (3-wire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
System integration via Fieldgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Operating conditions: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Preparing to install rod probes FTI55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Preparing to install rope probes FTI56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Probe with separate housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 FEI54 electronic insert (AC/DC with relay output) . 34
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operating conditions: Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Electronic insert FEI55 (8/16 mA; SIL2/SIL3) . . . . . 35
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Operating conditions: Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Process temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Process pressure and temperature derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 FEI57S electronic insert (PFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
State of aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Electronic insert FEI58 (NAMUR H-L edge) . . . . . . . 37
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Measuring range (valid for all FEI5x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Measuring conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Switch behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Switch-on behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fail-safe mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Switching delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Electronic insert FEI51 (AC 2-wire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Switch point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Ambient temperature effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Electronic inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Electronic inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Electronic insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
FEI52 electronic insert (DC PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2 Endress+Hauser
Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

CE approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Additional certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Other standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Solicap M FTI55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Solicap M FTI56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Overvoltage protection HAW56x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Patents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3 Endress+Hauser
Function and system design

Measuring principle The principle of capacitance point level detection is based on the change in capacitance of a capacitor as a result
of the probe being covered by bulk solids. The probe and container wall (conductive material) form an electric
capacitor. When the probe is in air (1), a certain low initial capacitance is measured. If the container is being
filled, the capacitance of the capacitor increases as more of the probe is covered (2), (3).
The point level switch switches when the capacitance CS specified during calibration is reached.
In addition, a probe with inactive length ensures that the effects of medium buildup or condensate near the
process connection are avoided. A probe with active buildup compensation compensates for the effects of
buildup on the probe in the area of the process connection.
1. 2. 3.
CS
CA C
ΔC
R CA
TI418F01
R: Conductivity of bulk solids

C: Capacitance of bulk solids
CA: Initial capacitance (probe not covered)
CS: Switching capacitance
ΔC: Change in capacitance
Function
The electronic insert selected for the probe determines the change in capacitance depending on how much of
the probe is covered. This ensures accurate switching at the switchpoint (level) calibrated for this purpose.
Application examples Sand, glass aggregate, gravel, molding sand, lime, ore (crushed), plaster, aluminum shavings, cement, grain,
pumice, flour, dolomite, sugar beet, kaolin, fodder and similar bulk solids.
In general:
Bulk solids with a relative dielectric constant εr ≥ 2.5.
4 Endress+Hauser
Measuring system The make-up of the measuring system depends on the electronic insert selected.
Point level switch

The complete measuring system consists of:
• the point level switch, Solicap M FTI55 or FTI56
• An electronic insert FEI51, FEI52, FEI54
FEI51, FEI52, FEI54

EX EX
Ex d
Dust-Ex
TI418Fen02
Two-point control (Δs function)
! Note!
Partially insulated probes only in conjunction with nonconductive bulk solids.
FEI51, FEI52, FEI54

EX EX
Ex d
Dust-Ex
ON
Conveyor screw
Ds
OFF
TI418Fen03
Endress+Hauser 5
The point level switch can also be used to control a screw conveyor, for example, where the on and off values
can be freely defined.
Point level switch

Solicap M FTI5x with electronic versions FEI53, FEI57S and FEI58 for connecting to a separate switching unit.
• the capacitance point level switch, Solicap M FTI55 or FTI56
• an electronic insert FEI53, FEI57S, FEI58
• a transmitter power supply unit e.g. FTC325, FTC625 (SW V1.4 or higher), FTC470Z, FTC471Z, FTL325N,
FTL375N
EX EX
EX FEI53 (no Ex)
FEI57S (Ex i) Ex i
FEI58 (Ex i)
T
FTC625
Ds*
U~
CH1
U–
~
L00-FTI5xxxx-14-00-06-xx-003
* Only possible with FEI53
The following table shows the transmitter power supply units available which can be operated with electronic
inserts FEI57S and FEI53.
Electronic insert FEI57S FEI53 FEI58
Transmitter power supply unit
FTC625 x – –
FTC325 x x –
FTL325N – – x
FTL375N – – x
FTC470Z x – –
FTC471Z x – –
FTC520Z* x – –
FTC521Z* x – –
FTC420* – x –
FTC421* – x –
FTC422* – x –
x Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
* Product phase-out 2006
6 Endress+Hauser
Point level switch 8/16 mA

• the point level switch, Solicap M FTI55 or FTI56
• the FEI55 electronic insert
• a transmitter power supply unit (e.g. RN221N, RNS221, RMA421, RMA422)
FEI55 EX EX
Ex i PLC
Transmitter
power supply
unit e.g. ENDRESS + HAUSER
RMA422
RMA422 or
RN221N On
Q-SET
– + E
TI418Fen67
Electronic versions FEI51

Two-wire AC connection
• Load switched directly into the power supply circuit via the thyristor.
• Point level adjustment directly at the point level switch.
FEI52
3-wire direct current version:
• Switch the load via the transistor (PNP) and separate supply voltage connection.
FEI53
3-wire direct current version with 3 to 12 V signal output:
• For separate switching unit, Nivotester FTC325 3–WIRE.
• Point level adjustment directly at the switching unit.
FEI54
Universal current version with relay output:
• Switch the loads via 2 floating changeover contacts (DPDT).
FEI55
Signal transmission 8/16 mA on two-wire cabling:
• SIL2 approval for the hardware
• SIL3 approval for the software
• For separate switching unit (e.g. RN221N, RNS221, RMA421, RMA422).
FEI57S
PFM signal transmission (current pulses are superimposed on the supply current):
• For separate switching unit with PFM signal transmission e.g. FTC325 PFM, FTC625 PFM and
FTC470Z/471Z
Endress+Hauser 7
• Self-test from the switching unit without changing levels.

• Cyclical checking from the switching unit.
FEI58 (NAMUR)
Signal transmission H-L edge 2.2 to 3.5 / 0.6 to 1.0 mA as per IEC 60947-5-6 on two-wire cable:
• For a separate switching unit (e.g. Nivotester FTL325N and FTL375N).
• Test the connection cables and slaves by pressing the button on the electronic insert.
! Note!
For additional information see → ä 31 ff.
System integration via Vendor managed inventory

Fieldgate
The remote interrogation of tank or silo levels via Fieldgate enables suppliers of raw materials to gather
information about the current inventories of their regular customers at any time and, for example, to take this
into account in their own production planning. The Fieldgate monitors the configured point levels and
automatically triggers the next order as required. Here, the range of possibilities ranges from simple
requisitioning by e-mail through to fully automatic order processing by incorporating XML data into the
planning systems on both sides.
Remote maintenance of measuring systems

Not only does Fieldgate transmit the current measured values, it also alerts the standby personnel responsible
by e-mail or SMS as required. Fieldgate forwards the information transparently. In this way, all options of the
operating software in question are available remotely. By using remote diagnosis and remote configuration
some onsite service operations can be avoided and all others can at least be planned and prepared better.
Remote interrogation Remote configuration/diagnostics
HTTP script via HART

HART client:
web browser - ToF Tool - FieldTool
FieldTool
… Package
- FieldCare
...
FEI57S (PFM)
EX Analog
Ethernet
GSM
Nivotester Fieldgate
FTC625 FXA520
RS485
T
interface
FTC625
U~
–
U~
CH1
TI418Fen06
8 Endress+Hauser
Operating conditions: Installation

! Note!
All dimensions in mm.
General notes Filling the silo

The filling stream should not be FTI55 FTI56
directed onto the probe.
Angle of material flow
Note the expected angle of the
material flow or of the outlet
funnel when determining the
Angle of
mounting location or probe slope
length. FTI55
Distance between probes

Distance
When installing several probes in
min. 500
a silo, a minimum distance of min. 500 min. 500
0.5 m between the probes must

be observed.
Threaded coupling for mounting
When installing the Solicap
M FTI55, FTI56, the threaded
coupling should be as short as
possible.
Condensation or product residue
may occur in a long threaded
coupling and interfere with the
correct operation of the probe.
FTI55
Heat insulation
In the event of high temperatures
in the silo: Angle of
Insulate the external silo wall to slope
avoid exceeding the permitted
temperature of the Solicap M
housing.
Heat insulation also prevents
condensation from forming near
the threaded boss in the silo.
This reduces buildup and the risk
TI418Fen07
of error switching.
Endress+Hauser 9
Preparing to install rod probes Correct installation Incorrect installation

FTI55
short
a. d.
b. e.
c.
f.
TI418Fen08
Correct installation
a. For maximum point level detection, a short threaded coupling is used.
b. For minimum point level detection, a short threaded coupling is used.
c. In the event of light buildup on the silo wall, the threaded coupling is welded internally.
The probe tip points slightly downwards so that bulk solids slide off more easily.
Incorrect installation
d. The threaded coupling is too long. This may cause material to settle inside and result in error
switching.
e. Horizontal mounting means a risk of error switching in the event of heavy buildup on the silo
wall.
In this case, the Solicap M FTI55 (rod probe) with inactive length is recommended.
f. In areas where product buildup occurs, the device cannot detect if the silo is "empty".
In this case, the FTI56 (rope probe) should be installed from above.
10 Endress+Hauser
In this example, the grounded steel plate forms the

counter electrode.
Heat insulation prevents condensation and therefore Sheet metal plate
with
buildup on the steel plate. threaded socket
min. ø300
or 300
Heat insulation
TI418Fen09
In a silo with concrete walls
When installing in a silo made of plastic, a sheet

metal plate must be attached to the exterior of the
silo as a counter electrode. Electrical Sheet metal plate
HF field
This plate can be either square or round.
– Dimensions in the case of a thin silo wall with
a low dielectric constant:
approx. 0.5 m along each side or ø0.5 m;
– Dimensions in the case of a thicker silo wall Ground connection
or wall with a higher dielectric constant:

approx. 0.7 m along each side or ø0.7 m. TI418Fen10
In a silo with plastic walls
Probe length and minimum coverage
! Note!
• When selecting the probe length, pay attention to the dependency between the relative dielectric constant
εr and the minimum amount the probe rod needs to be covered (see Table).
• For probe length tolerances see → ä 26.
• To ensure problem-free operation, it is important that the difference in capacitance between the covered and
uncovered parts of the probe is at least 5 pF.
• If you do not know the dielectric constant of the material, contact us for advice.
Product properties,
relative dielectric constant εr
*
TI418F12
* Minimum coverage
Electrically conductive 25 mm
Nonconductive
εr > 10 100 mm
εr > 5 to 10 200 mm
εr > 2 to 5 500 mm
Endress+Hauser 11
Preparing to install rope Correct installation Incorrect installation

probes FTI56
d.
a. b. c. e.
D
min. 0.2 m
TI418F13
In a silo with metal walls

Distance D between the probe and the wall approx. 10 to 25 % of the silo diameter
Correct installation
a. Solicap M FTI55, FTI56 with inactive length in the event of condensation and material
buildup on the silo roof.
b. At the correct distance from the silo wall, the material inlet and the material outlet.
Close to the wall, for reliable switching in the case of a low dielectric constant (not for
pneumatic filling).
For pneumatic filling, the distance from the probe to the wall should not be too short, as the
probe may swing.
Incorrect installation
c. If too close to the material inlet, inflowing bulk solids may damage the sensor.
If close to the center of the material outflow, high tensile forces at this point may cause the
probe to break off or subject the silo roof to excessive strain.
d. The threaded coupling is too long. This may cause condensation and dust to settle inside which
may result in error switching.
e. If too close to the silo wall, the probe may swing slightly against the wall or come in contact
with buildup. This can result in error switching.
12 Endress+Hauser
Silo roof
Ensure that the silo roof is of a sufficiently stable construction.
High tensile forces may occur when material is being extracted, particularly in the case of heavy and powdery
bulk solids which have a tendency to form buildup.
Coarse-grained bulk solids

In silos with extremely coarse-grained or extremely abrasive bulk solids, the use of a Solicap M FTI55 or FTI56
is recommended only for maximum detection.
Distance between the rope probes

To rule out mutual probe interference, you must maintain a minimum distance of 0.5 m between the rope
probes. This also applies if you are installing several Solicap M units in adjacent silos with nonconductive walls.
In the event of condensation:

Use the Solicap M with inactive length.
The inactive length (A) prevents moisture and buildup forming between the active part of the probe and the
silo roof.
Or:
To reduce the effects of condensation (B) and buildup, the threaded coupling (length: max. 25 mm) must
project into the silo.
Heat insulation reduces condensation and therefore buildup on the steel plate.
A B
Steel plate;
connected to the
reinforcing steel
Recommended with condensation:
Active part Steel plate

of probe
Heat insulation
TI418Fen15 TI418Fen14
Silo with walls that conduct electricity Silo with concrete walls
Endress+Hauser 13
Installation in the event of buildup

If buildup on the probe rod can be expected when
operating the measuring system, the active buildup
compensation function prevents the measurement
result from becoming distorted. No cleaning work
has to be performed on the probe rod.
BA300Fxx020
Installation in plastic tanks

When installing in a silo made of plastic, a counter
electrode must be mounted on the silo exterior at the
same height as the tensioning weight.
The length of the edge of the counter electrode
should be approximately the same length as the
distance between the tensioning weight and the silo
wall.
Ground connection
Electrical
HF field
Weight Surface area
e.g. 1 m²
Counter electrode
Distance e.g.
e.g. 1 m sheet metal plate
TI418Fen16
In a silo with plastic walls
14 Endress+Hauser
Range of sensor lengths
LB min. 250 *
LB min. 200
Level
TI418Fen17
Electrically conductive Bulk solids with high Bulk solids with low
bulk solids dielectric constant dielectric constant
(e.g. coal) (e.g. rock salt) (e.g. dried grain)
* LB (covered length):
For nonconductive bulk solids with a low dielectric constant, the rope probe must be approx. 5 % (but no
less than 250 mm) longer than the distance between the tank roof and the required point level.
Shortening the probe

Rod probe:
The partially insulated version can be shortened at a later stage by the user.
Rope probe:
Both versions (partially and fully insulated) may be shortened at a later stage.
Endress+Hauser 15
Probe with separate housing
! Note!
• For information on how to order, see also "Ordering information" from → ä 44 under "Probe
design".
• The maximum connection length between the probe and the separate housing is 6 m (L4).
When ordering a Solicap M with a separate housing, the desired length must be specified.
• If the connecting cable is to be shortened or passed through a wall, it must be separated from the
process connection. See also → ä 16 (extension heights).
• The cable has a bending radius of r ≥ 100 mm. This must be observed as a minimum.
EX
Zone 1
EX
Zone 0
L1
L4 ≤ 6 m
TI418F18
Rod length L1 max. 4 m

Rope length L1 max. 19.7 m (the maximum total length of L1 + L4 should not exceed 20 m.)
Extension heights
Housing side: wall mounting Housing side: pipe mounting Sensor side
r ³ 100
~61 B ~75 B
H4
D
H1
H1
H2
~41
~41
r ³ 100
TI418F19
Polyester housing F16 Stainless steel housing F15 Aluminum housing F17
B - 76 64 65
H1 - 172 166 177
D 50 - - -
H4 62 - - -
16 Endress+Hauser
! Note!
• Connecting cable: ø10.5 mm
• Outer jacket: silicone, notch-resistant
Wall holder unit
! Note!
• The wall holder unit is part of the scope of supply.
• The wall holder unit has to be screwed to the separate housing before you can use it as a drilling template.
The distance between the holes is reduced by screwing it to the separate housing.
86
6.2
28
3 70
TI418F20
Temperature-derating separate housing
Ta
°C +170/
+120
120
+180/
+110
* 100
Ta
80
60
TP
40
20
TP
0
–80 –60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 °C
–20
–40
–60
BA300Fxx021
Ta: ambient temperature

TP: process temperature
* temperature at separate housing ≤ 70 °C
! Note!
The maximum connection length between the probe and the separate housing is 6 m (L4). When ordering a
device with a separate housing, the desired length must be specified.
If the connecting cable is to be shortened or passed through a wall, it must be separated from the process
connection. See "Documentation" => "Operating Instructions" on → ä 49.
Endress+Hauser 17
Operating conditions: Environment

Ambient temperature range • Ambient temperature of the transmitter (note derating, see → ä 19):
❑ –50 to +70 °C
❑ –40 to +70 °C (with F16 housing)
• A weather protection cover should be used when operating outdoors in strong sunlight. For further
information on the weather protection cover, see → ä 48.
Storage temperature –50 to +85 °C
Climate class DIN EN 60068-2-38/IEC 68-2-38: test Z/AD
Degree of protection IP66* IP67* IP68* NEMA4X**

Polyester housing F16 X X - X
Stainless steel housing F15 X X - X
Aluminum housing F17 X X - X
Aluminum housing F13 X – X*** X
with gas-tight process seal
Aluminum housing T13 X – X*** X
with gas-tight process seal and
separate connection compartment (EEx d)
Separate housing X – X*** X
* As per EN60529
** As per NEMA 250
*** Only with M20 cable entry or G1/2 thread
Vibration resistance DIN EN 60068-2-64/IEC 68-2-64: 20 Hz– 2000 Hz; 0.01 g2/Hz
Cleaning Housing:
When cleaning, make sure that the cleaning agent used does not corrode the housing surface or the seals.
Probe:
Depending on the application, buildup (contamination and soiling) can form on the probe rod. A high degree
of material buildup can affect the measurement result. If the medium tends to create a high degree of buildup,
regular cleaning is recommended. When cleaning, it is important to make sure that the insulation of the probe
rod is not damaged. If cleaning agents are used make sure the material is resistant to them!
Electromagnetic • Interference emission to EN 61326, Electrical Equipment Class B

compatibility (EMC) Interference immunity in accordance with EN 61326, Appendix A (Industrial) and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 21 (EMC)
• A usual commercial instrument cable can be used.
Shock resistance DIN EN 60068-2-27/IEC 68-2-27: 30g acceleration
18 Endress+Hauser
Operating conditions: Process

Process temperature range
! Note!
• The following process temperature ranges only apply for standard applications outside hazardous areas.
• Regulations for use in hazardous areas are provided in the Supplementary Documentation XA389F/00.
Permitted ambient temperature Ta at the housing depending on the process temperature Tp in the tank.
Rod probe FTI55
Ta
°C
80
Ta
60
40 TP
20
TP
0
–60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 °C
–20
–40
–60
TI418F60
Partially insulated (PPS):
Ta
°C
80
Ta
60
40 TP
20
TP
0
–60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 100 °C
–20
–40
–60
TI418F61
Fully insulated (PE):
! Note!
Restriction to Ta –40 °C for polyester housing F16.
Endress+Hauser 19
Rope probe FTI56
Ta
°C
80
Ta
60
40 TP
20
TP
0
–60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 °C
–20
–40
–60
TI418F62
Partially insulated (PTFE):
Ta
°C
80
Ta
60
40 TP
20
TP
0
–60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 °C
–20
–40
–60
TI418F63
Fully insulated (PA):
20 Endress+Hauser
Process pressure and

temperature derating
! Note!
• The lowest value from the derating curves of the device and the selected flange applies.
• In the case of flange process connections, the maximum pressure is limited by the nominal pressure of the
flange.
• See also "Process connections" on → ä 25.
Rod probe FTI55
Pp
bar
40
20
TP
0
–60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 °C
TI418F64
Partially insulated (PPS):
Pp
bar
40
20
TP
0
–60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 100 °C
TI418F65
Fully insulated (PE):
Rope probe FTI56
Pp
bar
40
20
TP
0
–60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 °C
TI418F64
Partially insulated (PTFE):
Endress+Hauser 21
Pp
bar
40
20
TP
0
–60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 °C
TI418F66
Fully insulated (PA):
Process pressure limits
–1 to 25 bar
(observe dependencies => process connections from → ä 25 and operating conditions: process from
→ ä 19.)
The lowest value from the derating curves of the device and the selected flange applies.
Please refer to the following standards for the pressure values permitted at higher temperatures:
• pR EN 1092-1: 2005 Table, Appendix G2
With regard to its resistance/temperature property, the material 1.4435 is identical to 1.4404
(AISI 316L) which is grouped under 13E0 in EN 1092-1 Tab. 18. The chemical makeup of the
two materials can be identical.
• ASME B 16.5a - 1998 Tab. 2-2.2 F316
• ASME B 16.5a - 1998 Tab. 2.3.8 N10276
• JIS B 2220
State of aggregation See → ä 4, "Application examples"
22 Endress+Hauser
Polyester housing Stainless steel housing Aluminium housing Aluminium housing Aluminium housing
Overview
F16 F15 F17 F13 T13
with a gas-tight with a separate connection
process seal compartment and gas-tight
Endress+Hauser
process seal
Electronics
!
Note!
seperate housing
All dimensions in mm.
R 1½ NPT 1½ Flange
Rod probe FTI55 Rope probe FTI56
with build-up
Mechanical construction
with inactive length compensation with inactive length with inactive length
partially fully partially fully partially partially fully partially fully partially fully partially fully
insulated insulated insulated insulated insulated insulated insulated insulated insulated insulated insulated insulated insulated
ø18 ø25 ø18/25 ø18/25 ø18 ø6 ø8 ø6 ø8 ø12 ø14 ø12 ø14
tensioning weight
TI418Fen24
23
Housing
ø85 max. 76
Polyester housing F16
~ 97
TI418F25
ø76 max. 64
Stainless steel housing F15
~ 95
TI418F26
max. 65
Aluminum housing F17
ø80 max. 60
~ 105
TI418F27
max. 65
Aluminum housing F13
with gas-tight process seal ø80 max. 60
118
~118
TI418F28
max. 65 max. 97
Aluminum housing T13
with separate connection
compartment and gas-tight
process seal
~ 135
TI418F29
24 Endress+Hauser
Housing heights with adapter
Polyester housing Stainless steel Aluminum housing Aluminum housing Aluminum housing
F16 housing F15 F17 F13* with separate
connection
compartment T13*
H1
H1
H1
H1
H1
TI418F30 TI418F31 TI418F32 TI418F33 TI418F34
Order code 2 1 3 4 5
FTI55, FTI56
H1 125 121 131 177 194
* Housing with gas-tight process seal
Process connections and flanges
Thread: R 1½ Thread: NPT 1½ Flanges
TI418Fen35 TI418Fen36 TI418F37
(DIN EN 10226-1) (ANSI B 1.20.1) (EN1092-1)

(ANSI B 16.5)
(JIS B2220)
Order code/material RVJ / 316L RGJ / 316L

RV1 / steel RG1 / steel
Pressures up to 25 bars 25 bars Depends on flange max. 25 bar
Endress+Hauser 25
Rod probes FTI55
! Note!
Total length of the probe from the start of the thread: L = L1 + L3
(+ 125 mm with active buildup compensation)
Rod probe Rod probe fully insulated Rod probe with Rod probe with active
partially insulated inactive length buildup compensation
partially/fully insulated partially insulated
AF AF AF AF
H2
H2
H2
H2
H2
NPT / R
H3
H3
H3
H3
L2
125
L3
L1/L2/L3
L2
L1
L1
L2
L1
L1
TI418Fen39
H2 77 77 66 92
H3 25 25 25 25
Across flats (AF) 50 50 50 50
Total length (L) 200 to 4000 200 to 4000 300 to 6000 225 to 4000
Active rod length (L1) 200 to 4000 200 to 4000 200 to 4000 200 to 4000
Inactive rod length (L3) - - 200 to 2000 -
ø Inactive length - - 43 -
Length of partial insulation (L2) 75 - 75 / - 75
Probe rod diameter 18 18 18 18

(with insulation) (21.5) (21.5) (21.5) (21.5)
ø Active build-up compensation/ 36/

-/- -/- -/-
length 125
Lateral loading capacity (Nm) at 20 °C 300 300 300 200
Maximum process temperature (°C) 180 80 180/80 180
For use in mounting nozzles - - X -

In the event of condensate on tank - - X X
ceiling
X = recommended
Length tolerance up to 1 m: 0 to –5 mm > 1 m to 3 m: 0 to –10 mm > 3 m to 6 m: 0 to –20 mm
26 Endress+Hauser
Rope probes FTI56
! Note!
Total length of probe from start of thread: L = L1 + L3
Rod probe Rod probe Rope probe with Rope probe with inactive
Partially insulated rope Fully insulated rope inactive length length
Partially insulated rope Fully insulated rope
AF AF AF AF
H2
H2
H2
H2
H2
NPT / R
H3
H3
H3
H3
L2
L1/L2/L3
L3
L3
L1
L1
L2
L1
L1
lg
lg
lg
lg
TI418F38
TI418Fen40
H2 66 66 66 66
H3 25 25 25 25
Across flats (AF) 50 50 50 50
Total length (L) 500 to 20000 500 to 20000 700 to 20000 700 to 20000
Active rope length (L1) 500 to 20000 500 to 20000 500 to 19800 500 to 19800
Length of partial insulation (L2)* 500 - 500 -

Inactive length (L3) - - 200 to 2000 200 to 2000
ø Inactive length - - 43 43
Probe rope diameter 6 12 6 12 6 12 6 12

(with insulation) (7) (14) (7) (14) (7) (14) (7) (14)
ø Tensioning weight** 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40
Length of tensioning weight (lg) 150 250 150 250 150 250 150 250
Tensile loading capacity (kN) of probe 30 60 30 60 30 60 30 60
rope at 20 °C
Maximum process temperature (°C) 180 120 180 120
For use in mounting nozzles - - X X
In the event of condensate on tank - - X X

ceiling
X = recommended
* The length of the partial insulation extends, at maximum, to the tensioning weight.
** The tensioning weight is always uninsulated.
Length tolerance up to 1 m: 0 to –10 mm > 1 m to 3 m: 0 to –20 mm > 3 m to 6 m: 0 to –30 mm > 6 m to 20 m: 0 to –40 mm
Endress+Hauser 27
Material Housing
• Aluminum housing F17, F13, T13: GD–Al Si 10 Mg, DIN 1725, with plastic coating (blue/gray)
• Polyester housing F16: PBT–FR fiberglass reinforced polyester (blue/gray)
• Stainless steel housing F15: corrosion-resistant steel 316L (14404), uninsulated
Housing cover and seals

• Aluminum housing F17, F13, T13: EN-AC-AlSi10Mg, plastic-coated cover seal: EPDM
• Polyester housing F16: Cover made of PBT-FR or cover with sight glass made of PA12
Cover seal: EPDM
• Stainless steel housing F15: AISI 316L Cover seal: silicone
Probe material
• Process connection, tensioning weight for rope probe: 1.4404 (316L) or steel
• Inactive length: 1.4404 (316L)
• Probe rope partially insulated: PTFE, 1.4401 (AISI 316)
• Probe rope fully insulated: PA, galvanized steel
• Probe rod partially insulated: PPS, 1.4404 (316L)
• Probe rod fully insulated: PE, galvanized steel
Weight • with F15, F16, F17 or F13 housing approx. 4.0 kg

+ flange weight or process connection
+ probe rod 2.0 kg/m (for ø18 mm probe rod) or
+ probe rope 0.180 kg/m (for ø6 mm rope probes) or
+ probe rope 0.550 kg/m (for ø12 mm rope probes)
• with T13 housing approx. 4.5 kg
+ flange weight or process connection
+ probe rod 2.0 kg/m (for ø18 mm probe rod) or
+ probe rope 0.180 kg/m (for ø6 mm rope probes) or
+ probe rope 0.550 kg/m (for ø12 mm rope probes)
28 Endress+Hauser
Input
Measured variable Measurement of the change in capacitance between the probe rod and the tank wall, depending on the level
of the bulk solids.
Measuring range • Measuring frequency:

(valid for all FEI5x) 500 kHz
• Span:
ΔC = 5 to 1600 pF
ΔC = 5 to 500 pF (with FEI58)
• Final capacitance:
CE = max. 1600 pF
• Adjustable initial capacitance:
CA = 5 to 500 pF (range 1 = factory setting)
CA = 5 to 1600 pF (range 2; not with FEI58)
Input signal Probe covered => high capacitance

Probe not covered => low capacitance
Measuring conditions
! Note!
• When installing in a nozzle,
use inactive length (L3).
• To control a screw conveyor (Δs mode),
rod probes and rope probes can be used.
The on-value and off-value are L3 L3
determined by the empty and full
calibration;
– Partially insulated probes are only suitable OFF
for nonconductive bulk solids. OFF
L1 L1
DK > 10 Measuring range up to 4 m Ds

5 < DK < 10 Measuring range up to 12 m Ds
2 < DK < 5 Measuring range up to 20 m
ON
• The minimum capacitance change for ON
point level detection must be ≥ 5 pF. MIN

MIN
TI418F41
TI418F41
Minimum probe length for nonconductive media (<1μs/cm)

lmin = ΔCmin / (Cs * [εr - 1])
lmin = Minimum probe length

ΔCmin = 5 pF
Cs = Probe capacitance in air
εr = Dielectric constant e.g. dried grain = 3.0
Endress+Hauser 29
Output
Galvanic isolation FEI51, FEI52
between rod probe and power supply
FEI54:
between rod probe, power supply and load
FEI53, FEI55, FEI57S, FEI58
see connected switching device (functional galvanic isolation in the electronic insert)
Switch behavior Binary or Δs operation (pump control, not with FEI58)
Switch-on behavior When the power supply is switched on, the switching status of the outputs corresponds to the signal on alarm.
The correct switch condition is reached after max. 3 seconds.
Fail-safe mode Minimum/maximum quiescent current safety can be switched at the electronic insert (for FEI53 and FEI57S
only at Nivotester FTCxxx)
MAX = minimum safety: The output switches safety-oriented when the probe is uncovered
(signal on alarm). For use for dry running protection and pump protection for example
MAX = maximum safety: The output switches safety-oriented when the probe is covered
(signal on alarm). For use with overfill protection for example
Switching delay FEI51, FEI52, FEI54, FEI55

Can be adjusted incrementally at the electronic insert: 0.3 to 10 s
FEI53, FEI57S
Depends on the connected Nivotester (transmitter): FTC325, FTC625, FTC470Z or FTC471Z
FEI58
Can be adjusted alternately at the electronic insert: 1 s / 5 s
30 Endress+Hauser
Electronic insert FEI51 (AC 2-wire)

! Note!
Connect in series with an external load.
Power supply Supply voltage: 19 to 253 V AC

Power consumption: < 1.5 W
Residual current consumption: < 3.8 mA
Short-circuit protection
FEI51 overvoltage protection: overvoltage category II
Electrical connection Always connect in series with a load!

Check the following:
• the residual current consumption in blocked state.
• that for low voltage:
– the voltage drop across the load is such that 1 2
External load R
the minimum terminal voltage at the electronic * must be connected
insert (19 V) when blocked is not undershot.
– the voltage drop across the electronics when min.
switched through is observed (up to 12 V). 19 V
• that a relay cannot de-energize with holding

power below 1 mA. 1A
If this is the case, a resistor should be connected

parallel to the relay (RC module available on *
request). R
When selecting the relay, pay attention to the

holding power / rated power
(see below: "Connectable load"). L1 N N PE
(Masse)
U~ max. 253 V AC
50/60 Hz
L00-FMI5xxxx-06-05-xx-en-071
Signal on alarm Level Output signal

Safety mode LEDs
gn gn rd gn gn ye
L+ IL +
1 3
MAX
< 3,8 mA
1 3
L+ IL +
1 3
MIN
< 3,8 mA
1 3
Maintenance IL / < 3,8 mA

required
1 3
Instrument failure
< 3,8 mA
1 3
BA300Fen017
Output signal Output signal on power failure or in the event of damage to the sensor: < 3.8 mA
Connectable load • For relays with a minimum holding power or rated power > 2.5 VA at 253 V AC (10 mA) or > 0.5 VA at
24 V AC (20 mA)
• Relays with a lower holding power or rated power can be operated by means of an RC module connected in
parallel.
• For relays with a maximum holding power or rated power < 89 VA at 253 V AC or < 8.4 VA at 24 V AC
• Voltage drop across FEI51 max. 12 V
• Residual current with blocked thyristor max. 3.8 mA
• Load switched directly into the power supply circuit via the thyristor.
Endress+Hauser 31
FEI52 electronic insert (DC PNP)

Power supply Supply voltage: 10 to 55 V DC
Ripple: max. 1.7 V, 0…400 Hz
Current consumption: < 20 mA
Power consumption without load: max. 0.9 W
Power consumption with full load (350 mA): 1.6 W
Reverse polarity protection: yes
Separation voltage: 3.7 kV
Electrical connection Three-wire DC connection

Preferably in conjunction with programmable logic
controllers (PLC),
DI modules in accordance with EN 61131-2.
Positive signal present at the switch output of the
electronic system (PNP).
1 2 3
(+)
F
0.5A R
–
L+ L–
U…
– 10…55 V (DC)
TI418F42
Output signal
Safety mode Level Output signal LEDs
gn gn rd gn gn ye
L+ + IL = Load current
IL
1 3 (switched through)
MAX IR = Residual current
(blocked)
IR
1 3
L+ IL +
1 3
MIN
IR
1 3
Maintenance
required IL / IR Lit
1 3
Instrument failure Flashes

IR
1 3
Unlit
TI418Fen43 TI418F44
Signal on alarm Output signal on power failure or in the event of device failure: IR < 100 μA
Connectable load • Load switched via transistor and separate PNP connection, max. 55 V
• Load current max. 350 mA (cyclical overload and short-circuit protection)
• Residual current < 100 μA (with transistor blocked)
• Capacitance load max. 0.5 μF at 55 V; max. 1.0 μF at 24 V
• Residual voltage < 3 V (for transistor switched through)
32 Endress+Hauser
Electronic insert FEI53 (3-wire)

Power supply Supply voltage: 14.5 V DC
Current consumption: < 15 mA
Power consumption: max. 230 mW
Electrical connection Three-wire DC connection

3 to 12 V signal
For connecting to the switching unit, Nivotester

FTC325 3–WIRE from Endress+Hauser.
Switching between minimum/maximum
Safety in the Nivotester FTC325 3-WIRE. 1 2 3
(+)
Point level adjustment directly at the Nivotester.
11 12 13 Nivotester FTC325 3-WIRE

– + S
TI418F45
Output signal
Mode Output signal LEDs
green red
Normal operation 3...12 V

at terminal 3
Maintenance
3...12 V
required * Lit
at terminal 3

< 2,7 V
at terminal 3
Unlit
TI418Fen46 TI418F44
Signal on alarm Voltage at terminal 3 vis-à-vis terminal 1: < 2.7 V
Connectable load • Floating relay contacts in the connected switching unit Nivotester FTC325 3–WIRE
• For the contact load capacity, refer to the technical data of the switching device.
Endress+Hauser 33
FEI54 electronic insert (AC/DC with relay output)

Power supply Supply voltage: 19 to 253 V AC, 50/60 Hz or 19 to 55 V DC
Power consumption: max. 1.6 W
Electrical connection Universal current connection with relay output (DPDT)

Power supply:
Please note the different
voltage ranges for AC and DC.
Output:
When connecting an instrument with 1 2 3 4 56 7 8
high inductance, provide a spark arrester
to protect the relay contact.
A fine-wire fuse (depending on the
load connected) protects the relay
contact on short-circuiting. F
0.5A
Both relay contacts switch simultaneously.
* See below "Connectable load"
NO C NC NO C NC
a u r a u r
L1 N PE
L+ L– (Ground) * *
U~ 19…253 V (AC)
U– 19… 55 V (DC)
TI418F47
Output signal
gn gn rd gn gn ye
3 4 5 6 7 8
MAX
3 4 5 6 7 8
3 4 5 6 7 8
MIN
Relay energized
3 4 5 6 7 8 Relay de-energized
Maintenance
required Lit
3 4 5 6 7 8 Unlit
TI418Fen48 TI418F49
Signal on alarm Output signal on power failure or in the event of device failure: relay de-energized
Connectable load • Loads switched via 2 floating changeover contacts (DPDT)

• I~ max. 6 A, U~ max. 253 V; P~ max. 1500 VA at cos ϕ = 1, P~ max. 750 VA at cos ϕ > 0.7
• I– max. 6 A to 30 V, I– max. 0.2 A to 125 V
• The following applies when connecting a functional low-voltage circuit with double isolation as per
IEC 1010: Sum of voltages of relay output and power supply max. 300 V
34 Endress+Hauser
Electronic insert FEI55 (8/16 mA; SIL2/SIL3)

Power supply Supply voltage: 11 to 36 V DC
Power consumption: < 600 mW
Electrical connection Two-wire connection for separate switching unit

For connecting to
programmable logic controllers (PLC),
AI modules 4 to 20 mA in accordance with
EN 61131-2.
The point level signal is sent via an output signal
jump from 8 mA to 16 mA. 1 2
EEx ia EX
EX
– +
U– 11…36
e.g. PLC
TI418Fen50
Output signal
gn gn rd gn gn ye
+ ~16 mA
~16 mA = 16 mA ± 5 %
2 1 ~ 8 mA = 8 mA ± 6 %
MAX
+ ~8 mA
2 1
+ ~16 mA
2 1
MIN
+ ~8 mA
2 1
Maintenance +
required * 8/16 mA Lit
2 1

+ < 3.6 mA
2 1
Unlit
TI418Fen51 TI418F44
Signal on alarm Output signal on power failure or in the event of device failure: < 3.6 mA
Connectable load • U = Connection DC voltage:

- 11 to 36 V DC (non-hazardous area and Ex ia)
- 14.4 to 30 V DC (Ex d)
• Imax = 16 mA
Endress+Hauser 35
FEI57S electronic insert (PFM)

Power supply Supply voltage:
9.5 to 12.5 VDC
Power consumption: < 150 mW 16 mA PFM
8 mA
0 mA t
TI418F52
Frequency: 17 to 185 Hz

For connecting to switching units
Nivotester FTC325, FTC625, FTC470Z, FTC471Z
from Endress+Hauser.
PFM signal 17 to 185 Hz
Switching between minimum/maximum
1 2
safety in the Nivotester.
EX
EEx ia
PFM
EX
– + Nivotester
11 12 FTC325
FTC625
d4 d2 FTC470Z
FTC471Z
TI418F53
Output signal PFM 60 to 185 Hz (Endress+Hauser)
Signal on alarm
Mode Output signal LEDs
green red
Normal operation 60...185 Hz

1 2
Maintenance
required * 60...185 Hz
1 2 Lit

< 20 Hz
1 2
Unlit
TI418Fen54 TI418F44
Connectable load • Floating relay contacts in the connected switching unit Nivotester FTC325, FTC625, FTC470Z, FTC471Z
• For the contact load capacity, refer to the technical data of the switching device.
36 Endress+Hauser
Electronic insert FEI58 (NAMUR H-L edge)

Power supply Power consumption: < 6 mW at I < 1 mA; < 38 mW at I = 2.2 to 4 mA
Interface connection data: IEC 60947-5-6

For connecting to isolating amplifiers
as per NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6),
e.g. FXN421, FXN422, FTL325N,
FTL375N from Endress+Hauser.
Change in output signal from high to low current
in event of point level detection. 1 2
(H-L edge)
Additional function:
EEx ia
Test key on the electronic insert.
Pressing the key interrupts the connection
to the isolating amplifier. EX
! Note! H
In the case of Ex-d operation, the additional function I
can only be used if the housing is not EX
L
exposed to an explosive atmosphere.
Connection to Multiplexer: set 3 s as the

cycle time at least. – +
Isolating amplifier
to IEC 60947-5-6
(NAMUR)
L00-FTL5xxxx-04-05-xx-en-002
Output signal Fail-safe Level Output signal LEDs

mode green yellow
2.2 …
+ 3.5 mA
2 1
Max.
0.6 …
+ 1.0 mA
2 1
= Lit 2.2 …
+ 3.5 mA
2 1
= Flashes
Min.
0.6 …
= Unlit + 1.0 mA
2 1
L00-FTL5xxxx-07-05- L00-FTL5xxxx-04-05-xx-xx-007
xx-xx-002
Signal on alarm Output signal in the event of damage to the sensor: < 1.0 mA
Connectable load • See the technical data of the connected isolating amplifier as per IEC 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)
• Connection also to isolating amplifiers which have special safety circuits (I > 3.0 mA)
Endress+Hauser 37
Power supply
Electrical connection Connection compartment
Five housings with the following protection classes are available:
Housing Standard EEx ia EEx d Gas-tight process
seal
Polyester housing F16 X X - -
Stainless steel housing F15 X X - -
Aluminum housing F17 X X - -
Aluminum housing F13 X X X X
Aluminum housing T13 X X X X
(with separate connection compartment)
Connector In the case of the versions with a connector (M12 or 7/8"), the housing does not have to be opened to connect
the signal cable.
PIN assignment for the M12 connector (PROFIBUS PA standard, HART)
PIN Meaning for Meaning for

FEI52, FEI53 FEI55, FEI57S, FEI58
1 3 – 1 External load/ Not assigned

voltage output
2 + 4 nc 2 Not assigned Not assigned
3 Signal – Signal –
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-016
4 Signal + Signal +
PIN assignment for the 7/8" connector (Fieldbus FOUNDATION standard, HART)
PIN Meaning for Meaning for

FEI52, FEI53 FEI55, FEI57S, FEI58
1 – 3 nc 1 Signal – Signal –
2 Signal + Signal +
2 + 4
3 External load/ Not assigned
voltage output
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-017 4 Ground Ground
Cable entry • Cable gland: M20x1.5 (for EEx d only cable entry M20)
Two cable glands included in scope of delivery.
• Cable entry: G ½, NPT ½ , NPT ¾ or M20 thread
38 Endress+Hauser
Performance characteristics
Reference operating • Temperature: +20 °C ±5 °C
conditions
• Pressure: 1013 mbar abs. ±20 mbar
• Humidity: 65 % ±20%
• Medium: water from mains (conductivity ≥ 180 μS/cm)
Switch point • Uncertainty as per DIN 61298-2: max ±0.3%

• Non-repeatability (reproducibility) as per DIN 61298-2: max. ±0.1 %
Ambient temperature effect Electronic insert

< 0.06 % / 10 K related to the full scale value
Separate housing
Capacitance change of connecting cable per meter 0.15 pF/10K
Endress+Hauser 39
Human interface
Electronic inserts FEI51, FEI52, FEI54, FEI55
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B C LED
on
7 3
FEI5x - 5 + flashing
- +
offf
of
BA300Fen015
Green LED 1 ( ready for operation), red LED 3 ( error indicated), yellow LED 6 (✲ switching state)
Function switch Function – key + key Light emitting diodes (LED signals)
position
1
7 3 _
5
+
1 (green) 2 (green) 3 (red) 4 (green) 5 (green) 6 (yellow)
Operation Flashes On Flashes On On/off/
1 Operational (MIN-SIL) (warning/ (MAX-SIL) flashes
LED alarm)
Restore factory setting Press both keys for On –> –> –> –> On/off/
approx. 20 s flashes
Empty calibration Press On On/off/
2 (present) flashes
Full calibration Press On On/off/
(present) flashes
Reset: Press both keys for On –> –> –> –> On/off/
Calibration and approx. 10 s flashes
switchpoint adjustment
Dc
Switch point shift Press for < Press for > On Off Off Off Off On/off/
3 (2 pF) (4 pF) (8 pF) (16 pF) (32 pF) flashes
Measuring range Press for < On Off On/off/

4 (500 pF) (1600 pF) flashes
Two-point control Δs Press once On On/off/
Ds flashes
Buildup mode Press twice On On On/off/

flashes
Switching delay Press for < Press for > Off On Off Off On/off/
5 (0.3 s) (1.5 s) (5 s) (10 s) flashes
Self-test (function test) Press both keys Off Flashes On/off/

6 (inactive) (active) flashes
MIN-/MAX Press for Press for Off On On/off/

7 Fail-safe mode MIN MAX (MIN) (MAX) flashes
SIL mode* Press both keys On On On/off/
lock/unlock (MIN-SIL) (MAX-SIL) flashes
Upload/download sensor Press for Press for Flashes Flashes On/off/
8 DAT (EEPROM) download upload (download) (upload) flashes
* Only in conjunction with FEI55 electronic insert (SIL).
40 Endress+Hauser
Electronic inserts FEI53, FEI57S
A B
1 2
LED
0...1600pF on
FEI5x Standard 0.....500pF
- + flashing
offf
of
BA300Fen016
Green LED ( ready for operation), red LED ( error indicated)
DIP switch Function
A B
Standard1): If the measuring range is exceeded no alarm is output.

A
Standard
: If the measuring range is exceeded an alarm is output.

A
Measuring range: The measuring range is between 0 and 500 pF

B Span: The span is between 5 and 500 pF.
0.....500pF
Measuring range: The measuring range is between 0 and 1600 pF

0...1600pF
B Span: The span is between 5 and 1600 pF.
Endress+Hauser 41
Electronic insert FEI58
A B
1 2 3
MIN
LED
>2,2mA
FEI58
on
NAMUR
IEC 60947-5-6
MAX
- + flashing
C
off
C DE FG
BA299Fen016
Green LED 1 ( ready for operation), red LED 2 ( error indicated), yellow LED 3 (✲ switching state)
DIP switches (C, D, E, F) Function
The probe is covered during calibration.

D
The probe is uncovered during calibration.

D
Switchpoint adjustment: 10 pF
E C
Switchpoint adjustment: 2 pF
E C
Switching delay: 5 s
F
Switching delay: 1 s
F
Fail-safe mode: MIN

G MAX
MIN The output switches safety-oriented when the probe is uncovered (signal on
alarm). For use for dry running protection and pump protection for example
Fail-safe mode: MAX

G MAX The output switches safety-oriented when the probe is covered (signal on
alarm). For use with overfill protection for example
Key Function
A B C
X Display diagnostic code
X Display calibration situation
X X Perform calibration (during operation)
X X Delete calibration points (during startup)
X Test key , (disconnects the transmitter from the switching unit)
42 Endress+Hauser
Certificates and approvals

CE approval The devices are designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, have been tested and left the factory in
a condition in which they are safe to operate. The devices comply with the applicable standards and regulations
that are listed in the EC Declaration of Conformity and thus meet the legal requirements of the EC Directives.
Endress+Hauser confirms the conformity and successful testing of the device by affixing the CE mark.
Additional certification • See also "Ordering information" → ä 44

• AD2000
The wetted material (316L) corresponds to AD2000 – W0/W2
Other standards and EN 60529

guidelines Degrees of protection by housing (IP code)
EN 61010
Protection measures for electrical equipment for measurement, control, regulation and laboratory procedures
EN 61326
Interference emission (Class B equipment), interference immunity (Appendix A – Industrial).
NAMUR
Association for Standards for Control and Regulation in the Chemical Industry
IEC 61508
Functional safety
IEC 60947-5-6
Low-voltage switchgear and control gear; DC interface for proximity sensors and switching amplifiers
(NAMUR)
Endress+Hauser 43
Ordering information
! Note!
In this list, versions which are mutually exclusive are not marked.
Solicap M FTI55 10 Approval:

A Non-hazardous areas
B ATEX II 1/3 D
C ATEX II 1/2 D
F ATEX II 1 D, 1/2 D, 1/3 D EEx ia D
L CSA/FM IS Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1+2, Gr. A-G
M CSA/FM XP Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1+2, Gr. A-G
N CSA/FM DIP Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1+2, Gr. E-G
S TIIS Ex ia IIC T3
T TIIS Ex d IIC T3
3 NEPSI DIP A20
Y Special version, to be specified
20 Inactive length L3:

A Not selected
B Not selected + 125 mm/5 inch 316L
Active buildup compensation
1 .... mm 316L
5 .... inch 316L
9 Special version
30 Active length L1:

A .... mm, steel
B 325 mm, steel
C .... mm, 316L
D 325 mm, 316L
E 600 mm, steel
H .... inch, steel
K 13 inch, steel
M .... inch, 316L
N 13 inch, 316L
P 24 inch, steel
40 Insulation:
1 fully insulated PE, max. 80 °C
2 75 mm L2, partially insulated PPS, max. 180 °C
3 3 inch L2, partially insulated PPS, max. 180 °C
9 Special version, to be specified
50 Process connection:
AFJ 2", 150 lbs RF 316/316L
AGJ 3", 150 lbs RF 316/316L
AHJ 4", 150 lbs RF 316/316L
BSJ DN80, PN10/16 A 316L EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)
BTJ DN100, PN10/16 A 316L EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)
B3J DN50, PN25/40 A 316L EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)
KFJ 10K 50, RF 316L JIS B2220
KGJ 10K 80, RF 316L JIS B2220
KHJ 10K 100, RF 316L JIS B2220
RGJ NPT 1½, 316L thread ANSI
RG1 NPT 1½, steel thread ANSI
RVJ R 1½, 316L thread DIN2999
RV1 R 1½, steel thread DIN2999
YY9 Special version, to be specified
60 Electronics; output:
1 FEI51; 2-wire 19 to 253VAC
2 FEI52; 3-wire PNP, 10 to 55VDC
3 FEI53; 3-wire, 3 to 12 V signal
4 FEI54; relay DPDT, 19 to 253VAC, 19 to 55VDC
5 FEI55; 8/16 mA, 11 to 36VDC
44 Endress+Hauser
7 FEI57S;2–wire PFM
8 FEI58; NAMUR+test key (H-L signal)
W Prepared for FEI5x
70 Housing:
1 F15 316L IP66, NEMA4X
2 F16 polyester IP66, NEMA4X
3 F17 aluminum IP66, NEMA4X
4 F13 Alu + gas-tight probe seal IP66, NEMA4X
5 T13 Alu + gas-tight probe seal IP66, NEMA4X
+ separate connection compartment
80 Cable entry:
A M20 Threaded joint
B Thread G ½
C Thread NPT ½
D Thread NPT ¾
G Thread M20
E M12 connector
F 7/8" connector
90 Probe design:
1 Compact
2 2000 mm L4 cable > separate housing
3 .... mm L4 cable > separate housing
4 80 inch L4 cable > separate housing
5 .... inch L4 cable > separate housing
100 Additional equipment:

A Basic version
D EN10204-3.1 material (316L wetted), Inspection certificate
E EN10204-3.1 material (316L wetted), Inspection certificate
NACE MR0175
F SIL Declaration of Conformity
FTI55 Product designation
Endress+Hauser 45
Solicap M FTI56 10 Approval:

A Non-hazardous areas
B ATEX II 1/3 D
C ATEX II 1/2 D
F ATEX II 1 D, 1/2 D, 1/3 D EEx ia D
L CSA/FM IS Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1+2, Gr. A-G
M CSA/FM XP Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1+2, Gr. A-G
N CSA/FM DIP Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1+2, Gr. E-G
S TIIS Ex ia IIC T3
T TIIS Ex d IIC T3
3 NEPSI DIP A20
20 Inactive length L3:

A Not selected
1 .... mm 316L
5 .... inch 316L
9 Special version
30 Active length L1; tensioning weight:

A .... mm, 6 mm rope 316L; 316L
B .... mm, 12 mm rope 316L; 316L
C .... mm, 8 mm rope galvanized steel; steel
D .... mm, 14 mm rope galvanized steel; steel
H .... inch, 0.2" rope 316L; 316L
K .... inch, 0.5" rope 316L, 316L
M .... inch, 0.3" rope galvanized steel; steel
N .... inch, 0.6" rope galvanized steel; steel
40 Insulation:
1 fully insulated PA, max. 120 °C
2 500 mm L2, partially insulated PTFE, max. 180 °C
50 Process connection:
AFJ 2", 150 lbs RF 316/316L
AGJ 3", 150 lbs RF 316/316L
AHJ 4", 150 lbs RF 316/316L
BSJ DN80, PN10/16 A 316L EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)
BTJ DN100, PN10/16 A 316L EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)
B3J DN50, PN25/40 A 316L EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)
KFJ 10K 50, RF 316L JIS B2220
KGJ 10K 80, RF 316L JIS B2220
KHJ 10K 100, RF 316L JIS B2220
RGJ NPT 1½ 316L thread ANSI
RG1 NPT 1½, steel thread ANSI
RVJ R 1½, 316L thread DIN2999
RV1 R 1½, steel thread DIN2999
YY9 Special version, to be specified
1 FEI51; 2-wire 19 to 253VAC
2 FEI52; 3-wire PNP, 10 to 55VDC
3 FEI53; 3-wire, 3 to 12 V signal
4 FEI54; relay DPDT, 19 to 253VAC, 19 to 55VDC
5 FEI55; 8/16 mA, 11 to 36VDC
7 FEI57S;2–wire PFM
8 FEI58; NAMUR+test key (H-L signal)
W Prepared for FEI5x
70 Housing:
1 F15 316L IP66, NEMA4X
2 F16 polyester IP66, NEMA4X
46 Endress+Hauser
70 Housing:
3 F17 aluminum IP66, NEMA4X
4 F13 Alu + gas-tight probe seal IP66, NEMA4X
5 T13 Alu + gas-tight probe seal IP66, NEMA4X
+ separate connection compartment
80 Cable entry:
A M20 Threaded joint
B Thread G ½
C Thread NPT ½
D Thread NPT ¾
G Thread M20
E M12 connector
F 7/8" connector
90 Probe design:
1 Compact
2 2000 mm L4 cable > separate housing
3 .... mm L4 cable > separate housing
4 80 inch L4 cable > separate housing
5 .... inch L4 cable > separate housing
100 Additional equipment:

A Basic version
F SIL Declaration of Conformity
FTI56 Product designation
Endress+Hauser 47
Accessories
Weather protection cover For F13 and F17 housing
Order number: 71040497
Overvoltage protection Overvoltage protection (housing)

HAW56x
• HAW569–A11A (non-hazardous)
• HAW569–B11A (hazardous area)
! Note!
These two versions can be screwed directly into the housing (M20x1.5).
Surge arrester for limiting overvoltage in signal lines and components.
ÜS-Ableiter/Arrester
ENDRESS+HAUSER
HAW569
HAW569-A1 Uc 34.8 V
In 10 kA
IL 500 mA
protected
L00-FMI5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-009
Overvoltage protection (cabinet)

• HAW562Z (hazardous area)
The HAW562Z module can be used if installing in cabinets.
Spare parts Electronic inserts

Electronic insert Parts number
FEI51 71042887
FEI52 71025819
FEI53 71025820
FEI54 71025814
FEI55 71025815
FEI57S 71025816
FEI58 71100895
! Note!
• You can order spare parts directly from your E+H service organization by quoting the order number (see
below).
• Before ordering, please note that all ordered spare parts must correspond with the indications on your
nameplate. Otherwise, the indications on the nameplate will no longer correspond with the instrument
version.
Housing cover
Cover Parts number
For aluminum housing F13: gray with sealing ring 52002698
For stainless steel housing F15: with sealing ring 52027000
For stainless steel housing F15: with clasp and sealing ring 52028268
For polyester housing F16, flat: gray with sealing ring 52025606
For aluminum housing F17, flat: with sealing ring 52002699
For aluminum housing T13, flat: gray with sealing ring/electronics compartment 52006903
For aluminum housing T13, flat: gray with sealing ring/connection compartment 52007103
Seal set for stainless steel housing

• Seal set for stainless steel housing F15: with 5 sealing rings
52028179
48 Endress+Hauser
Documentation
! Note!
This documentation is available on the product pages at www.endress.com
Technical Information • Nivotester FTL325N

TI353F/00/en
• Nivotester FTL375N
TI361F/00/en
• EMC test procedures
TI241F/00/en
Operating Instructions • Solicap M FTI55, FTI56

BA300F/00/en
Certificates Safety information (ATEX)

ATEX II 1 D Ex tD A20 IP65 T 90 °C,
ATEX II 1/2 D Ex tD A20/A21 IP65 T 100 °C
XA389F/00/a3
DIP A21 TA, T 100°C IP65
NEPSI GYJ071369
XA426F/00/a3
Control Drawings (for FM and CSA)

FM ZD222F/00/en
CSA ZD225F/00/en
Functional safety (SIL2/SIL3)

SIL
SD278F/00/en
CRN registration
• CRN 0F1988.75
Other
• AD2000
The wetted material (316L) corresponds to AD2000 – W0/W2
Patents This product is protected by at least one of the patents listed below.
Further patents are under development.
• DE 103 22 279,
WO 2004 102 133,
US 2005 003 9528
• DE 203 13 695,
WO 2005 025 015
Endress+Hauser 49
50 Endress+Hauser
Endress+Hauser 51
Instruments International
Endress+Hauser
Instruments International AG
Kaegenstrasse 2
4153 Reinach
Switzerland
Tel. +41 61 715 81 00

Fax +41 61 715 25 00
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com
TI418F/00/en/01.10
71110976
FM+SGML 6.0 ProMoDo 71110976
7.
LAMP
Data Sheet LED-510 Series Flood Light
20W, 30W, 50W, 100W, 150W and 200W
IP65 Flood Light in robust design for enlightening of all
types of outdoor areas as; parking lots, walkways,
video surveillance areas and much more.
The robust anodised aluminium housing, secures a
good heat dissipation.
The longest possible lifetime is achieved by the built in
Mean Well drivers, that secures a constant current
through the Bridgelux LED chips.
With an efficiency of 110 lm/W, the LED-510 series
replaces 80-1000W Halite lamps.
General Specifications:
LED Type COB, Bridgelux
Driver type Mean Well
Front glass 5mm clear hardened glass
Colour temperature 5500K
Expected lifetime 50,000 hours (L80)
Input Voltage 85V-265V AC
Power Factor >0.95 (230VAC)
Beam angle 150º
Certificates CE og ROHS
Sensor LED-510, -511 og -512 is available with PIR sensor
Model LED-510C1 LED-511C1 LED-512C1

Lumen output 2.200 lm 3.300 lm 5.500 lm
Power 20W +/- 5% 30W +/- 5% 50W +/- 5%
Replaces 100-150 Halite 150-200W Halite 200-250 Halite
Width 166mm 178mm 194mm
Height 200mm 215mm 253mm
Depth 77mm 81mm 95mm
Weight 1.300g 2.200g 3.000g
Model LED-514C1 LED-515C1-150 LED-516C1

Lumen output 11.000 lm 16.500 lm 22.000 lm
Power 100W +/- 5% 150W +/- 5% 200W +/- 5%
Replaces 400-500W Halite 600-800W Halite 800-1000W Halite
Width 310mm 320mm 320mm
Height 340mm 400mm 400mm
Depth 185mm 190mm 190mm
Weight 6.500g 9.000g 10.500g
Ver. 4.1-EN, maj 2016
LED-TEK A/S · LUNDAGERVEJ 45A · DK-8723 LØSNING · TELEFON +45 7384 1100 · LED-TEK@LED-TEK.DK · WWW.LED-TEK.DK
Data Sheet LED-600 og 610 Series
IP67 Industrial luminaire
The IP67 series is a robust series of waterproof doublet isolated industrial luminaire, with an efficiency
of 100lm/W.
The luminaire is easily mounted with the brackets supplied with the luminaire. Bought directly onto
the ceiling or strapped down in wires.
The cable is mounted through the watertight M16 gland.
The hole series is supplied with a frosted plastic cover and is suitable for use in production halls,
warehouses, animal stables, food production and cold storage, as well as a variety of sports halls, etc.
Furthermore, the series is suitable as built-in lighting in signs.
Specifications:
Voltage: 180-265VAC
Power Factor: >0,9
CRI: (RA) >80
IP class: IP67
LED type: Taiwan Lextar 5630 LED
Expected lifetime: >35.000 timer (L70)
Operation temp.: -24 ºC to +40 ºC
Mounting: Watertight M16 gland
Material: Body: ABS/PC (polycarbonate)
Cover: Plastic (frosted)
Aluminium PCB
Certificates: CE og RoHS
Part number: LED-600B1 / 601B1 / 602B1 LED-610B1 / 611B1 / 612B1

Power: 10W/24W/32W 24W/50W/60W
Lumen: 900 lm/2200 lm/3000 lm 2500 lm/5000 lm/5700 lm
Light angle: 145 º 116º
Light colour: 4000K 4000K
Dimensions: 680/1201/1500 x ø 53 mm 705/1225/1525 x 80 x 54 mm
Weight: 400 gr./650 gr./850 gr. 660 gr./1100 gr./1350 gr.
All part numbers are available in 3000 and 5000 Kelvin as well.
Ver. 7-EN, May 2016
Data Sheet LED-620 Series IP65 luminaire
Neat and timeless LED luminaire available in several sizes and with several different
options. The fixture is easily mounted with the supplied brackets and can be connected
in series as needed.
All versions are supplied with IP65 waterproof housing.
The luminaires are available with the following options:
Motion sensor - Emergency lighting
Cable backwards - Triac dimming
1-10V dimming *
* Cannot be combined with other options
Specifications:
Voltage: 85-265VAC
Power Factor: >0,9
CRI: (RA) >80 (CRI90 as option)
IP class: IP65
LED type: SMD2835
Light angle: 120º
Expected lifetime: >50.000 timer (L70)
Operations temp.: -20 ºC to +45 ºC
Mounting: Watertight plug
Sensor: The sensor is a combined PIR and Daylight sensor.
Material: Plastic housing and cover in Polycarbonate (frosted)
PCB: Aluminium
Certificates: CE and RoHs
Part no.: LED-620A1 LED-620B1 LED-621A1 LED-621B1 LED-622A1 LED-622B1

Power: 20W 20W 40W 40W 60W 60W
Lumen: 1750 lm 1800 lm 3550 lm 3600 lm 5350 lm 5400 lm
No. of LEDs: 120 120 240 240 384 384
CCT: 3000K 4000K 3000K 4000K 3000K 4000K
Dim.:(mm) 640x120x80 640x120x80 1200x120x80 1200x120x80 1500x120x80 1500x120x80
Weight: 1200g 1200g 2300g 2300g 3200g 3200g
Ver. 7-EN, May 2016
8.
ENCODER
IXARC Absolute Rotary Encoder
OCD-DPC1B-1212-B150-H3P
Interface
Interface Profibus DP
Profile DPV0, DPV1 and DPV2 Class 2 (EN50170 +
EN50254)
Diagnostics Memory
Programming Functions Resolution, gearing factor (physical resolution) ,
velocity scaling + filter, preset (zero point),
counting direction, limit switches , node number,
teach-in, diagnosis
Manual Functions Address selector switch 0-99 and terminal
resistor (with connection cap)
Features Round Axis
Transmission Rate ≤12 Mbaud
Interface Cycle Time ≥ 1 ms
Outputs
Output Driver Profibus Data Interface, galvanically isolated via
opto-couplers
Electrical Data
Supply Voltage 10 – 30 VDC (On power supplies comply with EN
50178)
Current Consumption ≤ 230 mA @ 10 V DC, ≤ 100 mA @ 24 V DC
Power Consumption ≤ 2.5 W
Data Sheet
Printed at 26-05-2016 08:05
-1/5-
Start-Up Time <1s
Reverse Polarity Protection Yes
Short Circuit Protection Yes
EMC: Emitted Interference DIN EN 61000-6-4
EMC: Noise Immunity DIN EN 61000-6-2
MTTF 13.5 years @ 40 °C
Sensor
Technology Optical
Resolution Singleturn 12 bit
Resolution Multiturn 12 bit
Multiturn Technology Mechanical Gearing (no Battery)
Accuracy (INL) ±0.0220° (14 – 16 bit), ±0.0439° (≤13 bit)
Code Binary
Environmental Specifications
Protection Class (Shaft) IP65
Protection Class (Housing) IP65
Operating Temperature -40 °C (-40 °F) - +85 °C (+185 °F)
Storage Temperature -40 °C (-40 °F) – +85 °C (+185 °F)
Humidity 98% RH, no condensation
Mechanical Data
Connection Cap Material Aluminum
Housing Material Steel
Housing Coating Cathodic corrosion protection (>720 h salt spay
resistance) + Wet Painted
Flange Type Blind Hollow, ø 58 mm (B)
Flange Material Aluminum
Shaft Type Blind Hollow, Depth = 30 mm
Shaft Diameter ø 15 mm (ø 0.59")
Shaft Material Stainless Steel V2A (1.4305, 303)
Rotor Inertia ≤ 30 gcm² [≤ 0.17 oz-in²]
Friction Torque ≤ 3 Ncm @ 20 °C (4.2 oz-in @ 68 °F)
Max. Permissible Mechanical Speed ≤ 12000 1/min
Shock Resistance ≤ 100 g (half sine 6 ms, EN 60068-2-27)
Permanent Shock Resistance ≤ 10 g (half sine 16 ms, EN 60068-2-29)
Data Sheet
Printed at 26-05-2016 08:05
-2/5-
Vibration Resistance ≤ 10 g (10 Hz – 1000 Hz, EN 60068-2-6)
Length 99 mm (3.90")
Weight 460 g (1.01 lb)
Electrical Connection
Connection Orientation Radial
Connection Type 3 x Cable Gland
Connection Cap Type Removable for easy replacing encoder without
new installation of cable, Rotary switches with
visible node number, No active components,
Terminal resistor switch cut the outgoing bus too,
Big spring clips
Product Life Cycle

Product Life Cycle Established
Connection Plan
SIGNAL PIN NUMBER
Bus line B (Bus in) B
Bus line A (Bus in) A
GND −
Power Supply +
Bus line B (Bus out) B
Bus line A (Bus out) A
GND −
Power Supply +
Data Sheet
Printed at 26-05-2016 08:05
-3/5-
Connector-View on Encoder
Accessories
Torque Support-Tether-B15 Type
Clamping Ring B15
Contact
POSITAL
info@posital.com
Data Sheet
Printed at 26-05-2016 08:05
-4/5-
The picture and drawing are for general presentation purposes only. Please refer to the "Download" section for detailed technical drawings.
All dimension in [inch] mm. © FRABA B.V., All rights reserved. We do not assume responsibility for technical inaccuracies or omissions.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Data Sheet
Printed at 26-05-2016 08:05
-5/5-
9.
SPARE
10.
CIRCUIT BREAKER AND RELAY

AUX T1...T6 1Q 1SY
General Information
Extended Product Type: AUX T1...T6 1Q 1SY
Product ID: 1SDA051368R1
EAN: 8015644517892
Catalog Description: AUX T1...T6 1Q 1SY
Long Description: 1 CHANGEOVER CONTACT OPEN-CLOSED + 1 CHANGEOVER FOR TRIPPED
INDICATION T1-T2-T3-T4-T5-T6
Categories
Products » Low Voltage Products and Systems » Circuit Breakers » Moulded Case Circuit Breakers » Accessories for
Tmax T
Parts & Services » Robotics » Controllers » IRC5 » IRC5 Single
Ordering
EAN: 8015644517892
Minimum Order Quantity: 1 piece
Customs Tariff Number: 85389099
Dimensions
Product Net Weight: 0.04 kg
Container Information
Package Level 1 Units: 1 piece
Package Level 1 Width: 110 mm
Package Level 1 Height: 60 mm
Package Level 1 Length: 140 mm
Package Level 1 Gross Weight: 0.06 kg
Package Level 1 EAN: 8015644517892
Environmental
RoHS Status: Planned to follow EU Directive 2002/95/EC August 18, 2005 and amendment after 2006-07-
01
Additional Information
Device: T1-T2-T3
Product Main Type: Accessories for Tmax T
Product Name: Accessory for Circuit Breakers
Product Type: ACC
Standards: IEC
Suitable For: T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
Suitable for Product Class: SACE Tmax T
Certificates and Declarations (Document Number)

Data Sheet, Technical Information: 1SDC210015D0201
Declaration of Conformity - CE: 1SDL000165R0001
RoHS Information: 1SDL000200R0001
Classifications
E-nummer: 3180985
Object Classification Code: Q
UNSPSC: 39120000
Where Used (as a spare part for "Products")

1 Products Filter
Identifier Description Qty Unit Of Measure
3HAC020536-014 IRC5 Controller 1 piece
Product specific part data
1 Products Filter
Product Category Robot Design Year
3HAC020536-014 IRC5 Single IRC5 M2004
AUX 1Q 24Vdc XT1...XT4
General Information
Extended Product Type: AUX 1Q 24Vdc XT1...XT4
EAN: 8015644002787
Catalog Description: AUX 1Q 24Vdc XT1...XT4
Long Description: 1 CHANGEOVER CONTACTS OPEN-CLOSED V <(><<)> 24V DC XT1..XT4
Categories
Tmax XT
Ordering
EAN: 8015644002787
Dimensions
Product Main Type: Accessories for Tmax XT
Product Type: ACC
Standards: IEC 60947-2
Suitable For: XT1
XT2
XT3
XT4
Suitable for Product Class: SACE Tmax XT

Classifications
UNSPSC: 39120000
HKF1-11
General Information
Extended Product Type: HKF1-11
Product ID: 1SAM201901R1001
EAN: 4013614320354
Catalog Description: HKF1-11 Auxiliary Contact
Long Description: HKF1-11 Aux.-contact for frontmounting
Categories (Show All..)

Products » Low Voltage Products and Systems » Control Products » Manual Motor Starters » Manual Motor Starters
Accessories
Parts & Services » Drives » Medium Voltage AC Drives » Industrial Drives » ACS2000
Parts & Services » Drives » Medium Voltage AC Drives » Special Purpose Drives » ACS1000
Ordering
EAN: 4013614320354
Dimensions
Product Net Height: 12.5 mm
Product Net Depth: 26.5 mm
Product Net Width: 45 mm
Technical
Rated Operational Current AC-15 (240 V) 4 A
(Ie): (24 V) 6 A
(380 / 400 V) 3 A
(690 V) 1 A
Rated Operational Current DC-13 (125 V) 0.55 A
(Ie): (24 V) 2 A
(250 V) 0.27 A
(440 V) 0 A
(600 V) 0 A
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage Auxiliary Circuit 6 kV
(Uimp):
Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui): 250 V
Connecting Capacity Auxiliary Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 1.5 mm²
Circuit: Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 1.5 mm²
Flexible 1/2x 0.75 ... 1.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 1.5 mm²
Tightening Torque: Auxiliary Circuit 0.8 ... 1.2 N·m
Wire Stripping Length: Auxiliary Circuit 8 mm
Recommended Screw Driver: M3
Pozidriv 2
Number of Auxiliary Contacts NO: 1
Number of Auxiliary Contacts NC: 1
Standards: IEC/EN 60947-1
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
UL 60947-1
UL 60947-4-1
Product Name: Auxiliary Contact
Suitable For: MS116
MS132
MO132
Suitable for Product Class: Manual Motor Starter
Rated Operational Voltage: 250 V
Environmental
RoHS Status: Following EU Directive 2002/95/EC August 18, 2005 and amendment
Ambient Air Temperature: Operation -20 ... +55 °C
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
Connecting Capacity Auxiliary Flexible 1/2x 16-14 AWG
Circuit UL/CSA: Stranded 1/2x 16-14 AWG
Tightening Torque UL/CSA: Auxiliary Circuit 7 in·lb
Contact Rating UL/CSA: B300
R300
Maximum Operating Voltage Main Circuit 250 V AC
UL/CSA:

Instructions and Manuals: 2CDC131011M6802
2CDC131034M6801
2CDC131022M6802
ABS Certificate: 1SAA963001-0101
BV Certificate: 1SAA963000-0202
CB Certificate: 1SAA963003-2001
CCC Certificate: 1SAA963002-3804
cUL Certificate: cUL_E137861
Data Sheet, Technical Information: 1SBC100173C0201
Declaration of Conformity - CE: 1SAD938509-0125
1SAD938501-0190
1SAD938503-0183
1SAD938515-0060
DNV Certificate: 1SAA963001-0303
EAC Certificate: 1SAA963000-2701
GL Certificate: 1SAA963001-0401
1SAA963000-0402
GOST Certificate: 1SAA937000-2703
LR Certificate: 1SAA963001-0501
1SAA963001-0502
1SAA963000-0505
RINA Certificate: 1SAA963000-0802
RoHS Information: 1SAA963001-4407
UL Certificate: UL_E137861
Classifications
E-nummer: 3112001
ETIM 4: EC002498 - Accessories for low-voltage switch technology
eClass: 7.0 27379201
UNSPSC: 39121500

4 Products Filter
ACS 1000 No Description Available 1 piece
ACS 5000 Water Cooled No Description Available 1 piece

4 Products Filter
Product Category Drive Part Category
ACS 2000 ACS2000 Switches, Relays, Contactors
ACS 5000 Water Cooled ACS5000 water cooled Switches, Relays, Contactors
MS116-1.0
General Information
Extended Product Type: MS116-1.0
EAN: 4013614320286
Catalog Description: MS116-1.0 Manual Motor Starter
Long Description: The MS116-1.0 manual motor starter is a compact 45 mm width devices with a rated
operational current of Ie = 1.0 A. This device is used to manually switch on and off motors
and to protect them reliably and without the need for a fuse from short-circuits, overload and
phase failures. The manual motor starter offers a rated service short-circuit breaking
capacity Ics = 50 kA at 400 VAC and the trip class 10A. Further features are the build-in
disconnect function, temperature compensation, trip-free mechanism and a rotary handle
with a clear switch position indication. The manual motor starter is suitable for three- and
single-phase applications. Auxiliary contacts, signalling contacts, undervoltage releases,
shunt trips, 3-phase bus bars, power in-feed blocks and locking devices for protection
against unauthorized changes are available as accessory.
Categories
Products » Low Voltage Products and Systems » Circuit Breakers » Manual Motor Starters
Ordering
EAN: 4013614320286
Dimensions
Product Net Height: 90 mm
Technical
Rated Ultimate Short-Circuit (230 V AC) 50 kA
Breaking Capacity (Icu): (400 V AC) 50 kA
(440 V AC) 30 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 30 kA
Rated Instantaneous Short-Circuit 12.5 A
Current Setting (Ii):
Setting Range: 0.63 ... 1 A
Rated Operational Power AC-3 (Pe): (400 V) Three Phase 0.25 kW
Rated Operational Voltage: Main Circuit 690 V AC
Rated Operational Current (Ie): 1A
Rated Operational Current AC-3 (Ie): 1A
Rated Frequency (f): Main Circuit 50 Hz
Main Circuit 60 Hz
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage Main Circuit 6 kV
(Uimp):
Power Loss: at Rated Operating Conditions per Pole 0.7 ... 1.7 W
Number of Poles: 3
Conventional Free-air Thermal Main Circuit 1 A
Current (Ith):
Degree of Protection: Housing IP20
Main Circuit Terminals IP10
Pollution Degree: 3
Electrical Durability: 100000 cycle
Mechanical Durability: 100000 cycle
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit: Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Flexible 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 4 mm²
Tightening Torque: Main Circuit 0.8 ... 1.2 N·m
Wire Stripping Length: Main Circuit 9 mm
Recommended Screw Driver: Pozidriv 2
Mounting Position: Position 1 to 6
Actuator Type: Rotary Handle
Contact Position Indication: ON / OFF
Mounting on DIN Rail: TH35-15 (35 x 15 mm Mounting Rail) acc. to IEC 60715
TH35-7.5 (35 x 7.5 mm Mounting Rail) acc. to IEC 60715
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
UL 60947-1
UL 60947-4-1
Rated Service Short-Circuit (230 V AC) 50 kA
Breaking Capacity (Ics): (400 V AC) 50 kA
(440 V AC) 30 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 30 kA
Environmental
Ambient Air Temperature Yes
Compensation:
Maximum Operating Altitude 2000 m
Permissible:
Resistance to Shock acc. to IEC 11 ms Pulse 25g
60068-2-27:
Resistance to Vibrations acc. to IEC 5g / 3 ... 150 Hz
60068-2-6:
Ambient Air Temperature: Around the Enclosure 0 ... +40 °C
Operation -25 ... +70 °C
Operation Compensated -25 ... +55 °C
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
Horsepower Rating UL/CSA: (550 ... 600 V AC) Three Phase 0.5 Hp
Ampere Rating UL/CSA: 1A
General Use Rating UL/CSA: (600 V AC) 1 A
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit Flexible 1/2x 16-12 AWG
UL/CSA: Stranded 1/2x 16-12 AWG
Tightening Torque UL/CSA: Main Circuit 10 in·lb
UL/CSA:

Data Sheet, Technical Information 1SAM200505F0005
(Part 2):
(Part 3): 1SAM200507F0002
1SAM200507F0003
1SAM200508F0001
1SAM200508F0002
1SAM200508F0003
Data Sheet, Technical Information: 2CDC131025D0201
RMRS Certificate: 1SAA918000-0703
Classifications
E-nummer: 3111938
ETIM 4: EC000074 - Motor protective circuit-breaker
ETIM 6: EC000074 - Motor protection circuit-breaker
eClass: 7.0 27370401
UNSPSC: 39121521
Object Classification Code: F
MS116-1.6
General Information
EAN: 4013614320293

Ordering
EAN: 4013614320293
Dimensions
Technical
(440 V AC) 30 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 30 kA
Rated Instantaneous Short-Circuit 20 A
Setting Range: 1 ... 1.6 A
Rated Operational Current (Ie): 1.6 A
Rated Operational Current AC-3 (Ie): 1.6 A
Main Circuit 60 Hz
(Uimp):
Number of Poles: 3
Conventional Free-air Thermal Main Circuit 1.6 A
Current (Ith):
Pollution Degree: 3
Connecting Capacity-Main Circuit: Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Flexible 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 4 mm²
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
UL 60947-1
UL 60947-4-1
(440 V AC) 30 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 30 kA
Environmental
Compensation:
Permissible:
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
(550 ... 600 V AC) Three Phase 0.75 Hp
Ampere Rating UL/CSA: 1.6 A
General Use Rating UL/CSA: (600 V AC) 1.6 A
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit Flexible 1/2x 16 ... 12 AWG
UL/CSA: Stranded 1/2x 16 ... 12 AWG
UL/CSA:

(Part 2):
(Part 3): 1SAM200507F0002
1SAM200507F0003
1SAM200508F0001
1SAM200508F0002
1SAM200508F0003
Classifications
E-nummer: 3111940
eClass: 7.0 27370401
UNSPSC: 39121521

2 Products Filter

2 Products Filter
MS116-10
General Information
Extended Product Type: MS116-10
EAN: 4013614320330
Catalog Description: MS116-10 Manual Motor Starter
Long Description: The MS116-10 manual motor starter is a compact 45 mm width devices with a rated
capacity Ics = 50 kA at 400 VAC and the trip class 10A.
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4013614320330
Dimensions
Technical
(440 V AC) 6 kA
(500 V AC) 6 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Rated Operational Power AC-3 (Pe): (400 V) Three Phase 4 kW
Rated Operational Current (Ie): 10 A
Rated Operational Current AC-3 (Ie): 10 A
Main Circuit 60 Hz
(Uimp):
Number of Poles: 3
Current (Ith):
Pollution Degree: 3
Flexible 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 4 mm²
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
UL 60947-1
UL 60947-4-1
(440 V AC) 6 kA
(500 V AC) 6 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Environmental
Compensation:
Permissible:
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
Horsepower Rating UL/CSA: (220 ... 240 V AC) Three Phase 3 Hp
(440 ... 480 V AC) Three Phase 5 Hp
Ampere Rating UL/CSA: 10 A
UL/CSA:

(Part 2):
(Part 3): 1SAM200507F0002
1SAM200507F0003
1SAM200508F0001
1SAM200508F0002
1SAM200508F0003
Classifications
E-nummer: 3111948
eClass: 7.0 27370401
UNSPSC: 39121521
MS116-12
General Information
EAN: 4013614348211
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4013614348211
Dimensions
Technical
(440 V AC) 6 kA
(500 V AC) 6 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Setting Range: 8 ... 12 A
Main Circuit 60 Hz
(Uimp):
Number of Poles: 3
Current (Ith):
Pollution Degree: 3
Flexible 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 4 mm²
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
UL 60947-1
UL 60947-4-1
(440 V AC) 6 kA
(500 V AC) 6 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Environmental
Compensation:
Permissible:
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
UL/CSA:

(Part 2):
(Part 3): 1SAM200507F0002
1SAM200507F0003
1SAM200508F0001
1SAM200508F0002
1SAM200508F0003
Classifications
E-nummer: 3111949
eClass: 7.0 27370401
UNSPSC: 39121521
MS116-16
General Information
EAN: 4013614320347

Ordering
EAN: 4013614320347
Dimensions
Technical
(440 V AC) 4 kA
(500 V AC) 4 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Main Circuit 60 Hz
(Uimp):
Number of Poles: 3
Current (Ith):
Pollution Degree: 3
Flexible 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 4 mm²
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
UL 60947-1
UL 60947-4-1
(440 V AC) 4 kA
(500 V AC) 4 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Environmental
Compensation:
Permissible:
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
UL/CSA:

(Part 2):
(Part 3): 1SAM200507F0002
1SAM200507F0003
1SAM200508F0001
1SAM200508F0002
1SAM200508F0003
Classifications
E-nummer: 3111950
eClass: 7.0 27370401
UNSPSC: 39121521

2 Products Filter

2 Products Filter
MS116-2.5
General Information
EAN: 4013614320309
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4013614320309
Dimensions
Technical
(440 V AC) 10 kA
(500 V AC) 10 kA
(690 V AC) 5 kA
Setting Range: 1.6 ... 2.5 A
Main Circuit 60 Hz
(Uimp):
Number of Poles: 3
Current (Ith):
Pollution Degree: 3
Flexible 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 4 mm²
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
UL 60947-1
UL 60947-4-1
(440 V AC) 10 kA
(500 V AC) 10 kA
(690 V AC) 5 kA
Environmental
Compensation:
Permissible:
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
UL/CSA:

(Part 2):
(Part 3): 1SAM200507F0002
1SAM200507F0003
1SAM200508F0001
1SAM200508F0002
1SAM200508F0003
Classifications
E-nummer: 3111942
eClass: 7.0 27370401
UNSPSC: 39121521
MS116-32
General Information
EAN: 4013614405679
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4013614405679
Dimensions
Technical
(440 V AC) 6 kA
(500 V AC) 4 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Main Circuit 60 Hz
(Uimp):
Number of Poles: 3
Current (Ith):
Pollution Degree: 3
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit: Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 6 mm²
Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 6 mm²
Flexible 1/2x 1 ... 2.5 mm²
Flexible 1/2x 2.5 ... 6 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 2.5 ... 6 mm²
Tightening Torque: Main Circuit 2 N·m
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
UL 60947-1
UL 60947-4-1
(440 V AC) 3 kA
(500 V AC) 3 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Environmental
Compensation:
Permissible:
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
UL/CSA:

(Part 2):
(Part 3): 1SAM200507F0002
1SAM200507F0003
1SAM200508F0001
1SAM200508F0002
1SAM200508F0003
Classifications
E-nummer: 3111953
eClass: 7.0 27370401
UNSPSC: 39121521
MS116-4.0
General Information
EAN: 4013614320316
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4013614320316
Dimensions
Technical
(440 V AC) 6 kA
(500 V AC) 6 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Rated Operational Current (Ie): 4A
Rated Operational Current AC-3 (Ie): 4A
Main Circuit 60 Hz
(Uimp):
Number of Poles: 3
Current (Ith):
Pollution Degree: 3
Flexible 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 4 mm²
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
UL 60947-1
UL 60947-4-1
(440 V AC) 6 kA
(500 V AC) 6 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Environmental
Compensation:
Permissible:
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
Ampere Rating UL/CSA: 4A
UL/CSA:

(Part 2):
(Part 3): 1SAM200507F0002
1SAM200507F0003
1SAM200508F0001
1SAM200508F0002
1SAM200508F0003
Classifications
E-nummer: 3111944
eClass: 7.0 27370401
UNSPSC: 39121521
MS116-6.3
General Information
EAN: 4013614320323

Ordering
EAN: 4013614320323
Dimensions
Technical
(440 V AC) 6 kA
(500 V AC) 6 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Main Circuit 60 Hz
(Uimp):
Number of Poles: 3
Current (Ith):
Pollution Degree: 3
Flexible 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 4 mm²
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
UL 60947-1
UL 60947-4-1
(440 V AC) 6 kA
(500 V AC) 6 kA
(690 V AC) 2 kA
Environmental
Compensation:
Permissible:
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
RoHS Status: Planned to follow EU Directive 2002/95/EC August 18, 2005 and amendment after 2008 Q1
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
UL/CSA:

(Part 2):
(Part 3): 1SAM200507F0002
1SAM200507F0003
1SAM200508F0001
1SAM200508F0002
1SAM200508F0003
CK Certificate: 1SAA963000-1501
Classifications
E-nummer: 3111946
eClass: 7.0 27370401
UNSPSC: 39121521

2 Products Filter

2 Products Filter
MS132-12T
General Information
Extended Product Type: MS132-12T
EAN: 4013614485015
Catalog Description: MS132-12T Circuit Breaker for Primary Transformer Protection
Long Description: The circuit breaker for transformer protection MS132-12T is a compact 45 mm width device
designed to protect control transformers on the primary side. This device has a rated
operational current of Ie = 12 A. It allows fuse-less protection against overload and short-
circuit. The short-circuit current setting is fixed to 20 times the rated operational current to
handle the high inrush current generated by transformers. The device allows manually
connect and disconnect the transformer from the mains thanks of its built-in disconnection
function. The circuit breaker for transformer protection offers a rated service short-circuit
breaking capacity of Ics = 100 kA at 400 VAC and a trip class 10. Further features are
temperature compensation, trip-free mechanism, rotary handle with a clear switch position
indication and short circuit trip indicator. The handle is lockable to protect against
unauthorized changes. Auxiliary contacts, signalling contacts, undervoltage releases, shunt
trips, power in-feed blocks are available as accessory.
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4013614485015
Dimensions
Technical
Main Circuit 60 Hz
(Uimp):
Power Loss: at Rated Operating Conditions per Pole 0.9 … 2.0 W
Number of Poles: 3
Conventional Free-air Thermal 12 A
Current (Ith): Main Circuit 12 A
Pollution Degree: 3
Connecting Capacity-Main Circuit: Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 6 mm²
Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 6 mm²
Flexible 1/2x 1 ... 2.5 mm²
Flexible 1/2x 2.5 ... 6 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 2.5 ... 6 mm²
Tightening Torque: Main Circuit 2 N·m
Recommended Screw Driver: M4
Pozidriv 2
Contact Position Indication: ON / OFF / TRIP
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
Environmental
Compensation:
Permissible:
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA

(Part 2):
cULus Certificate: cUL_E137861
cUR Certificate: cUL_E137861
Classifications
ETIM 4: EC000228 - Power circuit-breaker for trafo/generator/installation prot.
eClass: 7.0 27370409
MS132-6.3T
General Information
Extended Product Type: MS132-6.3T
EAN: 4013614484995
Catalog Description: MS132-6.3T Circuit Breaker for Primary Transformer Protection
Long Description: The circuit breaker for transformer protection MS132-6.3T is a compact 45 mm width device
designed to protect control transformers on the primary side. This device has a rated
operational current of Ie = 6.3 A. It allows fuse-less protection against overload and short-
circuit. The short-circuit current setting is fixed to 20 times the rated operational current to
handle the high inrush current generated by transformers. The device allows manually
connect and disconnect the transformer from the mains thanks of its built-in disconnection
function. The circuit breaker for transformer protection offers a rated service short-circuit
breaking capacity of Ics = 100 kA at 400 VAC and a trip class 10. Further features are
temperature compensation, trip-free mechanism, rotary handle with a clear switch position
indication and short circuit trip indicator. The handle is lockable to protect against
unauthorized changes. Auxiliary contacts, signalling contacts, undervoltage releases, shunt
trips, power in-feed blocks are available as accessory.
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4013614484995
Dimensions
Technical
Main Circuit 60 Hz
(Uimp):
Power Loss: at Rated Operating Conditions per Pole 0.7 … 1.8 W
Number of Poles: 3
Conventional Free-air Thermal 6.3 A
Current (Ith): Main Circuit 6.3 A
Pollution Degree: 3
Flexible 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 4 mm²
M3.5
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
Environmental
Compensation:
Permissible:
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
Tightening Torque UL/CSA: Main Circuit 10 ... 12 in·lb

(Part 2):
cULus Certificate: cUL_E137861
cUR Certificate: cUL_E137861
Classifications
eClass: 7.0 27370409
MS165-54
General Information
EAN: 4013614486104
Long Description: MS165-54 Manual motor starter Trip class 10 40 - 54 A
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4013614486104
Package Level 2 Gross Weight: 13 kg
Dimensions
Technical
Breaking Capacity (Icu): (250 V DC) 100 kA
(400 V AC) 50 kA
(440 V AC) 45 kA
(500 V AC) 20 kA
(690 V AC) 5 kA
Rated Operational Current DC-5 (Ie): 54 A
Main Circuit 60 Hz
(Uimp):
Power Loss: 3.84 … 6.99 W
Number of Poles: 3
Current (Ith):
Pollution Degree: 3
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit: Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 1 ... 35 mm²
Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 1/2x 1 … 35 mm²
Flexible 1/2x 1 ... 35 mm²
Solid 1/2x 1 … 50 mm²
Tightening Torque: Control Circuit 4 N·m
Main Circuit 4 N·m
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
UL 60947-4-1
CSA 22.2 No. 14
Breaking Capacity (Ics): (250 V DC) 3 Poles in Series 100 kA
(400 V AC) 30 kA
(440 V AC) 30 kA
(500 V AC) 20 kA
(690 V AC) 5 kA
Environmental
Compensation:
Permissible:
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
RoHS Status: Following EU Directive 2011/65/EC
Storage -50 ... +80 °C
Technical UL/CSA
Horsepower Rating UL/CSA: (200 V AC) Three Phase 15 Hp
(208 V AC) Three Phase 15 Hp
Tightening Torque UL/CSA: 35 in·lb
Main Circuit 35 in·lb
UL/CSA:

Instructions and Manuals (Part 2): 2CDC131087M6801
ATEX Certificate: 1SAA918001-3901
UL Certificate: cUL_E137861
UL_E137861
cUL_E345003
UL_345003
Classifications
eClass: 7.0 27370401
UNSPSC: 39121521
RHD T4-T5 F/P STAND. DIRECT
General Information
Extended Product Type: RHD T4-T5 F/P STAND. DIRECT
EAN: 8015644557089
Catalog Description: RHD T4-T5 F/P STAND. DIRECT
Long Description: ROTARY HANDLE OPERATING MECHANISM STANDARD DIRECT WITH PADLOCK
DEVICE ON C.BREAKER FIXED-PLUG-IN T4-T5
Categories
Tmax T
Ordering
EAN: 8015644557089
Dimensions
Environmental
01
Product Main Type: Accessories for Tmax T
Product Type: ACC
Standards: IEC
Suitable For: T4
T5
Suitable for Product Class: SACE Tmax T

Classifications
E-nummer: 3180997
UNSPSC: 39120000
RHD XT2-XT4 F/P STAND. DIRECT
General Information
Extended Product Type: RHD XT2-XT4 F/P STAND. DIRECT
EAN: 8015644697396
Catalog Description: RHD XT2-XT4 F/P STAND. DIRECT
Long Description: ROTARY HANDLE OPERATING MECHANISM STANDARD DIRECT WITH PADLOCK
DEVICE ON C.BREAKER FIXED-PLUG-IN XT2-XT4
Categories
Tmax XT
Ordering
EAN: 8015644697396
Product Main Type: Accessories for Tmax XT
Product Type: ACC
Standards: IEC 60947-2
Suitable For: XT2
XT3
XT4
Suitable for Product Class: SACE Tmax XT

Classifications
T5N 400 PR221DS-LS/I In=400 3p F F
General Information
Extended Product Type: T5N 400 PR221DS-LS/I In=400 3p F F
EAN: 8015644552626
Catalog Description: T5N 400 PR221DS-LS/I In=400 3p F F
Long Description: C.BREAKER TMAX T5N 400 FIXED THREE-POLE WITH FRONT TERMINALS AND SOLID-
STATE RELEASE IN AC PR221DS-LS/I R 400
Categories
Products » Low Voltage Products and Systems » Circuit Breakers » Moulded Case Circuit Breakers » Tmax T
Ordering
EAN: 8015644552626
Dimensions
Environmental
01
60 cycles per hour
IIT Publishing Status: Level 0 - Information enabled
120 cycles per hour
Number of Poles: 3
Power Loss: at Rated Operating Conditions per Pole 16,5 W
Product Main Type: SACE Tmax T
Product Name: Automatic Circuit Breaker
Product Type: CB
Rated Current (In): Main Circuit 400 A
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage 8 kV
(Uimp):
Rated Operational Voltage: 690 V AC
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(400 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 30 kA
(500 V AC) 25 kA
(690 V AC) 20 kA
Rated Short-time Withstand Current for 1 s 5 A
(Icw):
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(400 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 30 kA
(500 V AC) 25 kA
(690 V AC) 20 kA
(250 V DC) 2 Poles in Series 36 kA
Rated Uninterrupted Current (Iu): 400 A
Release Type: EL
Standards: IEC 60947
Sub-type: T5
Suitable For: T5
Suitable for Product Class: Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Terminal Connection Type: Fixed Circuit-Breakers
Front
Test Voltage Max (Utest): 3500 V
Version: F

Classifications
E-nummer: 3180373
UNSPSC: 39121100
XT1C 160 TMD 100-1000 3p F F
General Information
Extended Product Type: XT1C 160 TMD 100-1000 3p F F
EAN: 8015644012915
Catalog Description: XT1C 160 TMD 100-1000 3p F F
Long Description: C.BREAKER TMAX XT1C 160 FIXED THREE-POLE WITH FRONT TERMINALS AND
THERMOMAGNETIC RELEASE TMD R 100-1000 A
Categories
Products » Low Voltage Products and Systems » Circuit Breakers » Moulded Case Circuit Breakers » Tmax XT
Ordering
EAN: 8015644012915
Dimensions
Product Net Width: 76.2 mm
Product Net Depth: 70 mm
Circuit Breaker Type to be Power distribution
Associated:
Electrical Durability: 120 cycles per hour
8000 cycle
Mechanical Durability: Nr. Operations 240 cycles per hour
Nr. Operations 25000 cycle
Number of Poles: 3
Opening Time: CB with SOR 15 ms
CB with UVR 15 ms
Power Loss: at Rated Operating Conditions per Pole 7 W
Product Main Type: SACE Tmax XT
Product Type: CB
Rated Current (In): 100 A
Rated Frequency (f): 50 / 60 Hz
(Uimp):
500 V DC
(380 V AC) 25 kA
(415 V AC) 25 kA
(440 V AC) 12,5 kA
(500 V AC) 9 kA
(690 V AC) 4 kA
(380 V AC) 25 kA
(415 V AC) 25 kA
(440 V AC) 25 kA
(500 V AC) 18 kA
(690 V AC) 4 kA
Rated Voltage (Ur): 690 V
Release Type: TM
Sub-type: XT1
Front
Version: F

GL Certificate: 1SDL000163R0103
LR Certificate: 1SDL000163R0100
Classifications
UNSPSC: 39120000
XT1C 160 TMD 63-630 3p F F
General Information
Extended Product Type: XT1C 160 TMD 63-630 3p F F
EAN: 8015644012199
Catalog Description: XT1C 160 TMD 63-630 3p F F
Long Description: C.BREAKER TMAX XT1C 160 FIXED THREE-POLE WITH FRONT TERMINALS AND
THERMOMAGNETIC RELEASE TMD R 63-630 A
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 8015644012199
Dimensions
Associated:
8000 cycle
Number of Poles: 3
CB with UVR 15 ms
Power Loss: at Rated Operating Conditions per Pole 4.3 W
Product Type: CB
(Uimp):
500 V DC
(380 V AC) 25 kA
(415 V AC) 25 kA
(440 V AC) 12,5 kA
(500 V AC) 9 kA
(690 V AC) 4 kA
(380 V AC) 25 kA
(415 V AC) 25 kA
(440 V AC) 25 kA
(500 V AC) 18 kA
(690 V AC) 4 kA
Release Type: TM
Sub-type: XT1
Front
Version: F

Classifications
UNSPSC: 39120000
XT2N 160 Ekip LS/I In=100A 3p F F
General Information
Extended Product Type: XT2N 160 Ekip LS/I In=100A 3p F F
EAN: 8015644007942
Catalog Description: XT2N 160 Ekip LS/I In=100A 3p F F
Long Description: C.BREAKER TMAX XT2N 160 FIXED THREE-POLE WITH FRONT TERMINALS AND
SOLID-STATE RELEASE IN AC EKIP-LS/I R 100 A
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 8015644007942
Dimensions
Associated:
8000 cycle
Number of Poles: 3
CB with UVR 15 ms
Product Type: CB
(Uimp):
500 V DC
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
Release Type: EL
Sub-type: XT2
Front
Version: F

Classifications
UNSPSC: 39120000
XT2N 160 MA 160 Im=960…2240 3p F F
General Information
Extended Product Type: XT2N 160 MA 160 Im=960…2240 3p F F
Catalog Description: XT2N 160 MA 160 Im=960…2240 3p F F
Categories
Number of Poles: 3
Product Type: CB
Rated Current (In): Main Circuit 160 A
(Uimp):
Rated Operational Voltage: 690 V
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(220 V AC) 65 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
Release Type: M
Sub-type: XT2
Terminal Connection Type: Front
Version: F
XT2N 160 MA 80 Im=480...1120 3p F F
General Information
Extended Product Type: XT2N 160 MA 80 Im=480...1120 3p F F
EAN: 8015644009588
Catalog Description: XT2N 160 MA 80 Im=480...1120 3p F F
MAGNETIC RELEASE MA Iu 80 A I3=480...1120 A
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 8015644009588
Dimensions
Circuit Breaker Type to be Motor protection
Associated:
8000 cycle
Number of Poles: 3
CB with UVR 15 ms
Product Type: CB
(Uimp):
500 V DC
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
Release Type: M
Sub-type: XT2
Front
Version: F

Classifications
UNSPSC: 39120000
XT2N 160 TMA 125-1250 3p F F
General Information
Extended Product Type: XT2N 160 TMA 125-1250 3p F F
EAN: 8015644009250
Catalog Description: XT2N 160 TMA 125-1250 3p F F
THERMOMAGNETIC RELEASE TMA R 125 I3=625...1250 A
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 8015644009250
Dimensions
Associated:
8000 cycle
Number of Poles: 3
CB with UVR 15 ms
Product Type: CB
(Uimp):
500 V DC
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
Release Type: TM
Sub-type: XT2
Front
Version: F

Classifications
UNSPSC: 39120000
XT2N 160 TMA 160-1600 3p F F
General Information
Extended Product Type: XT2N 160 TMA 160-1600 3p F F
EAN: 8015644009267
Catalog Description: XT2N 160 TMA 160-1600 3p F F
THERMOMAGNETIC RELEASE TMA R 160 I3=800...1600 A
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 8015644009267
Dimensions
Associated:
8000 cycle
Number of Poles: 3
CB with UVR 15 ms
Product Type: CB
(Uimp):
500 V DC
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
Release Type: TM
Sub-type: XT2
Front
Version: F

Classifications
UNSPSC: 39120000
XT4N 250 Ekip LS/I In=250A 3p F F
General Information
Extended Product Type: XT4N 250 Ekip LS/I In=250A 3p F F
EAN: 8015644020231
Catalog Description: XT4N 250 Ekip LS/I In=250A 3p F F
SOLID-STATE RELEASE IN AC EKIP-LS/I R 250 A
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 8015644020231
Dimensions
Associated:
8000 cycle
Number of Poles: 3
CB with UVR 15 ms
Product Type: CB
(Uimp):
500 V DC
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
(380 V AC) 36 kA
(415 V AC) 36 kA
(440 V AC) 36 kA
(500 V AC) 30 kA
(690 V AC) 10 kA
Release Type: EL
Sub-type: XT4
Front
Version: F

Classifications
UNSPSC: 39120000
S201-C10NA
General Information
Extended Product Type: S201-C10NA
Product ID: 2CDS251103R0104
EAN: 4016779531757
Catalog Description: Miniature Circuit Breaker - S200 - 2P - C - 10 A
Long Description: System pro M compact S200 miniature circuit breakers are current limiting. They have two
different tripping mechanisms, the delayed thermal tripping mechanism for overload
protection and the electromechanic tripping mechanism for short circuit protection. They are
available in different characteristics (B,C,D,K,Z), configurations (1P,1P+N,2P,3P,3P+N,4P),
breaking capacities (up to 6 kA at 230/400 V AC) and rated currents (up to 63A). All MCBs
of the product range S200 comply with IEC/EN 60898-1, IEC/EN 60947-2, UL1077 and CSA
22.2 No. 235, allowing the use for residential, commercial and industrial applications.
Bottom-fitting auxiliary contact can be mounted on S200 to save 50% space.
Categories
Products » Low Voltage Products and Systems » Modular DIN Rail Products » Miniature Circuit Breakers MCBs
Ordering
EAN: 4016779531757
Dimensions
Environmental
Storage -40 ... +70 °C
Resistance to Shock acc. to IEC 25g / 2 shocks / 13 ms
60068-2-27:
Resistance to Vibrations acc. to IEC 5g, 20 cycles at 5 ... 150 ... 5 Hz with load 0.8 In
60068-2-6:
Environmental Conditions: 28 cycles
with 55 °C / 90-96 %
and 25 °C / 95-100 %
Technical
Number of Poles: 2
Tripping Characteristic: C
Rated Operational Voltage: acc. to IEC 60898-1 230 V AC
acc. to IEC 60947-2 440 V AC
Power Loss: 4.2 W
at Rated Operating Conditions per Pole 2.1 W
Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui): acc. to IEC/EN 60664-1 440 V
Operational Voltage: Maximum (Incl. Tolerance) 253 V AC
Minimum 12 V AC / 12 V DC
Rated Frequency (f): 50 Hz
60 Hz
Rated Short-Circuit Capacity (Icn): (AC) 6 kA
6 kA (DC) kA
Rated Ultimate Short-Circuit 10 kA
Breaking Capacity (Icu): 10 kA (DC) kA
Rated Service Short-Circuit 7.5 kA
Breaking Capacity (Ics):
Energy Limiting Class: 3
Overvoltage Category: III
Pollution Degree: 3
(Uimp): (6.2 kV @ sea level)
(5.0 kV @ 2000 m)
Dielectric Test Voltage: 50 / 60 Hz, 1 min: 2 kV
Housing Material: Insulation Group II, RAL 7035
Actuator Type: Insulation group II, black, sealable
Contact Position Indication: Red ON / Green OFF
Degree of Protection: IP20
Remarks: IP40 in enclosure with cover
Electrical Endurance: 20000 AC cycle
Mechanical Endurance: 20000 cycle
Terminal Type: Screw Terminals
Screw Terminal Type: Failsafe Bi-directional Cylinder-lift Terminal
Connecting Capacity: Busbar 10 / 10 mm²
Flexible with Ferrule 0.75 ... 25 mm²
Flexible 0.75 ... 25 mm²
Rigid 0.75 ... 35 mm²
Stranded 0.75 ... 35 mm²
Tightening Torque: 2.8 N·m
Mounting Position: Any
IEC/EN 60947-2
UL 1077
Technical UL/CSA
Connecting Capacity UL/CSA: Busbar 18 ... 8 AWG
Conductor 18 ... 4 AWG
Interrupting Rating acc. to UL1077: 6 kA
(DC) 10 kA
Maximum Operating Voltage 277 V AC
UL/CSA:

Instructions and Manuals: 2CSC400002D0208
Data Sheet, Technical Information: 2CSC400002D0208
Declaration of Conformity - CE: 2CDK403001D0602
RoHS Information: 2CDK400003K0201
Classifications
ETIM 4: EC000042 - Miniature circuit breaker (MCB)
eClass: 7.0 27141901
UNSPSC: 39121614
Accessories Show accessory images

32 Products Filter
Unit Of
Identifier Description Type Qty Measure
Sensor 18mm, 80A AC, DC, TRMS, mounting for pro M compact &
2CCA880100R0001 SMISSLINE CMS-100PS 1 piece
2CCA880101R0001
Identifier Description
SMISSLINE CMS-101PS
Type 1Qty Unit
pieceOf
Measure
2CCA880102R0001 Sensor 18mm, 20A AC, DC, TRMS, mounting for pro M compact & CMS-102PS 1 piece
SMISSLINE
2CDS200909R0001 S2C-A1 - Shunt Trip S2C-A1 1 piece
2CDS200912R0001 S2C-H6R - Auxiliary Contact S2C-H6R 1 piece
2CDS200918R0001 S2C-NT - Hand Operated Neutral S2C-NT 1 piece
2CDS200922R0001 S2C-S/H6R - Signal / Auxiliary Contact S2C-S/H6R 1 piece
2CDS200936R0001 S2C-H11L - Auxiliary Contact S2C-H11L 1 piece
2CDS200946R0001 S2C-H6-11R - Auxiliary Contact S2C-H6-11R 1 piece
2CDS200970R0001 S2C-H01 - Auxiliary Contact S2C-H01 1 piece
2CSS200911R0001 S2C-UA 12 DC - Undervoltage release S2C-UA 12 DC 1 piece
2CSS200911R0002 S2C-UA 24 AC - Undervoltage release S2C-UA 24 AC 1 piece
2CSS200911R0004 S2C-UA 110 AC - Undervoltage release S2C-UA 110 1 piece
AC
AC
AC
2CSS200911R0009 S2C-UA 110 DC - Undervoltage release S2C-UA 110 1 piece
DC
DC
2CSS200998R0001 S2C-BP - Mechanical tripping device S2C-BP 1 piece
2CSS200999R0001 S2C-EST - Plug-in base S2C-EST 1 piece
2CSS201997R0013 S2C-CM1 - Motor operating device S2C-CM1 1 piece
2CSS203997R0013 S2C-CM2/3 - Motor operating device S2C-CM2/3 1 piece
GHS2001901R0003 S2C-DH - Mechanical Accessories S2C-DH 1 piece
S201-C4NA
General Information
Extended Product Type: S201-C4NA
EAN: 4016779531726
Catalog Description: Miniature Circuit Breaker - S200 - 2P - C - 4 A
Long Description: System pro M compact S200 miniature circuit breakers are current limiting. They have two
of the product range S200 comply with IEC/EN 60898-1, IEC/EN 60947-2, UL1077 and CSA
22.2 No. 235, allowing the use for residential, commercial and industrial applications.
Bottom-fitting auxiliary contact can be mounted on S200 to save 50% space.
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4016779531726
Dimensions
Environmental
Storage -40 ... +70 °C
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
with 55 °C / 90-96 %
and 25 °C / 95-100 %
Technical
Number of Poles: 2
Rated Current (In): 4A
acc. to IEC 60947-2 440 V AC
Power Loss: 3.6 W
60 Hz
Rated Short-Circuit Capacity (Icn): (AC) 6 kA
6 kA (DC) kA
Pollution Degree: 3
(5.0 kV @ 2000 m)
Rigid 0.75 ... 35 mm²
Tightening Torque: 2.8 N·m
IEC/EN 60947-2
UL 1077
Technical UL/CSA
Connecting Capacity UL/CSA: Busbar 18-8 AWG
Conductor 18-4 AWG
(DC) 10 kA
Maximum Operating Voltage 277 V AC
UL/CSA:

Classifications
eClass: 7.0 27141901
UNSPSC: 39121614

32 Products Filter
Unit Of
2CCA880101R0001
SMISSLINE CMS-101PS
Type 1Qty Unit
pieceOf
Measure
SMISSLINE
AC
AC
AC
DC
DC
S203M-C10
General Information
Extended Product Type: S203M-C10
EAN: 4016779550437
Catalog Description: Miniature Circuit Breaker - S200M - 3P - C - 10 A
Long Description: System pro M compact S200M miniature circuit breakers are current limiting. They have two
of the product range S200M comply with IEC/EN 60898-1 and IEC/EN 609 47-2, allowing the
use for residential, commercial and industrial applications. Bottom-fitting auxiliary contact
can be mounted on S200M to save 50% space.
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4016779550437
Dimensions
Environmental
Storage -40 ... +70 °C
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
with 55 °C / 90-96 %
and 25 °C / 95-100 %
Technical
Number of Poles: 3
acc. to IEC 60947-2 440 V AC
Power Loss: 6.3 W
60 Hz
Rated Short-Circuit Capacity (Icn): 10 kA (AC) kA
Pollution Degree: 3
(5.0 kV @ 2000 m)
Rigid 0.75 ... 35 mm²
Tightening Torque: 2 N·m
Mounting on DIN Rail: TH35-7.5 (35 x 7.5 mm Mounting Rail) acc. to IEC 60715
TH35-15 (35 x 15 mm Mounting Rail) acc. to IEC 60715
IEC/EN 60947-2
Technical UL/CSA
Conductor 14-4 AWG
(DC) 10 kA
Maximum Operating Voltage 480Y / 277 V AC
UL/CSA:

Classifications
E-nummer: 2101242
eClass: 7.0 27141901
UNSPSC: 39121614

32 Products Filter
Unit Of
SMISSLINE Type Qty Unit Of
Sensor 18mm, 20A AC, DC, TRMS, mounting for pro M compact & Measure
2CCA880102R0001 CMS-102PS 1 piece
SMISSLINE
AC
AC
AC
DC
DC
S203M-C20
General Information
EAN: 4016779550468
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4016779550468
Dimensions
Environmental
Storage -40 ... +70 °C
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
with 55 °C / 90-96 %
and 25 °C / 95-100 %
Technical
Number of Poles: 3
acc. to IEC 60947-2 440 V AC
Power Loss: 7.5 W
60 Hz
Pollution Degree: 3
(5.0 kV @ 2000 m)
Rigid 0.75 ... 35 mm²
IEC/EN 60947-2
Technical UL/CSA
Conductor 14-4 AWG
(DC) 10 kA
UL/CSA:

Classifications
E-nummer: 2101245
eClass: 7.0 27141901
UNSPSC: 39121614

32 Products Filter
Unit Of
SMISSLINE
AC
AC
AC
DC
DC
S203M-C32
General Information
EAN: 4016779550482
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4016779550482
Dimensions
Environmental
Storage -40 ... +70 °C
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
with 55 °C / 90-96 %
and 25 °C / 95-100 %
Technical
Number of Poles: 3
acc. to IEC 60947-2 440 V AC
Power Loss: 11.1 W
60 Hz
Pollution Degree: 3
(5.0 kV @ 2000 m)
Rigid 0.75 ... 35 mm²
IEC/EN 60947-2
Technical UL/CSA
Conductor 14-4 AWG
(DC) 10 kA
UL/CSA:

Classifications
E-nummer: 2101247
eClass: 7.0 27141901
UNSPSC: 39121614

32 Products Filter
Unit Of
SMISSLINE
AC
AC
AC
DC
DC
S203M-C63
General Information
EAN: 4016779544009
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 4016779544009
Dimensions
Environmental
Storage -40 ... +70 °C
60068-2-27:
60068-2-6:
with 55 °C / 90-96 %
and 25 °C / 95-100 %
Technical
Number of Poles: 3
acc. to IEC 60947-2 440 V AC
Power Loss: 14.4 W
60 Hz
Pollution Degree: 3
(5.0 kV @ 2000 m)
Rigid 0.75 ... 35 mm²
IEC/EN 60947-2
Technical UL/CSA
Conductor 14-4 AWG
(DC) 10 kA
UL/CSA:

Classifications
E-nummer: 2101250
eClass: 7.0 27141901
UNSPSC: 39121614

32 Products Filter
Unit Of
SMISSLINE
AC
AC
AC
DC
DC
S2C-H6R
General Information
Extended Product Type: S2C-H6R
EAN: 4016779563826
Catalog Description: S2C-H6R - Auxiliary Contact
Long Description: Indication of the position of the device’s contacts. Suitable for MCBs S 200 series, SN 201
series, RCCBs F 200 series, RCBOs DS201, DS202C, DS 200 series. To be mounted on
the right side of the MCBs.
Categories
Products » Low Voltage Products and Systems » Modular DIN Rail Products » Miniature Circuit Breakers MCBs Accessories
» Auxiliary / Signal Contacts
Ordering
EAN: 4016779563826
Dimensions
Environmental
Accessory Type: Auxiliary Contact
Function: Auxiliary Contact
Power Loss: 0,5 W
Product Main Type: S2C
Product Name: Auxiliary Contact
RoHS Date: 0335
Standards: UL 1077
GB14048.5
CSA Class 3215-30
CSA Class 3215-90
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Suitable For: S200
S200M
S200P
S200S
SN201L
SN201
SN201M
F200
DS201
DS202C
DS200
Suitable for Product Class: Miniature Circuit Breaker
Residual Current Device
Technical Information: AUXILIARYCONTACT

Classifications
eClass: 7.0 27143502
E-nummer: 2102500
ETIM 4: EC001286 - Auxiliary contact unit for distribution board
AF09-30-01-11
General Information
Extended Product Type: AF09-30-01-11
Product ID: 1SBL137001R1101
EAN: 3471523110113
Catalog Description: AF09-30-01-11 24-60V50/60HZ 20-60VDC Contactor
Long Description: AF09 contactors are used for controlling power circuits up to 690 V AC and 220 V DC. They
are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors, non-inductive or slightly inductive loads.
AF... contactors include an electronic coil interface accepting a wide control voltage Uc min.
... Uc max. Only four coils cover control voltages between 24...500 V 50/60 Hz or 20...500 V
DC. AF contactors can manage large control voltage variations. One coil can be used for
different control voltages used worldwide without any coil change. AF contactors have built-in
surge protection and do not require additional surge suppressors. The AF... series 1-stack
3-pole contactors are of the block type design. - Main poles and auxiliary contact blocks: 3
main poles, 1 built-in auxiliary contact, front and side-mounted add-on auxiliary contact
blocks (mechanically-linked auxiliary contacts compliant with Annex L of IEC 60947-5-1.
N.C. mirror contacts compliant with Annex F of IEC 60947-4-1) - Control circuit: AC or DC
operated - Accessories: a wide range of accessories is available. Note: AF..-30-..-11 not
suitable for a direct control by PLC-output. AF..-30-..-11 contactor type available in some
countries: please consult your ABB representative.
Categories
Products » Low Voltage Products and Systems » Control Products » Contactors » Block Contactors
Ordering
EAN: 3471523110113
Dimensions
Technical
Number of Main Contacts NC: 0
Standards: IEC 60947-1 / 60947-4-1 and EN 60947-1 / 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA C22.2 N°14
Rated Operational Voltage: Auxiliary Circuit 690 V
Main Circuit 690 V
Rated Frequency (f): Auxiliary Circuit 50 / 60 Hz
Main Circuit 50 / 60 Hz
Conventional Free-air Thermal acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, Open Contactors q = 40 °C 35 A
Current (Ith): acc. to IEC 60947-5-1, q = 40 °C 16 A
Rated Operational Current AC-1 (Ie): (690 V) 40 °C 25 A
(690 V) 60 °C 25 A
(690 V) 70 °C 22 A
Rated Operational Current AC-3 (Ie): (220 / 230 / 240 V) 60 °C 9 A
(380 / 400 V) 60 °C 9 A
(415 V) 60 °C 9 A
(440 V) 60 °C 9 A
(500 V) 60 °C 9.5 A
(690 V) 60 °C 7 A
Rated Operational Power AC-3 (Pe): (220 / 230 / 240 V) 2.2 kW
(380 / 400 V) 4 kW
(415 V) 4 kW
(440 V) 4 kW
(500 V) 5.5 kW
(690 V) 5.5 kW
Rated Operational Current AC-15 (220 / 240 V) 4 A
(Ie): (24 / 127 V) 6 A
(400 / 440 V) 3 A
(500 V) 2 A
(690 V) 2 A
Rated Short-time Withstand Current at 40 °C Ambient Temp, in Free Air, from a Cold State 10 s 150 A
(Icw): at 40 °C Ambient Temp, in Free Air, from a Cold State 15 min 35 A
at 40 °C Ambient Temp, in Free Air, from a Cold State 1 min 60 A
at 40 °C Ambient Temp, in Free Air, from a Cold State 1 s 300 A
for 0.1 s 140 A
for 1 s 100 A
Maximum Breaking Capacity: cos phi=0.45 (cos phi=0.35 for Ie > 100 A) at 440 V 250 A
cos phi=0.45 (cos phi=0.35 for Ie > 100 A) at 690 V 106 A
Maximum Electrical Switching AC-1 600 cycles per hour
Frequency: AC-15 1200 cycles per hour
AC-2 / AC-4 300 cycles per hour
AC-3 1200 cycles per hour
DC-13 900 cycles per hour
Rated Operational Current DC-13 (110 V) 0.55 A / 60 W
(Ie): (125 V) 0.55 A / 69 W
(220 V) 0.27 A / 60 W
(24 V) 6 A / 144 W
(250 V) 0.27 A / 68 W
(400 V) 0.15 A / 60 W
(48 V) 2.8 A / 134 W
(500 V) 0.13 A / 65 W
(600 V) 0.1 A / 60 W
(72 V) 1 A / 72 W
Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui): acc. to UL/CSA 600 V
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 and VDE 0110 (Gr. C) 690 V
(Uimp):
Maximum Mechanical Switching 3600 cycles per hour
Frequency:
Rated Control Circuit Voltage (Uc): 50 Hz 24 ... 60 V
60 Hz 24 ... 60 V
DC Operation 20 ... 60 V
Operate Time: Between Coil De-energization and NC Contact Closing 13...98 ms
Between Coil De-energization and NO Contact Opening 11...95 ms
Between Coil Energization and NC Contact Opening 38...90 ms
Between Coil Energization and NO Contact Closing 40...95 ms
Connecting Capacity-Main Circuit: Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 1x 0.75...4 mm²
Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 2x 0.75...2.5 mm²
Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 0.75...6 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1...6 mm²
Connecting Capacity-Auxiliary Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Circuit: Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 1x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 2x 0.75 ... 1.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Connecting Capacity-Control Circuit: Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Control Circuit 10 mm
Main Circuit 10 mm
Degree of Protection: acc. to IEC 60529, IEC 60947-1, EN 60529 Auxiliary Terminals IP20
acc. to IEC 60529, IEC 60947-1, EN 60529 Coil Terminals IP20
acc. to IEC 60529, IEC 60947-1, EN 60529 Main Terminals IP20
Number of Main Contacts NO: 3
Environmental
Permissible:
Resistance to Vibrations acc. to IEC 5...300 Hz 4 g closed position / 2 g open position
60068-2-6:
Resistance to Shock acc. to IEC Closed, Shock Direction: B1 25 g
60068-2-27: Open, Shock Direction: B1 5 g
Shock Direction: A 30 g
Shock Direction: B2 15 g
Shock Direction: C1 25 g
Ambient Air Temperature: Close to Contactor for Storage -60...+80 °C
Close to Contactor Fitted with Thermal O/L Relay -25 ... +60 °C
Close to Contactor without Thermal O/L Relay -40 ... +70 °C
Technical UL/CSA
Horsepower Rating UL/CSA: (120 V AC) Single Phase 3/4 Hp
(240 V AC) Single Phase 1-1/2 Hp
(550 ... 600 V AC) Three Phase 7-1/2 Hp
Control Circuit 11 in·lb

Instructions and Manuals: 1SBC101027M6801
ABS Certificate: ABS_15-GE1349500-PDA_90682247
CB Certificate: CB_SE_70855M1
CCC Certificate: CCC_2010010304445624
cUL Certificate: UL_20091124-E312527-7-1
Data Sheet, Technical Information: 1SBC101402D0201
Declaration of Conformity - CE: 1SBD250164C3000
DNV Certificate: DNV-GL_E13871
EAC Certificate: EAC_RU C-FR ME77 B01010
GL Certificate: DNV-GL_E13871
GOST Certificate: GOST_POCCFR.ME77.B07175.pdf
LR Certificate: LRS_1300087E1
RINA Certificate: RINA_ELE084013XG
RMRS Certificate: RMRS_1400682124
RoHS Information: 1SBD251013E1000
Classifications
E-nummer: 3210015
ETIM 4: EC000066 - Magnet contactor, AC-switching
AF09-30-01-13
General Information
EAN: 3471523110137
Catalog Description: AF09-30-01-13 100-250V50/60HZ-DC Contactor
operated - Accessories: a wide range of accessories is available.
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 3471523110137
Dimensions
Technical
Main Circuit 690 V
(690 V) 60 °C 25 A
(690 V) 70 °C 22 A
(380 / 400 V) 60 °C 9 A
(415 V) 60 °C 9 A
(440 V) 60 °C 9 A
(500 V) 60 °C 9.5 A
(690 V) 60 °C 7 A
(380 / 400 V) 4 kW
(415 V) 4 kW
(440 V) 4 kW
(500 V) 5.5 kW
(690 V) 5.5 kW
(Ie): (24 / 127 V) 6 A
(400 / 440 V) 3 A
(500 V) 2 A
(690 V) 2 A
for 0.1 s 140 A
for 1 s 100 A
(Ie): (125 V) 0.55 A / 69 W
(220 V) 0.27 A / 60 W
(24 V) 6 A / 144 W
(250 V) 0.27 A / 68 W
(400 V) 0.15 A / 60 W
(48 V) 2.8 A / 134 W
(500 V) 0.13 A / 65 W
(600 V) 0.1 A / 60 W
(72 V) 1 A / 72 W
(Uimp):
Frequency:
60 Hz 100 ... 250 V
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Main Circuit 10 mm
Environmental
Permissible:
60068-2-6:
Technical UL/CSA

Classifications
E-nummer: 3210010
UNSPSC: 39121529
AF09-30-10-13
General Information
EAN: 3471523110038
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 3471523110038
Dimensions
Technical
Main Circuit 690 V
(690 V) 60 °C 25 A
(690 V) 70 °C 22 A
(380 / 400 V) 60 °C 9 A
(415 V) 60 °C 9 A
(440 V) 60 °C 9 A
(500 V) 60 °C 9.5 A
(690 V) 60 °C 7 A
(380 / 400 V) 4 kW
(415 V) 4 kW
(440 V) 4 kW
(500 V) 5.5 kW
(690 V) 5.5 kW
(Ie): (24 / 127 V) 6 A
(400 / 440 V) 3 A
(500 V) 2 A
(690 V) 2 A
for 0.1 s 140 A
for 1 s 100 A
(Ie): (125 V) 0.55 A / 69 W
(220 V) 0.27 A / 60 W
(24 V) 6 A / 144 W
(250 V) 0.27 A / 68 W
(400 V) 0.15 A / 60 W
(48 V) 2.8 A / 134 W
(500 V) 0.13 A / 65 W
(600 V) 0.1 A / 60 W
(72 V) 1 A / 72 W
(Uimp):
Frequency:
60 Hz 100 ... 250 V
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Main Circuit 10 mm
Environmental
Permissible:
60068-2-6:
Technical UL/CSA

Classifications
E-nummer: 3210009
UNSPSC: 39121529
AF09Z-30-01-21
General Information
Extended Product Type: AF09Z-30-01-21
EAN: 3471523113312
Catalog Description: AF09Z-30-01-21 24-60V50/60HZ 20-60VDC Contactor
Long Description: AF09Z contactors are used for controlling power circuits up to 690 V AC and 220 V DC.
They are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors, non-inductive or slightly inductive
loads. AF..Z contactors include an electronic coil interface accepting a wide control voltage
Uc min. ... Uc max. Only four coils cover control voltages between 24...250 V 50/60 Hz or
12...250 V DC. AF..Z contactors can manage large control voltage variations. One coil can
be used for different control voltages used worldwide without any coil change. AF..Z
contactors allow direct control by PLC-output ≥ 24 V DC 500 mA and obtain a reduced
holding coil consumption. AF..Z contactors withstand short voltage dips and voltage sags
(SEMI F47-0706 compliance) between 24...250 V 50/60 Hz AF..Z contactors have built-in
surge protection and do not require additional surge suppressors The AF... series 1-stack 3-
pole contactors are of the block type design. - Main poles and auxiliary contact blocks: 3
blocks. (mechanically-linked auxiliary contacts compliant with Annex L of IEC 60947-5-1.
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 3471523113312
Dimensions
Technical
Main Circuit 690 V
(690 V) 60 °C 25 A
(690 V) 70 °C 22 A
(380 / 400 V) 60 °C 9 A
(415 V) 60 °C 9 A
(440 V) 60 °C 9 A
(500 V) 60 °C 9.5 A
(690 V) 60 °C 7 A
(380 / 400 V) 4 kW
(415 V) 4 kW
(440 V) 4 kW
(500 V) 5.5 kW
(690 V) 5.5 kW
(Ie): (24 / 127 V) 6 A
(400 / 440 V) 3 A
(500 V) 2 A
(690 V) 2 A
for 0.1 s 140 A
for 1 s 100 A
(Ie): (125 V) 0.55 A / 69 W
(220 V) 0.27 A / 60 W
(24 V) 6 A / 144 W
(250 V) 0.27 A / 68 W
(400 V) 0.15 A / 60 W
(48 V) 2.8 A / 134 W
(500 V) 0.13 A / 65 W
(600 V) 0.1 A / 60 W
(72 V) 1 A / 72 W
(Uimp):
Frequency:
60 Hz 24 ... 60 V
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Main Circuit 10 mm
Environmental
Permissible:
60068-2-6:
Technical UL/CSA

Classifications
E-nummer: 3210006
UNSPSC: 39121529
AF116-30-11-13 100-250V 50/60Hz / DC
General Information
Extended Product Type: AF116-30-11-13 100-250V 50/60Hz / DC
Product ID: 1SFL427001R1311
EAN: 7320500476376
Catalog Description: AF116-30-11-13 Contactor
Long Description: A 3-phase Contactor suitable for various applications such as Motor starting, Isolation, By-
pass and Distribution application up to max 690 V. Operated with wide control voltage range
100-250 V, 50/60 Hz and DC
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 7320500476376
Dimensions
Technical
Rated Operational Voltage: Main Circuit 690 V
Rated Frequency (f): Main Circuit 50/60 Hz
Current (Ith):
(690 V) 40 °C 160 A
(690 V) 70 °C 130 A
(415 V) 55 °C 116 A
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 55 °C 116 A
(440 V) 55 °C 116 A
(380 / 400 V) 55 °C 116 A
(500 V) 55 °C 110 A
Rated Operational Power AC-3 (Pe): (500 V) 75 kW
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 30 kW
(690 V) 55 kW
(380 / 400 V) 55 kW
(440 V) 75 kW
(415 V) 55 kW
Rated Breaking Capacity AC-3 acc. 8 x Ie AC-3
to IEC 60947-4-1:
Rated Making Capacity AC-3 acc. to 10 x Ie AC-3
IEC 60947-4-1:
Short-Circuit Protective Devices: gG Type Fuses 250 A
Rated Short-time Withstand Current at 40 °C Ambient Temp, in Free Air, from a Cold State 15 min 160 A
(Icw): at 40 °C Ambient Temp, in Free Air, from a Cold State 30 s 536 A
Rated Operational Current DC-1 (Ie): (110 V) 2 Poles in Series, 40 °C 145 A
(220 V) 3 Poles in Series, 40 °C 145 A
(Uimp):
Mechanical Durability: 5 million
Frequency:
Coil Operating Limits: (acc. to IEC 60947-4-1) 0.85 x Uc Min. ... 1.1 x Uc Max. (at θ ≤ 70 °C) °C
Rated Control Circuit Voltage (Uc): 60 Hz 100…250 V
50 Hz 100…250 V
DC Operation 100…250 V
Coil Consumption: Pull-in at Max. Rated Control Circuit Voltage 60 Hz 130 V·A
Holding at Max. Rated Control Circuit Voltage DC 3 W
Holding at Max. Rated Control Circuit Voltage 50 Hz 6 V·A
Pull-in at Max. Rated Control Circuit Voltage DC 135 W
Pull-in at Max. Rated Control Circuit Voltage 50 Hz 130 V·A
Operate Time: Between Coil Energization and NO Contact Closing 25…55 ms
Between Coil De-energization and NO Contact Opening 37…47 ms
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit: Flexible 2x10…70 mm²
Rigid Cu-Cable 2x10…95 mm²
Connecting Capacity Auxiliary Solid 2x1…4 mm²
Circuit: Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 1x0.75…2.5 mm²
Stranded 2x1…4 mm²
Flexible 2x0.75…2.5 mm²
Flexible with Ferrule 2x0.75…2.5 mm²
Degree of Protection: acc. to IEC 60529, IEC 60947-1, EN 60529 Coil Terminals IP20
Terminal Type: Double Clamp
Environmental
Permissible:
Ambient Air Temperature: Close to Contactor Fitted with Thermal O/L Relay (0.85 ... 1.1 Uc) -25…+50 °C
Close to Contactor without Thermal O/L Relay (0.85 ... 1.1 Uc) -40…+70 °C
Close to Contactor for Storage -40…+70 °C
Technical UL/CSA
Maximum Operating Voltage Main Circuit 600 V
UL/CSA:

Instructions and Manuals: 1SFC100003M0201
CB Certificate: SE-70479
CCC Certificate: CQC_2013010304604055
Data Sheet, Technical Information: 1SFC101070D0201
Declaration of Conformity - CE: 2CMT004242
RINA Certificate: ELE060313XG/002
RoHS Information: 1SFC101055D0202
Classifications
E-nummer: 3210068
UNSPSC: 39121529
AF140-30-11-13 100-250V 50/60Hz / DC
General Information
EAN: 7320500476949
pass and Distribution application up to max 690 V. Operated with wide control voltage range
100-250 V, 50/60 Hz and DC
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 7320500476949
Dimensions
Technical
Current (Ith):
(690 V) 40 °C 200 A
(690 V) 70 °C 160 A
(415 V) 55 °C 140 A
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 55 °C 140 A
(440 V) 55 °C 140 A
(380 / 400 V) 55 °C 140 A
(500 V) 55 °C 130 A
(690 V) 75 kW
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 37 kW
(380 / 400 V) 75 kW
(440 V) 90 kW
(415 V) 75 kW
to IEC 60947-4-1:
IEC 60947-4-1:
(Uimp):
Frequency:
50 Hz 100…250 V
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit: Rigid Cu-Cable 2x10…95 mm²
Flexible 2x10…70 mm²
Environmental
Permissible:
Technical UL/CSA
UL/CSA:

Classifications
UNSPSC: 39121529
AF146-30-11-13 100-250V 50/60Hz / DC
General Information
EAN: 7320500476994
pass and Distribution application up to max 1000 V. Operated with wide control voltage
range 100-250 V, 50/60 Hz and DC
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 7320500476994
Dimensions
Technical
Current (Ith):
(690 V) 40 °C 225 A
(1000 V) 40 °C 225 A
(1000 V) 55 °C 200 A
(690 V) 70 °C 175 A
(1000 V) 70 °C 175 A
(690 V) 55 °C 93 A
(415 V) 55 °C 146 A
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 55 °C 146 A
(440 V) 55 °C 146 A
(380 / 400 V) 55 °C 146 A
(500 V) 55 °C 93 A
(1000 V) 75 kW
(690 V) 90 kW
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 45 kW
(380 / 400 V) 75 kW
(440 V) 90 kW
(415 V) 75 kW
to IEC 60947-4-1:
IEC 60947-4-1:
(Uimp):
Frequency:
50 Hz 100…250 V
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit: Rigid Cu-Cable 1x10…95 mm²
Environmental
Permissible:
Technical UL/CSA
UL/CSA:

Classifications
UNSPSC: 39121529
AF190-30-11-13 100-250V 50/60Hz / DC
General Information
EAN: 7320500480434
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 7320500480434
Dimensions
Technical
Current (Ith):
(690 V) 40 °C 275 A
(1000 V) 40 °C 250 A
(1000 V) 55 °C 225 A
(690 V) 70 °C 200 A
(1000 V) 70 °C 185 A
(415 V) 55 °C 190 A
(690 V) 55 °C 135 A
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 55 °C 190 A
(440 V) 55 °C 190 A
(380 / 400 V) 55 °C 190 A
(500 V) 55 °C 135 A
(1000 V) 110 kW
(690 V) 132 kW
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 55 kW
(380 / 400 V) 90 kW
(440 V) 110 kW
(415 V) 90 kW
to IEC 60947-4-1:
IEC 60947-4-1:
(Uimp):
Frequency:
50 Hz 100…250 V
Holding at Max. Rated Control Circuit Voltage DC 2.5 W
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit: Rigid Al-Cable 1x95…185 mm²
Terminal Type: Main Circuit: Bars
Environmental
Permissible:
Technical UL/CSA
UL/CSA:

CB Certificate: SE-71797M1
Classifications
E-nummer: 3210134
UNSPSC: 39121529
AF205-30-11-13 100-250V 50/60Hz / DC
General Information
EAN: 7320500480564
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 7320500480564
Dimensions
Technical
Current (Ith):
(690 V) 40 °C 350 A
(1000 V) 40 °C 275 A
(1000 V) 55 °C 250 A
(690 V) 70 °C 240 A
(1000 V) 70 °C 200 A
(690 V) 55 °C 165 A
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 55 °C 205 A
(415 V) 55 °C 205 A
(440 V) 55 °C 205 A
(380 / 400 V) 55 °C 205 A
(500 V) 55 °C 165 A
(1000 V) 132 kW
(690 V) 160 kW
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 55 kW
(380 / 400 V) 110 kW
(440 V) 132 kW
(415 V) 110 kW
to IEC 60947-4-1:
IEC 60947-4-1:
(Uimp):
Frequency:
50 Hz 100…250 V
Environmental
Permissible:
Technical UL/CSA
UL/CSA:

Classifications
E-nummer: 3210147
UNSPSC: 39121529
AF305-30-11-13 100-250V 50/60Hz / DC
General Information
EAN: 7320500481776
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 7320500481776
Dimensions
Technical
Current (Ith):
(690 V) 40 °C 500 A
(1000 V) 40 °C 375 A
(1000 V) 55 °C 325 A
(690 V) 70 °C 325 A
(1000 V) 70 °C 260 A
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 55 °C 305 A
(690 V) 55 °C 290 A
(415 V) 55 °C 305 A
(440 V) 55 °C 305 A
(380 / 400 V) 55 °C 305 A
(500 V) 55 °C 290 A
(1000 V) 132 kW
(690 V) 250 kW
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 90 kW
(380 / 400 V) 160 kW
(440 V) 160 kW
(415 V) 160 kW
to IEC 60947-4-1:
IEC 60947-4-1:
(Uimp):
Frequency:
50 Hz 100…250 V
Holding at Max. Rated Control Circuit Voltage 50 Hz 17.5 V·A
Holding at Max. Rated Control Circuit Voltage 60 Hz 17.5 V·A
Environmental
Permissible:
Technical UL/CSA
UL/CSA:

CB Certificate: SE-73043M1
Classifications
E-nummer: 3210163
UNSPSC: 39121529
AF400-30-11 100-250V 50/60Hz / 100-250V
DC
General Information
Extended Product Type: AF400-30-11 100-250V 50/60Hz / 100-250V DC
EAN: 7320500217665
Catalog Description: AF400-30-11 100-250V 50/60Hz / 100-250V DC Contactor
range 100-250 V, AC/DC
Categories
Parts & Services » Drives » Low voltage AC drives » Legacy AC drives » MoCon
Ordering
EAN: 7320500217665
Dimensions
Technical
Current (Ith):
(690 V) 40 °C 600 A
(1000 V) 40 °C 600 A
(1000 V) 55 °C 500 A
(690 V) 70 °C 400 A
(1000 V) 70 °C 400 A
(690 V) 55 °C 350 A
(415 V) 55 °C 400 A
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 55 °C 400 A
(440 V) 55 °C 400 A
(380 / 400 V) 55 °C 400 A
(500 V) 55 °C 400 A
(690 V) 315 kW
(220 / 230 / 240 V) 110 kW
(380 / 400 V) 200 kW
(440 V) 220 kW
(415 V) 220 kW
to IEC 60947-4-1:
IEC 60947-4-1:
(110 V) 1-Pole, 40 °C 600 A
(110 V) 1-Pole, 40 °C 600 A
(110 V) 1-Pole, 40 °C 600 A
(Uimp):
Frequency:
Rated Control Circuit Voltage (Uc): 60 Hz 100 … 250 V
50 Hz 100 … 250 V
DC Operation 100 … 250 V
Holding at Max. Rated Control Circuit Voltage DC 5 V·A
Pull-in at Max. Rated Control Circuit Voltage DC 895 V·A
Operate Time: Between Coil Energization and NO Contact Closing 50 ... 120 ms
Between Coil De-energization and NO Contact Opening 48 ... 58 ms
Between Coil De-energization and NC Contact Closing 45 ... 55 ms
Between Coil Energization and NC Contact Opening 45 ... 115 ms
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit: Rigid Al-Cable 2x240 mm²
Bar 47 mm
Rigid Cu-Cable 240 mm²
Environmental
Permissible:
Resistance to Shock acc. to IEC Shock Direction: A 5 g
60068-2-27: Shock Direction: C2 5 g
Technical UL/CSA
UL/CSA:

Instructions and Manuals: 1SFC380023-en
BV Certificate: 11727/C0 BV
Declaration of Conformity - CE: 1SFA1-65
DNV Certificate: DNV_E-10966
GL Certificate: GL_42988-02HH
LOVAG Certificate: SE-0146190
LR Certificate: LR_13_20009
Classifications
E-nummer: 3228335
UNSPSC: 39121529

4 Products Filter
FC-0460-0240 No Description Available 1 piece
FC-0460-0500 DEV 1 No Description Available 1 piece

4 Products Filter
FC-0460-0240 MoCon Switches, Relays, Contactors
FC-0460-0500 DEV 1 MoCon Switches, Relays, Contactors
AF40-30-00-13
General Information
EAN: 3471523132030
main poles, front and side-mounted add-on auxiliary contact blocks (mechanically-linked
auxiliary contacts compliant with Annex L of IEC 60947-5-1. N.C. mirror contacts compliant
with Annex F of IEC 60947-4-1) - Control circuit: AC or DC operated - Accessories: a wide
range of accessories is available.
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 3471523132030
Dimensions
Technical
Rated Frequency (f): Main Circuit 50 / 60 Hz
Current (Ith):
(690 V) 60 °C 60 A
(690 V) 70 °C 50 A
(380 / 400 V) 60 °C 40 A
(415 V) 60 °C 40 A
(440 V) 60 °C 40 A
(500 V) 60 °C 35 A
(690 V) 60 °C 25 A
Rated Operational Power AC-3 (Pe): (220 / 230 / 240 V) 11 kW
(380 / 400 V) 18.5 kW
(415 V) 22 kW
(440 V) 22 kW
(500 V) 22 kW
(690 V) 22 kW
Frequency: AC-2 / AC-4 150 cycles per hour
(Uimp):
Frequency:
60 Hz 100 ... 250 V
Operate Time: Between Coil De-energization and NC Contact Closing 19 ... 105 ms
Between Coil Energization and NO Contact Closing 42 ... 100 ms
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit: Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 1/2x 4...35 mm²
Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 4...35 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 6...35 mm²
Connecting Capacity Control Circuit: Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Degree of Protection: acc. to IEC 60529, IEC 60947-1, EN 60529 Main Terminals IP10
Environmental
Permissible:
60068-2-6:
Resistance to Shock acc. to IEC Closed, Shock Direction: A 25 g
60068-2-27: Closed, Shock Direction: B1 25 g
Closed, Shock Direction: B2 15 g
Closed, Shock Direction: C1 25 g
Open, Shock Direction: B1 5 g
Technical UL/CSA
Horsepower Rating UL/CSA: (120 V AC) Single Phase 3 Hp
Tightening Torque UL/CSA: Control Circuit 11 in·lb

BV Certificate: BV_2634H36994A
CB Certificate: CB_SE_77418
cUL Certificate: UL_20130926-E312527_14_1
Declaration of Conformity - CE: 1SBD250000U1000
Classifications
E-nummer: 3210033
UNSPSC: 39121529
AF65-30-00-13
General Information
EAN: 3471523132634
main poles, front and side-mounted add-on auxiliary contact blocks (mechanically-linked
auxiliary contacts compliant with Annex L of IEC 60947-5-1. N.C. mirror contacts compliant
with Annex F of IEC 60947-4-1) - Control circuit: AC or DC operated - Accessories: a wide
range of accessories is available.
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 3471523132634
Dimensions
Technical
Rated Frequency (f): Main Circuit 50 / 60 Hz
Current (Ith):
(690 V) 60 °C 90 A
(690 V) 70 °C 80 A
(380 / 400 V) 60 °C 65 A
(415 V) 60 °C 65 A
(440 V) 60 °C 65 A
(500 V) 60 °C 55 A
(690 V) 60 °C 39 A
(380 / 400 V) 30 kW
(400 V) 30 kW
(415 V) 37 kW
(440 V) 37 kW
(500 V) 37 kW
(690 V) 37 kW
Frequency: AC-2 / AC-4 150 cycles per hour
(Uimp):
Frequency:
60 Hz 100 ... 250 V
Operate Time: Between Coil De-energization and NC Contact Closing 19 ... 105 ms
Between Coil Energization and NO Contact Closing 42 ... 100 ms
Connecting Capacity Main Circuit: Flexible with Insulated Ferrule 1/2x 4...35 mm²
Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 4...35 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 6...35 mm²
Connecting Capacity Control Circuit: Flexible with Ferrule 1/2x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm²
Rigid 1/2x 1 ... 2.5 mm²
Degree of Protection: acc. to IEC 60529, IEC 60947-1, EN 60529 Main Terminals IP10
Environmental
Climatic Withstand: Category B according to IEC 60947-1 Annex Q
Permissible:
60068-2-6:
Resistance to Shock acc. to IEC Closed, Shock Direction: A 25 g
60068-2-27: Closed, Shock Direction: B1 25 g
Closed, Shock Direction: B2 15 g
Open, Shock Direction: B1 5 g
Technical UL/CSA
Horsepower Rating UL/CSA: (120 V AC) Single Phase 5 Hp
(240 V AC) Single Phase 15 Hp
Tightening Torque UL/CSA: Control Circuit 11 in·lb

BV Certificate: BV_2634H36994A
cUL Certificate: UL_20130926-E312527_14_1
Classifications
E-nummer: 3210045
ETIM 6: EC000066 - Power contactor, AC switching
UNSPSC: 39121529
CA4-01
General Information
Extended Product Type: CA4-01
Product ID: 1SBN010110R1001
EAN: 3471523130029
Catalog Description: CA4-01 Auxiliary Contact Block
Long Description: CA4-01 Auxiliary Contact Block
Categories
Products » Low Voltage Products and Systems » Control Products » Contactors » Block Contactors Accessories
Ordering
EAN: 3471523130029
Dimensions
Product Packing Type: Bag
Environmental
Technical UL/CSA
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Conventional Free-air Thermal acc. to IEC 60947-5-1, q = 40 °C 16 A
Current (Ith):
Frequency: DC-13 900 cycles per hour
Frequency:
Mounted Auxiliary Contacts: 0 NO, 1 NC
Product Main Type: Accessories for Block Contactors
Product Name: Auxiliary Contact Block
(Uimp):
(Ie): (24 / 127 V) 6 A
(400 / 440 V) 3 A
(500 V) 2 A
(690 V) 2 A
(125 V) 0.55 A / 69 W
(Ie): (220 V) 0.27 A / 60 W
(24 V) 6 A / 144 W
(250 V) 0.27 A / 68 W
(400 V) 0.15 A / 60 W
(48 V) 2.8 A / 134 W
(500 V) 0.13 A / 65 W
(600 V) 0.1 A / 60 W
(72 V) 1 A / 72 W
Rated Operational Voltage: Auxiliary Circuit 24 ... 690 V
Rated Short-time Withstand Current for 0.1 s 140 A
(Icw): for 1 s 100 A
RoHS Date: 20090609
Suitable For: AF09
AF12
AF16
AF26
AF30
AF38
AF40
AF52
AF65
AF80
AF96
NF
Tightening Torque: Auxiliary Circuit 1.2 N·m

DNV Certificate: DNV_E11683
Classifications
E-nummer: 3211410
Object Classification Code: K
UNSPSC: 39121500
CA4-10
General Information
Extended Product Type: CA4-10
EAN: 3471523130005
Catalog Description: CA4-10 Auxiliary Contact Block
Long Description: CA4-10 Auxiliary Contact Block
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 3471523130005
Dimensions
Environmental
Technical UL/CSA
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Current (Ith):
Frequency:
(Uimp):
(Ie): (24 / 127 V) 6 A
(400 / 440 V) 3 A
(500 V) 2 A
(690 V) 2 A
(125 V) 0.55 A / 69 W
(Ie): (220 V) 0.27 A / 60 W
(24 V) 6 A / 144 W
(250 V) 0.27 A / 68 W
(400 V) 0.15 A / 60 W
(48 V) 2.8 A / 134 W
(500 V) 0.13 A / 65 W
(600 V) 0.1 A / 60 W
(72 V) 1 A / 72 W
RoHS Date: 20090609
Suitable For: AF09
AF12
AF16
AF26
AF30
AF38
AF40
AF52
AF65
AF80
AF96
NF

DNV Certificate: DNV_E11683
Classifications
E-nummer: 3211416
UNSPSC: 39121500
CAL4-11
General Information
Extended Product Type: CAL4-11
EAN: 3471523130043
Catalog Description: CAL4-11 Auxiliary Contact Block
Long Description: CAL4-11 Auxiliary Contact Block
Categories
Ordering
EAN: 3471523130043
Dimensions
Environmental
Technical UL/CSA
Rigid 1/2x 1...2.5 mm²
Current (Ith):
Frequency:
(Uimp):
(Ie): (24 / 127 V) 6 A
(400 / 440 V) 3 A
(500 V) 2 A
(690 V) 2 A
(125 V) 0.55 A / 69 W
(Ie): (220 V) 0.27 A / 60 W
(24 V) 6 A / 144 W
(250 V) 0.27 A / 68 W
(400 V) 0.15 A / 60 W
(48 V) 2.8 A / 134 W
(500 V) 0.13 A / 65 W
(600 V) 0.1 A / 60 W
(72 V) 1 A / 72 W
RoHS Date: 20090609
Suitable For: AF09
AF12
AF16
AF26
AF30
AF38
AF40
AF52
AF65
AF80
AF96
NF

Classifications
E-nummer: 3211435
UNSPSC: 39121500
Relay retaining bracket - EL3-M52 - 2833628

Relay retaining bracket, wiring to suit relay socket RIF-3 and PR3, for 52 mm high octal relay
Product Features
■ Relay base family that can be fitted with 2 PDT or 3 PDT relays
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Minimum order quantity 10 pc
Technical data
Product type Retaining bracket
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27371190

eCl@ss 4.1 27371190
eCl@ss 5.0 27371692
eCl@ss 5.1 27371692
eCl@ss 6.0 27371603
eCl@ss 7.0 27371603
eCl@ss 8.0 27379208
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC001456

ETIM 3.0 EC001456
04/17/2016 Page 1 / 2
Relay retaining bracket - EL3-M52 - 2833628

Classifications
ETIM
ETIM 4.0 EC001456
ETIM 5.0 EC002586
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211917

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121516
UNSPSC 11 39121516
UNSPSC 12.01 39121516
UNSPSC 13.2 39121516

04/17/2016 Page 2 / 2
Relay socket - PR3-BSC1/3X21 - 2833615
Relay socket PR3..., for octal relay REL-OR with 3 PDT, screw connections, connection facility for input/
interference suppression modules, for mounting on NS 35/7.5
Product Features
■ Relay base family that can be fitted with 2 PDT or 3 PDT relays
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Technical data
Dimensions
Width 38 mm
Height 75 mm
Depth with retaining bracket 84 mm (EL3-M52)
Ambient conditions
Connection data, input side

Connection name Input side
04/17/2016 Page 1 / 5
Technical data
Screw thread M3
Conductor cross section solid 0.2 mm² ... 2.5 mm²
0.2 mm² ... 2.5 mm² (2 conductors with the same cross-section)
Conductor cross section flexible 0.2 mm² ... 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG 26 ... 14
26 ... 14 (2 conductors with the same cross-section)
Connection data, output side

Connection name Output side
Screw thread M3
26 ... 14 (2 conductors with the same cross-section)
General
Nominal voltage UN 400 V AC/DC
Nominal current IN 10 A
Color green

Connection in acc. with standard CSA
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27371102

eCl@ss 4.1 27371102
eCl@ss 5.0 27371603
eCl@ss 5.1 27371603
eCl@ss 6.0 27371603
eCl@ss 7.0 27371603
eCl@ss 8.0 27371603
eCl@ss 9.0 27371603
04/17/2016 Page 2 / 5
Classifications
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC001456

ETIM 3.0 EC001456
ETIM 4.0 EC001456
ETIM 5.0 EC001456
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211917

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121516
UNSPSC 11 39121516
UNSPSC 12.01 39121516
UNSPSC 13.2 39121516
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Recognized / cUL Recognized / CSA / EAC / cULus Recognized
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Recognized
cUL Recognized
CSA
04/17/2016 Page 3 / 5
Approvals
EAC
cULus Recognized
Accessories
Required add-on products
Single relay - REL-OR- 24DC/3X21 - 2834274
Pluggable octal relay with power contacts, 3 PDT, test button, mechanical switching position indication, coil voltage 24 V
DC

Single relay - REL-OR- 24AC/3X21 - 2834287
AC

Single relay - REL-OR-120AC/3X21 - 2834290
AC

Pluggable octal relay with power contacts, 3 PDT, test button, mechanical switching position indication, input voltage: 230
V AC

04/17/2016 Page 4 / 5

04/17/2016 Page 5 / 5

Pluggable octal relay with power contacts, 3 PDT, test button, mechanical switching position indication, coil
voltage 24 V DC
Product Features
■ Extremely rugged design
■ With detectable manual operation
■ Mechanical switch position indicator
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Technical data
Dimensions
Width 34.5 mm
Height 34.5 mm
Depth 52.5 mm
Ambient conditions
Coil side
Nominal input voltage UN 24 V DC
Input voltage range in reference to UN 0.8 ... 1.1
05/20/2016 Page 1 / 5

Technical data
Coil side
Typical input current at UN 56 mA
Typical response time 12 ms
Typical release time 6 ms
Coil resistance 430 Ω ±15 % (at 20 °C)
Power dissipation for nominal condition 1.34 W
Contact side
Contact type 3 PDTs
Contact material AgSnIn
Maximum switching voltage 250 V AC/DC
Minimum switching voltage 1V
Min. switching current 10 mA
Maximum inrush current on request
Limiting continuous current 10 A (N/O contact)
5 A (N/C contact)
Interrupting rating (ohmic load) max. 2500 VA (for 250 V AC)
Connection data input side

Connection name Coil side
Connection method Plug connection
Connection data output side

Connection name Contact side
General
Test voltage relay winding/relay contact 2.5 kV AC (50 Hz, 1 min.)
Test voltage relay contact/relay contact 2.5 kV AC (50 Hz, 1 min.)
Operating mode 100% operating factor
Mechanical service life 6
10 x 10 cycles
Standards/regulations IEC 60664
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category II
Mounting position any
Assembly instructions On relay base PR3

05/20/2016 Page 2 / 5

Technical data
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27371104

eCl@ss 4.1 27371104
eCl@ss 5.0 27371001
eCl@ss 5.1 27371001
eCl@ss 6.0 27371001
eCl@ss 7.0 27371001
eCl@ss 8.0 27371601
eCl@ss 9.0 27371601
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000196

ETIM 3.0 EC000196
ETIM 4.0 EC000196
ETIM 5.0 EC001437
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211916

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121515
UNSPSC 11 39121515
UNSPSC 12.01 39121515
UNSPSC 13.2 39121515
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Recognized / cUL Recognized / EAC / EAC / cULus Recognized
Ex Approvals
05/20/2016 Page 3 / 5

Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Recognized
cUL Recognized
EAC
EAC
cULus Recognized
Accessories
Additional products
Relay socket PR3..., for octal relay REL-OR with 3 PDT, screw connections, connection facility for input/interference
suppression modules, for mounting on NS 35/7.5

Drawings
05/20/2016 Page 4 / 5

Diagram Diagram
20
Switching current [A]

10
7
5
3
2
1
10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
Switching voltage [V]
1 AC, ohmic load

2 DC, ohmic load
Electrical service life Interrupting rating
Diagram Circuit diagram
(14)
(12)
(A1) 3
4
1 2 (22)
5
0,9
(11)
1
(21)
0,8 6
Reduction factor
11
0,7 (31)
7
0,6 10 (24)
8
(A2) 9
0,5 (32)
(34)
0,4
0,3
1 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
COS j
Service life reduction factor with various cos phi

05/20/2016 Page 5 / 5
Pluggable octal relay with power contacts, 3 PDT, test button, mechanical switching position indication, input
voltage: 230 V AC
Product Features
■ With detectable manual operation
■ Extremely rugged design
■ Mechanical switch position indicator
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 10 pc
GTIN

Technical data
Dimensions
Width 34.5 mm
Height 34.5 mm
Depth 52.5 mm
Ambient conditions
Coil side
Nominal input voltage UN 230 V AC
Typical input current at UN 10 mA (at 50 Hz)
11 mA (At 60 Hz)
Typical response time 5 ms ... 20 ms (AC, depending on phase relation)
05/24/2016 Page 1 / 5
Technical data
Coil side
Typical release time range 5 ms ... 20 ms (AC, depending on phase relation)
Coil resistance 6170 Ω ±15 % (at 20 °C)
Contact side
Contact type 3 PDTs
Contact material AgSnIn
Maximum switching voltage 250 V AC/DC
Minimum switching voltage 1V
Min. switching current 10 mA
Maximum inrush current on request
Limiting continuous current 10 A (N/O contact)
5 A (N/C contact)
Interrupting rating (ohmic load) max. 2500 VA (for 250 V AC)
Connection data input side

Connection name Coil side
Connection data output side

Connection name Contact side
General
Test voltage relay winding/relay contact 2.5 kV AC (50 Hz, 1 min.)
Test voltage relay contact/relay contact 2.5 kV AC (50 Hz, 1 min.)
Mechanical service life 6
10 x 10 cycles
Assembly instructions On relay base PR3

Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27371104
05/24/2016 Page 2 / 5
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.1 27371104
eCl@ss 5.0 27371001
eCl@ss 5.1 27371001
eCl@ss 6.0 27371001
eCl@ss 7.0 27371001
eCl@ss 8.0 27371601
eCl@ss 9.0 27371601
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000196

ETIM 3.0 EC000196
ETIM 4.0 EC000196
ETIM 5.0 EC001437
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211916

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121515
UNSPSC 11 39121515
UNSPSC 12.01 39121515
UNSPSC 13.2 39121515
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Recognized / cUL Recognized / EAC / EAC / cULus Recognized
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Recognized
05/24/2016 Page 3 / 5
Approvals
cUL Recognized
EAC
EAC
cULus Recognized
Accessories
Additional products
Relay socket PR3..., for octal relay REL-OR with 3 PDT, screw connections, connection facility for input/interference
suppression modules, for mounting on NS 35/7.5

Drawings
Diagram Diagram
20
1
Switching current [A]
10
7
5
3
2
1
10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
Switching voltage [V]
1 AC, ohmic load

2 DC, ohmic load
Electrical service life Interrupting rating
05/24/2016 Page 4 / 5
(14)
(12)
(A1) 3
4
1 2 (22)
5
0,9
(11)
1
(21)
0,8 6
Reduction factor
11
0,7 (31)
7
0,6 10 (24)
8
(A2) 9
0,5 (32)
(34)
0,4
0,3
1 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
COS j
Service life reduction factor with various cos phi

05/24/2016 Page 5 / 5
Solid-state relay module - PLC-OSC- 24DC/ 24DC/ 2 - 2966634

PLC-INTERFACE, consisting of PLC-BSC…/21 basic terminal block with screw connection and plug-in
miniature solid-state relay, for mounting on DIN rail NS 35/7,5, 1 N/O contact, input: 24 V DC, output: 3 - 33 V
DC/3 A
The illustration shows the version

PLC-BSC- 24DC/21
Product Features
■ Slim design
■ Efficient connection to system cabling using V8 adapter
■ RT III sealed solid-state relay
■ Integrated input circuit
■ Functional plug-in bridges
■ Zero voltage switch at AC output
■ High switching power
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 10 pc
GTIN

Sales Key 08
Technical data
Note
area
Dimensions
Width 6.2 mm
Height 80 mm
Depth 94 mm
05/23/2016 Page 1 / 11

Technical data
Ambient conditions
Input data
Nominal input voltage UN 24 V DC
Switching threshold "0" signal in reference to UN ≤ 0.4
Switching threshold "1" signal in reference to UN ≥ 0.8
Typical input current at UN 8.5 mA
Typical response time 20 µs (at UN)
Typical turn-off time 300 µs (at UN)
Operating voltage display Yellow LED
Type of protection Reverse polarity protection
Free-wheeling diode
Protective circuit/component Polarity protection diode
Damping diode
Transmission frequency 300 Hz
Power dissipation for nominal condition 0.6 W
Output data
Output voltage range 3 V DC ... 33 V DC
Limiting continuous current 3 A (see derating curve)
Maximum inrush current 15 A (10 ms)
Voltage drop at max. limiting continuous current ≤ 200 mV
Output circuit 2-wire, floating
Type of protection Reverse polarity protection
Surge protection
Protective circuit/component Polarity protection diode

Connection name Input side
Screw thread M3

Connection name Output side
Screw thread M3
05/23/2016 Page 2 / 11

Technical data
General
Test voltage input/output 2.5 kV (50 Hz, 1 min.)
Assembly instructions In rows with zero spacing
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Designation Standards/regulations
EN 50178
IEC 62103
Rated surge voltage/insulation Basic insulation
Overvoltage category III

Designation Standards/regulations
EN 50178
IEC 62103
Rated surge voltage/insulation Basic insulation
Overvoltage category III
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27371102

eCl@ss 4.1 27371102
eCl@ss 5.0 27371001
eCl@ss 5.1 27371001
eCl@ss 6.0 27371001
eCl@ss 7.0 27371001
eCl@ss 8.0 27371604
eCl@ss 9.0 27371604
05/23/2016 Page 3 / 11

Classifications
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC001504

ETIM 3.0 EC001504
ETIM 4.0 EC001504
ETIM 5.0 EC001504
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211916

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121542
UNSPSC 11 39121542
UNSPSC 12.01 39121542
UNSPSC 13.2 39121542
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Recognized / UL Listed / cUL Recognized / cUL Listed / GL / EAC / EAC / cULus Recognized / cULus Listed
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Recognized
UL Listed
cUL Recognized
05/23/2016 Page 4 / 11

Approvals
cUL Listed
GL
EAC
EAC
cULus Recognized
cULus Listed
Accessories
Accessories
Bridge
Continuous plug-in bridge - FBST 500-PLC RD - 2966786
Continuous plug-in bridge, Length: 500 mm, Color: red

Continuous plug-in bridge - FBST 500-PLC BU - 2966692
Continuous plug-in bridge, Length: 500 mm, Color: blue

05/23/2016 Page 5 / 11

Accessories
Continuous plug-in bridge - FBST 500-PLC GY - 2966838
Continuous plug-in bridge, Length: 500 mm, Color: gray

Single plug-in bridge - FBST 6-PLC RD - 2966236
Single plug-in bridge, Length: 6 mm, Number of positions: 2, Color: red

Single plug-in bridge - FBST 6-PLC BU - 2966812
Single plug-in bridge, Length: 6 mm, Number of positions: 2, Color: blue

Single plug-in bridge - FBST 6-PLC GY - 2966825
Single plug-in bridge, Length: 6 mm, Number of positions: 2, Color: gray

Single plug-in bridge - FBST 8-PLC GY - 2967688
Single plug-in bridge, Length: 8 mm, Number of positions: 2, Color: gray

Controller board
05/23/2016 Page 6 / 11

Accessories
System connection - PLC-V8/FLK14/OUT - 2295554
V8-OUTPUT adapter for eight 6.2 mm PLC interfaces (1 PDT, etc./see "Supplementary Products"). 14-pos. flat-
ribbon cable connection for the PLC system cabling, control logic: Plus switching

System connection - PLC-V8/FLK14/OUT/M - 2304102
V8-OUTPUT adapter for eight 6.2 mm PLC interfaces (1 PDT, etc./see "Supplementary Products"). 14-pos. flat-
ribbon cable connection for the PLC system cabling, control logic: Minus switching

System connection - PLC-V8/D15S/OUT - 2296058
V8-OUTPUT adapter for eight 6.2 mm PLC interfaces (1 PDT, etc./see "Additional Products"). 15-pin D-SUB male
connector, control logic: Positive switching

System connection - PLC-V8/D15B/OUT - 2296061
V8-OUTPUT adapter for eight 6.2 mm PLC interfaces (1 PDT, etc./see "Additional Products"). 15-pin D-SUB female
connector, control logic: Positive switching

DIN rail
DIN rail, unperforated - NS 35/ 7,5 V2A UNPERF 2000MM - 0801377
DIN rail, unperforated, Width: 35 mm, Height: 7.5 mm, Length: 2000 mm, Color: silver

05/23/2016 Page 7 / 11

Accessories
DIN rail perforated - NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM - 0801733
DIN rail, material: steel galvanized and passivated with a thick layer, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length:
2000 mm

DIN rail, unperforated - NS 35/ 7,5 CU UNPERF 2000MM - 0801762
DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

DIN rail, unperforated - NS 35/15 UNPERF 2000MM - 1201714
DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

DIN rail, unperforated - NS 35/15 CU UNPERF 2000MM - 1201895
DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

DIN rail, unperforated - NS 35/15-2,3 UNPERF 2000MM - 1201798
DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, 2.3 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

05/23/2016 Page 8 / 11

Accessories
DIN rail, unperforated - NS 35/15 AL UNPERF 2000MM - 1201756
DIN rail, deep drawn, high profile, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, material: aluminum, height 15 mm, width 35 mm,
length 2000 mm

DIN rail perforated - NS 35/15 PERF 2000MM - 1201730
DIN rail, material: steel galvanized and passivated with a thick layer, perforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length:
2000 mm

DIN rail, unperforated - NS 35/ 7,5 UNPERF 2000MM - 0801681
DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

Labeled terminal marker
Zack marker strip - ZB 6,LGS:FORTL.ZAHLEN - 1051016
Zack marker strip, Strip, white, labeled, can be labeled with: Plotter, Printed horizontally: Consecutive numbers 1 - 10,
11 - 20, etc. up to 491 - 500, Mounting type: Snap into tall marker groove, for terminal block width: 6.2 mm, Lettering
field: 6.15 x 10.5 mm

Partition plate
Separating plate - PLC-ATP BK - 2966841
Separating plate, 2 mm thick, required at the start and end of a PLC terminal strip. Furthermore, it is used for: visual
separation of groups, safe isolation of different voltages of neighboring PLC relays in acc. with DIN VDE 0106-101,
isolation

Power module
05/23/2016 Page 9 / 11

Accessories
Power terminal block - PLC-ESK GY - 2966508
Power terminal block, for the input of up to four potentials, for mounting on NS 35/7.5

Relay socket
Relay socket - PLC-BSC- 24DC/21 - 2966016
6.2 mm PLC basic terminal block with screw connection, without relays or solid-state relay, for mounting on DIN rail
NS 35/7,5, 1 PDT, input voltage 24 V DC

Screwdriver tools
Screwdriver - SZF 1-0,6X3,5 - 1204517
Actuation tool, for ST terminal blocks, also suitable for use as a bladed screwdriver, size: 0.6 x 3.5 x 100 mm, 2-
component grip, with non-slip grip

Single solid-state relay
Miniature solid-state relay - OPT-24DC/ 24DC/ 2 - 2966595
Plug-in miniature solid-state relay, power solid-state relay, 1 N/O contact, input: 24 V DC, output: 3 - 33 V DC/3 A

Terminal marking
Zack marker strip - ZB 6:UNBEDRUCKT - 1051003
Zack marker strip, Strip, white, unlabeled, can be labeled with: Plotter, Mounting type: Snap into tall marker groove,
for terminal block width: 6.2 mm, Lettering field: 6.15 x 10.5 mm

05/23/2016 Page 10 / 11

Accessories
Spare parts
Relay socket - PLC-BSC- 24DC/21 - 2966016
6.2 mm PLC basic terminal block with screw connection, without relays or solid-state relay, for mounting on DIN rail
NS 35/7,5, 1 PDT, input voltage 24 V DC

Miniature solid-state relay - OPT-24DC/ 24DC/ 2 - 2966595
Plug-in miniature solid-state relay, power solid-state relay, 1 N/O contact, input: 24 V DC, output: 3 - 33 V DC/3 A

Drawings

Load current [A]
2
A2 13+
1
0 A1 14
10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature [°C]

05/23/2016 Page 11 / 11
Data sheet 3NC1450-5
SITOR CYLIND. FUSE-LINK AR WITH STRIKER 14X51
50 A, 690V AC/ 600V DC
Model
product brand name SENTRON
General technical data

Size of the fuse link 14x51 mm
Dissipation
Power loss [W]
● for rated value of the current / at AC / in hot W 9
operating state / per pole
Main circuit
Operating voltage / rated value V 690
Operating current / Rated value A 50
Product details
Product component / striker Yes
Net weight g 26
Equipment marking
● acc. to DIN EN 61346-2 F
3NC1450-5 Changes preserved

● acc. to DIN EN 81346-2 F
General Product Approval

sonstig
Further information
Information- and Downloadcenter (Catalogs, Brochures,…)
http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/catalogs
Industry Mall (Online ordering system)
https://eb.automation.siemens.com/mall/en/WW/Catalog/Product/3NC14505
Service&Support (Manuals, Certificates, Characteristics, FAQs,...)
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/3NC14505/all
Image database (product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, device circuit diagrams, ...)
http://www.automation.siemens.com/bilddb/cax_en.aspx?mlfb=3NC14505
CAx-Online-Generator
http://www.siemens.com/cax
Tender specifications
http://ausschreibungstexte.siemens.com/tiplv
last modified: 09.06.2016
3NC1450-5 Changes preserved

E 90 range of fuse disconnectors
and fuseholders
Uncompromising performance
Designing simplicity
ABB competence serving the most
demanding customers
Suitability for disconnection and switching, effective heat

dissipation and certified compliance with several international
standards are mandatory requirements to meet the needs of the
most demanding customers. ABB has dedicated its designers’
passion, competence and creativity to the development of E 90
new range of disconnectors and fuseholders.
The result is the first AC-22B fuse disconnector, certified up to
32 A by the most outstanding marks and approvals all over the
world.
2 | E 90 range of fuse disconnectors and fuseholders

The new ABB standard
Certified according to the most important
international marks
A passport to the world.

International quality marks, naval type-approvals and UL certification
make E 90 the ideal range for designers and manufacturers of
switchboards and installations “without frontiers”.
E 90 range of fuse disconnectors and fuseholders | 3

E 90 range
Designed by ABB for the most demanding
customers
Industrial automation Distribution switchboards

E 90 fuse switch E 90h fuseholders
disconnectors
– O ne module per pole – One pole plus neutral in one module
– Versions 1, 1N, 2, 3, 3N, 4 – Versions 1N, 3N
– AC-22B according to IEC 60947-3 – Certified according to IEC 60269-3
– R ated current 20 A and 32 A – Rated current 20 A and 32 A
– R ated voltage 400 V AC-22B and 690 V AC-20B – Rated voltage 400 V AC
– C an be equipped with 8.5 x 31.5 mm and 10.3 x 38 mm – Can be equipped with 8.5 x 31.5 mm and 10.3 x 38 mm
aM and gG fuses aM and gG fuses
– D esigned for isolation and switching under load and for – Designed for instruments and auxiliaries protection
protection of secondary circuits of industrial plants in switchboards and consumer units
– All the versions are available with optical blown fuse indicator – All the versions are available with optical blown fuse indicator
– C ompatible with ABB busbars of S 200 series and Unifix – Compatible with ABB busbars of SN 201 series and Unifix
plug-in system plug-in system
– cURus certification

Photovoltaic installations For the American market
E 90 PV fuse disconnectors E 90 CC fuseholders
– One module per pole – O ne module per pole

– 1 and 2-pole versions – Versions 1, 1N, 2, 3, 3N, 4 poles
– DC-20B according to IEC 60947-3 – R ated current 30 A
– Rated current 32 A – R ated voltage 600 V AC/DC
– Rated voltage 1000 V DC – Can be equipped with Class CC fuses
– Can be equipped with 10.3 x 38 mm gPV fuses – Specifically designed for North American market
– Designed for isolation and protection of circuits in – All the versions are available with optical blown fuse indicator
photovoltaic installations up to 1000 V DC – Certified according to UL 4248-4
– All the versions are available with optical blown fuse indicator – Compatible with UL-508 busbars
– Certified according to UL 4248-18 – Rejection member feature according to UL 4248-4
– Compatible with UL-508 busbars

Choosing the best
ABB experience sets a new leading-edge
performance standard
Tip-top Reliability
performance Venting grooves and cooling
chambers improve heat
E 90 fuseholders can be used dissipation even in multiple-pole
in any applications where configurations. The reduced
operating temperature inside
you need to ensure electrical
fuseholders ensures durability and
protection, isolation and reliability of the devices over time.
switching under load of
inductive or resistive loads in
compliance with IEC 60947-3
Standard, AC-22B utilization
category. The technology
solutions applied to reduce
power dissipation help to
minimize module heating.
Compactness
When open, the drawer projection is
only 17 mm more than in the normal
closed position.
The compact dimensions enable
to close the switchboard door
even when the fuseholder is open,
thus ensuring total safety during
maintenance. 1P+N versions in
Completeness one module only and 3P+N in three

modules only are available.
The fuse tripping can be easily

displayed, thanks to the special
blown fuse indicator light.
Universal use
Screw holes have increased
diameter to accommodate
insulated screwdrivers and electric
screwdrivers. In addition, with the
Pozidrive PZ2 screws tightening
can be performed by exerting less
torque than conventional screws,
and the same electric screwdriver
can be used for all terminals.
Moreover, the PS connection
busbars facilitate the connecting
operations, making the wiring both
simple and safe and providing
complete integration with S 200 and
Ease of installation. SN 201 System pro M compact®

circuit-breakers.
E 90 fuseholders are fully compatible
with the Unifix-L wiring system
E 90 safe and smart range is designed for quick, flexible and
error-proof installation, to ease the everyday use of devices.
Thanks to its unique features, E 90 series sets a new safety
standard.
Reliable connections
Wide terminals allow the use of cables with
section up to 25 mm2, whereas the antivibration
knurling on the terminal cages ensures safe and
reliable connections.
Ease of use
Fuseholder profile has been
designed for maximum ease
of use: the 90° flip hinge with
ergonomic knob, makes the
replacement of fuses easier
even in small spaces or when
wearing protective gloves.
Safety
To ensure protection and safety
during maintenance operations
and avoid any accidental switching,
fuseholders can be sealed in
closed position, and padlocked
in open position. The protection
degree is IP20 when the unit is
installed behind the switchboard
slotting.
Environmental protection.
The fuseholders are compliant with RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances)
European directive, which prohibits the use of hazardous substances in the
manufacture of electrical and electronic equipment.
Smart protection for installations
with E 90s
The first fuse disconnector for photovoltaic installations

with optical blown fuse indicator. It efficiently monitors DC
installations up to 1000 V
Flexible:
E 90: 24 to 690 V operation in
AC networks. Can be powered
from both the load side and
the supply side
E 90 PV: 24 to 1000 V
operation in DC networks with
upstream supply
Simple:
No need for auxiliary supply
or specific wiring
Effective:
Local fuse tripping signal
Allows the faulty phase
to be immediately detected

+ ~ – + ~ –
– –
+ +
+ ~ – + ~ –
Wiring diagram for d.c. networks Wiring diagram for a.c. networks
E 90 Wizard
E 90 Wizard is an APP to easily select fuse and fuse holder

codes in few simple steps wherever you are.
E 90 Wizard helps you to select ABB codes for E 90 and

E 9F series for all the applications: industrial, residential,
photovoltaic and North American markets.
In few taps E 90 Wizard can provide you the right code, listing
you technical characteristics and documentation links.

Results you can trust
High performance of E 90
fuse disconnectors

E 90 protection and control
A range developed for automation
and industry
Applications E90 fuse disconnectors are designed for switching
under load, ensuring isolation and protection against
- Automation switchboards short circuit and overload, in compliance with the
IEC 60947-3 Standard.
- On-board switchboards
- OEM E 90 range is designed to comply with the strictest
requirements of OEMs and panel builders. They are ideally
installed in industrial automation switchboards to protect
Main functions: secondary circuits, primary and secondary of transformers,
motors and other resistive or inductive loads. Due to the
- Protection of terminal circuits AC-22B utilization category up to 400V, according to the IEC
- Switching of loads, even 60947-3 Standard, E 90 fuse disconnectors are convenient,

simple and reliable devices for loads switching and protection.
inductive Fuse disconnectors ensure selectivity, if equipped with
appropriate fuses. Since they are uURus type-approved, they
- Selectivity can be installed in UL-certified machines designed for the
American market.
Application example
Here you can find a typical industrial control application. According to
IEC 60364-1 Standard, the secondary winding of a control transformer must
be protected against short circuits and overload. The transformer provides
dedicated 230 V a.c. power supply to a battery of industrial contactors.

Industrial distribution
E 90h fuseholders:
ideal for distribution switchboards

E 90h fuseholders
Compact protection of electric auxiliaries
in distribution switchboards
Applications E90 Fuseholders – 1P+N in one module and 3P+N in three
modules, respectively – are very compact in size and are
- Distribution switchboards the most suitable solution for protection of circuits and
devices inside switchboards.
- Consumer units
E 90h range is designed for protecting electrical devices both
Terminal protection of: in single phase and in three-phase networks with neutral. They
are particularly suitable inside switchboards and consumer
-E lectric auxiliaries units for protecting lighting circuits, modular sockets and
electrical devices for monitoring, measuring and signalling.
- Switchboard instrumentation
- Surge arresters
Application example
Here you can find a typical application inside a secondary distribution
switchboard. Following the manufacturer’s instruction, the voltmetric
inputs of the multimeter are protected with fuses.

E 90 PV fuse disconnectors
for photovoltaic applications
Designed for industry professionals
Features E 90 PV fuse disconnectors have been specifically
designed for photovoltaic applications. Thanks to their
- For 10.3 x 38 mm fuses rated voltage up to 1000 V d.c. they are the ideal solution
for protecting cells, inverters or surge arresters. In case of
- Rated voltage 1000 V DC maintenance, they ensure isolation of circuits and strings
up to 1000 V in direct current, in total safety.
- Rated current 32 A
- DC-20B Utilization category
- Reference standards:
IEC 60947-3 UL 4248-18

Isolation and protection
of strings up to 1000 V
Application examples
String protection
To prevent damage to the equipment in the direct current
lines of photovoltaic installations and ensure that it remains
isolated when maintenance work is performed, E 90 PV fuse
disconnectors can be installed downstream of the inverter so
as to protect each string. The fuses must be selected to suit
the rated current of the line.
Surge arrester back-up

When the Icc short-circuit current at the installation point
exceeds 100 A DC, OVR PV surge arresters require back-up
protection with a specific gR-type fuse.
D.c. side of the inverter

In small photovoltaic installations, E 90 PV fuse disconnectors
can be used to protect the direct current side of the inverter.
Fuse cartridges should be selected according to the inverter
rated current.

Quality also speaks American
E 90 CC fuseholders,
designed for the North American market
Features E 90 CC range has been designed to comply with North

American market regulations and to enable worldwide
- UL Listed according to manufacturers to sell their equipment in conformity with
safety requirements also in these countries.
UL 4248-1 and UL 4248-4
- Can be equipped only with Class CC fuses have limiting characteristics dedicated to
terminal protection of components and apparatuses against
Class CC fuses short-term overloads and to protect motor against short-circuit.
Maximum rated current of a Class CC fuse is 30 A, whereas the
- Rated voltage 600 V AC/DC maximum rated voltage is 600 V. The breaking capacity reaches
- Rated current 30 A 200 kA. The limiting properties of the Class CC fuses are
particularly appreciated in the North American market, allowing
- Versions 1, 1N, 2, 3, 3N, 4 poles suitable protection even of equipment with limited resistance to
short-circuit. The use of Class CC fuses is continuously
- Rejection member to increasing in the American market, since the safety and reliability
prescriptions of end users have become stricter and do not
allow just the insertion tolerate any permanent damage to motor starts.
of a class CC fuse

E 930 fuse disconnectors
Protection for industrial circuits
Features E 930 fuse disconnectors are specifically designed for

protecting industrial circuits thanks to aM and gG
-F or 14x51 and 22x58 mm cylindrical fuses with 50 A and 125 A ratings.
fuses E 930 range can be padlocked in the open position to ensure
-6 90 V AC/DC according safety for operators performing maintenance work. Moreover,

they also support MCR microswitches thanks to which the
to IEC and 750V AC/DC status of the device can be fully monitored from remote. The
microswitch is able to provide an indication when the fuse
according to UL blows, if the drawer is open and if it has been closed without
- U R and CSA inserting the fuse. Microswitch functionalities are guarantee

only using fuses with striker pin. More technical details can be
type-approved found at pag. 43.

Technical data
E 90 series
Data according to IEC

Type E 90/20 E 90/32 E 90hN/20 E 90hN/32 E 90/32 PV E 930/50 E 930/125
Rated current A 20 32 20 32 32 50 125
Type of current AC AC DC AC/DC
Fuse mm 8 x 31 10 x 38 8 x 31 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58
Max power dissipation accepted W 2,5 3 2,6 3,2 3 5 9,5
Rated frequency Hz / 50-60 / 50-60 – = / 50-60
Tightening torque Nm PZ2 2-2,5 PZ2 0,8-1,2 PZ2 2-2,5 PZ2 3,5 PZ2 4
Protection degree IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Terminals' section mm 2 25 16 25 35 50
Cross section rigid copper conductors mm 2 1,5 - 25 1,5 - 16 1,5 - 25 2,5 - 35 4 - 50
Cross section stranded copper conductors mm 2 1,5 - 16 1,5 - 10 1,5 - 16 2,5 - 25 4 - 35
Operating temperature °C -5 / +40*** -5 / +40*** -5 / +40*** -5 / +40***
Storage temperature °C -25 / +70**** -25 / +70**** -25 / +70**** -25 / +70****
Altitude m 2000 2000 2000 2000
Voltage range for LED indicator light 24 - 1000 AC/DC – – 24 - 1000 24 - 1000 AC/DC
(only s version) AC/DC (only (only s version)
s version)
Padlockable (when open) • • • • •

Sealable (when closed) • • • • •
IEC 60947-3
Utilization category AC-22B AC-20B AC-22B AC-20B – DC-20B AC-20B / DC-20B
Rated voltage V 400 690 400 690 – 1000 690 690
IEC 60269-3
Rated voltage V – 400 400 – – –
Marks and approvals E 90/20 E 90/32 E 90hN/20 E 90hN/32 E 90/32 PV E 930/50 E 930/125
IMQ •*(1) •*(1) •* •*
NF •** (1) •**(1)
CCC - Cina •*(1) •*(1) •* •*
cURus • (2)
UR •
UL •(3)
CSA •
RINA •*(1) •*(1) •* •*
LLOYD •* (1) •*(1) •* •*
BV • (1) • (1) • • • •
GOST - Russia • • • • • •
GOST - Ukraina • • • • • •
•*= without LED version

•** = no neutral and without LED version
***= for lower temperature verify fuse technical characteristics, for higher temperature refer to derating table at page 25
****= for more than 24h max temperature is +55°C
(1) = certified AC-22B at 400V in compliance with IEC 60947-3
(2) = certified at 600V in compliance with UL 4248-4

Data according to UL
Type E 90/30 CC E 90/32 PV
Rated current A 30 32
Rated Voltage V 600 1000
Type of current AC/DC DC
Fuse class CC 10x38
Rated frequency Hz = / 60 -
Tightening torque Nm PZ2 2-2,5 PZ2 2-2,5
Protection degree IP20 IP20
Terminals' section mm 2 25 25
Cross section rigid copper conductors AWG 16÷10 16÷10
Cross section stranded copper conductors AWG 16÷3 16÷3
Padlockable (when open) • •
Sealable (when closed) • •
Marks and Approvals

cULus • (1)
UL • (2)
(1) = certified at 600V in compliance with UL 4248-1 and UL 4248-4
Shock and vibration

Vibration withstand on the 3 main axis:
– Sinusoidal vibration testing according to IEC 60068-2-6
2 to 13Hz x= 1 mm peak
13 to 100Hz y= 0.7g peak
– R andom vibration testing according to IEC 61373
Category 1 Class B
Shock withstand on the 3 main axis:

– Shock testing according to IEC 60068-2-27 15g/11ms/18
shocks
– Shock testing according to IEC 61373 Category 1 Class B

Order codes
E 90 series
Poles Rated Modu- Description ABB code Bbn Piece Pack unit
current les Type 8012542 weight pcs
EAN kg
E 90 fuse disconnectors for 10.3 x 38 mm fuses
38 ø 10,3 1 32 1 E 91/32 2CSM200923R1801 009238 0,061 6
1 32 1 E 91/32s* 2CSM202483R1801 024835 0,062 6
1+N 32 2 E 91N/32 2CSM200893R1801 008934 0,130 3
1+N 32 2 E 91N/32s* 2CSM251503R1801 515036 0,131 3
2 32 2 E 92/32 2CSM200883R1801 008835 0,122 3
2 32 2 E 92/32s* 2CSM251493R1801 514930 0,123 3
3 32 3 E 93/32 2CSM204753R1801 047537 0,183 2
3 32 3 E 93/32s* 2CSM202063R1801 020639 0,184 2
3+N 32 4 E 93N/32 2CSM204733R1801 047339 0,252 1
3+N 32 4 E 93N/32s* 2CSM251483R1801 514831 0,254 1
4 32 4 E 94/32 2CSM204723R1801 047230 0,244 1
31,5 ø 8,5 4 32 4 E 94/32s* 2CSM202053R1801 020530 0,245 1

E 90 fuse disconnectors for 8.5 x 31.5 mm fuses
1 20 1 E 91/20 2CSM200983R1801 009832 0,061 6
1 20 1 E 91/20s* 2CSM202423R1801 024231 0,062 6
2 20 2 E 92/20 2CSM200953R1801 009535 0,122 3
2 20 2 E 92/20s* 2CSM289623R1801 896234 0,123 3
3 20 3 E 93/20 2CSM200943R1801 009436 0,183 2
3 20 3 E 93/20s* 2CSM289613R1801 896135 0,184 2
The most widely used codes are in green
*s: versione with blown fuse indicator
EAN kg
E 90h fuseholders for 10.3 x 38 mm fuses
38 ø 10,3 1+N 32 1 E 91hN/32 2CSM200913R1801 009139 0,070 6
1+N 32 1 E 91hN/32s* 2CSM206573R1801 065739 0,071 6
3+N 32 3 E 93hN/32 2CSM204743R1801 047438 0,192 2
3+N 32 3 E 93hN/32s* 2CSM274343R1801 743439 0,193 2
31,5 ø 8,5
E 90h fuseholders for 8.5 x 31.5 mm fuses
1+N 20 1 E 91hN/20 2CSM200963R1801 009634 0,070 6
1+N 20 1 E 91hN/20s* 2CSM200703R1801 007036 0,071 6
3+N 20 3 E 93hN/20 2CSM200933R1801 009337 0,192 2
3+N 20 3 E 93hN/20s 2CSM289603R1801 896036 0,193 2

EAN kg
E 90 PV fuse disconnectors for 10.3 x 38 mm fuses (DC-20B)
38 ø 10,3 1 32 1 E 91/32 PV 2CSM204713R1801 047131 0,061 6
1 32 1 E 91/32 PVs* 2CSM204693R1801 046936 0,062 6
2 32 2 E 92/32 PV 2CSM204703R1801 047032 0,122 3
2 32 2 E 92/32 PVs* 2CSM256913R1801 569138 0,122 3
Poles Rated Modules Description ABB code Bbn Piece Pack unit
current Type 8012542 weight pcs
EAN kg
E 90 CC fuseholders for Class CC 10.4 x 38.1 mm fuses
38,1 ø 10,4 1 30 1 E 91/30 CC 2CSM299872R1801 998723 0,061 6
1 30 1 E 91/30 CCs* 2CSM299882R1801 998822 0,062 6
1+N 30 2 E 91N/30 CC 2CSM299892R1801 998921 0,13 3
1+N 30 2 E 91N/30 CCs* 2CSM299902R1801 999027 0,131 3
2 30 2 E 92/30 CC 2CSM299912R1801 999126 0,122 3
2 30 2 E 92/30 CCs* 2CSM299922R1801 999225 0,123 3
3 30 3 E 93/30 CC 2CSM299932R1801 999324 0,183 2
3 30 3 E 93/30 CCs* 2CSM299942R1801 999423 0,184 2
3+N 30 4 E 93N/30 CC 2CSM299952R1801 999522 0,252 1
3+N 30 4 E 93N/30 CCs* 2CSM299962R1801 999621 0,253 1
4 30 4 E 94/30 CC 2CSM299972R1801 999720 0,244 1
4 30 4 E 94/30 CCs* 2CSM299982R1801 999829 0,245 1
*s: version with blown fuse indication indicator

Order codes
E 930 series
EAN kg
E 930 fuse disconnectors for 14 x 51 mm fuses (AC-20B)
1 50 1,5 E 931/50 2CSM361610R1801 446804 0,200 6
51 ø 14
1+N 50 3 E 931N/50 2CSM365610R1801 446903 0,400 3
2 50 3 E 932/50 2CSM362610R1801 447009 0,400 3
3 50 4,5 E 933/50 2CSM363610R1801 447108 0,600 1
3+N 50 6 E 933N/50 2CSM367610R1801 447207 0,800 1
EAN kg
E 930 fuse disconnectors for 22 x 58 mm fuses (AC-20B)
1 125 2 E 931/125 2CSM371710R1801 447504 0,200 6
58 ø 22 1+N 125 4 E 931N/125 2CSM375710R1801 447603 0,400 3

2 125 4 E 932/125 2CSM372710R1801 447702 0,400 3
3 125 6 E 933/125 2CSM373710R1801 447801 0,600 1
3+N 125 8 E 933N/125 2CSM377710R1801 447900 0,800 1
EAN kg
Accessories for E 930 series fuseholders
Microswitch for fuse blown signalling
1 50 1,5 E 930/ 2CSM060019R1801 451006 0,030 1

MCR1P50
3 50 4,5 E 930/ 2CSM060029R1801 451105 0,030 1
MCR3P50
1 125 2 E 930/ 2CSM070019R1801 451204 0,030 1
MCR1P125
3 125 6 E 930/ 2CSM070029R1801 451303 0,030 1
MCR3P125

Wiring diagrams
and overall dimensions
E 90 series
E 90 wiring diagrams
1P 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 4P
E 90h wiring diagrams E 90 PV wiring diagrams
1P+N 3P+N 1P 2P
Overall dimensions
1P (E 91hN) 1P+N, 2P 3P, 3P+N (E 93hN) 3P+N, 4P
85
45
17.5 35 52.5 70 64

Wiring diagrams
and overall dimensions
E 930 series
Wiring diagrams
1P 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N
Overall dimensions:
76.5
50 A
1P 1P+N, 2P 3P 3P+N, 4P 50
45
107
60
26.5 53 79.5 106
76.5
125 A
1P 1P+N, 2P 3P 3P+N, 4P 50
45
126.5
60
35 70 105 140

How to choose the protection system
Maximum rated current The maximum rated current values of the fuse that can
be installed in the fuseholder are given in the table below.
value of the fuse These values depend on the rated voltage of the network
and conform to the maximum limits of the power dissipated
by the protection system, formed by the fuse and fuseholder.
ABB fuses and fuseholders allow all the requirements
established by the standards to be met in full safety.
The performance provided by ABB products allows a fuse with
a rated current that exceeds the limit dictated by standard
IEC 60269-2-1 (Art. 5-3-1) to be installed in certain situations.
Fuseholders
Rated Fuse E 90/20 E 90/32 E 930/50 E 930/125
voltage curve 8,5 x 31,5 10,3 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58
mm mm mm mm
400 V c.a. gG 20 A 32 A 50 A 100 A
aM 10 A 32 A 50 A 125 A*
500 V c.a. gG - 25 A 40 A 100 A
aM - 25 A 40 A 100 A
690 V c.a. gG - 10 A 25 A 80 A
aM - - 25 A 80 A
* = to be used in combination with a device which guarantees protection
against overload.
Derating values Depending on the rated current, the number of poles installed
side by side or the temperature and relative humidity, the
for E 90 fuseholders derating parameters in the table must be considered if several
poles are installed side by side or if the equipment is installed
in unusual climatic conditions.
Installation of single poles side by side

E 91/32 E 91hN/32 E930 50/125
Poles Maximum Poles Maximum Poles Maximum
current current current
1…4 In 1…3 In 1…3 In
5…7 0,8 x In 4…9 0,7 x In 4…6 0,95 x In
more more more
0,7 x In 0,6 x In 0,9 x In
than 7 than 10 than 7
Climatic conditions
Maximum temperature 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C
Maximum humidity 95 % 90 % 80 % 50 %
Maximum current In In x 0,95 In x 0,9 In x 0,8

E 9F gG cylindrical fuses
The fastest protection for industrial
automation switchboards
E 9F gG series fuses are the best way to protect against overloads and
short-circuits together with series fuse E 90 and E 930. They feature a fast
tripping curve that is ideal for protecting electronic devices, transformers
and electric cables. The E 9F gG series is available for all the main sizes
(8.5 x 31.5 mm, 10.3 x 38 mm, 14 x 51 mm e 22 x 58 mm) and with a wide
range of rated current values (from 1 A to 125 A and up to 690 V a.c.).
All the E 9F series fuses conform to the RoHS directive and are type-approved
in accordance with the most important international naval marks.
E 9F 8 gG 8.5 x 31.5 mm cylindrical fuses

31,5 ø 8,5 Rated D e s c r i p t i o n ABB code Bbn Piece weight Package
current Type 8012542 kg
In [A] EAN
1 E 9F8 GG1 2CSM257573R1801 575733 0,004 10
2 E 9F8 GG2 2CSM256393R1801 563938 0,004 10
4 E 9F8 GG4 2CSM258663R1801 586630 0,004 10
6 E 9F8 GG6 2CSM257483R1801 574835 0,004 10
8 E 9F8 GG8 2CSM256303R1801 563037 0,004 10
10 E 9F8 GG10 2CSM277573R1801 775737 0,004 10
12 E 9F8 GG12 2CSM277353R1801 773535 0,004 10
16 E 9F8 GG16 2CSM277133R1801 771333 0,004 10
20 E 9F8 GG20 2CSM277503R1801 775034 0,004 10
E 9F 10 gG 10.3 x 38 mm cylindrical fuses

38 ø 10,3 Rated D e s c r i p t i o n ABB code Bbn Piece weight Package
In [A] EAN
0,5 E 9F10 GG05 2CSM277333R1801 773337 0,007 10
1 E 9F10 GG1 2CSM277113R1801 771135 0,007 10
2 E 9F10 GG2 2CSM258723R1801 587231 0,007 10
4 E 9F10 GG4 2CSM257543R1801 575436 0,007 10
6 E 9F10 GG6 2CSM256363R1801 563631 0,007 10
8 E 9F10 GG8 2CSM258633R1801 586333 0,007 10
10 E 9F10 GG10 2CSM257453R1801 574538 0,007 10
12 E 9F10 GG12 2CSM256273R1801 562733 0,007 10
16 E 9F10 GG16 2CSM277543R1801 775430 0,007 10
20 E 9F10 GG20 2CSM277323R1801 773238 0,007 10
25 E 9F10 GG25 2CSM277103R1801 771036 0,007 10
32 E 9F10 GG32 2CSM258713R1801 587132 0,007 10

E 9F 14 gG 14 x 51 mm cylindrical fuses
51 ø 14
Rated D e s c r i p t i o n ABB code Bbn Piece weight Package
In [A] EAN
2 E 9F14 GG2 2CSM277523R1801 775232 0,018 10
4 E 9F14 GG4 2CSM277303R1801 773030 0,018 10
6 E 9F14 GG6 2CSM277083R1801 770831 0,018 10
8 E 9F14 GG8 2CSM291003R1801 910039 0,018 10
10 E 9F14 GG10 2CSM290983R1801 909835 0,018 10
12 E 9F14 GG12 2CSM290963R1801 909637 0,018 10
16 E 9F14 GG16 2CSM258783R1801 587835 0,018 10
20 E 9F14 GG20 2CSM257603R1801 576037 0,018 10
25 E 9F14 GG25 2CSM256423R1801 564232 0,018 10
32 E 9F14 GG32 2CSM258693R1801 586937 0,018 10
40 E 9F14 GG40 2CSM257513R1801 575139 0,018 10
50 E 9F14 GG50 2CSM256333R1801 563334 0,018 10
E 9F 22 gG 22 x 58 mm cylindrical fuses
58 ø 22 In [A] EAN
4 E 9F22 GG4 2CSM257183R1801 571834 0,048 10
6 E 9F22 GG6 2CSM259283R1801 592839 0,048 10
8 E 9F22 GG8 2CSM258103R1801 581031 0,048 10
10 E 9F22 GG10 2CSM256923R1801 569237 0,048 10
12 E 9F22 GG12 2CSM259403R1801 594031 0,048 10
16 E 9F22 GG16 2CSM258223R1801 582236 0,048 10
20 E 9F22 GG20 2CSM257043R1801 570431 0,048 10
25 E 9F22 GG25 2CSM259533R1801 595335 0,048 10
32 E 9F22 GG32 2CSM258353R1801 583530 0,048 10
40 E 9F22 GG40 2CSM257173R1801 571735 0,048 10
50 E 9F22 GG50 2CSM259393R1801 593935 0,048 10
63 E 9F22 GG63 2CSM258213R1801 582137 0,048 10
80 E 9F22 GG80 2CSM257033R1801 570332 0,048 10
100 E 9F22 GG100 2CSM259523R1801 595236 0,048 10
125 E 9F22 GG125 2CSM258343R1801 583431 0,048 10
Technical specifications
Rated voltage [V] 400, 500, 690 AC
Rated current [A] 0,5…125
Breaking capacity [kA] 20, 80, 120
Overall dimensions [mm] 8,5 x 31,5, 10,3 x 38, 14 x 51, 22 x 58
Weight [g] 4, 7, 18, 48
Marks LLOYD, BV
Standards IEC 60269-2; ROHS 2002/98/CE

E 9F 8 gG 8.5 x 31.5 mm cylindrical fuses E 9F 14 gG 14 x 51 mm cylindrical fuses
Type Rated current Rated voltage Breaking Type Rated current Rated voltage Breaking
capacity capacity
[A] [V a.c.] [kA] [A] [V a.c.] [kA]
E 9F8 GG1 1 400 20 E 9F10 GG05 0,5 500 120

E 9F8 GG2 2 400 20 E 9F10 GG1 1 500 120
E 9F8 GG4 4 400 20 E 9F10 GG2 2 500 120
E 9F8 GG6 6 400 20 E 9F10 GG4 4 500 120
E 9F8 GG8 8 400 20 E 9F10 GG6 6 500 120
E 9F8 GG10 10 400 20 E 9F10 GG8 8 500 120
E 9F8 GG12 12 400 20 E 9F10 GG10 10 500 120
E 9F8 GG16 16 400 20 E 9F10 GG12 12 500 120
E 9F8 GG20 20 400 20 E 9F10 GG16 16 500 120
E 9F10 GG20 20 500 120
E 9F10 GG25 25 500 120
E 9F10 GG32 32 400 120
E 9F 10 gG 10.3 x 38 mm cylindrical fuses E 9F 22 gG 22 x 58 mm cylindrical fuses

capacity capacity
[A] [V a.c.] [kA] [A] [V a.c.] [kA]
E 9F14 GG2 2 690 80 E 9F22 GG4 4 690 80

E 9F14 GG4 4 690 80 E 9F22 GG6 6 690 80
E 9F14 GG6 6 690 80 E 9F22 GG8 8 690 80
E 9F14 GG8 8 690 80 E 9F22 GG10 10 690 80
E 9F14 GG10 10 690 80 E 9F22 GG12 12 690 80
E 9F14 GG12 12 690 80 E 9F22 GG16 16 690 80
E 9F14 GG16 16 690 80 E 9F22 GG20 20 690 80
E 9F14 GG20 20 690 80 E 9F22 GG25 25 690 80
E 9F14 GG25 25 690 80 E 9F22 GG32 32 690 80
E 9F14 GG32 32 500 120 E 9F22 GG40 40 690 80
E 9F14 GG40 40 500 120 E 9F22 GG50 50 690 80
E 9F14 GG50 50 400 120 E 9F22 GG63 63 690 80
E 9F22 GG80 80 690 80
E 9F22 GG100 100 500 120
E 9F22 GG125 125 400 120

Power dissipation [W] It is important to make sure that the
In
[A]
Size mm
power dissipated by the fuse does not
8,5 x 31,5 10,3 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58
exceed the limit imposed by the
0,5 0,55 2
1 0,35 2,5 3,4
fuseholder in which it is installed.
2 0,45 0,70 1 1,20
The maximum power dissipation values,
4 0,06 0,80 1,10 1,30 in accordance with the specifications of
6 0,83 0,90 1,20 1,40 the E 90 and E 930 series fuseholders,
8 1 1,10 1,50 1,65 are highlighted in green.
10 1,2 1,35 1,80 2
12 1,3 1,55 2,10 2,40
16 1,7 1,90 2,55 3
20 2 2,30 3 3,40
25 2,4 2,80 3,50 3,80
32 3 3,80 4,30
40 4,40 5,10
50 4,70 5,50
63 6,70
80 8
100 9
125 12,5

Characteristic tI Characteristic I²t
105
104
103
104
102
103
101
t2 S (A2 S)
t [S]
100
102
10-1
101 690 V
Operating I²t
10-2 500 V
400 V
10-3 100 Pre-arcing I²t

100 101 102 103 104 lp [A]
lp [A]
Temperature increase
°C
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
2 4 5 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 2 4 5 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58

Maximum length [m] of the copper conductors
Copper Rated current In (A)
conductor section of gG fuses
(mm²)
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
1,5 99/113 86/87 40/59 21/29 13/16 7/9
2,5 134 110/122 67/84 41/51 25/33 13/20 8/11
4 183 139 108/119 67/84 46/58 24/32 14/17 7,3/10
6 214 165 139 94/113 55/70 33/41 20/27
10 275 226 172 130 90/108 57/70
16 283 217 168 128
25 336 257 197
35 367 283
50 379
Use this table to find the cable length, Just cross the rated current of the fuse (in the columns)
with the section of the conductor (on the lines).
in meters, that is protected by a fuse. The resulting number corresponds to the protected length
of the conductor: for example, a 32 A fuse can protect up
to 214 meters of 6 mm2 section cable. When there are two
values, it means that the maximum length of the cable is
between the two numbers given in the table.

E 9F aM cylindrical fuses
Delayed protection for motor starts
E 9F aM series fuses are the best way to protect against overloads and
short-circuits together with series fuse E 90 and E 930. They feature a delayed
tripping curve and are therefore ideal for protecting industrial motors that
require high inrush current during the starting phase. The E 9F aM series
is available for all the main sizes (8.5 x 31.5 mm, 10.3 x 38 mm, 14 x 51 mm
e 22 x 58 mm) and with a wide range of rated current values (from 1 A to 125 A
and up to 690 V a.c.). All the E 9F series fuses conform to the RoHS directive
and are type-approved in accordance with the most important international
naval marks.
E 9F 8 aM 8.5 x 31.5 mm cylindrical fuses

31,5 ø 8,5 Rated D e s c r i p t i o n ABB code Bbn Piece weight Package
In [A] EAN
1 E 9F8 AM1 2CSM277283R1801 772835 0,004 10
2 E 9F8 AM2 2CSM277063R1801 770633 0,004 10
4 E 9F8 AM4 2CSM258743R1801 587439 0,004 10
6 E 9F8 AM6 2CSM257563R1801 575634 0,004 10
8 E 9F8 AM8 2CSM256383R1801 563839 0,004 10
10 E 9F8 AM10 2CSM258653R1801 586531 0,004 10
E 9F 10 aM 10.3 x 38 mm cylindrical fuses

38 ø 10,3 Rated D e s c r i p t i o n ABB code Bbn Piece weight Package
In [A] EAN
0,5 E 9F10 AM05 2CSM257473R1801 574736 0,007 10
1 E 9F10 AM1 2CSM256293R1801 562931 0,007 10
2 E 9F10 AM2 2CSM277563R1801 775638 0,007 10
4 E 9F10 AM4 2CSM277343R1801 773436 0,007 10
6 E 9F10 AM6 2CSM277123R1801 771234 0,007 10
8 E 9F10 AM8 2CSM258733R1801 587330 0,007 10
10 E 9F10 AM10 2CSM257553R1801 575535 0,007 10
12 E 9F10 AM12 2CSM256373R1801 563730 0,007 10
16 E 9F10 AM16 2CSM258643R1801 586432 0,007 10
20 E 9F10 AM20 2CSM257463R1801 574637 0,007 10
25 E 9F10 AM25 2CSM256283R1801 562832 0,007 10
32 E 9F10 AM32 2CSM277553R1801 775539 0,007 10

E 9F 14 aM 14 x 51 mm cylindrical fuses
51 ø 14 current Type 8012542 kg
In [A] EAN
1 E 9F14 AM1 2CSM257533R1801 575337 0,018 10
2 E 9F14 AM2 2CSM256353R1801 563532 0,018 10
4 E 9F14 AM4 2CSM258623R1801 586234 0,018 10
6 E 9F14 AM6 2CSM257443R1801 574439 0,018 10
8 E 9F14 AM8 2CSM256263R1801 562634 0,018 10
10 E 9F14 AM10 2CSM277533R1801 775331 0,018 10
12 E 9F14 AM12 2CSM277313R1801 773139 0,018 10
16 E 9F14 AM16 2CSM277093R1801 770930 0,018 10
20 E 9F14 AM20 2CSM258703R1801 587033 0,018 10
25 E 9F14 AM25 2CSM257523R1801 575238 0,018 10
32 E 9F14 AM32 2CSM256343R1801 563433 0,018 10
40 E 9F14 AM40 2CSM258613R1801 586135 0,018 10
45 E 9F14 AM45 2CSM257433R1801 574330 0,018 10
50 E 9F14 AM50 2CSM256253R1801 562535 0,018 10
E 9F 22 aM 22 x 58 mm cylindrical fuses
58 ø 22 In [A] EAN
6 E 9F22 AM6 2CSM258603R1801 586036 0,048 10
8 E 9F22 AM8 2CSM257423R1801 574231 0,048 10
10 E 9F22 AM10 2CSM256243R1801 562436 0,048 10
12 E 9F22 AM12 2CSM277513R1801 775133 0,048 10
16 E 9F22 AM16 2CSM277293R1801 772934 0,048 10
20 E 9F22 AM20 2CSM277073R1801 770732 0,048 10
25 E 9F22 AM25 2CSM277493R1801 774938 0,048 10
32 E 9F22 AM32 2CSM277273R1801 772736 0,048 10
40 E 9F22 AM40 2CSM277053R1801 770534 0,048 10
50 E 9F22 AM50 2CSM259413R1801 594130 0,048 10
63 E 9F22 AM63 2CSM258233R1801 582335 0,048 10
80 E 9F22 AM80 2CSM257053R1801 570530 0,048 10
100 E 9F22 AM100 2CSM259543R1801 595434 0,048 10
125 E 9F22 AM125 2CSM258363R1801 583639 0,048 10
Rated voltage [V] 400, 500, 690 AC
Rated current [A] 0,5…125
Breaking capacity [kA] 20, 80, 120
Overall dimensions [mm] 8,5 x 31,5, 10,3 x 38, 14 x 51, 22 x 58
Weight [g] 4, 7, 18, 48
Marks LLOYD, BV

E 9F 8 aM 8.5 x 31.5 mm cylindrical fuses E 9F 10 aM 10.3 x 38 mm cylindrical fuses

capacity capacity
[A] [V a.c.] [kA] [A] [V a.c.] [kA]
E 9F1 AM1 1 400 20 E 9F10 AM05 0,5 500 120

E 9F8 AM2 2 400 20 E 9F10 AM1 1 500 120
E 9F8 AM4 4 400 20 E 9F10 AM2 2 500 120
E 9F8 AM6 6 400 20 E 9F10 AM4 4 500 120
E 9F8 AM8 8 400 20 E 9F10 AM6 6 500 120
E 9F8 AM10 10 400 20 E 9F10 AM8 8 500 120
E 9F10 AM10 10 500 120
E 9F10 AM12 12 500 120
E 9F10 AM16 16 500 120
E 9F10 AM20 20 500 120
E 9F10 AM25 25 400 120
E 9F10 AM32 32 400 120
E 9F 14 aM 14 x 51 mm cylindrical fuses E 9F 22 aM 22 x 58 mm cylindrical fuses

capacity capacity
[A] [V a.c.] [kA] [A] [V a.c.] [kA]
E 9F14 AM1 1 690 80 E 9F22 AM6 6 690 80

E 9F14 AM2 2 690 80 E 9F22 AM8 8 690 80
E 9F14 AM4 4 690 80 E 9F22 AM10 10 690 80
E 9F14 AM6 6 690 80 E 9F22 AM12 12 690 80
E 9F14 AM8 8 690 80 E 9F22 AM16 16 690 80
E 9F14 AM10 10 690 80 E 9F22 AM20 20 690 80
E 9F14 AM12 12 690 80 E 9F22 AM25 25 690 80
E 9F14 AM16 16 690 80 E 9F22 AM32 32 690 80
E 9F14 AM20 20 690 80 E 9F22 AM40 40 690 80
E 9F14 AM25 25 690 80 E 9F22 AM50 50 690 80
E 9F14 AM32 32 500 120 E 9F22 AM63 63 690 80
E 9F14 AM40 40 500 120 E 9F22 AM80 80 690 80
E 9F14 AM50 50 400 120 E 9F22 AM100 100 500 120
E 9F22 AM125 125 400 120

It is important to make sure that the Power dissipation [W]
power dissipated by the fuse does not In

[A]
Size mm
8,5 x 31,5 10,3 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58
exceed the limit imposed by the
0,5 0,50 0,75
fuseholder in which it is installed. The 1 0,09 0,13 0,18 0,20
maximum power dissipation values, in 2 0,15 0,20 0,25 0,30
accordance with the specifications of 4 0,26 0,30 0,40 0,50
the E 90 and E 930 series fuseholders, 6 0,35 0,45 0,55 0,65
are highlighted in green. 8 0,47 0,55 0,65 0,75

10 0,55 0,65 0,75 0,85
12 0,7 0,75 0,85 1
16 0,90 1,20 1,40
20 1,10 1,50 1,70
25 1,40 1,80 2
32 2 2,10 2,60
40 2,60 3,20
45 2,80
50 2,90 3,90
63 4,60
80 5,60
100 6,50
125 9,50

Characteristic tI Characteristic I²t

104
105
103
104
102
101
103
t [S]
t2 S (A2 S)
100
102
10-1
Operating I²t
10-2 101 690 V
500 V
400 V
10-3
100 101 102 103 104
100 Pre-arcing I²t
lp [A] lp [A]
Temperature increase
°C
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
125
10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58

Maximum cable length according to the rated current and section of the conductor
Copper Rated current In (A)
conductor section of aM fuses
(mm²)
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
1,5 55/64 37-45 25/30 15/20
2,5 116 84/94 58/68 40/49 26/32 17/20
4 181 147 118 84/95 58/68 42/48 28/33 18/23
6 273 223 178 139 105/117 79/89 55/64 37/42 26/31 14/20
10 227 181 147 113/125 80/94 57/69 40/47
16 236 189 151 120 83/97
25 231 185 147
35 262 210
Use this table to find the cable length, Just cross the rated current of the fuse (in the columns)
with the section of the conductor (on the lines).
in meters, that is protected by a fuse. The resulting number corresponds to the protected length
of the conductor: for example, a 32 A fuse can protect up
to 214 meters of 6 mm2 section cable. When there are two
values, it means that the maximum length of the cable is
between the two numbers given in the table.

E 9F gPV cylindrical fuses
The best protection for direct current
photovoltaic installations
The E 9F PV series of cylindrical fuses has been specifically designed for
protecting direct current circuits up to 1000 V.
Available in the 10.3 x 38 mm size for up to 30 A rated current values, they are
the best way to protect the strings, inverters and surge arresters in
photovoltaic installations according to IEC 60269-6 "Supplementary
requirements for fuse-links for the protection of solar photovoltaic energy
systems".
E 9F gPV 10.3 x 38 mm cylindrical fuses

38 ø
ø 10,3 Rated Description Type ABB code Bbn Piece Package
current 8012542 weight
In [A] EAN Kg
1 E 9F1 PV 2CSM213456R1801 134565 0,007 10
2 E 9F2 PV 2CSM213466R1801 134664 0,007 10
31,5 ø 8,5
3 E 9F3 PV 2CSM213476R1801 134763 0,007 10
4 E 9F4 PV 2CSM213486R1801 134862 0,007 10
5 E 9F5 PV 2CSM213496R1801 134961 0,007 10
6 E 9F6 PV 2CSM213506R1801 135067 0,007 10
7 E 9F7 PV 2CSM213516R1801 135166 0,007 10
8 E 9F8 PV 2CSM213526R1801 135265 0,007 10
10 E 9F10 PV 2CSM213536R1801 135364 0,007 10
12 E 9F12 PV 2CSM213546R1801 135463 0,007 10
15 E 9F15 PV 2CSM213556R1801 135562 0,007 10
20 E 9F20 PV 2CSM213566R1801 135661 0,007 10
25 E 9F25 PV 2CSM213576R1801 135760 0,007 10
30 E 9F30 PV 2CSM213586R1801 135869 0,007 10
Rated voltage [V] 1000 DC
Rated current [A] 1...30
Breaking capacity [kA] 10
Minimum breaking capability da 1A a 7A = 1.3 x In
da 8A a 30A = 2.0 x In
Dimensions [mm] 10,3 x 38

Weight [g] 7

E 9F gPV 10.3 x 38 mm cylindrical fuses Derating in combination with Ambient Temperature
Type Rated Dissipated Dissipated Dissipated I²t Total 1.4
current power 0.7 power 0.8 power PreArc I²t
[A] In [W] In [W] In [W] [A²s] [A²s]
E 9F1 PV 1 0,12 0,16 0,32 1,2 19
1.2
E 9F2 PV 2 0,15 0,20 0,43 10,4 120
E 9F3 PV 3 0,70 0,90 1,4 3,1 130
E 9F4 PV 4 0,70 0,80 1,3 10,4 220
Derating Coefficient
1.0
E 9F5 PV 5 0,70 0,90 1,4 22 330

E 9F6 PV 6 0,70 0,90 1,5 49 410
E 9F7 PV 7 0,80 1 1,5 65 630 0.8
E 9F8 PV 8 0,80 1 1,1 6,5 105

E 9F10 PV 10 0,90 1,20 1,5 10 127
0.6
E 9F12 PV 12 1 1,3 2 17 215
E 9F15 PV 15 1,20 1,60 3 26 495
E 9F20 PV 20 1,40 1,90 4,4 49 755 0.4
-30 -10 30 50 70
E 9F25 PV 25 1,20 1,70 2,90 132 1650 10
Ambient Temperature [°C]

E 9F30 PV 30 1,50 2,10 3,80 197 1850
The power dissipation of the fuse cannot exceed the maximum power
dissipation accepted by the fuseholder.
Time/current tripping characteristics
1000 1000
700 700
500 1A 500
2A
300 300
3A
200 200
4A
5A
100 100
6A 8A
70 70
10A
50 7A 50 12A
15A
30 30 20A
20 20
25A
10 10 30A
7 7
5 5
t [S]
t [S]
3 3
2 2
1 1
-7 -7
-5 -5
-3 -3
-2 -2
-1 -1
-0,7 -0,7
-0,5 -0,5
-0,3 -0,3
-0,2 -0,2
-0,1 -0,1
0,5
0,7
1
2
3
5
7
10
20
30
50
70
100
200
300
500
700
1000
2000
3000
5000
7000
10000
0,5
0,7
1
2
3
5
7
10
20
30
50
70
100
200
300
500
700
1000
2000
3000
5000
7000
10000
lp [A] lp [A]

Questions & answers
Technical and regulatory details
concerning the E 90 range
IEC 60947-3: switches, disconnectors, This identifies:

switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units a. The nature of current (AC/DC)
b. The type of switching allowed (no load, resistive loads,
This standard establishes the requirements of a device to highly inductive loads, etc.)
ensure its suitability for disconnection and operation. c. The operation frequency
E 90 fuse-switch disconnectors have AC-22B utilization
category up to 400V and utilization category AC-20B up to
Disconnector: 690V. The E 90 PV fuse-switch-disconnectors have DC-20B
A disconnector is a mechanical control device which, when utilization category.
open, meets the prescriptions for the disconnection function
laid down by the international IEC 60947-3 standard. Current Utilization category Typical applications
Opening a disconnector ensures that downstream the circuit nature
A B
is electrically isolated from upstream. This condition is
Alternating AC-20A AC-20B Connecting and disconnetting
necessary if you need to operate on a network component, current under no-load conditions
e.g. during maintenance. Pursuant to the IEC 60364 AC-21A AC-21B Switching of resistive loads
standard, any maintenance operations on the installation are including moderate overloads
prohibited unless circuits have been previously disconnected. AC-22A AC-22B Switching of mixed resistive
and inductive loads, including
moderate overload
Fuse-disconnector: AC-23A AC-23B Switching of motor loads or other
This defines a fuseholder that also performs disconnecting highly inductive loads
functions. Not all fuseholders are also disconnectors: to meet Direct DC-20A DC-20B Connecting and disconnecting
current under no-load conditions
this definition they must meet the requirements and pass the
DC-21A DC-21B Switching of resistive loads
tests provided for in the IEC 60947-3 standard. including moderate overloads
DC-22A DC-22B Switching of mixed resistive and
Fuse-switch-disconnector: inductive loads, including moderate
overloads (e.g. shunt motors)
According to the IEC 60947-3 standard, this definition
concerns a fuse-switch-disconnector that enables switching DC-23A DC-23B Switching of highly inductive loads?
(e.g. series motors)
under load. Not all fuse-disconnectors enable this operation:
to be considered as a fuse-switch-disconnector a device
must have utilization category equal to AC-21B or above. Which loads can be disconnected using a product with
AC-22B utilization category?
Utilization categories: The AC-22B utilization category allows occasional operation
Not all devices intended for disconnection have the same of mixed, resistive and inductive loads with moderate
performance. The type of operation allowed depends on a overloads in alternating current circuits. Mixed loads include:
designation that specifically defines the methods of use, transformers, corrected motors, capacitor batteries, discharge
i.e. the utilization category. lamps, heating, etc.
Which loads can be disconnected using a product with

AC-20B utilization category?
The AC-20B utilization category does not allow operation
under load. Disconnection is possible only by first
disconnecting the load through an appropriate switch.

IEC 60269-1: Fuses with voltage not exceeding 1000 V Are fuseholders marked UR and UL equivalent to each
in alternating current and 1500 V in direct current other?
They are different products and they comply with equally
This standard establishes the requirements of low voltage different requirements. E 90/32 switch disconnectors conform
fuses, and as a result the requirements of fuseholders as to IEC standards and accommodate midget fuses. However,
devices intended to accommodate fuses. since they are recognized by the UL laboratories, by means of
This standard includes two different sections, with different the UR mark, they can be used as components in UL-certified
requirements depending on the type of individual using the machines designed for the American market.
equipment: On the other hand, E 90/30 CC fuseholders are specifically
IEC 60269-2: s upplementary requirements for fuses for use designed and tested in accordance with the American
by skilled persons (mainly for industrial standards. They are able to accommodate Class CC
application). cylindrical fuses, which possess particular limitation
IEC 60269-3: s upplementary requirements for fuses for use characteristics. This means that it is forbidden to use 10.3x38
by unskilled persons (mainly for household and fuses that conform to IEC standards in E 90/30 CC
similar applicationss). fuseholders.
What is the difference between a IEC 60947-3-compliant

fuseholder and a IEC 60947-2-compliant fuseholder?
These are two complementary standards: IEC 60269-2
establishes the characteristics of fuses, and, from these
general requirements for fuseholders are derived. It is the
reference standard for overcurrent protection but not for
disconnection and switching.

Questions & answers
Technical and regulatory details
concerning the E 9F range
Maximum rated current for cylindrical fuses according Can fuses with rated current values higher than the
to IEC 60269-2-1 (Art. 5-3-1). one indicated in the table be used? For example, can a
10.3 x 38 mm 32 A gG fuse be used in a 10.3 x 38 mm
Size of fuse 400 V a.c. 500 V a.c. 690 V a.c. E 90/32 fuseholder?
[mm] gG aM gG aM gG aM Yes, in compliance with the instructions provided by the
In A manufacturer: make sure that the power dissipated at the
8,5 x 31,5 16 10 - -- - - rated voltage value declared by the manufacturer for the size
10,3 x 38 - - 25 16 10 - considered does not exceed the maximum dissipated power
14 x 51 - - 50 40 25 25 limit of the fuseholder. In this specific case, an E 9F10 GG32
22 x 58 - - 100 100 50 50 fuse dissipates 3 W at 400 V rated voltage. Since an E 90/32
series fuseholder for 10.3 x 38 mm fuses achieves 3 W
thermal dissipation, the fuse in question can be used at 400 V
The Standard also allows the use of fuses with rated current rated voltage or less.
values that are higher than the value in the table.
The maximum rated current values envisaged for the Can a 10.3 x 38 mm 32 A gG fuse be used in a
fuseholders are indicated 10.3 x 38 mm E 90/32 fuseholder with a rated voltage
exceeding 400 V?
In the specific case of E 9F10 GG32, use of rated voltage
exceeding 400 V fails to allow the equipment to comply with
the maximum dissipated power limit.
Maximum acceptable values of power dissipation in order

to be used in combination with the fuseholders according
to IEC 60269-2.
Characteristic Size of fuse

curve 8,5 x 31,5 10,3 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58
gG 2,5 W 3W 5W 9,5 W
aM 0,9 W 1,2 W 3W 7W
gPV 3W
The table gives the maximum dissipated power values of the

fuses, considering their size and characteristic curve.
The values shown correspond to the maximum dissipated
power limit for the fuseholders.

Questions & answers
Technical details
concerning the Microswitch
Does the microswitch work with every kind of fuse?

No, Microswitch functionalities are guarantee only using fuses
with striker pin.
Microswitch assembly and didassembly steps

1- assembly 2- disassembly
Microswitch functions enabled thanks to fuses with striker pin

a - Fuse blown : indicates fuse break condition
b - Pre-opening: indicates when the fuseholders cover is open
c - Presence: indicates when the cover is closed but there is no fuse inside
State of the E930/MCR microswitch contact

Closed fuseholders with fuse Open fuseholders without fuse

Contact us
ABB SACE
2CSC444002B0203 - 11/2013
The data and illustrations are not binding. We reserve
the right to modify the contents of this document on the
A division of ABB S.p.A. basis of technical development of the products,
Line Protection Devices without prior notice.
Viale dell’Industria, 18
Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved.
20010 Vittuone (MI) - Italy
Tel.: +39 02 9034 1
Fax: +39 02 9034 7609
www.abb.com
11.
SPARE
12.
SPARE
13.
SPARE
14.
TOUCHVIEW SCREEN
Extract from the online
catalog

VL PPC 6015 FLS
Order No.: 2913031
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.dk/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2913031

IPC with touch screen
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
Commercial data 17-08-2011
Note Made-to-order
EAN 4046356651158
Pack 1 pcs.
Customs tariff 84714100
Gross weight in pieces 6800.00 g Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
Product key 11N online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
country of origin TW
to the user documentation at http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com.
The General Terms and Conditions
of Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
Display data
Display 38.1 cm/15" TFT active
Resolution 1024 x 768 Pixel (XGA)
Backlighting CCFL
Display backlight MTBF 50000 h
Touch screen Resistive industrial touch screen
Computer data
Processor Atom™ 1.6 GHz N270
Phoenix Contact A/S Page 1 / 3

http://www.phoenixcontact.dk Nov 23, 2012
VL PPC 6015 FLS Order No.: 2913031
Main memory 1 GB DDR SODIMM

Processor fan Without fan
Data memory 2.5" SSD, min. 16 GB (SATA)
Graphics card On-board graphics chip (AGP)
Interfaces COM 1 (RS-232), 1x VGA, 4x USB, 2x CompactFlash
®
Network 2x Ethernet (10/100/1000 Mbps), RJ45

Operating systems Windows XP SP3 (English, German, Multi-language)
Realtime clock Yes (battery-backed)
Service life of battery 5 years (typical)
Slots without
Power supply unit 24 V DC ±20%
General data
External dimension, width 410 mm
External dimension, height 309 mm
External dimension, depth 96 mm
Installation dimension, width 386.6 mm
Installation dimension, height 285.6 mm
Mounting type Panel PC for mounting in the front panel
Ambient Conditions
Degree of protection IP65 (front), IP20 (back)
Ambient temperature (operation) 0 °C ... 55 °C (Configuration options can affect the operating
temperature. See user manual for details)
Permissible humidity (operation) 5 % ... 95 % (no condensation)
Permissible humidity (storage/transport) 5 % ... 95 % (no condensation)
Vibration (operation) DIN EN 60068-2-6
Shock 15g, 11 ms in accordance with IEC 60068-2-27
Certificates
Certification
Certifications applied for:
Certification Ex:

VL PPC 6015 FLS Order No.: 2913031
Address
Phoenix Contact A/S

Hammerholmen 48
2650 Hvidovre,Denmark
Phone +45 36 77 44 11
Fax +45 36 77 40 22
http://www.phoenixcontact.dk
Phoenix Contact A/S

Technical modifications reserved;

15.
PLC
Data sheet 6ES7155-6AA00-0BN0
SIMATIC ET 200SP, PROFINET INTERFACE MODULE IM155-6PN
STANDARD, MAX. 32 PERIPHERY MODULES, INCL.
SERVERMODUL, INCL. BUSADAPTER BA 2X RJ45
General information
Product type designation IM 155-6 PN ST with BA 2xRJ45 and server module
Firmware version V3.3
Product function
● I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
● STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of V13 SP1
version
● STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 and higher
● PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 / -
Configuration control
via dataset Yes
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Mains buffering
6ES7155-6AA00-0BN0 Changes preserved

● Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 5 ms
Input current
Current consumption, max. 450 mA
Inrush current, max. 3.7 A
I²t 0.09 A²·s
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.9 W
Address area
Address space per module
● Address space per module, max. 256 byte; per input / output
Address space per station
● Address space per station, max. 512 byte; Dependent on configuration
Hardware configuration
Rack
● Modules per rack, max. 32; + 16 ET 200AL modules
Submodules
● Number of submodules per station, max. 256
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch)
1. Interface
Interface types
● Number of ports 2
● integrated switch Yes
● RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; Pre-assembled BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
● Bus adapter (PROFINET) Yes; Applicable BusAdapters: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x FC
Functionality
● PROFINET IO Device Yes
● Open IE communication Yes
● Media redundancy Yes; PROFINET MRP
Interface types
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
● 10 Mbps Yes; for Ethernet services
● 100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex (100BASE-TX)
● Transmission procedure PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex (100BASE-TX)
● Autonegotiation Yes
● Autocrossing Yes
Protocols
PROFINET IO Device
Services

— Isochronous mode No
— Open IE communication Yes
— IRT Yes; with send cycles of between 250 µs and 4 ms in increments
of 125 µs
— MRP Yes
— MRPD No
— PROFINET system redundancy No
— PROFIenergy Yes
— Prioritized startup Yes
— Shared device Yes
— Number of IO Controllers with shared 2
device, max.
Open IE communication
● TCP/IP Yes
● SNMP Yes
● LLDP Yes
Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchronized up No
to terminal)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Status indicator Yes
Alarms Yes
Diagnostic functions Yes
Diagnostics indication LED
● RUN LED Yes; Green LED
● ERROR LED Yes; Red LED
● MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED
● Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR-LED) Yes; Green LED
● Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes; 2x green link LEDs on BusAdapter
Potential separation
between backplane bus and electronics No
between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes
between supply and all other circuits Yes
Permissible potential difference

between different circuits 75 V DC/60 V AC (base isolation)
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC between supply voltage and electronics; 1 500 V AC
between Ethernet and electronics
Standards, approvals, certificates

Network loading class 2

Security level According to Security Level 1 Test Cases V1.1.1
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
● horizontal installation, min. 0 °C
● horizontal installation, max. 60 °C
● vertical installation, min. 0 °C
● vertical installation, max. 50 °C
Connection method
ET-Connection
● via BU/BA Send Yes; + 16 ET 200AL modules
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 191 g; IM155PN ST with BA 2x RJ45 (mounted)

Data sheet 6ES7315-2EH14-0AB0
SIMATIC S7-300 CPU 315-2 PN/DP, CENTRAL PROCESSING
UNIT WITH 384 KBYTE WORKING MEMORY, 1. INTERFACE
MPI/DP 12MBIT/S, 2. INTERFACE ETHERNET PROFINET, WITH 2
PORT SWITCH, MICRO MEMORY CARD NECESSARY
General information
Hardware product version 01
Engineering with
● Programming package STEP7 V 5.5 or higher
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC)
● 24 V DC Yes
external protection for power supply lines 2 A min.
(recommendation)
Mains buffering
● Repeat rate, min. 1 s
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 750 mA
Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 150 mA
6ES7315-2EH14-0AB0 Changes preserved

Inrush current, typ. 4 A
I²t 1 A²·s
Power loss
Memory
Work memory
● integrated 384 kbyte
● expandable No
● Size of retentive memory for retentive data 128 kbyte
blocks
Load memory
● Plug-in (MMC) Yes
● Plug-in (MMC), max. 8 Mbyte
● Data management on MMC (after last 10 y
programming), min.
Backup
● present Yes; Guaranteed by MMC (maintenance-free)
● without battery Yes; Program and data
CPU processing times

for bit operations, typ. 0.05 µs
for word operations, typ. 0.09 µs
for fixed point arithmetic, typ. 0.12 µs
for floating point arithmetic, typ. 0.45 µs
CPU-blocks
Number of blocks (total) 1 024; (DBs, FCs, FBs); the maximum number of loadable blocks
can be reduced by the MMC used.
DB
● Number, max. 1 024; Number range: 1 to 16000
● Size, max. 64 kbyte
FB
FC
OB
● Number of free cycle OBs 1; OB 1
● Number of time alarm OBs 1; OB 10
● Number of delay alarm OBs 2; OB 20, 21
● Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 4; OB 32, 33, 34, 35

● Number of process alarm OBs 1; OB 40
● Number of DPV1 alarm OBs 3; OB 55, 56, 57
● Number of isochronous mode OBs 1; OB 61
● Number of startup OBs 1; OB 100
● Number of asynchronous error OBs 6; OB 80, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87 (OB83 only for PROFINET IO)
● Number of synchronous error OBs 2; OB 121, 122
Nesting depth
● per priority class 16
● additional within an error OB 4
Counters, timers and their retentivity

S7 counter
● Number 256
Retentivity
— adjustable Yes
— lower limit 0
— upper limit 255
— preset Z 0 to Z 7
Counting range
— can be set Yes
— lower limit 0
— upper limit 999
IEC counter
● present Yes
● Type SFB
● Number Unlimited (limited only by RAM capacity)
S7 times
● Number 256
Retentivity
— adjustable Yes
— lower limit 0
— upper limit 255
— preset No retentivity
Time range
— lower limit 10 ms
— upper limit 9 990 s
IEC timer
● present Yes
● Type SFB
Data areas and their retentivity

retentive data area in total All, 128 KB max.

Flag
● Number, max. 2 048 byte
● Retentivity available Yes; MB 0 to MB 2047
● Retentivity preset MB 0 to MB 15
● Number of clock memories 8; 1 memory byte
Data blocks
● Retentivity adjustable Yes; via non-retain property on DB
● Retentivity preset Yes
Local data
● per priority class, max. 32 768 byte; Max. 2048 bytes per block
Address area
I/O address area
● Inputs 2 048 byte
● Outputs 2 048 byte
of which distributed
— Inputs 2 048 byte
— Outputs 2 048 byte
Process image
● Inputs, adjustable 2 048 byte
● Outputs, adjustable 2 048 byte
● Inputs, default 128 byte
● Outputs, default 128 byte
Subprocess images
● Number of subprocess images, max. 1; With PROFINET IO, the length of the user data is limited to
1600 bytes
Digital channels
● Inputs 16 384
— of which central 1 024
● Outputs 16 384
Analog channels
● Inputs 1 024
— of which central 256
● Outputs 1 024
Number of expansion units, max. 3

Number of DP masters
● integrated 1
● via CP 4
Number of operable FMs and CPs (recommended)
● FM 8
● CP, point-to-point 8
● CP, LAN 10
Rack
● Racks, max. 4
● Modules per rack, max. 8
Time of day
Clock
● Hardware clock (real-time clock) Yes
● retentive and synchronizable Yes
● Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature
● Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s
● Behavior of the clock following POWER-ON Clock continues running after POWER OFF
● Behavior of the clock following expiry of backup Clock continues to run with the time at which the power failure
period occurred
Operating hours counter
● Number 1
● Number/Number range 0
● Range of values 0 to 2^31 hours (when using SFC 101)
● Granularity 1 hour
● retentive Yes; Must be restarted at each restart
Clock synchronization
● supported Yes
● to MPI, master Yes
● to MPI, slave Yes
● to DP, master Yes; With DP slave only slave clock
● to DP, slave Yes
● in AS, master Yes
● in AS, slave Yes
● on Ethernet via NTP Yes; As client
Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 0
Digital outputs
Number of digital outputs 0
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 0

Analog outputs
Number of analog outputs 0
Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) RJ45
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Combined MPI / PROFIBUS DP
Number of RS 422 interfaces 0
1. Interface
Interface type Integrated RS 485 interface
Physics RS 485
Isolated Yes
Power supply to interface (15 to 30 V DC), max. 200 mA
Functionality
● MPI Yes
● PROFIBUS DP master Yes
● PROFIBUS DP slave Yes
● Point-to-point connection No
MPI
● Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s
Services
— PG/OP communication Yes
— Routing Yes
— Global data communication Yes
— S7 basic communication Yes
— S7 communication Yes
— S7 communication, as client No; but via CP and loadable FB
— S7 communication, as server Yes
DP master
● Number of DP slaves, max. 124
Services
— Routing Yes
— Global data communication No
— S7 basic communication Yes; I blocks only
— S7 communication, as client No
— Equidistance mode support Yes
— Isochronous mode Yes; OB 61; isochronous mode can only be used alternatively on
PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO
— SYNC/FREEZE Yes

— Activation/deactivation of DP slaves Yes
— Number of DP slaves that can be 8
simultaneously activated/deactivated, max.
— Direct data exchange (slave-to-slave Yes; As subscriber
communication)
— DPV1 Yes
Address area
— Inputs, max. 2 kbyte
— Outputs, max. 2 kbyte
User data per DP slave
— Inputs, max. 244 byte
— Outputs, max. 244 byte
DP slave
● automatic baud rate search Yes; only with passive interface
● Address area, max. 32
● User data per address area, max. 32 byte
Services
— Routing Yes; Only with active interface
— S7 basic communication No
— S7 communication, as server Yes; Connection configured on one side only
— Direct data exchange (slave-to-slave Yes
communication)
— DPV1 No
Transfer memory
— Inputs 244 byte
— Outputs 244 byte
2. Interface
Interface type PROFINET
Physics Ethernet RJ45
Isolated Yes
automatic detection of transmission rate Yes; 10/100 Mbit/s
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Change of IP address at runtime, supported Yes
Interface types

Media redundancy
● supported Yes
● Switchover time on line break, typ. 200 ms; PROFINET MRP
● Number of stations in the ring, max. 50
Functionality
● MPI No
● PROFINET IO Controller Yes; Also simultaneously with IO-Device functionality
● PROFINET IO Device Yes; Also simultaneously with IO Controller functionality
● PROFINET CBA Yes
● PROFIBUS DP master No
● PROFIBUS DP slave No
● Open IE communication Yes; Via TCP/IP, ISO on TCP, and UDP
● Web server Yes
— Number of HTTP clients 5
PROFINET IO Controller
Services
— Routing Yes
— S7 communication Yes; With loadable FBs, max. configurable connections: 14, max.
number of instances: 32
— Open IE communication Yes; Via TCP/IP, ISO on TCP, and UDP
— IRT Yes
— Number of IO devices with prioritized 32
startup, max.
— Number of connectable IO Devices, max. 128
— Of which IO devices with IRT, max. 64
— of which in line, max. 64
— Number of IO Devices with IRT and the 128
option "high flexibility"
— Number of connectable IO Devices for RT, 128
max.
— Activation/deactivation of IO Devices Yes
— Number of IO Devices that can be 8
— IO Devices changing during operation Yes
(partner ports), supported

— Number of IO Devices per tool, max. 8
— Device replacement without swap medium Yes
— Send cycles 250 μs, 500 μs,1 ms; 2 ms, 4 ms (not in the case of IRT with "high
flexibility" option)
— Updating time 250 µs to 512 ms (depending on the operating mode, see Manual
"S7-300 CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical Data" for more
details)
Address area
— User data consistency, max. 1 024 byte
PROFINET IO Device
Services
— Routing Yes
— S7 communication Yes; With loadable FBs, max. configurable connections: 14, max.
— IRT Yes
— PROFIenergy Yes; With SFB 73 / 74 prepared for loadable PROFIenergy
standard FB for I-Device
device, max.
Transfer memory
— Inputs, max. 1 440 byte; Per IO Controller with shared device
— Outputs, max. 1 440 byte; Per IO Controller with shared device
Submodules
— Number, max. 64
— User data per submodule, max. 1 024 byte
PROFINET CBA
● acyclic transmission Yes
● cyclic transmission Yes
● Number of connections, max. 8
● Local port numbers used at the system end 0, 20, 21, 23, 25, 80, 102, 135, 161, 443, 8080, 34962, 34963,
34964, 65532, 65533, 65534, 65535
● Keep-alive function, supported Yes
Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchronized up Yes; Via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET interface
to terminal)

Communication functions
PG/OP communication Yes
Data record routing Yes
Global data communication
● supported Yes
● Number of GD loops, max. 8
● Number of GD packets, max. 8
● Number of GD packets, transmitter, max. 8
● Number of GD packets, receiver, max. 8
● Size of GD packets, max. 22 byte
● Size of GD packet (of which consistent), max. 22 byte
S7 basic communication
● supported Yes
● User data per job, max. 76 byte
● User data per job (of which consistent), max. 76 byte; 76 bytes (with X_SEND or X_RCV); 64 bytes (with
X_PUT or X_GET as server)
S7 communication
● supported Yes
● as server Yes
● as client Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FB or via
CP and loadable FB
● User data per job, max. See online help of STEP 7 (shared parameters of the SFBs/FBs
and of the SFCs/FCs of S7 Communication)
S5 compatible communication
● supported Yes; via CP and loadable FC
● TCP/IP Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs
— Number of connections, max. 8
— Data length for connection type 01H, max. 1 460 byte
— several passive connections per port, Yes
supported
● ISO-on-TCP (RFC1006) Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs
— Data length, max. 32 768 byte
● UDP Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs
Web server
● supported Yes
● Number of HTTP clients 5
● User-defined websites Yes

PROFINET CBA (at set setpoint communication load)
● Setpoint for the CPU communication load 50 %
● Number of remote interconnection partners 32
● Number of functions, master/slave 30
● Total of all master/slave connections 1 000
● Data length of all incoming connections 4 000 byte
master/slave, max.
● Data length of all outgoing connections 4 000 byte
master/slave, max.
● Number of device-internal and PROFIBUS 500
interconnections
● Data length of device-internal und PROFIBUS 4 000 byte
interconnections, max.
● Data length per connection, max. 1 400 byte
Remote interconnections with acyclic transmission
— Sampling frequency: Sampling time, min. 500 ms
— Number of incoming interconnections 100
— Number of outgoing interconnections 100
— Data length of all incoming 2 000 byte
— Data length of all outgoing 2 000 byte
— Data length per connection, max. 1 400 byte
Remote interconnections with cyclic transmission
— Transmission frequency: Transmission 10 ms
interval, min.
— Data length per connection, max. 450 byte
HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic)
— Number of stations that can log on for HMI 3; 2x PN OPC/1x iMap
variables (PN OPC/iMap)
— HMI variable updating 500 ms
— Number of HMI variables 200
— Data length of all HMI variables, max. 2 000 byte
PROFIBUS proxy functionality
— supported Yes
— Number of linked PROFIBUS devices 16
— Data length per connection, max. 240 byte; Slave-dependent

Number of connections
● overall 16
● usable for PG communication 15
— reserved for PG communication 1
— adjustable for PG communication, min. 1
— adjustable for PG communication, max. 15
● usable for OP communication 15
— reserved for OP communication 1
— adjustable for OP communication, min. 1
— adjustable for OP communication, max. 15
● usable for S7 basic communication 14
— reserved for S7 basic communication 0
— adjustable for S7 basic communication, 0
min.
max.
● usable for S7 communication 14
— reserved for S7 communication 0
— adjustable for S7 communication, min. 0
— adjustable for S7 communication, max. 14
● total number of instances, max. 32
● usable for routing X1 as MPI: max. 10; X1 as DP master: max. 24; X1 as DP slave
(active): max. 14; X2 as PROFINET: 24 max.
S7 message functions
Number of login stations for message functions, max. 16; Depending on the configured connections for PG/OP and S7
basic communication
Process diagnostic messages Yes
simultaneously active Alarm-S blocks, max. 300
Test commissioning functions

Status block Yes; Up to 2 simultaneously
Single step Yes
Number of breakpoints 4
Status/control
● Status/control variable Yes
● Variables Inputs, outputs, memory bits, DB, times, counters
● Number of variables, max. 30
— of which status variables, max. 30
— of which control variables, max. 14
Forcing
● Forcing Yes
● Forcing, variables Inputs, outputs

Diagnostic buffer
● present Yes
● Number of entries, max. 500
— can be set No
— of which powerfail-proof 100; Only the last 100 entries are retained
● Number of entries readable in RUN, max. 499
— can be set Yes; From 10 to 499
— preset 10
Service data
● can be read out Yes
Ambient conditions
● min. 0 °C
● max. 60 °C
Configuration
Configuration software
● STEP 7 Yes; V5.5 or higher
Programming
● Command set see instruction list
● Nesting levels 8
● System functions (SFC) see instruction list
● System function blocks (SFB) see instruction list
Programming language
— LAD Yes
— FBD Yes
— STL Yes
— SCL Yes
— CFC Yes
— GRAPH Yes
— HiGraph® Yes
Know-how protection
● User program protection/password protection Yes
● Block encryption Yes; With S7 block Privacy
Dimensions
Width 40 mm
Height 125 mm
Depth 130 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 340 g


Data sheet 6ES7317-2EK14-0AB0
SIMATIC S7-300 CPU 317-2 PN/DP, CENTRAL PROCESSING
UNIT WITH 1 MB WORKING MEMORY, 1. INTERFACE MPI/DP
12MBIT/S, 2. INTERFACE ETHERNET PROFINET, WITH 2 PORT
SWITCH, MICRO MEMORY CARD NECESSARY
General information
Hardware product version 01
Engineering with
● Programming package STEP 7 V5.5 or higher
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC)
● 24 V DC Yes
external protection for power supply lines 2 A min.
(recommendation)
Mains buffering
● Repeat rate, min. 1 s
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 750 mA
Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 150 mA
6ES7317-2EK14-0AB0 Changes preserved

Inrush current, typ. 4 A
I²t 1 A²·s
Power loss
Memory
Work memory
● integrated 1 024 kbyte
● expandable No
● Size of retentive memory for retentive data 256 kbyte
blocks
Load memory
● Plug-in (MMC) Yes
● Plug-in (MMC), max. 8 Mbyte
● Data management on MMC (after last 10 y
programming), min.
Backup
● present Yes; Guaranteed by MMC (maintenance-free)
● without battery Yes; Program and data
CPU processing times

for bit operations, typ. 0.025 µs
for word operations, typ. 0.03 µs
for fixed point arithmetic, typ. 0.04 µs
for floating point arithmetic, typ. 0.16 µs
CPU-blocks
Number of blocks (total) 2 048; (DBs, FCs, FBs); the maximum number of loadable blocks
can be reduced by the MMC used.
DB
FB
FC
OB
● Number of free cycle OBs 1; OB 1
● Number of time alarm OBs 1; OB 10
● Number of delay alarm OBs 2; OB 20, 21
● Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 4; OB 32, 33, 34, 35

● Number of process alarm OBs 1; OB 40
● Number of DPV1 alarm OBs 3; OB 55, 56, 57
● Number of isochronous mode OBs 1; OB 61 - isochronous mode is possible either on DP or
PROFINET IO (not simultaneously)
● Number of startup OBs 1; OB 100
● Number of asynchronous error OBs 6; OB 80, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87 (OB83 only for PROFINET IO)
● Number of synchronous error OBs 2; OB 121, 122
Nesting depth
● per priority class 16
● additional within an error OB 4
Counters, timers and their retentivity

S7 counter
● Number 512
Retentivity
— adjustable Yes
— lower limit 0
— upper limit 511
— preset Z 0 to Z 7
Counting range
— can be set Yes
— lower limit 0
— upper limit 999
IEC counter
● present Yes
● Type SFB
S7 times
● Number 512
Retentivity
— adjustable Yes
— lower limit 0
— upper limit 511
— preset No retentivity
Time range
— lower limit 10 ms
— upper limit 9 990 s
IEC timer
● present Yes
● Type SFB
Data areas and their retentivity

retentive data area in total All, max. 256 KB
Flag
● Number, max. 4 096 byte
● Retentivity available Yes; From MB 0 to MB 4095
● Retentivity preset MB 0 to MB 15
● Number of clock memories 8; 1 memory byte
Data blocks
● Retentivity adjustable Yes; via non-retain property on DB
● Retentivity preset Yes
Local data
● per priority class, max. 32 768 byte; Max. 2048 bytes per block
Address area
I/O address area
of which distributed
— Inputs 8 192 byte
— Outputs 8 192 byte
Process image
● Inputs, adjustable 8 192 byte
● Outputs, adjustable 8 192 byte
● Inputs, default 256 byte
● Outputs, default 256 byte
Subprocess images
● Number of subprocess images, max. 1; With PROFINET IO, the length of the user data is limited to
1600 bytes
Digital channels
● Inputs 65 536
● Outputs 65 536
Analog channels
● Inputs 4 096
● Outputs 4 096

Number of expansion units, max. 3
Number of DP masters
● integrated 1
● via CP 4
Number of operable FMs and CPs (recommended)
● FM 8
● CP, LAN 10
Rack
● Racks, max. 4
● Modules per rack, max. 8
Time of day
Clock
● retentive and synchronizable Yes
● Backup time 6 wk; At 40 °C ambient temperature
● Deviation per day, max. 10 s; Typ.: 2 s
● Behavior of the clock following POWER-ON Clock continues running after POWER OFF
● Behavior of the clock following expiry of backup Clock continues to run with the time at which the power failure
period occurred
Operating hours counter
● Number 4
● Number/Number range 0 to 3
● Range of values 0 to 2^31 hours (when using SFC 101)
● Granularity 1 hour
● retentive Yes; Must be restarted at each restart
Clock synchronization
● supported Yes
● to MPI, master Yes
● to MPI, slave Yes
● to DP, master Yes; With DP slave only slave clock
● to DP, slave Yes
● in AS, master Yes
● in AS, slave Yes
● on Ethernet via NTP Yes; As client
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 0
Analog outputs

Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) RJ45
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; Combined MPI / PROFIBUS DP
Number of RS 422 interfaces 0
1. Interface
Interface type Integrated RS 485 interface
Physics RS 485
Isolated Yes
Power supply to interface (15 to 30 V DC), max. 200 mA
Functionality
● MPI Yes
● PROFIBUS DP master Yes
● PROFIBUS DP slave Yes
● Point-to-point connection No
MPI
Services
— Routing Yes
— Global data communication Yes
— S7 basic communication Yes
— S7 communication, as client No; but via CP and loadable FB
DP master
● Number of DP slaves, max. 124
Services
— Routing Yes
— S7 basic communication Yes; I blocks only
— Equidistance mode support Yes
— SYNC/FREEZE Yes
— Activation/deactivation of DP slaves Yes

— Number of DP slaves that can be 8
— Direct data exchange (slave-to-slave Yes; As subscriber
communication)
— DPV1 Yes
Address area
User data per DP slave
— Inputs, max. 244 byte
— Outputs, max. 244 byte
DP slave
● automatic baud rate search Yes; only with passive interface
● Address area, max. 32
● User data per address area, max. 32 byte
Services
— Routing Yes; Only with active interface
— S7 basic communication No
— S7 communication, as server Yes; Connection configured on one side only
— Direct data exchange (slave-to-slave Yes
communication)
— DPV1 No
Transfer memory
— Inputs 244 byte
— Outputs 244 byte
2. Interface
Interface type PROFINET
Physics Ethernet RJ45
Isolated Yes
automatic detection of transmission rate Yes; 10/100 Mbit/s
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Change of IP address at runtime, supported Yes
Interface types
Media redundancy

● supported Yes
● Switchover time on line break, typ. 200 ms; PROFINET MRP
● Number of stations in the ring, max. 50
Functionality
● MPI No
● PROFINET IO Controller Yes; Also simultaneously with IO-Device functionality
● PROFINET IO Device Yes; Also simultaneously with IO Controller functionality
● PROFINET CBA Yes
● PROFIBUS DP master No
● PROFIBUS DP slave No
● Open IE communication Yes; Via TCP/IP, ISO on TCP, and UDP
● Web server Yes
— Number of HTTP clients 5
PROFINET IO Controller
Services
— Routing Yes
— S7 communication Yes; with loadable FBs, max. configurable connections: 16, max.
— IRT Yes
— Number of IO devices with prioritized 32
startup, max.
— Number of connectable IO Devices, max. 128
— Of which IO devices with IRT, max. 64
— Number of IO Devices with IRT and the 128
option "high flexibility"
— Number of connectable IO Devices for RT, 128
max.
— Activation/deactivation of IO Devices Yes
— Number of IO Devices that can be 8
— IO Devices changing during operation Yes
(partner ports), supported
— Number of IO Devices per tool, max. 8

— Device replacement without swap medium Yes
— Send cycles 250 μs, 500 μs,1 ms; 2 ms, 4 ms (not in the case of IRT with "high
flexibility" option)
— Updating time 250 µs to 512 ms (depending on the operating mode, see Manual
"S7-300 CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical Data" for more
details)
Address area
— User data consistency, max. 1 024 byte
PROFINET IO Device
Services
— Routing Yes
— S7 communication Yes; with loadable FBs, max. configurable connections: 16, max.
— IRT Yes
— PROFIenergy Yes; With SFB 73 / 74 prepared for loadable PROFIenergy
standard FB for I-Device
device, max.
Transfer memory
— Inputs, max. 1 440 byte; Per IO Controller with shared device
— Outputs, max. 1 440 byte; Per IO Controller with shared device
Submodules
— Number, max. 64
— User data per submodule, max. 1 024 byte
PROFINET CBA
● acyclic transmission Yes
● cyclic transmission Yes
● Number of connections, max. 16
● Local port numbers used at the system end 0, 20, 21, 23, 25, 80, 102, 135, 161, 443, 8080, 34962, 34963,
34964, 65532, 65533, 65534, 65535
● Keep-alive function, supported Yes
Isochronous mode
Isochronous operation (application synchronized up Yes; Via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET interface
to terminal)
Communication functions

PG/OP communication Yes
Data record routing Yes
Global data communication
● supported Yes
● Number of GD loops, max. 8
● Number of GD packets, max. 8
● Number of GD packets, transmitter, max. 8
● Number of GD packets, receiver, max. 8
● Size of GD packets, max. 22 byte
● Size of GD packet (of which consistent), max. 22 byte
S7 basic communication
● supported Yes
● User data per job, max. 76 byte
● User data per job (of which consistent), max. 76 byte; 76 bytes (with X_SEND or X_RCV); 64 bytes (with
X_PUT or X_GET as server)
S7 communication
● supported Yes
● as server Yes
● as client Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FB or via
CP and loadable FB
● User data per job, max. See online help of STEP 7 (shared parameters of the SFBs/FBs
and of the SFCs/FCs of S7 Communication)
S5 compatible communication
● supported Yes; via CP and loadable FC
● TCP/IP Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs
— several passive connections per port, Yes
supported
● ISO-on-TCP (RFC1006) Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs
● UDP Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs
Web server
● supported Yes
● Number of HTTP clients 5
● User-defined websites Yes
PROFINET CBA (at set setpoint communication load)

● Setpoint for the CPU communication load 50 %
● Number of remote interconnection partners 32
● Number of functions, master/slave 30
● Total of all master/slave connections 1 000
● Data length of all incoming connections 4 000 byte
master/slave, max.
● Data length of all outgoing connections 4 000 byte
master/slave, max.
● Number of device-internal and PROFIBUS 500
interconnections
● Data length of device-internal und PROFIBUS 4 000 byte
● Data length per connection, max. 1 400 byte
Remote interconnections with acyclic transmission
— Sampling frequency: Sampling time, min. 500 ms
— Data length per connection, max. 1 400 byte
Remote interconnections with cyclic transmission
— Transmission frequency: Transmission 10 ms
interval, min.
— Data length per connection, max. 450 byte
HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic)
— Number of stations that can log on for HMI 3; 2x PN OPC/1x iMap
variables (PN OPC/iMap)
— HMI variable updating 500 ms
— Number of HMI variables 200
— Data length of all HMI variables, max. 2 000 byte
PROFIBUS proxy functionality
— supported Yes
— Number of linked PROFIBUS devices 16
— Data length per connection, max. 240 byte; Slave-dependent
Number of connections

● overall 32
● usable for PG communication 31
— reserved for PG communication 1
— adjustable for PG communication, min. 1
— adjustable for PG communication, max. 31
● usable for OP communication 31
— reserved for OP communication 1
— adjustable for OP communication, min. 1
— adjustable for OP communication, max. 31
● usable for S7 basic communication 30
— reserved for S7 basic communication 0
min.
max.
● usable for S7 communication 16
— reserved for S7 communication 0
— adjustable for S7 communication, min. 0
— adjustable for S7 communication, max. 16
● total number of instances, max. 32
● usable for routing X1 as MPI: max. 10; X1 as DP master: max. 24; X1 as DP slave
(active): max. 14; X2 as PROFINET: 24 max.
S7 message functions
Number of login stations for message functions, max. 32; Depending on the configured connections for PG/OP and S7
basic communication
Process diagnostic messages Yes
simultaneously active Alarm-S blocks, max. 300
Test commissioning functions

Status block Yes; Up to 2 simultaneously
Single step Yes
Number of breakpoints 4
Status/control
● Status/control variable Yes
● Variables Inputs, outputs, memory bits, DB, times, counters
— of which status variables, max. 30
— of which control variables, max. 14
Forcing
● Forcing Yes
● Forcing, variables Inputs, outputs
Diagnostic buffer

● present Yes
● Number of entries, max. 500
— can be set No
— of which powerfail-proof 100; Only the last 100 entries are retained
● Number of entries readable in RUN, max. 499
— can be set Yes; From 10 to 499
— preset 10
Service data
● can be read out Yes
Ambient conditions
● min. 0 °C
● max. 60 °C
Configuration
Configuration software
● STEP 7 Yes; V5.5 or higher
Programming
● Command set see instruction list
● Nesting levels 8
● System functions (SFC) see instruction list
● System function blocks (SFB) see instruction list
Programming language
— LAD Yes
— FBD Yes
— STL Yes
— SCL Yes
— CFC Yes
— GRAPH Yes
— HiGraph® Yes
Know-how protection
● User program protection/password protection Yes
● Block encryption Yes; With S7 block Privacy
Dimensions
Width 40 mm
Height 125 mm
Depth 130 mm
Weights

Data sheet 6ES7390-1AB60-0AA0
SIMATIC S7-300, RAIL L=160MM
Accessories
belongs to product S7-300
Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 122 mm
Weights
6ES7390-1AB60-0AA0 Changes preserved

Data sheet 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0
SIMATIC S7, SHIELD CONNECTING ELEMENT 80MM WIDE,
WITH 2 ROWS FOR 4 SHIELDED TERMINALS EACH
Accessories
belongs to product SIMATIC S7
Weights
6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0 Changes preserved

Data sheet 6ES7953-8LL31-0AA0
SIMATIC S7, MICRO MEMORY CARD P. S7-300/C7/ET 200, 3.3 V
NFLASH, 2 MBYTES
Memory
Type of memory Flash-EPROM
Memory size 2 Mbyte
Number of write/delete operations, min. 100 000
Data retention (after final programming action), min. 10 y
Accessories
belongs to product S7-300 / ET200
Dimensions
Width 24 mm
Height 32 mm
Depth 1.4 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 2 g
6ES7953-8LL31-0AA0 Changes preserved

Data sheet 6ES7972-0BB12-0XA0
Product type designation PROFIBUS bus connector, RS485, screw, with PG socket, 90°
Product description PROFIBUS bus connector, RS485, srew, with PG socket, 90°
SIMATIC DP, BUS CONNECTOR FOR PROFIBUS UP TO 12
MBIT/S 90 DEGREE ANGLE CABLE OUTLET, 15,8 X 64 X 35,6 MM
(WXHXD), TERMINAT. RESIST. WITH ISOLAT. FUNCTION, WITH
PG SOCKET
Suitability for use For connecting PROFIBUS nodes to the PROFIBUS bus cable
Transmission rate
Transfer rate / with PROFIBUS DP 9.6 kbit/s ... 12 Mbit/s
Interfaces
Number of electrical connections
● for PROFIBUS cables 2
● for network components or terminal equipment 1
Type of electrical connection
● for PROFIBUS cables Screw
● for network components or terminal equipment Sub-D connector (9-pin)
Type of electrical connection / FastConnect No
Mechanical data
Design of terminating resistor Integrated resistor combination that can be selected with slide
switch
Material / of the enclosure plastic
Locking mechanism design Screw
6ES7972-0BB12-0XA0 Changes preserved

Design, dimensions and weight
Type of cable outlet 90° cable outlet
Width 15.8 mm
Height 64 mm
Depth 35.6 mm
Net weight 10 g
Permitted ambient conditions

Ambient temperature
● during operation -25 ... +60 °C
● during storage -40 ... +70 °C
● during transport -40 ... +70 °C
Protection class IP IP20
Product properties, functions, components / general

Product feature
● silicon-free Yes
Product component
● PG connection socket Yes
● strain relief Yes
Standards, specifications, approvals

Certificate of suitability
● RoHS conformity Yes
● UL approval Yes
6ES7972-0BB12-0XA0 Changes preserved

5/24/2016 Product Details Industry Mall Siemens WW
24.05.2016 5:25:08 AM
6XV18303GH10
SIMATIC NET, PROFIBUS FESTOON CABLE GP FOR FESTOONED CABLING, 2WIRE, SHIELDED, MAX. ACCELERATION: 4 M/QS, MIN. 5 MIO BENDING CYCLES, SOLD BY THE METER, MAX.
CONSIGNMENT: 1000 M, MIN. ORDERING QUANTITY: 20 M
List Price Show prices
Customer Price Show prices
DataSheet in PDF Download
Service & Support (Manuals, Certificates, FAQs...) Download
Product
Article Number (Market Facing Number) 6XV18303GH10
Product Description SIMATIC NET, PROFIBUS FESTOON CABLE GP FOR FESTOONED CABLING, 2WIRE, SHIELDED, MAX.
ACCELERATION: 4 M/QS, MIN. 5 MIO BENDING CYCLES, SOLD BY THE METER, MAX. CONSIGNMENT: 1000 M, MIN.
ORDERING QUANTITY: 20 M
Product family PROFIBUS bus cables
Product Lifecycle (PLM) PM300:Active Product
Price data
Price Group
List Price Show prices
Customer Price Show prices
Surcharge for Raw Materials None
Metal Factor None
Delivery information
Export Control Regulations AL : N / ECCN : N
Delivery Time 1 Day/Days
Net Weight (kg) 0,056 Kg
Product Dimensions (W x L x H) Not available
Packaging Dimension 0,10 x 0,10 x 0,10
Package size unit of measure CM
Quantity Unit 1 Meter
Packaging Quantity 1
Additional Product Information
EAN 4019169400732
UPC 662643227963
Commodity Code 85444920
LKZ_FDB/ CatalogID IK
Product Group 2451
Compliance with the substance restrictions according to RoHS directive Since: 01.12.2005
Product class C: products manufactured / produced to order, which cannot be reused or reutilised or be returned against credit.
Obligation Category for taking back electrical and electronic equipment after use No obligation to take back electrical and electronic equipment after use
Classifications
Version Classification
eClass 5.1 27061801
eClass 6 27061801
eClass 7.1 27061801
eClass 8 27061801
eClass 9 27061801
ETIM 4 EC000830
ETIM 5 EC000830
UNSPSC 14 26121609
UNSPSC 15 26121609
https://mall.industry.siemens.com/mall/en/WW/Catalog/Product/6XV18303GH10 1/1
Data sheet 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
SIMATIC ET 200SP, DIGITAL INPUT MODULE, DI 16X 24VDC
STANDARD, FITS TO BU-TYPE A0, COLOR CODE CC00,
MODULE DIAGNOSIS
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, DI 16x24VDC ST, VPE 1
● FW update possible Yes
usable BaseUnits BU type A0
Color code for module-specific color identification CC00
plate
Product function
Engineering with
● STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of V13 SP1
version
● STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 / -
● PCS 7 configurable/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1
● PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD Revision 5
● PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3
Operating mode
● DI Yes
● Counter No
6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 Changes preserved

● Oversampling No
● MSI No
Supply voltage
Input current
Encoder supply
Short-circuit protection No
24 V encoder supply
● 24 V No
● Short-circuit protection No
Power loss
Address area
● Address space per module, max. 2 byte; + 2 bytes for QI information
Automatic encoding
● Mechanical coding element Yes
Selection of BaseUnit for connection variants
● 1-wire connection BU type A0
● 2-wire connection BU type A0 + external terminals
Digital inputs
m/p-reading p-reading
Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC Yes
61131, type 1
Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC No
61131, type 2
Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC Yes
61131, type 3
Pulse extension No
Input voltage
● Type of input voltage DC
● Rated value (DC) 24 V

● for signal "0" -30 to +5V
● for signal "1" +11 to +30V
Input current
● for signal "1", typ. 2.5 mA
Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
for standard inputs
— parameterizable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms (in each case +
delay of 30 to 500 µs, depending on line length)
— at "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms
— at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms
— at "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms
— at "1" to "0", max. 20 ms
for interrupt inputs
— parameterizable No
for counter/technological functions
— parameterizable No
Cable length
● shielded, max. 1 000 m
● unshielded, max. 600 m
Encoder
Connectable encoders
● 2-wire sensor Yes
— permissible quiescent current (2-wire 1.5 mA
sensor), max.
Isochronous mode
to terminal)
Diagnostics Yes
Alarms
● Diagnostic alarm Yes
Diagnostic messages
● Diagnostic information readable Yes
● Monitoring the supply voltage Yes
— parameterizable Yes
● Monitoring of encoder power supply No
● Wire-break Yes; Module-wise
● Short-circuit No
● Group error Yes
● Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR-LED) Yes; green PWR LED

● Channel status display Yes; Green LED
● for channel diagnostics No
● for module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED
Potential separation channels
● between the channels No
● between the channels and backplane bus Yes
● between the channels and the power supply of No
the electronics

Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights

Data sheet 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
SIMATIC ET 200SP, DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE, DQ
16X24VDC/0.5A STANDARD, FITS TO BU-TYPE A0, COLOR
CODE CC00, MODULE DIAGNOSIS
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST, VPE 1
usable BaseUnits BU type A0
plate
Product function
Engineering with
● STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of V11 SP2 / V13
version
● STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / -
Operating mode
● DQ Yes
● DQ with energy-saving function No

● PWM No
● Oversampling No
● MSO No
Supply voltage
Input current
Current consumption, max. 60 mA; without load
Output voltage
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1 W
Address area
● Address space per module, max. 2 byte
Digital outputs
Current-sinking No
Current-sourcing Yes
Short-circuit protection Yes
● Response threshold, typ. 0.7 to 1.3 A
Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-50 V)
Controlling a digital input Yes
Switching capacity of the outputs
● with resistive load, max. 0.5 A
● on lamp load, max. 5 W
Load resistance range
● lower limit 48 Ω
● upper limit 12 kΩ
Output current
● for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A
● for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA
Output delay with resistive load
● "0" to "1", typ. 50 µs
● "1" to "0", typ. 100 µs
Parallel switching of two outputs
● for uprating No
● for redundant control of a load Yes

Switching frequency
● with resistive load, max. 100 Hz
● with inductive load, max. 2 Hz
● on lamp load, max. 10 Hz
Total current of the outputs
● Current per channel, max. 0.5 A
● Current per module, max. 8 A
Total current of the outputs (per module)
horizontal installation
— up to 30 °C, max. 8 A
— up to 40 °C, max. 8 A
— up to 50 °C, max. 6 A
— up to 60 °C, max. 4 A
vertical installation
— up to 30 °C, max. 8 A
— up to 40 °C, max. 6 A
— up to 50 °C, max. 4 A
— up to 60 °C, max. 4 A
Cable length
● unshielded, max. 600 m
Isochronous mode
to terminal)
Diagnostics Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
Diagnostic messages
● Wire-break Yes; Module-wise
● Short-circuit Yes; Module-wise
● Group error Yes


Isolation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights

Data sheet 6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1
SIMATIC ET 200SP, ANALOG INPUT MODULE, AI 4XI 2-/4-WIRE
STANDARD, FITS TO BU-TYPE A0, A1, COLOR CODE CC03,
MODULE DIAGNOSIS, 16BIT, +/-0,3%
General information
usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1
plate
Product function
● Scalable measuring range No
Engineering with
version
Operating mode
● Oversampling No
● MSI No
6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1 Changes preserved

CiR - Configuration in RUN
Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes
Calibration possible in RUN No
Supply voltage
Input current
Current consumption, max. 37 mA; without sensor supply
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
● 24 V Yes
● Short-circuit protection Yes
● Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration < 10 s
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.85 W; Without encoder supply voltage
Address area
● Address space per module, max. 8 byte; + 1 byte for QI information
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 4; Differential inputs
permissible input current for current input (destruction 50 mA
limit), max.
Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times and additional processing
times (depending on the parameterization of the active channels)
Input ranges (rated values), currents
● 0 to 20 mA Yes
● Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 100 Ω; + approx. 0.7 V diode forward voltage in 2-wire operation
● -20 mA to +20 mA Yes
● Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 100 Ω
● 4 mA to 20 mA Yes
● Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 100 Ω; + approx. 0.7 V diode forward voltage in 2-wire operation
Cable length
Analog value generation for the inputs

Measurement principle integrating (Sigma-Delta)
Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel
● Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), 16 bit
max.

● Integration time, parameterizable Yes
● Interference voltage suppression for 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz
interference frequency f1 in Hz
● Conversion time (per channel) 180 / 60 / 50 ms
Smoothing of measured values
● Number of levels 4; None; 4/8/16 times
● parameterizable Yes
Encoder
Connection of signal encoders
● for voltage measurement No
● for current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes
— Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. 650 Ω
● for current measurement as 4-wire transducer Yes
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (relative to full-scale), (+/-) 0.01 %
Temperature error (relative to full-scale), (+/-) 0.005 %/K
Crosstalk between the inputs, min. 50 dB; Applies to up to + /-5 V overvoltage in other channels
Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 °C (relative to 0.05 %
full-scale), (+/-)
Operational error limit in overall temperature range
● Current, relative to full-scale, (+/-) 0.5 %
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
● Current, relative to full-scale, (+/-) 0.3 %
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/- 1 %), f1 = interference frequency
● Series mode interference (peak value of 70 dB
interference < rated value of input range), min.
● Common mode voltage, max. 10 V
● Common mode interference, min. 90 dB
Isochronous mode
to terminal)
Diagnostics Yes
Alarms
● Limit value alarm No
Diagnostic messages
● Wire-break Yes; at 4 to 20 mA
● Short-circuit Yes; 2-wire mode: Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or
of an input to the encoder supply

● Group error Yes
● Overflow/underflow Yes
● Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR-LED) Yes; Green LED
● for module diagnostics Yes; Green/red LED
● between the channels Yes; channel group-specific between 2-wire current input group
and 4-wire voltage input group
● between the channels and the power supply of Yes; only for 4-wire transducer
the electronics

between the inputs (UCM) 10 V DC
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights

Data sheet 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1
SIMATIC ET 200SP, ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE, AQ 4XU/I
STANDARD, FITS TO BU-TYPE A0, A1, COLOR CODE CC00,
MODULE DIAGNOSIS, 16BIT, +/-0,3%
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, AQ 4xU/I Standard
usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1
plate
Product function
● Scalable output range No
Engineering with
version
Operating mode
● Oversampling No
● MSO No
6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1 Changes preserved

CiR - Configuration in RUN
Reparameterization possible in RUN Yes
Calibration possible in RUN No
Supply voltage
Input current
Power loss
Address area
● Address space per module, max. 8 byte; + 1 byte for QI information
Analog outputs
Voltage output, short-circuit current, max. 45 mA
Cycle time (all channels), min. 5 ms
Analog output with oversampling No
Output ranges, voltage
● 0 to 10 V Yes; 15 bit
● 1 V to 5 V Yes; 13 bit
● -5 V to +5 V Yes; 15 bit incl. sign
● -10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign
Output ranges, current
● 0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit
● -20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bit incl. sign
● 4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 14 bit
Connection of actuators
● for voltage output two-wire connection Yes
● for voltage output four-wire connection Yes
● for current output two-wire connection Yes
Load impedance (in rated range of output)
● with voltage outputs, min. 2 kΩ
● with voltage outputs, capacitive load, max. 1 µF
● with current outputs, max. 500 Ω
● with current outputs, inductive load, max. 1 mH
Destruction limits against externally applied voltages and currents
● Voltages at the outputs 30 V

Cable length
● shielded, max. 1 000 m; 200 m for voltage output
Analog value generation for the outputs

Settling time
● for resistive load 0.1 ms
● for capacitive load 1 ms
● for inductive load 0.5 ms
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (relative to output range), (+/-) 0.03 %
Temperature error (relative to output range), (+/-) 0.005 %/K
Crosstalk between the outputs, min. -50 dB
Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 °C (relative to 0.05 %
output range), (+/-)
Operational error limit in overall temperature range
● Voltage, relative to output range, (+/-) 0.5 %
● Current, relative to output range, (+/-) 0.5 %
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
● Voltage, relative to output range, (+/-) 0.3 %
● Current, relative to output range, (+/-) 0.3 %
Isochronous mode
to terminal)
Diagnostics function Yes
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
Diagnostic messages
● Wire-break Yes
● Short-circuit Yes
● Group error Yes
● Overflow/underflow Yes

● between the channels and the power supply of Yes
the electronics

Isolation
Ambient conditions
● horizontal installation, min. 0 °C
● horizontal installation, max. 60 °C; Observe derating
● vertical installation, min. 0 °C
● vertical installation, max. 50 °C; Observe derating
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights

Data sheet 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0
SIMATIC ET 200SP, BASEUNIT BU15-P16+A0+2B, BU-TYPE A0,
PUSH-IN TERMINALS, W/O AUX-TERMINALS, BRIDGED TO LEFT
BU WXH: 15MMX117MM
General information
Product type designation BU Type A0, BU15-P16+A0+2B, VPE 1
Supply voltage
external protection for power supply lines Yes; 24 V DC/10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C
tripping characteristic
Current carrying capacity

up to 60 °C, max. 10 A
between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 117 mm
6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0 Changes preserved

Depth 35 mm
Weights
6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0 Changes preserved

Data sheet 6ES7193-6BP00-0DA0
SIMATIC ET 200SP, BASEUNIT BU15-P16+A0+2D, BU-TYPE A0,
PUSH-IN TERMINALS, W/O AUX-TERMINALS, NEW
LOADGROUP, WXH: 15MMX117MM
General information
Product type designation BU Type A0, BU15-P16+A0+2D, VPE 1
Supply voltage
external protection for power supply lines Yes; 24 V DC/10 A miniature circuit breaker with type B or C
tripping characteristic
Current carrying capacity

up to 60 °C, max. 10 A
between backplane bus and supply voltage Yes
between the potential groups Yes
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 35 mm
6ES7193-6BP00-0DA0 Changes preserved

Weights
6ES7193-6BP00-0DA0 Changes preserved

16.
PARAMETER LIST FOR CONVERTERS

17.
CABIN
Abb. 1: Schnappbefestigung auf 35 mm-Tragschiene Abb. 2: Bereichseinengung Abb. 3: Anschlußschema
nach EN 50 022 Fig. 2: Range restriction Fig. 3: Connection diagram
Fig. 1: Clip-on fastening on 35 mm support rail to Fig. 2: Réduction de la plage de température Fig. 3: Schéma de connexion
EN 50 022 Afb. 2: Instelling van het bereik Afb. 3: Aansluitschema
Fig. 1: Fixation par encliquetage sur rail porteur de Bild 2: Anslutningssättet Bild 3: Anslutningsschema
35 mm selon EN 50 022 Fig. 2: Limitazione di campo della temperatura Fig. 3: Schema di allacciamento
Afb. 1: Snapbevestiging op 35 mm montagerail Fig. 2: Ajuste del campo de temperatura Fig. 3: Esquema de conexión
Schaltschrank-
volgens EN 50 022
temperaturregler
Bild 1: Snäppfastsättning på 35 mm profilskena Einstellbereich Regler
enligt EN 50 022
Fig. 1: Fissaggio a scatto su guida a 35 mm secondo °F °C
48V (L2*)
Enclosurethermostat
EN 50 022 60V 24V (L1*) 250V 115V
Régulatuer de température Fig. 1: Clips de sujeción sobre guía soporte N N U P L N N
60
pour armoires électriques de 35 mm según EN 50 022
131
Schakelkasttem- 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
peratuurregelaar
113
Apparatskåps-
40
temperaturregulator
95
Termostato per armadi per
quadri di comando 30
77
Termostato para armariosde
SK 3110.000 distribución 20
59
10
41 5
Montageanleitung 1 2 3 4 5 6
Assembly instructions Bereichseinengung im Einstellknopf
Notice de montage
Montage-instruktie
Montageanvisning
Istruzioni di montaggio
Instrucciones de montaje
Enclosures
Power Distribution
Climate Control
IT Infrastructure
Software & Services
U 468 931 012 946-2
5. Aufl. 12.2012 / Id-Nr. 232 588
RITTAL GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach 1662 · D-35726 Herborn
Phone +49(0)2772 505-0 · Fax +49(0)2772 505-2319
E-mail: info@rittal.de · www.rittal.com
Montage Montage Montage Montaje
Deutsch Schnappbefestigung auf 35- Français Fixation par encliquetage sur Svenska Snäppfastsättning av Español Sujeción con clips a la guía
mm-Tragschiene nach EN rail porteur de 35 mm selon 35 mm plintskena enligt EN soporte de 35 mm según EN
Dieses Gerät darf nur von 50 022 siehe Abb. 1, sowohl Seul le personnel qualifié est EN 50 022, Denna enheft får endast 50 022 se bild 1. La instalación de este apara- 50 022 ver
ausgebildetem Fachpersonal waagerecht, als auch senk- autorisé à installer l’appareil voir fig. 1. installeras av utbildat to debe realizzarla exclusiva- fig. 1.
gemäß dem Schaltbild Abb. recht durch Versetzen der conformément au schéma personal enligt bild 3. mente personal espezializa-
3 installiert werden. Klemmfeder. de connexion, fig. 3. Les Hänsyn skall tagas till Inbyggnadsanvisning do según el diagrama de cir-
Dabei sind die bestehenden directives de sécurité en Remarque gällande säkerhetsföreskrif- Montaget bör ske i horison- cuito de la figura 3. Durante Indicaciones
Sicherheitsvorschriften zu Hinweise vigueur doivent absolument Le montage se fera de préfé- ter. Med denna tellt läge. Placeringen av ter- la instalación deben tenerse Es preferible realizar el mon-
beachten. Dieser Schalt- Die Montage ist in hori- être respectées. Le régula- rence en position horizontale. apparatskåpstermostat mostaten bör vara i den övre en cuenta las normas de taje en posición horizontal. El
schrank-Temperaturregler zontaler Lage vorzunehmen. teur de témperature permet Installer le régulateur de tem- regleras temperaturen inne i delen i skåpet och så långt seguridad. Este termostato emplazamiento del termosta-
dient zur Regelung der Die Plazierung des d’assurer le réglage de la pérature dans la partie supé- ett stängt skåp. Skåpet är från värmeelement och vär- para armarios de distribución to debería ser en la parte
Schaltschrank-Innen- Temperaturreglers sollte nach température intérieure de rieure de l’armoire électrique tänkt att stå i normal industri- mekällor som möjligt. För att permite la regulación de la superior del armario a la
temperatur in einem ge- Möglichkeit diagonal im obe- l’armoire électrique lorsque en l’écartant le plus possible miljö. Termostaten är HF- garantera kopplingsdifferen- temperatura interior de un máxima distancia posible de
schlossenen Schaltschrank ren Schaltschrankbereich mit celle-ci est fermée et instalée des resistances chauffantes avstörd enligt tysk industri- sen på 1 K skall den termiska armario cerrado instalado en resistencias calefactoras y
mit üblicher Umgebung. größtmöglichem Abstand zu en environnement usuel. pour armoires électriques et norm VDE 0875 resp. EN återkopplingen anslutas. condiciones ambientales fuentes de evacuación de
Dieses Gerät ist gemäß VDE Schaltschrank-Heizungen L’appareil est antiparasité de toutes les sources de dis- 55 014 och arbetar enligt Anslutningssättet kan ses på normales. El aparato se calor. Para garantizar una
0875 bzw. EN 55 014 fun- und Verlustwärmequellen conformément aux normes sipation de chaleur. Pour skala 1C. bild 2. encuentra libre de histéresis de conexión de 1 K
kentstört und arbeitet nach gewählt werden. Um eine VDE 0875 ou garantir l’hystérésis d’enclen- interferncias según debe conectarse la realimen-
der Wirkungsweise 1C. Schalthysterese von 1 K zu EN 55 014 et travaille selon chement de 1 K, il est néces- Tekniskt uttförande Garanti VDE 0875 o EN 55 014 tación térmica.
garantieren ist es erforderlich, processus 1C. saire de brancher le retour Utförande: Vi garanterar 1 års garanti vid y trabaja según el proceso El ajuste del campo de tem-
die eingebaute thermische thermique intégré à l’appa- Bimetall som temperaturkän- fackmannamässigt använ- 1C. peratura puede realizarse
Technische Ausführung Rückführung anzuschließen. Fabrication technique reil. Pour réduire la plage de nande organ med termiskt dande från leveransdatum. según fig. 2.
Ausführung: Die Bereichseinengung kann Fabrication: température, se conformer återgång. Inom denna tid kommer Descripción técnica
Bimetallregler als temperatur- entsprechend Abb. 2 vorge- L’organe sensible à la cha- aux indications de la aggregatet att repareras eller Descripción:
empfindliches Organ mit nommen werden. Bei fle- leur est un régulateur bilame fig. 2. Kontaktbestyckning: bytas ut kostnadsfritt. Regulador con sensor térmi- Garantía
thermischer Rückführung. xiblen Anschlussleitungen avec retour thermique. 1-polig växlandekontakt. co por bimetal conrealimen- Sobre esta unidad
(Litzen) sind Aderendhülsen Garantie Tillåten kontaktbestyckning: tación térmica. otorgamos 1 año de garantía
Kontaktbestückung: zu verwenden. Elément de contact: Nous assurons sur l’appareil Uppvärmning U: Componentes del contacto: contado a partir del día de
1poliger Umschaltkontakt Zulässige relative Raum- Contact unipolaire (inver- utilisé correctement une 5 – 3 ~ 10 (4*) A, 1 contacto conmutado. suministro, siempre que su
(Wechsler) als Sprung- feuchte: max. 95 %, nicht seur) comme élément de garantie de .—
. . 30 W Datos del contacto utilización se efectúe de
schaltglied kondensierend. rupture brusque. 1 an à compter du jour de la Kylning P: admitidos: forma correcta. Dentro de
Zulässige Kontaktdaten: Données admissibles pour le livraison. Durant cette pério- 5 – 4 ~ 5 (4*) A, Poder de ruptura contacto este período la unidad
Heizbetrieb U: Garantie contact: de, un appareil renvoyé à .—
. . 30 W calefación U: suministrada será reparado o
Klemme 5 – 3 Auf dieses Gerät gewähren Chauffage U: nos ateliers sera réparé ou Klämma: Terminales sustituida en fábrica gratuita-
~10 (4*) A, wir 1 Jahr Garantie bei 5 – 3 ~ 10 (4*) A, échangé gratuitement. Tråddiameter AWG 20…14 5 – 3 ~ 10 (4*) A, mente.
.—
. . max. 30 W fachgerechter Anwendung .—. . 30 W (Cu, fast, fåtrådig) (2,5 mm2) .—
. . 30 W
Kühlbetrieb P: vom Tage der Lieferung an. Refroidissement P: Åtdragningsmoment 0,5 Poder de ruptura contacto
Klemme 5 – 4 Innerhalb dieses Zeitraumes 5 – 4 ~ 5 (4*) A, Nm condensación P:
~ 5 (4*) A, wird das eingeschickte Gerät .—. . 30 W Koppelingsdifferens: Terminales
.—
. . max. 30 W im Werk kostenlos repariert Serrer: Ca. 1 K 5 – 4 ~ 5 (4*) A,
Klemme: oder ausgetauscht. Diamètre du fil AWG *induktiv last .—
. . 30 W
Drahtdurchmesser 20…14 Terminal:
AWG 20…14 (Cu, solide, échoué) Diámetro del alambre AWG
(Cu, ein-/mehrdrähtig) (2,5 mm2) 20…14 (Cu, rígidas, semirí-
(max 2,5mm2) Couple de serrage 0,5 Nm gidas) (2,5 mm2)
Anzugsdrehmoment Différence d’enclenchement: Par de apriete 0,5 Nm
.—
. . 0,5 Nm env. 1 K Histéresis:
Schaltdifferenz: ca.1K *Charge inductive aprox. 1 K
*induktive Last *carga inductiva
Mounting Montage Montaggio

English Clip-on fastening on Nederlands Snapbevestiging op Italiano Fissaggio a scatto sulla
35 mm support rail to 35 mm dinrail volgens guida portante a 35 mm sec.
This component must be EN 50022, see fig. 1. Het apparaat mag alleen dor EN 50 022, zie afb. 1. Questo apparecchio può EN 50 022 vedi fig. 1.
installed by fully trained per- vakkundige personen over- essere installato solo da per-
sonnel only, in accordance Notes eenkomstig afb. 3 geïnstal- sonale specializzato in base
with wiring diagram fig. 3. Mounting should preferably leerd worden. Daarbij dienen Aanwijzing allo schema di montaggio fig. Informazioni
Relevant safety regulations be executed in the horizontal de bestaande veiligheids- De montage bijvoorkeur in 3, rispettando le norme di Si consiglia un’installazione
must be observed. These position. Wherever possible, voorschriften in acht te wor- horizontale positie. Qua sicurezza relative allo stesso. orizzontale. Il termostato
enclosure thermostats are the thermostat should be den genomen. Deze scha- plaats zou indien mogelijk de Questo termostato viene dovrebbe essere installato
used to control the tempera- placed in the upper part of kelkasttermostatenzijn voor keuze moeten vallen op het impiegato per la regolazione possibilmente nella parte
ture inside a closed enclo- the enclosure with maximum het regelen van de schakel- bovenste gedeelte van de della temperatura all’interno superiore dell’armadio; con-
sure set up in normal work- separation from the enclo- kasttemperatuur in een kast. Zo ver mogelijk verwij- di armadio chiuso, in condi- siderando una notevole
ing areas. This unit is RFI- sure heaters and sources of gesloten schakelkast in een derd van schakelkastverwar- zioni ambientali normali. distanza sia da riscaldatori
screened in accordance with heath losses. In order to normale omgeving. mingen en andere bronnen Questa apparecchiatura è anticondensa o da fonti di
VDE 0875 and/or EN 55 ensure a swtching overlap, it Dit apparaat is ontstoord in met een grote warmte-afstr- schermata secondo norme dissipazione di calore. Per
014. It is working according is necessary to connect the overeenstemming met VDE aling. Om de schakelhystere- VDE 0875 oppure EN 55 garantire unciclo di isteresi
to procedure 1C. installed thermal feedback. 0875 resp. sis van 1 K te garanderen is 014 e funziona in base al pari a 1K è necessario colle-
Range restriction can be EN 55 014 en functioneert het noodzakelijk die inge- procedimento 1C. gare la resistenza di retroa-
Technical details made in accordance with fig. volgens procedure 1C. bouwde thermische terug- zione termica.
Construction: 2. koppeling aan te sluiten. De Per la limitazione di campo
Bimetallic controller as a Technische uitvoering instelling van het bereik kan Esecuzione tecnica della temperatura fare riferi-
temperature sensitive Guarantee Uitvoering: overeenkomstig afb. 2 wor- Esecuzione: mente alla fig. 2.
element with termal feed- This unit is guaranteed for 1 Bimetaalregelaar als tempe- den gerealiseerd. Termostato ad elemento
back. year, subject to correct ratuurgevoelig orgaan met bimetallico sensibile con
usage from the date of deliv- thermische terugkoppeling. retroazione termica. Garanzia
Contacts: ery. Within that period, the Garantie Contatto di commutazione a Per questo apparecchio con-
Single-pole changer as a returned unit will be repaired Kontaktuitvoering: Op dit apparaat garanderen scatto, unipolare. cediamo un anno di garanzia
quick-break switch. in the factory or replaced free 1-polig wisselkontakt met wij 1 jaar garantie bij vakkun- con decorrenza dal giorno
Permissible contact data: of charge. schakelmoment. dig gebruik vanaf de dag van Carico ammesso al contatto: della fornitura, per un impie-
For heating U: Toelaatbare kontaktbelas- levering. Binnen dit tijdsbe- Caldo morsetti U: go appropriato e nelle condi-
5 – 3 ~ 10 (4*) A, ting: stek wordt het retourgezon- 5 – 3 ~10 (4*) A, zioni previste. In caso di gua-
.—
. . 30 W Verwarmen U: den apparaat kostenloos .—. . 30 W sti entro tale periodo di
for cooling P: 5 – 3 ~ 10 (4*) A, gereppareerd of uitge- Freddo morsetti P: tempo l’apparecchio potrà
5 – 4 ~ 5 (4*) A, .—. . 30 W wisseld. 5 – 4 ~5 (4*) A, essere inviato in fabbrica,
.—
. . 30 W Koelen P: .—. . 30 W dove si eseguirà una ripara-
Clamp: 5 – 4 ~ 5 (4*) A, Morsetti: zione o una sostituzione gra-
Wire diameter AWG .—. . 30 W Diametro del filo AWG tuita.
20…14 (Cu, solid, multi- Klem: 20…14 (Cu, solido, flessibi-
stranded) (max 2.5 mm2) Draaddiameter AWG le) (2,5 mm2)
Tightening torque 0.5 Nm 20…14 (Cu, solide, Coppia di serraggio 0,5 Nm
Operational differential: gestrande) (2,5 mm2) Differenza allo scatto:
Approx. 1 K Aanhaalmoment 0,5 Nm Ca. 1K
*inductive load Schakelhysteresis: *carico induttivo
Ca. 1 K
*Induktieve belasting
FiHterHÛfter
FaJaJdfiHter uJit
VeJtiHateur Ã fiHtre
VeJtiHatKr
FiHterfHÇGt
VeJtiHatKrefiHtrK
VeJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK
3237xxx 3241xxx
3238xxx 3243xxx
3239xxx 3244xxx
3240xxx 3245xxx
*KJtage IJstaHHatiKJs uJd BedieJuJgsaJHeituJg

AsseIbHy aJd KperatiJg iJstructiKJs
+Ktice d’eIpHKi d’iJstaHHatiKJ et de IKJtage
*KJtage eJ bedieJiJgshaJdHeidiJg
*KJtage Kch haJteriJgsaJvisJiJg
IstruViKJi di IKJtaggiK e fuJViKJaIeJtK
IJstrucciKJes de IKJtaFe y fuJciKJaIieJtK
取扱説明書
CKJteJts
E+
1 +Ktes KJ dKcuIeJtatiKJ 4 5 CarryiJg Kut the eHectricaH
11 ,ther appHicabHe dKcuIeJts 4 cKJJectiKJ 9
12 ReteJtiKJ Kf dKcuIeJts 4 51 CKJJectiJg the pKwer suppHy 9
13 SyIbKHs used 4 52 RKtatiJg the vKHtage
cKJJectiKJ 9
2 Safety JKtes 5 53 ChaJgiJg the directiKJ Kf
airfHKw 10
3 Device descriptiKJ 5
31 FuJctiKJaH descriptiKJ 5 6 CKIIissiKJiJg 10
3.1.1 Main components . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.2 Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7 IJstaHHiJg aJd chaJgiJg
3.1.3 Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 6 the fiHter 10
3.1.4 Filter mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
32 PrKper use 6 8 IJspectiKJ aJd
33 ScKpe Kf suppHy 6
IaiJteJaJce 11
4 AsseIbHy aJd cKJJectiKJ 7
9 StKrage aJd dispKsaH 11
41 ChKKsiJg the iJstaHHatiKJ
site 7
42 AsseIbHy iJstructiKJs 7 10 TechJicaH specificatiKJs 12
4.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2.2 Layout of the components 11 CutKutdriHHiJg diIeJsiKJs 16
in the enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
43 FittiJg the faJaJdfiHter uJit 12 E*C faJKutHet fiHter 17
Kr KutHet fiHter 7
4.3.1 Cutting out the enclosure . . . . . 7 13 CKJJectiKJ diagraIs 18
4.3.2 Fitting the fan-and-filter unit . . . 8
44 +Ktes KJ eHectricaH
14 EC decHaratiKJ Kf
cKJJectiKJ 8
4.4.1 Connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
cKJfKrIity 20
4.4.2 Overvoltage protection and
supply line load . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.4.3 PE conductor connection . . . . . 9
Rittal fan-and-filter unit assembly and operating instructions 3

1 +Ktes KJ dKcuIeJtatiKJ
1 +Ktes KJ dKcuIeJtatiKJ 1.3 Symbols used
E+ These assembly instructions are aimed at
– tradespersons who are familiar with
assembly and installation of the The buHHet pKiJt iJdicates aJ

fan-and-filter unit actiKJ tK be perfKrIed
– trained specialists who are familiar with
operation of the fan-and-filter unit
1.1 Other applicable documents DaJger!

Assembly and operating instructions exist IIIediate daJger tK Hife aJd
as paper documents and/or on CD-ROM HiIb!
for the unit types described here and are
enclosed with the equipment.
We cannot accept any liability for damage
associated with failure to observe these CautiKJ!
instructions. Where applicable, the instruc- PKteJtiaH threat tK the prKduct
tions for any accessories used also apply. aJd its eJvirKJIeJt
1.2 Retention of documents

These instructions and all associated
+KteĮ
documents constitute an integral part of
the product. They must be given to the Useful information and special
plant operator. The operator is responsi- features.
ble for storage of the documents so they
are readily available when needed.
4 Rittal fan-and-filter unit assembly and operating instructions

2 Safety JKtes
2 Safety JKtes 3 Device descriptiKJ
Please observe the following safety notes Depending on the model chosen, your fan- E+
when assembling and operating the unit: and-filter unit may vary in appearance from
– Assembly, installation and servicing may the illustrations contained in these instruc-
only be performed by properly trained tions. However, the functions are identical
specialists in principle.
– Do not obstruct the air inlet and outlet of
the fan-and-filter unit inside and outside
3
the enclosure (see also section 1
“4.2.2 Layout of the components in the
enclosure”, page 7)
– The heat loss of the components 4 2
installed in the enclosure must not
exceed the specific air throughput
of the fan-and-filter unit
– The louvres must always have their 5
opening pointing downwards
– Use only original spare parts and
accessories Fig. 1: Device description
– Do not make any changes to the fan-
(ey
and-filter unit other than those de-
1 Function logo
scribed in these and other applicable
(to release the louvred grille)
instructions
2 Louvred grille
– The fan-and-filter unit must only be
3 Filter box with filter mat
connected to the mains with the system
4 Fan housing
de-energised. Connect the pre-fuse
5 Variable electrical connection
specified on the rating plate
– Changes to the direction of airflow must
3.1 Functional description
only be carried out with the system de-
The fan-and-filter unit in conjunction with
energised
the corresponding outlet filter(s) is used
– Changes to the positioning of the mains
to dissipate heat loss from enclosures,
connection must only be carried out with
ventilate the enclosure and protect
the system de-energised
temperature-sensitive components. This is
– Never insert your fingers into the rotat-
achieved via the direct infeed of ambient
ing fan blade
air, the temperature of which must be less
– Electrical connection and any repairs
than the admissible enclosure interior
may only be carried out by authorised
temperature. The system is fitted into
specialist personnel
prepared cut-outs.
311 *aiJ cKIpKJeJts

The fan-and-filter unit is comprised of
the following four main components: Fan
motor, filter box, louvred grille with function
logo and filter rmedium.

3 Device descriptiKJ
312 CKJtrKH 3.2 Proper use
E+ Rittal fan-and-filter units may be controlled
more efficiently using a thermostat
Rittal fan-and-filter units were developed
and designed in accordance with the state
(Model No. 3110.000), digital temperature of the art and the recognised rules govern-
display (Model No. 3114.200), ing technical safety. Nevertheless, if used
temperature-dependent speed control improperly, they may pose a threat to life
(Model No. 3120.200, 3235.440, 3235.450) and limb or cause damage to property.
and/or hygrostat (Model No. 3118.000). The unit is only intended for ventilating en-
closures and electronic cases. Any other
use is deemed improper. The manufactur-
+KteĮ
er will not be liable for any damages
The control unit 3120.200 can caused as a result of improper use, or for
only be used with single-phase
incorrect assembly, installation and use.
AC units. The control units
All risk is borne solely by the user.
3235.440 and 3235.450 can
Proper usage also includes the observa-
only be used with fan-and-filter
tion of all valid documents and compli-
units with integrated control
ance with the inspection and servicing
interface (EC fan-and-filter units
conditions.
and fan-and-filter units with
EMC shielding from an air
throughput of 180 m3/h. 3.3 Scope of supply
Model No. 3240.500/600, The fan is supplied in a packaging unit
3241.500/600, 3243.500/600, in a fully assembled state and ready to
3244.500/600, 3245.500/600. connect.
Please check the scope of supply for
completeness.
313 Safety equipIeJt
The fan is equipped with thermal winding
Qty DescriptiKJ
protection devices for protection against
excess current and, in some cases, 1 Fan-and-filter unit
against overtemperature. For rotary current 4 – Mounting screws (not for
fans, the winding protection is located in 3237.1xx to 3239.1xx)
the star earthing of the motor.
1 – Assembly, installation and
314 FiHter Iats operating instructions
The fan-and-filter unit/outlet filter is sup- 1 Drilling template, self-adhesive
plied with a standard filter mat already in-
1 Standard or EMC filter mat
stalled. The filter must be checked regular-
ly in accordance with the level of dust Tab. 1: Scope of supply
exposure and replaced as necessary.
In order to increase the protection catego-
ry, and in the case of dust with a grain size
of < 10 µm, we recommend the use of fine
filter mats.
+KteĮ
The air throughput volume will
be reduced.
Special filter mats are required
for EMC fan-and-filter units
(see accessories).

4 AsseIbHy aJd cKJJectiKJ
4 AsseIbHy aJd cKJJectiKJ 422 )ayKut Kf the cKIpKJeJts iJ the
eJcHKsure
Observe the air flows from the internal fans
E+
4.1 Choosing the installation site
of installed electronic components. For in-
When choosing the installation site for the
stallation, it is important to ensure that the
enclosure, please observe the following:
airflows of fans and built-in electronic com-
– The site for the enclosure, and hence ponents do not have a negative influence
the arrangement of the fan-and-filter
on one another (air short-circuit). The corre-
unit, must be carefully selected so as to
sponding minimum distances between the
ensure good ventilation fan and component must be observed in
– The site must be free from excessive dirt order to ensure unhindered air circulation.
and moisture
– Fan-and-filter units must always be in-
4.3 Fitting the fan-and-filter unit or
stalled on vertical panels (door or walls)
outlet filter
– The ambient temperature must be lower
The fan-and-filter unit or outlet filter is
than the permissible enclosure interior
mounted on a vertical panel of the
temperature
enclosure:
– The mains connection data as stated
For this purpose, the appropriate door,
on the rating plate of the unit must be
side or rear panel must be cut out using
guaranteed
the supplied drilling template.
The fan-and-filter unit is generally fitted in
4.2 Assembly instructions
the lower part of the enclosure, and the
421 GeJeraH outlet filter in the upper part.
– Check the packaging carefully for signs
431 CuttiJg Kut the eJcHKsure
of damage. Any packaging damage may
Stick the self-adhesive drilling template
be the cause of a subsequent functional
supplied to the envisaged position on
failure
the door, side or rear panel of the
– The fan-and-filter and outlet filter must
enclosure.
always be mounted on an enclosure in
Lines indicating the dimensions of cut-outs
order to ensure air exchange
and drilling specifications for mounting
and fixing of the fan (only necessary for
+KteĮ sheet metal thickness 2.5 mm and above)
The outlet filter should be at are to be found on the drilling template.
least the same size as the See also fig. 8 and fig. 9 on page 16.
fan-and-filter unit.
– The enclosure must be sealed on all RisG Kf iJFury!

sides (IP 54). If the enclosure has a leak, CarefuHHy deburr aHH cutKuts
unfiltered, contaminated air may enter tK preveJt iJFuries caused by
the enclosure, depending on the direc- sharp edges
tion of airflow of the fan
– If two or more fan-and-filter units are ar- Make the cut-outs including the line
ranged one above the other, a minimum width as per the drilling template.
spacing of 15 mm should be observed Deburr the cut-outs.
(between drilling templates). Only then is it
guaranteed that the louvred grille can be
opened without restriction.

4 AsseIbHy aJd cKJJectiKJ
432 FittiJg the faJaJdfiHter uJit – The protection category can be in-
E+ – The fan may be fitted without tools, by
simply snapping into the preconfigured
creased by means of the following
accessories:
mounting cut-out – IP 55 by using an additional fine filter
– Make sure that the clips have snapped mat or hose-proof hood
into place properly to guarantee secure – IP 56 by using a hose-proof hood
mounting
– From a sheet metal thickness of 2 mm, +KteĮ
the clips should be pressed in
To increase the protection cate-
individually
gory, an additional fine filter
– From a sheet metal thickness of 2.5 mm,
mat or hose-proof hood must
the fan-and-filter unit must be screw- be used in both the fan-and-
fastened in addition
filter unit and the outlet filter.
– To drill the lower holes, it is necessary to
remove the louvred grille as shown in
fig. 2 4.4 Notes on electrical connection
When performing the electrical connection, it
3237.xxx is important to observe all valid national and
3238.xxx regional regulations as well as the provisions
of the responsible power supply company.
Electrical connection must only be carried
out by a qualified electrician who is responsi-
ble for compliance with the existing stand-
ards and regulations.
441 CKJJectiKJ data

3239.xxx – The voltage and frequency of the con-
3240.xxx nection must correspond to the values
3241.xxx
3243.xxx stated on the rating plate
3244.xxx – Electrical connection and any repairs
3245.xxx
may only be carried out by authorised
specialist personnel
Use only original spare parts!
– For 1~ and 24 V (DC) fans, install the
pre-fuse prescribed on the rating plate
(circuit-breaker or slow fuse) to protect
Fig. 2: Release the louvred grille against short-circuiting
– With the rotary current variant, install the
– If transporting, it is necessary that you pre-fuse prescribed on the rating plate or
screw-fasten the fan to prevent it from a circuit-breaker/back-up protection to
falling out of the mounting cut-out. protect against short-circuiting, and set
– The fan-and-filter unit is a rotating com- it to the prescribed rating value
ponent that may transfer vibrations and – The direction of airflow and the direction
oscillations. Appropriate measures to of rotation are each marked on the motor
decouple vibration must be taken in housing with an arrow
advance by the company responsible – If a phase is missing, the fan will not
for the overall plant or system. start. If the rotary field is incorrect, the
fan will run backwards

EHectricaH cKJJectiKJ
442 ,vervKHtage prKtectiKJ aJd suppHy
HiJe HKad
The unit does not have its own overvoltage
CautiKJ!
If JK wire eJd ferruHes are
E+
protection. Measures must be taken by the used the iJsuHatiKJ Kf the
operator at the supply end to ensure effec- iJdividuaH wires should be
tive lightning and overvoltage protection. stripped to a max. of 9 mm
The mains voltage must not exceed a (tK cKIpHy with cHearaJce
tolerance of ±10%. aJd creepage distaJces)
443 PE cKJductKr cKJJectiKJ Re-attach the electrical connection

The PE conductor connection must be cover.
connected to the PE conductor system of
the overall system.
+KteĮ
Fan-and-filter unit 3237.xxx is
5 CarryiJg Kut the eHectricaH connected by way of two sin-
gle wires which are led out of
cKJJectiKJ the unit.
5.1 Connecting the power supply 5.2 Rotating the voltage connection
Complete the electrical connection by If the position of the voltage connection is
following the wiring plans. not ideally accessible, it may be rotated
through 90° and snapped into position.
+KteĮ To this end, press down on the release
button of the bayonet connection at the rear
For technical data, refer to the
rating plate. of the fan. Units 3238.xxx to 3239.xxx are
released by pulling out the clip (see fig. 4)
Remove the red cover from the electrical of the bayonet connection.
connection.
3238.xxx
3239.xxx
Fig. 4: Release the bayonet connection
Units 3240.xxx, 3241.xxx, 3243.xxx to

Fig. 3: Access the electrical connection
3245.xxx are released by pressing the re-
Insert the connection cable with wire end lease button of the bayonet connection
ferrules into the screwless spring termi- (see fig. 5), located on the opposite cor-
nals. Choose an appropriate pre-fuse ner from the connection terminal.
according to the line cross-section
(2 x 0.75 – 2.5 mm² multi-wire,
2 x 1.5 – 2.5 mm² fine-wire soldered).

6 CKIIissiKJiJg
7 IJstaHHiJg aJd chaJgiJg
E+ the fiHter
The fan-and-filter unit and outlet filter are
supplied as standard with a standard filter
mat for the pre-filtering of dry, coarse dust
and lint. In order to increase the protection
category, and in the case of dust with a
grain size of < 10 µm, we recommend the
use of fine filter mats (optionally available).
The filter should be checked at regular in-
tervals in accordance with the level of dust
Fig. 5: Release the bayonet connection exposure (recommended: at the latest af-
ter 2,000 operating hours) and replaced as
5.3 Changing the direction of airflow necessary.
The direction of airflow blows into the enclo-
sure from the outside as standard. Should it +KteĮ
become necessary to change the direction of Use only original Rittal filters
airflow for technical reasons (space, specific which bear the Rittal logo in order
component air routing etc.), this is easily to safeguard the designated pro-
achieved. Simply release the fan housing tection category, air throughout
and rotate it through 180°. To release, please and operating approvals.
follow the same procedure as described un-
der “5.2 Rotating the voltage connection”,
RisG Kf iJFury!
page 9.
,JHy chaJge the fiHter Iat
Please also observe the instructions outlined
whiHe the faJ rKtKr is
under “4.2.1 General”, page 7.
statiKJary
+ever iJsert yKur fiJgers iJtK
the faJ rKtKr
6 CKIIissiKJiJg
The fan-and-filter unit operates automati- To insert or replace the filter, proceed as
cally, in other words, the fan will start up follows (direction of airflow: drawing from
once the power has been switched on. outside and blowing into the enclosure):
Depending on the model, the following First press the catch of the louvred grill
voltage variants are supported: (Rittal logo) up slightly with one finger
– 24 V DC (see fig. 6)
– 115 V, 1~ Once it is released, the louvred grille can
– 230 V, 1~ be dropped open by approx. 70° or 90°
– 400/460 V, 3-phase If necessary, first place the fine filter mat
into the housing
Ensure that the open (roughened) side
faces towards the louvred grille
Then insert the enclosed standard filter
mat
Here again, ensure that the open side
(without Rittal logo) faces towards the
louvred grille (see fig. 7)
Now push the louvred grille back onto
the enclosure until it snaps audibly into
position.

8 IJspectiKJ aJd IaiJteJaJce
The built-in, maintenance-free fan is mount-
ed on a friction bearing (3237.xxx, 3238.xxx
and 3239.xxx) or ball bearing (3240.xxx,
E+
3241.xxx, 3243.xxx to 3245.xxx), and is
protected against humidity and dust, and
equipped with a temperature monitor.
The life expectancy is at least 40,000 operat-
ing hours (L10, 40°C). The fan-and-filter unit
is thus largely maintenance free.
From time to time, the components may
need to be cleaned using a vacuum
cleaner or compressed air if they
become visibly dirty.
Fig. 6: Release the louvred grille Any stubborn, oily stains may be removed
using a non-flammable detergent, such as
degreaser.
Open (roughened) CautiKJ!

side without
Rittal logo
RisG Kf fire!
+ever use fHaIIabHe Hiquids
fKr cHeaJiJg
Sequence of maintenance measures:

– Check the level of dirt.
– Filter soiling?
Replace the filter.
Fig. 7: Installing the standard filter mat – Fan membranes soiled?
Clean.
– Check the noise generation of the fan.
+KteĮ
– Compressed air cleaning
If it becomes necessary to
change the direction of the
airflow (see 5.3 “Changing the
direction of airflow”, page 10),
9 StKrage aJd dispKsaH
the installation is reversed
accordingly. CautiKJ!
RisG Kf daIage!
The faJ uJit Iust JKt be
8 IJspectiKJ aJd stKred at teIperatures abKve
70aC Kr beHKw 30aC
IaiJteJaJce
Disposal can be performed at the Rittal
RisG Kf eHectric shKcG! plant.
The uJit is Hive Please contact us for advice.
Switch Kff the pKwer suppHy
befKre KpeJiJg aJd taGe suit
abHe precautiKJs agaiJst it
beiJg accideJtaHHy switched
bacG KJ

10 TechJicaH specificatiKJs
E+ – Observe the mains connection data – Observe the pre-fuse as per the specifi-
(voltage and frequency) as per the rat- cations on the rating plate
ing plate
UJit *KdeH +K
FaJaJdfiHter uJit
– 3237100 3237110 3237124 3238100 3238110 3238124
RA) 7035
E*C faJaJdfiHter uJit

– 3237600 – – 3238600 – –
RA) 7035
V 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 230, 1~, 115, 1~,
Rated operating voltage 24 (DC) 24 (DC)
Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Rated current max. A 0.065/0.052 0.12/0.1 0.125 0.12/0.11 0.24/0.22 0.24
Power consumption W 11/9 3 19/18 5.5
Pre-fuse T A 2
Dimensions
Width (B1) x height (H1) mm 116.5 x 116.5 148.5 x 148.5
Required mounting cut-
mm 92 x 92 124 x 124
out (B2 x H2)
Depth (T1) mm 16
Max. installation depth
mm 43 58.5
(T2)
Air throughput,
m³/h 20/25 20 55/66 55
unimpeded airflow
Air throughput with outlet 1 x 3237.200: 15/18 1 x 3238.200: 43/50

filter including standard m³/h
filter mat – 2 x 3238.200: 46/56
,utHet fiHter – 3237200 3238200
E*C KutHet fiHter – 3237060 3238060

Diagonal,
Axial, self-starting Axial, Diagonal,
Fan – self-starting shaded
shaded pole motor DC motor DC motor
pole motor
Noise pressure level dB (A) 38/43 38 46/49 46
Operating temperature °C -15...+55
Storage temperature °C -30...+70
IP 54 standard IP 54 standard
Protection category
– IP 55 with hose-proof hood IP 55 with hose-proof hood
(to IEC 60 529)
IP 56 with hose-proof hood IP 56 with hose-proof hood
Tab. 2: Technical specifications Technical modifications reserved.

UJit *KdeH +K
FaJaJdfiHter uJit
–
E+
3239100 3239110 3239124
RA) 7035

– 3239600 – –
RA) 7035
V 230, 1~, 115, 1~,
Rated operating voltage 24 (DC)
Hz 50/60 50/60
Rated current max. A 0.12/0.11 0.24/0.22 0.23
Power consumption W 19/18 5.5
Pre-fuse T A 2
Dimensions
Width (B1) x height (H1) mm 204 x 204
Required mounting
mm 177 x 177
cut-out (B2 x H2)
Depth (T1) mm 24
mm 90
(T2)
Air throughput,
m³/h 105/120 105
unimpeded airflow
1 x 3239.200: 87/100
Air throughput with outlet
filter including standard m³/h 2 x 3239.200: 93/108
filter mat
1 x 3240.200: 98/111
,utHet fiHter – 3239200
E*C KutHet fiHter – 3239060

Diagonal, Diagonal,
Fan –
self-starting shaded pole motor DC motor
Noise pressure level dB (A) 46/49 46
IP 54 standard
Protection category
– IP 55 with additional fine filter mat or hose-proof hood
(to IEC 60 529)
IP 56 with hose-proof hood

UJit *KdeH +K
E+ FaJaJdfiHter uJit
– 3240100 3240110 3240124 3241100 3241110 3241124
RA) 7035

– 3240600 – – 3241600 – –
RA) 7035
V 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 230, 1~, 115, 1~,
Rated operating voltage 24 (DC) 24 (DC)
Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Rated current max. A 0.21/0.19 0.42/0.38 0.43 0.26/0.24 0.52/0.48 0.8
Power consumption W 35/34 10 40/42 40/42 19
Pre-fuse T A 2 4 2 4 2
Dimensions
Width (B1) x
mm 255 x 255
height (H1)
Required mounting
mm 224 x 224
cut-out (B2 x H2)
Depth (T1) mm 25
mm 107
(T2)
Air throughput,
m³/h 180/160 180 230/250 230
unimpeded airflow
1 x 3240.200: 138/121 1 x 3240.200: 183/205
Air throughput with outlet
filter including standard m³/h 2 x 3240.200: 165/140 2 x 3240.200: 203/230
filter mat
1 x 3243.200: 165/140 1 x 3243.200: 203/230

Diagonal, Diagonal,
Diagonal, Diagonal,
Fan – self-starting shaded self-starting shaded
DC motor DC motor
pole motor pole motor
Noise pressure level dB (A) 51/46 51 54/56 54
IP 54 standard
Protection category
– IP 55 with additional fine filter mat or hose-proof hood
(to IEC 60 529)
IP 56 with hose-proof hood

UJit *KdeH +K
FaJaJdfiHter
E+
uJit – 3243.100 3243.110 3244.100 3244.110 3244.140 3245.500 3245.510
RA) 7035
E*C faJaJd
fiHter uJit – 3243.600 – 3244.600 – – 3245.600 –
RA) 7035
230, 115, 230, 115, 400/460, 200…240 100…130
Rated operating V
1~, 1~, 1~, 1~, 3~, 1~, 1~,
voltage Hz
50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Rated current
A 0.37/0.39 0.78/0.8 0.43/0.6 0.9/1.25 0.17/0.21 1.33 2.1
max.
Power
W 70/87 75/90 95/135 100/145 93/140 165 165
consumption
Motor
Pre-fuse T A 4 6 4 6 circuit- 4 6
breaker
Dimensions
Width (B1) x
mm 323 x 323
height (H1)
Required
mounting cut-out mm 292 x 292
(B2 x H2)
Depth (T1) mm 25
Max. installation
mm 118.5 130.5 130.5
depth (T2)
Air throughput,
m³/h 550/600 700/770 900
unimpeded airflow
Air throughput 1 x 3243.200: 1 x 3243.200: 1 x 3243.200:

with outlet filter 465/510 544/587 680
m³/h
including stand- 2 x 3243.200: 2 x 3243.200: 2 x 3243.200:
ard filter mat 508/548 614/662 820

Diagonal,
Diagonal, Diagonal,
Fan – rotary cur-
capacitor motor EC motor
rent motor
Noise pressure
dB (A) 59/61 65/66 67/70 72
level
Operating
°C -30...+55
temperature
Storage
°C -30...+70
temperature
IP 51 standard
Protection IP 54 standard IP 52 with additional
category – IP 55 with additional fine filter mat or hose-proof hood fine filter mat
(to IEC 60 529) IP 56 with hose-proof hood IP 56 with hose-proof
hood

11 CutKutdriHHiJg diIeJsiKJs
11 CutKutdriHHiJg
E+ diIeJsiKJs
+KteĮ
From a certain wall thickness,
a slightly larger cut-out is
required (see the enclosed
drilling template).
B2
T2
*KdeH +K B2 x H2 II T2 II
T1
3237xxx 92 x 92 43
3238xxx 124 x 124 58.5
H2
3239xxx 177 x 177 90
3240xxx 224 x 224 107
H1
3241xxx 224 x 224 107

B1
3243xxx 292 x 292 118.5
3244xxx 292 x 292 130.5
Fig. 8: Cut-out dimensions 3245xxx 292 x 292 130.5

B = Width, T= Depth Tab. 6: Cut-out dimensions
*KdeH +K m II F II
3237xxx 3.5 100.5

3238xxx 3.5 132.5
3239xxx 4.5 185
3240xxx 4.5 234
3241xxx 4.5 234
3243xxx 4.5 302
3244xxx 4.5 302
3245xxx 4.5 302
Tab. 7: Drilling dimensions
Fig. 9: Drilling pattern

12 E*C faJKutHet fiHter
12 E*C faJKutHet fiHter
To achieve EMC protection, the EMC fans E+
and EMC outlet filters should be snapped
into the mounting cut-out and screw-fas-
tened using the screws supplied. Next, the
four contact foils should be stuck on all-
round between the fan-and-filter unit and
the inside of the enclosure as shown in the
following illustration.
Fig. 10: EMC contact foils
+KteĮ
EMC protection can only be
guaranteed when using original
Rittal EMC filter media (Model
Nos. 3237.066, 3238.066,
3239.066, 3240.066, 3243.066).

13 CKJJectiKJ diagraIs
E+
M M M
1~ 1~ 1~
L N PE L N PE L N P
3237.100/.110/.600 3243.100/.110/.600 3245.500/.510/.600

3238.100/.110/.600 3244.100/.110/.600 Details,
3239.100/.110/.600 see page 19
M M M
1~ 3~ 24 V DC
L N PE L1 L2 L3 PE – 24 +
3240.100/.110/.600 3244.140 3237.124
3241.100/.110/.600 3238.124
3239.124
3240.124
3241.124
Fig. 11: Connection diagrams

For SK 3245 only!
E+
1 2
Interface Fan/motor
3 2
L AC 1 P
CON10
N 1.6 AT AC 2 N
1 – 10 V
CON11
2 1
10 V n = max. PE
1V n = min. CON12
PE 1
<1 V n=0
+10 V 1 3
3
3 4 I max. = 1.1 mA 2 4
15 V 10 V/PWM
2
47 k 47 k 1 uF
3
I max. = 10 mA GND
1
2 2
10 K
Speed 3 1
4
12 V
680 R 4 2
1 1
ZMM 47
100 % PWM n = max.
10 % PWM n = min.
<10 % PWM n=0
Fig. 12: Connection diagram 3245
1 Max. speed (as delivered)

2 Adjustable speed
3 Adjustable speed via PWM 1 – 10 kHz
4 Adjustable speed via potentiometer
+K CKJJectiKJ FuJctiKJAssigJIeJt

CON10 L Power supply 200…240 V AC, 50…60 Hz
CON11 N Neutral conductor
CON12 PE PE conductor
1 GND GND connection of the control interface
2 0…10 V/PWM Control input 0…10 V or PWM, galvanically isolated, impedance 100 kΩ
3 +10 V Voltage output 10 V max. 1.1 mA, galvanically isolated, not short circuit-protected
4 Speed Speed output Open Collector, 1 pulse per revolution, galvanically isolated
Tab. 8: Explanations to fig. 12

14 EC decHaratiKJ Kf cKJfKrIity
14 EC decHaratiKJ Kf cKJfKrIity
E+

䡲 Enclosures
䡲 Power Distribution
䡲 Climate Control
䡲 IT Infrastructure
䡲 Software & Services
6th edition 11.2013 / ID no.: 328 628 / Drawing no.: A 4474200SK23
RITTAL GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach 1662 䡠 D-35726 Herborn
Phone +49(0)2772 505-0 䡠 Fax +49(0)2772 505-2319
E-mail: info@rittal.de 䡠 www.rittal.com
Gennemføring for rund- og fladkabel
Multi-Seal FL21
www.powerflex.as Telefon 48 47 66 44
Multi-Seal FL 21
Patenteret flange for indføring af flere kabler – runde såvel som flade – i én og samme flange.
Multi-Seal FL 21 fylder lidt, er hurtig og enkel Sådan monterer du:

at montere og passer til alle kabler indenfor
60 x 120 mm. Multi-Seal erstatter PG-for-
skruninger og er den mest økonomiske og
arbejdsbesparende løsning, når flere kabler
skal føres ind i samme kasse.
Kapslingsgrad modsvarer mindst IP54 ved
normal montage.
•Gør underdelen fast i kassen med de nederste monta-
Montagekittet indeholder: gebolte
1 overdel
•Tilpas gummielementerne i de rette længder på begge
1 underdel
1 pakning (mod kassen) sider af kabelbundtet (brug en skarp kniv)
7 gummielementer •Alle kabler omvikles med fyldbånd og presses på
2 samleskruer M6 x 125 plads sammen med tilskårne gummielementer
2 montagebolte M8 x 70 (øverste)
2 montagebolte M8 x 30 (nederste)
Fyldbånd
•Fyld op med fyldbånd, så en jævn overside opnås

•Læg de sidste gummielementer på plads
Måledata:
•Monter overdelen mod kassen med let tilspændte

M8x70 bolte (aflange huller)
•Spænd overdelen mod gummielementerne med de
gennemgående samleskruer M6x125
•Spænd til sidst overdelen godt fast til kassen (aflange
huller)
•Efter endt samling afskæres evt. overskydende mate-
riale
Udskæringsmål: •Evt. kabelaflastning placeres separat
www.powerflex.as Telefon 48 47 66 44
1(4)
A/S Løgstrup-Steel
Egeskovvej 16-18
CHECK BEFORE COMMISSIONING DK-3490 Kvistgård
Telephone +45 49 12 75 00
Telefax +45 49 12 75 01
Reg.nr. 47.699
AND
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE OF SWITCHBOARDS
The following points must be checked before commissioning:

1. Visual inspection.
2. Cleaning – dust and foreign bodies.
3. Tighten up. All screwed connections (electrical as well as mechanical) must only be
tightened up with a torque wrench (see product catalogue Sec. 04 Page 43 or information
from component supplier).
4. High voltage and megger test (remember to switch off electronic and pilot voltage
circuits and to switch off outgoing circuits).
5. Tighten up the Neutral link.
The following points should be checked at least once a year:

1. Visual inspection.
2. Cleaning, especially insulation parts and ventilation gaps to be cleaned for dust and
moisture.
3. All screwed connections electrical as well as mechanical to be checked. (Use torque

wrench if tightening is necessary.)
4. Fuse switches and circuit breakers to be operated frequently (IEC 158-1).
5. Contacts to be cleaned (do not use a file!)
6. Voltage drop measurements to be taken on contacts of essential apparatus, where

visual inspection is impossible.
7. Worn out parts to be replaced, e.g. based on service periods or number of operations.
8. High voltage and megger test (remember to switch off electronic and pilot voltage
circuits, and to switch off outgoing circuits).
9. Alarm and control voltage circuits to be checked.
10. After heavy short circuits, all the above-mentioned points should be checked and all
damaged parts replaced.
K:\TEKST\TILBUD\Formularer\Torques 051110 1-4.doc

TORQUES Prepared by: ES/amp * Appr. by: KBJ * Date: 1991-01-01 * Rev.: K * Rev.date: 2005-11-10
2(4)
MANUAL
SECTION III, OPERATIONAL LEVEL
Encl. 13
B 09.315
RECOMMENDED TORQUES FOR WIREFASTENING:

DIN 57609 Part 1+2
VDE 06609 Part 1+2
Catalogue No. LR-No. Description Moment Cable Socket ABB connected on busbars
………. 481202-001 Wiedlandkl. 16q 2,4 Nm M5 5 Nm
………. 481202-010 Wiedlandkl. 4q 0,6 Nm M6 9 Nm
………. 481201-006 8JH4112 1.5-16q 2,4 Nm M8 21 Nm
11526 421201-003 8JH4105 16-70q 12,0 Nm M10 42 Nm
M12 70 Nm
M16 170 Nm
Fastening of terminals: Torques between Løgstrup Busbar: Connec- PS Bolt

Weidmüller: ABB (Stroemberg) + Flexibar (see sect. 04 page 43) tion Isolator:
WDU 1,5 to be tightened 0,5 Nm M 6 to be tightened 9,0 Nm M 6 9,4 Nm 11312
WDU 2,5 ” 0,5 Nm M 8 - - 20,0 Nm M 8 20,0 Nm 11301 19,0 Nm
WDU 4 ” 0,6 Nm M 10 - - 40,0 Nm M 10 40,0 Nm 11302
WDU 6 ” 1,2 Nm M 12 - - 75,0 Nm M 12 77,5 Nm 10042
WDU 10 ” 2,0 Nm M 16 170,0 Nm
WDU 16 ” 3,0 Nm Torques for Løgstrup flex – see page 4
WDU 35 ” 4,0 Nm Holec switches: Torques for
WDU 70 ” 10,0 Nm M 5 to be tightened 5,0 Nm ENSTO
WDU 120 ” 15,0 Nm M 6 - - 8,0Nm Single / Double Clamps Top
SAK 95 ” 15,0 Nm M 8 - - 10,0 Nm KE 61- KE 66 10,0 Nm 2.5- 50q M5
SAKG 28 ” 4,5 Nm M 10 - - 32,0 Nm KE 62- KE 67 14,0 Nm 16- 95q M5
SAKG 32 ” 10,0 Nm M 12 - - 56,0 Nm KE 63- KE 68 14,0 Nm 35- 95q M8
SAKG 40 ” 15,0 Nm KE 63- KE 68 24,0 Nm 120-150q M8
SAKG 46 ” 20,0 Nm Siemens fuseholder KE 64- KE 69 12,0 Nm 35- 70q M8
SAKG 54 ” 40,0 Nm M16 65,0 Nm KE 64- KE 69 40,0 Nm 95-240q M8
WFF 35 ” 3,0 Nm
WFF 70 ” 6,0 Nm Merlin Gerin NS switches: ABB
WFF 120 ” 10,0 Nm NS 80 M5 5,0 Nm Single / Double Clamps Top
WFF 185 ” 15,5 Nm NS100 M6 10,0 Nm OZXB1 15,0 Nm 10- 70q M4
WFF 300 ” 30,0 Nm NS160-250 M 8 15,0 Nm OZXB2 30,0 Nm 25-120q M5
NS400-630 M 10 50,0 Nm OZXB3 / 4 22,0 Nm 70-185q M6
Phoenix : OZXB5 / 6 44,0 Nm 120-300q M8
UK 2,5-5 (3mm) ” 1,0 Nm Outlet 1 cable (NS100-250R) OZXB7 35,0 Nm 120-240q M5
UK 10-35 (4mm) ” 2,0 Nm 3p 25259 25 – 50q 20 Nm
UKH 25 (5mm) ” 4,5 Nm 4p 25260 25 – 50q 20 Nm Merlin Gerin for busbar
UKH 50 (6mm) ” 8,0 Nm 3p 25259 70 – 185q 26 Nm Cable Clamp CU/AL Cables Top
UKH 95 (8mm) ” 20,0 Nm 4p 25260 70 – 185q 26 Nm 46961 3p 3# 31,0 Nm 70-185q M8 x)
UKH 150 (10mm) ” 30,0 Nm 46965 4p 3# 31,0 Nm 70-185q M8 x)
UKH 240 (10mm) ” 30,0 Nm 46960 3p 4# 42,0 Nm 95-240q M10 *)
Cable Clamp 1-2 ≠ cables (NS400-630) 46994 4p 4# 42,0 Nm 95-240q M10 *)
Merlin Gerin C60 Torque cable 31,0 Nm Fastening of bolt:
MCB & Fault Current Relay Fastening of cable clamp 37,0 Nm x) 10 mm 40 Nm
≤ 25A 2 Nm *) 10 mm 50 Nm
≥ 35 A 3,5 Nm Tabula-Busbar C225
Merlin Gerin NG 125 M8 to be tightened 10,0 Nm
≤ 63 A 3,5 Nm
≥ 80 A 6,0 Nm
Do not forget to reset torque wrenches after use !

A/S LØGSTRUP-STEEL, Egeskovvej 16-18, DK-3490 Kvistgård
TORQUES Prepared by: ES/amp * Appr. by: KBJ * Date: 1991-01-01 * Rev.: K * Date: 2005-11-10
3(4)
Operation Data
Schwitchboard Identification The schwitchboard is installed and
put into operation by:
Drawing No. ……...: Date……..:
Placing……..……...: Company..:
Description…..…....: -Before commissioning, see page 1
Date: Date: Date: Date: Date:

Logstrup cannot be held responsible for Company (stamp) Company (stamp) Company (stamp) Company (stamp) Company (stamp)
possible damages which could arise in

connection with maintenance. The
schedules are intended as a guide and
must be supplemented as required.
Thermo- -busbars
graphing -wire connections
-components
-
Date: Date: Date: Date: Date:

Logstrup cannot be held responsible for Company (stamp) Company (stamp) Company (stamp) Company (stamp) Company (stamp)
possible damages which could arise in

connection with maintenance. The
schedules are intended as a guide and
must be supplemented as required.
Live -vertical busbars
busbars -horizontal busbars
-fish joints and similar
-creepage distances
-
Wire -protective conductors
connec- -main feeder connections
tions -supp. feeder connections
-incoming conductors
-outgoing conductorst
-internal connections
-
Compo- -protective measures
nents -fuseholder and fuses
-
Enclosure -barriers (coverings)
and -wiring
barriers -
Ratings -rated current
-identification
-
Documen- -
tation -
-
Remarks / Enclosure No, if any
A/S Løgstrup-Steel
Telephone +4549127500
Egeskovvej 16-18
Telefax +4549127501
DK-3490 Kvistgård
4(4)
Busbars Connections
Busbar Type 6x6>18 Holec 12x12>90 12x12>90 12x12>90 12x114>
Busbar Bolt 6MM 8MM 8MM 10MM 12MM 12MM

Torque
On busbars
Connection / wire X X X """"""""" """"""""" X

2.5q > 95q 9.4Nm 10,0Nm 20,0Nm 75,0Nm
Logstrup 98230 Washer for CABLE BOX 6mm 6,5x17,8x1,5
Logstrup 98267 Washer for CABLE BOX 8mm 8,2x19,5x1,8
Logstrup 98268 Washer for CABLE BOX 10mm 11.5x24x2
Logstrup 98269 Washer for CABLE BOX 12mm 13x30x3
Connection / Logstrup X X X X
Flex IBS 25 ( 180A ) 9,4Nm 10,0Nm 30,0Nm 44,0Nm
Flex IBS 50 ( 265A ) 9,4Nm 10,0Nm 30,0Nm 44,0Nm
Logstrup 98230 Washer for FLEX 6mm 6.2x17,8x1.5
Arvid Nilsson 826-08-000 Washer for FLEX 8mm 8,2x24x2,0
Arvid Nilsson 826-10-000 Washer for FLEX 10mm 10.2x30x2,5
Logstrup 98269 Washer for FLEX 12mm 13x30x3
400A > 630A 2x9,4Nm 2x20,0Nm 44,0Nm 75,0Nm 75,0Nm
Arvid Nilsson 826-10-000 Washer for FLEX 10mm 10.2x30x2,5
Connection / Flex """"""""" """"""""" """"""""" """"""""" X X

> 630A 75,0Nm 75,0Nm
FLEX 2004.11.16

18.
MOTOR
19.
CABLE DRUMS/
SLIPRING SYSTEM
20.
UL-LISTED / IEC, Data sheet on cabinets

Panel builder:
A/S LØGSTRUP STEEL
Egeskovvej 16.-18
DK-3490 Kvistgaard
Telephone +45 49 12 75 00
Telefax +45 49 12 75 01
Industrial Control Panel for Industrial Machinery

Standard: EN 60204-1
Short circuit spec. Other spec.
Rated current: 160 A Rated operational voltage, Ue: 3x400 V AC
Settings: 140A
Rated prospective, Icc: 10 kA Rated op. voltage, control circ.: 230V AC/24V DC
Rated insulation voltage, Ui: 500 V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Degree of protection, IP: IP 54
Protection: TN-S
Protection against electr. Chock: DISCONNECT
Special conditions: NONE
Form: 1
Type of electrical connections: FFF
EMC environment : 2
Tag no.: Panel builders project no.: Panel builders drawing no.:
132.ST200 1601457 3-82014
UL 508A supplement spec.

Supply conductor and machine overcurrent protection, provided at main supply terminals
- Type Rating:
- Largest Motor:
- FLS Drawing No.: 80040527
Panel builder:
A/S LØGSTRUP STEEL
Egeskovvej 16.-18
DK-3490 Kvistgaard
Telephone +45 49 12 75 00
Telefax +45 49 12 75 01

Settings: 95A
Frequency: 50 Hz
Protection: TN-S
Form: 1
EMC environment : 2
231.ST200 1601457 3-82015

- Type Rating:
- Largest Motor:
Panel builder:
A/S LØGSTRUP STEEL
Egeskovvej 16.-18
DK-3490 Kvistgaard
Telephone +45 49 12 75 00
Telefax +45 49 12 75 01

Settings: 139A
Frequency: 50 Hz
Protection: TN-S
Form: 1
EMC environment : 2
232.ST200 1601457 3-82016

- Type Rating:
- Largest Motor:
Panel builder:
A/S LØGSTRUP STEEL
Egeskovvej 16.-18
DK-3490 Kvistgaard
Telephone +45 49 12 75 00
Telefax +45 49 12 75 01

Settings: 160A
Frequency: 50 Hz
Protection: TN-S
Form: 1
EMC environment : 2
131.ST200 1601457 3-82164

- Type Rating:
- Largest Motor:
Panel builder:
A/S LØGSTRUP STEEL
Egeskovvej 16.-18
DK-3490 Kvistgaard
Telephone +45 49 12 75 00
Telefax +45 49 12 75 01

Settings: 380A
Frequency: 50 Hz
Protection: TN-S
Form: 1
EMC environment : 2
131.RE300 1601457 3-82165

- Type Rating:
- Largest Motor:
Panel builder:
A/S LØGSTRUP STEEL
Egeskovvej 16.-18
DK-3490 Kvistgaard
Telephone +45 49 12 75 00
Telefax +45 49 12 75 01

Settings: 190A
Frequency: 50 Hz
Protection: TN-S
Form: 1
EMC environment : 2
132.RE300 1601457 3-82176

- Type Rating:
- Largest Motor:
Panel builder:
A/S LØGSTRUP STEEL
Egeskovvej 16.-18
DK-3490 Kvistgaard
Telephone +45 49 12 75 00
Telefax +45 49 12 75 01

Settings: 190A
Frequency: 50 Hz
Protection: TN-S
Form: 1
EMC environment : 2
132.RE350 1601457 3-82177

- Type Rating:
- Largest Motor:
Panel builder:
A/S LØGSTRUP STEEL
Egeskovvej 16.-18
DK-3490 Kvistgaard
Telephone +45 49 12 75 00
Telefax +45 49 12 75 01

Settings: 170A
Frequency: 50 Hz
Protection: TN-S
Form: 1
EMC environment : 2
231.RE300 1601457 3-82178

- Type Rating:
- Largest Motor:
Panel builder:
A/S LØGSTRUP STEEL
Egeskovvej 16.-18
DK-3490 Kvistgaard
Telephone +45 49 12 75 00
Telefax +45 49 12 75 01

Settings: 190A
Frequency: 50 Hz
Protection: TN-S
Form: 1
EMC environment : 2
232.RE300 1601457 3-82179

- Type Rating:
- Largest Motor:

Machine Control System: Sub Supplier Instruction

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Machine Control System: Sub Supplier Instruction

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

.

Machine Control System

Plant Name: XUAN THANH - VIETNAM

Contract Number: 1445344_900

Created by: ASHPI-IN

Doc. No.: 60152277 - 1.0

3. EMERGENCY STOP RELAY

10. CIRCUIT BREAKER AND RELAY

14. TOUCHVEIW SCREEN

16. PARAMETER LIST FOR CONVERTERS

19. CABLE DRUMS / SLIPRING SYSTEM

20. UL-LISTED / IEC, Data sheet on cabinets

May 19, 2016

Jun 23, 2016

(Minor differences between the printed image and the original

Product type description BN 20-10Z

Design of electrical connection Screw connection

Design of control element Normally open contact (NO)

Design of control output Reed contakts

LED switching conditions display

LED switching conditions display (Y/N) No

Explosion protection categories for gases None

Dimensions of the sensor

Actuators must be ordered separately.

Declaration of conformity (de) 188 kB, 10.07.2012

notice - Switch distance (de) 36 kB, 07.08.2009

notice - Switch distance (nl) 39 kB, 07.08.2009

notice - Switch distance (fr) 41 kB, 07.08.2009

notice - Switch distance (pt) 39 kB, 07.08.2009

notice - Switch distance (it) 40 kB, 07.08.2009

notice - Switch distance (es) 38 kB, 07.08.2009

Dimensional drawing (basic component)

• Suitable for mounting on ferrous material with a

leaflet no. Kiepe 358

HEN 001 1 1 91.043 450.001

Spare parts and accessories:

1 Pull rope 4 Turnbuckle 7 Clamp

Subject to change without notice.

40599 Düsseldorf (Germany) · Kiepe-Platz 1

Phone +49 (0) 2 11 74 97-0 · Fax +49 (0) 2 11 74 97-420

May 20, 2016

Connection by Screw Clamp Terminals or Plug-in Connectors or on Connection by Faston Connectors

(1) Diameter on finished panel or support

Panel Cut-outs (Viewed from Installer’s Side)

A: 30 mm min. / 1.18 in. min.

General Tolerances of the Panel and Printed Circuit Board

Mounting of Adapter (Socket) ZBZ 01•

Electrical Composition Corresponding to Code C3

Electrical Composition Corresponding to Code C4

Electrical Composition Corresponding to Code C5

Electrical Composition Corresponding to Code C6

Electrical Composition Corresponding to Code C7

Electrical Composition Corresponding to Codes C9, C11, SF1 and SR1

Electrical Composition Corresponding to Code C15

1 N/O + N/C or 1 N/O + N/O or 1 N/C + N/C

Push Position Top

Location Left Centre Right

Contacts N/O open open open

N/C closed closed closed

Push Position Top

Location Left Centre Right

Contacts N/O closed closed closed

N/C open open open